PDF Toshiba Strata DK 24 56 96 Manual

Strata DK 24-56-96 Manual Strata DK 24-56-96 Manual

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 676

DownloadPDF Toshiba Strata DK 24-56-96 Manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
TOSHIBA

STRATA DK
Strata DK Release 2 & 3
DK24 – DK56 – DK96

Digital Key Telephone Systems

3
.I
I

TOSHIBA

AMERICA

INFORMATION

PUBLICATION

z-.

SYSTEMS,

INFORMATION

INC.
-.

.

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication
Systems Division, reserves
the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason, including, but not
limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of
this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems,
Inc., Telecommunication
Systems Division,
also reserves the right without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or components
as engineering or manufacturing
methods may warrant.

WARRANTY
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., (“TAIS”) warrants that this telephone equipment
(except for fuses, lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAlS
dealer to a retail customer in new condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for
twelve (12) months after delivery. This warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than
normal use and maintenance
conditions, (b) if the equipment is modified or altered, unless the
modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the equipment is subject to abuse,
neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by someone other than
TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment is defaced or missing, or (f) if the equipment
is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which are
not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other
legal obligation with respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized
dealer, with new or refurbished parts (at their option) of such defective or missing parts as are causing
the malfunction. If TAIS or one of its authorized dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail
customer’s sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by TAIS to its dealers for such parts as
are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAlS through one of its authorized dealers within
the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail Customer or any user or dealer or other person be
entitled to any direct, special, indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract,
tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will any such person be entitled to any sum greater than
the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer
machine to the attention of one of TAIS authorized dealers within
no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever
malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS dealer within
customer being not entitled to warranty service.

must bring the malfunction of the
the twelve (12) month period and
first occurs. Failure to bring the
the prescribed time results in the

THEREARENOOTHERWARRANTlESFROMElTHERTOSHlBAAMERlCAINFORMATlON
SYSTEMS, INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS
WARRANTY.ALLOTHERWARRANTlES,EXPRESSORlMPLlED,lNCLUDlNGTHEWARRANTlES
OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE,
ARE EXCLUDED.

warranty.

No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this
No such modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing. ,

GENERAL

STRATA DK
END USER INFORMATION

The STRATA DK Electronic Digital Key telephone systems
are registered in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of
the Federal Communications
Commission’s
Rules and Regulations.

FCC REQUIREMENTS
l

Means of Connection:

The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) has established
rules which permit the
STRATA DK system to be connected directly to the telephone network. Connection
points are provided by the
telephone
company-connections
for this type of customer-provided
equipment
will not be provided on coin
lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.

Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning,

it may
also be disrupting the telephone
network. The system
should be disconnected
until the problem can be determined and repaired.
If this is not done, the telephone
company may temporarily disconnect service. If possible,
they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is not
practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will
be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local
Toshiba telecommunications
distributor.
To obtain the
nearest Toshiba telecommunications
distributor
in your
area, call Toshiba America Information
Systems, Inc.,
Telecommunication
Systems Division in Irvine, CA (714)

583-3700.
Telephone Network Compatibility:

The telephone company
may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations,
and procedures. If such changes affect the compatibility or
use of the STRATA DK system, the telephone company will
notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain
uninterrupted
service.

Notification

of Telephone Company: Before connecting a
STRATA DK system to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request the following:
1) Your telephone

number.

2) FCC registration number:
STRATA DK may be configured
as a Key or Hybrid
telephone system. The appropriate
configuration
for
your system is dependent
upon your operation of the
system.
If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a Key
telephone system.
l

l

going lines, such as dial access, Least Cost Routing,
Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be registered-as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the
above, certain features (TIE Lines, Off-premises
Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid telephone
system registration in some areas.
If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the
appropriate
FCC registration
number, contact your
local Toshiba telecommunications
distributor for assistance.

DKSU Manufactured
in Japan
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
Hybrid system: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
DKSU Manufactured
in USA as of November
Key system: CJ687N-10578-KF-E
Hybrid system: CJ687N-10579-MF-E

1989

3) Ringer equivalence
number: 0.28 (see Table A). The
ringer equivalence
number (REN) is useful to determine
the quantity of devices which you may connect to your
telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when
your number is called. In most areas, but not all, the sum
of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not
exceed five (5.08). To be certain of the number of devices
you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN,
you should contact your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
4) Network connection
information
USOC jack required:
RJ14C, RJ2EX, RJPGX, RJ21X (see Table A). Items 2,3
and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction manual, may
cause interference
to radio communications.
It has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection
against such interference
when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause interference;
in which case, the user, at his
own expense, will be required to take whatever measuresrnay
be required to correct the interference.
This system is listed with Underwriters

Laboratory.

LISTED
l

If your operation

requires

automatic

selection

of out-

0!L

49L7
E89891

IMPORTANT NOTICE - MUSIC-ON-HOLD
In accordance
with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and
Publishers, or other similar organization,
if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through themusic-on:hold
feature of this
telecommunication
system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to
obtain such a license.

StrataExr
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
TABLE OF CONTENTS

b *)

PARAGRAPH
1

2

3

4

SUBJECT
TABLE of CONTENTS ........................................................................................
GENERAL ...........................................................................................................
Summary .........................................................................................................
Technology ......................................................................................................
Maintenance and Programming ......................................................................
PERIPHERAL HARDWARE DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................
Digital Telephones ...........................................................................................
Electronic Telephones .....................................................................................
Toshiba Peripherals .........................................................................................
Customer-supplied Peripherals .......................................................................
SYSTEM HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ..................................................... .........
Key Service Units ............................................................................................
System Operation ............................................................................................
Printed Circuit Boards ......................................................................................
System Capacity and Configuration ................................................................
FEATURES .........................................................................................................
System Features .............................................................................................
Digital and Electronic Telephone Features.. ....................................................
GLOSSARY OF ACRONYMS .............................................................................

i

1
1
1
3
3
3
7
9
13
13
13
15
17
25
27
29
39
48

TABLE LIST
TABLE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P

SUBJECT
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATIONS ..........................................................................
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................
RESERVE POWER TIME ...................................................................................
DATA INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................
STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................
SYSTEM TON ES ................................................................................................
COMMON CONTROL INFORMATION ...............................................................
OPTIONAL INTERFACE PCB OPTIONS ...........................................................
SYSTEM CAPACITIES .......................................................................................
UNIVERSAL SLOT CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................
OPTIONAL SUBASSEMBLIES ...........................................................................
OPTIONAL UNITS ..............................................................................................
SYSTEM FEATURES .........................................................................................
DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE FEATURES.. .................................
STANDARD TELEPHONE FEATURES.. ............................................................

-I-

i

2
4
5
10
12
13
14
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29

-

^__

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLE OF CONTENTS(continued)
*-.

FIGURE NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IO
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18A
188
19
20

FIGURE LIST

-.

SUBJECT
PAGE
...
..............................................................................
STRATA DK PERIPHERALS
III
STRATA DK24, DK56, and DK96 CABINETS ....................................................
1
.......................................................................
20-button DIGITAL TELEPHONE
.......................
20-button LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DIGITAL TELEPHONE..
INTEGRATED
DATA INTERFACE
UNIT (PDIU-DI) ...........................................
DIGITAL DIRECT STATION SELECTION
CONSOLE
.......................................
1 O-button ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
..............................................................
20-button ELECTRONIC
..............................................................
TELEPHONE
20-h&m LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
...............
DIRECT STATION SELECTION
CONSOLE
......................................................
STAND-ALONE
DATA INTERFACE
UNIT (PDIU-DS) .......................................
DOOR PHONE ....................................................................................................
DOOR PHONE/LOCK
CONTROL
UNIT (HDCB) ...............................................

EXTERNAL SPEAKER (HESB) ..........................................................................
DK24 CABINET INTERIOR .................................................................................
DK56 CABINET INTERIOR .................................................................................
DK96 CABINET INTERIOR .................................................................................
DK FUNCTIONAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
................................................................
DK FUNCTIONAL
DIAGRAM
................................................................
BLOCK
DIGITAL TELEPHONE
DIAGRAM ......................................................................
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
DIAGRAM.. ...........................................................

-ii-

5
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
9
11
11
12
15
16
16
18
19
46
47

STRATA
DK
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER
1990
1 GENERAL

DK24 can be configured in possible combinations extending from 32 stations and 8 CO lines
to a square system of 16 X- 16.’ STRATA DK56
can be configured in possible combinations
extending from 56 stations and 4 CO lines to 24
stations and 20 CO li:tes. STRATA DK96 combinations extend from 96 stations and 8 CO lines
to 40 stations and 36 CO lines (see Table A).

Summary
STRATA DK digital key telephone systems are
advanced key/hybrids that are electrically compatible with the public telephone network (loop
start CO lines and E & M TIE lines) and can
function in PBX or Centrex environments.

Toshiba digital telephones are connected to
the system with l-pair cabling. With a 2B+D
ISDN-type digital link, this single pair transmits
and receives simultaneous voice and data along
with control information. Toshiba electronic telephones are connected to the system with 2-pair
cabling, and can access most of the same
advanced features as the digital telephones.
Solid-state digital electronics inside the key service unit translate digital signals from the electronic and digital telephone dialpads into either
DTMF tones or rotary dial signals, depending on
the central office’s requirements (see Peripheral
Hardware Descriptions). Many customer-supplied standard telephones and auto attendant/
voice mail devices are also compatible with the
systems, because the systems provide end-toend DTMF signaling between digital and electronic telephones and devices connected to
standard telephone ports.

NOTE:
Every time “CO line” is mentioned hereafter,
the information also applies to Centrex and
PBX lines.
Each system can be configured as key or
hybrid, with separate Federal Communications
Commission registration numbers for each type.
The appropriate configuration for an individual
system depends on its function.
STRATA DK24, DK56, and DK96 models are
very similar in design. Figure 1 illustrates the
impressive range of basic features and options
available on all three systems; Figure 2 shows
the cabinets and their relative sizes. To accommodate a wide variety of users’ application and
expansion needs, system cabinet configurations
are extremely flexible.

Technology
STRATA DK digital key telephone systems
apply the following technology:
Pulse Code Modulation: The system is completely digital. Therefore, talk paths operate
through digital switching, as opposed to analog crosspoints. Analog-to-digital and digitalto-analog conversion is accomplished by
CODECs on station and CO line PCBs. Pulse
Code Modulation technology allows fully nonblocking intercom and outside line talk paths.

FIGUREL-STRATA DK24,DK56,and
DK96CABINETS

Stored Program Control: The system uses a
16-bit microprocessor to achieve stored program control. System operating software is
stored in read only memory (ROM). The system’s individual configuration and custom pro-

The functional difference between models is
primarily one of capacity (see Table A). STRATA

-l-

I:
1,

j
i

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLE A
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATIONS

1

40
36
32
28
24
AVAILABLE
CO LINES

20
16

8
4
0

8

1624324048566472808896
AVAILABLE

Maximum
DK24 (PCTUS)

STATION PORTS

Configurations

DK24 (PCTU)4

DK56
CO lines

Stations

l-l
20
16
12
8
4

DI 96

24
32
40
48
56

CO lines
36
32
28
24
20
16
12
8

Stations
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96

NOTES:
1. The above station capacities apply to any combination of standard telephones, 6500-series
electronic telephones, and IOOO-series digital telephones. Station capacities using older
Toshiba electronic telephones are given in STRATA DK installation documentation.
2. installing a TIE line (PEMU) PCB or an optional interface (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEW) PCB
reduces available CO lines by four or available ports by eight.
3. The DK24’s 32-station limit is a result of power supply capacity.
I
4. PCTUZ or PCTU3.

-2-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
grarnming is stored in random access memory
(RAM). RAM is protected by a lithium battery,
which has at least a six year life span.

minimal or no system downtime.
A remote administration -and ma’intenance
option can be added to install and maintain customer software, and to test hardware from
remote locations.

Microprocessors: The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at
a clock speed of 8 MHz. It is located on the
system’s control board (PCTU). Local microprocessors are located on all printed circuit
boards. The local microprocessor is an 8-bit
TMP90C840-type that operates at a clock
speed of 10 MHz.

On-site maintenance and programming is
accomplished using:
l
The 20-button LCD digital or electronic
telephone designated for programming
and maintenance, always connected to
station port 05. This telephone may be
used as a normal station when not used
for programming.

Custom Electronic Circuitry: Use of large scale
integration (LSI) technology enables STRATA
DK circuit design to be simple and efficient.
More circuitry fits onto smaller printed circuit
boards (PCBs) and affords a compact system.
Widespread use of CMOS circuits minimize
the system’s power requirements.

-or* An on-site ASCII terminal connected to an
optional maintenance port.
2 PERIPHERAL
HARDWARE DESCRIPTIONS

Power Supply: The system uses a switchingtype power supply to generate *5VDC and
-24VDC. Mechanical circuit breakers on the
front panel, which may be reset if necessary,
protect these DC voltages.(See Table B for
General Requirements).
l
The source of the power used is a standard 117VAC, 15 amp circuit. The power
supply has a built-in battery charger to
maintain customer-supplied
batteries
which can be connected as a backup. This
allows full normal system operation for a
number of hours in the event of a primary
power failure. (For more detail, see Table
Q

A wide variety of peripheral equipment is compatible with all three systems (see Figure 1).
Peripherals fall under four different categories:
digital telephones, electronic telephones,
Toshiba-supplied peripherals, or customer-supplied peripherals. This section describes the
Toshiba-supplied equipment. When applicable,
system interface information is included.
Digital Telephonest
There are two digital telephone models available. The phones are enclosed in a stylish,
impact-resistant case with a charcoal gray matte
finish, and blend easily into any progressive
office environment.

Maiqtenance and Programming
As a result of large scale integrated circuitry,
STRATA DK telephone systems have a minimal
number of printed circuit board types. Less time
is spent isolating board failures. This directly
translates to saving time and money.

Both digital telephone models and the digital
DSS console (see Digital Direct Station Selection
Console) have the same dimensions:
Height: 3.6 in. (92 mm)
Width: 7.3 in. (184 mm)
Length: 9.0 in. (229 mm)

Hardware maintenance and repair procedures
describe how to quickly and easily locate,
remove, and replace defective modules, with

In standard form, all digital telephones may be
wall mounted without additional equipment and
are hearing aid compatible.
t Requires

Release 3 software.

-3i

STRATA
DK
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER
1990
TABLEB
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Primary power
Input AC
AC frequency
DK24 power supply
DK56 power supply
DK96 power supply
Environmental
specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature

a5 w 135VAC
50/60 Hz
65 watts
140 watts
230 watts
32 ..a104°F (0 - 40°C)
20 - 60% relative humidity without condensation
- 4 M 158°F (-20 M 70°C)

Power supply
DC voltage output
specification
Battery charger

-24VDC: (-26.3 w -27.8VDC)
+5VDC: (+4.5 w +5.5VDC)
- 5VDC: (- 4.5 m - 5.5VDC)
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 +_0.5VDC

characteristics

PSTU or PESU (circuits

-.

1 & 2)

Square wave output with high/low option jumper:

Ring voltage

Low position, 130 + 20VDC peak-to-peak
High position, 190 + 25VDC peak-to-peak

Ringing capability

Two ringers maximum per circuit, high or low
position

PEW or PSTU modem
BTU rating
DK24

DK56

DK96

interface

data rate

(no-load)
(no-load)

9600 bps maximum
PART
PEKU
PCOU
PCTUS
PIOUS
EKTs
PEKU
PCOU
PCTU
EKTs
PEKU
PCOU
PCTU
EKTs

-4-

QTY
3
2
1
1
24
5
3
1
40
9
5
1
72

103 BTUs (30 watt hours)

205 BTUs (60 watt hours)

346 BTUs (102 watt hours)

STRATA
DK
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER
1990
TABLEC
RESERVE
POWERTIME
*

TYPICAL RESERVE POWER DURATION ESTIMATES

Time is estimated with the following considerations:
1. Batteries have full charge at start of operation.
2. Batteries (2) are connected in series.
8. Batteries are 12VDC, rated at 80 amp/hours each.
4. System is operating at full load traffic with LCD phones.
5. Batteries used for this test are gel-Cell
and maintenance-free.
Reserve duration will vary &pending
upon battery type, age, and manufacturer. These figures should only be used as an estimate.
Each digital
telephone
also features
a
standard modular handset cord and is connected
to the system with a single-pair modular line cord
which can transmit
and receive simultaneous
voice and data.

l

l
l
l

20-button

Digital Telephone

1020H provides
bilitv on intercom

handsfree
lines.

(Figure 3): The
answerback

Calling Station Messaging
Busy Station Messagingt
l Group/Remote
Station Messaging?
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Indication
CO line Identification
Speed Dial Memo
Timed Reminders with Messaging
Intercom User Name/Number
Display
Call Duration Display
DateiTime of Day
Call Progress Information
l

l

capa-

l
l
l
l

FIGURE3-20-button DIGITALTELEPHONE
20-button Liquid Crystal Display
Telephone (Figure 4): The 1020SD

Digital

FIGURE4-20-button LIQUIDCRYSTALDISPLAY
DIGITALTELEPHONE

is available as a full speakerphone
with a 32-character, alphanumeric
liquid crystal display (LCD)
field. The numerous LCD features include:
l
Alphanumeric
Messaging
l Called
Station Messaging

Digital Telephone

Upgrade Options:

Telephones
can be upgraded
receive simultaneous
voice

Digital
to transmit and
and data. They

t Requires Release 3 software.

-5-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
can also be upgraded with off-hook call
anounce, loud ringing bell, and headset interface capability.
l
Simultaneous
Voice and Data: Digital
telephones may be upgraded with an integrated data interface unit (PDIU-DI) to
receive and transmit simultaneous voice
and data; data and voice calls can be
made independently of each other. The
PDIU-DI (Figure 5) is easily installed,
replacing the usual digital telephone base.
Asynchronous data devices, such as personal computers and terminals, can be
connected to the standard RS-232 connector of the PDIU-DI. Station users are able
to transmit and receive RS-232 data over
the PDIU-DI-equipped digital telephone’s
single twisted wire pair. 2B+D technology
enables the digital telephone and the
PDIU-DI to share the same wire pair and
station port (see Table D).

l

l

l

Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade:
Each digital telephone may also be
upgraded to provide a loud ringing bell
interface and a modular headset interface.
To accomplish this, an upgrade assembly
consisting of a small PCB (HHEU) installs
inside the phone with a plug-in connector.
The loud ringing bell and headset options
are available simultaneously on a digital
telephone.
l
Loud Ringing Bell: An external speaker (HESB) can be directly connected to
the upgraded phone. When the phone
rings, the HESB produces a loud tone
that mimics the phone’s ring. On voice
first intercom calls, the HESB amplifies
the caller’s voice announcement. See
the External Speaker option.
l
Headset: Most standard headsets plug
into the HHEU jack and are compatible
with the digital telephone.

e

Option Combinations: A digital telephone may
use most of the .available upgrade options
simultaneously. For example, the same station
may be upgraded with a digital DSS console,
OCA, loud ringing bell, and headset. Digital
telephones upgraded with the PDIU-DI cannot
be wall mounted or upgraded with the loud
ringing bell, headset, or OCA interface, but
can be connected with digital DSS consoles.

FIGURE 54NTEGRATED DATA INTERFACE UNIT
(PDIU-DI)
NOTE:
The PDIU-DI will function with all slots,
except slots 11 w 14 in DK96.
l

telephones is a small printed circuit
board, DVSU, which installs inside the
telephone base-with plug-in cormectors.
Only those telephones programmed to
receive OCA announcements require a
DVSU.
An extra wire pair is not required for
digital telephones to receive or originate
OCA, and no other subassemblies are
required for the Digital Telephone
Interface PCB (PDKU).

Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade: If
equipped with an off-hook call announce
(OCA) upgrade assembly, each digital telephone may receive intercom calls when
the handset is off-hook.
l
The OCA upgrade assembly for digital

Digital Direct Station Selection Consolet: The
Digital Direct Station Selection (DDSS) console is an optional, dedicated answering station incorporating a’busy lainp field (Figure 6),
and can only be used with a digital telephone.

t Requires Release 3 software

-6-

(

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
Electronic Telephones

It is normally used on systems with a heavy
volume of incoming calls. A DDSS console
may be used with any digital station connected
to the first circuit on the digital telephone interface PCB (PDKU). Up to four DDSS consoles
can be supported with a PCTU3 PCB.
0
DDSS consoles are equipped with automatic line hold, and voice or tone signaling
capability. The consoles have 60 flexible
buttons, each with an associated LED (the
DDSS button LEDs will light red or green
depending on the button function). Each
flexible button can be assigned one of the
following functions:
All call page (pre-assigned)
CO line appearance
Direct station selection with busy LED
Night transfer (pre-assigned tenant 1 or
tenant 2, if necessary)
Speed dial
0
Each DDSS console requires one station
port on a PDKU, always the eighth circuit.
0
A DDSS console must be assigned to a
particular station when the system configuration is defined in programming. All four
DDSS consoles can be assigned to one
station, or four different DDSS consoles
may be assigned to four different stations
(or any intermediate combination). The
same DDSS console may not be assigned
to more than one station.

- Four different models of 6500-series electronic
telephones are available. The phones are enclosed in a stylish, impact-resistant case (either
ash white or charcoal gray) with a matte finish,
and blend easily into any progressive office environment. Toshiba electronic telephones that are
compatible with the analog STRATA/STRATA,
key telephone systems are also compatible with
the STRATA DK systems. However, some features may vary (e.g. LCD and busy lamp field
telephones).
All 6500-series electronic telephones and DSS
consoles have the same dimensions:
Height: 3.6 in (92 mm)
Width: 7.0 in (178 mm)
Length: 9.0 in (229 mm)
In standard form all electronic telephones may
be wall mounted without additional equipment,
and they are also hearing aid compatible.
Each electronic telephone also features a
standard modular handset cord, and is connected to the system with a 2-pair modular line cord.
Various upgrade options, such as the off-hook
call announce and loud ringing bell upgrade
assemblies, require special wiring. A 3-pair modular line cord is required for off-hook call
announce, and a custom external speaker cable
is required for the loud ringing bell.
lo-button Electronic Telephone (Figure 7):
The 6510 model is available in two variations;
as a speakerphone or with handsfree answerback capability on intercom lines.
20-button Electronic Telephone (Figure 8):
The 6520 model is available with handsfree
answerback capability on intercom lines.
20-button Liquid Crystal Display Electronic
Telephone (Figure 9): The 6520SD is available only as a speakerphone with a 32-character, alphanumeric liquid crystal display
(LCD) field. The numerous LCD features
include:
l
Alphanumeric Messaging

FIGURE 6- DIGITAL DIRECT STATION
SELECTIONCONSOLE
-7-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990

”

FIGURE 7-IO-button

FIGURE 8-20-button

ELECTRONICTELEPHONE

FIGURE 9-20-button LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
ELECTRONICTELEPHONE

ELECTRONICTELEPHONE

Electronic Telephone Upgrade Options: All
electronic telephones may be upgraded with
off-hook call announce, loud ringing bell, and
headset capability.
l
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade: Each
electronic telephone may be upgraded to
receive intercom calls when the handset is
off-hook by installing an off-hook call
announce upgrade assembly.
l
The assembly consists of two PCBs,
HVSU and HVSI, which install inside the
telephone base with plug-in connectors.
l
Only those telephones programmed to
receive OCA announcements require
the OCA upgrade.
l
Each station PCB (PEKU or PESU) that
supports electronic telephones with
OCA capability must be equipped with
an EOCU subassembly.
l
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade:
Each electronic telephone may also be
upgraded to provide a loud ringing bell
interface and a modular headset interface.
To accomplish this, an upgrade assembly
consisting of a small PCB (HHEU) installs
inside the phone with a plug-in connector.
l
An external speaker (HESB) can be
directly connected to the upgraded
phone. When-the phone rings, the
HESB produces a loud tone that mimics

Called Station Messaging
Calling Station Messaging
l
Busy Station Messagingt
l
Group/Remote Station Messaging-t
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Indication
CO Line Identification
Speed Dial Memo
Timed Reminders with Messages
Intercom User Name/Number Display
Call Duration Display
l

l

l
l
l
l
l
l

System software allows the customer to
assign feature buttons on all electronic telephones in a completely flexible manner.
j-Requires

Release 3 software

-8-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990

l

the phone’s ring. On voice first intercom
calls, the HESB amplifies the caller’s
voice announcement. See the External
Speaker option.
l
Most standard headsets plug into the
HHEU jack and are compatible with the
electronic telephone.
An electronic telephone may use all available upgrade options simultaneously. For
example, the same station may be upgraded with a DSS console, OCA, a loud ringing bell, and a headset.

Direct Station Selection Console: The Direct
Station Selection (DSS) console is an optional,
dedicated answering station incorporating a
busy lamp field (Figure 10). It is normally used
on systems with a heavy volume of incoming
calls. A DSS console may be used with any
station connected to the first circuit on a PEKU
PCB. Up to four DSS consoles can be supported with a PCTU PCB, and up to three with
a PCTUS PCB.
DSS consoles are equipped with automatic
line hold, and voice or tone signaling capability. The consoles have 60 flexible buttons, each with an associated LED. Each
flexible button can be assigned one of the
following functions:
l All call page (pre-assigned)
0 CO line appearance
l
Direct station selection with busy LED
l
Night transfer (pre-assigned tenant 1 or
tenant 2, if necessary)
l Speed dial
Each DSS console requires two station
ports (circuits 7 and 8) on an electronic
telephone interface PCB (PEKU). Only one
DSS console may be installed on a particular PEKU.
A D$S console must be assigned to a particular station when the system configuration is defined in programming. All four
DSS consoles can be assigned to one station, or four different DSS consoles may be
assigned to four different stations (or any
intermediate combination). The same DSS
console may not be assigned to more than
one station.

FIGURE10
DIRECTSTATIONSELECTIONCONSOLE
Toshiba Peripherals
This section describes each peripheral item
that is available from Toshiba. Configuration and
connection considerations are noted when applicable. For more detail regarding PCB interfaces,
see Printed Circuit Boards.
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS)t:
The PDIU-DS (Figure 11) is used for making
switched data connections for modem pooling,
printer sharing, and host/mainframe computer
accessing. LEDs on the front panel indicate
transmission status. Each PDIU-DS requires

FlGUREll-STAND-ALONEOATAINTERFACE
UNlT(PDIU-OS)
t Requires Release 3 software

-9-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLED
DATA INTERFACESPECIFICATIONS

=

SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM

Terminal Interface Specification

RS-232C (EIA)
V.24/V.28 (CCITT)

Data Transmission

Up to 19.2kbps, asynchronous

Speed

Half and full duplex, utilizing RTS/CTS/CD

Flow Control

control leads

Based on AT commands:
Data speed of AT command is 300,600,
1200,2400,4800,
or 9600
Data bit: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits
. Parity bit: even, odd, or no parity

l

Automatic Dialing

l
l

Maximum Distance: KSU to DKTAMJ
or DIU stand-alone

With local power; 1000 feet with 1 -pair (24 AWG)
With battery back-up: 330 feet with 1-pair or 1000 feet
with 2-pair (24 AWG)

l
l

Number of Wire Pairs

1-pair or 2-pair (24 AWG)

LED Indicators (stand-alone

POWER: Lights when power is on
READY: Lights when DTE and DIU are ready
CONNECT: Lights when DIU is in transmission

DIU only)

Automatic Disconnect Timeout

Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space
signal on SD or RD within nine minutes
One-chip
Memory:
Ping-pong
512kbps,

l
l

LSI Technology

STRATA DK
Option Compatibility

or ringing mode

l

CPU with a clock frequency of 12.288MHz
ROM, 16KB; RAM, 512kb
transmission: LSI with bearer transmission
2B+D-type link

rate of

Digital telephones with integrated DIU:
No HHEU (headset/loud ringing bell)
No wall mount
No DVSU (off-hook call announce)
Compatible with associated digital DSS console
l
l
l
l

l

Cabling/Connectors
l
l
l

DIU to DTE/DCE device: 8-wires,
50 feet maximum, 24 AWG: compatible with RJ-45, 8-wire
modular cable and RJ-45 to DB25 RS-232 modular adaptors
Stand-alone DIU: RJll modular connector
Integrated DIU: connected inside digital telephone
Stand-alone DIU jumper plugs enable straight wire connection
to a DTE or DCE device without null-modem cables or adapton

-lO-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
one 2B+D station port on a PDKU (see Printed
Circuit Boards) and will function on one wire

ed with a PCTU, up to nine with a PCTUS.
A door
phone/lock
control
unit
(HDCB-Figure
13) must be installed to
support up to three door phones (or two
door phones and one door lock control).
Each HDCB requires one station port on
an electronic telephone interface PCB
(PEKU or PESU). Only one HDCB can be
installed on a particular PEKU or PESU.

NOTES:
1. The PDIU-DS will function with all slots,
except slots 11 u 14 in DK96.
2. Modems, printers, and mainframes are
connected to the standard RS-232
DB25 connector on the PDIU-DS (see
Table 0).
Door Phone: In one of its most popular applications, the door phone (Figure 12) mounts outside a building, next to a locked door whose
entry requires screening. An individual located
outside the building who wants to speak with
someone inside simply presses the button on
the door phone. A distinctive tone will then
sound over the speakers of the digital and/or
electronic telephones defined to do so through
system programming. Any digital or electronic
telephone user can answer and converse with
the individual at the door phone. If the system
is properly configured, the user can allow entry
using a door lock button on the digital or electronic telephone.
l
A door phone also functions as a sound
monitor. Any telephone can call the door
phone and listen to sounds within its
immediate area.
l
Up to twelve door phones can be support-

FlGURE13-DOORPHONE/LOCK
CONTROLUNlT(HDCB)
NOTE:
The PDKU cannot support an HDCB.
l

Door lock control requires an optional
interface PCB (PIOU, PEPU, or PIOUS)
and/or an HDCB. Up to five door lock controls can be installed, but each door lock
controlled by an HDCB reduces the door
phone capacity on that HDCB from three
to two.

External Speaker: The HESB external speaker
unit is a 6-inch, 3-watt speaker with a built-in
amplifier (Figure 14). A +12 VDC power supply
(HACU-120) is included with each external
speaker. It connects to the back panel with an
8-foot cord and plugs into a 117VAC, 60 Hz
outlet. The HESB has three applications:
l
Amplified Paging Speaker: Allows the
HESB to be used as a paging speaker,
reducing the need for other manufacturers’
paging equipment.

FlGURE12-DOORPHONE

-lli

STRATADK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990

l

FlGURE14-EXTERNALSPEAKER(HESB)
l

Amplified

Talkback

Speaker:

When

used

in conjunction
with external
page,
an
HESB can be installed
as a talkback
device.
The HESB is connected
to the
door phone,
which is used as a microphone to provide talkback capability.
Loud Ringing
Bell: Allows the voice/tone
of a paging/ringing
call to any digital telephone
or 6500-series
electronic
telephone to be amplified.
When an HESB is
connected
as a loud ringing
bell, an
HHEU
upgrade
assembly
must
be
installed
in the digital or electronic
telephone’s
base.
See the loud ringing
bell/headset
telephone
upgrade in the last
section.
An external
speaker
cable
(HESC-65
for electronic
telephones;
HESC-65A
for digital telephones)
connects the station to the speaker.

TABLEE
STATION LOOPREQUIREMENTS
Device Description
PEKU
(ckts 1 - 8)

PLJ’
(ckts 5 w 8)
PEKU
(ckts 7 & 8)
PSTU
(ckts 1 m 8)

Max Loop Resistance
(Including Device)

Max Distance from
KSU to Device

Electronic
telephone,
door phone/
control boxes

400hms

iOOOft.(303m)

DSS consoles

200hms

500ft.(152

3000hms

Approx. 3000
with 150 ohm
manufacturer’s
specifications
resistance of

m)

ft. (909 m)
device. See
product
for exact
device.

Number of
Wire Pairs’
All need 2-pair.

EKTs which
receive OCA
calls need
3-pair!

P&J 2
(ckts 1 & 2)

Standard
telephones,
voice mail,
auto attendant,
etc.

PDKU
(ckts 1 w 8)

Digital
telephones

400hms

lOOOfL(303m)

1 -pair

DDSS consoles

200hms

lOOOfL(303m)

1 -pair

PDKU
(ckts 1 m 8)

PDIU-DI

400hms

lOOOfL(303m)

PDKU
(ckts 1 * 8)

PDIU-DS

400hms

lOOOfL(303m)

PDKU
(ckt 8)

NOTES:
1. Use 24 A WG twisted pairs.
2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used.
3. Two-pair or larger wire is required to achieve maximum range.
-12-

I

1 -pair

Shares digital
telephone
wire-pair?
1 -pair3

STRATA
DK
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER
1990
TABLEF
NETWORK
REQUIREMENTS
Facility
Interface Code

PCB

PCOU
(Loopstart line)
PEMU
(Type I, TIE line)
2-wire
4-wire
PESU/PSTU
(Off-premisesstation)
(see note)
NOTE:
On PEW,

circuits

Jack

Ringer
Equivalence

02LS2

RJ14C

0.2B

TLllM
TL31M

RJ2EX
RJ2GX

N/A
N/A

OL13A

RJ21X

N/A

I and 2 only provide

Power Failure Transfer Unit: An optional external power failure transfer unit (DPFT) may be
connected to the system with a PSTU PCB to
provide emergency service in the event of a
power failure. Up to eight CO lines are
switched directly to dedicated conventional
telephones (customer-provided 2500- or 500type) for incoming and outgoing calls. When
power is restored, stations/CO lines reserved
for power failure transfer will automatically
return to normal service. Standard telephones
that are connected to the PESU PCB can also
be connected to the DPFT to provide emergency service.
Customer-supplied

Network

off-premises

l
l
l

l
l

l

l
l
l

capability.

Paging system (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU)
Radio paging equipment (PSTU or PESU)
Remote maintenance terminal (PIOU or
PIOUS with IMDU)
Standard telephones (PSTU or PESU)
SMDR printer/call accounting device (PIOU
or PIOUS)
Voice mail messaging system (PSTU or
PESU)
Printers (PDIU-DS)t
Personal Computers (PDIU-Dl)t
Mainframe Computer Access (PDIU-DS)t
3 SYSTEM HARDWARE

Peripherals

DESCRIPTION

Key Service Units

All three STRATA DK digital key systems support many other commonly used peripheral
devices which can be supplied by the customer.
Several of these devices are listed below (with
the supporting PCB or data interface unit noted):
l
Auto attendant device (PSTU or PESU)
l
Dictation equipment (PSTU or PESU)
l
External maintenance modem (PIOU or
PIOUS)
l
Facsimile (PSTU or PESU)
0 Local maintenance terminal (PIOU or PIOUS)
l
Modem (PSTU, PESU, or PDIU-DS)t

Key Service Unit Exterior: All three systems
can be mounted on a wall or table top. The
basic key service unit consists of a single
metal cabinet (Figure 2) with the following
dimensions. Weight measurements approximate fully loaded systems.
STRATA DK24
Height: 10.6 in (269 mm)
Width: 16.0 in (406 mm)
Depth: 9.1 in (230 mm)
Weight: 194 Ibs (9 kg)

t Requires Release 3 software

-13-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
TABLE G
SYSTEM TONES
Idle
electronic
telephones
co
Line

Ring tone 1

5001640 Hz, modulated by 16 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

sec. OFF

Ring tone 2

600/800 Hz, modulated by 16 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

sec. OFF

Ring transfer

540/760 Hz, modulated by 16 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

sec. OFF

Busy station (camp-on)
Standard telephone
Normal ring option:

or

2400 Hz, modulated
VOiCf?

mail

port:

Distinctive ring option
(standard telephone):
TIE line
or DISA
line calls

sec. OFF-O.4

sec. ON-3

sec. OFF

To busy station

sec. OFF

Tone first (EKT ring signal)

500 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

B
override

sec. OFF

sec. OFF

870 Hz, 1 sec.1710 HZ, 2-0.5 sec. (5 rings)
870 Hz, 0.5 sec./71 0 HZ, 2-0.5 sec. (5 rings)
2400 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

Dial (intercom)

400 Hz, continuous

Ringback

400 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

sec. OFF

Busy

sec. OFF
400 Hz, 0.25 sec. ON-O.25 sec. OFF

Do not disturb

400 Hz, 0.125 sec. ON-O.125

Voice page warning

500 Hz, 1 sec. ON (via electronic telephone

OCA warning

500 Hz, 1 sec. ON only (via electronic telephone

Executive/privacy

override warning

Hold recall
Standard telephone

Special
Zonfirma[ion
rones

sec. OFF

0.4 sec. ON-O.2

A&C

sec. OFF

20

or
400 Hz, 0.25 sec. ON-O.25
(programmable option’)

Busy override/DND

Voice
Mail
Special
Tones

Hz,
1 sec. ON-3

by IO Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

400 Hz, 0.25 sec. ON-O.25

Door
phone

Intercom
Line
Calls

-.

Answer:
Disconnect:
Recall:

ringing

DTMF “A”
DTMF “D”
DTMF “B”

Verified account code
confirmation tones2

sec. OFF
speaker)
speaker)

500 Hz, 1 sec. ON only (via handset or speaker)
2400 Hz, modulated

by 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON-l

20 Hz, 1 sec. ON-3

sec. OFF

sec. OFF

80/l 60 msec., dual-tone

‘Ode valid
Code not valid

Station option programming
confirmation tones (call forward,
timed reminders, etc.)

400 Hz, 0.5 sec. ON

400 Hz, 0.125 sec. ON-O.1 25 sec. OFF-O.125
400 Hz, 1 sec. ON

NOTES:
1. Requires Release 3 software.
2. Tones are sent only to the station that enters the

-14-

not to the outside party.

sec. ON

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990.
STRATA DK56
Height: 15.0 in (380 mm)
Width: 16.1 in (410 mm)
Depth: 9.1 in (230 mm)
Weight: 37.5 Ibs (17 kg)

two shelves. The top shelf has eight PCB
slots, labeled SO1 N S08; the bottom has
seven PCB slots, labeled PCTU, SO9 N
S14. The power supply is positioned vertically to the right of the shelves, and is
installed at the factory.

STRATA DK96
Height: 18.7 in (475 mm)
Width: 19.7 in (500 mm)
Depth: 9.1 in (230 mm)
Weight: 55.1 Ibs (25 kg)

System Printed Circuit Board Slots: Each
system is equipped with universal PCB slots
that are extremely flexible and can be configured to suit individual customer needs. All
station, CO line and optional PCBs are the
same size, and use the same connector type
to mount into the cabinet’s backplane.
Therefore, any PCB can be installed in any
universal slot, with the exception of the PCTU
or PCTUS, which must be installed in the slot
labeled PCTU.

Key Service Unit Interiors:
l
The DK24 cabinet interior (Figure 15) has
one shelf with seven PCB slots, labeled
PCTU, SO1 w S06. The power supply is
positioned vertically on the right side of the
shelf, and is installed at the factory.
l
The DK56 cabinet interior (Figure 16) has
one shelf with nine PCB slots, labeled
PCTU, SO1 w S08. The power supply is
positioned horizontally above the shelf,
and is installed at the factory.
l
The DK96 cabinet interior (Figure 17) has

b

FIGURE 15-DK24

System Operation
A system consists of a key service unit and
up to either 32 stations in DK24, 56 stations in
DK56, and 96 stations in DK96 (station loop

CABINET INTERIOR
-15i

STRATADK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990

Pl

FlGURE16-DK56

CABINET INTERIOR

FlGURE17-DK96

CABINETINTERIOR

-16-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
lengths, network requirements, and system tone
patterns are summarized in Tables E, F, and G,
respectively).

f

The system can have several options configured, as illustrated in the functional block diagram (Figures 18A and 18B).
As represented in the functional block diagram, the system’s cabinet contains a power
supply and printed circuit boards appropriate to
the user’s configuration. PCBs include the common control unit (PCTU2, PCTU3, or PCTUS),
DTMF receiver subassembly (CRCU-4 or CRCU8), option interface unit (PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU), remote maintenance modem subassembly (IMDU), CO line unit (PCOU), E & M TIE line
unit (PEMU), digital telephone interface unit
(PDKU)t, electronic telephone interface unit
(PEKU), off-hook call announce subassembly
(EOCU), standard telephone interface unit
(PSTU), and a combination electronic/standard
telephone interface unit (PESU).
!iD

Printed Circuit Boards
Most STRATA DK system hardware options
are integrated within the system cabinet. Each
major PCB measures 7.5 x 5.5 inches (190 x 140
mm) and mounts in a PCB slot in the shelf with a
44-pin backplane connector.

installed for the system to operate. It contains
the system’s main 16-bit, 68000-type micro-processor and microprocessor bus, batteryprotected memory circuits, time switch logic,
conference logic, and system tones. The
PCTU also has a music-on-hold/background
music source interface, and connectors to
mount an optional DTMF receiver PCB
(CRCU) for DISA, TIE lines, standard telephones and peripherals. There are three versions of PCTU PCBs available: PCTUS,
PCTU2, and PCTU3. PCTUS and PCTU2 provide Release 2 features; PCTU3 provides
Releases 2 and 3 features. See Table H for
PCTU comparison and compatibility.
DTMF Receiver Subassembly
(CRCU): An
optional DTMF receiver PCB mounts onto the
PCTU piggy-back style. It translates DTMF
signals from direct inward system access
(DISA) CO lines, TIE lines, standard telephones or peripheral devices to data signals
for the system.
l
One CRCU option must be installed for the
system to receive DTMF dialing. Both 4and 8-circuit CRCUs are available (CRCU4 and CRCU-8).
l
CRCU DTMF receiver circuits are shared
by users, i.e. a receiver is seized for dialing and then released for the next call.
Option Interface Unit (PIOU): The PIOU provides a circuit interface with the peripheral
options, including external paging functions,
alarm interface, SMDR, and remote maintenance. Table I shows details of each feature.

PCB external connections are made to the
Main Distribution Frame (MDF) using the following industry-standard connectors:
l
25pair Amphenol Female: Connects digital
telephones, electronic telephones, standard
telephones, and most peripherals.
l
Modular: Connects CO lines, E & M TIE
lines, station message detail recording port
(W-232), and maintenance port (RS-232).
l
Terminals: MOH and some peripherals.

Simplified Option Interface Unit (PIOUS): A
reduced model of the PIOU, the PIOUS provides an interface with the peripheral options
shown in Table I.
External Page Interface Unit (PEPU): Also a
reduced model of the PIOU, the PEPU provides a circuit interface with the peripheral
options shown in Table I.

The following list includes every PCB that can
be installed in the key service unit. Each PCB’s
function is described, along with applicable configuration and connection details.

Remote Maintenance fvlodem’ Subassembly
(IMDU): An optional built-in modem provides
the system with a link to off-site programming

Common Control Unit (PCTU): The PCTU is
the system’s controller PCB, and must be
-17-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
DKSU 24/56/96

z4.

-

PCOU
LINE
LOOP START LINES
~

* FIC: 02LS2
. USOC: RJI 4C
. REN: 0.2B

_

P-PAIR
MODCORD

LOOP START
LINE PCB
(4 CIRCUITS)
‘2-PAIR
MODULAR

LINE
1 AND2
~

I

E&M TIE LINES

P-PAIR
MODCORD

’
1
I

MODULAR

’

-

i

id

II II

I
I

I

_

-

JACK

*

I

I

1

*I

I

E&M
~~
TIE-LINE
PCB

I 3

31

. FIC:
2-W; TLI 1M
4-W: TL31 M

. usoc:

S-PAIR
MOD CORD

2-W; RJPEX
4-W; RJPGX
REN:
NIA

kl

L4t
l-z-l
bW

4

‘3-PAIR
MODULAR
JACK

1

,“,::

L%

I I

I

l-l+

I
1
cl

i%

MDF
!MlNG

TERMINAL

OR MODEM
CALL ACCOUNTING

DEVICE f!-fj

opTlo;~N~~;C~~y

MAIN DISTF
FRAME MC
I&
AMPLIFIED

I

25PAIR AMPHENOL
(PlOU/PEPU)
OR
SPRING TERMINAL STRIP

PAGE OUTPUT

MUSIC SOURCE: EXTERNAL
BACKGROUND
MUSIC

ZC

RELA\I
MAIN
CONTROL

ALARM

ZONE PAGE RELAYS (4 ZONES)

EXTERNAL

PAGE AMPLIFIER

-1

I

-

AND/OR
,

TWISTED

I
PAIR

I

II

\
MOHlBGM
VOLUME
CONTROL

FIGURE 18A-DK FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
-18-

PCB

PCTU
(SEE TABLE B)

PAIR ’

1

EXTERNAL

BACKGROUND

TWISTED

RELAY)

RELAY SENSOR

MUSIC SOURCE:
MUSIC-ON-HOLD

I

I

DOOR LOCK OR BGM MUTE CONTROL

NIGHT BELL OR MOH (CONTROL

1

RECEIVER

II

I

STRATADK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990

t
-

__-w--v,

--

HESB

MI-IF
l”lYl

--- E!%J 24/56/96

-

--

k

-LOUD’

.

.I. 8

jl$:,“:::::r,:,
tbi

i

z

BGM SOURCE
TO STATIONS

2- (

r

$F;;;;;;;pD
DOOR PHONES

tttt

PSTU
or
PESU
.

STANDARD

AND LOCK CONTROLS

(8 STD CIRCUITS)
(ZSTDC(.CUTS)(

TELEPHONE

,

-&‘(PSTU

(NOTE
ONLY)

1)

POWER FAILURE
TRANSFER UNIT

PDKU”
(8 DIGITAL

CIRCUITS)

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC
DIU STATION PCB

TELEPHONE/

I

1

n

I

I

I

1 1 CABLES

.Li

25.PAIR
AMPHENOL
(FEMALE)
125-PAIR
‘CABLE

-

!

-

-.-....TELEPHONE3

1

PPSU
MODULAR

I
117VAC
(15 AMP)
m/fin

-

H7

PBTC CABLE

.IED

CORDS

NOTES:
Can be on-premises or off-premises
(OPS: FC = OL13A; USOC = RJ2X)
2. Al,7 external devices connected to the PCTU,
IPFS//
LVV, ,P1I‘OU, PSTU, PEMU, and PCOU must be
industry-standard and supplied by the customer.
All devices connected to the PDKU and PEKU are
Toshiba proprietary.
Requires Release 3.

FlGURE18B-DKFUNCTIONALBLOCKDIAGRAM

-19i

STRATA
DK
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER
1990
TABLEH
COMMONCONTROLINFORMATION
PCTU2/PCTU3

Item
CPU type
Clock speed
Conference

channels

ROM memory

_

68000/i 6 bit

PCTUS
68000/i 6 bit

8 MHZ

8 MHZ

32

14

l
l

l

RAM memory

l

512KB (PCTU2)
768KB (PCTU3)

512KB

256KB (PCTU2)
384KB (PCTU3)

128KB

Personal LCD message
memory (10 w 19)

10 messages
32 characters each
16 LCD stations max.

10 messages
32 characters each
6 LCD stations max.

Personal speed dial LCD memo
memory (10 m 49)

40 memos
12 characters each
16 LCD stations max.

40 memos
12 characters each
6 LCD stations max.

Verified account codes

l

PCTU2-none
PCTU3-300 codes,
4 w 15 digit each max.

None

Personal timed reminder LCD memo
memory (605 w 609)

5 reminder memos
32 characters each
16 LCD stations max.

5 memos
32 characters each
6 LCD stations max.

l

System speed dial memory (60 m 99)

1 40 numbers, 20 digits each, shared by all stations in the system.

Station speed dial memory (10 N 49)

40 numbers, 20 digits each, separately available to all stations
in the system.

System LCD message memory (60 m 99)

40 messages, 32 characters each, shared by all LCD stations in
the system

System speed dial LCD memo memory
(60 - 99)

40 memos, 12 characters each, shared by all LCD stations in
the system.

Personal timed reminder memory
(605 - 609)

5 timed reminders, separately available to all stations in
the system.

NOTES:
1. The PCTUS is compatible with DK24 only; however, the PCTU may be used with all systems.
2. The PCTU and PCTUS provide MOH/BGM interface with volume control and support either CRCU-4 or -8.
3. See Tables J and K for PCTU and PCTUS configuration information.
4. PCTU2, PCTU3, and PCTUS ROMs are not interchangeable.

-2o-

STRATADK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLEI
OPTIONALINTERFACE-PCBOPTIONS
Interface Option

PIOU

PIOUS

PEPU

Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohms, duplex)

X

X

X

Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms)

X

Zone page interface (unamplified,

4 zones)

X

control relay

X

Night transfer or music-on-hold

Door lock or external amplifier control relay

X

X

X
I
I

Alarm sensor

X
I

X

X

X

Maintenance port for a local ASCII terminal or external
modem (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)

X

X

Remote maintenance
external connector)

X

X

modular connector)

modem (IMDU subassembly,

no

X

I

X

SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire

X

NOTE:
X = the option is provided.

and maintenance equipment, such as a personal computer or ASCII terminal. The IMDU
has an internal maintenance channel and
does not require a dedicated CO line or station
port. Data transmission speed can be set at
300 or 1200 BPS full duplex.
l
The IMDU mounts on top of the option
interface unit (PIOU or PIOUS) piggy-back
style.

are made with modular connectors, each
with two circuits.
E 81 M TIE Line Unit (PEMU): The PEMU provides for E & M Type I signaling, immediatestart TIE lines. Each PEMU reduces the maximum system capacity by four CO lines and
four stations (four CO lines and eight stations
if the PCTUS is used). A choice between 2- or
4-wire transmission is available as a jumperplug option.
l
A maximum of one PEMU can be installed
in DK24 to provide four TIE lines, two in
DK56 to provide eight TIE lines, and three
in DK96 to provide twelve TIE lines (see
Table K for details).
l
Connections from the PEMU to the MDF
are made with modular connectors, each
with one circuit.

CO Line Unit (PCOU): The PCOU provides the
system with four loop-start CO lines and a
standard, built-in automatic busy redial (ABR)
circuit. Each CO line can be programmed to
be either DTMF or dial pulse. In addition, each
CO line has a 3 dB pad option switch to control excessive loudness resulting from close
proximity
to the PBX or central office. Each
CO line circuit

provides

built-in

gas tubes

for

limited protection from lightning.
l
A maximum of four PCOU PCBs can be
installed
in DK24 to provide sixteen CO
lines, five PCOU PCBs can be installed in

Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU)t: The
PDKU provides eight ports for digital telephones and data interface units (PDIU-DI and
PDIU-DS). It can support one DDSS console.
PDKUs supporting digital telephones with offhook call announce do not require an EOCU.

DK56 to provide twenty CO lines, and nine
in DK96 to provide thirty-six CO lines.
l

Connections from the PCOU to the MDF

t Requires Release 3 software

-21i

I

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLE J
SYSTEM CAPACITIES

YE_.
Item

-.

PCTU2/PCTIIR

..-...

_

System compatibility

----..

-.--

DK24, DK56,
6 max,
8 max,
14 max,
32 max,
56 max,
96 max,
16 max,
20 max,
36 max,
4 max,
8 max,
12 max,
4 max
12 max

Universal PCB slot capacity

Station port capacity

CO line capacity

TIE line capacity
DSS consoles: DSSDDSS
Door phones
Simultaneous 4-party conferences
LCD stations w/personal message memory

8 max
16 max

Door lock controls

5
21
53
80
24
56
80

PDIU-DI (PCTU3 only)

PDIU-DS (PCTU3 only)

max
max,
max,
max,
max,
max,
max,

and DK96
DK24
DK56
DK96
DK24
DK56
DK96
DK24
DK56
DK96
DK24
DK56
DK96

I

.

PCTIIC
.

W,“V

DK24
6 max

24 max

16 max

4 max
3 max
9 max
3 max
6 max
4 max

DK24
DK56
DK96
DK24
DK56
DK98

Not supported

Not supported

provide fifty-six digital telephone ports, and
twelve in DK96 to provide ninety-six digital
telephone ports.

The PDKU does not support door phones or
background music source connection.
l
Each digital telephone requires one port on
the PDKU; the maximum number of digital
telephones per PDKU is eight. Each DDSS
console requires only one port (always circuit 8), and reduces the maximum number
of digital telephones
by one. Each PDIUDS requires one PDKU port, and each
PDIU-DI shares the same port with its
accompanying telephone.
l
Connections from the PDKU to the MDF
are made with 25pair amphenol connectors. Each port normally uses single-pair
wiring. No extra wiring is required for offhook call announce.
l
A maximum of four PDKUs can normally

Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU):
The PEKU provides eight ports for electronic
telephones. It can be configured for off-hook
call announce by installing an EOCU. It can
also be configured to support a DSS console
and/or door phone control unit (HDCB). One
designated PEKU port can be connected to a
customer-supplied background music source
to feed music to all electronic telephones.
l
Each electronic telephone requires one
port; the maximum num,ber of electronic
telephones per PEKU is eight. The upgrade for off-hook call announce does not
require a port. Each DSS console requires
two ports and reduces the maximum

be installed in DK24 to provide thirty-two
digital telephone
ports, seven in DK56 to

-22-

/
I

/ i

I
./

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
Power Failure Transfer Unit: The PSTU
provides a -24VDC output for controlling
a power failure’;fransfer unit.(DPFT).
Customer-supplied peripherals include
those listed below:
l
Auto attendant device
l
Dictation equipment
l
Facsimile
l
Off-premises station
l
Modem
l
Standard telephone
l
Voice mail device
A maximum of three PSTUs can normally
be installed in DK24, providing twenty-four
standard telephone ports; seven PSTUs
can normally be installed in DK56, providing fifty-six standard telephone ports; and
twelve in DK96, providing ninety-six standard telephone ports (see Table K).
Connections from the PSTU to the MDF
are made with 25pair amphenol connectors, one pair per port.
If any devices which send DTMF signals
are connected to the PSTU, a CRCU must
be installed on the PCTU2, PCTU3, or
PCTUS.

number of electronic telephones by two;
each HDCB takes one port, and reduces
*-the maximum by one.
l
Connections from the PEKU to the MDF
are made with 25-pair amphenol connectors. Each port normally uses 2-pair wiring;
3-pair wiring is required when off-hook call
announce is supported.
l
A maximum of three PEKUs can normally
be installed in DK24 to provide twenty-four
electronic telephone ports, seven in DK56
to provide fifty-six electronic telephone
ports, and twelve in DK96 to provide ninety-six electronic telephone ports (see Table
4

l

NOTE:
The system capacities above apply only
when connecting 6500-series telephones to
PEKU PCBs. If earlier series Toshiba electronic telephones are used, the capacities
are reduced (see Table K).
Off-hook
Call Announce
Upgrade Unit
(EOCU): An optional off-hook call announce
upgrade unit mounts on top of the PEKU or
PESU piggy-back style. It is required on every
PEKU or PESU that supports stations receiving off-hook call announce. The unit provides
two off-hook call announce channels, which
are shared by all electronic telephone circuits
on a PEKU or PESU. An EOCU is not required
on PDKUs supporting stations with off-hook
call announce (see Table L).

Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
(PESU): The PESU PCB provides an interface with a combination of two standard telephone and four electronic telephone circuits.
The two standard circuits are identical to
PSTU circuits, providing an interface with
standard telephones
and/or peripheral
devices. The four electronic telephone circuits
are identical to the PEKU circuits; they provide
interface to Toshiba electronic telephones
(with/without off-hook call announce), BGM
source connection, and an HDCB, but do not
support a DSS console.
l
The PESU can accept an EOCU subassembly PCB to support electronic telephones that receive off-hook call
announce.
l
If any devices that are connected to the
PESU standard telephone ports send
DTMF signals, a CRCU must be installed
on the PCTU PCB.

Standard Telephone Interface Unit (PSTU):
The PSTU provides an interface between
standard telephones and the system. It adds
eight standard telephone ports, and has a 20
Hz square-wave ring generator.
l
In addition, the PSTU provides support for
numerous Toshiba-supplied and customersupplied peripherals. Toshiba peripherals
include:
l
Digital Voice Messaging Systems: One
standard telephone port is required for
each voice mail port.

-24-

STRATADK .
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLEL
OPTIONALSUBASSEMBLIES

b
Subassembly

Capacity

Host

^
Function

EOCU

PEKU and PESU

1 for PEKU or PESU
that supports OCA

Provides OCA path for 8 circuits
on PEKU or 4 circuits on PESU.

CRCU
(4 or 8 circuits)

PCTU or PCTUS

1 per PCTlkystem

Provides DTMF receiver for DISA,
standard telephone circuits, and TIE lines.

IMDU

PIOU or PIOUS

1 per PlOWsystem

Provides remote maintenance
interface with built-in modem.

HHEU

1 per EKT/DKT

Provides interface for headset and loud
ringing bell.

HVSU

6500-series EKT/
1OOO-series DKT
6500-series EKT

1 per EKT

Provides interface for EKT to receive OCA.

HVSI

6500-series

EKT

1 per EKT

Provides interface for EKT to receive OCA.

DVSU

1OOO-series DKT

1 per DKT

Provides interface for DKT to receive OCA.

System Capacity and Configuration

port/CO line capacity. Generally, each optional
PCB, e.g. PEMU, PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU,
installed in the cabinet occupies a slot that may
have been used to support eight station ports or
four CO lines.
The number of station ports or CO lines provided by each PCB is given in Table K. Tables L
and M list each type of subassembly and optional unit that can be installed.

This section provides an overview of system
configuration
requirements
and considerations.
Table A I illustrates
each system’s
various
station/CO
line capacities.
For example,
the
STRATA DK96 system can have 36 CO lines and

40 stations. Optional upgrades impact the station

-25-

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLE M
OPTIONAL UNITS
Interface

Option unit
HDSS 6560
:DSS console)

DDSS10605
(Digital DSS
Console)

HDCB (door
Ihone control)
MDFB

PEKU (circuits 7 & 8)

PDKU (circuit 8)

-.

Capacity

Function

4 per system with PCTU2/3 Provides a 60-button DSS console
3 with PCTUS
that functions with electronic
telephones. Buttons are flexibly
assigned as CO line, speed dial,
and DSS.
4 per system with PCTUB Provides a 60-button DSS
console that functions with
digital telephones. Buttons
are flexibly assigned as CO
line, speed dial, and DSS.

PEKU or PESU (circuit 5)

4 per system with PCTU2/3 Provides MDFB door phone and
3 with PCTUS
door lock control interface.

HDCB control box
(each HDCB supports
three MDFBs)

12 per system (PCTU2
or 3)
9 per system (PCTUS)

l

l

l

HESB

DPFT

Door monitor with two-way talk
path to system telephones.
Door bell that rings designated
electronic and digital telephones.
Microphone for talkback when
paged over HESB amplified speaker

PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for 1 per PIOU, PIOUS,
page, speaker, or amplifier or PEPU

External page amplifier
and speaker.

DKT/EKT with HHEU PCB
for loud ringing bell

1 per DKTIEKT (with
HHEU PCB)

Loud ringing bell.

PSTU

2 max, DK24
3 max, DK56

Connects up to 8 CO lines directly
to standard telephones if the
system’s AC power is removed.

5 max, DK96
ntegrated DIU
(PDIU-Dl)5

PDKU via DKT

8 per PDKU;
1 per DKT

Used for transmitting and receiving
data between terminals, personal
computers and devices connected
to other PDIU-Dls or to modems,
printers and computers connected
to PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI is also
used to provide personal computer
access to outside dial up data
services and/or bulletin boards via
modem pooling.

Zandalone DIU
(PDIU-DS)5

PDKU (any circuit)

8 per PDKU

For making RS-232 switched data
connections for modem pooling,
printer sharing, and host!
mainframe computer accessing.

DSS AND DDSS CONSOLE NOTES:
1. No additional hardware is required to use the DSS and DDSS consoles.
2. The DDSS and DSS consoles are assigned to associated digital and electronic telephones,
in programming.
3. DDSS and DSS consoles cannot be connected to PESU electronic telephone circuits.

respectively

DOOR PHONE NOTES:
1. A maximum of three HDCBs are allowed per system equipped with a PCTUS or four HDCBs
with a PCTU2/3, to support up to nine or twelve door phones (MDFBs), respectively.
2. One electronic telephone (PEKU or PESU) port, always the fifth circuit port, is required per HDCB.
3. HDCBs can only be connected to PEKU or PESU port numbers 04, 12,20, and/or 28.
4. One door lock control can be configured on each HDCB in place of one door phone.,
5. HDCBs cannot be connected to PDKU station ports.
6. Requires Release 3 software.

-26-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
4 FEATURES
STRATA DK digital key systems Offer a broad range of features and services, which are summarized
.
*
in Tables N, 0, and P.
TABLE N
SYSTEM FEATURES
The system features listed below function on all STRATA DK systems.
Standard
Music-on-Hold*
Night Ringing Answer Code
l
Non-blocking Talk Paths
0 Outgoing Call Restriction
l
Pooled CO Lines
l
Privacy/Non-privacy
l
Station Hunting
l
System Programming through Station
l
System Speed Dial
l
Tandem CO Line Connections
l
Tenant Service
l
Toll Restriction
0 Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial
l
Transfer Privacy
l
Traveling Class of Service?
l
Unlimited Handsfree Intercom Paths
l
Unrestricted Call Transfer over Intercom
l
Voice Mail Interface
l
Automated Attendant
l
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
l
Message Waiting Indication
l
Voice Mail Control via Digital/Electronic
Station
l
Feature Integration
l
Voice Mail identification Codes
l
Voice or Tone Signaling
l
Voice First
l
Tone First
l
Wall or Table Mounting

Account Codes (Forced/Voluntary/Verifiedt)
All Call Voice Page
Alternate Point Answer
Automatic Hold/Park Recall
Automatic Release from Hold/DISA
Background Music*
Centrex/PBX Compatible
Centrex Ringing Repeat
CO Line Groups
CO Line Queuing
Conferencing
Credit Card Dialingt
DAY/NIGHT Modes
Delayed Ringing
Distinctive CO Line/Intercom Ringing
DTMF Back Tone
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
DTMF Signal Time (80/l 60 ms)
Dual FCC Registration
Flexible Button Assignment
Flexible Intercom Numbering
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment
l
Immediate
l
Delay 1
l
Delay 2
Flexible Port/Line Assignment
Group Paging
Least Cost Routing
Live System Programming
Memory Protection
Message Waiting

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
l
l
l

l
l

Optional

l
l
l

Alarm Sensor*
Data Switchingt*
Direct Inward System Access
Door Lock Control*
Door Phones
Night Ringing Over External Page*
l
Night Pickup Code
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones
Off-premises Station
Page Interface

*May require customer-supplied
peripheral
t Requires Release 3 software.

hardware;

l
l
l

l
l
l
l

see the detailed

-27-

Page Zones
Power Failure Transfer*
Relay Service*
. External Page/Door Lock Relay
l
Night/Hold Relay
Remote Administration and Maintenance*
Reserve Power*
Station Message Detail Recording*
TIE Lines
feature descriptions

‘..

STRATA
DK
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER
1990
TABLE0
DIGITALANDELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
FEATURES

c--.

.

The station features listed below are accessible from each digital and electronic telephone.
Standard
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

l
l
l
l
l
l
l

l
l
l

Account Code Button
Automatic Busy Redial
Automatic Callback
Automatic Hold/Park Recall
Automatic Line Selection
Background Music with Station Control*
Busy Override
Call Forward
l
All Calls
l
Busy
l
No Answer
l
Busy/No Answer
l
Fixed
Call Park
Call Pickup
Call Transfer with Camp-on
CO/Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons
Direct Station Selection Buttons
DISA Security Code Revision
Distinctive LED Indications
l
Incoming Call
. In-use
l
On-hold
Distinctive Station Ringing
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb Override

DP/DTMF Mode Change
Exclusive Hold
Executive Override
Fixed Call Forward
Handsfree Answerback
Hearing Aid Compatible
Message Waiting/Flash
Microphone Control Button
Modem Button
Modular Handset and Line Cords
On-hook Dialing
Pooled Line Buttons
Privacy Button-t
Privacy Release Button
Privacy Override
Private CO Lines
Pushbutton Dialing
Release Button
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls
Repeat Last Number Dialed
Ringing Line Preference
Saved Number Redial
Speed Dial Buttons
Station Speed Dial
Timed Reminder
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision

l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

Optional
l
l

Data Button
Direct Station Selection Console Features
l
Automatic Line Hold
l
Flexible Buttons
All Call Voice Page Button
CO Lines
DSS
9 Night Transfer Button
Speed Dial
Voice or Tone Signaling
Call Forward Override
Liquid Crystal Display Features
Alphanumeric Messaging

l
l
l
l

l

l

l

l

l

l
l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Busy Lamp Field Indication
Busy Station Messagingt
Called Station Messaging
Calling Station Messaging
CO Line Identification
Group Station Messagingt
Intercom Name/Number Display
Speed Dial Memo
Station Identification
Timed Reminders with Messages
Modular Headset Interface
Off-hook Call Announce

l

*May require customer-supplied peripheral hardware; see the detailed feature descriptions
t Requires Release 3 software.

-28-

STRATADK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
TABLEP

STANDARD
TELEPHONE
FEATURES

_

The features listed below are accessible from a standard telephone by dialing access codes. See
both System Features and Digital and Electronic Telephone Features sections for detailed descriptions.

l
l
l
l
l

l
l
l
l
l
l

l
l

l

Standard
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

All Call Voice Page
Automatic Callback
Automatic Hold/Park Recall
Busy Override
Call Forward
l
All Calls
l
Busy
l
No Answer
l
Busy/No Answer
Call Park
Call Pickup
Call Transfer with Camp-on
Centrex/PBX Compatible
CO Line Queuing
Conference (four party, including two CO
l
0
lines)
0
Distinctive Ringing (CO vs. Intercom calls)
Do Not Disturb Override
Optional
0
Direct Inward System Access

DP/DTMF Mode Change
Executive Override
Forced and Voluntary Account Codes
Group Paging
Least Cost Routing
Message Waiting (set only, not receive)
Night Pickup Code
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls
Repeat Last Number Dialed
Station Hunting
Speed Dial (Station and System)
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
Voice Mail Interface
Voice Signaling (to, not from)

Off-premises Station

System Features
Account Codes (Forced/Voluntary/Verified)t:
Account codes may be forced or voluntary;
and may be verified or not. Account code digit
length is 4 u 15 digits and set system wide;
this digit length applies to all types and combinations of account codes used in the system.
Account codes are sent out on the system’s
SMDR port with each call record as calls are
completed.
l
Forced: Each station may be required
(forced by programming) to enter an
account code before being allowed to dial
a telephone number from selected CO
lines,
l A station may be forced to dial account
codes on some CO lines but not others,
depending on how the CO line is set in
t Requires

l

Release 3 software.

-29-

system programming-forced or voluntary.
l Each station in the system may be programmed so that account codes
entered from that station will be verified
or not verified.
Voluntary: Voluntary account codes may
be entered by any station at any time during a telephone call by pressing the
B
button or dialing an access
code.
l
If a voluntary account code is dialed
from a digital or electronic telephone,
the call will not be interrupted. If dialed
from a standard telephone, the call will
be placed on hold while the code is
being entered; therefore, the account
code is normally entered from standard
telephones at’ the beginning or end of
the telephone conversation.

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
Each station in the system may be pro*---- grammed so that account codes entered
from that station will be verified or not
verified.
l
Verifiedt: Each station is set independently in system programming so that account
codes, forced and voluntary, will be verified
or not verified.
l
The system may be programmed to
have 300 verified account codes
total-voluntary and forced.
l
A verified account code may be system
programmed so that all the digits (4 N
15) of the code are verified, or only the
first portion (programmable length) of
the code is verified. 300 blocks of partially verified account codes can be
established, and each of these blocks
can contain a near limitless amount of
variations. For example, if the required
length of each account code in the system is five digits, and if each of the
available 300 verified account codes is
three digits, then there would be 100
combinations (00 u 99) for each verified
account code. In this instance, there
would be 30,000 partially verified
account codes available, 100 combinations for each of the 300 verified
account code blocks.
l
Each verified account code can be
assigned to a toll restriction class of
service in system programming. When a
verified account code is dialed at a station, that station’s normal toll restriction
class is temporarily replaced by the verified account code’s toll restriction class
of service (the station reverts back to its
normal restriction class when the call is
completed). The account code will be
sent out on that station’s SMDR call
record.
l
Verified account codes may be added,
deleted, or changed by users from stations enabled to in system programming.
l

Alarm Sensor: When configured with a customer-supplied alarm, the sensor detects
when the alarm relay-is activated -and causes
all digital and electronic telephones to sound a
startling tone. The digital or electronic telephone alarm tone is reset from any station programmed with an m
button. This feature is
optional, and an option interface PCB (PIOU
or PIOUS) is required in order to support it.
All Call Voice Page*: A user can page to all
station speakers simultaneously by dialin a 2digit access code or by pressing the dA button. The system can also be programmed to
page to an external zone speaker as part of
the all call page. See External Page Interface
and External Zone Paging.
Alternate
Point Answer: Allows users to
answer transferred CO calls from any station
that shares the CO line button’s appearance.
Automatic Hold/Park Recall+: If a station parks
or puts a call on hold, and a pre-programmed
period of time lapses without the call being
retrieved, the call automatically sounds a distinctive reminder tone at the station which initiated the hold/park. Each’station’s recall time
can be set individually in programming.
Automatic Release from Hold/DISA: If a CO
line is put on hold (or is used for a DISA call),
and the outside party hangs up, the system
disconnects automatically, releasing the CO
line(s). Individual CO lines can be programmed to either recognize or ignore the disconnect signal from the central office. This feature
will not operate unless the telephone company’s central office provides a disconnect signal
to the system.
Background Music: Background music can be
broadcast two different ways; over digital
and/or electronic telephone speakers, and
over optional external paging speakers.
l
When background music is broadcast over
digital and/or electronic telephone speakers, the music source connects directly to
the system’s controller PCB (PCTU) or a
designated (PEKU or PESU) station port.
No optional hardware is required.
l
When external speakers are used, an
option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or

NOTE:
The 911 emergency number bypasses
forced verified account code requiremenkt

*Available using standard or electronic telephones.

t Requires Release 3 software.

-3o-

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
data equipment, including personal computers,
printers, and modems. Asynchronous data can
t%?ransmitted at speeds up to 19.2 kpbs. The
system allows personal computer (PC) keyboard dialing (up to 9600 bps) using the AT
command set. When used in conjunction with
PC desk top software, dial-by-name and other
dial directories may be set up inside the PC.
The system provides four data security groups
to restrict data calls between groups. The system also provides program options to allow
modems to be used in pooling groups.

l

l

DAY/NIGHT Modes: The system has three
available modes, DAY, DAY2 and NIGHT.
Each mode can be assigned a distinct CO-tostation ringing arrangement for handling calls
differently. The system can be programmed
with either two or three modes (which can be
changed by any station programmed with a q
button):
Three modes:
Two modes:
DAY
DAY
DAY2
NIGHT
NIGHT

l

l

Delayed Ringing: If a CO line call rings to a station and is not answered, alternate stations
can be programmed to ring 12 or 24 seconds
later. Twelve seconds is approximately 3 rings;
24 seconds, 6 rings. Delayed ringing is selectively provided for each line, by each station.

l

l

Direct Inward System Access: Using a DTMF
telephone, outside callers can dial internal stations (DISC) or outgoing CO lines directly,
without going through a receptionist or operator. Any number of CO lines can be programmed with the direct inward system access
(DISA) feature.
l
The caller dials the DISA CO line number
and hears ringing. Then, a tone sounds for
nine seconds. While the tone is sounding,
the caller may dial a station number or outgoing CO line access code. If a busy station is dialed, the caller can dial another
station. If no number is dialed and the
nine-second interval elapses, the call is
transferred to a pre-assigned ringing
arrangement.

If set in program memory, an optional
security code must be dialed to make
DISA calls throtigh the system via CO
lines, but is never required to dial internal
stations directly. The DISA security code (1
u 15 digits) may be set, changed, or canceled from system programming and/or
designated stations. If the DISA security
code is not set in memory, it is not necessary for dialing out on CO lines via DISA.
A built-in 4-minute timer automatically disconnects DISA calls in situations where
the central office does not provide a
release signal. After a warning tone, this
timer can be reset by the caller dialing B to
extend the call another four minutes as
many times as required to finish the call.
This timer is always operational during
DISA calls to prevent CO line lock-up.
A CRCU PC6 must be installed on the
PCTU PCB to allow DISA operation.
A DISA CO line can be assigned to any
Night Transfer ringing mode, allowing CO
lines to ring normally in one mode (i.e.
DAY) and become DISA lines when the
system is transferred to another mode (see
DAY/NIGHT Modes).
DISA CO line calls have complete system
privacy and cannot be overridden.
The system provides DISA class of service, which allows Toll Restriction to be
applied to DISA CO line calls.

Distinctive CO Line/Intercom Ringing+: When
CO and intercom calls ring a station, the ringing is different. This helps the user determine
the type of each incoming call before answering. (This feature is optional for single-line telephones and standard for digital and electronic
telephones.)
l
A further distinction is available for electronic telephones as a station feature.
Stations in close proximity may be programmed for a unique ring on incoming
CO calls. This allows individual station
users to recognize their telephone’s ringing. See Station Features, Distinctive
Station Ringing.
*Available

-32-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
Door Lock Control: Any telephone programmed with a door lock button can unlock a door.
Pressing the button activates the electronic
door lock, and the lock opens for 3 or 6 seconds, as specified in programming. The actual
electronic door lock mechanism must be supplied by the customer. This feature is optional.
An option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU) or an HDCB is required to support it.
Up to five door lock controls can be installed
with a designated button for each (four are
provided by each of up to four HDCBs and
one via either a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU-see
System Features, Relay Service). If a PCTUS
is installed, the maximum number of door lock
controls is four.

tones. See Toshiba Peripheral Equipment,
Door Phone Control Unit.
_
NOTE: *
The PDKU cannot support an HDCB.
DTMF Back Tone: The system can be programmed to allow or prevent DTMF tones from
being returned to an electronic or digital telephone when its user dials on CO lines or
sends digits to voice mail.
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible*:
The system works with either DTMF or rotary
dial pulse CO lines programmed on a line-byline basis.

Door Phones: The door phone has several
applications.
0
For example, it can be used in conjunction
with door lock control, outside an entrance
which must be screened. When a button is
pressed on the door phone, any or all digital and/or electronic telephones in the system can be programmed to ring with a distinct door phone tone. Any digital or electronic telephone can answer the ring and
converse with the person at the door
phone. The door lock can be opened if the
person requires entry.
0
Door phones may be programmed to ring
any combination of digital and/or electronic
telephones;
they may even be programmed to ring over external page when
the system is in NIGHT mode.
A second function of the door phone is that
of a monitor. Any telephone can call the
door phone and monitor its immediate
area.
A maximum of twelve door phones are
allowed per system with a PCTU2/3 and
nine with a PCTUS. A maximum of four
HDCBs can be installed to.support up to
three door phones each. Each HDCB
requires the support of one electronic telephone interface unit (PEKU or PESU).
When multiple door phones are installed,
they may ring with two distinct door phone

DTMF Signal Time (801160 ms): The standard
DTMF dial signal time is 160 milliseconds, but
it may be reduced to 80, if the central office or
peripheral equipment, such as voice mail
devices, will function with the reduced signal
time. The DTMF signal time is set independently for CO line outdialing and voice mail
auto dial digits via system programming.
Dual FCC Registration:
The system can be
configured as either key or hybrid, with separate FCC registration numbers for each type.
The appropriate configuration for an individual
system depends on its function. For more
details; refer to General End User Information,
located in the front of this document.
Flexible Button Assignment: Each digital telephone has 20 buttons and each electronic
telephone has 10 or 20 buttons which may be
flexibly programmed as a CO or as any of the
different types of features.
Flexible Intercom Numbering*: A station intercom number can be programmed to have up
to four digits. The numbers can be assigned to
any station port, and can be programmed in
any sequence.
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment: Each CO
line can be programmed to ring (or not ring) at
each station in the system. A different ringing
*Available

-33-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
assignment may be assigned to the system for
zach DAY, DAY2 or NIGHT mode (see
DAY/NIGHT Modes). If a station is programmed to ring for a particular CO line, then
a choice may be made between three timing
specifications:
l
Immediate: Stations assigned IMMEDIATE timing ring as soon as the CO line
rings into the system.
l
Delay 1: If stations with IMMEDIATE timing have not answered within 12 seconds
(three rings), stations assigned DELAY 1
timing begin ringing also.
l
Delay 2: If the above stations have not
answered within 24 seconds (6 rings), stations assigned DELAY 2 timing begin ringing also.
Flexible Port/Line Assignment: The system’s
universal slots can be assigned to station, CO
line, or E & M TIE line PCBs in a variety of
custom configurations. See System Capacity
and Configuration.
Group Paging*: Dialing a 2-digit access code
permits a user to make vocal announcements
to one of four internal station groups or all stations simultaneously. Any station receiving an
announcement can directly access the originator by dialing a code, although any other station receiving the announcement will be cut
off. Stations are assigned to groups when the
system is programmed. This feature is independent of external paging zones, which reach
external speakers (see External Zone Paging).
Least Cost Routing*: Eight different routing
plans may be designed to automatically place
outgoing calls using the most cost-efficient
method. Three different LCR time schedules
can be set up for the business day. Each
schedule can use a different priority sequence
to place calls, depending on the time of day.
Stations can be grouped into one of four classes of LCR. Each class has its own routing priority. Selected station users may have priority
use of a line, even when the route with the
lowest cost is not available. LCR is compatible
with ABR and two CO line conference.
*Available

using standard

or electronic

Live System Programming: Programming the
system does not normally interrupt service.
When the system is>rogrammed on-site, only
the station executing commands loses normal
function. When the system is programmed
from a remote terminal, all stations remain
functional. Service is only interrupted for hardware upgrades.
Memory Protection: If the power fails, the system has an internal battery backup that protects data and the customer’s programmed
configuration. This information will be maintained within a powerless system for approximately six years.
Message Waiting: Any station and most voice
mail devices can leave a message waiting
indication at a digital or an electronic station
which causes the called digital station’s MESSAGE LED or called electronic station’s
MW/FL LED to flash. In such a case, the station user can either automatically recall the
originating station or voice mail device, or cancel the indication without responding. Up to
three indications sent by other stations will be
queued. A fourth indication is always reserved
for the Message Center.
l
The system message waiting feature integrates with most voice mail/auto attendant
devices by providing special codes that
allow the device to set and cancel the
message waiting LEDs on the digital and
electronic telephones. The digital and electronic teleohones automatically retrieve the
message ‘via the m-and
m
buttons respectively.
Music-on-Hold*:
A customer-supplied music
source, such as a radio or tape player, can be
connected to the system. CO lines or stations
placed on hold connect to the music-on-hold
source, and the holding party hears music.
l
The music source can be connected
directly to the controller PCB (PCTU or
PCTUS). An optional interface PCB is not
required to support this feature. However,
if the system is to be-configured with a
tape recorder that plays a pre-recorded

telephones.

-34-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990

0

message to holding parties, the option
interface unit PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU) is suggested.
The interface PCB has a relay that can be
programmed to control a tape player every
time a call is placed on hold. When the
relay activates, the tape plays. When the
call goes off hold, the tape stops. The tape
recorder does not need to run continuously
in order for the taped message to reach
holding parties (see Relay Service).
Music-on-hold and background music can
share a music source or have individual
music sources (see Background Music).

Night Ringing Over External Page*: When the
system is in Night mode, and an incoming call
from a CO line or door phone is received, the
system can be programmed for ringing to
sound over an external speaker. When this
feature is used, persons working after-hours
are more likely to answer important calls,
especially if they work away from a telephone.
The customer-supplied
external speaker
requires an option interface PCB (PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU) to support it. See Night
Ringing Over Selected Page Zones.
l
Any station in the system can answer the
call by dialing the Night Pickup code.

Page Interface*: Dialing a 2-digit code permits
user access to a customer-provided external
speaker through an internal 3-watt amplifier, or
a two-way 600-ohm voice path is available for
use with a customer-supplied talkback speaker/amplifier. The external amplifier and speaker are optional, and an option interface PCB
(PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) is required to support them.

Page Zones*: Dialing a 2-digit access code permits a user to page to one of four external
zones or all zones simultaneously. External
zones are composed of customer-supplied
speaker(s) and amplifier(s). This feature is
independent of group paging, which reaches
internal station groups (see Group Paging).
The external speakers required to operate this
feature are optional. An option interface PCB
(PIOU) is required to support them. The
PIOUS or PEPU provides one external zone
only.

Non-blocking Talk Paths*: All CO and intercom lines can be used at the same time. The
system can operate at full capacity at all times.

NOTE:
Zone page can be accessed by all stations
and TIE lines, but not DISA/DISC lines.

Off-premises Station: An off-premises station
is a standard telephone located off-site from
the system. Each is supported by one standard telephone interface (PSTU or PESU)
port, and normally requires a special line from
the central office. Each PSTU supports up to
eight off-premises stations, and each PESU
Release

Outgoing Call Restrictioti:
Statidns’can be
selectively restricted from originating calls over
any number of CO lines. Only outgoing calls
are restricted. The same stations can receive
incoming calls over the restricted CO lines.

NOTES:
1. Page can be accessed by all stations
and TIE lines (optional), but not
DISA/DISC lines.
2. The 3-watt amplifier is included with
either a PlOlJ or PEPU, but not on the
PIOUS.

Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones+:
CO lines can be programmed to night ring
over selected PIOU page zones via customersupplied paging equipment. The lines can be
divided into two groups (tenant 1 and tenant 2)
which can then be assigned to night ring over
the selected zones, 1 N 4.

t Requires

supports up to two off-premises stations.

Pooled CO Lines: Several CO lines can be
pooled to appear under one station CO line
button. CO lines can’ be pooled in categories,
e.g., all WATS lines in one pool, all regular CO

3 software.

*Available

-35-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
lines in another pool, etc.
*---Outgoing pooled line buttons override system LCR, and cannot be used to set up
tandem CO calls.
l
Pooled line buttons can be used to set up
two-CO line conference calls with one or
two stations.

l

Power Failure Transfer: Up to eight CO lines
are switched directly to up to eight dedicated
conventional telephones (customer-provided
2500- or 500-type) for incoming and outgoing
calls. This feature requires an external unit,
the power failure transfer unit (DPFT). A standard telephone interface unit (PSTU) is
required to supply the DPFT with a -24VDC
control signal and ground connections.
l

Privacy/Non-privacy:
The system can be programmed to be totally private or non-private,
or any combination of private/non-private on a
station-by-station basis. The system is in private mode by default, meaning that station
users, by pressing the CO line button, cannot
access a CO line that is in-use by another station. Station users, however, can change their
individual station’s mode via the privacy
release button. Users having stations with
common CO line appearances can access a
CO line that is currently in use by a non-private user. Up to three stations may converse
on a single CO line via non-private operation.
See Station Features, Privacy Release Button
and Privacy Override.
NOTES:
1. In private systems (default), all stations
are denied Privacy Override.
2. In nonprivate systems, all stations are
allowed Privacy Override.

External Page/Door Lock Relay: This
relay can be programmed to activate one
of the following functions:
.
l
External Page: An external music
source can be connected to the system
to provide background music over external speakers. When a paging announcement is made over the external speakers, the external page relay mutes the
background music.
l
Door Lock Control: This relay controls
an electronic door lock. When the station door lock button is pressed, the
door is unlocked by the relay for either 3
or 6 seconds as specified in programming.
Night/Hold Relay: This relay can be programmed with one of the following functions:
l
Night Relay: The night relay activates if
the system is in night mode and there is
an incoming CO line or door phone ring.
In programming, the relay can be set to
activate continuously
(for indirect
answering machine control) or pulsating
at 1 second ON/3 seconds OFF (for a
night bell) when a CO line or door phone
rings.
l
Hold Relay: The hold relay activates
any time a CO line is on hold. It is normally used to control the music-on-hold
source. A common source controlled by
this relay is a tape deck (see Music-onHold).

(

NOTES:
1. Door lock control is also provided via
HDCBs (see Door Lock Control).
2. Both relays reside on the option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU).
Therefore, a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU is
required for any relay functions discussed above.

Relay Service: Two relays provide signals to
activate optional external equipment. Each
relay can be optionally configured to be normally open or normally closed. Each relay can
be programmed to perform one function only.
Relays and their optional functions are as follows:

Remote Administration
and Maintenance:
System administration, programming, and
maintenance can be performed from a remote

-36-

l

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
location, over a customer-supplied ASCII terminal and modem. The system remains live,
with no interruption to operation.
l
Remote access of system programming/
maintenance is accomplished by calling in
on CO lines that connect to the maintenance modem (direct ring or transfer). A
customer-supplied commercial modem or
an internal modem unit (IMDU) with a supporting option interface PCB (PIOU or
PIOUS) are required to support this feature.

station is call forwarded, calls to the station will
ring at the forwarded destination-not the hunt
_destination.
Station Message Detail Recording: The system provides detailed information regarding
both incoming and outgoing calls. The information includes time and duration of a call, as
well as the called number. It can also include
account codes entered (forced and voluntary),
the time it took to answer a call, and the station to which a call was transferred. Calls may
be screened to print out all calls, outgoing
only, or outgoing long distance calls only.
l
The system provides the information
through an RS-232 port (ASCII), which is
compatible with most commercial printers
and call accounting devices. Such customer-supplied peripherals may be capable of providing sophisticated account
tracking and reporting features.
l
Station message detail recording is optional, and an option interface PCB (PIOU or
PIOUS) is required to support it.

Reserve Power: Two customer-supplied 12-volt
batteries can be connected to the system as a
power failure backup. The batteries are connected to the system’s standard power supply,
therefore, no optional interface PCB is
required. When electrical power is intact, the
battery continuously trickle charges to capacity. The battery charger is built into the power
supply. In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches over to battery
power without any interruption to existing calls
or other normal system function. The length of
time reserve power will operate depends upon
the number of batteries provided, and the system load (see Table B).

System Programming through Station: The
system is easily programmed through an LCDtype digital or electronic telephone connected
to PEKU port 05. The programming electronic
telephone functions the same as any other
station when it is not in programming mode.
See Live System Programming.

IMPORTANT NOTES:
1. Local ordinances may dictate battery
and installation
type, housing,
method.
2. Batteries must be connected when
the system is operating via AC power
(if batteries are installed after the AC
power fails, they will not operate the
system).
3. Batteries are connected to the system with the Toshiba-supplied PBTC3M cable.

System Speed Dial*: Up to 40 system speed
dial numbers can be stored by the digital or
electronic telephone connected to PEKU port
00. Each number can be up to 20 digits, and
IO of the 40 numbers can be linked to any
other speed dial number to automatically dial
up to 37 digits. Any station in the system can
speed dial the stored number by pressing a 2digit access code or a previously programmed
button. Names may be assigned to each
number for LCD telephone users. Speed dial
buttons (locked or fixed) can be configured for
one-button access to Centrex/PBX features. A
fixed
button cannot be changed except by
station 200. See Station Features, Speed Dial
Buttons and Station Speed Dial.

q

Station Hunting*:
When a called station is
busy, the call will hunt to an assigned station.
If the assigned station is busy, the call hunts to
the next assigned station, and so on. The call
is eventually routed to the first idle station. The
hunting sequence can be either consecutive or
non-consecutive, and is fully flexible. If a hunt

q

*Available

-37-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
Tandem CO Line Connections: This feature
altews an unattended line-to-line connection,
leaving the originating station free to make
another call. For supervision purposes, the
originating station must have both CO line button appearances to allow tandem operation.
Therefore, tandem calls cannot be set-up from
standard telephones, digital telephones, or
electronic telephones using LCR, pooled line
buttons, or CO line access codes.

and/or operator-assisted calls. Each station is
assigned any one of t.he available restriction
levels or no restrictionT Individual CO lines can
be defined as unrestricted. By dialing one of
the two toll restriction override codes programmed into the system, a user can bypass
toll restriction. Also, a user can temporarily
change a station’s toll restriction class (See
Station Features: Traveling Class of Service,
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision, and
Verified Account Codes).T

Tenant Service: Two small businesses in the
same office building which do not each require
a full system can share a system. Each tenant’s CO line buttons appear in the correct
sequence on stations. Each tenant can have
two dedicated DSS consoles. Tenants can
also call each other directly. Tenants can have
separate:
l
LCR and toll restriction plans.
l
Night transfer ringing assignments.
l
Flexible door phone and CO line ringing
assignments.

Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial*: System speed dial numbers can be
programmed to override toll restrictions. For
instance, when employees need to access a
toll number that falls into a restricted area/
office code for work purposes, an employer
can program the particular toll number as a
system speed dial number. Even if their stations are toll restricted, they can access the
number with speed dialing.
Transfer Privacy: Optional transfer privacy can
be programmed system-wide. When transfer
privacy is programmed and an outside call is
answered by one station, then transferred to
another station, it can only be answered by the
second station, or by a station with directed
call pickup. Other stations cannot pick up the
transferred call with a CO line button. See
Alternate Point Answer and Directed Call
Pickup.

TIE Lines: TIE lines can be installed to link
STRATA DK systems to one another, or to link
a STRATA DK system to a PBX or any other
system with TIE lines. System configuration
allows a maximum of four TIE lines on DK24,
eight on DK56, and twelve on DK96. TIE lines
are interfaced via the PEMU PCB, each of
which provides four circuits. TIE lines are E &
M Type I signaling, optional 2- or 4-wire transmission, immediate start.
l
Paging system (external and station
speakers) access by far-end callers originating TIE line calls can be denied or
allowed in system programming.
l
System programming allows or denies
handsfree answerback on incoming TIE
line calls.
l
Off-hook call announce is not available
over TIE lines.

Traveling Class of Service-t: The normal toll
restriction class of a station can be temporarily
changed to another class. Each of the four toll
restriction classes can be assigned a four-digit
code. If one of these codes is entered at any
station, the station will assume the class associated with the code for the next dialed number. The station will revert back to its normal
toll restriction class for subsequent calls. In
system programming, any station can be
assigned to change these codes. The traveling
class code data is not sent out the SMDR port
and will not print out on station call records.
Traveling class codes can be added, deleted,
or changed by users from stations selected in
programming.

Toll Restriction*: Stations can be individually
restricted from making toll calls. Four restriction levels can be defined, each allowing or
denying specific area and office codes, long
distance information calls, international calls,
t Requires

Release

*Available

3 software.

-38-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

4

4

I

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
Unlimited Handsfree Intercom Paths: All intercom lines can carry handsfree conversations
simultaneously. Because intercom paths are
non-blocking, the’ number is only limited by the
amount of digital and electronic stations.

0

Unrestricted Call Transfer over Intercom: Any
CO line call can be transferred to any station
over the intercom line. A station does not need
a specific CO line’s appearance in order to
answer the call.

Voice or Tone Signaling*:‘ Each method suits
different business needs, and the calling station can select the other setting at any time,
regardless of the system’s programming. In
addition, the intercom tone can be optionally
disabled, via system programming, to each
station individually to allow room sound monitoring. The system can be programmed to
announce calls in one of two ways:
l
Voice First: Can be more convenient,
enabling the called party to answer without
touching the station. A distinctive intercom
tone sounds over the receiving station’s
speaker, followed by the caller’s voice.
l
Tone First: Ensures a conversation’s privacy. The intercom tone sounds over the
receiving station’s speaker every four seconds, until the station user answers the
call. See Station Features, Distinctive
Ringing.

Voice Mail Interface*: The system can be configured with a Toshiba- or customer-supplied
voice mail messaging system. Depending
upon the voice mail product installed, some or
all of the following features may be provided:
call routing, message handling, information
management, etc.
l
Automated Attendant:
An integrated
Automated Attendant can streamline the
system’s call answering capability. Additionally, the supervised transfer capability
virtually eliminates unanswered or missed
calls.
l
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox: Each
telephone user can forward calls directly to
a personal mailbox. The caller bypasses
the usual sequence of voice mail.commands, and simply leaves a message after
hearing a tone.
l
Message Waiting Indication:
When a
message is recorded in a user’s mailbox,
the voice mail system automatically sets a
message waiting indication at the user’s
station. When the station user listens to
the message, he/she can erase the message, allowing the voice mail device to
automatically turn off the indication.
l
Voice Mail Control via Station: Station
users can control voice mail equipment
from their telephone dialpads.
l
Feature Integration: The integration of
special voice mail features in STRATA DK
system software enable the systems to
work together more efficiently.
l
Voice Mail Identification Codes: Each
station user can set VM ID codes to automatically route calls directly to his/her mailt Requires

Release

box. VM ID codes can be up to 16 digits in
length and will dial automatically on forwarded and hunt-type calls, or when
responding to an MW indication.
To support a voice mail system, an optional standard telephone interface unit PCB
(PSTU or PESU) must be installed in the
STRATA DK system.

Wall or Table Mounting: The cabinet can be
mounted on the wall or table top. Special
brackets shipped with every cabinet may be
installed on the rear of the cabinet to provide
recommended clearance from the mounting
surface.
Digital and Electronic Telephone Features
Account Code Buttont: Allows users to enter
voluntary account code (verified or not) during
a conversation without interrupting the conversation.
Automatic Busy Redial: If a station user dials
an outside number and gets a busy signal, the
user can hang up and have automatic busy
redial (ABR) dial the number until the call completes. ABR retries the number either every 30
or 60 seconds up to 15 times. When the call

3 software.

*Available

-39-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

STRATA OK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
’
programmed to ring at a single station (and
that station is forwarded). All CO lines transferred to a forwarded station.will forward,
When a station is in a call forward mode, it is
allowed to originate telephone calls as usual.
There are five different call forward modes
available for each station. Each mode is
set/canceled by the station user via individual
call forward buttons or dial access codes. The
call forward modes are:
l
All Calls: When a station is idle or busy,
all calls to the station will forward immediately and the station will not ring.
l
Busy: When a station is busy, all calls to
the station will forward immediately. When
the station is idle, incoming calls will ring
normally.
l
No Answer: When a station is idle, calls
to the station ring for 12 seconds2 and then
forward. When the station is busy, incoming calls will receive busy tone when calling the station.
l
Busy/No Answer: When a station is idle,
calls to the station ring for 12 seconds and
then forward. When the station is busy,
incoming calls will forward immediately.
l
Fixed: When the station is either idle or
busy, all incoming calls will forward immediately and the station will not ring. Fixed
call forward is different from the other call
forward modes in that the destination station is set once in system programming,
not selected each time the user sets the
station in a call forward mode.

successfully completes, the originating station
.%eunds a distinctive ABR tone. No optional
hardware is required to support ABR. ABR is
compatible with LCR.
Automatic Callback*:
If a station user dials
another station over an intercom line and gets
a busy signal, the user can hang up and have
automatic callback (ACB) redial the number.
When the busy station is freed, ACB calls the
originating station. When the originating station user answers the ACB recall, the system
rings the called station. The callback request
will stay active indefinitely until either the
called station is freed, or the caller cancels the
ACB request.
Automatic Hold/Park Recall*: A CO line or
intercom call placed on-hold or parked will
automatically recall the station after a previously programmed time period. A different
time period can be selected for each station.
Automatic Line Selection: Each station can be
programmed so that when the handset is lifted
or the m
button is pressed, a CO line, CO
line group, or intercom line is automatically
accessed.
Background Music with Station Control: A
station user may control background music
playing over the station’s speaker. The music
may be switched on or off and the volume may
be adjusted to suit the individual user. A designated station (200) can control (on/off) background music played over the external page
speakers.

NOTES:
1. The alternate station or device is selected by the station user when setting call
forward (all calls, busy, no answer, and
busy/no answer). With fixed call forward,
the alternate station or device is selected in system programming for each station.
2. If voice first, one ring tone will occur,
then voice announce. If tone first or CO
line call, three rings occur before forwarding activates.
3. The system’can 66 programmed to
allow the DSS (or DDSS) console or

Busy Override*: Upon calling a busy station
and receiving a busy tone, the caller can dial 1
to sound a tone burst to the called station.
Busy Override is available to all stations and
cannot be blocked.

,*
!

Call Forwarding: When a station is set in a call
forward mode, calls to the forwarded station
are routed to an alternate station or voice mail
device. This feature applies to both intercom
and designated CO line calls. Incoming CO
line calls will forward only if the CO lines are
*Available using standard or electronic telephones.

-4oj:

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1999

4.
5.

6.
7.

associated telephone to override the
call forward feature and ring stations set
in the call forward mode. This allows
attendants to notify users that may have
forgotten their telephones are in the call
forward mode.
Call forward takes precedence over station hunting destinations.
All call forward modes are available to
all stations; however, only one mode
can be activated on a particular station
at a time.
If system power is removed, call forward
information remains set on stations
when power is restored.
The call forward destination station can
call the forwarding station.

Call Park*: A station can place an existing call
on park/hold and consult by placing another
call. After consulting, the original call can be
retrieved. This feature can also be used to
park an outside CO line call, then page a person internally to pick up the call. Any station
can’pick up the parked CO line calls selectively by dialing an access code plus the CO line
number.

stations. The recall time set in programming
for each station is the time it will take to recall
- the station when it originates a transfer that is
not answered.
CO/Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons: Speed dial
buttons can be used to store access codes,
plus any flashes or pauses necessary to
access features through a host switching system. These fixed feature buttons can only be
changed by the station connected to port 00.
Every fixed feature button assigned to the station reduces the system speed dial numbers
by one.
Data Buttont: Allows manual dialing of internal
data calls, data interface unit to data interface
unit connections.
Direct Station Selection Buttons: By pressing
an assigned button, a station user can ring the
selected station. The button’s LED gives an
indication of whether or not the station is busy.
DSS and DDSS Console Features: The following features operate on all DSS and DDSS
consoles:
Automatic Line Hold: By pressing a station’s m
button, the attendant automatically places a CO line on hold and rings
the selected station.
Flexible Buttons: Each DSS and DDSS
console has 60 flexible buttons. Each button can be assigned one of the following
functions:
All Call Voice Page: The q button
allows the attendant to voice page all
station speakers simultaneously. It is
pre-assigned and must be located at
button 59.
CO line: Pressing a q button accessses a CO line (incoming or outgoing).
Direct Station Selection: Pressing a
m
button calls (or transfers a call to)
the selected station.
Night Transfer: Pressing the q button
puts the system ringing pattern in DAY,
DAY2 or NIGHT mode. See System

NOTE:
When a call is parked, the CO line LED will
flash at the on-hold rate.
Call Pickup*: By going off-hook and dialing an
access code, any station can pick up:
Calls on-hold or parked (selectively).
Calls ringing at other stations.
An external page.
CO line ringing at night over external page
or niaht bell.
Call”pickup (m)
buttons can be assigned to stations to automatically pick up
calls.
Call Transfer with Camp-on*: Allows an outside call to be transferred to an idle or busy
station (camp-on). Recall occurs if the call is
not answered within a specified time period.
The recall time period is flexible, and can be
programmed for different times for individual
t Requires

Release

3 soft ware.

*Available

-41-

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
+--

each other, as described in System Features,
Distinctive CO Line/intercom Ringing. Electronic telephone stations in close.proximity can
be programmed to ring differently. This allows
station users whose phones are near each
other to easily distinguish between their
incoming CO line calls. Two different tones are
available for incoming CO line calls:
l
Tone 1: 5001640 Hz, modulated by 16 Hz
l
Tone 2: 600/800 Hz, modulated by 16 Hz

Features, Day/Night Mode, for a definition of these ringing modes. If the system has tenant service, then the DDSS
and/or DSS consoles specified for the
second tenant have independent control
over ringing modes. The
button is
pre-assigned and must be button 60.
Speed Dial: Pressing an
button
dials a telephone number automatically.
Voice or Tone Signaling: DSS and DDSS
consoles may be programmed for voice- or
tone-first signaling, independent of the system’s assignment. As with all stations, the
DSS or DDSS console attendant may
choose the alternate mode at any time.
See Voice or Tone Signaling.
Call Forward
Override:
Either the
DSSDDSS console or its associated telephone can be programmed to call stations
even when the station has call forward set.
This allows attendants to notify users that
may have forgotten their telephones are in
the call forward mode.

q

q

l

Do Not Disturb: When a station user does not
want to be disturbed, the w
button can be
pressed, and users calling that station will get
a fast busy signal.
Do Not Disturb Override*: A privileged user,
by dialing a 1, can send a tone to a station that
is in the do not disturb mode. DND override
cannot be blocked for selected stations.
DP/DTMF Mode Change*: Allows a station to
change CO out-dialing signal modes from dial
pulse (DP) to DTMF (or vice versa) by pressing the m
button.

DISA Security Code Revision: To ensure confidentiality, only stations selected in programming can set, change, or cancel the DISA
security code (1 N 15 digits).

Exclusive Hold: A station user can press the
m
button twice to hold a call and not allow
it to be picked up by any other party whose
station has the same CO line appearance.
Exclusive hold calls can be picked up with the
remote retrieval of held calls feature, although
the party picking up the call must know it is
there (no LED indication of a holding call is
given to any station except the station originating the exclusive hold).

Distinctive LED Indications: A station or CO
Line LED flashes distinctively to indicate different states:
Exclusive Hold and CO Line Conference: Lines that are placed on exclusive
hold or are on a conference call will flash
at double the on-hold rate (see Exclusive
Hold).
Incoming Call: An LED flashes distinctively at the called station.
In-use: Other stations see a steadily lit
LED, and the LED on the in-use station
flashes distinctively.
On-hold: Other stations see a distinctive
on-hold flash. The used station’s LED
flashes at a special on-hold rate.

Executive Override*:
A privileged user can
enter any conversation in the system by dialing 8. An optional warning tone sounds to notify conversing parties that an additional party is
about to enter the conversation.
NOTE:
Executive override can be blocked selectively to any station in system programming.
This provides security fo.r modem (data)
calls, voice mail calls, fax calls, etc.

Distinctive Station Ringing: System-wide, CO
lines and intercom lines ring differently from
*Available

using standard

or electronic

telephones.

-42-

,

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
Group Station Messagingt: Allows any
station to set a Called or. Calling station
Message for a group-of stations.
Busy Lamp Field Indication: The LCD
can indicate the on-/off-hook status of all
stations in the system. Station status displays in increments of 20, listed by station
port number.
CO Line Identification: Each CO line can
be assigned a 16-character alphanumeric
name. All LCD phones using a named line
display the line’s name and/or number.
Intercom Name/Number Display: Allows
LCD station users to set a title (e.g. your
name, lobby, etc., up to 16 characters) in
station memory. The title displays on the
top row of the station’s LCD when it is idle,
and is displayed on the bottom row of
another LCD station when calling that station. The title is programmed from each
station individually and may be set and
cleared easily with an access code. It is
sent on direct intercom, forwarded, and
hunt type calls. Any station type (non-LCD,
standard telephone, and/or voice mail port)
may be programmed from station 200 to
send a title to the LCD stations they call.
Speed Dial Memo: A number of LCD telephone users can assign names (up to 12
characters) to each of their 40 personal
speed dial numbers (see Note). A user can
scroll through the list of names on the LCD
and make a selection. When selected, the
number is automatically dialed by pressing
a (9 button. All system speed dial numbers may be set with LCD memo for use
with all LCD phones.
Station Identification: A station’s number
is displayed on its LCD when the handset
is on-hook. A station’s number is also displayed on another station’s LCD when it is
calling that station.
Timed Reminders with Messages: This
feature enhances the timed reminder feature, which is available to all digital and
electronic telephones. Up to five separate
messages can be set at a number of LCD
telephones (see Note). The messages display at the programmed time and are
accompanied by a tone. Each message

Executive override is not blocked by the
m
button.

l

Fixed Call Forward: Station feature buttons can
be programmed to put the station in call forward mode (with one touch) to a fixed station,
e.g., receptionist’s station or a voice mail system. The destination is fixed in programming
and cannot be changed by the station user.
Handsfree
Answerback:
When a voiceannounced intercom call comes in, an electronic telephone user can answer without lifting the handset.
Hearing Aid Compatible:
All Toshiba telephones are hearing aid compatible.
Liquid Crystal Display Features: The following
features operate on all LCD model telephones:
l
Alphanumeric Messaging: System and
personal messages display on the 32character LCD. Up to 40 system messages
can be used by all LCD stations. In addition, a number of stations can program a
maximum of 10 personal messages (see
Note). Both letters and numbers are
allowed in the messages. The LCD messages are fully editable.
l
Busy Station Messagingt:
When
reaching a busy LCD station, a message can be sent to that station (a tone
will be heard). The busy station may
also return a message to the calling station’s LCD. The two stations may continue this procedure to carry on a “silent”
conversation.
l
Called Station Messaging: An LCD
message can be left for another LCD
station. When the other LCD user
answers the message indication, the
LCD displays any message that has
been left.
l
Calling Station Messaging: A message displayed on a called station’s LCD
automatically displays on a calling station’s LCD when the called station is
dialed.

t Requires Release 3 software.

-43-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
using privacy override (this allows a conference of up to three stations and one outside
w-04.

Repeat Last Number Dialed*: The last number
dialed by a station is stored in system memory,
- and may be redialed automatically b accessing a CO line and pressing the 1 or b= D button. See Saved Number Redial.

NOTES:
1. Privacy override can be blocked selectively to any station in system programming (this provides security for modem,
fax, and voice mail calls).
2. This feature allows a system to be totally private or non-private, or any combination, on a station-by-station basis via
system programming. If all stations are
allowed privacy override, the system is
non-private. If all stations are denied privacy override, the system is private.
Individual stations can be allo wed/denied privacy override in any combination.
3. DISA CO line calls cannot be overridden.

Ringing Line Preference: A station automatically answers whichever line is ringing when
there are a number of appearing lines. The
line can be answered by. iifting the handset or
by pressing the m
button. The ringing line
is automatically selected.
Saved Number Redial: A programmable m
button stores the number that was just dialed
for redialing at a later time. It may be used at
any time and is exclusive of repeat last number dialed.
Speed Dial Buttons: q buttons can be assigned to each station during programming.
Each q button on the station can store a preprogrammed telephone number (up to 20 digits, including pause and flash signals). When
the station user presses a programmed q
button, the station automatically dials the
stored number. See System Features, System
Speed Dial.

Private CO Lines: CO lines can be restricted to
appear only on selected stations.
Pushbutton Dialing: All Toshiba telephones are
equipped with pushbutton dialpads.

Station Speed Dial*: In addition to system
speed dial, each station can store a private list
of up to 40 telephone numbers, each up to 20
digits. Flashes and pauses may also be stored
in speed dial memory. Stored numbers, flashes, and pauses are dialed automatically by
pressing pre-programmed q buttons or by
dialing the code for the specific memory location.

Release Button: A release (m) button can be
programmed on digital and electronic telephones, allowing the user to disconnect from
an existing call without having to go on-hook
to press the hookswitch. This flexible button is
useful on stations that are equipped with
headsets.
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls*:
Calls placed on-hold or parked by a station
can be picked up by a different station with the
m
button or the access code. Calls on
exclusive hold may be picked up from a
remote station using this feature, although the
party picking up the call must know the call is
on-hold, since no LED indication of a holding
call is given to any station except the station
originating the exclusive hold. If more than one
CO line is on-hold. the lines can be selectivelv
retrieved by dialing b u plus the line number

Timed Reminder: Five separate reminders can
be set at any digital or electronic telephone,
even if it has no LCD. A reminder tone sounds
at the pre-set time. Each reminder may be set
to ring only once, or at the same time daily.
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision*: To
ensure confidentiality, only selected stations in
the system can change the codes for bypassing toll restriction. Stations are selected in programming.
See System Features, Toll
Restriction.

cm- q ,.

-45-

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990

‘rd.

.

LCD DISPLAY*

HANDSET

\

I LCD CONTROL
BUTTONS

SPEAKER

r

\
VOLUME
UP/DOWN
CONTROL
BUTTONS ’

/ FLASH
BUTTON

mmmmfi?
rmmm-m
mmmmm
mmmmm

MODULAR
CORD
\

FLEXIBLE
FEATURE
BUTTONS
MESSAGE WAITING
BUTTON AND LED
INDICATOR
-TRANSFER/
CONFERENCE
BUTTON
+ LAST
NUMBER
REDIAL
BUTTON

\
MICROPHONE
ON/OFF BUTTON
AND LED INDICATOR

’

J-l OLD
BUTTON

DIALPAD

SPEAKER ON/OFF
BUTTON AND LED
INDICATOR

*Available on LCD model only
FIGURE 19-DIGITAL TELEPHONEDIAGRAM

-46-

d

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
DIALPAD
\
HANDSET
\-

\

LCD DISPLAY*
\
\
\

Y

MODE BUTTON*

SPEAKER

II

II

MODULAR
CORD
FLEXIBLE
BUTTONS

CONF/TRNS

01

on

\

SPEAKER
ON/OFF BUTTON

MICROPHONE

MEMO TRAY

CONFERENCE/
TRANSFER
BUTTON

VOLUME
CONTROL

*Available on LCD model only
FIGURE PO-ELECTRONIC TELEPHONEDIAGRAM

-47I

STRATA DK
GENERALDESCRIPTION
DECEMBER1990
GLOSSARY

"BPS
CO
CODECs
CRCU

Bits per second-baud

OF ACRONYMS
IMDU

rate.

Central office.
Coder/decoder semiconductor.
DTMF receiver subassemblyoptional DTMF receiver upgrade for
the PCTU2/3 or PCTUS.

CRCU-4

4-circuit DTMF receiver subassembly.

CRCU-8

8-circuit DTMF receiver subassembly.

Remote mamtenance modem subassembly.

KSU

Key service unit.

LCD

Liquid crystal display.

LED

Light emitting
indication.

diode-busy

LSI

Large scale integration.

MDF

Main distribution frame.

MDFB

Door phone unit.

DISA

Direct inward system access.

OCA

Off-hook call announce.

DISC

Direct inward station calling.

PBX

Private branch exchange.

Digital key.

PCB

Printed circuit board.

Power failure transfer unit-emergency backup unit.

PCM

Pulse code modulation.

DK
DPFT
DSS
DDSSt
EOCU

FCC
HDCB

Direct station selection.
Digital direct station selection.
Off-hook call announce subassembly-optional PCB upgrade to PEKU
or PESU for OCA (not needed on
PDKU).
Federal Communication
sion.

HESB

External speaker unit-speaker
with built-in amplifier.

HHEU

A subassembly to upgrade an electronic telephone with a headset
and/or loud ringing bell.

HVSI

A subassembly to upgrade an electronic telephone with OCA.

HVSU

A subassembly to upgrade an electronic telephone with OCA.

t Requires

Release

PCOU

CO line unit-PCB option that provides the system with four CO lines.

PCTU

Common control unit-the system’s
controller PCB (there are three versions,
PCTU2,
PCTU3,
and
PCTUS).

PDKlJt

Digital telephone interface unit-station port PCB-supports digital telephones and digital interface units
(PDIU-Dls and PDIU-DSs). It can
also support a DDSS console.

PDIU-Dlt

Integrated
data
interface
unit-integrated into the base of a
digital telephone, it is used for
transmitting
and receiving data
between
terminals/personal
computers and devices connected to
other PDIU-Dls or to modems,
printers, and computers connected
to PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI also
provides personal computer access
to outside dial-up data services
and/or bulletin boards via modems.

Commis-

Door phone control unit-peripheral
to support door phone or door lock
option.
box

,

3 software.

-48-

lamp

4

STRATA DK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DECEMBER 1990
PDIU-DSt

PEKU

Stand-alone data interface unitused for modem pooling, printer
sharing, and access to a host/mainframe computer.

PIOU

E & M TIE line unit-supports
Type I E & M TIE lines.

PEPU

External page interface unit.

PESU

Combination standard/electronic
telephone interface unit-station port
PCB-supports
two standard telephones (or peripheral devices) and
four electronic telephones.

that sup-

PIOUS ‘Option interface-unitia
reduced
version of the PIOU PCB that supports peripheral options.

Electronic key telephone interface
unit-station
port PCB-supports
eight electronic telephones.

PEMU

Option interface unit-PCB
ports peripheral options.

PSTU

four

Standard telephone interface unitoptional PCB interface for eight standard phones (or peripheral devices).

RAM

Random access memory.

ROM

Read only memory.

-f Requires

-49-

Release

3 software.

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONESYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 200-096-201
FEBRUARY 1991

Strata@bzc
RELEASE

1,2, and 3

INSTALLATION
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter

One-Introduction
Two-System
Description
Three-Site
Requirements
Four-Configuration
Five-KSU
Installation
Six-Printed
Circuit Board Installation
Seven-Telephone
Installation
Eight-Peripheral
Installation
Nine-Wiring
Diagrams

Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section

200-096-201
200-096-202
200-096-203
200-096-204
200-096-205
200-096-206
200-096-207
200-096-208
200-096-209

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTlON
SECTION200-096-201
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1

2
3
3.10

3.20
3.30
3.40
3.50
3.60
4
4.10
5
5.00
5.10

SUBJECT
PURPOSE ...............................................................................................................
ORGANIZATION .....................................................................................................
REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION .........................................................................
Fault Finding Procedures ....................................................................................
General Description .............................................................................................
User Guides ........................................................................................................
System Record ....................................................................................................
Programming .......................................................................................................
Remote Maintenance and Administration ...........................................................
SYSTEM MNEMONICS/TERMS .............................................................................
Use of Notes, Important Notes, Cautions, and Warnings.. ..................................
INSPECTION, PACKAGING, and STORAGE ........................................................
Inspection ............................................................................................................
Packaging and Storage .......................................................................................

l-i

PAGE
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION200-096-201
FEBRUARY 1991
1 PURPOSE

Record, and program the system from the completed System Record Sheets. LCD responses
are included to provide clear guidance ‘for the
programmer.

1.00 The purpose

of this manual is to provide
detailed step-by-step instructions for installing and
programming
STRATA DK systems.

3.60 Remote Maintenance and Administration:
Programming
and maintenance
procedures
specially adapted for remote maintenance
and administration
terminal use. Detailed, step-by-step
instructions are provided, complete with the terminal responses.

1 .Ol This chapter provides an overview of manual
organization;
a list of reference documentation
that supports the installed system; a list of system
mnemonics;
and inspection, packaging and storage guidelines.

NOTE:
These procedures
also apply when using a
local ASCII terminal connected directly to the
DK system.

2 ORGANIZATION
2.00 This manual is organized in modular chapters for easy removal and replacement
of updated
materials. The chapters are as follows:
Chapter One
- Introduction
Chapter Two
- System Description
Chapter Three
- Installation Site Requirements
- System Configuration
Chapter Four
- KSU Cabinet Installation
Chapter Five
- PCB Installation
Chapter Six
Installation
Chapter Seven - Telephone
Chapter Eight
- Peripherals
Installation
System
Wiring
and Main DisChapter Nine
tribution Frame Arrangements

3 REFERENCE

4 SYSTEM MNEMONICS/TERMS
4.00 Mnemonics are used to identify the system’s
hardware, operation, and features. The following
alphabetical listing describes the mnemonics used
in this manual.

BPS: Bits Per Second-Unit

of measure that refers to the transmission
speed (baud rate) of
electronic signals. It is used when describing
modem operation.

DOCUMENTATION

3.00 The STRATA DK digital key systems are
supported
by the following complement
of reference documentation:

CO: Central Office-The
facility which houses
switching equipment
that provides telephone
service (CO lines, E & M TIE lines, Centrex
lines, etc.) for the immediate geographical
area.

3.10 Fault Finding Procedures: Hardware

CO Line: A term used to define the STRATA

bleshooting
in flowchart

and diagnostic
form.

information

3.20 General Description:
systems

troupresented

An overview

of the

step-by-step

guides

DK
hardware circuit that connects to the Central
Office network line pair. Each CO line and TIE
line circuit is assigned a CO line number in
system software.

and their features.

3.30 User Guides: Detailed
for system operation.

CODECs: Coder/Decoders-Semiconductors
allow the system to process analog-to-digital
and digital-to-analog
conversions.

3.40 System Record: A series of tables used to
record the system’s software
figuration programming.

features

CRCU-4:
An optional upgrade to the system’s
controller PCB (PCTU or PCTUSI)
that provides a 4-circuit DTMF receiver for system DISA
CO lines, E & M TIE lines, and standard telephones.

and con-

3.50 Programming:
structions

that

Detailed step-by-step
inon how to enter data in the System

I-1

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 200-096-201
FEBRUARY1991
HESB: External Speaker Box-A
speaker/amplifier that can be configured
with the system to
provide a variety of functions.
.

CRCU-8:
An optional upgrade to the system’s
controller PCB (PCTU or PCTUS) that provides
an 8-circuit DTMF receiver for system DISA CO
lines, E & M TIE lines, and standard telephones.

HESC-65:
A cable used to connect electronic
telephones
(HHEU) to the HESB for the loud
ringing-bell option.

DDSS (Release3):
Digital Direct Station Selection
Console-A
console to facilitate processing
a
heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS console
is usually associated with adedicated attendant’s
telephone.

I

HESC-65A (Release 3): A cable that connects an
HHEU-equipped
digital or electronic telephone
to an HESB for the loud ringing bell option.
I

DISA (Release
2 and higher):
Direct Inward
System Access-A
feature available for CO
lines that allows an outside party to access a
system’s internal stations or outgoing CO lines*
without going through an operator or automated
attendant. An optional security code may be set
to prevent unauthorized
access to outgoing CO
lines for through system calling.

HHEU: Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Jack Interface
Upgrade Unit-A
small PCB upgrade for use
inside a digital telephone or a 6500-series elec- I
tronic telephone that allows a speaker (HESB)
and/or a headset to be installed with the station.

HVSI: The second

of two subassemblies
that
comprise the upgrade assembly that equips an
electronic
telephone
with Off-hook
Call Announce capability.

DK: Digital Key.
DPFT: Power Failure/Emergency
Transfer
An optional backup unit that provides
gency service during power failures.

Unitemer-

HVSU: One of two subassemblies
that comprise
the upgrade assembly that equips an electronic
telephone with Off-hook Call Announce capability.

DSS: Direct Station Selection Console-A
console to facilitate processing
a heavy load of
incoming calls. The DSS console is always
associated
with a dedicated
attendant
electronic telephone station.

I

IMDU: Remote Maintenance
Modem Interface
Unit-A
subassembly
installed on a PIOU or
PIOUS PCB that allows the system to be connected with a remote maintenance/administration terminal.

DVSU (Release 3): A subassembly
that equips a
digital telephone
with off-hook call announce
capability.

KSU: Key Service Unit-The
with its common equipment.

EOCU: Off-hook Call Announce SubassemblyAn optional upgrade to the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PCB (PEKU) that provides
supportforstations
with off-hookcall
announce.

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display-The
tal and electronic telephones.

cabinet

display on digiI

LSI: Large Scale Integration-Related
to circuit
design technology.
STRATA DK printed circuit
boards use LSI circuit design.

HDCB: Door Phone Control Box-A
peripheral
hardware
unit that supports
optional
door
phones.
2 software

system’s

LED: Light Emitting Diode-The
indicators
located on printed circuit boards, digital telephones,
I
and electronic telephones.

FCC: Federal Communication
Commission-The
telecommunication
industry’s federal regulatory
agency. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or
approved.

*Release

..
,I:

MDF: Main Distribution Frame-The
usually located in a phone closet.

and higher

1-2

wiring frame

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION200-096-201
FEBRUARY1991
MDFB: Door Phone Box-A
speaker

peripheral

PDIU-DS (Release 3): Stand-alone

two-way

Unit-Used
for modem pooling,
and access to a host/mainframe

box option.

OCA: Off-hook

Data Interface
printer sharing,
computer.

Call Announce.

PDKU (Release 3): Digital Telephone

Interface
Unit-An
optional PCB that provides thesystem
with eight digital telephone circuits. In addition
to digital telephones,
the PDKU can support
data interface units (stand-alone and integrated)
and a digital DSS console.

PBX: Private

Branch Exchange-lndustry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch,
usually on-premises,
which serves an individual
company,
and is connected
to a public telephone exchange through the CO.

PCB: Printed Circuit Board.
PCM: Pulse Code

Modulation-A
widely
form of digital telephone switching.

PEKU: Electronic

Telephone
Interface Unit-An
optional PCB that provides the system with
eight electronic telephone circuits.

used

PEMU: E & M TIE Line Unit-An

optional PCB that
provides the system with support for four E & M
Type I TIE lines.

PCOU: CO Line Interface
that provides

Unit-An
optional PCB
the system with four CO lines.

PCOUP: The PCOU2 is a direct replacement

for
the PCOU. Their fit/form/function
is identical;
however, for manufacturing
reasons, the PCOU
was phased out in favor of the PCOU2.

PEPU: External Page Interface

Unit-An
optional
PCB (essentially a reduced model of the PIOU)
that provides support and/or circuit interface for
optional hardware
peripherals
and upgrades
associated with external paging functions.

PCTU 1, 2, or 3: Common

Control Unit-The
system’s controller PCB. It supports up to 14
universal slots, 96 station ports, and 36 CO
lines. The PCTUl supports Release 1 software;
the PCTU2 supports Release 2 software; and
the PCTU3 supports Release 3 software. All
three PCTU versions are compatible with all DK
systems-DK24,
DK56, and DK96.

PESU (Release 2 and higher): Standard/Electronic Interface PCB-An
optional PCB that provides the system with a combination
of two
standard and four electronic telephone circuits.
The standard telephone
circuits may also be
connected to optional hardware peripherals, such
as voice mail, auto attendant, and fax machines.

PCTUS: Common

PIOU: Option

Control Unit-The
controller
PCB for the DK24. It supports up to six universal
slots, 24 station ports and 16 CO lines. It also
supports Release 2 software. The PCTUS is
compatible with DK24 only.

Interface Unit-An
optional PCB
that provides support and/or circuit interface for
optional hardware peripherals and upgrades.

PIOUS: The same as the PIOU, with some exceptions; most notably, the PIOUS has one external
paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four.

PDIU-DI (Release 3): Integrated

Data Interface
Unit-Integrated
into the base of a digital telephone, it is used for transmitting
and receiving
data between terminals/personal
computers and
devices connected to other PDIU-Dls or to modems, printers, and computers
connected
to
PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI is also used to provide
personal computer
access to outside dial-up
data services and/or bulletin boards via modem
pooling.

NOTE:
Each system will support on/y one of the
following PCBs: PIOU, PlOUS or PEW.
Port: A term used to identify

a station circuit
location. Each station and TIE line hardware
circuit is assigned to a port number in system
software.

1-3

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 200-096-201
FEBRUARY1991
PPTC: A Toshiba-supplied

5 INSPECTION, PACKAGING,
and STORAGE
_

adapter that is used to
connect the modular SMDR and/or maintenance
ports of the PIOU or PIOUS to the DB-25 connector of a printer, terminal,
modem or call
accounting
machine.

5.00 Inspection
5.01 When the system

is received, examine all
packages carefully and note any visible damage.
If any damage is found, do not open the packages.
Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make
the proper claims.

PBTC: A Toshiba-supplied

cable used to connect
customer-supplied
batteries to any DK PPSU
power supply for emergency
reserve power.

PSTU: Standard

Telephone
Interface Unit-An
optional PCB with built-in ring generator that
provides interface for eight standard telephones
or optional hardware peripherals
(voice mail,
auto attendant,
fax machine, etc).

5.02 Check the system against the packing slip. If
it is determined that equipment is missing, contact
the delivery carrier and your supplier immediately.
5.03 After unpacking (and before installing), check
the system against the packing list and inspect all
equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or
damaged, contact your supplier immediately.

PSTUS: Standard Telephone

Interface Unit-Provides same function as the PSTU with the addition of a switch to select high or low ringing
generator voltage.

5.04 Be sure to retain original packaging
als for reuse when storing or transporting
hardware.

RAM: Random

Access Memory-Refers
to the
type of system memory that holds individual
system configuration
and feature programming.
RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily
revised in programming.

materisystem

5.10 Packaging and Storage
CAUTION!
When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back
(soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges.

ROM: Read Only Memory-Refers

to the type of
system memory that holds static software that
comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software
engineers.

5.11 When

packaging
and storing the system,
remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power
supply may remain installed in the cabinet for
storage and shipment).
Printed circuit boards
should be packaged in their original antistatic bags
for protection against electrostatic
discharge. Be
sure to package equipment in its original shipping
containers.

4.10 Use of Notes, Important Notes, Cautions,
and Warnings
4.11 Notes call attention to specific items to elaborate, or to refer the reader to other information.
4.12 Important Notes are used when the information is considered to be very important.
4.13 Cautions call attention to the possibility of
equipment
being damaged
if the instructions are
not followed closely.
4.14 Warnings
are used when the given tasks
involved could cause the possibility of personal
injury or death to the technician.

1-4

TOSHIBASYSTEMPRACTICES
DIGITALKEYTELEPHONESYSTEMS

RELEASE

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991

1,2, and 3

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER TWO
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTlON200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
1.10
2
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
3
3.10
3.20
3.30
4
4.10
4.20
5
6
6.10
7
8
8.00
8.10
8.20
8.30
8.40
9
10
11
11.00
11.10
11.20
11.30
11.40
11.50

SUBJECT

'PAGE

GENERAL ...............................................................................................................
System Description
.......... ...................................................................................
SYSTEM TECHNOLOGY
.......................................................................................
Custom Electronic Circuitry .................................................................................
Microprocessors
..................................................................................................
Stored Programming
...........................................................................................
Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM) ............................................................................
KEY SERVICE UNITS (KSU) ..................................................................................
DK24 KSU Interior ...............................................................................................
DK56 KSU Interior ...............................................................................................
DK96 KSU Interior ...............................................................................................
POWER SUPPLIES ................................................................................................
Reserve Power ....................................................................................................
Battery Charger ...................................................................................................
POWER FAILURE/EMERGENCY
TRANSFER
UNIT .............................................
* PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD DESCRIPTIONS
.......................................................
Printed Circuit Boards .........................................................................................
SYSTEM CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
.............................................................
PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT
...................................................................................
Electronic Telephones
.........................................................................................
Electronic Telephone
Upgrade Options ..............................................................
Direct Station Selection Console .........................................................................
Toshiba-supplied
Peripherals ..............................................................................
Customer-supplied
Peripherals ...........................................................................
RELEASE 3 INFORMATION
...................................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS (Release 3) .............................................................
PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT
(Release 3) ................................................................
Digital Telephones ...............................................................................................
Digital Telephone
Upgrade Options (Release 3) .................................................
Digital Direct Station Selection Console (Release 3) ..........................................
Stand-alone
Data Interface Unit: PDIU-DS (Release 3) ......................................
Toshiba-supplied
Peripherals (Release 3) ..........................................................
Customer-supplied
Peripherals ...........................................................................

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-21

TABLELIST
TABLE
2-A
2-B
2-c
2-D
2-E
2-F
2-F
2-G

TITLE

PAGE

TYPICAL RESERVE POWER FUNCTION
ESTIMATES..
......................................
COMMON CONTROL UNIT DATA .........................................................................
INTERFACE
PCB OPTIONS ..................................................................................
DK24 MODEL CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS..
...................................................
DK56 MODEL CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
.....................................................
DK96 MODEL CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS..
...................................................
DK96 MODEL CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
(continued) ......... . ............ . ............
PCB CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
....................................................................
*See Paragraph

2-i

2-5
2-10
2-11
2-14
2-I 5
2-16
2-17
2-17

9 for more information

I

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17

TITLE
DK24/56/96
KSUs ...............................................................................................
DK24 KSU INTERIOR .........................................................................................
DK56 KSU INTERIOR .........................................................................................
DK96 KSU INTERIOR .........................................................................................
DK24 POWER SUPPLY FRONT PANEL ...........................................................
DK56 POWER SUPPLY FRONT PANEL ...........................................................
DK96 POWER SUPPLY FRONT PANEL ...........................................................
POWER FAILURE TRANSFER
UNIT (DPFT) ....................................................
DPFT FUNCTIONAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM ............................................................
SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM.. .....................................................
SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM (continued). ...................................
LOCATION
OF DK24 CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
.....................................
LOCATION
OF DK56 CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
.....................................
LOCATION
OF DK96 CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
.....................................
LOCATION
OF PCB CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
.......................................
HVSU and HVSI ..................................................................................................
HHEU ..................................................................................................................
DOOR PHONE/LOCK
CONTROL
UNIT (HDCB) ...............................................

2-ii

I*
'PAGE
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-18
2-19

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
1 GENERAL

2 SYSTEM TECHNOLOGY

1.00 This chapter provides a discussion of the
technology
employed in the STRATA DK system
design, and a detailed description
of the system
hardware, including the basic equipment cabinet
(key service unit), PCB options, and system peripheral equipment.
A description
of system controls and indicators is also provided.

2.00 Custom Electronic Circuitry
2.01 STRATA DK system circuitry employs Large
Scale Integration technology
to increase system
efficiency while allowing a reduction in physical
size. Use of CMOS circuits, when applicable,
minimizes the system’s power requirements.

1.I 0 System Description
2.10 Microprocessors

1.I 1 A STRATA

DK system consists essentially
of a key service unit (KSU) cabinet (Figure 2-l)
which houses the power supply and a number of
PCBs. The quantity and type of PCBs, telephones,
and peripherals
installed depends on the user’s
requirements.
The primary differences
between
models are KSU sizes, PCB capacities, and power
supplies.

2.11 Main Microprocessor.

The systems employ a 16-bit, 68000-type microprocessor,
operating at a speed of 8 MHz, for stored program control.
The main microprocessor
is located on the Common Control Unit (PCTU or PCTUSI PCB).

2.12 Local Microprocessors. Local microprocessors are located on most PCBs and in electronic telephones.
The local microprocessors
in
the KSU are 8-bit, TMP90C840-type
microprocessors, which operate at a clock speed of 10 MHz.

1.12 Hardware for all three system types is identical, with the exception of the KSUs and power
supplies. Differences between models are identified, as applicable.

llllll
Illill
illill
lllll/

StrataDKB@

TOSHIBA

TOSHIBA

Strata

izmsm

lllllll~l’
~~lllll~~’

TOSHIBA

FIGURE Z-l--DK24/56/96

2-1

KSUs

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
DK96 Height: 18.6 in. (475 mm)

2.20 Stored Programming

Width: 19.6 in. (500 mm)
Depth: 9.0 in. (229 mm)
Weight: 55.1 Ibs (25 kg)

2.21 System Operating Software. System
erating software
only by Toshiba

opis stored in ROM, and is revised
software engineers.

3.10 DK24 KSU Interior
2.22 Configuration and Custom Programming.
3.11 The DK24 KSU interior has one shelf (Figure

Each system’s individual configuration
and custom programming
is stored in RAM. The contents
of system
RAM is user-developed
and -programmed
based on the system’s configuration
and the user’s requirements.
System RAM is protected by a lithium battery with a shelf life of
approximately
six years.

2-2) with seven available PCB slots, labeled PCTU
and SO1 w S06. Only the PCTU slot serves a
dedicated function.

2.30 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
2.31 PCM technology

allows fully non-blocking
intercom and outside line talk paths. Talk paths
operate through digital switching, as opposed to
analog crosspoints.
Analog-to-digital
and digitalto-analog conversion is accomplished
by CODEC
integrated circuits.

3 KEY SERVICE

UNITS (KSU)

3.01 The STRATA DK KSUs consist of single,
free-standing
cabinets that can be configured for
either wall or table-top mounting. One-inch rubber
feet on the base of the cabinet ensure that proper
clearance is maintained when the KSU is table-top
mounted. The KSU interior houses the PCBshelves
and the power supply.

FIGURE 2-2-DK24 KSU INTERIOR
3.12 Each PCB slot (SO1 N S06) incorporates
a
standard 40-pin female connector located in the
same vertical position on the KSU’s backplane.
This standardization
enables any of the optional
PCBs to be installed in any slot. The PCTU slot
incorporates
the same 40-pin female connector,
but it is set 0.25-inch higher, so that only a PCTU
or PCTUSl
PCB may be installed in the slot.

3.02 External
dimensions
and approximate
weights for the DK24, DK56, and DK96 models are
listed below. Weights are based on cabinets containing a full complement
of PCBs.

3.13 The power supply
is factory-installed,
mounted vertically into the right side of the PCB
shelf, and is secured with two combination slotted/
Phillips mounting screws at the right side of the
cabinet.

DK24 Height: 10.6 in. (269 mm)
Width: 16.0 in. (406 mm)
Depth: 9.0 in. (229 mm)
Weight: 19.4 Ibs (9 kg)

DK56 Height: 15.0 in. (381 mm)

3.20 DK56 KSU interior

Width: 16.0 in. (406 mm)
Depth: 9.0 in. (229 mm)
Weight: 37.5 Ibs (17 kg)

3.21 The DK56 KSU interior also has just one
shelf (Figure 2-3), but with nine available PCB

2-2

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991

.

FlGURE2-3-DK56

KSUINTERIOR

FIGURE Z-4-DK96

KSU INTERIOR

2-3

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
slots. These slots are labeled PCTU and SO1 w
S08; only the PCTU slot serves a dedicated function.

PCTU slot incorporates
the same 40-pin female
connector,
but it is set 0.25-inch higher, so that
only a PCTU PCB may be installed in the slot.

3.22 Each PCB slot (SO1 N S08) incorporates
a
standard 40-pin female connector located in the
same vertical position on the KSU’s backplane.
This standardization
enables any of the optional
PCBs to be installed in any slot. The PCTU slot
incorporates
the same 40-pin female connector,
but it is set 0.25-inch higher, so that only a PCTU
PCB may be installed in the slot.

3.33 The power supply
is factory-installed,
mounted vertically (to the right of the two PCB
shelves), and is secured with four combination
slotted/Phillips
mounting screws.

4 POWER SUPPLIES
4.00 STRATA DK systems
incorporate
singlechassis, switching-type
power supplies. The power
supplies for the three models are functionally identical (except for power capacity), although they
differ in appearance
due to cabinet sizes and
mounting considerations.
The DK24 model uses a
PPSU24 power supply (Figure 2-5), DK56 uses a
PPSU56 (Figure 2-6), and DK96 uses a PPSU96
(Figure 2-7).

3.23 The power
supply
is factory-installed,
mounted horizontally above the PCB shelf, and is
secured with four combination
slotted/Phillips
mounting screws.
3.30

DK96 KSU Interior

3.31 The cabinet interior has two shelves (Figure
2-4). The top shelf has eight available PCB slots
labeled SO1 N S08. The bottom shelf has seven
available PCB slots labeled PCTU and SO9 N S14.
Only the PCTU slot serves a dedicated function.

4.01 The power supplies generate *5VDC and
-24VDC output voltages (that are protected
by
mechanical circuit breakers located on the power
supply front panel). Input voltage is provided by a
standard 117VAC, 15 amp circuit. Electrical characteristics include:
l
Primary Power
l
Input AC: 85VAC w 135VAC
l
AC Frequency: 50/60 Hz
l
Wattage: DK24/65, DK56/140,
DK96/230

3.32 Each PCB slot (SO1 w S14) incorporates
a
standard 40-pin female connector located in the
same vertical position on the KSU’s backplane.
This standardization
enables any of the optional
PCBs to be installed in any available slot. The

POWER SWITCH

PPSU 24
080

@I

LG-24”,-24”z
FGOOd

VOLTAGE LEDs

@ CIRCUIT
I BREAKERS

\ AC INPUT

BATTERY
CONN---^I iSGQ3 l-l

CIRCUIT
BREAKERS

FIGURE 2-5-DK24 POWER SUPPLY
FRONT PANEL

BATTERY
CONNECTOR

FIGURE 2-6-DK56 POWER SUPPLY
FRONT PANEL

2-4

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
l

l

DC Voltage Output Specifications
. -24VDC; -26.3 w -27.8
. &/DC;
+4.5 w +5.5
. -5VDC; -4.5 N -5.5
Circuit Breakers
l
24; -24V
l
56; -24V
l
96; -24V, +5V

VOLTAGE
LEDs
/

CIRCUIT
BREAKERS <

Reserve Power

4.10

BATTERY
CONNECTOR

4.11 Twocustomer-supplied,

12-volt batteries (80
ampere hours maximum)
can be connected
in
series to the system as a power failure backup. In
the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches over to battery power without any
interruption
to existing calls or other normal system functions. The length of time reserve power
operates depends on the system, size and number
of batteries provided, and the system load. Typical
reserve power duration estimates are provided in
Table 2-A.
4.12 AToshiba-supplied,
number PBTC, supports
lation.

\

AC INPUT
RECEPTACLE

g-foot battery cable, part
the reserve battery instal-

POWER
SWITCH

’

FlGURE2-7-OK96 POWERSUPPLY
FRONTPANEL

TABLE2-A
TYPICALRESERVEPOWERFUNCTIONESTIMATES
Quantities of PCBs
Installed (Including PCTU)

234567

8

9

IO

11

12

13

14

15

Estimated Operation
Time (Hours)

71

45

31

23

19

16

13.5

11.5

10

9

8

7

6

5

Approximate
Current
Drain (DC(-24V)
Amperes)

1

1.7

2.4

3.1

3.8

4.5

5.2

6

6.6

7.3

8

8.7

9.4

10

Time is estimated
(I)

with the following

considerations:

Batteries

have full charge at start of operation.
(2 ea.) are connected in series.
(3) Batteries are 12 VDC, rated at 80 amp/hours each.
(4) System is operating at full load traffic with LCD-type telephones.
(5) Batteries used for this test are gel-cell, maintenance-free
batteries. Reserve duration will vary
depending
on battery type and manufacturer.
These figures should only be used as an estimate.
(2) Batteries

2-5

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
IMPORTANT NOTES:
1. Local ordinances may dictate battery
type and installation details.
2. The reserve power batteries must be
installed while commercial AC power
is applied to the system to allow the
power supply reserve relay to operate.
If batteries are connected after AC
power is lost, the batteries WILL NOT
power the system and the system W/L L
NOT operate.

permitting
service.

5.02 The DPFT consists of eight normally open
relays, connecting the telephones to PSTU (Standard Telephone
Interface Unit) PCB circuits and
the CO lines to PCOU (CO Line Unit) PCB circuits
(Figure 2-9). If a power failure occurs, the relays
close, connecting
the telephones
directly to the
CO lines. Calls can then be placed from the selected standard telephones,
over the CO lines,
completely bypassing the system.

during
a power failure, the power supply has a built-in,
current limiting battery charger that maintains customer-supplied
batteries.
Electrical characteristics of the battery charger include:
l
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
l
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
l
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 *O.!?V

5.03 When the DPFT is reset after a transfer,
existing PFT conversations
are protected. Individual circuits are restored only when they become
idle.

5 POWER FAILURE/EMERGENCY
TRANSFER UNIT

6 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
DESCRIPTIONS

5.00 The Power Failure/EmergencyTransfer
Unit
(DPFT) provides an optional means of ensuring
uninterrupted
telephone operation in the event of
a power failure. The DPFT (Figure 2-8) automatically connects selected CO lines to standard telephone lines in the event of a power failure, while

FAILURE

is in

module that
mounts externally to the system’s KSU, typically
near the MDF. Connections
to the CO lines, standard telephones
and the cabinet are made with
two50-pinamphenol-typeconnectorson
theDPFT.

4.21 To allow full normal system operation

POWER

when the system

5.01 The DPFT is a self-contained

4.20 Battery Charger

CO LINE

normal operation

6.00 Twelve types of PCBs are available for use in
STRATA DK systems. A maximum of seven PCBs
can be installed in DK24, nine in DK56, and fifteen
in DK96.
6.01 With the exception of the PCTU and PCTUSl
PCBs, PCB size and connector
provisions
are
standardized.
All PCBs, including
the PCTU/
PCTUSl,
measure 7.5 x 5.5 in (190 x 140 mm).
The PCBs connect to the KSU’s backplane with
identical 40-pin male connectors.
Except for the
PCTU/PCTUSl
PCBs, the connectors
are positioned in the same location on each board type.

TEL LINE

6.02 PCB external connections
are made to the
Main Distribution Frame (MDF) using the following
industry-standard
connectors:
l
25-pair Amphenol Female: Twenty-five-pair
amphenol
connectors
connect electronic telephones, standard telephones
and most peripherals.
I
l
Modular: Modular jacks connect CO lines, E &
M TIE lines, the Station Message Detail Re-

TRANSFER

FIGURE 2-8-POWER FAILURE
TRANSFER UNIT (DPFT)

2-6

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
DPFT

T

T

I I

I

CO LINE

PCOU

R

I

R
I
I

I
I

oT
PSTU

STANDARD
TELEPHONE
R

-24 VDC
INDICATING
AC POWER ON

NOTES:
1. One of eight DPFT circuits.
2. Conditions of AC power on.

FlGURE2-9-DPFTFUNCTIONALBLOCKDIAGRAM

l

cording port (RS-232 signaling),
and the Remote Administration
and Maintenance
port (RS232 signaling).
Terminals: Screwterminalsconnect
MOH/BGM
to the PCTU or PCTUSI , and spring-clip terminals connect peripherals to the PIOUS.

system tones. The PCTU also has a music-onhold/background
music source interface, and
connectors
to mount an optional DTMF receiver PCB (CRCU) for DISA, TIE lines, standard telephones and peripherals. See Table 2B for more PCTU details.

6.10 Printed Circuit Boards

PCTUSl (Common Control Unit): The PCTUSI
is a reduced version of the PCTU. It is equipped
with STRATA DK Release 2 software features,
but it supports fewer universal slots, stations
and CO lines than the PCTU. The PCTUSI is
intended for use with the DK24 only.

6.11 The following paragraphs
provide functional
descriptions,
along with applicable
configuration
and connection
details, for all PCBs available for
installation in STRATA DK systems. Refer to Figure 2-10 for a pictorial overview of each PCB’s
peripheral connections.

NOTE:
See Table 2-B for a comparison
PCTUSI PCBs.

PCTU (Common Control Unit): The PCTU is a
system controller PCB. PCTUl is equipped with
Release 1 software and PCTU2 with Release 2
software. The PCTU must be installed in DK56
and DK96, and is optional for DK24. The PCTU
contains the system’s main microprocessor
and
microprocessor
bus, battery-protected
memory
circuits, time switch logic, conference
logic, and

of PCTU and

CRCU (DTMF Receiver Subassembly):

The
CRCU is an optional DTMF receiver PCB which
mounts on the PCTU or PCTUSI
piggy-back
style. It translates DTMF signals from Direct
Inward Station Access (DISA) CO lines, TIE
lines, standard telephones,
or peripheral de-

2-7

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTlON200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
DKSU 24/56/96

r

PCOU

LOOP START

LINES

-

* FIC: 02LS2
. USOC: RJ14C
. REN: 0.28

2-PAIR
MOD CORD

-

LINE
3AND4
*
I
7
LINE
1 AND2

-

2-PAIR
MODCORD

H

MODULAR
’ BLOCKS

CENTRAL OFFICE/
CENTREX/PBX
E&M TIE LINES

c

. FIC:
2-W; TLI 1 M
4-W; TL31 M

‘Z-PAIR
MODULAR
JACK

*

1
7

’

PEMU

,’

-

-

-

H

-

H

-

H

E&M
TIE-LINE
PCB
2 OR 4 WIRE

* usoc:
2-W; RJ2EX
4-W; RJ2GX

LOOP START
LINE PCB
(4 CIRCUITS)

%PAIR
MODULAR
JACK

. REN:
N/A

I

FRAMZ
AMPLIFIED

il

PAGE OUTPUT

(3 WATTS)

MUSIC SOURCE: EXTERNALZONE
BACKGROUND
MUSIC

PAGE

~

2-

-

RELAY

PAIR

PCTU
PCB

ZONE

PAGE RELAYS

(SEE TABLE B

CRCU
(OPTIONAL)

MOHlBGM

ALARM RELAY SENSOR

EXTERNAL

I

MAIN
CONTROL

TWISTED

RELAY)

r

25.PAIR AMPHENOL
(PIOUIPEPU)
OR
SPRING TERMINAL STRIP
(PIOUS)
)

3-PAIR /
MODLUAR
CORDS

I
D

DOOR LOCK OR BGM MUTE CONTROL

NIGHT BELL OR MOH (CONTROL

-

-

DTMF
RECEIVER
(4OR8
CIRCUITS)

(4 ZONES)

~

MUSIC SOURCE:
MUSIC-ON-HOLD

BACKGROUND

AND/OR

TWISTED

I
PAIR
1

\

\
MOHIBGM
VOLUME
CONTROL

FlGURE2-lo-SYSTEM FUNCTIONALBLOCKDIAGRAM

2-8

:

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991

MDF

-I
I

PEKU
or
PESU

(6 EKT CIRCUITS)
(4 EKT CIRCUITS)

BGM SOURCE
TO STATIONS

ANALOG
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
STATION PCB

5,

EOCU
5

PHONES

25-PAIR
AMPHENOL
(FEMALE)

t-

AND

CK CONTROLS

(OPTIONAL
r7r.D cnn nrn\

-

I

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC
DIU STATION PCB

I

$41

I!
1 -24Fa4

(NOTEI)

,

POWER FAILURE
TRANSFER UNIT

TELEPHONE/

DIGITAL

24 VDC
PCB

I

CHARGER

ro

1 BATT

-

AC INPUT-

+

I
e

+-~------------I
cxm

-

12 VOLT
BAmERY

117VAC
(15AMP)
50160 HZ

PBTC CABLE

I
+

1

,

I
CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED
BAmERIES

NOTES:
1. Can be on-premises or off-premises
(OPS: FC = OL 13A; USOC = RJ2X)
2. All external devices connected to the PCTU,
PEW, PIOU, PSTU, PEMU, and PCOU must
be industry-standard and supplied by the
customer. All devices connected to the
PDKU and PEKU are Toshiba proprietary.
3. Requires Release 3.

FlGURE2-IO-SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DlAGRAM(continued)

2-9

CONSOLE3

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE2-B
COMMONCONTROLUNITDATA

I
I
I

NOTES:
1. PCTU2 replaces PCTUl.
2. Except for the ROM version, PCTU2 and PCTUl are identical.
3. PCTU (1, 2, or 3) ROM is not interchangeable
with PCTUSl ROM.
4. All PCTU versions provide MOHIBGM input and volume control.
5. PCTU3 ROM is not interchangeable
with PCTUl or 2 ROM.

vices into data signals for the system. The
CRCU option must be installed for the system to
receive DTMF dialing. Both 4-circuit (CRCU-4)
and 8-circuit (CRCU-8) units are available, depending on system traffic. The DTMF receivers
are shared by users; they are seized for dialing,
then released for the next call.

with a combination
of two standard and four
electronic telephone circuits. The standard telephone circuits may also be connected
to optional hardware peripherals such as voice mail,
auto attendant
and fax machines. The PESU
has a ring generator for the standard telephone
circuits which can be set for high- or low-ring
voltage. PESU electronic telephone circuits can
be configured
for off-hook call announce
by
installing an optional off-hook call announce
upgrade
unit (EOCU).
The PESU supports
HDCB and door phone/locks,
but not DSS consoles or music-on-hold
separation.

PIOU (Option Interface Unit): The PIOU provides a
circuit interface with peripheral options as shown in
Table 2-C.

PIOUS (Option Interface Unit): A reduced version of
the PIOU, the PIOUS provides a circuit interface with
peripheral options as shown in Table 2-C.

PCOU (CO Line Unit): The PCOU provides

the
system with four loop-start
CO lines and a
standard, built-in automatic busy redial (ABR)
circuit. Each CO line can be programmed
for
either rotary or dial pulse. In addition, each CO
line has a 3 dB pad option switch to control
excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to the PBX or central office. Each CO line
circuit provides
built-in gas tubes for limited
protection from lightning.

IMDU (Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly): The IMDU is an optional built-in modem
which provides the system with a link to off-site
programming
and maintenance equipment, such
as a personal computer or ASCII terminal. The
IMDU has an internal maintenance
channel and
does not require a dedicated CO line or station
port. Data transmission speed can be set at 300
or 1200 BPS full duplex.

PCOU2 (CO Line Unit): The PCOU2 is a direct
replacement
for the PCOU. Their fit, form, and
function are identical; however, for manufacturing reasons, the PCOU was phased out in favor
of the PCOU2.
.
PEMU (E & M TIE Line Unit): The PEMU provides
four E & M Type I signaling (2- or 4-wire, imme-

PEPU (External Page Interface Unit): A reduced versionofthePIOU,thePEPUprovidesacircuitinterface
with peripheral options as shown in Table 2-C.

PESU (Standard/ElectronicTelephone Interface
Unit): This optional PCB provides the system

2-10

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE24
INTERFACEPCBOPTIONS

RS-232 SMDR
Output Jack

X, M

X, M

RS-232 Maintenance
Jack
for a Local ASCII Terminal
or External Modem

X, M

X, M

K p

x, p

Remote Maintenance
Modem (IMDU)
A = Amphenol Connector
M = 6-pair Modular Connector

P = Piggy-back PCB
T = Terminal Connector

shared

diate start) TIE lines. Each PEMU reduces the
system capacity by four CO lines and four station ports in DK56 and DK96, and by four CO
lines and eight station ports in DK24.

X = Option

equipped

by all circuits on a PEKU or PESU.

PSTU (Standard Telephone Interface Unit): The
PSTU provides an interface between standard
telephones
and the system. It adds eight standard telephone
ports, and has a 20H2, 19OV
peak-to-peak
square wave ring generator (no
load). In addition, the PSTU provides support for
numerous
Toshiba-supplied
and customersupplied peripherals,
including:
l
Toshiba-supplied
(optional):
l
INTOUCH Digital Voice Messaging System
l
Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT)
l
Customer-supplied
(optional):
l Auto Attendant
device
l Dictation
Equipment
l
Facsimile
.
l
Modem
l
Voice Mail Device

PEKU (Electronic Telephone Interface Unit): The
PEKU provides eight ports for electronic telephones.
It can be configured for off-hook call announce by
installing an optional off-hookcall announce upgrade
unit (EOCU). It can also be configured to support a
DSS console, door phone control unit (HDCB), and/
or BGM source interface.

EOCU (Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade Unit):
The EOCU is an optional off-hookcall
announce
upgrade unit which mounts on top of the PEKU
or PESU piggy-backstyle.
It is required on every
PEKU or PESU that supports stations receiving
off-hook call announce.
The unit provides two
off-hook call announce
channels,
which are

2-11

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
NOTE:
As of November 1989, the PSTU is equipped
with a jumperplug
to change the ring generator no load output from 79OV peak-to-peak
square wave (high) to 130V peak-to-peak
square wave (low). The low setting is used
with peripherals that are sensitive to high-ring
voltage (almost all peripherals
function with
high-ring voltage).

7 SYSTEM CONTROLS

AND INDICATORS

7.00 System controls and indicators are located
inside the KSU. Controls and indicators may be
accessed
only by removing the cabinet’s front
cover. Controls and indicators are located on the
power supply, KSU chassis, and on various PCBs.

FIGURE 2-13-LOCATION OF DK96 CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
7.01 Controls and indicators for the DK24 model
are shown in Figure 2-11 and described in Table 2D; for DK56, see Figure 2-12 and Table 2-E, and
for DK96, see Figure 2-13 and Table 2-F. PCB
controls and indicators are shown in Figure 2-14
and described in Table 2-G.

FIGURE 2-ll-LOCATION OF DK24 CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS

8 PERIPHERAL

EQUIPMENT

8.00 Electronic Telephones
8.01 Four 6500-series
electronic telephones
are
compatible with the STRATA DK systems. They
are the 6510 (two versions), the 6520, and the
6520SD. See the Genera/ Description for a more
complete description of these phones.

8

9

NOTE:
All electronic telephones compatible with the
analog STRA TA/STRA TAe key telephone
systems are also compatible withlhe STRATA
DK systems and vice versa. However, some
features or volume levels may vary.

10

FIGURE 2-12-LOCATION OF DK56 CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS

2-12

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
LINE
NUMBER

II

\

VRl:
3-WATT

BAUD

1 “HtARTBEAT”
LED
(PCTUI,
2,3
ONLY)

LINE

P
LINE
NUMBER

VRl
MOHIBGM
VOLUME
CONTROL

PI&
50-PIN
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR

PIOU

CONNECTOR

PIOUS

PEPU

PCTU 1,2,&3
PCTUS

PCOU
(17 2)

PEMU

FlGURE2-14-LOCATIONOFPCBCONTROLSANDlNDlCATORS
8.10 Electronic Telephone Upgrade Options

installing an OCA upgrade assembly. The assembly consists of two PCBs, the HVSU and the
HVSI (Figure 2-15), which install inside the
telephone base with plug-in connectors.

8.11 All electronic

telephones
may be upgraded
with off-hook call announce,
loud ringing bell and
headset capability. Any electronic telephone may
use all available upgrade options simultaneously.
All electronic telephones
may be wall mounted
without additional equipment. They are also hearing aid-compatible.

NOTE:
Only those telephones
programmed
to receive OCA announcements
require the OCA
upgrade.

8.12 Each electronic telephone
also features a
standard modular handset cord, and is connected
to the system with a 2-pair modular line cord (7-foot
cord included). Various upgrade options, such as
the off-hook call announce
and loud ringing bell
upgrade assemblies,
require the telephone to be
connected to the system with special wiring. A 3pair modular line cord is required for off-hook call
announce,
and a custom external speaker cable
(HESC-65) is required for the loud ringing bell.

HVSU and HVSI (Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade): Each electronic telephone may be upgraded to receive
back calls when

intercom handsfree answerthe handset is off-hook by

FlGURE2-15-hVSUandHVSl

2-13

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991

TABLE2-D
DK24MODELCONTROLSANDlNDlCATORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR
Item No.)
Figure 2-11
POWER

Switch

AC Power Cord

TYPEOFCOMPONENT

(I)

Two-position

(2)

10 3-prong

DESCRIPTION
Power switch for application of AC
input power from wall socket to KSU
power supply

rocker switch

plug with power cord

Cord for application of AC
power from wall outlet

LG/FG Connector

(3)

2-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for LG/FG ground
strap (ground strap must remain
installed in LG/FG connector for all
system applications)

SG/FG Terminal
Block

(4)

Two-terminal
screw-type
terminal block

Terminal connections for SG/FG
ground strap (ground strap must
remain installed on SG/FG terminal
block for all system applications)

BATT +/- Connector

(5)

2-pin keyed male connector

Interface
batteries

-G Terminal

(not shown)

Combination

slotted/Phillips

screw

connector

KSU frame ground

for reserve

power

terminal

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots SO1
and S02, SO3

(g)

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots S04,
S05, and SO6

(11)

Green LED

Lights to indicate power switch is set
to ON (AC input power is applied to
power supply)

+5V Indicator

(12)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence
output from power supply

of +5VDC

-5V Indicator

(13)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence
output from power supply

of -5VDC

-24V Indicator

(14)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence
output from power supply

of -24V

-24VI Circuit
Breaker
-24V2 Circuit
Breaker

POWER

Indicator

63)

2-14

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991

TABLE2-E
DK56MODELCONTROLSANDlNDlCATORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR
Item No.)
Figure2-12

TYPEOF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION
Power switch for application of AC
input power from wall socket to KSU
power supply

Switch

(1)

Two-position

AC IN Connector

(2)

3-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for application
AC power from wall outlet

ON/OFF

rocker switch

of

LG/FG Connector

(3)

2-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for LG/FG ground
strap (ground strap must remain
installed in LG/FG connector for all
system applications)

SG/FG Terminal
Block

(4)

Two-terminal
screw-type
terminal block

Terminal connections for SG/FG
ground strap (ground strap must
remain installed on SG/FG terminal
block for all system applications)

BATT +/- Connector

(5)

2-pin keyed male connector

Interface
batteries

-G Terminal

(not shown)

DC OUT Connector

-24V1 Circuit
Breaker
-24V2 Circuit
Breaker

(7)

(8)

(9)

Combination

slotted/Phillips

screw

connector

for reserve

power

KSU frame ground terminal

7-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for application of
power supply +5VDC and -24VDC
outputs to KSU’s backplane

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots SO1
and SO2

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots S03, S04,
and SO5

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots S06, S07,
and SO8

-24V3 Circuit
Breaker

(10)

POWER

(11)

Green LED

Lights to indicate ON/OFF switch is sei
to ON (AC input power is applied to
power supply)

t5V Indicator

(12)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence
output from power supply

of +5VDC

-5V Indicator

(13)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence
output from power supply

of -5VDC

Indicator

2-15

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE2-F
DK96MODELCONTROLSANDlNDlCATORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR
Figure2-13
Item No.)

TYPEOFCOMPONENT

DESCRIPTION
Power switch for application of AC
input power from wall socket to KSU
power supply

Switch

(1)

Two-position

AC IN Connector

(2)

3-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for application
AC power from wall outlet

(3)

2-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for LG/FG ground
strap (ground strap must remain
installed in LG/FG connector for all
system applications)

SG/FG Terminal
Block

(4)

Two-terminal
screw-type
terminal block

Terminal connections for SG/FG
ground strap (ground strap must
remain installed on SG/FG terminal
block for all system applications)

BATT +/- Connector

(5)

2-pin keyed male connector

Interface
batteries

3N/OFF

LG/FG Connector

FG Terminal

(not shown)

DC OUT Connector

-24Vl Circuit
Breaker
-24v2

CirCUit

Breaker
-24v3

ChIXit

Breaker
-24v4

CitYNit

Breaker
-24&i

CirCUit

Breaker

POWER

Indicator

+5Vl Indicator

Combination

rocker switch

slotted/Phillips

screw

connector

KSU frame ground

for reserve

of

power

terminal

7-pin keyed male connector

Interface connector for application of
power supply +5VDC and -24VDC
outputs to KSU’s backplane

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots SO1
and SO2

(9)

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots S03, S04,
and SO5

(, o)

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots S06, S07,
and SO8

(, , )

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots SO9, Sl 0,
and Sl 1

(, 2)

Push-to-reset

circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply
-24VDC output to PCB slots S12, S13,
and S14

(13)

Green LED

Lights to indicate ON/OFF switch is se
to ON (AC input power is applied to
power supply)

(14)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence of +5VDC
output from power supply (for KSU’s
upper PCB shelf backplane)

(7)

(8)

,’

2-16

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE2-F
DK96MODELCONTROLSANDlNDlCATORS(continued)
CONTROL/lNOlCATOR
Item No.)
(Figure 2-13

TYPEOF COMPONENT

.

DESCRIPTION

+5V2 Indicator

(15)

Green LED

-5V Indicator

(16)

Green LED

Lights to indicate presence of +5VDC
output from power supply (for KSU’s
lower PCB shelf backplane)
Lights to indicate presence of -5VDC
output from power supply

Push-to-reset circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply +5VDC
output to KSU’s upper PCB shelf

Push-to-reset circuit breaker

Circuit breaker for power supply +5VDC
output to KSU’s lower PCB shelf

+5V1 Circuit
Breaker

(17)

-45V2Circuit
Breaker

(18)

TABLE2-G
PCBCONTROLSANDINDICATORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR
(Figure 2-14)

TYPEOFCOMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

Two-position, spring-loaded,
locking push-button switch

Selects baud rate for TTY or modem;
300 baud is selected when switch is in
locked position, 1200 baud is selected
when switch is in released position

PIOU/PIOUS Baud Rate
Indicator (CD4)

Red LED

Lights when 300 baud rate is selected,
by Baud Rate Selector (5); goes off when
1200 baud rate is selected

PIOU Page Background
Music Volume Control

Trim potentiometer (VRI)

Adjusts volume of 3-watt amplifier
for page background music feature

PEMU E & M TIE Line
Indicators

Four red LEDs

Light to indicate the applicable E & M TIE
line is in operation

PIOU/PIOUS Baud Rate
Selector (SW2)

Flashes to indicate operation
(l/4 second on-l/4 second off)

PCTU “Heartbeat”
Red LED
Indicator (CD3)
PCTU/PCTUSI Music-onHold/Background Music
Trim potentiometer
Volume Control (VRI)
PCOU/PCOU2 CO Line
Indicators

Adjusts volume for music-on-hold/
background music feature
Lights to indicate the applicable CO line
is in operation (NOTE: CO line indicators
will not light unless PCOU is connected
to a CO line)

Four red LEDs

2-17

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY1991
HHEU (Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade):
Each electronic telephone may also be upgraded
to provide a loud ringing bell interface and a
modular headset jack by installing a loud ringing
bell/headset
upgrade assembly (Figure 2-l 6).
The assembly consists of a small PCB (HHEU)
which installs on the main PCB, inside the telephone, with a plug-in connector (HESC-65).
l
An external speaker/amplifier
is directly connected to the upgraded
phone. When the
phone rings, the speaker sounds a loud tone
that mimics the phone’s ring. See the HESB
(external speaker) option.
l
Most standard headsets are compatible with
the HHEU jack.
NOTE:
It is recommended
feature when using
cause all voice paths
electronic telephone
call.

FlGURE2-16-HHEU
face PCB (PEKU). Only one DSS console may be
installed on a particular PEKU. DSS consoles can
not be installed on PESU electronic telephone
circuits 7 and 8.

not to equip the OCA
an HHEU feature beare switched over the
speaker during an OCA

8.30 Toshiba-supplied

8.20 Direct Station Selection Console

8.31 This section describes
manufactured
by Toshiba for
DK systems. Configuration
siderations are noted where

8.21 The Direct Station Selection (DSS) console
is an optional dedicated
answering station. It is
normally used on systems with a heavy volume of
incoming calls. However, a DSS console may be
used with one of four designated
electronic telephones. Both DK56 and DK96 models can support
up to four DSS consoles. DK24 can also support
up to four DSS consoles, if its controller PCB is the
PCTU; however, a DK24 with a PCTUSI PCB can
only support up to three DSS consoles. For more
information
on DSS console features,
see the
General Description.

each peripheral item
use with the STRATA
and connection
conapplicable.

8.32 Door Phone. Up to 12 door phones

may be
installed on any STRATA DK system. Five of the
door phones may be associated with the door lock.
When used in this manner, the door phone is
mounted outside a building, next to a locked door
whose entry requires screening. A door phone can
also function as a sound monitor-any
electronic
telephone can call the door phone’s station number and listen to sounds within its immediate area.
Up to three door phones or two door phones and
one door lock can be connected to each HDCB
door phone control unit (Figure 2-17). See the
General Description for more details.

8.22 A DSS console must be assigned to a particular station when the system configuration
is
defined in programming.
All four DSS consoles
can be assigned to asingle station, orfourdifferent
DSS consoles may be assigned to four different
stations (or any intermediate
combination).
The
same DSS console may not be assigned to more
than one station.
8.23 Each DSS console requires
(circuits 7 and 8) on an electronic

Peripherals

8.33 Door Lock Control. The door lock control
allows a user to momentarily
(three or six seconds)
open an electronic door lock bv pressing a button
(m)
on an electronic telephone.
NOTE:
I
One door lock control is supported by any of
the Option Interface PCBs (PIOU, or PIOUS,

two station ports
telephone
Inter-

2-18

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
8.40 Customer-supplied

Peripherals
.

8.41 The STRATA DK systems support many
other commonly
used peripheral devices which
can be supplied by the customer.
Examples of
these devices are listed below, with theconnecting
system PCB noted in parentheses:
l
Auto-attendant
Device (PSTU and PESU)
l
Dictation Equipment (PSTU and PESU)
l
External Maintenance
Modem (PIOU or PIOUS)
l
Facsimile (PSTU and PESU)
l
Local Maintenance
Terminal (PIOU or PIOUS)
l
Modem (PSTU and PESU)
l
Paging System (PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU)
l
Radio Paging Equipment (PSTU and PESU)
l
Remote Maintenance
Terminal (PIOU or IMDU)
l
Standard Telephones
(PSTU and PESU)
l
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device (PIOU or
PIOUS)
l
Voice Mail Messaging System (PSTU and PESU)

FIGURE 2-17-DOOR PHONE/LOCKCONTROL
UNIT (HDCB)
or PEPU) and/orjack B of each HDCBf for up
to five door lock controls.
8.34 External Speaker. The external speaker
option is a 3-watt, 6 inch speaker with a built-in 3watt amplifier. A +12VDC power supply (HACU120) is provided with each external speaker, which
connects to the speaker’s back panel. An 8’ cord is
provided to plug in the power supply to a 117VAC,
60 Hz outlet. The HESB has three applications:
paging speaker, talk-back speaker, and amplified
ringing bell. See the General Description for more
application details.

9 RELEASE

3 INFORMATION

9.00 The following contains Release 3 information
relevant to Chapter 2’s contents. Descriptions
of
the new printed circuit boards, the new digital
telephones,
digital telephone
upgrade
upgrade
options, and new Toshiba-supplied
peripherals
are provided.

IO PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
(Release 3)

8.35 Voice Messaging System. The Messaging
System helps a business significantly improve the
effectiveness
of its telephonecommunication.
See
the Genera/ Description for more feature details.

10.00 PDKU (Digital Telephone Interface Unit):
The PDKU provides eight ports for digital telephones and or Data Interface Units. It can also be
configured to support a DDSS console. The PDKU
does not need an EOCU (off-hook call announce
upgrade unit) to support digital telephones equipped
with off-hook call announce
capability. Also, the
PDKU cannot support a door phone control unit
(HDCB), and/or BGM source interface.
l
The PDKU measures 7.5 by 5.5 inches (190 by
140 mm) and connects to the KSU’s backplane
with a 40-pin male connector.
l
The PDKU connects to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) using a 25pair female amphenol
connector.

8.36 The STRATA DKsystems use in-band DTMF
tone signaling
to interface with the INTOUCH
system. The PSTU and/or PESU must be installed
in the STRATA DK KSU in order to support the
Voice Messaging System.
8.37 INTOUCH interfaces with the STRATA DK
system through the MDF using standard connectors. Each voice mail port requires a 1 -pair wiring
connection to the MDF, and one port on the PSTU/
,, PESU, as well as special programming
in the
STRATA DK to act as a voice mail port.

t Release 2 and higher

2-19

INSTALLATION-SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION200-096-202
FEBRUARY 1991
10.01 PCTU3 (Common Control Unit): The latest version of the common control unit is PCTU3,
which contains Release 3 software. The PCTU3
can be installed in DK96, DK56, and DK24. Like
earlier PCTU versions, the PCTU3 contains the
system’s main microprocessor
and microprocessor bus, battery-protected
memory circuits, time
switch logic, conference
logic, and system tones.
The PCTU3 also has a music-on-hold/background
music source interface, and connectors to mount
an optional DTMF receiver PCB (CRCU) for DISA,
TIE lines, standard telephones,
and peripherals.
l
The PCTU3 measures 7.5 by 5.5 inches (190 by
140 mm) and connects to the KSU’s backplane
with a 40-pin male connector.
11 PERIPHERAL

receive and transmit simultaneous
voice and
data; data and voice calls can be made independently of each other. The PDIU-DI is easily
installed, replacing the normal digtal telephone
base.
NOTES:
1. The PDIU-DI will function with all slots,
except slots 1 I w 14 in DK96.
2. PDKU circuits 1 N 7can support PDIU-Dls.

DVSU (Off-hookCall Announce Upgrade): Each
digtal telephone
may be upgraded to receive
intercom handsfree answerback calls when the
handset is off-hook by installing an OCA upgrade assembly.
This assembly,
called the
DVSU, is installed inside the telephone
base
with plug-in connectors.

EQUIPMENT

11 .OO Digital Telephones (Release 3)
HHEU (Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade):
11.Ol There are twodigital telephones,

Each digital telephone may also be upgraded to
provide a loud ringing bell interface and a modular headset jack by installing a loud ringing bell/
headset
upgrade
assembly.
The assembly
consists of a small PCB (HHEU) which is installed inside the telephone
base with plug-in
connectors.

the 1020SD
and the 1020H, compatible with the STRATA DK
systems. See the General Description for a more
complete description
of these phones.

11 .I 0 Digital
(Release 3)

Telephone

Upgrade

Options

11.20 Digital Direct Station Selection Console
(Release 3)

11.11 Digital

telephones
may be upgraded
to
transmit and receive simultaneous
voice and data.
They may also be upgraded
with off-hook call
announce,
loud ringing bell, and headset capability. If the telphone is upgraded to transmit and
receive simultaneous
voice and data, it cannot be
upgraded with any of the other options. However,
it can be upgraded simultaneously
with off-hook
call announce
and loud ringing bell or headset
capability.

11.21 The Digital Direct Station Selection Console (DDSS) is an optional, dedicated answering
station incorporating
a busy lamp field, and it can
be used with electronic or digital telephones.
It is
normally used on systems with a heavy volume of
incoming calls. A DDSS console may be used with
one of four designated
telephones.
If equipped
with a PCTU3, DK96, DK56, and DK24 can support up to four DDSS consoles (DK24, if equipped
with the PCTUS, will not support DDSS consoles).
For more information on DDSS console features,
see the General Description.

11 .I2 Each digital telephone
also features
a
standard modular handset cord, and is connected
to the system with a single-pair modular line card
(7 feet length cord included). No extra wire pair is
required for the various upgrade options, but a
custom external speaker cable (HESC-65A)
is
required for the loud ringing bell.

11.22 A DDSS console must be assigned to a
particular station when the system configuration
is
defined in programming.
All four DDSS consoles
can be assigned to asingle’station,
orfourdifferent
DDSS consoles may be assigned to four different

PDIU-DI (Integrated data interface unit): Digital
telephones

may be upgraded

with a PDIU-DI to

2-20

INSTALLATION-SITEREQUIREMENTS
SECTION200-096-203
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
.
PARAGRAPH

I

1
2
3
3.00
3.10
4
5
5.10
6
7
7.10

SUBJECT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .
GENERAL.
INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS
. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
SITE CONSIDERATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
Clearance and Location Requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical/Environmental
Requirements
and Characteristics
. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .
CABLE LENGTHS/NETWORK
REQUIREMENTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .
GROUNDING
REQUIREMENTS
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .
Earth Ground Test . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .
SITE CONSIDERATIONS
(continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .
GROUNDING
REQUIREMENTS
(continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second Ground Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .

PAGE
3-l
3-l
3-l
3-l
3-l
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-5
3-5
3-5

TABLE LIST
TABLE
3-A
3-B
3-c

TITLE
LOOP REQUIREMENTS
. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK
REQUIREMENTS
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARY
OF ELECTRICAL/ENVIRONMENTAL
CHARACTERISTICS
. . . . . . . .. .. . . .

PAGE
3-3
3-3
3-4

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
I

3-l
3-2
3-3

TITLE
DK24/56 MINIMUM CLEARANCE
REQUIREMENTS
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
DK96 MINIMUM CLEARANCE
REQUIREMENTS
. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
KSU GROUNDING
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3-i

PAGE
3-l
3-l
3-5

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION200-096-203
FEBRUARY 1991
1 GENERAL
1.00 This chapter defines the installation

TOP VIEW
DK96 UNIT

site requirements
necessary to ensure a proper operating environment
for STRATA DK systems. Also
included are input power requirements,
site considerations,
cable lengths/network
requirements,
and grounding requirements.

l/2”J

2 INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS
2.00 The systems
of 117VAC nominal
15 amps. The AC
system use, fused,
graph 5).

require an input power source
(85VAC N 135VAC), 50/60 Hz,
outlet must be dedicated
to
and grounded (refer to Para-

FRONT
WORK
APPROXIMATELY
+

I-ItilJKt 3-Z-UK96 MINIMUM
CLEARANCEREQUIREMENTS

2.01 To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is recommended that an ON/OFF wall switch not be used on
this dedicated AC circuit.

3.02 The following conditions must be considered
when selecting a location for the KSU:
The location MUST BE:
l
Dry and clean
l
Well ventilated
l
Well illuminated
l
Easily accessible

2.02 A reserve power source (two customersupplied l2-volt batteries) may be connected to
the system to serve as a power failure backup.

3 SITE CONSIDERATIONS
3.00 Clearance and Location Requirements

The location MUST NOT BE:
l
Subject to extreme heat or cold
l
Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants
l
Subject to excessive vibration
l
Next to television, radio, office automation,
or
high frequency equipment

3.01 The KSU may be table-top or wall mounted.
Figure 3-l (DK24/56) and Figure 3-2 (DK96) show
the minimum
clearance
requirements
for both
mounting options.
TOP VIEW
DK24/56 UNIT

NOTE:
See Paragraph
tions.

‘f”

I
I

d

I

I

2”

--

SPACE
36”

I 6”

b

I
I
I
I

2” I+
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I

FRONT
WORK
APPROXIMATELY

6 for more site consideraI

3.03 If reserve power is to be installed, the batteries will require a well-ventilated
location close
(within nine feet) to the KSU (the Toshiba-supplied
battery cable is 9 feet in length).

SPACE
36”

3.10 Electrical/Environmental
and Characteristics

Requirements

3.11 The electrical/environmental

requirements
are provided

t
I

FIGURE 3-l-DK24/56 MINIMUM
CLEARANCEREQUIREMENTS

and characteristics
in Table 3C.

3-1

for each system

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 200-096-203
FEBRUARY 1991
4 CABLE LENGTHS/NETWORK
REQUIREMENTS

2) Connect the meter probes between the two
main AC voltage terminals (white and black
wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained
should be between 100 - 120 VAC.

4.00 Table 3-A lists system loop requirements.
Table 3-B lists system network requirements.
The
KSU must be located to allow compliance with the
specified requirements.

5 GROUNDING

3) Move one of the meter probes to the third
terminal (green wire ground). Either the same
reading or a reading of zero volts should be
obtained.

REQUIREMENTS

4) If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on
the ground terminal and move the other probe
to the second voltage terminal.

5.00 The system requires a solid earth ground for
proper operation. Failure to provide such a ground
may lead to confusing trouble symptoms and, in
extreme cases, system failure. The ground connection is provided by the “third wire ground” from
the commercial
power outlet.
NOTE:
The ground

CAUTION!
If a reading of zero volts is obtained on
both voltage terminals (white wire to green
wire, black wire to green wire), the out/et is
not properly grounded. Omit steps 5 and
6, and proceed directly to step 7.

must be dedicated.

5.01 At most installations in the continental United
States, the ground provided by the “third wire
ground” at the commercial power outlet is satisfactory for system requirements.
However, in a small
percentage
of installations,
this ground may be
installed incorrectly.
Before installing a system,
test the third wire ground for continuity by either
measuring the resistance between the third prong
terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water
pipe (maximum: 5 ohms), or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator.

5) If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a
reading of 100 - 120 VAC on the other terminal
is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet.
6) Set the meter
one probe on
probe on the
of zero volts.
ohm.

CAUTION!
If the reading is more than one ohm, then
the outlet is not adequately grounded.

5.02 If neither procedure is possible, perform the
earth ground test procedure in Paragraph 5.10.

I

NOTE:
See Paragraph
quiremen ts.

7 for more

grounding

to the “OHMS/Rx1 ” scale. Place
the ground terminal, and the other
terminal that produced a reading
The reading should be less than 1

7) If the above tests show the outlet is not properly
grounded,
the condition should be corrected
(per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code)
by a qualified electrician before the system is
connected.

re-

5.10 Earth Ground Test
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death
or injury are exposed during the folio wing
test. Use great care when working with AC
power line voltage.
1) Obtain a suitable voltmeter,
and set it for a
possible reading of up to 250 VAC.

3-2

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 200-096-203
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE3-A
LOOPREQUIREMENTS
Max Loop Resistance
(Including Device)

Device Description
PEKU
(ckts 1 w 8)

Max Distance from
KSU to Device

Number of
Wire Pairs 1

Electronic
telephone,
door phone/
control boxes

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

DSS consoles

20 ohms

500 ft. (152 m)

300 ohms

Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m)
with 150 ohm device. See
manufacturer’s product
specifications for exact
resistance of device.

1-pair

P&J 2
(ckts 1 & 2)

Standard
telephones,
voice mail,
auto attendant,
etc.

PDKU
(ckts 1 N 8)

Digital
telephones

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

1-pair

DDSS consoles

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

1-pair

PDKU
(ckts 1 N 7)

PDIU-DI

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

PDKU
(ckts 1 w 7)

PDIU-DS

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

P&J’
(ckts 5 N 8)
PEKU
(ckts 7 & 8)
PSTU
(ckts 1 * 8)

PDKU
(ckt 8)

NOTES:
1. Use 24 A WG twisted pairs.
2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used.
3. Two-pair may be required to achieve

maximum

range

(see Chapter

All need 2-pair.
EKTs which
receive OCA
calls need
3-pair.’

Shares digital
telephone
wire-pair?
1 -pair3

9).

TABLE3-B
NETWORKREQUIREMENTS
TOSHIBA
Circuit Board

Facility
Interface Code

Network
Jack

Ringer
Equivalence

Pcou/Pcou2
(Loop Start Line)

02LS2

RJl4C

0.26

PEMU
(Type I, TIE Line)
2-wire

TLllM

R2JEX

N/A

OLl3A

RJ21 X

N/A

4-wire
PSTU/PESU (circuits 1 & 2)
(Off-premises Line)

3-3

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION200-096-203
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE34
SUMMARY OFELECTRICAL/ENVIRONMENTALCHARACTERlSTlCS .
GENERAL
Primary Power
Input AC
AC Frequency
DK24 power supply
DK56 power supply
DK96 power supply

85VAC - 135VAC
50/60 Hz
65 watts
140 watts
230 watts
I

Environmental
Specifications
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature

32 - 104°F (0 * 40°C)
20 * 80% relative humidity (without condensation)
-4 - 158°F (-20 * 70°C)

Power Supply
DC Voltage Output
Specification

-24VDC; -26.3 m -27.8
+ 5VDC; + 4.5 m + 5.5
- 5VDC; - 4.5 - - 5.5
Charger; current limiting
Nominal Float Voltage; 2.275 volts/cell
Charge Current; 0.7 amps maximum
Battery Discharge Cut-off Voltage; 20.5 f 0.5V

Battery Charger
Characteristics

PSTU (before November

1989)

Square Wave:

Ring Voltage
Ringing Capability
PSTU2/PESU (circuits

190 f 20V peak-to-peak (no load)
up to two ringers maximum per circuit.

1 & 2)

Square Wave:

Ring Voltage

Low position 130 +_20V peak-to-peak (no load)
High position 190 f 25V peak-to-peak (no load)

Ringing

Two ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position

Capability

BTU Rating

DK24

PEKU 3
103 BTUs (30 wh)
PCOU 2
PCTUS 1
PIOUS 1
Electronic Telephone 24

DK56

PEKU 5
205 BTUs (60 wh)
PCOU 3
PCTU 1
Electronic Telephone 40
I

DK96

PEKU 9
348 BTUs (102 wh)
PCOU 5
PCTU 1
Electronic Telephone 72

3-4

‘\
I

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION200-096-203
FEBRUARY 1991
6 SITE CONSIDERATIONS (continued)
6.00 The following precautions should be adhered
to when installing telephone wiring:

1.
2.
3.

4.

GROUND

1;

\
THIRD WIRE
AC GROUND
\

WARNING!
Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install the telephone jacks in wet
locations unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone
wires or terminals unless the telephone
line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

THIRD WIRE GRO;ND
TO AC POWER CORD
DKSU

\ II
A+

\
’

POWER
SUPPLY

t

A
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM GROUND

BUILDING GROUND
COLD WATER PIPE

OR

*f
INSULATED
GROUND WIRE

7 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS (continued)
7.00 In addition to the grounding
provisions
in
Paragraph 5, the following grounding
provisions
must be adhered to (Figure 3-3):

GROUND

1) Redundant
and independent
equipment
grounding
conductors
are to be installed between the product and the wiring system ground.

2;

FRAME GROUND
SCREW ON DKSU
PER GENERAL RULES
OF ARTICLE 250 OF
THE NATIONAL
ELECTRICAL
CODE, NFPA70

FIGURE 3-3 KSU GROUNDINGDIAGRAM

2) One of the equipment
grounding
conductors
(ground 1) shall be an insulated grounding
conductor
that is not smaller in size and is
equivalent in insulation material and thickness
to the grounded and ungrounded
branch-circuit
supply conductors,
except that it is green with
or without one or more yellow stripes. The
grounding conductor is to be installed as part of
the circuit that supplies that system and is to be
connected to ground at the service equipment.

or injury may be exposed during the
following test. Use great care when
working with AC power line voltage.
1) Refer to Figure 3-3.
2) Disconnect the AC plug of the system to make
sure that the two earth ground
paths are
separated.
3) With a suitable volt/ohm
meter, perform a
reading between
A and B. Verify that the
readings do not exceed the figures listed below.
If they do, the condition must be corrected by a
qualified electrician before the system is connected.

3) The other conductor (ground 2) shall comply
with the general rules for grounding contained
in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code,
NFPA 70, but shall not depend on the cord and
plug of the product.

7.10 Second Ground Test

A to B: 1 volt maximum
then
A to B: 1 ohm maximum

WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death

3-5

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION200-096-203
FEBRUARY1991
?
I’

This page intentionally left blank

3-6

TOSHIBASYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITALKEYTELEPHONESYSTEMS

Stra

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991

taExx

RELEASE

1,2, and 3

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER FOUR
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
.
PARAGRAPH

I

1

I

I

1
1.10
2
2.10
2.20
2.30
2.40
2.50
2.60
2.70
2.80
2.90
3

4
4.00
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.40

SUBJECT
INTRODUCTION
.....................................................................................................
System Considerations..
......................................................................................
OPTION INTERFACING
... . .....................................................................................
DDSSDSS
Consoles ..........................................................................................
Data Interface Units (PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS) .....................................................
Door Phones .......................................................................................................
E & M TIE Lines . . . ...............................................................................................
Off-hook Call Announce ......................................................................................
Data and Modems with Release 1 or 2 ...............................................................
Miscellaneous
......................................................................................................
Ports .... ................................................................................................................
CO Lines .............................................................................................................
WORKSHEETS
.......................................................................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
1 ......................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
2.. ....................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
3.. ....................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
4.. ....................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
5.. ....................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
6.. ....................................................
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE, WORKSHEET
7.. ....................................................
SYSTEM HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION
............................................................
................................................................................................................
General
System Hardware Assignment
Record ...............................................................
Door Phone Hardware Configuration
Notes ........................................................
DSSDDSS
Console Hardware Configuration
Notes.. .........................................
Data Interface Unit (DIU) Configuration
Notes ....................................................

PAGE
4-1
4-l
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-17
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-25
4-26
4-26

TABLELIST
TABLE
4-A
4-B
4-c
4-D
4-E
4-F

TITLE
DK24/DK56/DK96
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATIONS
. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .
SYSTEM CONTROL PCB (PCTU) CONFIGURATION
INFORMATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
UNIVERSAL
SLOT/PCB CAPACITIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .._..
OPTIONAL
INTERFACE
PCB INFORMATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .._.............................
OPTIONAL ADD-ON UNIT CONFIGURATION
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIONAL
SUBASSEMBLY
PCB CONFIGURATION
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

PAGE
4-2
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
4-1
4-2

PCB CONFIGURATION
CHART
HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION

TITLE

PAGE

. . . *................................................................,......
EXAMPLE . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .

4-1
4-28

4-i

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
1 INTRODUCTION

DK56, and 36 CO lines for DK96 are based on
squared systems. Software allows 16 CG lines with
PCTUSl and 36 CO lines with PCTU (1, 2, or 3). 1
Similarly, the 24 station (PCTUSI)
and 96 station
(PCTUI, 2, or 3) limits are software limitations.
I

1.01 STRATA DK systems are flexible in their
ability to meet varied system needs. A modular
building block approach allows the addition of various parts to meet system needs and applications.
A universal slot concept is used in the KSU, which
means that a PCB slot in the KSU can accept any
one of a number of different PCBs. This is contrasted with a dedicated
slot approach
(used in
previous STRATA systems), where a particular slot
can only accept a specific PCB, such as a CO line
interface PCB. DK24 has six universal slots, DK56
has eight, and DK96 has 14. This increased flexibility in STRATA DK means that tradeoffs can be
made between the number of CO lines and stations
in a system application. This is illustrated in Figure

1.10 System

Considerations

1.11 When no external options or TIE lines are
installed and only CO lines and station PCBs are
exchanged,
the maximum configurations
can be
summarized
in Table 4-A.
1.12 Table 4-A shows the maximum
number of
1 OOO-series digital telephone,
6500-series
telephones, and/or standard telephones that can exist
in each system. Due to power availability,
the
numbers decrease if using 2000-, 3000-, 6000-, or
6005-series
electronic telephones,
a PEMU PCB,
or digital telephones
with PDIU-Dls
connected.
I
When mixing different series telephones and/or if a
PEMU PCB is installed,
use the Configuration
Guide, worksheet 7, to verify that the power supplied is greater than the power used.

4-1.

1.02 Figure 4-l shows that in most configurations,
four CO lines can be traded for eight stations.
Conversely,
for every eight stations that are given
up, four CO lines can be added. The maximum
quantities of 16 CO lines for DK24,20 CO lines for

40
36
32
28
24

AVAILABLE
CO LINES

(WITHOUT
SYSTEM OPTIONS)

20
16
12
8

I

4
NOTES (DK24):
1. 24 stations are available
0
with PCTUSl -equipped DK24.
2. 32 stations are available
with PCTU-(1, 2, or 3) equipped DK24.
-_-__--

AVAILABLE
- .

---

FIGURE 4-l-PCB

--~~~

STATION PORTS

CONFIGURATIONCHART
4-1

I

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
Table 4-A
OK24/56/96 MAXIMUM CONFIGURATIONS
DK24 (PCTUS)

I CO Lines
16
12
8
4
0

Stations
16
24
24
24
24

DK 24 (PCTU
CO Lines
16
12
8
4
0

1,2.
I

I

or 31 DK56 (PCTU
.

Stations

CO Lines

16
24
32
323
323

20
16
12
8
4
0

1.2.
, , or :
Stations
24
32
40
48
56
64

DK96 (PCCO Line5

1, 2, or:
Stations

36
32
28
24
20
16
12
8

40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96

NOTES:
1. The station capacities apply to any combination of standard telephones, IOOO-series digital
telephones and 6500-series electronic telephones (only). Station capacities using other
Toshiba electronic telephones are given on worksheet 7.
2. Installing a TIE line (PEMU) PCB or an optional interface (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)
PCB
reduces available CO lines by four or available station ports by eight.
3. The DK24’s 32-station limit is a result of power supply capacity.

circuits. The standard telephone interface unit PCB
(PSTU) can accommodate
eight standard telephones or like devices. The standard/electronic
telephone interface unit PCB (PESU) supports up
to two standard and four electronic telephones. The
PESU is intended for configurations
that require
less than three standard telephone
ports and/or
less than five electronic telephone ports, on systems
that mix standard and electronic telephones.

1 .13 System Control PCB Considerations.
DK
systems can be configured
with one of four versions of control PCBs: PCTUl , PCTU2, PCTU3, or
The PCTUl,
2, and 3 have the same
I PCTUSI.
configuration
capacity and can be used in all three
system models. The PCTUI provides Release 1
features; the PCTU2 provides Release 2 features;
I and the PCTU3 provides Release 3 features. The
PCTUSl provides Release 2features, but has less
I system capacity than a PCTU (1, 2, or 3). The
PCTUS is designed to function in DK24 only; if a
PCTUS is installed in DK56 or DK96, the system
will not operate correctly. The configuration
capacities of each PCTU PCB are shown in Table 4-B.
This table shows the maximum capacities of all the
options, stations, and lines for each configuration.
These capacities
reflect maximum
stand alone
capacities and do not indicate combined capacity
of the many possible configurations
when mixing
options, stations, and lines. Use the configuration
worksheets to determine combined capacities.

1.15 Up to four CO lines can be connected
CO line unit PCB (PCOU).

with the

1 .16 With the exception of the control PCB which
has its own dedicated slot, any of these PCBs can
be used in any of the universal slots (DK24 has six
universal slots, DK56 has eight, and DK96 has 14).
Table 4-C shows all the PCBs which can be installed in universal slots and the maximum quantity
of each PCB allowed per system. It is useful to
consider some examples of system configuration
as follows:

1.14 The digital telephone
interface
unit PCB
(PDKU) provides an interface for eight digital telephones. The PDKU also provides interface for the
I PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS data interface units. The
electronic telephone
interface unit PCB (PEKU)
provides an interface for eight electronic telephone

Example 1-A small business requires a system to
handle six CO lines, 12 electronic telephones
and three standard rotary type telephones.
l
The PCBconfiguration
(in addition to Release
1 or 2 common equipment)
is as follows:

4-2

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991

0

Two PCOU PCBs
Two PEKU PCBs
One PSTU PCB
Each of these PCBs requires one universal
slot, so a total of five slots is required. Therefore, a DK24 can be used.

Example 2-A
I

I

bank branch office needs nine CO
lines, seven electronic telephones,
five digital
telephones,
and 11 standard rotary type telephones.
l
The PCB configuration (in addition to Release
3 common equipment)
is as follows:
Three PCOU PCBs
One PEKU PCB
One PDKU PCB
Two PSTU PCBs
l
The configuration
requires seven universal
slots; therefore, DK24 is ruled out, because
it has only six universal slots. Offering 14
universal slots, DK96 could be used, but it is
a little too big for the office’s needs at the
moment. DK56, with its eight universal slots,
could meet those needs immediately.
Also,
DK56 could accomodate
some expansion of
lines or stations in this case, since there
would be one empty universal slot.

0

2 OPTION INTERFACING
2.01 Numerous options, such as a paging amplifier, external page interface (one zone), relay control, etc., require an additional
PC6 called the
PEPU. If even more options are required, such as
multi-zone paging, alarm sensor, SMDR or remote
maintenance,
then the PIOU or a PIOUS PCB
would be needed. Table 4-D provides more details
about the capabilities of these PCBs. Only one of
these PCBs would be needed in a STRATA DK
system because the PIOU can do everything the
PEPU or PIOUS can do and more. If any of these
options are required, one universal slot is needed
to accommodate
the appropriate
PCB, thereby
reducing the maximum CO line/station capabilities
by eight station ports or four CO lines. Only one
option PCB is allowed per DK system.

Example 3-A
I

mon equipment)
is as follows:
Five PCOU PCBs
.
Two PEKU PCBs
Two PDKU PCBs
I
One PSTU PCB
One PESU PCB
One CRCU subassembly
Each of these PCBs, except for the CRCU,
requires one universal slot. Therefore, a total
of 11 slots are required. This is beyond the
capacity of DK24 and DK56 (six and eight
slots, respectively)
but well within DK96’s
capacity.

large travel agency needs 18 CO
lines, 14 electronic telephones,
14 digital telephones, nine standard DTMF telephones
and
one FAX machine, all connected to one system.
l
Since DTMF is required,
an additional
subassembly
(CRCU) is needed to translate
DTMF to signals that STRATA DK can understand. The CRCU is a subassembly
that
mounts on the common control PCB (PCTU),
which is part of the STRATA DK common
equipment. The PCTU has its own dedicated
slot in the KSU separate from the available
universal slots. In summary,
an additional
subassembly
(CRCU) is required for DTMF
but the maximum number of universal slots
remains at six for DK24, eight for DK56, and
14 for DK96. Lastly, a FAX machine is treated
like a standard telephone and can use DTMF
dialing, since the capability
exists in the
system because of the standard DTMF telephones.
l
The PCB configuration
(in addition to com-

2.10 DDSS and DSS Consoles
2.11 Up to four DSS consoles can be accomodated
by DK24, DK56, or DK96 equipped with a PCTUI
or 2 (PCTUl
or 2 does not support DDSS consoles). Up to four DDSS consoles, or up to four DSS
consoles,
or any combination
up to four can be
accommodated
by a DK24, DK56, or DK96
equipped with a PCTU3. A DK24 equipped with a
PCTUSl
can support up to three DSS consoles
only (PCTUSl cannot support DDSS consoles). In
addition, the application of DDSS consoles is flexible so that one to four DDSS consoles can be
assigned to one digital or electronic telephone,
or
one DDSS console to each of four digital or electronic telephones,
or any intermediate combination
(this also applies to DSS consoles and electronic

4-3

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
telephones).
Each DDSS console does not require
a specialized interface PCB; instead, each DDSS
console takes the place of one digital telephone on
a PDKU PCB. However, only one DDSS console
may be interfaced to a PDKU, and it must interface
to circuit 8. Likewise, each DSS console does not
require a specialized interface PCB; instead, each
DSS console takes the place of two electronic
telephones
on a PEKU PCB. However, only one
DSS console may be interfaced to a PEKU, and it
must interface to circuits 7 and 8. Table 4-E provides more details regarding DDSS and DSS consoles.

l

2.20 Data Interface Units (PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS)
2.21 Integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI):
Digital telephones
may be equipped with a PDIUDI. The PDIU-DI is not astand-alone
unit, and must
be attached to a digital telephone. Each system can
support amaximum numberof PDIU-Dls, asshown
in Table 4-B. The PDIU-DI and the digital telephone
it is integrated into share the same circuit on the
PDKU PCB.

Example 4-An

end user requires nine CO lines,
15 electronic telephones,
one DSS console and
external paging.
l
If external paging speakers can be driven
with 3 watts or less, then the PEPU PCB can
be employed as the paging amplifier. Since
each DSS console requires the equivalent of
two electronic
telephones
for interface, a
total of 17 equivalent electronic telephones
must be interfaced
and, therefore,
three
PEKU PCBs are needed. Aside from common equipment,
the PCBs required for this
configuration
are as follows:
Three PCOU PCBs
Three PEKU PCBs
One PEPU PCB
l
A total of seven universal slots are needed
(which is within the maximum of DK56’s eight
universal slots).

2.22 Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS):
Each PDIU-DS requires one circuit on a PDKU
PCB. A PDIU-DS can be connected to any circuit
on a PDKU, and as many as eight can be connected to a PDKU. Unlike the PDIU-DI, the PDIUDS does not share a circuit with a digital telephone.
Therefore, each PDIU-DS reduces the digital telephone maximum capacity by one. Each system can
suppot-tamaximumnumberofPDIU-DSs,asshown
in Table 4-B.
NOTE:
1. The PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS will function
with all slots, except slots 11 - 14 in DK96.
2. PDKU circuits 1 - 7 can support PDIU-Dls
and PDIU-DSs.

Example 5-A
1

the installation
of three PEKU PCBs. The
final PCB configuration
(in addition to cornmon equipment)
is:
Four PCOU PCBs
Three PEKU PCBs
Two PDKU PCBs
One PIOU PCB
The total universal slots needed equals 10,
so that a DK96 would be sold to this business.

mid-sized business needs 15 CO
lines, 12 digital telephones, two DDSS consoles,
14 electronic telephones,
two DSS consoles,
external paging system interface to drive an
existing 8-ohm speaker, and SMDR.
l
Because SMDR is a requirement,
the PIOU
amplified page output and SMDR interface
will be needed. This unit can also handle the
external paging system interface requirement. Two DDSS consoles
require the
equivalent of two digital telephone circuits in
addition to the 12 digital telephones,
for a
total of 14 digital telephone
circuits; this
results in the installation of two PDKU PCBs.
Two DSS consoles require the equivalent of
four electronic telephones,
for a total of 18
electronic telephone
circuits; this results in

Example 6-A

small law firm requires three CO
lines, IO digital telephones
(all of which will be
equipped with a PDIU-DI connected
to a personal computer) and two PDIU-DSs connected
to modems.
l
The telephones will require IO PDKU circuits
and the modem/PDIU-DSs
two more. The
PDIU-Dls do not require a dedicated circuit,
because they share one with the digital telephones to which they are connected. A total
of 12 digital circuits are required for this
configuration;
therefore, two PDKUs would

4-4

.j

I

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
be needed. The three CO linescan
by one PCOU PCB.

be handled

a STRATA

The two modems are configured in a system
modem pool and if no dedicated CO lines are
provided,
then one standard
telephone
(PSTWPESU)
station port is required for
each; therefore a PESU or PSTU would be
needed. The PCBs required for this configuration are as follows:
Two PDKUs
One PCOU
One PESU or PSTU
A total of four universal stations needed.
A DK24 would suffice for this configuration.

DK96 can fill the bill.

2.30 Door Phones
2.31 Up to 12 door phones (MDFB) can be accommodated
by either a DK24, DK56, or a DK96
equipped with a PCTU (1,2, or 3). However, DK24
equipped with PCTUSI can support only nine door
phones. A door phone control (HDCB) interface
unit is required for every three door phones. Each
HDCB is interfaced to a STRATA DKsystem via the
PEKU or PESU PCB, and must occupy circuit 5 on
either PCB. For system configuration,
each HDCB
must be considered
equivalent
to an electronic
telephone
as far as consuming
station capacity.
Table 4-E provides more details regarding HDCB
configuration.

Example ~-TWO

tenants in one building require,
on a combined basis, 13 CO lines, 23 electronic
telephones,
eight standard DTMF telephones,
a
FAX machine, four DSS consoles, remote maintenance, and an interface to their alarm system.
l
The PIOUS PCB can provide remote maintenance for their telephone system and also act
as an alarm sensor to alert employees through
electronictelephones.
An IMDU subassembly
on the PIOUS fulfills the need of a modem for
remote maintenance,
but does not deduct
from the universal slot count. The four DSS
consoles need to be interfaced as eight electronic telephones
in addition to the 23 electronic telephones
(resulting in a total of 31
equivalent electronic telephones). Therefore,
a total of four PEKU PCBs would be installed,
which would each have a DSS console connected. One FAX machine in addition to eight
standard telephones
means that one PSTU
and one PESU PCB are needed. Because
DTMF is coming into the system, a CRCU
needs to be installed, but does notdeductfrom
the universal slots available. The total PCB
requirement
(in addition to common equipment) is as follows:
Four PCOU PCBs
Four PEKU PCBs
One PSTU PCB
One PESU PCB
One PIOUS PCB
One IMDU subassembly
One CRCU subassembly
l
A total of 11 universal slots are required, so

2.40 E & M TIE Lines
2.41 Each PEMU PCB provides interface to four
TIE lines. Up to four TIE lines can be accommodated by DK24, up to eight by DK56, and up to
twelve by DK96. TIE lines (PEMU) are the same as
CO lines (PCOU), when considering the maximum
total outside lines in a system. The maximum lines
per system are 16 for DK24,24 for DK56, and 36 for
DK96. In addition, each PEMU uses up station
ports so that the software-limited
station capacity of
a system is reduced with every PEMU added. The
number of station ports consumed
by the PEMU
depends on the type of PCTU used. If a PCTU (1,
2, or 3) is installed, the PEMU reduces the system
station capacity by four. If a PCTUSI is installed,
each PEMU reduces the station capacity by eight.
This is of concern only in a DK24 system that
requires more than 16 stations. Each PEMU added
to a system uses up one universal slot.
NOTE:
DK24’s limit of four TIE lines (one PEMU) is
due to power supply capacity. Do not exceed
this limit.

2.50 Off-hook Call Announce
2.51 If upgraded, each digital and electronic telephone can receive off-hook call announce
(OCA)
calls. In addition, PEKU PCBs supporting
elec-

4-5

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
Example 8-A

tronic telephones with OCA must also be upgraded
with an EOCU subassembly.
However, PDKU PCBs
supporting digital telephones
with OCA require no
such upgrade.
Telephones
calling to an OCAequipped
digital or electronic telephone
do not
require an upgrade.
l
To receive OCA calls, a digital telephone must be
upgraded with asubassembly
called DVSU. Each
digital telephone can be so equipped.
l
To receive OCA calls, an electronic telephone
must be upgraded with two subassemblies,
HVSU
and HVSI. Each electronic telephone can be so
equipped; there is no limit. Also, each PEKU or
PESU PCB supporting telephones equipped for
OCA must be upgraded with an EOCU. This means
that every electronic telephone which must receive an OCA call must be connected to a PEKU
or PESU equipped with the EOCU subassembly.
Therefore, OCA-equipped
electronic telephones
should be kept in groups of four in concert with a
particular PESU and in groups of eight with a
particular PEKU. Since the EOCU is a subassembly on the PEKU or PESU, it does not reduce the
number of available universal slots.
l
All system slots, except DK96’s 11-l 4and DK24’s
05 and 06 with PCTUSl , support telephone OCA
receiving.

sizable business needs 15 CO lines,
three E&M TIE lines, 37 electronic telephones,
two DSS consoles,
four door phones, three
standard
telephones,
a FAX machine,
three
modems, off-hookcall
announceforseven
of the
37 electronic telephones,
and three-zone
paging. The customer also wishes to use the Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
l
The four door phones require two HDCBs
since each HDCB has a maximum of three
door phones. Each HDCB interfaces as an
equivalent electronic telephone. The two DSS
consoles
count as the equivalent
of four
electronic telephones,
in addition to the two
for the HDCBs and the 37 actual electronic
telephones,
resulting in 43 equivalent electronic telephones.
The system, therefore,
requires six PEKU PCBs. One of the PEKUs
needs an EOCU PCB to accommodate
the
seven electronic telephones
that will have
off-hookcall
announce. This particular PEKU
should be one that does not interface a DSS
console, because the DSS console interfaces as the equivalent
of two electronic
telephones, so only six electronic telephones
could have the OCA feature. These seven
electronic telephones should, therefore, have
certain station numbers in order to save the
extra expense of additional EOCU PCBs.
l
The equivalent of seven standard telephones
need to be interfaced, so only one PSTU is
required. A CRCU PCB will be required for
the DISA feature, since DTMF tones will be
coming into the KSU. Therefore,
the standard telephones
and like devices can use
DTMF without any additional cost. If only one
zone of external paging is needed, a PEPU
or PIOUS PCB could do the job. But three
zones are required, so a PIOU PCB will be
installed. For 15 CO lines, four PCOU PCBs
are needed. Only one PEMU PCB is required
for the three TIE lines. The PEMU uses up
four stations from the total station capacity,
but no extra hardware is required because of
this, and this system is very far from using the
maximum
station capacity so it is not of
concern here.
l
In summary, the total PCB requirement
(in
addition to common equipment)
is as follows:

2.60 Data and Modems with Release 1 or 2
2.61 Passing data at up to 9600 bits per second
through the STRATA DK standard telephone ports
is possible. To accomplish
this function, an external, commercially
available modem is required.
Most typically, the modem will be housed in a
personal
computer
and have its own two-wire
modular connection. It is interfaced to STRATA DK
via a PSTU or PESU PCB as if it were a standard
telephone.
The IMDU modem discussed
previously in Example 6 can only be used with the PIOU
or PIOUS PCB for remote maintenance.
IMPORTANT
NOTE:
For data applications
requiring
more functions than that provided
by a personal
computer
and modem, it is recommended
to use the STRATA DK data interface units,
PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS. This includes
data
applications
such as modem
pooling,
printer sharing, PC-to-PC file transfer, etc.

4-6

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991

l

Four PCOU PCBs
One PEMU PCB
Six PEKU PCBs
One PSTU PCB
One PIOU PCB
One EOCU subassembly
One CRCU subassembly
A total of 13 universal slots (one for each of
the PCBs with the prefix “P”) will be used in
this DK96 system. It is working with 18 telephone lines and 48 station devices so it is
quite a large system. Another five electronic
telephones could be added without requiring
use of another universal slot.

The first port number is 00 and can continue up to
95 with a PCTU (1,2, or 3) PCB and up Jo 23 with
a PCTUS PCB. Port 00 is usually intercom station 200, 1
and is designated as the primary system attendant
station. Intercom numbering can becompletely flexibly
assigned, but is best left to the consecutive standard
numbering of 200 N 295 with PCTU (1, 2, and 3) and 1
200 N 223 with PCTUSl . User guides are written using
this standard plan, and LCD digital and electronic 1
telephone busy fields will be meaningful only if the last
two digits of the intercom number are consecutive,
starting with 00.
NOTES:
1. Each PEMU uses four station ports and four
CO lines; however, if the PEMU is installed in
a DK24 with a PCTUSl PCB, on/y 16 station
ports are available for station interface using
PEKU, PSTU, or PESU PCBs, because the
PCTUSassigns, eightstationports to the PEMU
PCB.
2. Each PEW provides two standard and four
electronic telephone ports for a total of six
stationports; however, two nonfunctioningpotis
(circuits 3 and 4) are automatically assigned to
the PESU so a total of eight station ports are
allocated to each PESU PCB installed.

2.70 Miscellaneous
2.71 Other hardware

items may be needed in a
particular system configuration.
These include the
DPFT power failure transfer unit, used to connect
CO lines to standard telephones
in the event of a
power outage; the HESB speaker/amplifier,
which
may interface with an digital or electronic telephone;
the HHEU headset interface, which may be required to hook up an HESB or a headset to a digital
or 6500-series
electronic telephone;
an HESC-65
cable, to connect
the HESB to a 6500-series
electronic telephone;
a PBTC-3M cable, for connection to reserve batteries or a PPTC connector
for an SMDR printer, TTY, or remote maintenance
terminal interface. More details on these miscellaneous items can be found in Table 4-F, the General
Description,
and other Installation chapters.

I

2.90 CO Lines
2.91 Telephone network CO lines interface to the
STRATA DK PCOU PCB. Four circuits are provided by
each PCOU. These circuits are identified as CO lines
in DK system software and are not considered as ports
but are in addition to ports when considering total
system station and line capacity.

NOTE:
An HESC-65A only is required to connect a
digital telephone to an HESB; this cable can
also be used with 6500-series
electronic
telephones.

NOTE:
Each PEMUuses four CO lines in system software
as well as four PCTU 1,2,3 or eight PCTUS ports
in system software.

2.80 Ports

3 WORKSHEETS

2.81 Interfaces to each of some devices (such as
telephones)
in the STRATA DK system can be
referred to as ports. Therefore,
a PEKU, PDKU,
I PSTU, and PESU PCB can be said to have station
ports (see Note 2). STRATA DK system programming uses port numbers to identify which device
will be equipped with desired features or operation.

3.00 To
configure
section.
consider

4-7

use a methodical step-by-step procedure to
a system, worksheets are provided in this
Use of these worksheets will automatically
all of the various factors.

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION

Al.

1

Location:

Customer:
Complete

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

Worksheet

DSS consoles

1 before
required

A2. Door phones/locks
A3. Electronic

proceeding

(refer to HDSS in Table 4-E):

required

telephones

with other worksheets.
1 (Al) HDSS

(refer to HDCB in Table 4-E):

required

I
1

1 (A2) HDCBs

(refer to PEKU and PESU in Table 4-C):

NOTE:
If upgrading an existing STRATA DKsystem using ZOOO-/3000-/6000-/6005-series
electronic telephones
and/or if the system requires TIE lines (PEMU), refer to the System Power Check, Worksheet 7.

I(A3)Total

electronic

telephones

I

A4. Does the customer require separate music sources for music-on-hold
. If separate sources are required,
music (BGM). Yes or no? (A4)
for the BGM source connection.
A5.

External

amplifier

for two-CO

line amplified

I(A5) Two-CO
NOTE:
External

amplifiers

conference

line conference

(MOH) and background
one PEKU port is needed

(4 maximum).

amplifiers:

I

are customer-supplied.

AAl.

DDSS consoles

AA2.

PDIU-DSs

AA3.

Digital telephones
Table 4-C):

required

required

(refer to DDSS in Table 4-E): 1 (AAl)

(refer to PDIU-DS
with or without

in Table 4-E):

PDIU-DI

data interface

r+yl=I

DDSS

1 (AA2) PDIU-DS
unit base required

(refer to PDKU in

(AA3) Total digital telephones

NOTE:
If upgrading an existing STRATA DK system to add digital telephones with PDIU-DI base and/or if the
system requires TIE lines (PEMU), refer to the System Power Check, Worksheet 7.

Bl . Number

of standard

telephones

required

(Bl) Standard

(refer to PSTU and PESU in Table 4-C).
telephones:

4-a

’

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
WORKSHEET

1 (continued)

B2. Number of auxiliary devices/ports, i.e., voice mail ports, auto attendant ports, fax machines,
modems (refer to PSTU and PESU in Table 4-C).

I(B2 ) Auxiliary devices:

I

C. Number of CO lines required (refer to PCOU in Table 4-C):
D. Number of E&M TIE lines required (refer to PEMU in Table 4-C):
E. Does the customer require options that interface with a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB? Yes

No---

(refer to Table 4-D). Enter optional interface PCB type:
Optional Interface PCB:

F. Does the customer require other optional features (yes or no for each): battery backup-, power
failure transfer unit-, DTMF signals from standard telephone ports-, off-hook call
announce-, headsets-, built-in remote maintenance-,
loud ringing bell-, talkback
amplifier-, externalpageamplifier/speaker-, door phones-, door lock controls-, PDIU-DI-- 1
NOTE:
These options

are configured

on Worksheet

6 after completing

G. Complete Worksheets 2 N 5.

4-9

Worksheets

2 - 5.

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

(PEKLVPDKU

2

PCB requirements)

Location

Customer

B. PEKU PCBs (eight station ports)
1. Determine

the total PEKU ports required

using Chart 1.

CHARTI-PEKU PORTREQUIREMENTS
Equipment

x

(Ports/
per)

=

DSS consoles:
(see Worksheet 1, Al)

(Al)

x

2

=

HDCB controllers:
(see Worksheet 1, A2)

VW

x

1

=

Electronic telephones:
(see Worksheet 1, A3)

(A3)

x

1

=

BGM/MOH separation:
(see Worksheet 1, A4)

(A4)

x

1

=

Conference amplifiers:
(see Worksheet 1, A5)

VW

x

2

=

Total PEKU Ports

=

2. Determine

the minimum

-r
01-08

Equipment
Quantity

Type:

09-16

PEKU PCBs required

Ports Used

using Chart 2.

CHARTP-MINIMUM PEKUPCBREQUIREMENTS
17-24

25-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

65 - 72 73 - 80

9

IO

81 - 88

89 - 96

11

12

3. Determine the actual PEKU PCBs required using Charts 1 and 2 as follows:
Actual PEKUs (AT) = (Am) or (Al) or (A2) whichever is the largest number.
Actual

PEKU PCBs = -..-.Jv

1

4. PESU: In a configuration

that requires less than five electronic telephone station-ports,
a PESU
PCB may be used in place of a PEKU PCB. The PESU supports HDCBs and a BGM source
connection as well as electronic telephones.
It does not support a DSS console. Normally, only
one PESU is installed in a system (see PSTU, Worksheet 3).

4-l 0

.:.
.I’

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION GUIDE, WORKSHEET 2 (continued)
(PEKWPDKU PCB requirements)
Location

Customer
AA. PDKU PCBs (eight station ports)

1. Determine the total PDKU ports required using Chart IA.
CHART IA-PDKU
Equipment

PORT REQUIREMENTS

Equipment
Quantity

Type:

x

(Ports/
per)

=

DDSS consoles:
(see Worksheet 1, AAI)

(AAI)

x

1

=

PDIU-DSs:
(see Worksheet 1, AA2)

(AA2)

x

1

=

Digital telephones (with
or without PDIU-Dls):
(see Worksheet 1, AA3)

VW

x

1

=

Total PDKU Ports

=

Ports Used

L

2. Determine

the minimum

PDKU PCBs required using Chart 2A.

CHART PA-MINIMUM
Total
Ports
(Chart IA)
Minimum
PDKU
PCBs
(AAm)

PDKU PCB REQUIREMENTS

01-08

09-16

17-24

25-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

65-72

73-80

81-88

89-96

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

the actual PDKU PCBs required using Charts IA and 2A as follows:
Actual PDKUs (AAT) = (AAm) or (AAl) whichever is the largest number.

3. Determine

Actual PDKU PCBs = -(AAT)

4-11

1

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFlGURJiTlON
(PSTWPESU

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

3

PCB requirements)

B. PSTU PCBs (eight station ports)
1. Determine

the total PSTU ports required

using Chart 3.

CHART 3-PSTU PORT REQUIREMENTS
Equipment

2. Determine

Equipment
Quantity

Type:

X

Ports

=

Standard telephones:
(see Worksheet 1, Bl)

WI

x

1

=

Other devices:
(see Worksheet 1, B2)

WI

x

1

=

Total PSTU Ports

=

the actual

PSTU PCB requirements

Ports Used

using Chart 4.

CHART 4-ACTUAL PSTU PCB REQUIREMENTS
Total
Ports
(Chart 3)

81 - 88

PSTU
PCBs

89 - 96

12

1 Actual

PSTU PCBs = (BT1)I

3. PESU: In a configuration

requiring less than two PSTU station ports, a PESU PCB can be used
in place of a PSTU PCB. Normally, only one PESU is installed in a system.
Actual

PESU PCBs -(BT.9

4-12

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

4

C. PCOU PCBs (four CO lines)
1. Enter the number

of CO lines required

from Paragraph

C of Worksheet

1.

CO lines
2. Determine

the number

of PCOU PCBs using Chart 5.

CHART 5-ACTUAL PCOU PCB REQUIREMENTS
co
Lines

01-04

05-08

09-12

13-16

17-20

21-24

25-28

29-32

33-36

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

(C) above

PCOU
PCBs

Actual

PCOU PCBs = -.Ac-u

(

D. PEMU PCBs (four TIE lines)
1. Enter the number

of TIE lines from Paragraph

D of Worksheet

1.

TIE lines
2. Determine

the number

of PEMU

PCBs using Chart 6.

CHART 6-ACTUAL PEMU PCB REQUIREMENTS
TIE
Lines

01 -04

05-08

09-12

2

3

(D) above

PEMU
PCBs

I Actual

1

PEMU PCBs = -..Aw

)

E. PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU PCBs (see Paragraph E of Worksheet 1)
Enter type of optional

interface

from Paragraph

E of Worksheet

Actual

PCB -.wW

Interface

4-13

1 if required.

Only one per system.

I

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

5
.

F. System and Slot Check
1. Add total PCB/slot requirements
=
PCB/slot total.

(from Worksheets

2 N 4): AT + AAT+ BTl + BT2 + CT + DT + ET

IMPORTANT NOTE!
One or two additional slots should always be considered for future growth.
2. If total is six or less, use DK24 and PCTUSl with the following considerations:
a. Total PEKU/PSTU/PESU
PCBs combined: three or less (no PEMU equipped).
b. Total PEKU/PSTU/PESU
PCBs combined: two or less (PEMU equipped).
c. Total PCOU PCBs:.four or less.
d. Total PEMU PCBs: one or less.
DK24 with PCTUS
e. DSS consoles: three or less.
f. HDCB controllers: three or less.
g. If using 2000~/3000-/6000-/6005series
electronic telephones
and/or a PEMU,
Check, Worksheet 7.

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

use Power

3. if total is six or less, use DK24 and PCTU (1, 2, or 3) with the following considerations:
a. Total PDKU/PEKU/PSTU/PESU
PCBs combined: four or less (no PEMU equipped).
b. Total PDKU/PEKU/PSTU/PESU
PCBs combined: three or less (PEMU equipped).
c. Total PCOU PCBs: six or less.
d. Total PEMU PCBs: one or less.
DK24 with PCTUl , 2, or 3
e. Combined DDSS and DSS consoles: four or less.
f. HDCB controllers: four or less.
g. If using 2000-/3000-/6000-/6005series
electronic telephones,
PDIU-Dls, and/or a PEMU, use
Power Check, Worksheet 7.
4. If total is eight or less, use DK56 and PCTU (1, 2, or 3) with the following considerations:
a. PDKU/PEKU/PSTU/PESU
PCBs combined: eight or less.
b. PCOU PCBs: eight or less.
c. PEMU PCBs: two or less.
d. PEMU and PCOU: eight or less.
DK56 with PCTUI, 2, or 3
e. Combined DDSS and DSS consoles: four or less.
f. HDCB controllers: four or less.
g. If using 2000-/3000-/6000-/6005-series
electronic telephones,
PDIU-Dls, and/or a PEMU, use
Power Check, Worksheet 7.
5. If this total is above eight, use DK96 and PCTU (1, 2, or 3) with the following considerations:
a. PDKU/PEKU/PSTU/PESU
PCBs combined:
12 or less.
b. PCOU PCBs: nine or less.
c. PEMU PCBs: three or less
d. PEMU and PCOU: nine or less.
DK96 with PCTUl , 2, or 3
e. Combined DDSS and DSS consoles: four or less.
f. HDCB controllers: four or less.
g. If using 2000-/3000-/6000-/6005-series
electronic telephones,
PDIU-Dls, and/or a PEMU, use
Power Check, Worksheet 7.
I
NOTE:
PDKU and DDSS rewire

PCTU3.

4-14

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

(miscellaneous

option

6

requirements)

.

G. CRCU PCBs (refer to Table 4-F):
1. A CRCU (-4 or -8) must be installed on the PCTUSl or PCTU2 or PCTU3 PCB if the customer
has TIE lines, DISA CO lines, or is using standard telephones
or voice mail type devices
connected to PSTU or PESU standard telephone ports.
2. For normal traffic, a CRCU-4 (providing
for extremely high traffic requirements,
be required.

four DTMF receiver circuits) will be sufficient. However,
a CRCU-8 (providing eight DTMF receiver circuits) may

CRCU-4

or CRCU-8

NOTE:
Only one CRCU can be used per system.

H. EOCU (refer to Table 4-F):
An EOCU must be installed on each PEKU and/or
receiving off-hook voice announcements
(OCA).
Actual

PESU that is connected

to electronic

telephones

EOCU PCBs

NOTES:
1. One EOCU for each PEKU or PEW that supports electronic telephones that must receive OCA.
2. Be sure thatproperconsideration
is given to where the PEKU or PESU is placed to provide the most
efficient use of the 8-circuit EOCU. The PESU only provides four electronic telephone ports; the
DSS consoles take a way two ports on a PEKU; an HDCB takes a way one port on a PESU or PEKU.
3. AnEOCU(OCA)willnotfunctioninslotsll
- 14onDK96andslots05-06onDK24withPCTUSl.

I. DVSU (refer to Table 4-F):
One DVSU is required

for each digital telephone
Actual

receiving

OCA.

DVSU

J. HVSWHVSI (refer to Table 4-F):
One HVSU and one HVSI is required
Actual

for each electronic
HVSU

telephone

receiving

00,.

and HVSI

K. IMDU PCB (refer to Table 4-F):
One IMDU PCB must be installed
capability.

on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB to provide built-in remote

maintenance

L. HHEU PCB (refer to Table 4-F):
One HHEU PCB must be installed in each digital and electronic
connects to an HESB providing a loud ringing bell.
Actual

HHEU PCBs

4-15

telephone

that suppo&

a headset

or

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

6 (Continued)
.

M. HESG65A (refer to Table 4-F):
One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each digital
telephone requiring the loud ringing bell option. The HESC-65A can also be used to connect HHEUequipped 6500-series
electronic telephones
to HESBs for the loud ringing bell option.
Actual HESC-65A

N. HESC-65 Cable (refer to Table 4-F):
One HESC-65 modular connecting
cable is required to connect
electronic telephone
requiring the loud ringing bell option.
Actual

0. HESB Amplifier/Speaker
1. One HESB is required
option.

the HESB to the HHEU

in each

HESC-65:

(refer to Table 4-E):
for each digital and electronic

telephone

providing

the loud ringing

bell

2. One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to either a PIOU, PIOUS,
or PEPU (customer-supplied
amplifiers/speakers
may be used in place of HESB).
3. One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page
speaker connected to a PIOU, PIOUS,
or PEPU (a customer-supplied
talkback amplifier/page
speaker may be used in place of HESB).
pizziGl

P. PBTC-3M Cable:
One PBTC-3M
supplied).

cable is required

for each system that requires

battery backup (batteries

are customer-

piiEziq

Q. PPTC Adaptor (Modular to RS-232)
A PPTC is required (one each) to connect a printer or call accounting device to the PIOU or PIOUS
SMDR port; or to connect a modem or ASCII terminal to the PIOU or PIOUS maintenance
port (TTY).
p7E-l

R. DPFT Unit:
The DPFT provides
of a power failure.

a means to connect

eight selected

CO lines to standard

telephones

in the event

p-j

S. MDFB:
The MDFB door phone unit plugs into the HDCB control box to provide a door phone. Three MDFBs
can be connected to each HDCB. The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker
to provide page talkback.

piq
T. PDIU-DI (refer to Table 4-B):
I

Digital telephones

must be equipped

,
with a PDIU-DI
Actual

PDIU-Dls

4-16

to transmit

and receive

voice and data.

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
CONFIGURATION
(System

GUIDE, WORKSHEET

7

Power Check)

Total Power Used:
Equipment

Equipment
Quantity

Type:

x Power Used

=

(Factor)

1 OOO-series digital telephone

X

(1.0)

=

2000-series

electronic telephone

X

(2.0)

=

3000-series

electronic telephone

X

(2.5)

=

6000-series

electronic telephone

X

(2.0)

=

6005-series

electronic telephone

X

(2.0)

=

6500-series

electronic telephone

X

(1.0)

=

DDSSDSS

console*

X

(0.8)

=

PDIU-DI

X

(0.5)

=

PDIU-DS

X

(0.8)

=

Standard telephone

X

(1.0)

=

X

(8.0)

=

PEMU PCB

Power Used

Total Power Used
* All series.

Power Supplied:
Power Supply
PPSU 24
PPSU 56
PPSU 96

Power Criteria:
-1

Configuration

-

71

Must be greater than zero.

Power Check:

Power Supplied7

-T

Total Power Used
Must be Greater than Zero

4-17

= ’

’

’

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE4-B
SYSTEMCONTROLPCB(PCTU)CONFlGURATlONlNFORMATlON
Control

Board Version

System

Compatibility

PCTUl/PCTUP/PCTU3
DK24/56/96

Universal PCB Slot
Capacity
Station Port
Capacity
CO Line Capacity
systems)

TIE Line Capacity

Simultaneous
Multi-party Conference

I

PCTU MOH/BGM
Connection

I

PDIU-DI
(PCTU3

only)

PDIU-DS
(PCTU3

only)

Personal Message/Memo
Memory for LCD Stations
Alternate

BGM Connection

Simultaneous
External
Amplified Two-CO Line
Conference Calls

24 max

16 max

3 max

12 max

9 max

5 max
1 max

(R2 and
(Rl)

2

6 max

4 max

R3)

4 max

8 max

I

CRCU (-4 or -8)
Option

Release

4 max

Door Phones

I

only

8 max with DK 56
12 max with DK96

DSS or DDSS Consoles
(or combination)

Door Lock Controls

DK24

PCTUI -Release
1
PCTU2-Release
2
PCTU3-Release
3
6 max with DK24
8 max with DK 56
14 max with DK96
32 max with DK24
56 max with DK 56
96 max with DK96
16 max with DK24
20 max with DK 56
36 max with DK96
4 max with DK24

DK Feature Set

(squared

PCTUS

3 max

1 max

1 max
21
53
80
24
56
80

max
max
max
max
max
max

with
with
with
with
with
with

DK24
DK56
DK96
DK24
DK56
DK96

16 stations
max
(see Note 1)
1 max

(R2

and

4 max

(R3)

R3)

I

1 max

Not Supported

Not Supported
6 stations
max
(see Note 1)
1 max

Not Supported

NOTES:
1. This only applies to LCD personal memory; all stations in any DK system can be an LCD
telephone.
2. In the DK24 and DK56 PDIU-Dls and PDIU-DSs are limited by the systempower
capacity
per worsheet 8; both DlUs are limited to slots 0 1- IO in the DK96.

4-18

.’

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE4-C
UNIVERSAL SLOT/PCB CAPACITIES

Vinted
Zircuit
Board

PDKU

0 =W=
IJCTU3)

Circuits per
Printed
Circuit Board
8/Digital

Telephone

Digital)
(without PDIU-DI)
(with PDIU-DI)
(POETS,

8/Electronic

PEKU ’

PSTU

(Ports,

PESU 2
(r equires
PC‘TU2 and
i shove)
PCOU

Electronic)

8/Standard
(Ports,

Telephone

Telephone

Standard)

2/Standard
4/Electronic

Telephone
Telephone

(Ports Standard/
Electronic)
4/CO

Lines

(Lines)

PEMU 3

4/TIE

Lines

(Lines)

PCB Maximum Capacities
(Ports/Lines)
DK24
PCTUSl

PCTU
(l/2/3)

DK56

DK96

PCTU
(l/2/3)

PCTU
(l/2/3)

3

4

8

12

(24)
(N/A)
(N/A)

(32)
(32)

(64)
(64)
(53?

(96)
(96)

W5

3

4

8

12

(24)

(32)

(64)

(96)

3

4

7

12

(24)

(32)

(56)

3

5

8

(6/12)

(1 O/20)

4

5

7

9

(16)

(20)

(28)

(36)

1

1

2

3

(4)

(4)

(8)

(12)

1

1

1

1

(21j5

(16/32)

(96)

12
(24/48)

Interface to:

*
*
*

Digital Telephones
DSS Consoles
PDIU-DI
PDIU-DS

*
*
*
*
*
*

Electronic
Telephones
HDCB Door Phone Box
DSS Consoles
BGM Source
EOCU PCB for OCA
Amplified
Conference

*
*
*
*
*
*

Standard
Telephones
Voice Mail Ports
FAX
Dictation
Machine
Off-premises
Stations
Other similar devices

Standard:

Same

as PSTU

;~~t;&~ame

as PEKU

* Central Office
Loop-Start
Lines
*
-

E&M TIE Lines
Type I - Signaling
2 or 4 wire transmission
Immediate
start

PIOU,
I
PIOUS

See Table

4-F

See Table

4-F

)r PEPU

C

NOTES:
1. The appropriate capacities apply to 1 OOO-series digital and 6500-series electronic telephones only.
if other Toshiba electronic telephones
(2000-, 3000-, 6000-) are used, refer to Paragraph
1.12.
2. The PESU provides two standard telephone circuits identical to PSTU circuits and four electronic
telephone circuits identical to PEKU circuits. Normally only one PESU is installed in a system that
requires a mix of standard and electronic telephone circuits. A PESU is installed instead ofa PSTU,
if only one or two standard telephone circuits are needed. A PESU is installed instead of a PEKU
if only four or less electronic telephone circuits are needed, The PESU supports the door phone
option and the BGM source but not DSS consoles.
3. The maximum number of PEMU PCBs is determined
by the system’s power supply capability
(caution: do not exceed the numbers shown); also; if a PEMU is installed in a DK24 with a PCTUS
PCB, only 16 station ports are available for telephones.
4. Only one type of peripheral interface PCB (PiOU, PIOUS, PEPU) may be installed per system.
5. The number of digital telephones
with PDIU-Dis is limited by the system’s power capacity per
Worksheet 7. Also, PDIU-Dis are limited to slots 01 N 10 in DK96 (see Table 4-B for details).

4-19

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
TABLE 4-D
OPTIONAL INTERFACEPCB INFORMATION
Interface Option

PIOU

PIOUS

PEPU

Unamplified Page Output
(Single zone, 600 ohms duplex)

X

Amplified Page Output
(Single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms)

X

Zone Page Interface
(Unamplified, 4 zones)

X

Night Transfer or Music-on-Hold,
Control Relay

X

X

X

Door Lock or External Amplifier
Control Relay

X

X

X

Alarm Sensor

X

X

SMDR Output (RS-232/6-wire
modular connector)

X

X

Maintenance Port for a Local ASCII
Terminal or External Modem
(RS-232/6-wire modular connector)

X

X

Remote Maintenance Modem (IMDU
subassembly, no external connector)

X

X

X

X

X

NOTE:
‘x” indicates the option is provided.

-.
.i

4-20

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
TABLE 4-E
OPTIONAL ADD-ON UNIT CONFIGURATION
Interface
PCB

Option
Unit

(DSS

HDSS
console)

HDCB
(door
phone/lock
control)

PEKU

(circuits

PEKU

or PESU

Capacity

7 & 8)

(circuit

5)

Function

4/system
3/system

(PCTUI,
(PCTUSl)

4IsYstem
3/system

(PCTUt , 2, or 3)
(PCTUSl)

Provides
a 60-button
console
that functions
with electronic
telephones.
Buttons are flexibly
assigned
as CO line, speed dial
and DSS.

2, or 3)

Each HDCB provides
interface
for
up to three door phones
(MDFBs)
or two door phones and one
door lock.
l

MDFB
(door phone)

HDCB

‘2’system
S/system

(PCTU1’
(PCTUSl)

2, Or 3,

l

l

HESB
(amplified
speaker)

DDSS

console

PIOUIPIOUS/PEPU
for page/speaker/amplifier
Electronic
telephone
HHEU PCB for loud
ringing bell

PDKU

(circuit

8)

1 per PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU
with

1 per electronic
telephone
(with HHEU PCB)

4 per system

with PCTUB

PDIU-DI*

Digital

telephone

1 per digital telephone
with PCTU3
(see Table 4-B)

PDIU-DS*

PDKU

(any circuit)

8 per PDKU with
PCTU3
(see Table 4-B)

Door monitor with two-way
talk
path to system telephones.
Doorbell that rings designated
digital and electronic
telephones
Microphone
for talkback
amplifie
with HESB.

External
page amplifier
and speaker
(talkback
with
MDFB).
Loud ringing bell.

Provides
a 60-button
DDSS
console
that functions
with digital
telephones.
Buttons
are flexibly
assigned
as CO line, speed dial,
and DSS.
Used for transmitting
and
receiving
data between
terminals,
personal
computers,
and devices
connected
to other PDIUs. The
PDIU-DI
is also used to provide
personal
computer
access
to
outside dial up data services
and/or bulletin boards via modem
pooling.
For making switched
data
connections
for modem pooling,
printer sharing,
and host/
mainframe
computer
accessing.

DSS CONSOLE
NOTES:
1. No additional
hardware
is required to use the DSSDDSS
consoles.
2. The DDSS and DSS consoles are assigned
to associated
digital and electronic
telephones
in programming.
3. DDSS or DSS consoles
cannot be connected
to PEW electronic
circuits.
4. DDSS or DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned
to designated
electronic
and digital telephone
stations; up to
four DSS and/or DDSS consoles may be assigned
to a designated
electronic
or digital telephone
station.
DOOR PHONE NOTES:
1. A maximum
of four door phone control boxes (HDCBs) are allowed per system, equipped
with a PCTU (I, 2, or 3)
or three HDCBs with a PCTUSl,
to support up to twelve or nine door phones (MDFBs), respectively.
2. One electronic
telephone
(PEKWPESU)
poti,
always the 5th circuit port, is required per door phone control
box (HDCB).
3. HDCBs can only be connected
to PEKU or PESU port numbers 04, 12,20, and 28.
4. One door lock control can be configured
on each HDCB in place of one door phone.
5. PDKU does not support HDCBIMDFB
door phones.
* PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS
for details).

capacity

is limited

by system

power

4-21

(PPSU)

or universal

slots availability
I

(see

Table 4-B
I

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
TABLE 4-F
OPTIONAL SUBASSEMBLY PCB CONFIGURATION
Subassembly
PCB
EOCU’

CRCU

(4 or 8
circuits)

Main PCB (Mount)

PEKU or PESU

PCTU (1, 2, or 3) or
PCTUSl

Capacity

Function

One for each PEKU or
PESU that supports OCA

Provide off-hook call
announce path for all
electronic telephone
circuits of main PCB

One per PCTU/system

Provides DTMF receiver for
DISA, standard telephone/\/M
circuits and TIE lines

One per PIOU or PIOUS/
system

Remote maintenance
interface with built-in modem

IMDU

PIOU and PIOUS

HHEU

6500-series electronic
telephone and 1 OOOseries digital telephone

One per electronic or
digital telephone

Interface for headset and
loud ringing bell2

HVSU

6500-series
telephone

electronic

One per electronic
telephone

Interface for electronic
telephone to receive
off-hook call announce

HVSI

6500-series
telephone

electronic

One per electronic
telephone

Interface for electronic
telephone to receive
off-hook call announce

DVSU

1 OOO-series digital
telephone

One per digital
telephone

Interface for digital
telephone to receive
off-hook call announce

NOTES:
1, An EOCU (OCA) will not function in slots 11 * 140n DK96orslots05-060n
DK24 with PCTUSl.
2. One HESC-65 cable (for electronic telephones)
or one HESC-65A cable (for digital or electronic
telephones)
is required to connect the HHEU to the HESB for the loud ringing bell option.

4-22

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
4 SYSTEM HARDWARE

CONFIGURATION

NOTE:
PCTU codes 91, 92, and 93 apply to a!/ PCTU
types (PCTUI, PCTUZ, PCTU3, and PCTUS1).

4.00 General
4.01 The following

provides guidelines to configure the system’s PCB slots, including the recommended order in which the PCBs and PCB options
should be assigned to specific slots.
4.02 This section does not detail the physical installation nor the wiring of PCBs or options. It is
provided as a guide to plan and record the system
hardware configuration.
Installation practices for
PCBs are provided in Chapter 6, and the DDSS,
DSS console, and door phone options are in Chapter 7.
4.03 The quantity of each type of PCB and option
must be determined
by the guidelines
given in
Worksheets
1 N 7 prior to using the following
guidelines.

4.10 System Hardware Assignment

Record

4.11 Locate the record sheet for Program 03 in the
Basic System Record Sheets, Section 200-096-300.
The system’s PCB configuration
should be recorded on this record sheet.
NOTE:
Record sheets are also available
from the manual.

PDKUand PEKU:Assign all PDKU and PEKU PCBs,
starting with slot 01 and continuing in numerical order without skipping slots until all PDKU and PEKU
PCBs are assigned.
PSTU: Assign all PSTU PCBs, starting with the
lowest numbered empty slot and continuing without skipping slots until all PSTU PCBs are assigned.
PESU: Assign all PESU PCBs, starting with the
lowest numbered empty slot and continuing without skipping slots until all PESU PCBs are assigned.
PCOU: Assign all PCOU PCBs, starting with the
lowest numbered empty slot and continuing without skipping slots until all PCOU PCBs are assigned.
PEMU: Assign all PEMU PCBS, starting with the
lowest numbered empty slot and continuing without skipping slots until all PEMU PCBs are assigned.
PIOUIPIOUSIPEPU: Assign the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU PCBs in slot 06 of DK24, in slot 08 of DK56,
or in slot 14 of DK96.

1
1

I

NOTE:
The same code (41) is used for either PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU.

4.14 PCB Option Assignments-Some

PCBs
may have subassembly
options (PCTU/CRCU,
PIOU(S)/IMDU,
PEKU/EOCU,
PESU/EOCU)
or
special peripheral equipment (PDKU/DDSS, PEKU/
DSS, PEKU/HDCB, PESU/HDCB) connected to selected ports. These options require special PCB
identification
codes in Program 03; therefore, it is
necessary to record each option (in the options row)
on the record sheet.
l
CRCU: If the PCTU is to be equipped with a
CRCU, record the CRCU-4 or CRCU-8 under
the PCTU slot. A special PCB code is required
for the PCBs that support the CRCU option.
l
EOCU: If a PEKU is required to support off-hook
call announce, record EOCU underthe appropriate PEKU slots. A special PCB code is required
for PEKU PCBs that support the EOCU option.
An EOCU (OCA) will not function in slots 11 w 14
on DK96 and slots 05 and 06 on DK24 with
PCTUSl.
I

separately

4.12 On the Program 03 record sheet, record the
following information
for PCBs: slot assignments,
option assignments,
code assignments,
station
port assignments,
and line number assignments.
The recommended
procedures
for recording this
information
is in Paragraphs 3.13 m 3.18 (refer to
Figure 4-2 for an example of each item to be
recorded).

4.13 PCB slot assignments-Record
in the PCB
type row on Program 03’s record sheet (in the order shown below) the type of PCB that should be
installed in each slot.
l
PCTU: Assign the PCTU to the PCTU slot, slot
00.

4-23

1

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTlON200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
NOTE:
The above also applies when
installed on a PEW PCB.
l

l

the EOCU

is

DSS: If a PEKU is required to support a DSS
console, record DSSl,
DSS2, DSS3, and/or
DSS4, as needed, under the appropriate
PEKU
slots. Start with DSSl in the lowest DSS-supporting PEKU slot, and continue, as required, to
DSS4 in the highest PEKU slot that is to support
a DSS console. A special PCB code is required
for PEKU PCBs that support the DSS console
option (refer to DSS console hardware configuration notes at the end of this section).
NOTE:
The above also applies
DDSSs to PDKU PCBs.

I

l

when

connecting

HDCB: If a PEKU is required to support a door
phone control box, record HDCB 04, HDCB 12,
HDCB 20, and HDCB 28 under the appropriate
PEKU slots. Start with HDCB 04 in the first PEKU
slot, and continue without skipping a PEKU slot, as
required, to HDCB 28 in the fourth PEKU slot. A
special PCB code is not required for PEKU PCBs
that support the HDCB option (refer to door phone
hardware configuration
notes at the end of this
section).
NOTE:
The above also applies when HDCBs are connected to PEW PCBs.

l

IMDU: If the PIOU is to be equipped with a remote
maintenance modem, record IMDU underthe PIOU
slot. A special PCB code is not required for PIOU
PCBs that support the IMDU option.
NOTE:
The above also applies when the IMDU is installed
on a PIOUS PCB.

I

PDIU-DS: If one or more PDIU-DS is connected to
a PDKU, record the port it interfaces with under the
appropriate PDKU slot. A special PCB code is not
required for PDKUs that support PDIU-DSs.

:.,
1’

I

4.15 PCB Code Assignments-Each
PCB type
has an identification
code that must be entered in
Program
03. If the PCB supports an option, a
special PCB code may have to be entered to
identify the PCB plus the option. Record the appropriate PCB code in the PCB code row of the
Program 03 record sheet. Use the sequential order
shown below:
l
PCTU (1,2,3, or S): Assign the appropriate PCB I
code (91, 92, or 93) to the PCTU slot:
l
PCB Code 91: PCTU without CRCU
l
PCB Code 92: PCTU with CRCU-4
l
PCB Code 93: PCTU with CRCU-8
l
PDKU: Assign the appropriate
PCB code (62 or
64) to all PDKU slots:
l
PCB Code 62: PDKU without DDSS
l
PCB Code 64: PDKU with DDSS
l
PEKU: Assign the appropriate
PCB code (21,
22, 23, or 24) to all PEKU slots:
l
PCB Code 21: PEKU without options
l
PCB Code 22: PEKU with EOCU
l
PCB Code 23: PEKU with DSS
l
PCB Code 24: PEKU with DSS and EOCU
l
PSTU: Assign PCB code 31 to all PSTU slots.
l
PESU: Assign appropriate
PCB code (25 or 26)
to all PESU slots:
l
PCB Code 25: PESU without EOCU
l
PCB Code 26: PESU with EOCU
NOTE:
A special code is not required for the HDCB if
connected to a PEKU or PESU.
l
l

l

PDIU-DI: If a PDIU-DI is connected to a digital
telephone, the PDIU-DI and the digital telephone
will share the same PDKU station port. A special
PCB code in Program 03 is not required for PDKU
PCBs that support digital telephones with PDIUDls.

l

PCOU: Assign PCB code 11 to all PCOU slots.
PEMU: Assign PCB code 13 to all PEMU slots.
PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU:
Assign PCB code 41 to the
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU slot.
NOTE:
A special
equipped

4-24

code is not reqbired for-the IMDU if
on the PIOU or PIOUS.

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
4.16 Station Port Assignments-Station

ports are
provided by the PDKU, PEKU, PSTU, and PESU
I PCBs. Each PDKU, PEKU, or PSTU PCB provides
eight station ports. The PESU provides six functioning station ports, although it is allocated eight
(see Paragraph 2.60). Each PEMU uses four or
eight station ports to support TIE lines. Each of the
PCBs must have station port numbers assigned.
Record the station port numbers in the station port
numbers row on Program 03’s record sheet. Record
m information
for each slot equipped with a PDKU,
PEKU, PSTU, PESU, or PEMU PCB in the order
shown below:
1 l PDKU and/or PEKU station ports: Assign
station port numbers, starting with ports 00 N 07
under slot 01, advancing incrementally
at eight
1
port numbers per PDKU and/or PEKU slot. Assign the numbers in numerical order until station
ports are assigned to all PDKU and/or PEKU
I
slots.
l
PSTU station ports: Assign station port numbers, starting where the last station port number
stopped, advancing
incrementally
at eight port
numbers per PSTU slot. Assign the numbers in
numerical order until station ports are assigned
to all PSTU slots.
l
PESU station ports: Assign station port numbers, starting where the last station port number
stopped, advancing incrementally
at eight port
numbers per PESU slot. Assign the numbers in
numerical order until station ports are assigned
to all PESU slots.

station interface using PDKU, PEKU, PESU,
and PSTU PCBs. If it is installed in a PCTU (I,
2, or 3)-controlled
DK24, 24 stations will be
available, because of power supply capacity.

4.17 CO Line Number Assignments-Line

circuits are provided by the PCOU and PEMU PCBs.
Each PCOU provides four line circuits for CO loop
start line connections,
and each PEMU provides
four line circuits to support TIE lines (each of the
PCBs must have line numbers assigned). Record
CO line numbers in the CO/TIE line numbers row
on Program 03’s record sheet. Record information
for each slot equipped with a PCOU or PEMU in the
order shown below:
l
PCOU line numbers: Assign CO line numbers,
starting with lines01 N 04 in the lowest numbered
PCOU slot, advancing incrementally
at four line
numbers per PCOU slot. Assign the numbers in
numerical order until CO lines are assigned to all
PCOU slots.
l
PEMU line numbers: Assign TIE line numbers,
starting with the next line above the highest
PCOU line, advancing incrementally
at four line
numbers per PEMU slot.

4.18 PCB Additions-To add PCBs to an existing
installation, assign the PCBs in the order described
above. Start with the lowest numbered
empty slot
and continue without skipping a slot until all PCBs
are assigned. Then, using the guidelines described
above, record the new PCB configuration
information on the record sheet for Program 03.

NOTE:
PEW circuits 1 and 2 are standard telephone
ports; 3 and 4 are not used but allocated to the
PEW slot, and circuits 5 - 8 are electronic
telephone ports.
l

NOTE:
PEMU PCBs should be first moved to higher
slot numbers to create the necessary number
of empty slots for additions. Be sure to reprogram for the new PEMU positions, including
new station number
assignments
for the
PEMU(s).

PEMU station ports: Assign station port numbers, starting where the last station port number
stopped, advancing
incrementally
at four port
numbers per PEMU slot. Assign the numbers in
numerical order until station ports are assigned
to all PEMU slots.

l

NOTE:
If a PEMU is installed in a PCTUS 1 -controlled
DK24, only 16stationports
willbe available for

l

4.20 Door Phone Hardware Configuration Notes

4-25

A maximum of 12 door phones are allowed per
system with PCTU (1, 2, or 3) and nine with
PCTUSI.
Each door phone must be connected
to an HDCB.
A maximum of three door phones may be con-

1
I

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991

l

I
l

I
l

l

l

attendant telephone.
One PEKU PCB is required for each DSS/attendant telephone.
DDSS consoles are always connected to PDKU
circuit 8, and the associated digital telephone is
always connected to PDKU circuit 1 (for a total of
two PDKU ports per DDSS console/attendant
telephone).
I
DSS consoles are always connected
to PEKU
circuits 7 and 8, and the associated attendant
telephone is always connected to PEKU circuit 1
(for a total of three PEKU ports per DSS console/
attendant telephone).
PDKWDDSS slots are identified and assigned in
Program 03 with special PCB code 64 (refer to
Figure 4-2).
I
PEKWDSS slots are identified and assigned in
Program 03 with special PCB codes 23 or 24
(refer to Figure 4-2).
DSS consoles
and attendant
telephones
are
automatically
assigned as DSSl/ATTl
, DSS2/
ATT2, DSS3/ATT3,
or DSS4/ATT4, starting with
the lowest DSSPEKU
slots and continuing,
in
consecutive
order, to the highest DSSPEKU
slot (this also applies to DDSS consoles and
attendant telephones).
Each DSS console is assigned to the attendant
telephone
connected
to the same PEKU PCB
supporting
that DSS console; however,
DSS
consoles may be flexibly reassigned (in Program

netted to one HDCB.
A maximum
of four HDCBs are allowed per
system with PCTU(l,
2, or 3) and three with
PCTUSl .
One PEKU or PESU circuit, always circuit number 5, is required per HDCB. PDKU does not
support the HDCB.
HDCBs can only be connected
to PEKU or
PESU port numbers 04, 12,20, and 28.
Always install HDCBs to PEKU or PESU PCBs
that are in lower slot numbers than PEMU PCBs.
This is required to maintain alignment of PEKU
and/or PESU circuit 5 and PEKU and/or PESU
port numbers 04, 12,20, and 28.
HDCBs do not require a special PCB code in

Program 03.
l

l

I
l
l

HDCB assignments
1, 77-2, and 79.
Door phones can be
digital and electronic
the system).
Door phones do not
Cut W9 on all PEKUs
HDCB.

are found in Programs 77programmed
to ring at any
telephone
(no limit within
ring standard telephones
.
and PESUs that support an

4.30 DSS/DDSS Console Hardware Configuration Notes
A maximum of four DDSS consoles or four DSS
consoles
(or any combination
up to four) is
allowed per system with PCTU(1, 2, or 3) and
three with PCTUS.
DDSS consoles operate with PCTU3 only, while
DSS consoles operate with PCTUI, 2, or 3 or
PCTUS.
DDSS consoles normally operate in conjunction
with digital telephones.
Each DDSS console is
assigned to an associated digital telephone (on
circuit 1 of the same PDKU), which in turn are
referred to as a DDSS/attendant
telephone.
DSS consoles normally operate in conjunction
with electronic telephones.
Each DSS console is
assigned to an associated electronic telephone
(on circuit 1 of the same PEKU), which in turn are
referred to as a DSS/attendant
telephone.
DDSS consoles will operate with electronic telephones and DSS consoles
will operate with
digital telephones.
One PDKU PCB is required for each DDSS/

28) to any of the designated attendant telephones allowing a maximum of four DSS consoles assigned to one attendant telephone (this
also applies to digital telephones).
DSS console buttons may be flexibly assigned
(in Program 29) as CO line buttons, DSS (hot
line) buttons, and speed dial buttons.

4.40 Data Interface Unit (DIU) Configuration
Notes
l

l

4-26

The integrated
data interface unit (PDIU-DI)
shares the same wire pair and PDKU station
circuit with the digital telephone
to which it is
connected.
The PDIU-DI requires
a PCTU3
control PCB. The PDIU-DI capacity is shown in
Table 4-B.
The PDIU-DI is a DCE type device that normally
connects to a personal computer serial commu-

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION200-096-204
FEBRUARY1991
l

l

nications port or ASCII terminal.
The stand-alone data interface unit (PDIU-DS)
requires one PDKU station circuit and one or two
pair of wires (see Chapter 9 for wiring information). PDIU-DS capacity is shown in Table 4-B.
PDIU-DSs may be configured as a DTE or DCE
type device and connect to modems, printers, or
host mainframe computers.

4-27

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 200-096-204
FEBRUARY 1991
DK 96 (Top Shelf)
01

SLOT NO.

‘bh%NS

.-

,‘._’

02

03

t?xYi/A771 Dssz/7~2
r%zBo4
iweB 72
EU&?fl)

~’

‘STA. PORi N0.si. :

00 w 07

COME LINE NO.S

-

04

05

DDJcf4/

Iv/u--Ds

74m
PD/M-D/
h-9

14

a-31

32-39

40-47

-

-

Dss/A~3

EOiUfh)
16-23

08-Z-

-

-

DK 96
(Bottom Shelf)
SLOT NO.

00

09

10

11

PCB CODE

92

M

M

25

i’CB TYPE
0PTlON”S’
STA. PORT N0.s
CO/TIE iNi!

hi&

PCTU ,WW

,WU

06

07

08 .

ad5)

48-55

-

-

_

07-N

PCB CODE
Reference Table
I
13

PESM PEMh’

PORTS/TYPE

I
00

41
CRCU4

1

YZ

NUNt

lrxx4

-

-

-

05-08 09-12

56-63
-

64-67

41

PEPU
I

INUN

t

I

I

13-16

NONE

00

NONE

PESU

25

8lSTA.

PESU
EOCU

26

8fSTA.

PDKU

62

8fSTA.

PDKU
w/DDSS

64

8lSTA.

FIGURE 4-P-HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONEXAMPLE
4-28

TOSHIBASYSTEMPRACTICES
DIGITALKEYTELEPHONESYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION 200-096-205
FEBRUARY1991

StrataTax
RELEASE

1,2, and 3

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER FIVE
KSU INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION200-096-205
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
2.30
3
4
4.10
4.20
5
6

SUBJECT

.

'PAGE

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .
KSU INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .
Wall Mounting . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .
Table-top Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
KSU AC Power and Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
POWER SUPPLY TEST PROCEDURE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .
POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOLTAGE TROUBLESHOOTING
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .

5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-4

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4

TITLE
WALL MOUNTING
BRACKET INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
PPSU24 FRONT PANEL AND DC OUT TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .
PPSU56 FRONT PANEL AND DC OUT TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .
PPSU96 FRONT PANEL AND DC OUT TEST POINTS . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .
LOWER LEFT OF DK24, BACKPLANE
PCB (PMB-824) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSU WALL MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .

5-i

PAGE
5-1
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5

INSTALLATIQN-KSU
SECTION200-096-205
FEBRUARY 1991
1 GENERAL
1 .OO This chapter provides the procedures necessary to install the DK KSUs. The chapter includes
mounting considerations,
grounding instructions,
and instructions to test the power supply. Instructions to remove and replace the power supply are
also provided.

$15.9

in. (DK96) \

2 KSU INSTALLATION
2.00 The KSU may be either wall-mounted
or
table-top
mounted.
The following
paragraphs
provide procedures for both mounting options.
2.01
l

l

FIGURE 5-I
WALL MOUNTING BRACKET INSTALLATION

To optimize airflow and ventilation:
Ensure that the installation
site provides the
minimum clearances
specified in Installation
Site Requirements,
Section
200-096-203,
Paragraph 3.
Do not block the ventilation
holes at the rear
and both sides of the KSU.

4) Hang the KSU
screws.

the top two

mounting

5) Install a third 1.25-inch panhead wood screw
through the hole in the bottom mounting bracket.

2.10 Wall Mounting

6) Tighten the three mounting
secure the KSU to the wall.

1) Install the three wall-mounting
brackets (packed
in the shipping carton with the KSU) on the rear
of the KSU in both upper corners, and at the
bottom center. Secure each bracket to the KSU
with the back panel screws and the screws
supplied with the brackets (see Figure 5-l).

screws

firmly to

2.20 Table-top Mounting
2.21 Table-top

mounting requires no special installation procedures.
However, it is suggested
that the top wall-mounting
brackets be installed to
ensure adequate ventilation at all times.

NOTE:
The KSU back panel should not be removed.

NOTE:
Do not install the KSU directly

2) Mark the appropriate mounting screw locations
on the wall by using Figure 5-1, or hold the KSU
against the wall at the selected mounting location. Mark the positions of the holes in the flat
part of each mounting
bracket where they
contact the wall. Mounting screws will be installed at these locations.

I

from

on the floor.

2.30 KSU AC Power and Ground
2.31 Ensure

the system AC power and earth
ground complies with the requirements
listed in
Installation Site Requirements,
Section 200-096203, prior to connecting the AC power plug.

NOTE:
Wall anchors are required for dry-wall surfaces where studs do not align with the
mounting screw locations (see Figure 5-6).

NOTE:
TheACpowermustbe
dedicated to the KSU.
Do not use power/ground
intended for another piece of equipment.

1 3) Install two 1.25-inch long panhead wood screws
approximately
half way into the wall at the
upper mounting bracket locations.

2.32 Ensure that SG/FG and LG/FG ground straps
are installed.

5-1

I

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION200-096-205
FEBRUARY 1991
nectar (DK24) and measure again. If a measured voltage is still unacceptable,
rep!ace the
power supply (refer to Paragraph 4).

3 POWER SUPPLY TEST PROCEDURE
3.00 Perform the power supply test procedure
with all PCBs removed from the KSU.

DC Voltage
-24V:
-5V:
+5V:

NOTE:
Refer to System Description, Section 200-096202, for illustrations and descriptions
of KSU
controls and indicators.

3.01 To test the power supply voltages with all
circuit boards installed, install the circuit boards
and then use the procedure in Paragraph 3.00 for
the PPSU56/96,
but follow the four steps below to
test the PPSU24.

1) Plug the AC power cable into the AC IN connector and to the AC wall socket.
NOTE:
The DK24 power cable is permanent/y
nected to the power supply.

con-

1) Loosen the four screws
the back of the KSU.

2) Lightly press all power supply circuit breakers
to ensure they have not accidentally
opened
during shipment.
3) Set the power supply power switch
Ensure that the power supply indicators
follows:
. DK24:
l
POWER indicator
l
-24V indicator
l
+5V indicator
l
-5V indicator
l
-24V, W V, (circuit breakers)
. DK56:
l
POWER indicator
l
+5V indicator
. -5V indicator
l
-24V, W V, (circuit breakers)
. DK96:
l
POWER indicator
l
-5V indicator
l
+5V, indicator
l
+5V, indicator
l
-24V, W V,(circuit breakers)

Range Specifications
-26.3 - -27.0
-4.5 -5.5
+4.5 - +5.5

holding

the panel on

2) Lift the panel up and pull it off of the KSU.
3) On the lower left side of the backplane
PCB
(PMB-824), the test points for the various voltages are marked. Refer to Figure 5-5.

to ON.
light as

4) Using the multimeter
(set to the appropriate
range), measure the voltages at the designated test points.
NOTE:
The multimeter test probes must have sharp
tips to penetrate solder mask on backplane
PCB.

4 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL
REPLACEMENT

AND

4.00 The following paragraphs provide procedures
necessary
to remove and replace faulty power
supplies.
4.10

4) Using a multimeter (set to the appropriate range),
measure the voltages at the pins of the DC OUT
connector for DK56/DK96 or the PI backplane
connector for DK24 as shown in Figures 5-2,53, or 5-4. Ensure that the voltages fall within the
ranges specified.
If a measured voltage falls
outside of the acceptable
range, remove the
DC power plug from the power supply DC OUT
connector
(DK56/96) or PI backplane
con-

Power

Supply

Removal

4.11 DK24. Refer to Figure 5-2 and remove the
power supply in accordance
with the following
steps:
1) Remove

screws (2) on right side of the KSU.

2) Slide the power supply out and gently remove
it from the KSU.

5-2

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION 200-096-205
FEBRUARY1991
PPSU 24

Irr

CABLE FROM REAR
OF POWER SUPPLY

!
2
-

ii?
a
-

,POWER
SWITCH

BATTERY
CONNECTOR

’

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

?

-

FG

-24v2

-24V,

-5v

\

+5V

VOLTAGE
LED’s

Pi

\

POWER

,I

III,

BACKPLANE
KSU (FRONT

0
.

CONNECTOR

III

MOUNTING
SCREWS ON
RIGHT SIDE

DG

-\

VIEW)

TEST POINTS

CORD

FlGURE5-2-PPSU24FRONTPANELANDDCOUTTESTPOlNTS
3) Reach behind the power supply and disconnect the cable at the PI backplane connector

PPSU56
PPSU.56

4.12 DK56/96. Refer to Figures 5-3 and 5-4 and
remove the power supply in accordance with the
following steps:

8

1) Squeeze the locking tab on the DC OUT plug,
and remove the plug from the DC OUT connector.
DC OUT TEST POINTS
2) Remove the four combination
slotted/Phillips
mounting screws from the power supply front
panel.
3) Slide the power supply
4.20

Power

Supply

DC OUT

out.

I 0000

Replacement

-24V2

4.21 DK24 Refer to Figure 5-2 and replace the
PPSU24 in accordance
with the following steps:
1) Slide the power supply partially
end of the PCB slot shelf.

-24v3

DG

-5v

7FIGURES-3-PP~U~~FRONTPANELANDDC

in to the right

OUTTESTPOINTS

5-3

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION 200-096-205
FEBRUARY 1991

PPSU96

DC OUT
+SJ,

-5V,

0

0’

-24Vj

-24V2

0

0

(”

-24V3

0

FIGURE 5-5-LOWER LEFT OF DK24,
BACKPLANEPCB (PMB-824)

FIGURE 5-4-PPSU96 FRONT PANEL AND DC
OUT TEST POINTS

inserted one way). Insert the plug into the
connector until its locking tab engages.

2) Reach behind the power supply, and connect
the cable from the rear of the power supply into
connector Pl on the KSU backplane.

5 CIRCUIT BREAKER
3) Slide the power supply completely into the slot
and secure it with screws (2) on the right side of
the KSU.

5.00 Referto Fault Finding, Section 200-096-500,
Tables B, C, and D for circuit breaker distribution.

6 VOLTAGE

4.22 DK56196. Refer to Figures 5-3 or 5-4, and
replace the power supply in accordance
with the
following steps:
1) Slide the new power supply into the opening
the KSU.

DISTRIBUTION

TROUBLESHOOTING

6.00 Refer to Fault Finding, Section 200-096-500,
Paragraph 6, for voltage troubleshooting.

in

2) Align the mounting screw holes on the power
supply’s front panel with the holes in the KSU’s
power supply mounting bracket.
3) Secure the power supply with the four combination slotted/Phillips
screws.
4) Insert the DC OUT cable plug into the DC OUT
connector (this is a keyed plug that can only be

5-4

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION200-096-205
FEBRUARY
1991
STUD

.

FIGURE5-6-KSU WALLMOUNTING
NOTE:
If mounting the KSU directly to a wall, be sure to align screws with studs behind the wall; if using a hard
board between the KSU and the wall, install screws first to hard board, and then secure hard board
to the wall, making certain that screws are aligned with studs.

5-5

INSTALLATION-KSU
SECTION200-096-205
FEBRUARY1991

This page intentionally left blank

5-6

TOSHIBASYSTEMPRACTICES
OIGITALKEYTELEPHONESYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991

Strata”mcx
RELEASE

1,2, and 3

INSTALLATION
PRINTED

CHAPTER SIX
CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT!
It is strongly advisable to install PCBs in the positions
manner specified in Paragraph 2. IO.

and the

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
‘\
i
/

IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES:
These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation.
1. Set PCTU jumper plug for BATTERY OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed customer
data will be lost on power down.
2. Place PEPLJ, PIOUS, or PIOU PCB in highest slot number of KSU.
3. Place all other PCBs in KSU from lowest slot number to highest in the following order:
PCTU or PCTUS
PEKU or PDKU (starting at Slot 01)
PSTUPSTU2
PESU
Pcou/Pcou2
PEMU
4. Run Program 90. Initialize Programs 00 - 97, and turn power OFF for 5 seconds, then
turn power back ON.
5. Run Program 92.
6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming
power OFF for 5 seconds, then turn power back ON.

mode, and turn

WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs:
1. Move PEMU PCBs to a higher slot number to create empty slots for additions.
2. Install new PCBs and reprogram with Program 03. Change PEMU station numbers or
reassign stations.
3. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions.

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
2.30
2.40
2.50
3
3.00
3.10
3.20
3.30
3.40
4
4.00
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.40
5
5.00
5.10
5.20
5.30
5.40
6
6.00
6.10
6.20
6.30
6.40
7
7.00
7.10
7.20
7.30
7.40
8
8.00
8.10
8.20
8.30
8.40
9
9.00
9.10

SUBJECT

.

,PAGE

GENERAL .................................................................................................................
6-l
*PCB INSTALLATION
OVERVIEW ...........................................................................
6-l
PCB Installation Considerations
............................................................................
6-1
Recommended
Universal PCB Slot Assignments
.................................................
6-l
Station and Line Expansion ...................................................................................
6-I
PCB Option Considerations
.......... ........................................................................
6-2
PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations..
...................................................
6-2
*COMMON
CONTROL UNIT (PCTU or PCTUSl) ....................................................
6-2
General ..................................................................................................................
6-2
PCTU Hardware Options .......................................................................................
6-2
PCTU Installation Procedures ........... ....................................................................
6-5
PCTU Wiring .........................................................................................................
6-6
PCTU Programming
Overview ..............................................................................
6-6
*ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
INTERFACE
UNIT (PEKU) .......................................
6-6
General ..................................................................................................................
6-6
PEKU Hardware Options .......................................................................................
6-6
PEKU Installation Procedures ...............................................................................
6-9
PEKU Wiring .........................................................................................................
6-9
PEKU Programming
Overview ..............................................................................
6-9
*STANDARD
TELEPHONE
INTERFACE
UNIT (PSTU). ..........................................
6-9
General ..................................................................................................................
6-9
PSTU (1 and 2) Hardware Options .......................................................................
6-10
PSTU Installation Procedures
........... ....................................................................
6-11
PSTU Wiring ..........................................................................................................
6-11
PSTU Programming
Overview ..............................................................................
6-11
*STANDARD/ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
INTERFACE
UNIT (PESU) ..................
6-11
General ..................................................................................................................
6-11
PESU Hardware Options .......................................................................................
6-13
PESU Installation Procedures
...............................................................................
6-14
PESU Wiring .........................................................................................................
6-14
PESU Programming
Overview ..............................................................................
6-14
*CO LINE UNIT (PCOU) ...........................................................................................
6-14
General ..................................................................................................................
6-14
PCOU Hardware Options ......................................................................................
6-15
PCOU Installation Procedures
.......... ....................................................................
6-15
PCOU Wiring .........................................................................................................
6-15
PCOU Programming
Overview .............................................................................
6-15
*E & M TIE LINE UNIT (PEMU) ................................................................................
6-17
General ..................................................................................................................
6-17
PEMU Hardware Options ......................................................................................
6-17
PEMU Installation Procedures
..............................................................................
6-17
PEMU Wiring. ........................................................................................................
6-19
PEMU Programming
Overview .............................................................................
6-19
*OPTION INTERFACE
UNIT (PIOU and PIOUS) .....................................................
6-19
General ..................................................................................................................
. 6-19
PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options ....................................................................
6-22
*see Paragraphs

6-i

11 - 21 for Release 3 considerations.

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
TABLE OF CONTENTS(continued)
PARAGRAPH
9.20
9.30
9.40
IO
10.00
10.10
10.20
10.30
10.40
II
I2
I3
13.00
13.10
13.20
13.30
13.40
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
20
21

SUBJECT

. PAGE

PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedures .............................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Wiring .......................................................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Programming
Overview.. ..........................................................
*EXTERNAL
PAGE INTERFACE
UNIT (PEPU) .......................................................
General ..................................................................................................................
PEPU Hardware Options .......................................................................................
PEPU Installation Procedure .................................................................................
PEPU Wiring .........................................................................................................
PEPU Programming
Overview ..............................................................................
INSTALLATION-PCB
FOR RELEASE 3 ...................................................................
OVERVIEW
(Release 3) ........................................................
PCB INSTALLATION
PDKU (Release 3) .....................................................................................................
General ..................................................................................................................
PDKU Hardware Options ......................................................................................
PDKU Installation Procedures ...............................................................................
PDKU Wiring .........................................................................................................
PDKU Programming
Overview ..............................................................................
PCTU (Release 3) .....................................................................................................
PEKU (Release 3) .....................................................................................................
PSTU (Release 3) .....................................................................................................
PESU (Release 3) ....... . .............................................................................................
PCOU (Release 3) ....................................................................................................
PEMU (Release 3) ....................................................................................................
PIOU AND PIOUS (Release 3) .................................................................................
PEPU (Release 3). ....................................................................................................

6-23
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-24
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-25
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28

.‘:
2,’

FIGURE LIST
TITLE

FIGURE
6-I
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15

PAGE

PCTU CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS..
................
PCTUSI CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
.............
DTMF RECEIVER UNIT (CRCU) INSTALLATION
...................................................
AND INTERFACE
PEKU CONTROLS
CONNECTORS
...........................................
OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE
UNIT (EOCU) INSTALLATION
..............................
PSTU (l/2) AND SUBUNIT (SSTU) ..........................................................................
PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION..
......................................
PCOU CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
.................
PEMU CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
...................................................................
PIOU CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
...................
PIOUS PCB SWITCH/JUMPER,
OPTION LOCATION.. ...........................................
REMOTE MAINTENANCE
MODEM UNIT (IMDU) INSTALLATION
........................
PEPU CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS..
................
PDKU INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
........................................................................
PCTU3 CO,NTROLS, INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
..................

6-3
6-3
6-5
6-7
6-7
6-10
6-12
6-15
6-17
6-20
6-20
6-23
6-24
6-26
6-28

I
,’

*see Paragraphs

11 - 21 for Release 3 considerations.

6-ii

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLELIST
TABLE
6-A
6-B
6-C
6-D
6-E
6-F
6-G
6-H
6-l

SUBJECT

.

PCTU AND PCTUS CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
.........................................................................................................
CONNECTORS
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
PEKU CONTROLS
...........................................
PSTU CONTROLS
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
...........................................
PESU CONTROLS
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
...........................................
PCOU CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
.................
PEMU CONTROLS,
INDICATORS,
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
.................
CONNECTORS
............................................
PIOU CONTROLS
AND INTERFACE
PIOUS CONTROLS
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS..
........................................
PEPU CONTROLS
AND INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
...........................................

6-iii

'PAGE
6-4
6-8
6-10
6-13
6-16
6-18
6-21
6-22
6-25

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
1 GENERAL

2.21 The following
steps describe
the recommended installation order and slot assignments
for
STRATA DK system station, line, and peripheral
PCBs. Installation order is the same for all systems.

1.Ol This chapter provides procedures

for installation of STRATA DK system printed circuit boards
(PCBs). This includes installation instructions, PCB
optional configuration
information,
and wiring and
programming
considerations
for each PCB.
1.02 Begin PCB installation
of KSU installation.

only after completion

NOTE:
Be sure the power supply has been
and the ground has been checked.

2 PCB INSTALLATION

tested,

1)

Install all PEKU PCBs, from left to right, starting with slot 01. Do not skip slots.

2)

Then install all PSTU PCBs, from left to right,
starting with the lowest numbered empty slot.
Do not skip slots.

3) Then install all PESU PCBs, from left to right,
starting with the lowest numbered
Do not skip slots.

OVERVIEW

NOTE:
Normally,
PEKU or
less than
less than

2.01 STRATA DK system KSUs are shipped with
only the power supply installed. No PCBs are
included. PCBs must be installed in accordance
with the configuration
information
obtained
and
developed in System Configuration,
Section 200096-204.

4)

2.10 PCB Installation Considerations
2.11 The PCTU or PCTUSI (DK24 only) PCB
must be installed in the PCTU slot. PCB slots SO1
- SO6 (DK24), PCB slots SO1 - SO8 (DK56), and
PCB slots SO1 a S14 (DK96) are universal; any of
the optional PCBs may be installed in any available
slot, as long as the system is programmed
to
recognize the chosen configuration.
However, it is
recommended
that station PCBs (PEKUs, PSTUs,
PESUs), and CO line/E & M TIE line PCBs (PCOUs
and PEMUs) be installed in a certain order. Use of
these configuration
recommendations
will reduce
reprogramming
in future system expansion,
and
keep the system station and CO line numbering
scheme simple.

empty slot.

one PEW is installed instead of a
PSTU in configurations
that require
three standard telephone ports or
five electronic telephone ports.

Then install all PCOU PCBs, from left to right,
starting with the lowest numbered empty slot.
Do not skip slots.

5) Then install all PEMU PCBs, from left to right,
starting with the lowest numbered
Do not skip slots.

empty slot.

6) Install a PIOU, PIOUS,

or PEPU in the last slot
(slot 06 in DK24, slot 08 in DK56, or slot 14 in
DK96).

2.30 Station and Line Expansion
2.31 If station or line PCBs (PEKU, PSTU, PESU,
PCOU, and/or PEMU) must be added to an existing
installation,
install the PCBs in the order recommended in Paragraph 2.20, starting with the lowest
numbered
empty slot. For example, if it is necessary to add eight standard telephones and four CO
lines, install a PSTU PCB in the lowest numbered
empty slot and then a PCOU PCB in the next empty
slot. Do not skip slots.

2.12 DK24/56/96 PCB Configuration Recommendations. First install station PCBs (PEKU,
PSTU, and PESU) from left to right and then CO
line/E & M TIE line PCBs (PCOUs and PEMUs)
from left to right, and optional PCBs (PIOU, PIOUS
or PEPU) from right to left, so that vacant slots are
in the middle.

2.32 If PEKU, PSTU, PERU and/or PCOU PCBs
are added, it is advisable to move any PEMU PCBs
to the right to make room for the new PCBs.

2.20 Recommended Universal PCB Slot
Assignments

6-1

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
NOTE:
For initial system programming,
install an
electronic telephone station PCB (PEKU) in
slot 01, and connect a ZO-button LCD electronic telephone to port 05. It is suggested that
a live telephone not be connected to port 05 to
avoid accidentally
entering the programming
mode.

OFF, whenever possible, when removing or
installing PEKU, PSTU, PESU, PCOU, PEMU,
PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs.

3 COMMON CONTROL UNIT
(PCTU OR PCTUSI)
3.00 General
3.01 The Common Control Unit (PCTU) PCB provides centralized
control for the KSU. The PCTU
incorporates
a 68000-type
microprocessor
and
contains custom time switch and conference
LSI
circuitry. One PCTU must be installed in STRATA
DK24, DK56, and DK96 models.

2.40 PCB Option Considerations
2.41 STRATA DK PCBs may be configured for a
variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies)
or
external (related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background
music, voice mail, etc).
Hardware and software options for each PCB are
identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter.

3.02 There are three PCTU versions (PCTUI ,
PCTU2, and PCTUSI).
The capacity and/or function of each PCTU model is different,
so it is
important to use the correct PCTU in each DK
system.

2.42 PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be
configured
for the applicable
hardware
options
prior to installation of the PCB in the KSU. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are
provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Configuration
instructions for
external hardware options are provided in Peripheral Installation, Section 200-096-208.

3.03 PCTUl/PCTU2isintendedforusewith
DK56/
96, but may also be used in DK24. The PCTUSl
may only be used in DK24. The detailed differences between the PCTU versions aredescribed
in
Paragraph 6.10 and Table 2-B of Section 200-096-

202.
NOTE:
Any further reference
to the PCTU in this
section
applies to PCTUl,
PCTUZ, AND
PCTUSI.

2.43 PCB Software Options. PCBs are configured for software options through programming,
after installation of the PCBs in the KSU. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the
individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Programming
Procedures, Section
200-096-300,
for detailed programming
instructions.

3.04 The PCTU may be equipped with an optional
4- or 8-circuit DTMF receiver (CRCU-4 or CRCU8), allowing the PCTU to receive tone dialing.
DTMF signals transmit from DISA, CO lines, TIE
lines and PSTU/PESU
standard
ports, and the
PCTU converts these signals to digital data for the
STRATA DK system CPU.

2.50 PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations
2.51 Whenever

removing or installing
serve the following requirements:

3.05 PCTU and PCTUSI controls, indicators, and
interface connectors are shown in Figures 6-1 and
6-2 and described in Table 6-A.

PCBs, ob-

1) The power supply must be OFF whenever
removing or installing the PCTU PCB.
2) It is recommended

that the power supply

3.10 PCTU Hardware Options
3.11 The PCTU supports
options:

be

6-2

the following

hardware

-:

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991

BATTERY
OCI VERSION

ROMS

BACKPLANE

CONNECTOR

P8

P9

L

FlGURE6-I-PCTIJ

CONTROLS,INOICATORS, ANOINTERFACECONNECTORS

BATTERY
00

BACKPLANE
r,n,,nr
rllr~Kt

VERSION

CONNECTOR
r. n

I)-Z-rLI

mnTl.na

I US1

P8
CL-..--*.
WN

1 KUL8,

A .I.-.-----INuicAI

6-3

UK&

----

AND

INTERFACE

’

P9

CONNECTORS

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE6-A
PCTUANDPCTUSCONTROLS,INDICATORS,ANDlNTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figures 6-I & 6-2)

l

DESCRIPTION

PCTU ON/OFF
Jumper Pl

Three-terminal

DTM F Receiver
Connector P2

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional DTMF
Receiver P2 Unit subassembly
(used in conjunction with P3, P8, and P9).

DTM F Receiver
Connector P3

6-pin connector

Interface connector for optional DTMF
Receiver P3 Unit subassembly
(used in conjunction with P2, P8, and P9).

MoH’BGM
Connector

Two-terminal

connector

Three-terminal

jumper

Music ‘Ource
P6

BATT Battery
P7

l

TYPE OF COMPONENT

Strap

jumper

plug

Enables PCTU (1 & 2 only) PCB for
operation. Should always be in ON position

Interface connector for Musicon-Hold (MOH)/Background
Music
source.
plug

Interface connector for on-board
battery that protects configuration
stored in system RAM.

lithium
data

DTM F Receiver
Connector
P8

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional DTMF
Receiver P8 Unit subassembly
(used in conjunction with P2, P3, and P9).

DTMF Receiver
Connector
P9

6-pin connector

Interface connector for optional DTMF
Receiver P9 Unit subassembly
(used in conjunction with P2, P3, and P8).

MOH/BGM Music Source
Volume Control VRI

Trim potentiometer

Adjusts volume
Hold/Background

Heartbeat

Red LED

Flashes to indicate operation (l/4-second
on-l/4-second
off); (PCTUl, 2, or 3 only).

Indicator

Internal Options
l
DTMF Receiver Unit, four circuit (CRCU-4)
l
DTMF Receiver Unit, eight circuit (CRCU-8)
External Options
l
Music-on-Hold/Background
Music (connected to P6 and VR1 level control)
NOTE:
Refer to Peripheral
Section 200-096-208,
ternal options.

for Music-onMusic feature.

CAUTION!
Do not remove insulating shield from back
of PCTU PCB. If shield comes off, do not
allow the backof the PCB to contact metal.
1) Remove the PCTU
protective packaging.

Equipment
Installation,
for installation
of ex-

and

CRCU

from

their

NOTE:
PCTU connectors
P2, P3, P8, and P9 are
positioned to allow installation of the CRCU (-4
or -8) only in the proper position,

3.12 DTMF Receiver Unit (CRC&4
or CRCU-8)
Installation.
Install the DTMF Receiver Unit (CRCU)
in accordance with the following steps:

2) Mate CRCU

6-4

connectors

Jl,

J2, J3, and J4

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
J2
CRCU (-4 or -8)

J4

\!

!

\

J3

P9
P8

ROM (4 each)
Located under CRCU

FlGURE6-3-DTMF
with PCTU connectors
(refer to Figure 6-3).

RECEIVERUNlT(CRCU)lNSTALLATlON

P2, P3, P8, and P9

NOTE:
The PCTU
P7battery
is moved
the PCTU
information

3) Apply firm, even pressure to CRCU to ensure
proper mating of connectors.

is shipped from the factory with the
strap in the OFFposition.
Ensure it
to the ON position when installing
to protect customer configuration
stored in the PCTU RAM.

3.20 PCTU Installation Procedures
3.21 Install the PCTU in accordance

4) Ensure the PCTU has been configured for the
appropriate
hardware options (refer to Paragraph 3.10).

with the fol-

lowing steps:
CAUTION!
Do not remove plastic

insulating shield
from back of PCTU PCB. If shield comes
off, do not allow the back of the PCB to
con tact metal.

NOTE:
Ensure the PCTU’s component
side is facing
right when installing it in the KSU.
IMPORTANT

1) Remove
ing.

the PCB from its protective

NOTE:

The power supply must be OFF when installing the PCTU PCB.

packag-

2) Set the PCTU Pl switch to the ON position
(PCTU,l or 2 only, not on PCTUSl).

5) Insert the PCTU into slot 00, labeled PCTU, and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors:

3) Set the PCTU P7 battery strap (BATT) to the
ON position.

6) After installing

6-5

the PCTU, gently pull the PCB

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
outward. If the connectors are properly
a slight resistance will be felt.

4 ELECTRONIC

mated,

TELEPHONE
UNIT (PEKU)

INTERFACE
.

4.00 General

NOTES:
1. Do not adjust trimmer capacitor C4. The
capacitor is factory-calibrated.
2. When transporting the PCTU, keep the P7
battery strap in the ON position if it is desired to save the configuration
data stored
in PCTU RAM (the battery will protect
RAM for approximately
six years); otherwise, to conserve the lithium battery, move
P7 to the OFF position. When packaging
the PCTU, use only a non-conductive
material enclosure, such as plain paper.
Conductive material can cause the internal battery to discharge and erase memory in the PCB.

4.01 The Electronic
Telephone
Interface
Unit
(PEKU) provides eight ports for electronic
telephones. Depending on system configuration,
DK24
can support up to four PEKUs with PCTU (1 or 2)
and three PEKUs with PCTUSI ; DK56 can support
up to eight PEKU PCBs, and DK96 up to twelve
PEKU PCBs.
4.02 The number of electronic telephones that can
be connected to PEKU PCBs in a system depends
on the series of telephones
used. This is due to
power capacity. It is recommended
that the current
6500-series
be used, because this series consumes the least amount of power. The maximum
number of 6500-series
electronic telephones
allowed in DK24 is 32, in DK56 is 64, and in DK96 is
96. If using an electronic telephone
series other
than, or mixed with, the 6500-series,
see the configuration
chapter, Section 200-096-204,
worksheet 7.

3.30 PCTU Wiring
3.31 Refer to MOH/BGM Wiring Diagram, Section
200-096-208,
for PCTU wiring/interconnecting
details.
3.40 PCTU Programming Overview

4.03 The PEKU can be configured
for Off-hook
Call Announce (to receive OCA calls) by installing
an Off-hook Call Announce
Unit (EOCU). It can
also be configured
to support a DSS console, a
Door Phone/Lock
Control Box (HDCB), and an
external Background Music (BGM) source connector. DSS consoles, HDCBs, and the BGM source,
are wired directly to the PEKU and require no
additional hardware, but do require specific ports/
circuits.

3.41 After initially installing a new and unused
PCTU, all on-board
RAM memory needs to be
erased by running Programs 90 and 92. If RAM
contains configuration
or feature data from previous programming
that should be retained, either do
not run these programs or use them selectively.
See the Programming
Procedures,
Section 200096-300.
3.42 The following parameters
may be specified,
through programming,
for the PCTU:

4.04 PEKU controls and interface connectors are
shown in Figure 6-4 and described in Table 6-B.

Program 03
l
l

Specify code 91 to indicate a normal PCTU.
Specify code 92 or 93 to indicate a PCTU with
DTMF Receiver Unit (CRCU-4 or CRCU-8, respectively) option installed.

4.10 PEKU Hardware Options
4.11 The PEKU supports

the following

options:

Internal Options

NOTE:
Codes 9 1,92, and 93 apply to both the PCTU
and PCTUSl.

l

l

Program 12
l

Select the seize time of the CRCU

Off-hook

Call Announce

External Options
l

circuit.

l

6-6

DSS console
Door Phone/Lock
BGM source connection

Unit (EOCU)

I

hardware

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
50-PIN AMPHENOL

W5, cut for y
BGM option

CONNECTOR

(FEMALE)

.

/-

,

P40

W9, cut for HDCB option

BACKPLANE

CONNECTOR

FlGURE6-4-PEKUCONTROLSANDlNTERFACECONNECTORS
NOTE:
Refer to Telephone Installation, Sections200096-207 and 200-096-208,
for installation
of
external options.

4.12 Off-hook Call Announce (EOCU) Installation. Install the Off-hook Call Announce
Unit
(EOCU)

in accordance

1) Remove
ing.

with the following

the PCB from its protective

steps:
packag-

NOTE:
PEKU connectors
PlO, P20, P40, P50, and
P60 are positioned to allow installation of the
EOCU only in the proper position (see Figure
6-4).
2) Mate EOCU connectors JIO, J20, J40, J50,
and J60with PEKU connectors Pl 0, P20, P40,
P50, and P60 (refer to Figure 6-5).

JIO

J20
I

3) Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure
proper mating of connectors.

(EOCU)lNSTALLATlON
6-7

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
TABLE 6-B
PEKU CONTROLSAND INTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-4)

TYPEOFCOMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P20,
P40, P50, and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P40, P50, and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P20, P50, and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P20, P40, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P60

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P20, P40, and P50).

DSSEKT DSS Console/
Electronic Telephone
SW1 Switch

Two-position

slide switch

Configures PEKU for operation with either
a DSS console or electronic telephones.

Door Phone W9 Jumper
Wire

White jumper

wire

When cut, configures PEKU for
installation of an optional HDCB.

BGM source connection
W5 Jumper Wire

White jumper

wire

When cut, configures PEKU for BGM
source connection (PEKU must be
installed in slot 01, port 02, circuit 3).

Off-hook Call
Announce PlO

Off-hook Call
Announce P20

Off-hook Call
Announce P40

Off-hook Call
Announce P50

2) Set the SW1 DSS/EKT switch to DSS.

4) Use a 3-pair cable for making connections
between the PEKU and the Off-hook
Call
Announce (OCA) electronic telephone.
Refer
to Wiring Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
for
wiring/interconnecting
details.

3) Refer to Telephone
Installation, Section 200096-207, for installation
procedures
for the
DSS console. Each DSS console requires
dedicated use of circuits 7 and 8 of a oarticular
PEKU PCB.

5) Refer to Telephone
Installation, Section 200096-207, for procedures to upgrade electronic
telephones
for OCA.

4.13 DSS Console Configuration. Configure
PEKU to support a DSSconsole
the following steps:
1) Remove
ing.

in accordance

the PCB from its protective

4.14 Door Phone/LockConfiguration.

Configure
the PEKU to support a Door Phone and/or Door
Lock in accordance with the following steps:

the
with

1) Remove
ing.

packag-

the PCB from its protective

2) If an HDCB will be connected
6-8

packag-

to the PEKU, cut

.

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
the W9 Door Phone jumper wire on the PEKU
PCB.

pressure
tors.

3) Refer to Telephone
Installation, Section 200096-207, for installation
procedures
for the
HDCB, control
box and associated
door
phones (MDFBs).
4) Each HDCB requires dedicated
5 of a particular PEKU PCB.

4)

proper mating of connec.

After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

4.30 PEKU Wiring

use of circuit

4.31 Refer to PEKU Wiring
200-096-290,

4.15 Background Music Configuration. Configure the PEKU to support a background
music
source in accordance
with the following steps:
1) Remove
ing.

to ensure

the PCB from its protective

Diagrams,
Section
for wiring/interconnecting
details.

4.40 PEKU Programming Overview
4.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming,
for the PEKU:

packag-

Program 03

2) Cut the W5 (BGM) jumper
PCB.

l

wire on the PEKU

l

l

3) Refer to Peripherals Installation, Section 200096-208, for installation procedures for BGM
connection.
NOTE:
The PEKU must be installed
a BGM connection.

l

l

Specify code 21 to indicate a station line PEKU.
Specify code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured
for OCA.
Specify code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured
for a DSS console.
Specify code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured
for OCA and a DSS console.
Door phones do not require a special code.

Program 1O-2

in slot 01 to allow

l

Used for BGM connection.

Programs 28 and 29
l

4) In Program 10-2, set LED 09 ON to enable
the PEKU (port 02) BGM source to be sent to
electronic telephone speakers and/or PIOU,
PIOUS, PEPU PCBs.

Used for DSS assignments.

Programs 77-1 and 77-2
l

Used for HDCB assignments,

5 STANDARD

4.20 PEKU Installation Procedures
4.21 Install the PEKU in accordance
lowing steps:

with the fol-

1)

Remove
ing.

the PCB from its protective

2)

Ensure the PEKU has been configured for the
appropriate
hardware options (refer to Paragraph 4.10).

TELEPHONE
UNIT (PSTU)

INTERFACE

5.00 General
5.01 The Standard

Telephone
Unit (PSTU) provides an interface between standard telephones or
two-wire devices and the system. Each PSTU PCB
adds eight standard telephone lines to the system.
There is no limit, other than the station size constraints of the PCTU PCB, to the number of PSTU
PCBs that can be installed in the system.

packag-

NOTE:
Ensure the PEKU’s component
side is facing
right when installing it in the KSU .

NOTE:
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones
generated
by a standard telephone
(or any
other device connected
to a PSTU port), a
DTMF Receiver Unit (CRCU-4 or CRCU-8)

3) Insert the PEKU into the appropriate slot (refer
to Paragraph
2.12), and apply firm, even

6-9

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)
t
\
I
I
h
1:
II
I I

Wl Ring Voltage
H = 19OV F-P
L=13OVP-P
/C^.. r3me-r,I u I \111
\rul
v.4) 1,
and PSTU2 only)

,

SSTU
SUBUNIT

0,

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
HtiUKt

must be installed on the Common
(PCTU) (refer to Paragraph 3).
5.02 PSTU controls are shown
described in Table 6-C.

ti-ti-t’S

I U (l/Z)

ANU SUWNI

I (SS I U)

P or 19OV P-P. The Wl jumper plug is used to set
the voltage level. Most standard telephones
and
two-wire
devices
require the 19OV P-P level;
however, some devices may experience
ring-trip
with 19OV P-P and they require the 13OV P-P level.

Control Unit

in Figure 6-6 and

5.10 PSTU (1 and 2) Hardware Options

NOTE:
PSTUl (V.4) became available in November
1989. PSTUl (V.3) was discontinued.

5.11 There are two PSTU versions (1 and 2): They
are identical except for the ring generator. The ring
generator on the original version (V.3) of PSTUl is
fixed at a 19OV P-P level, while the ring generator
on PSTUl (V.4) and PSTU2 can be set for 13OV P-

5.12 Set the PSTUI (V.4) or PSTU2 ring generator
level as required:
* WI set to H (19OV P-P).

TABLE 6-C
PSTUCONTROLSANDINTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-6)

r

Ring Voltage Wl Jumper
Plug (PSTUl (V.4) and
PSTU2 only)

TYPEOFCOMPONENT

Three-terminal

DESCRIPTION
Sets ring generator voltage
circuits (PSTU2 only).
H=190VP-P
.
L = 130v P-P

jumper

6-10

level for all

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
l

Wl set to L (13OV P-P).

l

Two ringers

maximum

Voice Mail or Auto Attendant devices (see Voice
Mail Installation, Section 200-096-208,
for more
.
details).

per port (H or L).

Program 1O-2

5.20 PSTU Installation Procedures
l

5.21 Install the PSTU in accordance

2) Ensure that the PSTU subunit (SSTU) is securely attached to the PSTU (refer to Figure 66).

NOTE:
Wl, the ring generator level option, should be
set in the H position (factory) for initial installation.
3) Insert the PSTU into the appropriate
slot, and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors.
4) After installing the PSTU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

6.00 General
6.01 The Standard/Electronic
Telephone
Unit
(PESU) provides two standard interface circuits (1
and 2) identical to PSTU circuits for connection
between standard telephones, or two wire devices,
and the system. It also provides four electronic
telephone
interface circuits (5 N 8) identical to
PEKU circuitsforconnecting
electronictelephones,
BGM, or one HDCB. The PESU provides a ring
generator for circuits 1 and 2 (with a ring voltage of
either 19OV P-P or 13OV P-P).
l
The PESU does not support a DSS console
connection.
l
The PESU provides connectors
to mount the
EOCU for OCA to electronic telephones.
l
The PESU supports HDCB and BGM connection.
l
PESU Requires Release 2 software.
NOTE:
A CRCU (-4 or -8) must be installed on the
PCTU or PCTUS 1 for the system to recognize
DTMF tones sent from standard telephones or
other two-wire devices that are connected to
the PEW.

5.30 PSTU Wiring
5.31 Refer to PSTU Wiring Diagram, Section
096-209, for wiring/interconnecting
details.

200-

6.02
The maximum number
per system is shown below:

5.32 The PSTU is registered for use with OLl3A
type lines for off-premises
stations.

5.40 PSTU Programming Overview
5.41 The following

parameters
may be specified,
programming,
for the PSTU:

Program 03
Specify code 31 for all slots that have PSTUs
installed.
Used to configure

all PSTU ports connected

of PESUs

System

PESUs

Std

Electronic
Telephone

DK24
DK24
DK56
DK96

3
5
8
12

6
10
16
24

12
20
32
48

allowed

PCTU
w
(1 or2)
(1 or2)
(1 or2)

6.03 The PESU controlsand
interface connectors
are shown in Figure 6-7 and described in Table
6-D.

Program 31
l

ringing option.

6 STANDARD/ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (PESU)

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging. The protective shield on the back of the
PSTU is designed to protect the installer from
potentially
hazardous
ring voltage. Do not
remove this shield.

l

telephone

with the fol-

lowing steps:

through

Used to set standard

to

6-11

INSTALLATION-PM
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
CUT W7 ONLY IF BGM IS CONNECTED
PORT 07, CIRCUIT 8, SLOT 01.

TO

/

OPTIONAL
EOCU, EQUIP
FOR OCA
FEATURE
50-PIN
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR
(FEMALE)

v,‘i

CUT W9 FOR
DOOR PHONE
OPTION (HDCB
ON CIRCUIT 5)

iw
iw
&G&-i
,~~~ I___-_---_--_____--____________
$,

Illk

I

;j
I

BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR

j P80

: ;
I___ ;

0
UP

0
g
P90

PESU

ESTS: STANDARD TELEPHONE
INTERFACE, ALWAYS EQUIPPED
FROM FACTORY

3ING VOLTAGE OPTION (PORTS 1 & 2):
- = LOW LEVEL (13OV P-P)
i = HIGH LEVEL (19OV P-P)

NOTE: Connect two ringers maximum per port (H or L).

FlGURE6-7-PESU

PCB OPTION LOCATIONAND IDENTIFICATION

6-12

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE6-D
PESUCONTROLSANDINTERFACECONNECTORS
I
I
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
TYPEOF COMPONENT
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-7)
Off-hook Call
Announce
PlO

Off-hook Call
Announce
P20

Off-hook Call
Announce P40

Off-hook Call
Announce P50

Off-hook Call
Announce P60

Ring Voltage
Plug P90

Jumper

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P20,
P40. P50. and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P40, P50. and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P20, P50, and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P20, P40, and P60).

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with PlO,
P20. P40. and P50).

Three-terminal

Sets ring generator voltage level for
circuits 1 and 2.
H = 19OV P-P (factory setting)
L= 130v P-P

jumper

Door Phone W9 Jumper
Wire

White jumper

wire

When cut, configures PESU, circuit 5 for
installation of an optional HDCB.

BGM W7 Jumper

White jumper

wire

When cut, configures PESU, port 07,
circuit 8, for BGM source connection
(slot 01 only)

Pack

6.12 Off-hook Call Announce (EOCU) Installation. Install the Off-hook Call Announce in accor-

6.10 PESU Hardware Options
6.11 The PESU supports

the following

dance with the following

hardware

options:
l

Internal

option:

Off-hook

Call

1) Remove
ing.

Announce

(EOCU).
l

.

Externbl option: Door Phone/Lock.

steps:

the PCB from its protective

packag-

NOTE:
PEW connectors PlO, P20, P40, P50, and
P60 are positioned to allow installation qf the
EOCU only in the proper position (refer to
Figure 6- 7).

NOTE:
Refer to Telephone Installation, Section ZOO096-207, for installation of external options.

6-13

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
JIO, 520, J40, J50,
and J60 with the PESU connectors PI 0, P20,
P40, P50, and P60 (refer to Figure 6-7).

2) Mate the EOCU connectors

3) Apply firm, even pressure to the EOCU
ensure proper mating of connectors.

mating

8) After installing the PESU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

to

6.31 Refer to PESU Wiring Diagram,
096-209,

Program 03
Specify code 25 for all slots that have PESUs
without EOCU.
Specify code 26 for all slots that have PESUs
equipped with EOCU.

with the fol-

NOTE:
A special code is not required
HDCB or BGM to a PEW.

Remove the PCB from its protective packaging. The protective shield on the back of the
PESU is designed to protect the installer from
potentially
hazardous
ring voltage. Do not
remove this shield.

Configures the PESU circuits 1 and 2forconnection to Voice Mail or Auto Attendant devices.
Sets the standard telephone
normal or distinctive ringing
connection.

ring cadence for
and BGM source

Programs 77-1 and 77-2
l

Assigns

an HDCB to a PESU port

7 CO LINE UNIT (PCOU)
7.00 General

to PESU circuits, cut

7.01 Each CO Line Unit (PCOU) PCB adds four
CO lines to the system. The PCOU provides Ring
Detection,
Dial Outpulsing
and Hold; as well as
Automatic Busy Redial circuitry. Each CO line can
be programmed
for DTMF or dial pulse. Depending
on system configuration,
DK24 can support up to
four PCOUs, DK56 up to five, and DK96 up to nine.

to port 07, circuit 8, slot

P90, is set
to the “H” position for initial installation. The “L”
position is used if devices connected
to the
PESU trip ring voltage before answer.

6) Ensure that the ring voltage option,

7)

an

Program 1O-2
l

connected to the
3) If the electronic telephones
PESU must receive OCA calls, install the
EOCU subassembly
PCB on the PESU per
Paragraph 6.12.

5) If BGM is connected
01, cut w7.

to connect

Program 31
l

Ensure that the PESU subunit (ESTS) is securely attached to the PESU (refer to Figure 67).

4) If an HDCB is connected
w9.

200-

6.41 The following parameters
may be specified,
through programming,
for the PESU:

6.20 PESU Installation Procedures

2)

for wiring/interconnecting

Section
details.

6.40 PESU Programming Overview

Installation, Section 2005) Refer to Telephone
096-207, for procedures to add OCA to electronic telephones.

1)

.’

6.30 PESU Wiring

4) Use 3-pair cable for connecting the PESU and
the OCA electronic telephone (refer to Wiring
Diagrams,
Section 200-096-209,
for wiring/
interconnecting
details).

6.21 Install the PESU in accordance
lowing steps:

:. \

of connectors.

NOTE:
There are two PCOU versions (1 and 2). They
are identical in fit/form/function
and are interchangeable
in all DK system models.

Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot, and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper

6-14

.:

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
CO LINE MODULAR
JACK CIRCUITS 1 AND 2

BACKPLANE

/JACK

CO LINE MODULAR
JACK CIRCUITS 3 AND 4

1

CONNECTOR
CON

FIGURE 6-8-PCOUCONTROLS,INDICATORS,ANDlNTERFACECONNECTORS
7.02 PCOU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-8 and described in
Table 6-E.

2) If the KSU is located within one mileof the PBX
or CO telephone office, set dB PAD switches
SW101 through SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal
level drop) position.

7.10 PCOU Hardware Options
7.11 There are no hardware
the PCOU.

options

supported

NOTE:
Ensure the PCOU’s component side is facing
right when installing it in the KSU.

by

3) Insert the PCOU into the appropriate
slot
(referto Paragraph 7.21), andapplyfirm,
even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.

7.20 PCOU Installation Procedures
7.21 Install the PCOU in accordance
lowing steps:
1) Remove
ing.

with the fol-

the PCB from its protective

4) After installing the PCOU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

packag-

NOTE:
ThedBPADswitchesSWlOl
throughSW401
control excessive loudness resulting from close
proximity to the CO or PBX telephone office by
providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from,
the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position.
Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal
level drop) position.

7.30 PCOU Wiring
7.31 Refer to PCOU Wiring Diagram, Section 200096-209,

for wiring/interconnecting

details.

7.40 PCOU Programming Overview
7.41 The following
6-15

parameters

may be specified,

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE 6-E
PCOUCONTROLS,INOICATORS,ANDlNTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-8)

TYPEOFCOMPONENT

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 3 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

CO Line Circuit 4
Indicator CD41 2

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 4 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

Jl Connector

Modular

connector

Interface connector
1 and 2.

for CO line circuits

J2 Connector

Modular

connector

Interface connector
3 and 4.

for CO line circuits

PAD Switch SW1 01

Two-position

slide

Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 1.

PAD Switch SW201

Two-position

slide

Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 2.

PAD Switch SW301

Two-position

slide

Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 3.

PAD Switch SW401

Two-position

slide

Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 4.

CO Line Circuit 1
Indicator CD1 12

CO Line Circuit 2
Indicator CD21 2

CO Line Circuit 3
Indicator CD31 2

through

programming,

for the PCOU:

group.

Program 03
l

Specify code 11 for the applicable
where each PCOU is installed.

Program 40

PCB slots

l

Program 1O-l
l

Allows/denies
DISA.

two-CO

Line

Conference

Assigns DTMF/DP Dialing, Tenant Service, DISA,
and a number of additional attributes to each CO
line.

l

Assigns

CO lines to groups

to CO lines (incoming

Assigns
only).

stations

access

to CO lines (outgoing

Program 42-0, l-8
l

Assigns behind
each CO line.

PBXCENTREX
I

operation

Programs 45 - 48

Program 16
l

Assigns stations access
and outgoing access).

Program 41

and

Program 15
l

DESCRIPTION

81 N 89, and dial 9

l

6-16

Defines

Toll Restrictions

for any CO line.

to

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
TIE LINE 2

GROUND/

TIE LINE 3

TIE LINE 4

/h/f

FACTORY
POSITIONS)

P403
BACKPLANE

CONNECTOR

P103
CI~IIPC
riuunL

E
v-3-n

q ennli

rmviu

twrm~ni
cluiy

i nuL3

Programs 50 - 56
l

Defines

Least Cost Routing

using CO lines.

Assigns special ringing of CO lines: Night Ring
Over Page, DISA, IMDU.

Programs 81 - 89
l
l

Assigns
Assigns

CO lines to ring selected stations.
Delayed Ringing to any CO line.

Program 93
l

Assigns

names to CO lines.

8 E & M TIE LINE UNIT (PEMU)
8.00 General
8.01 Each E & M TIE Line Unit (PEMU)

nfiln
nlYu

P203
~klnlnn~fin~
IlVulbHI

UK3

NOTES:
I. For the system to recognize
the DTMF
tones generated by incoming TIE lines, a
CRCU (-4 or -8) must be installed on the
PCTWPCTUS
I (refer to Paragraph 3).
2. The PEMU PCB uses four CO lines and
four station ports in software.
Only 24
station
ports are available
with the
PCTUSi;
however, in a DK24, only 16
station ports (not 20) will be available to
stations connected
to PESU, PEKU, or
PSTU PCBs. A PCTU is required to support up to 24 stations and 4 TIE lines in a
DK24.

Program 78
l

e

PCB

provides four TIE line interface circuits.
PEMU TIE lines may be configured for either 2or 4-wire transmission
with Type I signaling.
l
The TIE lines provide immediate start operation
only.
l
Each PEMU reduces system capacity by four
CO lines and four or eight station ports.
l
DK24 supports a maximum of one PEMU PCB,
DK56 a maximum of two, and DK96 a maximum
of three.

8.02 PEMU controls, indicators, and interfaceconnectars are shown in Figure 6-9 and described in
Table 6-F.

l

8.10 PEMU Hardware Options
8.11 There are no additional
supported by the PEMU. *

hardware

8.20 PEMU Installation Procedures
6-17

options

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE 6-F
PEMU CONTROLS,INDICATORS,ANDlNTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/ 1
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-9)
TIE Line Circuit 1
Indicator CD1 02

TYPEOFCOMPONENT
Red LED

DESCRIPTION
Lights to indicate TIE line 1 is in operation

TIE Line Circuit 2
Indicator CD202

Lights to indicate TIE line 2 is in operation

TIE Line Circuit 3
Indicator CD302

Red LED

Lights to indicate TIE line 3 is in operation

TIE Line Circuit 4
Indicator CD402

Red LED

Lights to indicate TIE line 4 is in operation

E & M TIE Line
Connector J101

Modular

connector

Interface connector
circuit 1.

for E & M TIE line

E & M TIE Line
Connector J201

Modular

connector

Interface connector
circuit 2.

for E & M TIE line

E & M TIE Line
Connector J301

Modular

connector

Interface connector
circuit 3.

for E & M TIE line

E & M TIE Line
Connector J401

Modular

connector

Interface connector
circuit 4.

for E & M TIE line

FG Jumper

P3

Three-terminal

jumper

GND/BAT
PlOl

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 1 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

GND/BAT
PI02

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 1 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

GND/BAT
P201

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 2 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

GND/BAT
P202

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 2 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

GND/BAT
P301

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 3 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

GND/BAT
P302

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 3 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

GND/BAT
P401

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 4 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

6-18

1 Enables

or disables

-48V ground

to FG.

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
TABLE 6-F
PEMU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACECONNECTORS(continued)

I

CONTROL/INDICATOR
(Figure 6-9)

I

2Wl4W
P203

I
I

jumper

M-lead origination for TIE line 4 (must
be in BAT position per FCC requirements)

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration
for E & M TIE line circuit 1.

Jumper

Three-terminal

jumper

Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration
for E & M TIE line circuit 2.

Three-terminal

jumper

Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration
for E & M TIE line circuit 3.

Three-terminal

jumper

Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration
for E & M TIE line circuit 4.

Jumper

I
I

2W/4W Jumper
P303
2Wl4W
P403

DESCRIPTION

Three-terminal

GND/BAT
P402
2Wl4W
P103

TYPE OFCOMPONENT

Jumper

8.21 Install the PEMU in accordance
lowing steps:
1) Remove
ing.

with the fol-

the PCB from its protective

P3 to the 2-3 position.

to the telephone

network.

NOTE:
The GND position is used to connect PEMU
circuits back-to-back
on premises only, 1000
feet maximum
(E & M lead wires must be
crossed).

for

8.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming,
for the PEMU:
Program 03
l

Specify code 13 for applicable
each PEMU is installed.

PCB slots where

Program 1O-l
l

Allows or denies

two-CO

Line Conference.

Program 15

4) Set all GNDlBAT jumpers to the BAT position
for connection

diagram

8.40 PEMU Programming Overview

packag-

2) Determine if the E & M TIE lines will be configured as 2- or 4-wire. Set 2W/4W switches PI 03,
P203, P303, and P403 to the appropriate positions.
3) Set the FG jumper

details, and to secondary
protector
secondary protector information.

l

Assigns

tandem

connections

to TIE lines.

Program 17
l

Assigns

Page/Handsfree

Answerback.

NOTE:
When a PEMU is installed in a system, it
automatically
assumes the next consecutive
CO line and station port numbers. If the system is equipped
with a PCTU(1 or Z), the
PEMU assumes four CO line and four station
port numbers. However, with a PCTUSI, on/y
16 station ports will be available for stations
connected to a PEKU, PESU, or PSTU PCB.

5) Insert the PEMU into the appropriate slot (refer
to Paragraph 2.21) and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.
6) After installing the PEMU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

9 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT
(PIOU AND PIOUS)

8.30 PEMU Wiring

9.00 General

8.31 In Section 200-096-209,
refer to PEMU (2W
or 4W) wiring diagram for wiring/interconnecting

9.01 The Option Interface
6-19

Unit (PIOU or PIOUS)

I

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
50-PIN AMPHENOL

CONNECTOR

(FEMALE)

CD4

SW2

SMDR

TTY
.

BACKPLANE

FIGURE 6-IO-PIOU

CONNECTOR

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
J’& NOT FACTORY
INSTALLED FOR BELL
MODEM SPECIFICATION

OPTIONAL IMDU PCB
REMOTE MAINTENANCE

CONNECTOR

TB
TERMIN
STRIP

FlGURE6-II-PIOUS

PCB SWITCH/JUMPER,OPTlON LOCATION

6-20

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE6-G

.

PIOU CONTROLSANDINTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-I 0)

TYPEOF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION
Interface connector for SMDR
call accounting device and
maintenance
terminal/modem.

printer/

SMDR/TTY
Interface
Connector J3

Dual modular

IMDU Connector

PI

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance
Modem piggy-back

module.

IMDU Connector

P2

g-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance
Modem piggy-back

module.

IMDU Connector

P3

3-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance
Modem piggy-back

module.

connector

M/B Make/Break
Jumper Plug PI 0

Three-terminal

jumper

plug

External Page/Door Lock Control
MAKE or BREAK jumper plug.

M/B Make/Break
Jumper Plug PI 1

Three-terminal

jumper

plug

Night/Hold Relay MAKE or BREAK
jumper plug.

Alarm Sensor N.O./N.C.
Jumper Plug P12

Three-terminal

jumper

plug

Alarm sensor normally
closed jumper pluo.

CCITT/BELL
Plug P13

Three-terminal

jumper

plug

IMDU or external modem operating
specification jumper plug.

Jumper

Relay

open or normally

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
SMDR printer or call accounting device.

SMDR Baud Rate
Switch SW1

Two-position

TTY Baud Rate Switch
SW2

Two-position
locking pushbutton switch

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
Remote Maintenance
Modem piggy-back
module (IMDU) or external TTY iack.

Two-position

slide switch

Enables PIOU for operation
modem or TTY jack.

SPO/SPI Internal/External
Amplifier Switch
SW4

Two-position

slide switch

Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or
600-ohm output (SPO) for external
page/BGM operation.

Volume
VRl

Trim potentiometer

Modem/TTY
SW3

Switch

Control

I

slide switch

Adjusts

provides a circuit interface with the system peripheral options. A maximum of one PIOU or PIOUS
PCB can be installed in the system. The PIOU and
PIOUS support the same options, except the PIOUS does not support Built-in Amplifier or Zone
Paging (see Paragraph 9.11).

volume

with IMDU

of built-in 3-watt amplifier.

NOTE:
If a PIOU is installed, then a PIOUS cannot be
installed, and vice versa.
9.02 PIOU
connectors

6-21

controls,
indicators,
are shown in Figure

and interface
6-10 and de-

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY1991
TABLE6-H
PlOUSCONTROLSANOlNTERFACECONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 6-11)
SMDRTTY
Connector

Interface
J3

TYPEOF COMPONENT

Dual modular

DESCRIPTION
Interface connector for SMDR printer/
call accounting device and
maintenance
terminal/modem.

connector

IMDU Connector

PI

1 O-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance
Modem piggy-back

module.

IMDU Connector

P2

g-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance
Modem piggy-back

module.

IMDU Connector

P3

3-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance
Modem piggy-back

module.

M/B Make/Break
WI

Jumper

Wire jumper

External Page/Door Lock Control
MAKE or BREAK jumper.

M/B Make/Break
w2

Jumper

Wire jumper

Night/Hold
_jumper.

Wire jumper

Alarm sensor normally
closed jumper.

Wire jumper

IMDU or external modem operating specification jumper plug. (BELL = NO W4)

Alarm Sensor
w3

N.O./N.C.

CCITT/BELL
w4*

Jumper

Relay

Relay MAKE or BREAK
open or normally

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
SMDR printer or call accounting device.

SMDR Baud Rate
Switch SW1

Two-position

TTY Baud Rate Switch
SW2

Two-position
locking pushbutton switch

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
Remote Maintenance
Modem piggy-back
module (IMDU) or external TTY jack.

Modem/TTY
SW3

Two-position

Enables PIOUS for operation
modem or TTY jack.

Switch

*Most modems

in USA require

slide switch

slide switch

BELL specification:

scribed in Table 6-G. PIOUS information
vided in Figure 6-l 1 and Table 6-H.

is pro-

W4 not factory-installed.
Alarm Sensor
External Paging 6OOQ (duplex) Interface
l
Zone Page, 4-zones (PIOU only)
l
Local Maintenance
Terminal or Modem
l
Music-on-Hold
Control or Night Relay Control
0 SMDR Printer or Call Accounting Port
l
Remote Maintenance
Port
l
l

9.10 PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options
9.11 The PIOU and PIOUS support the following
hardware

with IMDU

options:

Internal Options
l

Remote

Maintenance

Modem

NOTE:
Refer to Peripheral
Section 200-096-208,
nal options.

Unit (IMDU)

External Options
l
l

Built-in Paging Amplifier (PIOU only)
Door Lock Control or External Amplifier

Control

6-22

Eqyipmen t Ins talla tion,
for installation of exter-

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991

d

J3

q
q
q
q
q
q
0
q
q
0

J2

NOTE:
The IMDU default station intercom
19.

number

is

7) Apply firm, even pressure to IMDU to ensure
proper mating of connectors.

-Jl

NOTE:
Refer to Remote Maintenance
Procedures,
Section 200-096-400,
for information
regarding the IMDU.

0

9.20 PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedures

I

FIGURE 6-12--REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM
UNIT (IMDU) INSTALLATION

9.21 Install the PIOU or PIOUS in accordance
the following steps:
1) Remove
ing.

9.12 Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (IMDU)
Installation. Install the Remote Maintenance
Modem Unit (IMDU)
steps:
1) Remove
ing.

in accordance

with the following

the PCB from its protective

packag-

NOTE:
Ensure the PIOUS or PIOUS’component
side
is facing right when installing it in the KSU.

to 300 or 1200, as appropriate,
after the PIOU
has been installed in the KSU (in-300 bpsout-l 200 bps).

3) Insert the PIOU or PIOUS into the last slot (slot
06 for DK24, slot 08 for DK56, and slot 14 for
DK96 ), and apply firm, even pressure to
ensure proper mating of connectors.

position for IMDU opera-

4) Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
BELL position; or, cut the W4 jumper on the
PIOUS for BELL operation.

4) After installing the PIOU or PIOUS, gently pull
the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly
mated, a slight resistance will be felt.

5) Mate IMDU connectors
Jl, J2, and J3 with
PIOU or PIOUS connectors
Pl, P2, and P3
(refer to Figure 6-l 2).

9.30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring
9.31 Refer to Peripheral
Equipment
Installation,
Section 200-096-208;
and Wiring Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
for PIOU/PIOUS
wiring/interconnecting details.

NOTE:
PIOU or PlOUS connectors
PI, P2, and P3
arepositioned
to allow installation of the IMDU
on/y in the proper position.
6) Refer to Programming

Procedures,

packag-

2) Ensure the PIOU or PIOUS has been configured for the appropriate
hardware
options
(refer to Paragraph 9.10 and Section 200-096208).

2) Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front panel

3) Set SW3 to MODEM
tion.

the PCB from its protective

with

9.40 PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview

Section

200-096-300, Program 77-1, and set LED 14
to ON to enable

9.41 The following

IMDU operation.

6-23

parameters

may be specified,

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
50-PIN AMPHENOL
r
I

CONNECTOR
-

(FEMALE)
\
I
.VRl

Pi0
I

PI1
/

-SW4

BACKPLANE

CONNECTOR

FIGURE 6-13-PEPU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
through programming,
for the PIOU and PIOUS:
Program 77-l
l
Assigns relay control and IMDU options.
Program 60
l
Assigns SMDR options.
Program 1 O-2
l
Enables External Page with All Call Page (access code 39 only, not AC button).
Program 78
l
Enables Night Ringing over External Page.

10 EXTERNAL
10.00

PAGE INTERFACE
(PEPU)

UNIT

General

cannot

10.02 PEPU controls,
indicators,
and interface
connectors are shown in Figure 6-l 3 and described
in Table 6-l.
10.10

PEPU Hardware

Options

10.11 The PEPU supports the following hardware
options:
External Options
l
Built-in Paging Amplifier
l
Door Lock Control or External Amplifier Control
l
External Paging 6OOQ (duplex) Interface (one
zone)
l
Music-on-Hold
Control or Night Relay Control

10.01 The External Page Interface Unit (PEPU)
provides a circuit interface with the system peripheral options. The PEPU is similar to the PIOU, but
supports fewer peripherals. In general, PEPU-supported peripherals are related to paging and relay
control functions.
NOTE:
If a PIOU or PIOUS is installed,

be installed.

NOTE:
Refer to Peripheral
Section 200-096-208;
Section 200-096-209,
nal options.
10.12
options:

then a PEPU

6-24

Equipment
Installation,
and Wiring Diagrams,
for installation of exter-

I
PEPU does not include

the following

PIOU

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION
200-096-206
FEBRUARY
1991
TABLE6-l
PEPUCONTROLS
ANDINTERFACE
CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure
6-13)
. -

TYPEOF COMPONENT

M/B Make/Break
Jumper Plug PI0

I

M/B Make/Break
Jumper Plug PI 1

l
l
l
l

l

Alarm Sensor
Four-zone Page
SMDR Port
Remote Maintenance
Connector
IMDU Connection

jumper

plug

External Page/Door Lock Control
MAKE or BREAK jumper plug.

Three-terminal

jumper

plug

Night/Hold
plug.

Relay

Relay MAKE or BREAK jumper

Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier or
600-ohm output for External Page/BGM
operation.

slide switch

Adjusts volume

Trim potentiometer

of built-in 3-watt amplifier.

outward. If the connectors are properly
a slight resistance will be felt.
Modem

in accordance

mated,

10.30 PEPU Wiring

or ASCII terminal

10.31 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation,
Section 200-096-208;
and Wiring Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
forwiring/interconnecting
details.

10.20 PEPU Installation Procedure
10.21 Install the PEPU
following steps:

DESCRIPTION

Three-terminal

Two-position

I

.

with the

10.40 PEPU Programming Overview
10.41 The following parameters

1) Remove
ing.

the PCB from its protective

packag-

through

programming,

may be specified,
for the PEPU:

Program 77-1
Assigns

l

2) Ensure the PEPU has been configured for the
appropriate
hardware options (refer to Paragraph 10.10 and Section 200-096-208).

relay control

options.

Program 1O-2
Assigns External Page to All Call Page (access
code 39 only, not AC button).

l

Program 78
NOTE:
Ensure the PEP&
component
side is facing
right when installing it in the KSU.
3) insert the PEPU into the last slot (slot 06 of
DK24, slot 08for DK56, and slot 14for DK96),
and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors,
4.) After installing

the PEPU, gently pull the PCB

Enables

l

Night Ringing

over External

Page.

11 INSTALLATION-PCB FOR RELEASE 3
11.Ol The following contains Release 3 information. This information
includes complete installation instructions for the new digital telephone interface PCB, the PDKU. In addition, the instructions
for the other PCBs, including the PCTU, are updated to reflect the new software release.

6-25

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
directly to the PDKU and require no additional
hardware,
but do require their own dedicated
ports/circuits.
The PDIU-DI shares with its accompanying digital telephone the same wire pair and
circuit on the PDKU. The PDKU (Figure 6-14) has
no controls.

12 PCB INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
(RELEASE 3)
12.01 PCBslot installation considerationsdiscussed
in Paragraph 2 are the same with Release 3, except
for one change: with Release 3, the PDKU PCB or
the PEKU PCB should be installed in slot I-previously only the PEKU was recommended.
It does not
matter whether it’s the PEKU or the PDKU installed
in slot 1. However, it is recommended
that they be the
first PCBs installed from left to right.

13 PDKU (RELEASE

13.10 PDKU Hardware Options
13.11 The PDKU supports the hardware options
noted below. Unlike the other PCBs, there are no
controls on the PDKU that need to be set for
options.

3)

internal option:
External option:

13.01 The Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU)
provides eight ports/circuits for digital telephones.
Depending
on system configuration,
DK24 (with
PCTU3 only, not PCTUSI) can support up to four
PDKUs, DK56 can support up to eight PDKUs, and
DK96 can support up to 12. The PDKU can also be
configured for PDIU-Dls, PDIU-DSs, and a DDSS
console. DDSS consoles and PDIU-DSs are wired
50-PIN AMPHENOL
,

BACKPLANE

none

l

13.00 General

l

.
.

DDSS console
PDIU-DS
PDIU-DI

13.12 Hardware Configuration
13.13 DDSS Console Configuration.
Telephone
procedures

CONNECTOR

Refer to
Installation,
Chapter 7, for installation
for the DDSS console. Each DDSS

(FEMALE)
\

CONNECTOR

I

FIGURE 6-14-PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION

6-26

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
console requires dedicated
particular PDKU PCB.

use of circuit

Programs 20,21, and 22

8 of a
l

Use to configure

PDIU-Dls

Programs 28 and 29
13.14 PDIU-DS Configuration. Refer to Peripherals Installation, Chapter 8, for installation procedures for the PDIU-DS. A PDIU-DS can be connected to circuits 1 N 7 on a PDKU; the circuit must
be dedicated to the PDIU-DS.

l

l

Installation, Chapter 7, and Peripherals Installation,
Chapter 8, for installation procedures for the PDIUDI. PDIU-Dls can be equipped with any digital telephone connected to PDKU circuits 1 N 7, but the
quantity is limited (see Table 4-B in Chapter 4).

with the

packag-

Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring
volume levels of digital telephones.

15 PEKU (RELEASE

NOTE:
Ensure the PDKU’s component
side is facing
right when installing it in the KSU.

15.01 Alternate Background Music (BGM)
Configuration. With Release3, a BGM source can
be connected to a PEKU in any slot. With Program
19, identify the slot. Adhere to all other steps in

13.30 PDKU Wiring

Paragraph
for wiring/interconnecting

3)

15.00 For PEKU installation
instructions,
see
Paragraph 4. PCTU3 supports the same number of
PEKUs, electronic
telephones,
and options as
PCTUl and PCTU2.

4) After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

Chapter

3)

NOTE:
The PI jumper, which is on the PCTU 1 and 2,
is not on the PCTU3. Its function is automatic
with PCTU3 (see Table 6-A).

2) Insert the PDKU into the appropriate slot, and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors.

13.31 Refer to PDKU Wiring Diagrams,

level for digital

14.01 For PCTU3 (Figure 6-15) installation instructions, see Paragraph 3. The PCTU3 PCB has
the same station and CO line capacity and performsthesamefunction
as the PCTUl and PCTU2:
It provides centralized control for the KSU. PCTU3
is intended for use with DK56 and DK96; it can also
be used with DK24.

steps:
the PCB from its protective

volume

14 PCTU (RELEASE

13.20 PDKU Installation Procedures

1) Remove
ing.

Adjusts initial off-hook
telephone
handsets.

Program 92-5
l

13.21 Install the PDKU in accordance

Use for DDSS assignments.

Program 30

13.15 PDIU-DI Configuration. Refer to Telephone

following

and PDIU-DSs.
.

4.15.

9,

details.

15.02 External Amplifier Connection. With Release 3, a customer-supplied
two way external

13.40 PDKU Programming Overview

amplifier

may be connected

to PEKU ports. With

Program 1O-3, identify these ports. See Chapter 8
13.41 The following
through

programming,

parameters may be specified,
for the PDKU:

for amplifier

Program 03

installation

information.

16 PSTU (RELEASE

Specify code 62 to indicate a station line PDKU.
e Specify code 64 to indicate a PDKU configured
for a DDSS console.

3)

l

16.00 For PSTU installation
Paragraph 5. PCTU3 supports

6-27

instructions,
see
the same number of

INSTALLATION-PCB
SECTION 200-096-206
FEBRUARY 1991
HEARTBEAT

LED

P2

P3

P7, shown in /
OFF position

LITHIUM /
BATTERY
00

VERSION

BACKPLANE

FIGURE 6-15-PCTU3 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACECONNECTOR
PSTUs as PCTUl and PCTU2. It also supports the
same hardware
options and has the same programming parameters.

17 PESU (RELEASE

19 PEMU (RELEASE

19.00 For PEMU installation
instructions,
see
Paragraph 8. PCTU3 supports the same number of
PEMUs as PCTUI and PCTU2. It also supports no
hardware options and has the same programming
parameters.

3)

17.00 For PESU installation
instructions,
see
Paragraph 6. PCTU3 supports the same number
of PESUs as PCTUI and PCTU2. It also supports
the same hardware
options and has the same
programming
parameters.

20 PIOU AND PIOUS (RELEASE

6.40).

18 PCOU (RELEASE

3)

20.00 For PIOU and PIOUS installation
instructions, see Paragraph 9. Like PCTUI and 2, PCTU3
supports only one PIOU or one PIOUS. It supports
the same PIOU and PIOUS hardware options and
has the same programming
parameters
with one
addition: PCTU3 allows night ringing over selected
PIOU page zones by Tenant 1 and/or Tenant 2 CO
lines in Program 77-l.

17.01 PESU Programming Overview. With Release 3, a BGM source can be connected to a
PESU in any slot. With Program 19, identify that
slot (see Paragraph

3)

21 PEPU (RELEASE

3)

3)

21.00 For PEPU installation
instructions,
see
Paragraph 10. Like PCTUI and 2, PCTU3 supports
only one PIOU, or one PIOUS, or one PEPU. It
supports the same PEPU hardware options and
has the same programming
parameters.

18.00 For PCOU installation
instructions,
see
Paragraph 7. PCTU3 supports the same number of
PCOUs as PCTUI and PCTU2. It also has the
same PCOU programming
parameters.

6-28

TOSHIBASYSTEMPRACTICES
DIGITALKEYTELEPHONESYSTEMS

Stra

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991

ta7mx

RELEASE

1,2, and 3

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER SEVEN
TELEPHONE
INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
2.30
2.40
3
3.10
3.20
3.30
3.40
3.50
4
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.40
4.50

SUBJECT

.

GENERAL .................................................................................................................
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
UPGRADE OPTIONS ................................................
Electronic Telephone
Upgrade Installation.. ..........................................................
Carbon Handset Option.. .......................................................................................
Beep Strap ............................................................................................................
Microphone/Speaker
Threshold (speakerphone
only) ..........................................
STATION INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS
..........................................................
Electronic Telephone
Connections
........................................................................
Standard Telephone
Connections
.........................................................................
DSS Console Connections.
...................................................................................
HDCB Door Phone/Lock
Control Box Installation .................................................
Door Phone Installation .........................................................................................
DIGITAL TELEPHONE
UPGRADE OPTIONS.. ........................................................
Digital Telephone
Upgrade Installation .................................................................
Digital Telephone
Connections
.............................................................................
DDSS Console Connections
............. ....................................................................
PDIU-DI Connections
............................................................................................
PDIU-DS Connections
...........................................................................................

PAGE
7-l

7-l
7-l
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-l 1
7-11
7-12
7-12

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
7-l
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12

TITLE
REMOVING
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HHEU INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
PCB CONNECTIONS
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
HESC-65 CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HVSI/HVSU
INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
HANDSET HANGER INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
WALL MOUNTING
BASE ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOOR PHONE INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDIU-DI/DIGITAL
TELEPHONE
INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
HHEU INSTALLATION
FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE
. . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
DIGITAL TELEPHONE
PCB CONNECTIONS
AND STRAPS . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
DVSU INSTALLATION
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..

7-i

PAGE
7-l
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-10

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY 1991
1 GENERAL
1.00 This chapter provides the general instructions to connect electronic
telephones,
digital
telephones,
standard telephones
(including door
phones and door locks), and DSSDDSS consoles
to DK systems.

HANDSET

PLASTIC

1.01 The chapter also includes procedures to
upgrade electronic and digital telephones for Loud
Ringing Bell/Headset
Interface and Off-hook Call
Announce capability, and to wall-mount electronic
and digital telephones.
2 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
UPGRADE OPTIONS
2.00 Electronic telephones
may be upgraded to
include a Loud Ringing Bell/Headset
Interface and
Off-hook Call Announce capability.

2.01 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset
(HHEU)
Upgrade. The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset (HHEU)

FIGURE 7-I-REMOVING ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONEBASE

upgrade enables an external speaker (HESB) and
a headset to be connected to the electronic telephone. In this configuration,
the HESB serves as a
loud ringing bell.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 7-l ), and remove the
base.

NOTE:
Refer to Peripheral
Equipment
Installation,
Section 200-096-208,
for installation procedures for the HESB.

2.02 Off-hook
Call Announce
Upgrade. The Off-hook Call Announce
HVSI) upgrade allows
calls when the handset

2.10 Electronic
lation

the telephone
is off the hook.

Telephone

2) Using a screwdriver
or other suitable tool,
remove the plastic tab located on the back of
the base (Figure 7-l). The HHEU modular
connector
will be accessed
through
this
opening.

(OCA)
(HVSU/
to receive

3) On the HHEU, set the SW601 switch to the
Headset position for HESB and/or headset
connection
(Figure 7-2).

Upgrade Instal-

4A) Connect the HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable
(either one) to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud
Ringing Bell option is required (see Figure 74), and refer to HESB Option Installation,
Section 200-096-208.

2.11 HHEU Upgrade Installation. Install the Loud
Ringing Bell/Headset
(HHEU) upgrade
dance with the following steps:

in accor-

NOTE:
If the telephone
is equipped
with the Loud
Ringing Bell/headset (HHEU) and OCA (HVW
HVSU) upgrades, the HHEU version must be
HHEU IA, V.2 or later.

4B) For the telephone
speaker
only (not the
headset receiver) to receive OCA, cut one
side of the R607 resistor on the HHEU and
then remove the resistor so that no electrical
connection exists. (see Figure 7-2).

7-I

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
. .._

COMPONENT

FEED THROUGH
FOR HESC-65 CABLE

SIDE OF HHEU

HESC-65A

TO HESB

\

_’

CABLE
HHEU

P601

FIGURE 7-4-HESC-65 CABLING

FlGURE7-2-HHEUINSTALLATION

5) Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs
inside the base (Figure 7-2), and secure with
the two screws provided.

HKT6520KSD
CONNECTOR

6) Connect the HHEU PCB to the electronic
telephone
PCB as shown in Figure 7-3.
7) Cut HHEU strap shown

in Figure 7-3.

NOTE:
HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU
PCB is removed from the telephone.
8) Reinstall the electronic telephone
base and
secure it with its four captive screws.
CONNECTOR

2.12 HVSUIHVSI
Upgrade
Installation.
theoff-hookcall
announce (HVSU/HVSI)
in accordance
with the following steps:

CARBON STRAPS

1) Remove
2.11.

HHEU STRAP
W203

the base as described

Install
upgrade

in Paragraph

NOTE:
Exercise care when as?embling
the HVSU
PCB to the HVSI PCB to prevent damage to
the connectorpins;
also, verify that the HVSU

FlGURE7-3-ELECTRONICTELEPHONEPCB
CONNECTIONS

7-2

: :.
, .I

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY 1991
PCB is aligned with the silk-screened
on the HVSI PCB.

image
.

TO HVSU
CONNECTOR

2) Align the P5 connector on the HVSI PCB with
its receptacle on the HVSU PCB (Figure 7-5).
Apply firm, even pressure to the PCBs to
ensure that the connectors
mate properly
(they click).

ON MAIN PCB
INSIDE
TELEPHONE

HSVI

fl

3) Position the HVSU/HVSI
assembly
on the
standoffs inside the base, and secure with the
two screws provided.
4) Connect the HVSU/HVSI
PCBs to the electronic telephone PCB as shown in Figure 7-3.
5) Reinstall the electronic telephone base and
secure it with its four captive screws.

2.20 Carbon Handset Option
2.21 If a carbon type handset is used with the
6500-series
electronic telephone,
it is necessary
to cut two jumper straps located on the main PCB
inside the telephone. To cut the jumpers:
1) Remove

the base as described

FIGURE 7-5-HVSI/HVSU INSTALLATION
2.40 Microphone/Speaker
erphone only)

in Paragraph

2.11.

Threshold (speak-

2.41 If the speaker

cuts off frequently
because
high ambient noise levels interrupt conversations
during handsfree operation, set the Room Noise
switch to the HI position (see Figures 7-1 and 7-3).

2) Refer to Figure 7-3, and locate the carbon
straps W201 and W202. Cut both straps.
3) Reinstall the electronic telephone
base and
secure it with its four captive screws,

1) Remove the four captive screws securing the
6500-series electronic telephone base to the
telephone and remove the base.

2.30 Beep Strap
2.31 If the beep strap is cut, the beep sound that

2) Locate the Room Noise switch and push it
carefully to the HI position using a paper clip
or tip of a pencil.

occurs whenever the feature or dialpad buttons
are pressed is eliminated (refer to Figures 7-1 and
7-3).

3) Reinstall the electronic telephone
base and
secure in place using the four captive screws.

1) Remove the four captive screws securing the
6500-series electronic telephone base to the
telephone and remove the base.

3 STATION INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS

2) Locate and cut the beep strap.
3) Reinstall the electronic telephone
base and
secure in place using the four captive screws.

3.00 Wiring Diagrams, Chapter 9, provide pointto-point wiring diagrams for connecting electronic

7-3

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
NOTE:
All electronic and digital telephone models
are wall mounted in the same manner:

telephones,
standard telephones,
DSS consoles,
and door phones/locks
to STRATA DK systems.
The following paragraphs provide general requirements for telephone installation.

1) Remove

in Paragraph

2.11.

3.01 Refer to the Programming
Procedures, Section 200-096-300,
for programming
requirements
and procedures.

2) Using a suitable
hanger from the
Insert the handset
on the front of the
hanger fits in the

3.10 Electronic Telephone Connections
3.11 Electronic

telephones
are connected to the
PEKU or PESU PCB (via the MDF) with standard
twisted-pair
jacketed telephone
cable. Two-pair
wiring, as a minimum, is required for telephone
connection.
However,
3-pair wiring is recommended to permit future upgrades,
such as Offhook Call Announce. To accommodate
the electronic telephone
line cord, the cable should be
terminated
in a modular station connector block
(RJ-25) at the station location. The standard
modular electronic telephone cord length is 7 feet
(the maximum allowed length is 25 feet).

I

the base as described

cutter, remove the handset
base (refer to Figure 7-l).
hanger in the slot provided
telephone (Figure 7-6).The
notch on the handset.

3) Rotate the telephone base 180” and secure it
to the telephone with its four captive screws
(Figure 7-7).
4) Connect the electronic telephone to the wall
modular connector with a cord approximately
four inches long (available at most telephone
supply companies).
Route the cord into the
hollow portion of the base.
5) Mount the electronic telephone
on the wall
mounting modular connector plate.

NOTE:
See Section 200-096-209 for secondaryprotector information.
3.12 The overall length of the station cable run
from the KSU to the telephone
must not exceed
1,000 feet (305 M), if using 24 AWG cable.

HANDSET
HANGER
\

CAUTION!
When installing the station cable, do not
run parallel to and with@ 3 feet of an AC
power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90”) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs
near devices thatgenerate electricalnoise,
such as neon or fluorescent Iigh t fixtures.
3.13 Electronic

Telephone

Wall Mounting.

Electronic telephones
may be mounted on a wall
or any other flat, vertical surface to which the base
can besecured. When selecting the mounting site,
consider the electronic telephone’s weight and the
additional stresses to which the mounting will be
subjected.
Wall mount electronic telephones
in
accordance with the following steps:

FlGURE7-6-HANDSETHANGERINSTALLATION

7-4

'

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY 1991
OL13A lines (or equivalent)
and connect
RJ21 X FIC jack (or equivalent).
_

to an

3.30 DSS Console Connections
3.31 DSS consoles must be located adjacent to
an electronic telephone (preferably an LCD model).
DSS consoles are connected to the PEKU (via the
MDF) using standard 2-pair, twisted pair, jacketed
telephone cable. To connect the console use only
the data pair of circuits 7 and 8. To accommodate
the DSS console connection, the instrument end of
the cable should be terminated
in a modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
for wiring/interconnecting details.
3.32 The overall length of the DSS console cable
run from the KSU to the console must not exceed
500 feet (152 M), if using 24 AWG cable.

CAUTION!
When installing the DSS console cable, do
not run parallel to and within 3 feet of an
AC power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90”) angles only. Avoid
running DSS console wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such
as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.

FIGURE ‘I-7-ELECTRONIC TELEPHONEWALL
MOUNTING BASE ROTATION
3.20 Standard Telephone Connections

3.33 DSS Console Configuration

3.21 Standard telephones areconnected
to PSTU
or PESU (via the MDF) with standard twisted-pair
jacketed telephone
cable. Single-pair
wiring is
required for telephone connection (refer to Wiring
Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
for wiring/interconnecting details).

I

NOTE:
See Section 200-096-209
tector information.

3.34 The following considerations
should be made
when installing DSS consoles:
l
A PEKU PCB is required to use the DSS console.
(The DSS switch on the PEKU must be set to
DSS.)
l
PESU does not support DSS consoles.
l
A maximum of four DSS consoles are allowed
per system (three in a DK24 if a PCTUS is used).
l
Two PEKU ports are required for each DSS
console (always circuits 7 and 8).
l
Only one DSS console may be connected to a
PEKU.

for secondarypro-

3.22 The standard telephone cable’s overall loop
resistance, connected on- or off-premises,
is 300
ohms maximum,
including the telephone
resistance. This also applies to all devices connected to
PESU or PSTU standard telephone circuits.

3.35 DSS Programming
Program 28

3.23 Astandard telephone connected off-premises
via the telephone
network should interface with

l

7-5

Assigns
phones.

DSS

Overview
I

console(s)

to electronic

tele-

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
Program 29
l

Assigns
tions.

DSS console’s

individual

button func-

3.40 HDCB Door Phone/Lock Control Box Installation
3.41 The HDCB Door Phone Control

Box supports three door phones (MDFB), or two door
phones and one door lock control. Wiring connections for the HDCB are the same as for an electronic telephone.
3.42 The overall combined
length of the HDCB
and MDFB cable run from the KSU to the telephone must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 M), if
using 24 AWG cable.

TWO WALL
MOUNTING
HOLES

CA UT/ON!
When installing
the HDCB or MDFB cable,
do not run parallel to and within 3 feet of
an ACpower
line. AC power lines should
be crossed
at right (90”) angles
only.
A void running the HDCB/MDFB
wire pairs
near devices
that generate
electrical
noise, such as neon or fluorescent
light
fixtures.

I

I

DOOR PHONE
FlGURE7-8-OOORPHONElNSTALLATlON
3.44 Door Phone/Lock Programming Considerations
Program 03

3.43 Refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section 200-096209, for wiring/interconnecting
details. The following considerations
should be made when installing door phones:
l
A maximum
of four HDCBs are allowed per
system with PCTU(l, 2, or 3); three HDCBs are
allowed with PCTUS.
l
One electronic telephone (PEKU or PESU) port
(always the 5th circuit port) is required for each
HDCB.
l
HDCBs can only be connected
to PEKU or
PESU port numbers 04, 12, 20, and 28.
l
Only one HDCB may be connected to a PEKU
or PESU.
l
Cut jumper W9 on any PEKU/PESU PCB which
will support an HDCB.
NOTE:
PDKUs

do not support

l

PEKU or PESU slotssupporting
door phonesdo
not require a special PCB code.

Program 77-1
l

Assigns HDCB port numbers
over External Page.

and Night Ringing

Program 77-2
l

Busy-out unused MDFB positions; identify which
HDCBs support the Door Lock option.

Program 39
l

Assigns the m
Nm
tronic and digital telelphones.

buttons

to elecI

3.50 Door Phone Installation
3.51 Mount door phones (MDFBs) to a wall or
vertical surface in accordance
with the following
steps (Figure 7-8):

HDCBs.

7-6

I

-:

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
1) Remove the screw from the bottom of the
cover. Detach the cover from the base and
metal frame.

2. The PDIU-DI will function in all systems,
except for slots 7 I - 14 in DK96..
3. The PDIU-DI can be connected to any digital
telephone connected to PDKU circuits 1 w 7.

2) Position the metal frame and base to the
mounting surface and secure with two 1 -inch
pan head wood screws.

4.03 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset. The loud ringing bell/headset
upgrade
(HHEU) enables
an
external speaker (HESB) and/or a headset to be
connected to the digital telephone. In this configuration, the HESB serves as a loud ringing bell.

3) Attach cover to the metal frame and base.

4 DIGITAL TELEPHONE
UPGRADE OPTIONS

NOTE:
A Toshiba HESC-65A
cable is required to
connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to
the HESB. The HHEU must be version V3.0
or later for HESB operation (not required for
headset operation).

4.00 The following contains digital telephone
installation instructions.
It includes step-by-step
directions and drawings on how to upgrade digital
telephones
to transmit and receive simultaneous
voice and data calls. Instructions are also provided
for the loud ringing bell/headset
and off-hook call
announce upgrades.

4.04 Off-hook Call Announce (DVSU). The offhookcall announce (OCA) upgrade allows a digital
telephone to receive calls when the handset is offhook. To receive OCA calls, a digital telephone
must be upgraded with a DVSU; the telephone
making the call does not require a DVSU. (The
DVSU’s function in the digital telephone
is the
same as the HVSU/HVSI
assembly’s function in
the electronic telephone.) An additional wire pair is
not required for digital telephones
that receive
OCA calls.

4.01 Simultaneous Voice and Data (Integrated
Datalnterface Unit: PDIU-DI) Upgrade. PDIU-DIequipped digital telephones
can transmit and receive simultaneous
voice and data calls made
independently
of each other. Asynchronous
devices, such as personal computers and terminals,
can be connected to the standard RS-232 connector of the PDIU-DI. Station users are able to
transmit and receive RS-232 data over the PDIUDI equipped telephone’s
single twisted wire pair.

NOTE:
The HHEU must be version V3.0 or later for
digital telephones
supporting
both the loud
ringing bell/ headset and OCA upgrades.

4.02 Data calls can be manually dialed with a
m
button and disconnected
with am
button (see Program 39); or, if the PDIU-DI equipped
digital telephone is connected to a personal computer or ASCII terminal,
standard
“AT” dialing
commands
may be dialed from the terminal’s or
computer’s keyboard to place data or voice calls.
PDIU-DI equipped digital telephones
may also be
assigned a m
button (see Program 39) to
reserve a modem or monitor modem availability
and status.

4.10 Digital Telephone Upgrade Installation
4.11 PDIU-DI Installation. Install the PDIU-DI in
accordance

with the following

steps:

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing
digital telephone base, and remove it.

the

2) Refer to Figure 7-9, and insert the two PDIUDI wire connectors into the digital telephone’s
bottom PCB, observing the red wire for correct positioning.

NOTES:
I. If the digital telephone is equipped with a
PDIU-DI, it cannot be wall-mounted
or
upgraded
for loud ringing bell/headset
or
off-hook call announce.

3) On the digital telephone
cut the DIU strap:
W302 on DKT 1020H or -W401 on DKT
1020SD (see Figure 7-9).

7-7

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
,

RS-232 (FEMALE)
DE-25 CONNECTOR
/

TOP ASSEMBLY

-/

TO P2 OF
BOTTOM
PC6

IMPORTANT:
DO NOT CONNECT
CABLES
TO HHEU CONNECTOR

DIU

-.- -.
DIGITAL

TELEPHONE

BASE

FlGURE7-9-PDIU-DI/DIGITALTELEPHONElNSTALLATlON
NOTE:
The DIU strap must be replaced if the PDIUDI is removed from the telephone.

Program 39
l
Assigns them,

NOTE:
The HHEU installed in a digital
must be V.3 or greater.

NOTES:
1. The PDIU-DI and accompanying
digital
telephone share the same wire pair and
PDKU port.
2. To install data devices to the PDIU-DI,
RS-232 connector, see Chapter 8, PDIUDI/PDIU-DS
Data Device Installation.

l

Programming

buttons.

4.13 HHEU Upgrade Installation.
Install the loud
ringing bell/headset
(HHEU) upgrade in accordance with the following steps:

5) Remove the telephone number directory tray
from the original telephone base and install it
on the PDIU-DI telephone base (Figure 7-9).
Bend tray by squeezing its sides so it bows
slightly to remove and reinstall.

PDIU-DI

andmra

Programs
20 and 22
l
PDIU configuration.

4) Attach the PDIU-DI to the bottom of thedigital
telephone
and secure with the four captive
screws (Figure 7-l).

4.12

m,

telephone

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 7-l), and remove the
base.
2) Using a screwdriver
or other suitable tool,
remove the plastic tab located on the back of
the base (Figure 7-I); the HHEU modular
connector for the headset will be accessed
through this opening.

Overview

Program 03
No special code required.

7-8

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991

.

3) Set the SW601 switch on the HHEU to
HEADSET for the headset/loud
bell application (Figure 7-10).
4A) Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the
HHEU if the loud ringing bell option is required (see Figure 7-10).
4B)

If the headset receiver is not to receive OCA,
cut one side of the R607 resistor on the HHEU
(Figure 7-10) and then remove the resistor to
eliminate electrical contact.
W401-1020SD
W302-1020H

5) Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs
inside the base (Figure 7-10) and securewith
the two screws provided.
6) Connect the HHEU
upper PCB (Figure
SUB(SPF).

FlGURE7-II-DIGITALTELEPHONEPCB
CONNECTIONSANDSTRAPS

PCB to the telephone’s
7-l l), labelled DKTl O-

7B) Refer to Figure 7-l 1, and locate the HHEU
strap, W303, on the upper PCB, and cut it if an
HHEU will be connected to a headset.

7A) Refer to Figure 7-11, and locate the EXSP,
W305, strap on the upper PCB, and cut it if an
HHEU will be connected to an HESB for the
loud ringing bell option.

COMPONENT

8) Reinstall the telephone
base (Figure 7-l),
and secure it with its four captive screws.
NOTES:
1. The HESC-65A cable is for lOOO-series
digital telephones and 6500-series
electronic telephones.
The HESC-65 cable is
for 6500-series electronic telephones only.
2. If using the HESB as a loud ringing bell,
refer to Section 200-096-208,
External
Speaker (HESB) Options, for wiring details.

SIDE OF HHEU (V.3 or later)

4.14 DVSU Upgrade Installation. Install the offhook call announce
(DVSU) upgrade in accordance with the following steps.
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 7-l), and remove the
base.
2) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
metal plate to the standoffs inside the base
where the DVSU wi,fl be installed (Figure 712). Remove the metal plate, which can be
discarded.

FlGURE7-lo-HHEUINSTALLATION
FOR DIGITALTELEPHONE

7-9

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
3) Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs
(Figure7-12),andsecurewiththefourscrews
provided.

2) Refer to Figure 7-l 1, and locate the CARBON
straps, W301 and W302, and cut them.
.
3) Reinstall the telephone
base (Figure 7-l),
and secure it with its four captive screws.

4) Connect the DVSU wire plugs to the connectors labelled DVSU on both of the telephone’s
PCBs (Figures 7-l 1 and 7-12).

4.16 Beep Strap. A beep is emitted whenever a
dialpad button or flexible button is pressed. This
beep can be eliminated if the BEEP strap is cut. To
cut the strap:

IMPORTANT NOTE!
Make sure that the DVSU wire plugs are
connected to the proper connectors.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 7-l), and remove the
base.

5) Reinstall the telephone
base (Figure 7-l),
and secure it with its four captive screws.

4.15 Carbon Straps: If a carbon-type

handset or
headset is used with the digital telephone,
two
jumper straps on the telephone’s
upper PCB,
labelled DKT-SUB(SPF),
must be cut. To cut the
straps:

2) Refer to Figure 7-l 1, and locate the BEEP
strap,W304,
on the telephone’s
upper PCB,
labelled DKTl O-SUB(SPF),
and cut it.
3) Reinstall the telephone
base (Figure 7-I)
and secure it with its four captive screws.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 7-l), and remove the
base.

4.17 Microphone/Speaker Threshold (speakerphone only). If the speaker cuts off frequently
during handsfree operation because of high ambient noise levels, set the ROOM NOISE switch to
the high position. To set the switch:

IMPORTANT!
Make sure that the DVSU wire
plugs are inserted
into the
TO DVSU
correct UPPER and LOWER
CONNECTOR
PC0
connectors
of
the
ON UPPERPCB telephone. Do not plug DVSU
INSIDE
into HHEU connector.
TELEPHONE

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 7-l ), and remove the
base.
2) Refer to Figure 7-l 1, locate the ROOM NOISE
switch on the telephone’s
upper PCB, labelled DKTlO-SUB(SPF),
and push it carefully to the high (H) position.
3) Reinstall the telephone
base (Figure 7-l),
and secure it with its four captive screws.

4.18 Wall Mounting. Digital telephones mount on
walls and other vertical surfaces the same way
electronic telephones
do. See Paragraph 3.13.
NOTE:
Digital telephones
equipped
cannot be wall mounted.

FlGURE7-12-OVSUINSTALLATION

7-10

with PDIU-Dls

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION 200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
4.20 Digital Telephone Connections

power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90”) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs
near devices thatgenerateelectricalnoise,
such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.

4.21 Wiring Diagrams,
Section
200-096-209,
provide point-to-point
MDF wiring diagrams
for
connecting
digital telephones,
DDSS consoles,
and PDIU-DSs to STRATA DK systems. Refer to
Programming
Procedures, Section 200-096-300,
for programming
requirements
and procedures.
The following
paragraphs
provide general requirements
for telephone
installation.
1.
2.
3.

4.

4.30 DDSS Console Connections
4.31 DDSS consoles

must be located adjacent to
a digital or electronic telephone
(preferably
an
LCD model). DDSS consoles are connected to the
PDKU (viathe MDF) using standard twisted singlepair or two-pair jacketed telephone
cable (maximum 1000 feet, 303 M). The console uses only
circuit 8on the PDKU. To accommodate
the DDSS
console connection,
the instrument
end of the
cable should be terminated
in a modular station
connector
block (RJ-11). Refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
for wiring/interconnecting details, including cable length limitations.

WARNING!
Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install the telephone jacks in
wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone
wires or terminals unless the telephone
line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

CAUTION!
When installing the station cable, do not
run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC
power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90”) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs
neardevices thatgenerateelectricalnoise,
such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.

4.22 Digital telephonesareconnected
to the PDKU
(via the MDF) with standard twisted-pair jacketed
telephone
cable. Single-pair
wiring is sufficient
unless the system must operate on reserve power
or in the case of a digital telephone with a PDIU-DI.
In these cases, two-pair wiring should be used for
extra power (see Section 200-096-209
for details).
To accommodate
the digital telephone
line cord,
the cable should be terminated
in a modular station connector block (RJ-1 1 ) at the station location.
The standard modular digital telephone cord length
is 7 feet (the maximum allowed length is 25 feet).

4.32 DDSS Console Configuration. The following considerations
should be made when installing
DDSS consoles:
l
A PDKU PCB is required to use the DDSS
console.
l
A maximum of four DDSS consoles are allowed
per system.
l
One PDKU circuit is required for each DDSS
console (always circuit 8).
l
Only one DDSS console may be connected to a
PDKU.

4.23 The overall length of the station cable (single
pair) run from the KSU to the telephone or PDIUDS must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 M) if using 24
AWG cable and being powered by the PPSU. If
operating
on battery backup or if PDIU-Dls are
installed, a second pair of wires is required for
stations to operate effectively at 1000 feet (see
digital telephone
and DIU MDF wiring requirements in Section 200-096-209).

4.33 DDSS Programming

Overview

Program 03
l

CAUTION!
When installing the station cable, do not
run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC

Code 64 identifies
DDSS consoles.

PDKU

slots

that support

I

Program 28
l

7-11

Assigns

DDSS console(s)

to digital telephones.

INSTALLATION-TELEPHONE
SECTION200-096-207
FEBRUARY1991
Program 29
l

Assigns
tions.

DDSS console’s

individual

standard twisted-pair
jacketed telephone
cable.
Single-pair wiring is sufficient, unless the system
must operate on reserve power. In this case, twopair wiring should be used (see Section 200-096208for more wiring information and instructions on
how to connect peripheral devices to PDIU-DSs).

button func-

4.40 PDIU-DI Connections
4.41 A digital telephone
with an integrated data
interface unit (PDIU-DI) requires one wire pair and
one PDKU circuit (See Paragraph 4.20 for digital
telephonewiring
information and Section 200-096208 for instructions on how to connect peripheral
devices to PDIU-Dls).

NOTE:
PDIU-DSs
I - 7.

can be connected

to PDKU cirucits
I

4.50 PDIU-DS Connections
4.51 The stand-alone
data interface (PDIU-DS) is
connected to a single dedicated PDKU circuit with

‘.
-.
.
,’

7-12

TOSHIBASYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITALKEYTELEPHONESYSTEMS

Stra

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

ta@mcr

RELEASE

1,2, and.3

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER
EIGHT
PERIPHERALS
INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
3
3.10
3.20
4
4.10
4.20
5
5.10
5.20
6
6.00
6.10
7

7.10
7.20
8
8.10
8.20
8.30
9
9.00
9.10
9.20
10
11
12
12.00
12.10
12.20
12.30
12.40
12.50
12.60
12.70
12.80
13
13.00
14

SUBJECT

.

GENERAL ...............................................................................................................
RESERVE POWER/POWER
FAILURE OPTIONS.. ...............................................
Reserve Power Option ........................................................................................
Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option .........................................................
MUSIC-ON-HOLD/BACKGROUND
MUSIC OPTIONS ..........................................
Music-on-Hold
(MOH) Option ..............................................................................
Background
Music (BGM) Options ......................................................................
RELAY CONTROL OPTIONS .................................................................................
External Page/Door Lock Relay Options .............................................................
Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold
Relay Options ......................................................
EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT (HESB) OPTIONS.. ..................................................
System Hardware Requirements
........................................................................
HESB Option Installation .....................................................................................
EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS .................................................................................
System Hardware Requirements
........................................................................
External Page Option Installation ........................................................................
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
(SMDR) PRINTER/CALL
ACCOUNTING
DEVICE OPTIONS.. .......................................................................
EXAMPLE l-Ring,
No Answer DISA Call .........................................................
EXAMPLE 2-DISA
Internal Station Call ............................................................
EXAMPLE 3-DISA
Outgoing CO Line Call .......................................................
SMDR Hardware Requirements
..........................................................................
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting
Device Installation ..............................................
MAINTENANCE
TERMINAL OPTIONS.. ................................................................
Maintenance
Terminal/External
Modem Option System Hardware
Requirements
......................................................................................................
Local Maintenance
Terminal Installation .............................................................
Remote Maintenance
Option Installation ............................................................
VOICE MAIL/AUTO
ATTENDANT
OPTIONS .........................................................
System Hardware Requirements
........................................................................
INTOUCH Digital Voice Messaging System ........................................................
Customer-supplied
Voice Mail Messaging Systems.. ..........................................
ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION
......... ................................................................
NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE (Release 3) ............................
DATA INTERFACE
UNIT INSTALLATION
(Release 3) ..........................................
General ...............................................
.................................................................
Common DIU Connections
..................................................................................
EIA Interface Leads (Signals). .............................................................................
DIP Switch Options .............................................................................................
PDIU-DI to Personal Computer
(PC) Installation
................................................
PDIU-DS to Printer Installation ............................................................................
PDIU-DS to Modem Installation ...........................................................................
PDIU-DS Disassembly
and Assembly.. ...............................................................
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS
Installation Tests ...................................................................
TWO-CO LINE EXTERNAL AMPLIFIED
CONFERENCE
(RELEASE 3) ...............
General ................................................................................................................
BATTERY CARE .....................................................................................................
I

IMPORTANT!
Digital telephones can access all features available to electronic telephones.
8-i

PAGE
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-17
8-38
8-38
8-38
8-39
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-42
8-43
8-44
8-55
8-62
8-62
8-63

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
/

I

I

8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-11A
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-33
8-34
8-35
8-36
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-40

TITLE
RESERVE POWER/BATTERY
WIRING.. .............................................................
DPFT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.. ..................................................................................
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
AND BACKGROUND
MUSIC FUNCTIONAL
DIAGRAM .......
MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION
A.. ..............................................................
MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION
B ................................................................
MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION
C.. ..............................................................
PIOU/PEPU
RELAY CONTROL
FUNCTIONAL
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................
PIOUS RELAY CONTROL
FUNCTIONAL
WIRING DIAGRAM.. ..........................
DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)
....................................
MULTIPLE DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTIONS (HDCB) .....................................
HESB/ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING.. ......
HESB/DIGITAL
TELEPHONE
WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING .................
HESB/AMPLIFIED
SPEAKER WIRING ................................................................
HESB/TALKBACK
AMPLIFIED
SPEAKER WIRING ............................................
PAGE AND BGM USING SAME AMPLIFIER
(PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)
....................
PIOU ZONE, PAGE/BGM/NlGHT
RING (SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS)
..................
PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS
.............................................................
NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE.. ............................................
SMDR PRINTOUT
EXAMPLES ...........................................................................
PIOU/PIOUS
SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS
.....................................................
PIOU/PIOUS
TTY PORT (PROGRAM
97) DATA DUMP EXAMPLE ..................
PIOU/PIOUS
(TTY) MAINTENANCE
PORT (EXTERNAL
MODEM OR
ASCII TERMINAL).
................................................................................................
VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT
BLOCK DIAGRAM .........................................
ALARM SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM (PIOU/PIOUS)
..........................................
HESB WALL MOUNTING
.....................................................................................
STRATA DK DATA INSTALLATION
EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM ....................
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS
SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION
........................................
PDIU-DS DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
DIAGRAM ...............................................
PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTlONS/RS-232
CONNECTOR
INFORMATION
....
PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPE COMPUTER
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE
CONNECTIONS
....................................................................................................
PDIU-DI TO IBM XT-TYPE COMPUTER,
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE
CONNECTIONS
....................................................................................................
PDIU-DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE
CONNECTIONS
....................................................................................................
PDIU-DS TO HAYES TYPE SMART MODEM, RS-232 CONNECTOR/
CABLE CONNECTIONS
.......................................................................................
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS
MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45
ADAPTER CONNECTIONS..
.......
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS
MODULAR CORDS AND RJ-45/RS-232
ADAPTER PIN
CONNECTIONS
....................................................................................................
PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS
.................................................
PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING.. .................................
INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL
PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS..
........
EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS
L.........
PC AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST .....................................................................
AMPLIFIED
TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE
AND/OR AMPLIFIED
DISA
FUNCTIONAL
WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................................

8-ii

PAGE
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-25
8-26
8-26A
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-33
8-34
8-35
8-36
8-37
8-37
8-38
8-45
8-46
8-47
8-48
8-49
8-50
8-51
8-52
8-53
8-54
8-55
8-56
8-57
8-59
8-61
8-64

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
1 GENERAL

2) Ensure that a serviceable
lo-ampere
fuse is
installed in the in-line fuse holder of the ,PBTC3M battery cable.

1.OO This chapter provides procedures necessary
to connect
optional
peripheral
equipment
to
STRATA DK systems. The installation instructions
for each peripheral
option include hardware
requirements,
PC6 configuration,
interconnection/
wiring requirements,
and programming
considerations, as applicable.

3) Connect the white lead of the PBTC-3M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the
12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the
open negative terminal of the second 12VDC
battery.

1.Ol Peripheral equipment is connected to system
PCBs. Refer to PCB Installation, Section 200-096206, for PCB installation
instructions
and PCB
configuration
information.

IMPORTANT NOTE!
The KSU must be connected to the AC
power source, and the power supply ON/
OFF switch set to ON prior to the final step
of connecting the reserve power batteries
to the po wer supply via the BA TT +/- recep
tacle. If the batteries are connected after
AC power is lost, reserve power will not
function.

1.02 Figures are located in the middle and at the
end of this chapter.

2 RESERVE

POWER/POWER
OPTIONS

FAILURE

4) Connect the PBTC3M battery cable two-prong
male plug to the power supply BATT +/- receptacle.

2.00 STRATA DK systems offer two options to
protect system operation in the event of a power
failure; the Reserve Power option, and the Power
Failure Emergency Transfer option.

5) To test reserve power operation, disconnect
the system AC power plug with the power
supply power ON/OFF switch in the ON position. The system should continue to operate
without any interruption.

2.10 Reserve Power Option
2.11 STRATA DK system power supplies provide
the capability of connecting a reserve power source
(battery backup) to ensure uninterrupted
system
operation
in the event of a power failure. A preassembled
interface cable for installation
of the
Reserve Power option is available from Toshiba
(PBTC-3M).

NOTE:
See Paragraph
ments.

care requireI

2.20 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option

2.12 Refer to KSU Installation, Section 200-096205, for site requirements
for the reserve power
batteries.

2.21 The Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) provides a means of automatically
connecting
up to
eight selected CO lines directly to designated standard telephones in the event of a power failure. The
DPFT allows normal operation of the selected CO
lines and standard telephones
when the system is
in service. When power is restored, each telephone
is independently
reconnected
to the system after
that telephone is finished with its direct CO line call.
The DPFT is normally installed on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).

IMPORTANT NOTE!
Local ordinances may dictate battery type
and installation details.
2.13 Reserve Power Installation. Install the Reserve Power option in accordance
ing steps (refer to Figure 8-l):

14 for battery

with the follow-

1) Connect the PBTCSM black jumper wire from
the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to
the negative terminal of the second 12VDC
battery.

2.22 A circuit diagram
Figure 8-2.

8-l

of the DPFT

is shown

in

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
2.23 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation. Install the DPFT in accordance with the
following

electronic and standard telephones
connected to
the system. A variety of Background Music options
are also provided (refer to Figure 8-3).
.

steps:

1) Mount the DPFT on or near the MDF.

3.10 Music-on-Hold (MOH) Option

NOTE:
Refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section ZOO-096209, Figures 9- 14 and 9- 15 for MDF interconnecting tables.

2)

3.11 The Music-on-Hold

(MOH) option allows connection of an external music source, such as a tape
recorder or tuner, to the system for MOH. The
PCTU and PCTUSl PCBs provide the interface for
connection of the external musicsource.
The PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU MOH relay provides on/off control
for the MOH source. MOH source and MOH relay
contact specifications
are:

Using 25-pair cables
with amphenol-type
connectors (female for DPFT connector Jl, male
for DPFT connector J2), connect the DPFT to
two 66-type quick-connect
blocks.
l

3) Connect the CO lines selected for emergency
use to the DPFT Jl -block “CO-TIP” and “CO-

l
l

RING” terminals.

4) Connect the PCOU or PCOU2 circuits related
to the emergency
CO lines to the DPFT Jlblock “PCOU-TIP”
nals.

and “PCOU-RING”

l

termi-

l

the standard telephone stations selected for emergency use to the DPFT J2-block
“TEL-TIP” and “TEL-RING”
terminals.

the PSTU or PESU (circuits 1 & 2)
circuits related to the emergency
standard
telephones to DPFT J2-block”PSTU-TIP”and
“PSTU-RING”
terminals.
Connect the DPFT to the PSTU DG and -24V
terminals (refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section
200-096-209,
for PSTU and PCOU wiring/
interconnecting
details).

24VDC maximum
1 ampere maximum

3.12 Music-on-Hold Installation. Install the Muare avail-

sic-on-Hold option in accordance
steps (refer to Figure 8-3):

8) To test the operation of the DPFT, turn the
system power switch OFF, and verify that CO
dial tone is available at each standard telephone connected to the DPFT. Also, call back
to each telephone using an outside line.

3

Voltage:
Current:

IMPORTANT NOTICE!
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a
license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and
Publishers (ASCAP), or other similar organization, if copyrighted music is transmitted through the Music-on-Hold feature
of this telecommunications
system.
Toshiba America Information Systems,
inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising
out of the failure to obtain such a license.

6) Connect

NOTE:
The -24 V and DG ground terminals
able on PSTU only, not on PESU.

Input Impedance:
600 ohms
Input Voltage (recommended
levels)
Minimum:
0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)
Maximum:
0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)

Relay Contact Specifications
l

5) Connect

7)

MOH Source Specifications

1)

Connect the external music source to PCTU
or PCTUSl connector terminal P6.

2)

volume control
volume: clockwise increases volume; counterclockwise
decreases volume. Listen to the CO line on-hold
when setting MOH to Ithe proper volume.

3)

If MOH relay control is required, access Program 77-l. Set LED 05 to ON to configure the

MUSIC-ON-HOLD/BACKGROUND
MUSIC OPTIONS

3.00 STRATA DK systems provide a Music-onHold option for CO/E & M TIE lines, and digital,

8-2

with the following

Rotate the PCTU or PCTUSI

(VRl) to adjust Music-on-Hold

.‘\,
,:

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
MOH/Night Transfer Control relay for the MOH
function. This feature requires the installation
of a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB.

telephone speakers with BGM turned on (via
m 110 or m
button) and to the external
page system via the PIOU, PIOUS; or’PEPU
optional interface unit (only one optional interface PCB can be installed in a DK system).

4A) Set PIOU or PEPU jumper plug Pll to MAKE
or BREAK position as required:
l
MAKE (M)-Shorts
the normally open
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is
activated.
l
BREAK(B)-Opens the normally closed
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is
activated.
4B)

I

I

2) Configuration
B-two
music sources: This
configuration
allows the MOH source to be
connected to P6 of the PCTU or PCTUS PCB
(as in Configuration
A) and a separate BGM
source to be connected to circuit 3 of a PEKU
or circuit 8 of a PESU PCB (see Figure 8-5).
With this configuration,
the MOH source is
sent only to CO lines/stations
on hold, while
the BGM source is sent directly to electronic/
digital telephone speakers and to the external
I
page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU
optional interface unit.

Solder PIOUS jumper W2 to MAKE or BREAK
position if required:
l
MAKE (M)-Shorts
the normally open
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO
line is in the hold condition.
l
BREAK (B)-Opens
the normally closed
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO
line is in the hold condition.

3) Configuration
C-three
music sources: This
configuration
allows the MOH source to be
connected to P6 of the PCTU or PCTUSl (as
in Configuration
A). The digital or electronic
telephone BGM source is connected to circuit
3 of a PEKU or circuit 8 of a PESU PCB (as in
I
Configuration
B), and aseparate
BGM source
is sent to the external page speakers via the
PIOU PCB (see Figure 8-6). When a separate
BGM source is connected
to the PIOU, two
customer-supplied
amplifiers are required to
drive the external speakers.
One amplifier
drives the speakers for BGM when page is idle
and the other amplifier drives the speakers
during page. The PIOU switches
BGM or
page to the external speakers via the zone
relays (the PIOUS and PEPU do not provide
zone relays, therefore Configuration
C is not
possible with these PCBs).

5) MOH (CO line or intercom hold) is applied from
the PCTU or PCTUS through the KSU cabinet’s
backplane to the PEMU, PCOU, PEKU, PESU,
and PSTU to provide Music-on-Hold
for E & M
TIE lines, CO lines, electronic/digital
telephones, and single-line stations, respectively.
6) MOH is also applied through the PCTU Page/
Background
Music (BGM) control to provide
BGM to electronic/digital
telephone speakers
and external page (refer to Paragraph 3.20).

3.20 Background Music (BGM) Options
3.21 The Background Music options allow music
to play over optional external speakers (external
page system) and/or electronic telephone speakers. The system allows BGM to be configured any
of the three ways described below:

I

3.22 MOH Source as Background Music Installation. Install the MOH/Background
Music option
in accordance
Figure 8-3):

1) Configuration
A-one
music source: This
configuration
allows BGM and MOH to share
the same music source (see Figure 8-4). With
thisconfiguration,
the MOH/BGM musicsource
is connected to terminal P6 of the PCTU or
PCTUS PCB. The music source is sent to CO
lines/stations
on hold, to electronic/digital

with the following

steps

(refer to

1) Ensure that the Music-on-Hold
option is installed in accordance
with Paragraph 3.12.
I
2) The output of the PCTU or PCTUSI
page/
BGM control is applied through the backplane

8-3

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991

2) Connect

to the output select switch (SW4) on the PIOU
or PEPU.

the tip and ring circuit 03 of a PEKU
to the 600 Q output of the BGM source per
Figure 8-5 or connect the BGM output to
circuit 8, of a PESU PCB.

3) Set the SW4 switch to either SPO or SPI, as
required:
SPO-Directs
external page and nonamplified BGM to the HESB or external
amplifier (pins 13 and 38).
SPI-Directs
external page and BGM
through the on-board 3-watt amplifier to
the external speaker output (pins 25 and
50).

3) If BGM is connected, cut W5 on the PEKU or
W7 on the PESU PCB that BGM is connected

4) Using the BGM source’s volume control, adjust the BGM volume to the desired level
while listening to BGM via an electronic telephone speaker
and/or the external
page
speakers.
When BGM is sent to external
speakers
via a PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU
PCB, use the external amplifier volume control to balance the BGM and page volume
levels.

NOTE:
The PIOUS provides
non-amplified
BGM/
page output only (SPT and SPR, see Figure
8-8).

4) When

using an HESB or external amplifier for
paging/BGM,
adjust volume using the HESB
or amplifier volume control.

3.24 External Background Music Installation.
The external background music options are closely
associated with the external paging options. Refer
to Paragraph
6 for external paging amplifier installation.

5) When using the internal amplifier for paging/
BGM, adjust the volume using the volume
control (VRl) on the PIOU/PEPU
PCB.

4 RELAY CONTROL

3.23 BGM Source to PEKU or PESU Installation. A BGM source can be connected to either a

4.00 Two relays are provided on PIOU, PIOUS,
and PEPU PCBs to control the operation of peripheral equipment
(see Figures 8-7 and 8-8):
l
External Page/Door
Lock Relay (DET/DER)
l
Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold
Relay (NHT/
NHR)

PEKU or PESU. This music will be sent to all
electronic/digital
telephones
and to the external
page system via PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU. This
BGM source is separated
from the MOH source
connected to the PCTU or PCTUS PCB. Connect
the BGM source to the PEKU or PESU in accordance with the following steps (Figure 8-5):

I
I

OPTIONS

4.01 Each relay may be configured to provide one
of two possible control functions.
Additionally,
each relay may be configured
as normally open
(MAKE) or normally closed (BREAK). Electrical
specifications
for the relay contacts are:

NOTE:

Releases 1 and 2 require that the BGM PEKU
or PEW must be in slot 01; Release 3 allows
the BGM PEKU or PESU to be in any slot as
signed in Program 19.

Voltage:

1) Using the programming
electronic telephone
or a terminal, set LED 09 to ON in Program
10-2 if the BGM source connects to PEKU,
circuit 3. If the BGM source is connected
to
PESU, circuit 8, set LED IO to ON in Program 1O-2. If using PCTU3, identify the BGM
slot via Program 19.

l

24VDC

maximum

Current:
l

1 ampere

maximum

CA UT/ON!
Do not connect relays directly to 12OvAC
power source.
*

8-4

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
NOTE:
Refer to the Programming Procedures, Section
200-096-300,
as necessary when instructed to
program the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU in the
following paragraphs.

l

BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (DET and DER) when e)cternal
page is activated.

3) Refer to Figures 8-7 and 8-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU to the MDF as required for the external
paging function.

4.10 External Page/Door Lock Relay Options
with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU.
4.11 The External Page/Door

Lock Relay may be
programmed for either the external page function or
the door lock control function (refer to Figures 8-6
and 8-7).

4.15 Door Lock Control (PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU).

4.12 When configured in Program 77-1 for the external page function, the relay controls an external
music source connected to the PIOU, PIOUS or
PEPU to provide background
music over external
speakers. When a paging announcement
is made
over the external speakers, the external page relay
mutes the background music.

NOTE:
Only one door lock control is available using an
optional inten’ace PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU),
because only one interface PCB is allowed.

Configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for the door
lockcontrol function in accordance with the following
steps (refer to Figure 8-9):

Program 77-l. Set LED 07 to ON to
configure the external page/door lock relay for
the door lock control function.

1) Access

4.13 When configured in Program 77-1 for the door
lock control function, the relay controls an external
door lock. When a station’s door lock button (DRLK
0) is pressed, the door lock control relay unlocks the
doorfor3or6seconds,asspecifiedinprogramming.

Program 77-I. Set LED 20 to OFF for a 3second door lock activation time, or set LED 20 to
ON for a 6-second door lock activation time.

2) Access

34

Set the PI0 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU
to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door
lock button is pressed.
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s
door lock button is pressed.

W

Solder the WI jumper plug on the PIOUS to the
MAKE or BREAK position as required:
MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s
door lock button is pressed.
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (DETand DER) when astation’s
door lock button is pressed.

4.14 External Page Control. Configure the PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU for the external page mute function
in accordance
with the following steps (refer to
Figure 8-7 or 8-8):
1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 07 to OFF to
configure the external page/door lock relay for
the external page function.
2A) Set the jumper plug PI0 on the PIOU or PEPU
jumper plug to the MAKE or BREAK position as
required:
l
MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page
is activated.
l
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external
page is activated.
2B) Solder

the jumper

WI

4) Refer to Figure 8-9 for wiring/interconnecting
details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to
the MDF as required for the door lock control
function.

on the PIOUS to the

MAKE or BREAK position as required:
l

MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when external page
is activated.

4.16 Door Lock Control (HDCB). With Release 2
software,

8-5

the B output jack of each HDCB can be

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
NOTES:
1. See Programs 39, 77-1, and 77-2 tp program assignments.
2. HDCB hardware option settings for door
lock control operation:
l
Set SW1 (jumper) to DOOR position.
l
Set SW2 (switch) to LOCKposition.
3. Doorlock4isnotavailablewiththePCTlJSl.

configured
to provide one door lock control; this
allows up to four door lock controls to be provided
by HDCBs if the system is equipped with a PCTU2
or three door lock controls if with a PCTUSl (see
Figure 8-10). Each door lock control installed reduces the system’s door phone capacity by one.
Any electronic telephone can be programmed
with
door lock buttons that can control any of the door
locks that are connected
to properly configured
HDCBs. Configure each HDCB door lockcontrol as
follows:

1)

Cut jumper W9of the particular PEKU or PESU
that will connect to the HDCB.

2)

Connect circuit 5 VT/VR and DT/DR pairs to
the HDCB HKSU modular jack per Figure 9-3.

3) Connect
modular

4.20 Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold
tions with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU

4.21 The NHT/NHR relay may be programmed
for
either the night relay or the MOH relay function
(refer to Figures 8-7 and 8-8).
4.22 When configured for the night transfer function
with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the system
is in the NIGHT mode. The relay may be rogrammed to activate continuously when the d
key
(only) is set to NIGHT mode (for indirect answering
machine control); or to pulsate at l-second ON/3seconds OFF (for a night bell) when incoming CO
lines ring (NT1 = tenant 1 CO lines; NT2 = tenant 2
CO lines) per Program 15.

the door lock wire pair to the HDCB
B-jack (pins 3 & 4) per Figure 9-3.

4) On the HDCB, set SW1 to the DOOR position.
5) On the HDCB, set SW2 to the LOCK position.
6) In

Program 77-1, set the door lock activation

for three or six seconds, and enable the PESU
or PEKU ports for HDCB connection.

7)

Program 39, assign m

buttons
to the desired
customer’s
record sheet.

9)

4.24 Night Transfer Relay Control. Configure the

1 N m
1
stations
per the

PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for the Night Transfer
Relay function in accordance
with the following
steps (refer to Figures 8-7 and 8-8):

Check each m
button from each station:
The HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 & 4) will
momentarily close (threeorsixseconds)
when
the appropriate
m
button is pressed.

4.17 HDCB/DRLK Assignments

I

4.23 When configured for the Music-on-Hold
function with Program 77-1, the relay activates any
time a CO line is on hold. In this configuration,
the
relay is normally used to control the Music-on-Hold
source.

In Program 77-2, enable the HDCB B-jack for
door lock operation.

8) In

PEKU

Relay Op

1) Access
2) Access

Guide

04
12
20
28

1
2
3
4

m
0,
=I,
ml,
ml,
(PCTU2

Code
Code
Code
Code
only)

Relay for the Night

Program 77-1. Set LED 06 to provide

continuous
or pulsating relay activation
as
follows:
l
OFF-Programs
the relayforcontinuous
activation when m
button (only) is set.
l
ON-Programs
the relay for pulsating
activation when them
or m
button is
set to NIGHT mode and a tenant 1 or
tenant 2 CO line rings.

or PESU

First (fifth circuit)
Second (fifth circuit)
Third (fifth circuit)
Fourth (fifth circuit)

Program 77-l. Set LED 05 to OFF to

configure the Night/Hold
Relay function.

72
73
74
75

8-6

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
NOTE:
CO lines must be enabled in Program 78 for
the NT pulsating relay function.

NOTE:
Door phones programmed
to ring over externalpage in night mode (Program 77-i) db not
activate the NT relay.

3) Access Programs
87, 88, and 89 to set the
CO lines that will activate the relay (when the
system is in the NIGHT mode).

4.25 MOH Relay Control.
Configure
the PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU for the MOH relay function in
accordance
with the following steps (refer to Figures 8-7 and 8-8):

4) Access Program
39 to program
a Night
Transfer button (NT1 or NT2) on all telephones that are to transfer the system into the
NIGHT mode.

1)

5) Access Programs
29-1 N 29-4 to program a
Night Transfer button (NT1 or NT2) on all DSS
consoles that are to transfer the system into
the NIGHT mode.

24

Set the Pll jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU
to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
l
MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is
on hold.
l
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO
line is on hold.

2B)

Solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the
MAKE or BREAK oosition, as required:
MAKE-Shorts
the normally-open
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line
is on hold.
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO
line is in on hold.

NOTE:

Program29-4is notavailable

when a PCTUSI

PCB is installed.
6) If tenant operation is required, access Program
15 to set the CO lines for tenant 1 (m)
or
tenant 2 (m)
operation.
7A) Set the PI 1 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU
to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
l
MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay
is activated.
l
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night
relay is activated.

Access Program 77-l. Set LED 05 to ON to
configure the Night/MOH
relay for the MOH
relay function.

3) Refer to Figures 8-7 and 8-8 for wiring/interconnecting
details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the
MOH relay function.

7B) Solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
l
MAKE-Shorts
the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when the night
relay is activated.
l
BREAK-Opens
the normally
closed
contacts (NHT and NHR) when night
relay is activated.

5 EXTERNAL

SPEAKER
OPTIONS

5.00 STRATA DK systems
utilizing an HESB:

UNIT (HESB)

provide

three options

5.01 Loud Ringing Bell Option. The Loud Ringing Bell option allows the voice first or ringing signal
tone to be amplified without the use of other manufacturers’
equipment.
The voice first and signal
tone can be amplified on all 6500-series electronic

8) Refer to Figures 8-7 and 8-8 for wiring/interconnecting
details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the
night relay function.

8-7

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
NOTES:
1. HESB connections made in steps 4 N 7
may be accomplished
using the HESB
VOICE modular jack instead of the TBI
terminal block.
2. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65 cable
in the 6500-series
electronic
telephone
per Section
200-096-207
before proceeding with steps 4 and 5.

telephones
and 1 OOO-series digital telephones
equipped with HHEU PCBs (refer to Section 200096-207). The HESB automatically
turns off once
the ringing call or voice first has been manually
answered from the electronic or digital telephone.
This turn-off feature prevents audio feedback problems.
5.02 Amplified
Speaker Option. The Amplified
Speaker option allows the HESB to be configured
as a paging speaker. The HESB is connected to the
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600-ohm page output to
provide an amplified external speaker.

4) Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TBI terminal
tIlock to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable
Jsing a modular block per Figure 8-l 1.
5) Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TBI terminal
tslack to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65
:able using a modular block per Figure 8-l 1.

5.03 Talkback
Amplified
Speaker Option. The
Talkback Amplified Speaker option allows a talkback
speaker to be provided in areas where a telephone
is not needed, such as in conjunction with a door
phone. In this configuration,
the HESB is connected
to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 6OOQ (duplex) output
and is used as the amplifier and speaker. The door
phone unit (MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and
serves as a microphone to provide talkback operation (the MDFB pushbutton
is inoperative, and the
unit serves only as a microphone for talkback).

6)

7) Connect terminal 4 of the HESB TBI terminal
tYock to pin 4 of the electronic

nodular
8)

NOTE:
The PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU 600 Q (duplex)
page output is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers.
5.10

System

Hardware

HESB Option

telephone’s

block (VOICE-RING).

Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V
ead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal
Ilock, and connect the power supply’s OV lead
0 terminal 2.

9) Plug the provided

power cord into the power
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.

NOTE:
See Figure
instructions.

Requirements

5.11 System
hardware
requirements
vary depending on the HESB option selected. Refer to the
following installation
procedures
for the system
hardware requirements
for each option.
5.20

Connect terminal 3 of the HESB TBI terminal
to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s
nodular block (VOICE-TIP).

tIlock

8-24

for HESB

wall mounting

5.22 Loud Ringing Bell Test. Test the Loud Ringing Bell installation in accordance with the following
steps:

Installation

1)

5.21 Loud Ringing
Bell Installation.
Install the
HESB Loud Ringing Bell option in accordance with
the following steps (refer to Figure 8-l 1 for electronic or 8-l 1 A for digital telephones).

Make a CO or station call to the station configured for the loud ringing bell.
l
Ringing will be heard over the HESB.

2)

Adjust the HESBvolume
level.

1) Connect a jumper between
on the HESB TBI terminal

terminals
block.

6 and 7

2) Connect a jumper between
on the HESB TBI terminal

terminals
block.

5 and 8

3) Connect a jumper between
on the HESB TB2 terminal

terminals
block.

4 and 5

control to the desired

3) If ringing is heard at the station, but not over
the HESB, perform the following check while
the station is ringing:
a) Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the
HESB TBI terminal block.
l
Voltage indication should be 4.5 N
5.0 VDC.

8-8

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
NOTE:
Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There shouldbe NO voltagepotential
across terminals I and 2.

1) Make an external page.
l
Page should be heard over the HESB.
.
2) Adjust the HESBvolume
level.

b) If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the electronic telephone
wiring connections
to the HESB have
been made properly (wires to terminals 1
and 2 of the HESBTBI terminal block may
have been reversed).

5.25 Talkback
Amplified
Speaker Installation.
Install the HESB Talkback Amplified Speaker option in accordance with the following steps (refer to
Figure 8-13):

5.23 Amplified
Speaker Installation.
Install the
HESB Amplified
Speaker option in accordance
with the following steps (refer to Figure 8-l 2):
1) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TBI terminal block.

1 and 2

2) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TBI terminal block.

6 and 7

3) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TBI terminal block.

5 and 8

4) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

3 and 4

5) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

5 and 6

64

6B)

control to the desired

1) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TBI terminal block.

1 and 2

2) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

3 and 4

3) Connect a jumper between terminals
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

5 and 6

NOTE:
HESB connections
made in steps 4 w 7 may
be accomplished
using the HESB VOICE and
door phone modular jack instead of the TBI
terminal block.
4) Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TBI terminal
block to pin Ll of the MDFB.
5) Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TBI terminal
block to pin L2 of the MDFB.

Connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page
output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of
the HESB TBI terminal block.

6) Connect

Connect the PIOUS 600-ohm
page output
(SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the
HESB TBI terminal block.

7) Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TBI terminal block to pin 2 of the MDFB.

terminal 9 of the HESB TBI
block to pin 1 of the MDFB.

7) Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and
connect the OV lead to terminal 2.
8) Plug the provided power cord into the power
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.

terminal

84

Connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page
output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of
the HESB TBI terminal block.

84

Connect the PIOUS 600-ohm
page output
(SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the
HESB TBI terminal block.

9) Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO
position.

9) Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO
position.

5.24 Amplified
Speaker Test. Test the amplified
speaker installation in accordance with the following steps:

10) Connect the HACU-1,20’s +I 2V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and
connect the OV lead to terminal 2.

8-9

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
11) Plug the provided power cord into the power
supply and to a 117 VAC, 60Hz power source.

1)

5.26 Talkback Amplified Speaker Test. Test the
Talkback Amplified Speaker installation
dance with the following steps:

in accor-

2) Connect

the paging amplifier mute terminal to
pins 7 and 32 of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect
to DET and DER of the PIOUS.

1) Make an external page.
l
Page will be heard over the HESB.
2) Verify that someone speaking into the
phone can be heard at the paging station
this application, pressing the door phone
ton is not required to talkback through the
phone).

6 EXTERNAL

3) Connect the music source to the input no. 2 of
the paging amplifier.

door
(with
butdoor

4) Connect
output.

to the paging

amplifier

6.13 Zone Page with BGM (separate amplifiers). This configuration
provides
multiple-zone

6.01 STRATA

DK systems offer a variety of external page options. Additionally,
a BGM option is
available with each external page option. DK systems support:
l
Paging with BGM (same amplifier).
l
Zone paging with BGM (separate amplifiers).
l
Zone paging with BGM (multiple amplifiers).
PCB only is equipped

the speaker

5) Verify that the PIOU or PEPU PlO jumper plug
is in the MAKE position or that the PIOUS WI
jumper wire is in the MAKE position.

PAGE OPTIONS

6.00 System Hardware Requirements

NOTE:
The PIOU
paging.

Connect the input no. 1 from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU
or PEPU; or connect to SPT and SPR of the
PIOUS.

paging capability. The output of the paging amplifier is routed back to the PIOU, where it is switched
to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU relays Kl
through K4. The relay selected is determined
by
the access code dialed by the station user. Default
access codes are:
l
Kl/zone 1 = 35
l
K2/zone 2 = 36
l
K3/zone 3 = 37
l
K4/zone 4 = 38
l
All zones = 39

with zone

6.02 Either a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB is
required to support the external paging/BGM
options. The PIOU will support any of the paging/BGM
options. The PEPU and PIOUS will support only the
paging with BGM (same amplifier) option.

NOTE:
Multi-zone page output
mum at 300 ohms.

6.10 External Page Option installation

rating

is 30W/maxi-

6.14 An all zone page code (39) is also available as
an option (see Program 10-2). When the all page
code is dialed, all four relays are activated to permit
simultaneous
paging to all speaker zones and all
electronic telephone speakers. Install this option in
accordance with the following steps (refer to Figure
8-15):

6.11 All paging

connections
are made via the
PIOU or PEPU amphenol connectors or the PIOUS
TBl terminal to the MDF.

6.12 Page (single zone) with BGM (same amplifier). In this configuration,
paging and BGM are
amplified by a common customer-supplied
paging
amplifier. When the external page access code is
dialed, the external page control relay is activated,
which applies a short (or open) to the amplifier mute
control to mute the music. Install this option in
accordance with the following steps (refer to Figure
8-14):

1) Connect the input from the paging amplifier
pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU.

8-10

2) Connect
amplifier

the BGM music source
input.
*

3) Connect

the paging amplifier

to

to the music

output to the “M”

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
contact’s PIOU relays Kl - K4 and the “C”
terminal of zone 1 - zone 4 speakers.

6) Cross-connect
a jumper from pin 34 (NHT) to
pin 23 (PG COMMON) from the PIOU PCB.
.

4) Connect the BGM music amplifier output to
terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and
to zone 1 - zone 4 speakers.

7) In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to OFF and 06
to ON. Set LED 08 to ON if door phones are
to ring over external
in NIGHT mode.

6.15 Zone Page with BGM (multiple amplifiers).

2)

ring via external page when the system
in the NIGHT mode.

to electronic telephones
per the System
ord Sheets (see Note 2).

3) Connect the paging amplifier outputs to PIOU
relays Kl - K4 and zone 1 - zone 4 speakers.
4) Connect the music amplifier output to terminal

NOTES:
1. All zones will ring with this option; night
ringing to selected zones is not possible.
2. The m
or m
buttons put CO lines in
NIGHT ring mode per Program 15; NT1 TENANT l/NT2-TENANT
2 CO line assignment.

23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to the “C”
terminal of zone 1 - zone 4 speakers.

5) Connect

zone 1 - zone 4 speakers “A” terminal to the “B” contact of the PIOU relays KlK4 respectively.

6.16 Night Ringing over External Page Zones
(PIOU only). To allow the night ringing signal to be

7 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL
RECORDING (SMDR) PRINTER/CALL
ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS

sent over zone paging, install the paging amplifier
in accordance
with the following steps (refer to
Figure 8-17). (Steps 1 - 6 are performed
at the
MDF ’

2)

Cross-connect
the amplifier output A to the
PGINl - PGIN4 connector from the PIOU.

7.00 An SMDR printer or call accounting
device
may be connected to the system to provide a hardcopy record of station activity (incoming, outgoing,
and transferred calls account code entries) on CO
lines or a printout of the customer data base. Call
record data is printed out at the completion of each
call, provided the call was at least 10 seconds in
length. Program SMDR with Program 60, and use
Program 97 to have the SMDR printer display the
customer data base.

3) Cross-connect

the amplifier output B to the
zone 1 - zone 4 speaker common line.

4) Cross-connect

the PIOU PGOUTI
to zone 1 - zone 4 speakers.

5) Cross-connect

the amplifier
(NHR) of the PIOU.

Rec-

10) Press them
or m
button on an electronic
telephone
to set the system into the NIGHT
mode. Test by calling into the system on a CO
line assigned (Program 78) to night ring over
external page.
l
When ringing sounds (see Note 2) over
the page, press m 1 Ef 1 to answer.

Connect the music source to the music amplifier input.

Cross-connect
the amplifier input to pins 13
(SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU PCB.

is set

9) In Program 39, assign themormbuttons

Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers
to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU.

1)

is

8) In Program 78, enable the CO lines that are to

This configuration
also provides
multiple-zone
paging capability, as in Paragraph 6.13. However,
separate amplifiers are used for each zone. Install
this option in accordance
with the following steps
(refer to Figure 8-l 6):

1)

page when the system

- PGOUT4

output A to pin 9

7.01 SMDR will send out special names for the
following types of calls: .
l
MSS: Prints on DISA or DISC calls to stations
(see Note).

8-11

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
l

MODM: Prints on calls to the IMDU

remote

l

l

maintenance
modem (station 19).
DISA: Prints on DISA calls to CO lines when
calling through the system CO-to-CO.

l

NOTE:
MSS willprintonlyon
DISA orDlSCcalls thatare
answered 10 seconds after the DK dial tone is
sent to the calling party. If the call is answered
before 10 seconds, the call will register as a
normal incoming call and the MSS/transfer
portion of the call will not print out.

l

l

03 MSS 04:32

EXAMPLE 3-DISA

calls print out as MSS.

l

l

l

No Answer DISA Call

PRINTOUT A
EXAMPLE 2-DISA

00:00:32

l

Outgoing CO Line Call

Outside caller rings CO line 01 (line 01 is programmed as DISA).
Line 01 returns intercom dial tone after two ring
cycles (5 N 6 seconds).
Caller dials 703 to access CO line 03 (outgoing).
Caller dials the DISA security code and receives
CO dial tone.
Caller dials the telephone
number and converses when the call is answered.
Caller hangs up.
The call releases, and Printout C prints after the
call disconnects
at 12:22.

PRINTOUT C
Auto Release signal:

00:06

03 DISA
01 DISA

Internal Station Call

12:22
12:22

Disconnect Timer:

Call Sequence B
I

203

NOTES:
1. If the CO provides the auto release (AR)
signal (see Program
15), the call disconnects when either party hangs up.
2. If the auto release signal is not returned,
the CO lines will remain seized until the
DISA disconnect
timer releases the call
(approximately
five minutes).

Outside caller rings CO line 03 (CO line 03 is
programmed
as a DISA line).
Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after
two ring cycles (5 N 6 seconds).
Caller does nothing.
After 32 seconds, call is disconnected.
Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59.

03 MSS 04:59

00:05

Call Sequence C
l

l

EXAMPLE l-Ring,
Call Sequence A

00:00:48

NOTE:
DISA CO line calls print out as DISA.

l

NOTE:
DISA station

I

PRINTOUT B

l

SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO Lines

,
.1’

NOTE:
MSS will not print if the call is answered within
IO seconds from when the caller receives dial
tone.

7.02 Figure 8-l 8 shows a sample SMDR printout
and describes the contents of each column of the
printout. The following examples show several call
record samples and describe
the sequence
of
events which occurred to generate the call records.
NOTE:
SMDR printout “time of day” and day/month/
year (DD/MM/YY)
is the same as the system
clock time/date setby the station connected to
port 00. SMDR DD/MM/YY
will print out each
time 50 call records are generated.

Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after
two ring cycles (5 N 6 seconds).
Caller dials 203.
After 48 seconds from start of call, station 203
answers.
Printout B prints after station 203 answers the
call at 4:32.

01 DISA
03 DISA

Outside caller rings CO line 03 (CO line 03 is
programmed
as a DISA line).

8-12

12:24
12:24

00:02;01
00:02;01

(outgoing)
(incoming)

s
00:04;57
00:04;57

(incoming)
(outgoing)

I

I

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
7.03 System Program Data Printout. If a printer
is connected to the
information stored
may be printed out
97 (see Paragraph

7.20 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting
stallation

SMDR port, customer program
in the PCTU or PCTUSI
RAM
for reference by using Program
7.14).

7.21 Install the SMDR printer/call accounting device option in accordance with the following steps
(refer to Figures 8-19, 9-l 7, and 9-l 9):

7.10 SMDR Hardware Requirements

1)

7.11 A DK system must be equipped with a PIOU
or PIOUS PC6 to support the SMDR printer/call
accounting device option. Connection of the printer
or call accounting
device to the PIOU or PIOUS
PCB is accomplished
with a 3-pair modular cord (7
feet maximum)
and a PPTC connector
adaptor
(refer to Figure 8-19 for details). Call record data is
ASCII-formatted,
8 bits, no parity, 1 -stop bit.

or PIOUS SW1 switch to the
appropriate
baud rate (300 or 1200 bps), as
determined
by the baud rate of the printer or
call accounting device.

3) Set the printer or call accounting
bits/no parity/one stop bit.

8 MAINTENANCE

Program 60
Item 3-Selects
the records of outgoing calls or
outgoing and incoming calls to be printed.
Item 4-Selects
digit length of account code (4 to
15 digits).
Item 5-Allows
only long distance call records to
be printed.

OPTIONS

NOTE:
An external modem is required for Remote
Maintenance
if an IMDU is not installed on the
PIOU or PIOUS. The IMDU has a built-in
maintenance
channel for remote connection;
however, an external modem requires a CO
line, PSTU or PESU port.

Program 97
l

TERMINAL

8.00 A customer-supplied
maintenance
terminal
may be connected to the system (PIOU or PIOUS)
either locally or remotely. The maintenance
terminal (ASCII terminal) allows system programming
and testing to be accomplished.
Also, the IMDU
modem or an external maintenance
modem (300 or
1200 baud full-duplex) can be connected to allow
system programming
and testing to be accomplished from a remote location.

7.14 SelectableprogrammingoptionsfortheSMDR
printer or call accounting device are:

l

device to 8-

4) Program (Program 60) the system for the required SMDR printer/call accounting
device
options (refer to Paragraph 7.13 and the Programming Procedures, Section 200-096-300).

7.13 SMDR Programming Considerations

l

Connect the interface cable and the PPTC
adaptor from the PIOU or PIOUS SMDR port
to the SMDR printer or call accounting device
DB25 connector.

2) Set the PIOU

7.12 The PIOU or PIOUS contains a call record
buffer which stores call record data (for up to 50
calls) when the printed or call accounting device is
turned off, or when no device is connected to the
SMDR port. No further call records are stored after
the buffer is filled. When the printer or call accounting device is made operational,
an “ERROR
BUFFER OVERFLOW”
message is printed to indicate that the buffer was full, and that some call
information
may have been lost.

l

Device In-

Allows system program data to be printed via the
SMDR port (refer to Figure 8-20 for an example
printout).

8.10 Maintenance Terminal/External
Modem
Option System Hardware Requirements

NOTES:
1. An SMDR printer must be connected
to
the SMDR port to use the printout option
selected by Program 97.
2. Call record data is lost when program data
is printed out using Program 97.

8.11 The STRATA

DK system must be equipped
with a PIOU or PIOUS PCB to support the maintenance terminal/external
modem options. Connecting the maintenance
terminal or external mainte-

8-13

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
provides 300 or 1200 bps, full-duplex communication for remote maintenance.
If the IMDU is employed, a dedicated
CO line, PSTU, oi PESU
connection
is not required. Connection
of the remote maintenance
terminal is through existing system CO lines via intercom number 19. Refer to the
PIOU or PIOUS portion of Section 200-096-206
for
details on hardware installation and programming
requirements.
Remote Maintenance
Procedures,
Section 200-096-400,
provides more information
about using the IMDU for remote maintenance.

nance modem to the PIOU or PIOUS PCB is
accomplished
with a standard 3-pair modular cord
and a PPTC adaptor connected
to the PIOU or
PIOUS TTY jack (refer to Figure 8-21).
NOTE:
If the IMDUmodem
is used, the PPTC adapter
or modular cord is not required.

8.20 Local Maintenance Terminal Installation
8.21 Install the ASCII terminal in accordance
the following steps (refer to Figure 8-21):

with

8.32 External Maintenance Modem Installation.
Install the external modem in accordance
following steps (refer to Figure 8-21):

1) Connect the 3-pair modular cable (or 24 AWG
twisted pairs) and the PPTC adaptor from the
PIOU or PIOUS TTY port to the remote maintenance terminal DB25 connector.

with the

NOTE:
The Toshiba PPTC IX-232 modular-to-D925
adaptor is factory-configured
for ASCII terminal connection.
Pins 2 and 3 of the adaptor
must be reversed for external modem connection.

2) Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2 switch to match
the modem or terminal baud rate:
l
Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator
CD4 is lighted); let out (by pushing again)
for 1200 bps (CD4 is not lighted).
3) Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW3switch
position.

.:
:

1) Connect

the modular cord from the PIOU or
PIOUS TTY port to the PPTC adapter and
then to the external maintenance
modem RS232 25pin connector.

to theTTY

4) Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
BELL configuration,
or cut the W4 jumper on
the PIOUS (also for BELL configuration).

2) Connect

the external maintenance
modem
line-side to a dedicated CO line (tip and ring)
or to a dedicated
PSTU or PESU standard
telephone port (tip and ring). Refer to Wiring
Diagrams, Section 200-096-209,
for wiring/
interconnecting
details.

NOTE:
The PI3 (PIOU) and W4 (PIOUS) CCITT
configurations
are not normally used in the
USA.

3) Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2 switch to match
the modem or terminal baud rate:
l
Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator
CD4/LED is lighted); let out for 1200 bps
(CD4 is not lighted).

5) Programming
and system testing, via the
maintenance
terminal,
is described
in the
Remote
Maintenance
Procedures,
Section
200-096-400.

4) Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW3switch
position.

NOTE:
If the electronic telephone connected to pot?
05 is in the program mode, programming
from
the maintenance
terminal is not allowed.

to the TTY

NOTE:
The PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch is set to the
MODEM position for IMDU operation only.

8.30 Remote Maintenance Option Installation
8.31 IMDU Maintenance
modem

mounts

5) Set the PI3 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
BELL configuration,
or cut the W4 jumper on
the PIOUS (also for BELL configuration).

Modem. The IMDU

on the PIOU or PIOUS

PCB and

8-14

-.,
.. :;’

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991
NOTE:
The P13 (PIOU) or W4 (PIOUS) CCITT configurations are not normally used in the USA.

l
l

System
Feature

Monitoring
Integration

.

9.12 A block diagram of voice mail/auto attendantto-PSTU or -PESU connection is shown in Figure
8-22. See section 200-096-206for
PSTU and PESU
installation.

6) Programming and system testing, via the external maintenance
modem, is described in the
Remote Maintenance Procedures, Section 200096-400. Access to the external maintenance
modem is accomplished
as follows:
If the modem is connected to adedicated
CO line, call the CO line number to establish modem communication.
If the modem is connected to a PSTU or
PESU port, call a DK CO line that can be
transferred
to (or programmed
to ring)
the PSTU or PESU modem port to establish modem communication.

9.13 STRATA DK/INTOUCH
Considerations. Some features

Programming

of STRATA DK
system programming
are unique to INTOUCH, and
are not available for customer-supplied
voice mail
messaging systems. These programming
features
are:
Answer (A) Tone. The STRATA DK stations
will send an answer tone to INTOUCH when the
station answers an INTOUCH call.
Disconnect (D) Tone. The STRATA DK stations will send a disconnect tone to INTOUCH
when the station hangs up while connected to
INTOUCH.

9 VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANTOPTIONS
9.00 System Hardware Requirements

NOTE:
Bothansweranddisconnecttonesprovidemore
efficient INTOUCH port use. Always enable
these options. Both options are enabled by
accessing Program 31, and setting LED 15 to
ON (LEDs 16 and 17 must also be ON to allow
A and D tones).

9.01 Systems may be configured
to support a
Toshiba INTOUCH Digital Voice Messaging System, a customer-supplied
voice mail messaging
system, or auto attendant.
9.02 The STRATA DK system must be equipped
with a PSTU or PESU PCB to support the voice mail
or auto attendant
option. The PSTU is equipped
with eight standard
telephone
circuits, and the
PESU is equipped with two. A CRCU (-4 or -8)
subassembly
must be installed on the PCTU or
PCTUSI PCB. The voice mail/auto attendant option may be connected to any standard telephone
circuit at the MDF block.

B Tone Signals. Stations send a recall (B) tone
to INTOUCH whenever
INTOUCH
answers a
transfer (camp-on) recall from a station that did
not answer an INTOUCH blind transfer. (The B
tone notifies INTOUCH that the call is a recall
and not a new call, allowing INTOUCH to respond with the appropriate
greeting.)
For this
feature to operate, INTOUCH must be equipped
with Version B.06 software or above; and the
DK PSTU or PESU voice mail ports must have
LEDs 19 and 20 turned ON in Program 31.

9.10 INTOUCH Digital Voice Messaging System
9.11 STRATA DK systems are designed to support the full range of features offered by the INTOUCH
Digital Voice Messaging
System.
INTOUCH provides various call routing, message
handling, and information
management
features,
including:
l
Automated
Attendant
0 Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
l
Message Waiting Indication
l
Voice Mail Control from Electronic Telephone

9.14 INTOUCH Installation. Use the above information in concert with Paragraphs 9.23 and 9.24
to install INTOUCH.
9.20 Customer-supplied
Systems

Voice Mail Messaging

9.21 STRATA DK systems are designed to support a wide range of customer-supplied
voice mail

8-15

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
messaging systems. Depending on the voice mail
system used, some of the features available with
INTOUCH (refer to Paragraph 9.10) may be availablewith the customer-supplied
system.

PCTU or PCTUSI
naling.

vides auto digits from call forwarded stations to
direct callers to stations’ mailboxes. All VM ports
should be set to re,ceive auto ID code (Program
31, LED 16).

9.23 Voice mail (all types) PSTU or PESU port
programming
is accomplished
using Programs 31
and IO-2 (refer to Programming
Procedures, Section 200-096-300,
for details). Voice mail (VM) programming features are:
l
VM Groups-This feature groups VM PSTU or
PESU ports together so that message waiting
set/cancel signals appear to originate from the
lowest port in the VM group. All VM ports connected to a particular VM machine should be set
in the same VM group (Program 31, LEDs 05 N
08).
l
Message Waiting Set/Cancel-If
the VM machine has the ability to dial a code, plus the
appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the
message waiting LEDs on electronic telephones,
program the VM machine to dial the following
sequences
(Program 10-2, LED 04):
1) To set a MW LED, the VM machine must
dial Ii+
station number.
2) To cancel a MW LED, the VM machine
must dial Ii+
station number.

9.24 Voice Mail Program Checklist. The following items should
voice mail:

l

NOTE:
The CRCU (-4 or -8) must be installed

before

programming

2) STRATA

DK programs:
Initialization clears voice mail
auto dial codes.
Program 03: Verify that a CRCU (-4 or -8) is
installed on the PCTU to allow the VM/AA to
send DTMF tones.
Program 04: Assigns station numbers to
VM/AA ports (initialized
numbers
recommended).
Program 05: First digit of special codes 63
and 64 (initialized numbers recommended).
Program 1O-l : Set the system for voice first,
and program the VM/AA device to dial the
suffix as “1” after station numbers.
Program 10-2: Set LEDs 04 for set/cancel
operation and 06 ON for the VM to detect 80
msec. tones.
Program 13: If the VM/AA device is the
message center, set the lowest VM port as
the message center.
Program 31: Turn LEDs 05,09, and 15 N 20
ON for the PESU or PSTU ports that are
connected
to the INTOUCH VM/AA ports.
Do not set these options for standard telephone or electronic telephone station ports.

Program 95

No Conference

VM-Prevents
undesired
three-party
connections
during VM call transfers. All VM ports should be set for No Conf
(Program 31, LED 09).
Privacy Override Deny-Prevents
stations from
overriding
(breaking
in) in-progress
VM calls
(Program 31, LED 18).
End-to-End
Signaling-Allows
VM port
DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for
end-to-end
signaling (Program 31, LED 17).

be verified

1) Set INTOUCH
Maintenance
Menu system
parameters
to “D” = STRATA
DK (see
INTOUCH
installation
and Maintenance
Manual for other parameter settings).

NOTE:
Only dial codes 63 and 64 are set in the VM
device configuration;
the VM device will dial
the station number automatically
to set/cancel
the MW LED.

l

Sig-

Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes-Pro-

9.22 Voice Mail (PSTU or PESU Port) Programming Considerations

l

to allow End-to-End

NOTE:
A, D, and B tones should be enabled only for
VM/AA devices that respond to these tones.
l

on the

8-16

Program 33: Set the PESU and PSTU ports
that are connected
to the VM/AA ports

..

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991

l

l

l

l

l

l

to a hunting sequence, starting with the Iowest port hunting to the next highest port, etc.
The last hunt should be to an attendant.
Program 35: LEDs 01 and 02 must be ON
for stations to receive the message indication (MW LED flashing) from a VM device.
Program 36: Set fixed call forward to VM/
AA port per customer requirements.
Program 37: Set the timer for the VM/AA
ports to 22 seconds minimum to allow call
forward no answer to work on VM transferred
calls.
Program 39: Set the MW/FL, CFF, RDL
and SDS buttons on the electronic
telephones that will be used to communicate
with the VM/AA device.
Programs 81 N 89: Verify that the ringing
assignments
to the VM/AA devices are set
per customer requirements.
Programs 16,40,41,45
N 48 and 50 N 56:
Verify that outgoing CO line access is allowed on VM ports to allow the VM/AA beeper
notification feature to operate.

NOTE:
Some voice mail devices may ring tcip when
called; in this case, set the ring voltage jumper
to L (low position) on the PEW or PSTUZ
PCB connected to the voice mail device.
10 ALARM

10.00 The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit
that can be set to detect a relay open or closed
condition from a facility alarm system. When the
sensor is activated, all electronic telephones
will
sound an alarm signal. The electronic telephone
alarm signal can be reset by any electronic telephone with an alarm reset button (see Program 39).
10.01 Alarm Sensor Options. Jumper plug PI2
on the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to
detect an open or closed condition from the facility
alarm system. Set PI2 as follows (refer to Figure
8-23) :
l

l

9.25 Voice Mail System Installation. Install the
voice mail messaging
the following steps:

system

in accordance

SENSOR INSTALLATION

To detect a closed condition,
position.
To detect an open condition,
position.

set PI 2 to the N.O.
set PI 2 to the NC.

with
10.02 Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the
alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition
from the facility alarm system. Solder the W3
jumper wire as follows (refer to Figure 8-22):
l
To detect a closed condition, solder W3 to the
normal open position.
l
To detect an open condition, solder W3 to the
normal closed position.

1) Ensure that the PSTU or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Section 200-096-206.
2) Connect the voice mail messaging system to
the selected PSTU or PESU standard telephone port (refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section
200-096-290,
for PSTU and PESU wiring/
interconnecting
details).

10.03 Alarm Sensor Wiring. Refer to Figure
8-23, and connect the facility alarm system relay
contacts to the PIOU/PIOUS
PCB.

3) Program the system for the required voice
mail messaging features (refer to Paragraphs
9.13 and 9.22).
4) Ensure that a CRCU (-4 or -8) is installed on
the PCTU or PCTUSl PCB, and verify that the
PCTU code in Program 03 is for CRCU operation as required.
5) Perform additional voice mail messaging system programming
as applicable (refer to customer-supplied
installation/programming
manuals).

8-17

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

TWO-PRONG
MALE CONNECTOR
(PRE-ASSEMBLED)

PPSU
24/56/96

PBTC-3M
BATTERYCABLE
WITH RING TERMINALS
AND PPSU CONNECTOR
(LENGTH
9 FEET)

+
BATT

:

-

IN-LINE
FUSE HOLDER
IOA
(FUSE PROVIDED)
POWER

SUPPLY

WHITE

16AWG
-

+

-

+

ACTUAL
SIZE

12VDC
BATTERY
\

RING

FlGURE8-I-RESERVE

TERMINALS

3/8 IN.

BLACK JUMPER
WITH RING TERMINALS
(PROVIDED)

POWER/BATTERYWlRlNG

8-18

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

I

I
TO PSTU3-Ti

;>

TO PSTU3-RI

’
I>
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TO PCOU-Tl

J2-27

J2-26

J2-2

J2-1

TELEPHONE
CURRENT

DETECTOR

i

!

-24V

(INPUT)

Ji-26

+

Jl-1

4

RELAY

Ji-25

NOTES:
1. Representation
of first of eight circuits.
2. Conditons
shown with ACpower
(-24VDC)
off.
3. PEW
(circuits
1 and 2) T/R may also be connected.

8-19

*

’
(TO

I
I

I

FlGURE8-2-DPFTCIRCUIT

IT0

CO-T1

I

Ji-50

;

;

a
-

lp =

Ji-2

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

PSTU
CONTROL

-

I

’
)4

I
I
DG (INPUT)

c+.Y

lJ.c

Ji-27

I
TO PCOU-RI

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

1
-z

TEL-T1

’
< 1TO TEL-RI

I
I
I
I

14

< ‘TO

DIAGRAM

CO-RI

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991

TWISTED
24 AWG.

PAIR

SEE MDF TIP & RING
.
WIRING
DIAGRAMS
(CHAPTER

PCTU
VRl
MOH/BGM
VOLUME

0
El

l---i
P6

1

I

SINGLE-LINE
STATIONS

-@

*

MOH
CONNECTOR

1

TIE LINES
C.O. LINES

r)
MAX.

MUSIC

0

MUSICON-HOLD
SOURCE

BACKPLANE

CONTROL

9)

ON/OFF
CONTROL
(24VOLT

1

PAGE OR
BACKGROUND
MUSIC

VP
PAGEIBGM
CONTROL

_

*DIGITAL
AND
ELECTRONIC
+ TELEPHONE
SPEAKERS

PEKU
OR
PESU
(CKT 5-8)

1

DIGITAL
AND
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
BGM DIAL CODE
481 -ON
480.OFF
OR m
BUTTON

* MOH SQICE
SPECIFICATIONS:
* INPUT
IMPEDANCE:
6OOQ
INPUT VOLTAGE:
RECOMMENDED
LEVELS,
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)
l

NHT/NHR,
IF USING
PIOU/PEPU/PIOUS

TT’PICAL
MOHSQURCES:
. TAPE PLAYER
. TUNER

SPO

PIOUS
OPTIONAL
EXTERNAL
PAGE/
BGM OUTPUTS

I
(38)

HESB OR
L AMPLIFER
(13),
&

600R

BACKPLANE

( ) PIN N0.s
AMPHENOL

OF PIOU/PEPU
CONNECTOR\

‘2PFAKFR

II I
\

lQ\
\-I

OPTIONAL
PAGE OUTPUT
SWITCH
6OOn OR
3-WATT
8fi.
,I

(34)

MOH/NT
RELAY CONTACT
JUMPER
PLUG
(MAKE OR BREAK)
NOTE:
3-watt amp and S W4 are available
with PIOU and PEPU only;
PIOUS provides
600 ohm output only.

tLtC;

I KUNIC;

.-I TELEPHC- 3NES
PORT 00 ONLY:
491 -ON
490-OFF

MOH @Q
NIGHT TRANSFER
CONTI 3OL
RELAl I

-B
L

I

EX:ERNAL
BGM DIAL
CODE FROM
-. -^---.
..- _ ,lGITAL

I

r IVlUi-l
L

SELECT
.._I I

PROG.

W2, IF
USING
PIOUS
(SEE FIGURE

8-8)

77-1,

I

05
-II

RELAY CONTACT
SPECIFICATION:
24 VOLT D.C. MAX.
1 .O AMPERE,
MAX.

FIGURE 8-3-MUSIC-ON-HOLD AND BACKGROUNDMUSIC FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
(SEE MDF WIRING DIAGRAM FOR DETAILS)

8-20

& I

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

.
r-_-----_.
MOH/BGM
SOURCE (SHARED)
600 Q, O-l VOLT RMS

(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)
pEq

j
I(BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE)
(8Q OR 6OOQ OUTPUT)

FlGURE8-4-MUSIC

SOURCECONFIGURATIONA

-___-----____

MOH SOURCE

f VRl (VOLUME)

PESU 2.5PAIR CONNECTOR
VT = P40, BK-S
VR = P15, S-BK
SLOT XX*, CIRCUIT 8

PEKU 25PAIR CONNECTOR
VT = P30, W-S
VR = P5, S-W
SLOT XX*, CIRCUIT 3

(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)

* IF USING PCTU2, SLOT XX MUST
BE SLOT 01; SLOT XX IS DETERMINED
BY PROGRAM 19 WHEN USING PCTUS.

FlGURE8-5-MUSIC

I

SOURCE CONFIGURATIONB
8-21

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

-----------_

%
0,
MOH SOURCE

MOH (t!$
-------------

b

CO LINES AND
STATIONS ON-HOLD

P6, TERMINAL
f VRl (VOLUME)
PESU 25PAIR CONNECTOR
VT = P40, BK-S
VR = P1.5, S-BK
SLOT Xx*, CIRCUIT 8
CUT W7 ON PESU
PROG IO, LED 1O/ON

PESU
OR PEKU
IN SLOT XX*
PEKU 25PAIR CONNECTOR
VT = P30, W-S
VR = P.5, S-W
SLOT Xx*, CIRCUIT 3
CUT W5 ON PEKU
PROG 10, LED 09/ON
* IF USING PCUT2, SLOT XX
MUST BE SLOT 01; WHEN
USING PCTU3, SLOT XX IS
DETERMINED BY PROGRAM 19.

I

I
,

I

(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)

--------------____________
I
I
I
I
i

‘--+
EXTERNALSPEAKER
BGM SOURCE

@/3GM

p

AMPLIFIER

-----

I

+

6OOQ

‘\\
0
&iv-j
I-TI
PAGE,

I

1

PAGE

+
1:

AMPLIFIER
-

PAGE
OR BGM

ZONE REL AYS
Ar-l-I\IATC
n”ll”f-ill
WITH PAGE

I

I

0
Ol

I

SOURCECONFIGURATIONC

8-22

I

(BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE)

BACKPLANE WIRING
INSTALLATION WIRING

FlGURE8-6-MUSIC

TOEXTERNAL
PAGE SPEAKER

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991

PlOUlPEPU

PCB

~~

---.

. ---..

PAGE

-. -_..-.

. .-

CONTROL
32
7

R-O
O-R

1

13
14

I

t
SP.TO
6OOQ

I
OR
BGM
FROM
PCTU

r-l
DOOR
LOCK
-^..---.

r---

I

I

38

(DUPLEX)
SP.RO

SP.Tl
38~2
WATTSP.Rl

13

Bk-Gn

25

Gn-Bk

II- -25 50 -_-11

v-s
s~v-r

AMPLIF

26

I

---49.5”

,----I

:IER

z

rfl1

-----------,

(

I HtJt

BREAK

NH T.
NH R.

34
9

R-Br
Br-R

17
18

,

a OHil

PLAYER

CONTROL

=

1 SPEAKER

SPEAKER

iT
T I

II
\

NOTE:
Dotted
where

SELECT
RELAY FUNCTION
WITH PROGRAM
77- 1:
NIGHT RELA Y OR
MOH CONTROL

lines and solid lines differentiate
applicable;
do not connect
both

I

III

MDF
CONNECTIONS
ALL WIRES
SHOULD
BE JACKETED
24 AWG
TWISTED
PAIRS

IT
BELL

i
TO MUSIC-ON-HOLD
INPUT ON PCTU

optional connections
options simutaneously.

FIGURE 8-7-PIOU/PEPU RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONALWIRING DIAGRAM

8-23

PCB

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991

KSU BACKPLANE
/
SPT

BREAK
&-$$+

DE

DER
BREAK

; ; MUTE
; ; CONTROL
I *
I
A

DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL

I
l-

&-$a+
. . .

.

1

MOH
SOURCE
UNIT

NORMAL OPEN
ALMT
4LM
ALMR

PIOUS

1

L
l

All wing

connections must be 24 A WG twisted pairs.

RELAY OPTIONS:
l
l
l

Kl (DE): DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 07
K2 (NH): NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC-ON-HOLD
CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 05
Kl & K2: 24 VDC, 1 AMP MAXIMUM

FIGURE 8-8-PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONALWIRING DIAGRAM

8-24

FACILITY
ALARM
UNIT

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTlON200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
25PAIR
AMPHENOL

PIOU/PEPU

MDF

/
B/-*
----I
I
I
I

-’

DET

&PI0
M

/A’

PIN 34, R-BR

” 17
TO DOOR LOCK

PIN 9, BR-R

‘1 18

DER

I
I
I

SEE FIGURE 8-7
FOR WIRING

SEE PROGRAM

NOTE:
DRLK 0 assigned to electronic
telephones in Program 39,
code 71 controls PIOU, PIOUS,
or PEPU door lock relay.

77-1,

I
I
I

1
j
;
I- _ _ - _
TO DOOR LOCK

Kl/Pi 0 (24VDC, 1 .O AMP MAX.)
TERMINAL

ON FRONT EDGE OF PCB

FlGURE8-g--DOOR LOCK CONTROLOPTlON(PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)

DKSU
(PESU OR PEKU
SEE NOTE)
CIRCUIT
NO. 5
PORT
NO. _
SEE NOTE

MODULAR JACKS A, B, C (I-PAIR EACH)
CONNECT TO MODULAR PINS 3 AND 4

FOR DETAILS:
SEE FIGURE 9-3
J
1000 FT MAX
VT/VR, DT/DR

HDCB NO. 1 - 4
A

l KSU

3:
I
I
I
I
1

p.
C

TO DOOR LOCK
( -24 VDC 1 .O AMP MAX.)
DOOR PHONE C

pzE-2-t-i

DRLK I - 4 assigned to
electronic telephones
in Program 39, code -.
See note.

NOTE:
See Paragraph 4.17 for HDCB assignments
and hardware option settings.

I

FlGURE8-IO-MULTIPLEOOORLOCKCONTROLOPTlONS(HOCB)
8-25

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY 1991

HESB (REAR VIEW)

VlVL I I,

JUMPER
TBI
5-8
6-7

I

HACU-120
117/VAC TO
12 VDC

117

I I I I

TBI -VOICE
1 -6
2 3-3
4-4

WIRES:
TB2
4-5

VOICE

1

I

RING

I

12345678910
L!rLL

_ ___. ,, _ _
MUUULAH

’

f

CONNECTO-- KS
MAY r-3E ---USED

VAC

NOT USED1
PHONE

\mIm=
1 Vl”L

124AWG/JACKETED
TWISTED
PAIR
FROM
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
TO HESB

nnnR
Y”“,

IL”
U”
‘O”
n”

v

v-v-

-B2

MDF
66 Bl -0CK

r

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG
OCA _
TIP

l-r

1654

PZ
(CKT 5-8)

211

r-l
123456

w

FIGURE 8-II-HESB/ELECTRONIC

ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
6500-SERIES

HHEU
INSTALL HHEU PCB
INTO BASE OF
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

TELEPHONEWITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING

8-26

1

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
HESB (REAR
VOLUME
INTERNAL
WIRING:
JUMPER
TBI
2-10

TBI -VOICE
1-6
2-1
3-3

WIRES:
TB2
4-5

HACU-120
117NAC TO
12 VDC

CONNECTORS
MAY BE USED

AC
POWER
SUPPLY
IDF
5 BLOCK

CONTROL

(+)
t-1

Q

I
I

(L2)

I
I

I

TBI

10~01
12345678910
I

I
24 AWG
JACKETED
TWISTED
PAIR
FROM
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
TO HESB

12v ov
iom(jTB2
12v

STATION

VIEW)

12345
ov

L-

CABLING

TIP
RING
PT
PR

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

.--_

>TION

__.

- CABLE
kV-

1 HHEU (V.3) 1
INSTALL HHEU ClRCl JIT (V.3)
CARD INTO BASE OF DKT
PER HHEU INSTALLTION
INFORMATION
IN CHAPTER 7.

FlGURE8-VA-HESB/OIGITALTELEPHONEWlTH

8-26A

LOUD RINGING BELLWIRING

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

This page is intentionally left blank.

8-268

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

.

is allowed per system.

VOLUME CONTRO
CABLE

JUMPER WIRES:
TBl

TB2

6-7
INTERNAL WIRING:
TBI
3v
4F

v

VOICE

DOOR PHONE

VOICE

NOTE:
The 600 ohm page output sends
three types of signals
during system operation:
Voice page
Background music
Night ringing
l
l
l

117VAC
TO
12 VDC

FIGURE 8-IP-HESBIAMPLIFIEO

8-27

SPEAKER WIRING

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
MDFB (REAR VIEW)
NOTE:
Only one interface PCB
(PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU)
is allowed per system.

PIOUS

TBI

12LlL2
m
DOOR PHONE
TALKBACK
MICROPHONE

MDF

600 Q
PAGE
-. .--. .-

SPT
DUPLEX

PIOU OR
PEPU
I

J

nl
,

n

k”

SPR (13, GN-BK)

I

J

JACKETED
TWISTED
PAlR24AWG


MDF
66 BLOCK

0

,

26

j

VOLUME CONTROL

25 PAIR
CABLE
JUMPER WIRES:
TBl
l-2

I

TB2
3-4
5-6

“+

INTERNAL WIRING:
TBI
4
3
TBI
7
8
9
10

-4
---+3
-

z

TBl

MODULAR
CONNECTOR
MAY BE USED

12345678910
, ,
U
6543211654321
VOICE

VOICE

DOOR PHONE

12v ov

DOOR PHONE

i

1

~

NOTE:
The 600 ohm duplex page output is
compatible with most commercially
available talkback amplifiers.

123456
u
12v ov
Y
,

;;:;

117VACTOl2VDC

8-28

1

HE=

uw
JUMPERS
(REAR VIEW)

I LU

TWISTED
PAIR
24 AWG

I
~ :
i j
j j
I

PAGE OUTPUT

IAruirrizn
LlT\“r\L

--

MDF BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS

\

k-t-t-k
+A

SPR

DUUIL

1
- IIll

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS
EXTERNAL
PAGING
AMP

PIOU/PEPU
NIGHT RING
AND PAGE
FROM KSU ‘4
BACKPLANE

t
6OOQ
31

1

SPT

(38)

25

SPR

(13)

26

DET

(32)

13

DER

(7)

0 ?5
0 s-

B
Pi0

EXTERNAL
PAGE/
DOOR LOCK RELAY
(SEE PROGRAM
77-l

g
2
5

MUTE2
14

‘,-

&

0

PIOU/PEPU
PIN
NUMBERS
25PAIR
CABLE
MUSIC
SOURCE

NOTE:
Only one optional interface
allowed per system.

PCB

(PIOU,

PIOUS
NIGHT
RING
/.-AND PAGE
FROM KSU b.??ii
BACKPLANE

KSU

PIOUS,

or PEPU)

EXTERNAL
PAGING
AMP

MDF

BAcKPI
,_. . -.\NE
1

SPT
SPR
PI0

DET--I-

TBl
-J i$

z
5

6f$
~_

” 2

:,g;
MUTE2

DER

“,’
gd

1

0

f
/
EXTERNAL
PAGE/
DOOR LOCK RELAY
(SEE PROGRAM
77-l)

FIGURE 8-14-PAGE AND BGM USING SAMEAMPLlFlER(PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)

8-29

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS
PIOU

---

_------

1

-/

B

/
I PGOUTI

Kl

l

1 PGIN

M

I
I
I
, PGOUT

B

0
K2

(15)
1 (40)

2 (17)

1 PGIN

2 (42)

1

JACKETED
TWISTED
24 AWG

PAIR

30

A-

2g

c

34

A

133

ZONE

1

ZONE

2

ZONE

3

I

K3

I
1 PGOUT4
1

K4

,"

’

(21)

PGIN

4 (46)

NIGHT
RINGING
AND/OR
PAGE
----.
FROM
KSU
BACKPLANE

-

A”

I +-IllC

42

\

I

1

141

,
I

,-I

I

A
1

lc

11

IZONE

SPEAKER
COMMON
LINE

I
I PG
1 COMMON

(23)

46
MUSIC

--

1
I
PIOU PIN NUMBERS
25.PAIR
CABLE

AMP

__--

/()

BGM
MUSIC
SOURCE
(TO EXTERNAL
SPEAKER
ONLY)

NIGHT RINGING
(SEE PARAGRAPH

I

OPTIONAL
CONNECTION

PROGRAM
ASSIGNMENTS
11 OF SECTION
200-096-208)

LED OFF
Assignment

I

1 Tenant 2 COs

1 Tenant 1 COs

1

K3

1 Tenant 2 COs

1 Tenant 1 COs

1

11

K2

Tenant 2 COs

Tenant 1 COs

10

Kl

Tenant 2 COs

Tenant 1 COs

Program 77-1
Key/LED

1

1

NOTE:
See Paragraphs

Zone/
Relay

LED ON
Assignment

K4

6 and 11 for zone

pacling

installation

I

instructions.

FIGURE 8-15-PIOU ZONE, PAGE/BGM/NIGHT RlNG(SEPARATEAMPLIFIERS)

8-30

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

PIOU

66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS

MDF

1
PGOUT
PGIN

-i
1 (15)

1 (40)

30
1

J

JACKETED
TWISTED
24 AWG

PAGE ACCES!
CODES
( ):

PAIR

29

ZONE
(35)

1

ZONE

2

(36)

ZONE 3
(37)

ZONE

ALL

PIOU PIN NUMBERS
25PAIR
CABLES

SPT

(38)

25

SPR

(13)

26

4

0(39)
(38)

( )

I

FlGURE8-16-PAGING WITH

8-31

MULTIPLEAMPLIFIERS

ZONFS

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991
66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS
PIOU
PAGE ACCESS
CODES
( ):
ZONE1
(35)

PGOUT
K4

PAGE
NIGHT

AND
RING

4 (21)

PGIN

I
M

4 (46)

I
I
I

42
41
PAGING

j
:

SPT

(38)

AMP
,A

” z
60052

SPR

(13)

PG
I____.._______---___---~~.....-.-.--.....--...-----COMMON

NIGHT

ZONE
(37)

3

ZONE
(38)

4

1
:
;

SPEAKER
COMMON
LINE
W

(23)

46

WIRE)

i

PI1
NHT

I

2

‘I

j (JUMPER
BREAK

(A)

e
4
5”

26

ZONE
(36)

(34)

17

j

,.,
\ I
~~~~~~~~......~_________________________~~~~~

c

I

RELAY

PIOU Plkl NUMBERS
25.PAIR
CABLE

PROGRAMMING:
77-1:
LED 05, OFF.
LED 06, ON.
78: ENABLE
CO LINES TO NIGHT RING
OVER EXTERNAL
PAGE.
77-i:
LED 08, ON. FOR DOOR PHONE
NIGHT RING OVER PAGE.

( )

NOTES:
1. Page signal path - - - 2. Nightringsignalpath
----------.
3. Background
music over zone page is not possible
with this configuration.
4. Available
with PIOU only: not PEPU or PIOUS.
5. Night ringing will be sent to all zones; selected
zones are not possible.

FIGUREa-17-NIGHTRINGING

OVEREXTERNALZONEPAGE

8-32

ALL
) ZONES
(39)

Al
c

1

25

’

’

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION200-096-208
FEBRUARY1991

0 7 / 0 6 / 9 0
01

205

123456987 00;12 - 456789 ACCESS BY INCOMING DISA AND ACCESS 205 <205ANSWERSDlSA First DISA Ol> CO 03 OUTGOING> CALL 12SECONDSAFTERDKDIAL Digit (varies) Last TONE> (always this column) 12345678912345678965412365 7 14 5 8 3 3 7 0 0 First Digit (varies) 7145833700 123456789456321 Last * * F $ % ij LL 'I - Outgoing Telephone Account Code (4-15 digits) Number (l-26 Station to which the CO Line was transferred digits) (1-4 digits) CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS) Call Duration (HH:MM:SS, - see Note 1) Time of Day (HH:MM; hour and minute the call was released) Station Number (l-4 digits; see Note 2) CO Line Number (01-36) NOTES: 1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) must be 10 seconds (minimum) to generate a call record printout. 2. MSS: Is a Direct-inward (DISA) CO call to a station that is not answered; or, answered after IO seconds. If a station answers a DISA call before 10 seconds elapse, the call will register as a normal incoming call. DISA calls always register 05- 06 seconds ring before answer duration time. MODM: Is a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem. DISA: Direct-inward (DISA) call thru the system via CO to CO connection. * 3. Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes. 4. The call record data is ASCII formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit. 5. Special dial printout: Tone = “T” Long pause = “L” Flash = ‘IF” Pause = YV FlGURE8-18-SMDRPRINTOUTEXAMPLES 8-33 , INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 . BASIC CONNECTION DB25 Modular Cord,(7 ft. max) \ yaty, \r PIOU PI&S SADR Modular Jack 56 ft. max 24 A WG Wire Twisted Pair Modularized Printer or Call Accounting Device DATA FORMAT: ASCII 8-bits No parity l-stop bit l l l l /y Toshiba PPTCIA-SM, RS232, Modular to DB25 Adaptor BASIC WIRING (see: PIOU or PIOUS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 9 for more detail) PIOU, SMDR Jack Modular Pin No. PPTCl A-5M Adaptor Modular Pin No. DB25 Pin No. RS-232 Lead Name 1 To - 6 To - 3 RD 2 To - 5 To - 2 TD 3 To - 4 To - 6 DSR 4 To - 3 To - 20 DTR 5 To - 2 To - 8 CD 6 To - 1 To - 7 SG 4 Jumper to 5 RTS to CTS FlGURE8-19-PIOU/PIOUSSMDRCABLECONNECTlONS 8-34 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 . CO LINE NUMBERS / 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 T L 40 33 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 t 32 25 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 24 17 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 16 9 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 \ 148 11 llllll00 oooooo- (CO LINE) U-EDs ON) WEDS OFF) 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 L CO LINE 36 CO LINE 01 STATION PORT NUMBERS PROGRAM NUMBER NOTES: 1. In this example all lines are programmed 2. CO lines 37-40 are not used. 3. 0 = LED off, I = LED on. to immediately ring the station at port 00 only, FlGURE8-20-PIOU/PIOUSTTYPORT(PROGRAM97)DATADUMPEXAMPLE I 8-35 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 BASIC CONNECTION DB25 Plug 3-pair Line Side of External Modem PIOU P&S 2 50 ft. max 24 A WG Wire Twisted Pair Modularized TTY Modular Jack L ASCII Terminal or _ External Modem 7 Toshiba PPTCIA-SM, RS232, Modular to DB25 Adaptor J f T&R Connection of External Modem Only 2 l l l Dedicated PSTU Port (T&R) or Direct to Dedicated Central Office Line (T&R) 7-bits Even parity l-stop bit ASCII TERMIN \L BASIC WIRING (see: PIOU/PIOUS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 9 for more detail) I I PPTCI A-5M Adaptor PIOU, SMDR Jack ,-I RS-232 Modular Pin No. Modular Pin No. DB2.5 Pin No. / Lead Name 1 RD 1 To - 6 To - 3 2 To - 5 To - 2 TD 3 To - 4 To - 6 DSR 4 To - 3 To - 20 DTR 5 To - 2 To - a CD 6 To - 1 To - 7 SG 1 4Jumperto5 EXTERNAL MODEM BASIC WIRING (see: PIOU/PIOUS 1 RTS to CTS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 9 for more detail) PIOU, SMDR Jack Modular’l “““‘la;; PPTCl A-5M Adaptor ~ DB25 Pin No. / RS-232 Lead Name t 3 To - 4 To - 4 To - 3 To - 5To6 To - IMPORTANT: / G++ 2 To 1 To - : I 4 Jumper to 5 RTS to CTS * PPTClA-SM, pins 2 & 3 must be reversed in the field, as shown, for modem connection. FIGURE 8-21-PIOU/PIOUS (TTY) MAINTENANCE PORT (EXTERNAL MODEM OR ASCII-TERMINAL) 8-36 . INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 3 PCTU PCo:US NOTE: The CRCU (-4 or -8) must be installed PCTU or PCTlJSl to allow VM DTMF on the dialing. p!GzEq I I VOICE MDF I PSTU PESU (CKT l-8) (CiiT 1 & 2) 25.PIN (8 CIRCUITS (2 CIRCUITS MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT MACHINE 4 PSTUPESU CIRCUIT TIP & RING (1 PAIR PER PORT) CABLE PER PSTUJ PER PEW) FIGURE 8-22-VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM PIOU N.C. PCB PIOU PIN NUMBERS 25PAIR CABLE ~ ALARM SENSOR P12 ALMT (36) ALMR (11) () MDF 66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS 21 4 22 FACILITY ALARM SYSTEM N.O. 25.PAIR CABLE PIOUS PCB ORMAL CLOSE FIGURE 8-23-ALARM TWISTED PAIR SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM (PIOU/PIOUS) 8-37 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 l Program 15-5: Assigns CO lines to tenant 1 or tenant l l - ONE WALL MOUNTING HOLE 2. Lines are initialized as tenant 1. Program 77-1 (LEDs 10 w 13): Assigns tenant 1 and tenant 2 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU external page zones. Program 39: Assigns appropriate , m (tenant I), and m (tenant 2) buttons to electronic and digital telephones. q NOTES: I. See Paragraph 6 and Figure 8- 15 for PIOU zone paging ins talla tion instructions. 2. Any sta tion can pick up CO lines that night ring over external page zones by dialing IlmB 12 DATA INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION (RELEASE 3) Mount the HESB to a wall or vertical surface in accordance with the following steps: 1) Find a suitable location on the mounting surface for the HESB. 2) Screw a 1.25inch panhead wood screw into the mounting surface. 3) Hang the HESB from the screw in the mounting surface. 12.00 General 12.01 Release 3 provides two types of Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital telephone users to simultaneously transmit and receive data on the same PDKU station port and wire pair while communicating on a voice call. One unit, called the integrated DIU (PDIU-DI), becomes part of the digital telephone, replacing the telephone’s base; the other unit, is a small self-contained unit called the stand-alone DIU (PDIU-DS). Each DIU is powered by the PDKU it is connected to; therefore, no external power is required. FIGURE 8-24-HESB WALL MOUNTING 11 NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE (RELEASE 3) 11.00 In systems shared by two tenants, each tenant’s CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate PIOU external page zones (Figure 8-25). This feature can also be used in one-tenant systems. 12.02 Both DlUs can be connected to standard Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS-232 asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are divided into two categories: data communication equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE). Common DCE devices are modems and some printers; common DTE devices are personal computers, ASCII terminals, and some printers. The PDIU-DI operates like a DCE and connects directly to DTE devices using standard RS-232 cables. Depending on how its internal jumper plugs are configured, the PDIU-DS can either operate like a DTE and connect to DCE devices; or operate like a DCE device and connect to a DTE device. In most applications, DTE and,DCE devices exchange data between each other via the standard RS-232 cable connection. 11.01 With shared systems, for example, tenant l’s night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while tenant 2’s lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4. In non-shared systems, night ringing CO lines can be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected zones. 11.02 The following programs must be used to assign CO lines to ring selected PIOU page zones: l Program 78-1: Assigns CO lines, tenant 1 and tenant 2, that will night ring over PIOU external page zones. 8-38 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION206-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 12.03 DlUs can function with DCE and DTE devices at data speeds of up to 19.2 kbps. However, keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a PC or terminal connected to a DIU) is limited to 9600 bps. A speed of 19.2 kbps can be achieved when dialing from a PDIU-DI-equipped digital telephone dialpad, but many PC software programs do not yet handle 19.2 kbps in an error-free manner. DIU data transmisssion speed is set by the first ATcommand that the DIU receives once it is in the command state; if manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer (default) mode, the transmission speed is transparent. paths and scenarios for five types of data test calls are provided in Paragraphs 12.82 N 12.86. Step-bystep data calling procedures are provided in the Data Interface User Guide in the Installation & Maintenance Manual, Operating Procedures. 12.20 EIA Interface Leads (Signals) 12.21 Both DlUs operate with the ten standard EIA RS-232 interface leads (signals) on which signaling data is transmitted and received. DlUs connect to serial data devices with standard RS-232 cables, available from telephone supply stores (see Figures 8-29 m 8-34). The PDIU-DVPDIU-DS requires ten signals for some applications, but can function with eight using modular cords and connectors with RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications. If uncertain which signals are necessary for an application, all ten should be connected. IMPORTANT NOTE! To use the PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT commands, communications software or a PC program that performs terminal emulation must be used. A Tcommands cannot be issued from the computer’s operating system prompt. IMPORTANT NOTES! 1. The PDIU-DI is always a DCE device; the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE, depending on how its internal jumpers (I- 9) are configured (see Figure 8-28). 2. In the descriptions below, when a signal is ON, its potential is about seven volts positive relative to signal ground (pin 7); when a signal is OFF, it is about 7 volts negative relative to the signal ground (pin 7). 12.10 Common DIU Connections 12.11 The block diagram in Figure 8-25 illustrates common DIU connections. In this example, PDIUDls are connected to personal computers (PC1 and PC2), and PDIU-DSs are connected to a serial printer and modems. The personal computer users can transfer files internally, print files on the same printer, and access the modem pool to send/receive data to/from an external personal computer or dial up data service. 12.12 To access these devices, a data call connection must be established between the DIUs. This is accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a digital telephone dialpad or from a PC keyboard using standard AT dial commands. PDIU-Dls share the same intercom numbers/ports with the digital telephone to which they are connected, while PDIUDSs have their own. The INT and DATA LEDs on the digital telephone tell the system whether a voice or data call is being made: the INT LED, voice calls; and the DATA LED initiates data calls. When dialing from a keyboard with AT commands, B 0 1 is typed for voice calls, and 10 m w for data calls. l circuit AA) is bonded quired by nected to l l l 12.13 Installation are provided Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1): The FG signal (EIA instructions for these devices in Paragraphs 12.40 thru 12.70. Call 8-39 is a protective or safety ground which to the PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS PCB. If relocal codes, the FG should be conexternal ground. Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7): The SG signal (EIA circuit AB) establishes the common ground reference for all other PDIU and data device signals and must be wired for all applications. Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2): DTE devices transmit and DCE devices receive data on the TD lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the DTE device can transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and DTR signals (all discussed below) must be ON. The TD signal is OFF in the idle state. Receive Data (RD, Pi’n 3): The DCE -device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead (EIAcircuit BB); the DTE receives dataon the RD. INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 l l l l l Request to Send (RTS, Pin 4): Some DTE devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to the DCE devicewhen they are ready to transmit data on the TD lead. If the DTE device does not generate the RTS signal, the DIU DIP switch SWI-4 should be set ON to inform the DIU. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/ CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control, in these cases DIP switch SWI-4 should be OFF (see Figure 8-26 for DIP switch information). Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5): The DCE device sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to the line side. The DCE device sends this signal only when it receives the RTS signal from the DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control; in these cases, dip switch SWI-4 should be OFF (see Figure 8-26 for DIP switch information). Data Set Ready (DSR, Pin 6): When connected to the communication channel and prepared to exchange control characters to initiate data transmission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal (EIA circuit CC) to the DTE device. If the PDIU DIP switch SWI-2 is set ON, DSR will be ON continuously; if the switch is set OFF, DSR follows DTR (if DSR is ON, DTR is ON, etc.) SW1 -2 should be OFF in most cases (see Figure 8-26 for DIP switch information). Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8): The DCE device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when receiving the carrier signal on the line side. Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE devices require that the DCD be ON. If the carrier signal is removed by the remote end or lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE notifies the DTE device by an OFF condition with the DCD signal; PDIU DIP switch SWI-2 is set ON to set the DCD ON continuously; if set OFF, the DCD signal will only be ON when connection between two DlUs is established and OFF when aconnection is not established. SWI-2 isset OFF when the DTE/DCE uses the DTR/DSR signals for Ready/Busy flow control (see Figure 8-26 for DIP switch information). Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20): The DTE device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to the DCE device, prompting the DCE device to open the communication line. The line is closed and the call disconnected when the DTE device l quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to transmitorreceivedata.DIPswitchSWl-ishould be set OFF in most cases (see Figure 8-26 for DIP switch information). Ring Indicator (RI, Pin 22): The RI signal (EIA circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE device. Whenever the DCE device receives a ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI signal ON. If DIU DIP switch SWI-3 is set ON, the RI signal will be on continuously if ringing; if the switch is set OFF, the RI signal will be one second ON/three seconds OFF when the DIU detects ringing signal. 12.30 DIP Switch Options 12.31 The PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS each have a four-control DIP switch which can be configured for signaling options. The switch is located on the bottom of the PDIU-DI, and on the back panel of the PDIU-DS (see Figure 8-26). l SWI-1 : Normally this switch is set ON to disconnect devices from DlUs automatically. The connection is maintained if data is exchanged between the device and the DIU within eight to nine second intervals. If SWI-1 is OFF on the called and calling DIU, data calls will remain connected until released manually. IMPORTANT NOTE! SWl-1 ON, auto disconnect, is in effect only for D/Us that have AT commands enabled in Program 20 (LED 02 ON). l l 8-40 SWI-2: This switch is placed in the ON position when the PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured like a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR ON continuously. If SWI-2 is OFF, DSR follows DTR and DCD will be ON only when the DIU is connected on a data call to another DIU. SWI-2 should be OFF on a DIU when it is connected to a personal computer that uses a communications software program to establish data calls with AT commands. SWI-3:The PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DSconfiguredas a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate (RI) signal to the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the PDIU isreceivinganincomingcall.SWl-3should be ON for the DIU to send RI steady, and OFF to send at one second ON/three seconds OFF intervals. INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 l SWI-4: This switch is placed in the ON position if the computer does not output the RTS signal. Sometimes, the DTE device may use RTSKTS for Ready/Busy flow control, in these cases SWl-4 should be OFF. In this case the DCD signal of the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the called DTE and the DCD signal of the called DTE is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE. In this case a signal which stops the DTE from transmitting data (usually the CTS lead) should be cross-connected to the DIU’s DCD signal. Consult the DTE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required. tween the PDIU-Dl’s DB-25female connector and the PC’s appropriate asynchronous serial communications port connector (C‘OM port). IMPORTANT NOTE! Check the PC manufacturer’s serial communica tion port interface documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements; requirements vary with each manufacturer. The number of ElA RS232signals required (8, 9, or IO wires) depends on the application. When EIA signal requirements are not known, connect the 10 EIA signals listedin Paragraph 12.20. Figures 8-29 and 8-30 provide diagrams for connecting RS-232 cables between PDIU-Dls and Toshiba lap top, and IBM, XT and AT PCs. 12.40 PDIU-DI to Personal Computer (PC) Installation 12.41 The PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE device; it transmits data on the Receive Data lead (RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead (TD). Most personal computers function as a DTE device; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and receive data on the RD lead. Follow the steps below to install the PDIU-DI to a DTE, PC: 4) SetthePDIU-DI DIPswitch (SWl-I-4)forthe desired application. Figure 8-26 shows the DIP switch locations and Paragraph 12.30 describes switch functions. 5) Access Program 20 to configure the PDIU-DI for DTE-type connection and Program 39 for data button assignments of the digital telephone connected to the PDIU-DI. NOTES: 1. Use the steps below when installing an ASCII terminal, personal computer, or any other DTE device to a PDIU-DI. 2. The PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE computer or any other DCE-type device using a specially configured W-232 cable or adapter; but this application is rarely required. Program 20 l l l 1) Install the digital telephone that is to be equipped with PDIU-DI per the instructions in Section 200-096-207 and the drawing in Section 200-096-209. 2) Install the PDIU-DI under the digital telephone per the instructions in Section 200-096-207. NOTE: The PDIU-DI always operates as a DCE device; therefore, unlike the PDIU-DS, it has no internal jumpers. l 3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable be- 8-41 The port number entered for the PDIU-DI in Program 20 is the port number of the digital telephone to which the PDIU-DI is connected. LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIUDI ports. LED 02: Should be ON for PDIU-DI ports, unless the PC user will never use DIU AT commands (other than ATDD, ATDT, and ATD) and never require the PDIU-DI to send result codes to display on the PC display screen. Frequently, it is difficult to determine the full extent of these requirements; so it is recommended to turn LED 02 ON. See the Data Interface User Guidein the Operating Procedures of the Installation and Maintenance Manualfor information regarding D!U ATcommands and result codes. LEDs 03 and 04: Should be OFF for PDIU-DI ports. INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 l LED 05: Should be ON if the system is l installed behind a PBX or Centrex that uses access codes to make external calls or to insert a pause following DIU access of an outside line. LEDs 17 m 20: Used to establish data security groups. PDIU stations are only allowed to make calls to PDlUs in the same data group to which they are assigned. l Program 39 l The following data call buttons can be assigned digital telephones equipped with and mm. buttons to data devices as required. Do not assign m buttons to data devices; m buttons are used for voice calls only. DEM) position. Reassemble the PDIUDS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 12.70 provides PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 8-28 provides jumper plug information.) If the printer is a DTE device: It may not be necessary to disassemble the PDIUDS, since it comes direct from the factory configured as a DCE device. However, if uncertain, disassemble the PDIU-DS and verify that jumper plugs (Pl - P9) are in the “A-B” (DTE) position. Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “A-B” on the bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 12.70 provides PDIUDS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 8-28 provides jumper plug information.) 2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate PDKU circuit perwiring diagrams in Section 200-096209 and information provided in Section 200096-207. 12.50 PDIU-DS To Printer Installation 12.51 The STRATA DK (Release 3) enables serial printers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be connectedtostand-alonedatainterfaceunits(PDIUDSs). Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-Dls can share access to these printers. Serial printers operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the vendor; the PDIU-DS can be connected to either type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE device. (The PDIU-DS comes from the factory configured as a DCE device.) Follow the steps below to install the PDIU-DS to a serial printer. 3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the printer and the PDIU-DS (see Figure 8-31 for an example printer cable connection). 4) If steps 2 and 3 are done properly, the Power and Ready LEDs on the PDIU-DS should light when the printer is turned on and ready. 5) Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SWI-1 - 4) for the desired application. Figure 8-26 shows the DIP switch locations and Paragraph 12.30 describes switch functions. NOTES: 1. Only serial printers (not parallel) that conform to EIA RS-232signaling requirements can be connected to PDIU-DSs. 2. In rare applications, it may be desired to connectprinters to PDIU-Dls. Refer to the printer’s ins talla tion instructions. IMPORTANT NOTE! Check the printer’s serial documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The requirements vary with each manufacturer. 1) Consult theserial printer’s documentation and determine if the printer operates as a DCE or DTE device: l If the printer is a DCE device: Disassemble the PDIU-DS and configure it to operate like a DTE device by placing the jumper plugs (PI - P9) in the “B-C” (MO- 6) Use Program 20 to configure the PDIU-DS to connect to a serial printer (see Pogramming Section 200-096-302 for instructions and record sheets). l LED 01: Should al’ways be-ON for PDIUDS ports. 8-42 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 l l l l l LED 02: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers. LED 03: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS ports that connect to DTE- or DCE-type printers. LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports. LED 05: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers. LEDs 17 -, 20: Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital telephones equippedwith PDIU-Dlsaccessto PDIUDS ports connected to a printer. DIU stations can only make datacalls to DlUs in the same data security group. lines and modems, it is recommended to connect modems to PSTU/PESU standard station ports in a modem pool configuration. The RS-232 side of the modem connects to the PDIU-DSwith standard RS-232 cables; the PDIU-DS line side (RJ-11 connector) always connects to its own individual PDKU port. Use the instructions below to install modems to PDIU-DSs. 1) Configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device: Disassemble the PDIU-DS and place jumper plugs Pl y P9 in the”B-C’position (MODEM). Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “B-C” on the bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 12.70 provides PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions and Figure 8-28 provides jumper plug information.) 7) Program 22should be used to configure PDIUDSs to hunt if more than one PDIU-DS connected to the same printer/server. 2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate PDKU circuit per the wiring diagrams in Section 200- 096-209. 12.60 PDIU-DS To Modem Installation 3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the modem and the PDIU-DS. Figure832 shows an example PDIU-DS to “smart modem” RS-232 connection. 12.61 With Release 3 software, STRATA DK enables asynchronous-type (not synchronous) modems to be connected to PDIU-DSs. This allows PDIU-DI equipped digital telephones that are connected to personal computers, terminals, and other devices to share access to a modem or modem pool. IMPORTANT NOTE! All ten PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should be connected to the modem. Consult the modem’s documentation for correct RS232 pin requirements; the requirements may vary with each manufacturer. IMPORTANT NOTE! Modems must be “smart modems” that respond to ATcommandsandreturn result codes. Modems are customer-supplied. 4) Connect the line side of the modem to a PSTU or PESU standard telephone circuit or a dedicated CO line (consult the modem’s documentation to install the it to a CO line). Section 200-096-209 provides PESU/PSTU station port wiring information. 12.62 A modem(s) can be accessed internally for outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data calls. Modems operate as DCE devices; so PDIUDSs that are connected to them must be configured to operate like a DTE device. In the example installation in Figure 8-25, the line side of the two modems are connected to PSTU/PESU ports to establish a modem pool; however, the line side of modems could be connected directly to a dedicated CO line. If modems are connected directly to telephone network CO lines, automatic transfer of CO line voice calls to system modems (data call) will not function as described in the Data Interface User Guide. For best operation and utilization of CO 5) Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SWl-1 - 4) for thedesiredapplication. Figure8-26shows the DIP switch location and Paragraph 12.30 describes switch functions. 6) Use the programs below to configure the PDIU-DS to connect to an asynchronous modem (see programming Section 200-096302 for explanations and record sheets). 8-43 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 12.70 PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly Program 20 LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports 12.71 To set the jumper plugs (Pl - P9) on the PCS LEDO2: Should be ON for PDIU-DS ports inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the PDIU-DS must be disassembled. Disassemble the PDIU-DS in accordance with the following steps: connected to modems, enabling the use of AT commands and result codes when incoming calls are made from outside the system to modems connected to PDIUDSs. LED 03: Should be set ON for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems. LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports. LED 05: Should be ON if the system is installed behind a PBX/Centrex that uses access codes to place outgoing trunk calls. LEDs 17 W20: Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital telephones equipped with PDIU-Dls access to the PDIU-DS ports connected to a modem. DIU stations can only make data calls to DlUs in the same data security group. 12.72 Disassembling 1) Remove the four screws securing the bottom panel to the rest of the unit (see Figure 8-27). These screws are not captive; so place together where they can be easily accessed. 2) Remove panel. 4) Turn the PCB over and set the jumper plugs (Pl N P9) as follows: l If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DTE, set the plugs to the “A-B” position. l If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DCE device, set the plugs to the “B-C” position. For each PDIU-DS/modem pair, assign the ports on the PDKU and PSTU (or PESU) thatwill beconnectedtothe PDIUDS and modem, respectively. NOTE: Do not cut PDIU-DSjumper wires for DKinstallations. Jumper wires are for PERCEPTION applications on/y. Program 22/33 l the bottom 3) Remove the PCB inside the PDIU-DS by lifting the back panel from its side grooves. Program 21 l the PDIU-DS If more than one modem/PDIU-DS pair is configured as a system modem pool, the PDIU-DSs should be set to hunt each other in Program 22. The modem PSTU or PESU ports should be set to hunt each other in Program 33. 12.73 Assembling the PDIU-DS 1) Position the back panel to the PCB (see Figure 8-27). 2) Slide the back panel down into its side grooves. Program 31 @ LED 18 should be turned on for all PESU or PSTU station ports that are connected to modems. This provides data security by preventing executive or privacy override of modem calls. 3) Attach the bottom panel, and secure with the four non-captive screws. 8-44 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 NOTES: 1. KS-232 cable and connector information is provided in ’ 9PTOP, PC 1 STRATA DKSU (Release 3) DKT/PDIU -- MDI - LrEi 2’ ;igg&ene - 9-21. 3. Modem MDF station wiring to PSTU or PESU is in Section 200-096-209, Figures 9-6 and 9-8. DIAL-UP COMPUTER SERVICE I-DI RS11 1 RS- --... TELEPHO runu (PORT 03) I -- n I IS-232’ I1 MDF PCOU LINE * l-l RS I i i I : ! : AODEM MDF3I I ‘OOL 1 OR I PST” I ; ,lTr\“l- nn\ I I ’ I i : TELEPHONE LINE Y I MODEMt#~ I PC3 RS- FIGURE&25-STRATA DKDATAINSTALLATIONEXAMPLEBLOCKDIAGRAM 8-45 1 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 PDIU-DI (BOTTOM VIEW) DIP SWITCH fi 8 ACCESS FROM BOTTOM - OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DI r DIP SWITCH SWI BACK VIEW (ACCESS FROM BACK - OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DS) PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW) n u DIRECTORY ’ 43 f I TRAY: REMOVE FROM ORIGINAL TELEPHONE BASE AND INSTALL ON PDIU-DI BASE n n ’ - q I DB25 CONNECTOR (FEMALE) FOR DTE OR DCE RS-232 CABLE CONNECTION PDIU-DI DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE MODULAR CONNECTOR FOR PDKU LINE CONNECTION PDIU-DI AND -DS SW1 DIP SWITCH (1 _ 4) FUNCTIONS SWITCH NOTES: 1. DIU port must have LED 02, ON in Program 20 to enable auto disconnect. 2. See Paragraphs 12.20 and 12.30 for more details regarding S WI option settings. FUNCTION INITIAL POSITION SW1 (1) Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space signal on TD or RD for about 9 minutes ON: enable (auto-disconnect)l OFF: disable OFF SW1 (2) DCD, DSR control ON: continuous on OFF: DSR depends on DTR (DCD is on during communication state) OFF SW1 (3) RI control ON: RI is on continuously during ringing state OFF: RI is 1 set ON/3 set OFF during ringing state OFF SW1 (4) RTS control ON: DTE doesn’t have RTS signal OFF: DIE has RTS signal (ready/busy flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD) OFF FIGURE 8-26-PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS 8-26-PDIU-DVPDIU-DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION 8-46 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 . NOTE: Do not cut jumper wires for STRATA DK installations. Jumper wires are for PERCEPTION applications only. 8-47 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW) PDIU-DS (FRONT VIEW) MODULAR JACK FOR CONNECTING I- OR 2-PAIR E FIGURE 8-26 FOR (1 - 4) OPTIONS INFORMATION (SEE PARAGRAPH 12.72) n I RI J DTR Pl - P9 LOCATED ON PCB INSIDE OF PDIU-DS UNIT (SEE NOTES) I SIGNAL PDIU-DS SIGNAL NAME/ FUNCTION SIGNAL ABBREVIATON PDIU-DS PIN NO. FG FRAME GROUND 1 SG SIGNAL GROUND 7 TD TRANSMIT RD DTR I RECEIVE 1 DATA DIRECTION CONNECTED SIGNAL DIRECTION RS-232, DB25 (FEMALE) CONNECTOR ND FUNCTION TO DTE FUNCTION: A-B (DTE MODE) PDIU-DS OF PI - P9 CONNECTED TO DCE FUNCTION: B-C (MODEM MODE) SIGNAL DIRECTION DATA DATA TERMINAL READY 1 20 NOTES: 1. Mode select (Pl - P9) ‘A-B” if PDIU-DS IS 2. Mode select (Pl - P9) “B-C” if PDIU-DS is 3. See Figure 8-27 to disassemble/assemble 4. Some RS-232 leads go by different names 1 DTE DIU connected connected PDIU-DI. depending P3 MODEM DIU 1 P2 MODEM DIU P6 MODEM DIU I P3 MODEX DIU I P0 MODEM DIU 1 P9 to a terminal-type to a modem-type device (DTE). device (DCE). on the equipment manufacturer. FIGURE 8-28-PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONWRS-232 CONNECTORINFORMATION 8-48 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 PDIU-DI (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE) PIN DESIGNATIONS TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT-TYPE PERSONAL COMPUTER (DTE) PIN DESIGNATIONS CoK:RT NAME 123456789 DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI PDIU-DI PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 NAME FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of asynchronous (serial) communication interface connector (DB9) of Toshiba laptop or IBM AT personal computer Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector CONNECTOR DB9 FEMALE CONNECTOR 4 5 Pin to pin connections are confiqured as a straight cable, not as a null modem cable (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer supplied). 22 NOTES: 7. Some RS-232 E/A leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers. 2. The computer receives data on pin 2 (RD) and sends data on pin 3 (TO). FIGURE 8-29-PDIU-DI TO IBM AT TYPE COMPUTER 8-49 , RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 PDIU-DI (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE) IBM XT PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ASCII TERMINAL (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE) DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS PDIU-DI PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 PDIU-DI PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 NAME FG TD RD FITS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI NAME FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of personal computer . DB25 PIN# NAME DB25 PIN # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 2 TD 2 20 DTR 20 7 SG 7 6 DSR 6 4 RTS 4 5 CTS 5 22 RI 22 1 FG 1 RS-232 CABLE IBM PC AT modem style (serial) DB25 to DB2.5 (M/F) E-232 cable (50 ft max, 24 AWG, customer supplied). NOTE: The PC/ASCII terminal receives data on pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on pin 2 (TO). I FIGURE 8-30-POIU-DITOIBMXTTYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLECONNECTIONS 8-50 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 TOSHIBA PS321 SL PRINTER (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE) DB25 PDIU-DS (CONFIGURED IN THE “CONNECT TO DTE” MODE: PI - P9 q A-B SO PDIU FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE) PIN DESIGNATIONS DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS PRINTER PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 PDIU-DS PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 NAME FG TD RD RTS N/C DSR SG DCD DTR RI NAME FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of Drinter (50 ft max, 24 AWG; customer supplied). NOTES: 1. The printer receives data on pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on pin 2 (TO). 2. The PDIU-DS should be in the connect to DTE mode (Pl m P9 are strapped so that it transmits data on pin 3 (RD) and receives data on pin 2 (TO). A-B), FlGURE8-31-PDIU-DSTOTOSHlBAPRINTER,RS-232CONNECTOR/CABLE 8-51 CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE) PDIU-DS (CONFIGURED IN THE “CONNECT TO MODEM” MODE, PI - P9 = B-C, SO IT FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE) MODEM PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 PDIU-DS PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 NAME FG TD RD FITS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI NAME FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of modem DB25 connector Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25, connector W-232 CABLE (50 ft max, 24 AWG; customer supplied) NOTES: 1. Modem receives data on pin 2 (TO) and transmits data on pin 3 (RD). 2. The PDIU-DS must be in the connect to modem mode (Pl - P9 strapped data on pin 2 (TO) and receives data on pin 3 (RD). B-C) so that it transmits FIGURE 8-32-PDIU-OS TO HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLECONNECTIONS 8-52 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 CONNECTION EXAMPLE . 1 DIGITAL TELEPHONE TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT TYPE PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC) PDIU-DI BASE TYPE 1 MODULAR ADAPTER’ TYPE B MODULAR CORD (CROSSED) (50 ft max, 24AWG) TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER’ Will not function CONNECTION EXAMPLE IMPORTANT! with applications that require the RI signal to PC. 2 DIGITAL TELEPHONE IBM PC OR XT TYPE PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC) PDIU-DI BASE MODULAR ADAPTER’ TYPE A MODULAR CORD (STRAIGHT) (50 ft max, 24AWG) TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER’ Will not function CONNECTION EXAMPLE IMPORTANT! with applications that require the RI signal to PC. 3 TOHSIBA P321 SL OF SIMILAR TANDARD TYPE SERIAL PRINTER STAND-ALONE DIU I PDIU-DS TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER’ TYPE A MODULAR CORD’ (50 ft max, 24AWG) TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER’ NOTES: 1. See Figure 8-34 for detailedpin out information of modular cords and adapters. 2. Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS to a modem. 3. Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications (auto-dialers, printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, etc). If the PC PDIU-DI must receive calls, the RI lead is normally required; therefore, a standard RS-232 cable must be used (see Figures 8-29 and 8-30). 4. In Connection Example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the connect to DTE mode (Pl B P9, strapped A-B). 5. All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied. I FlGURE8-33-PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45ADAPTER CONNECTIONS 8-53 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 TYPE 1 RJ45 TO DB9 (FEMALE) ADAPTER 0 . 87654321 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 N/C DSR RTS RD DCD TD GND CTS RI 6 7 2 b 3 5 8 9 RJ45 LEAD NAME DB9 54321 oo”oooooo 9876 TYPE 2 RJ45 TO DB25 (MALE) ADAPTER 87654321 I!3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N/C CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI RJ45 LEAD NAME 5 7 2((j 22 DB25 TYPE 3 RJ45 TO DB25 (FEMALE) ADAPTER 87654321 L3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N/C CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI RJ45 LEAD NAME 5 7 22 DB25 2&iz&j RJ45 STRAIGHT THROUGH FRONT : TYPE A RJ45 FLAT MODULAR CORD (STRAIGHT) : z i RJ45 CROSS PINNING TYPE B RJ45 FLAT MODULAR CORD (CROSSED) Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer supplied) I i FIGURE 8-34-POIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDSAND RJ-45/RS-232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS 8-54 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 . LAPTOP PC 1 STRATA DK (Release 3) LAPTOP PC 2 FlGURE8-35-PCTO 12.80 PDIU-DVPDIU-DS PCTESTCALLUSINGATCOMMANDS Installation Tests 2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). 12.81 Paragraphs 12.82 -+ 12.86 provide tests for five DIU call applications. The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided for explanation purposes only; when actually testing, use port and telephone numbers appropriate for the system. Each of these tests can be conducted with manual dialing from adigital telephone’sdialpad or AT dialing from a personal computer’s keyboard; however, only the preferred method of dialing for application is presented. The Data hterface User Guide in the Operating Procedures section of this manual has additional information useful for the tests. 3) From PC l’s keyboard, type~~~~~~[and press m (AT commands must be capital letters). l The DATA LEDs will be lit on DKT 200 and 201 l PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX. l PC 2 displays, RING. l PC 1 and PC 2 are connected as shown by the thick solid lines. PDIU-Dls are now in the communication mode. 12.82 PC-to-PC Test Call Using AT Commands (see Figure 8-35) 4) Typing from PC 1 keyboard 2 display and vice versa. 1) DIU Programming: l Program 20: Ports 00 and 01. LEDs 01, 02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. l Program 39: Ports 00 and 01. m (56) and m (54) buttons should be provided. l Default settings for PDIU-DI S-Registers. will display on PC 5) To terminate the call: a) Type 1 B 4 from either PC keyboard. l The PC screen displays, OK: rom the PC keyboard used b) Type lR[3f in step 5a. 8-55 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 STRATA DK (Release 3) nnne I RS- RS- FlGURE8-36-PCTO l l PRINTERTESTCALL USING MANUAL DIALING PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER. The Data LEDs on each DKT are off. 12.83 PC to Printer Test Dialing (see Figure 8-36) Call Using 3) Using the manufacturer’s documentation, make sure the communication parameters (data speed, parity, data bits, stop bits, etc.) of the PC COM port match the printer’s serial interface parameters. Manual 4) To connect the PC to the printer, press the DKT’s m button and dial 111 . l The CONNECT on the PDIU-DS will be lit. l The connection between the PC and the printer is completed, as shown by the thick lines above (PDIU-DS 203 is in the communication mode). l If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the connection is not complete; press m and try step 4 again. 1) DIU Programming: l Program 20: Port 01. LEDs 01, 02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. l Program 20: Port 03. LEDs 01,04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. l Program 39: Port 01. m (56) and m (54) buttons should be provided. l Default settings for PDIU-DI, S-Registers. 2) Make sure the PC is configured to print data from its serial COM port (the PC COM port connected to DKT/PDIU-DI port 01). This is normally accomplished using the DOS and MODE commands. 5) Operate the PC to print data as required. 6) To terminate button. the call, press the DKT’s m I 8-56 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 STRATA DK (Release 3) 7-l 583-3700 - TELEPHONE LAPTOP PC 1 PC2 FIGURE 8-37-INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS 12.84 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using AT Commands (see Figure 8-37) 3) From PC l’s keyboard, type1~~~~~~and press m (AT commands must be capital letters). l The DATA LED on DKT 200 will be lit. l The CONNECT LED on PDIU-DS 204 will be lit. l The screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications software. l At this time, PC 1 and PDIU-DS 204 are connected as shown by the thick lines above (PDIU-DS 204 is in the communication mode); PC 1 is now linked directly to the RS-232 side of the internal modem; PC 1 can issue AT commands to the internal modem, which is now in the command mode. l If PDKWPDIU-DS port 04 is the only DIU port connected -to the modem (Program 20, LED 03 ON), the MODEM LEDs on all DKTs will be lit. 1) DIU Programming: l Program 20: Port 00. LEDs 01,02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. l Program 20: Port 04. LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, and1 7 ON; all other LEDs OFF. l Program 21: PDKU port 04 assigned with PSTU oort 08. l Program 39: Port 00. [iKEI (56), m (54), and ma (55) buttons should be provided. l Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIUDS S-Registers. 2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). 8-57 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 4) From PC l’s keyboard, type~~~~~~~~~ [[IIiand press=. l The internal modem (208) goes off-hook, dials 701 to seize the CO line, and then dials the external modem’s telephone number (674-4700). l The external modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications. l If the modems send result codes, the screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. l At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines above, to exchange data (file transfers, type messages, etc.). \ 5) To terminate the call: rom either PC keyboard. a) VwEEEf l The PC screen displays, OK. rom the PC keyboard used b) TweWllf in step 5a. l PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER. l The DATA LED on DKT 200 will be unlit. .. 8-58 . ‘, .i ./ INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 STRATA DK (Release 3) INTERNAL MODEM II (208) PDKU (PORT04) - LAPTOP PC 1 DKT/PDIU-DI PC2 FIGURE 8-38-EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS 12.85 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using AT Commands (see Figure 8-38) the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). 1) DIU Programming: l Program 20: Port 00. LEDs 01,02, and1 7 0N;all other LEDs OFF. l Program 20: Port 04. LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, and17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. l Program 21: PDKU port 04 assigned with PSTU port 08. l Program 39: Port 00. m (56), m (54), and mra (55) buttons should be provided. l Program 81: Port 08. LED 01 ON (CO line 01 rings PSTU port 08). l Internal modem: set to auto answer (SO=l). l Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIUDS, S-Registers. 3) b;m PdCp2’s keyb&, type~~~~~~~~~ t 0 an ress m. l The external modem oriainates the call to STRATA CO line 01. ” CO line 01 rings incoming to the internal l modem (PSTU port 08). l The internal modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications. l If the modems send result codes, the PC’s screens display, CONNECTXXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications software. l At this time, PC’2 is connected to PDIUDS (204), as shown by the thick lines above (PDIU-DS 204 is in the command 2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that 8-59 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 mode). PC 2 can now issue AT commands to PDIU-DS 204. l If PDKWPDIU-DS port 04 is the only PDIU port connected to a modem (Program 20, LED 03 ON), then the MODEM LEDs on all DKTs will light. 4) From PC 2’s keyboard, type~~~~~~~and press= (AT commands must be capital letters); this prompts PDIU-DS (204) to dial and connect to PDIU-DI (200). l The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS (204) will be lit; the DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 200 will also be lit. l The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. l At this time, PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines, to exchange data (file transfers, typed messages, etc.). -.\, .I , 5) To terminate the call: a) Type [I 1 from either PC keyboard. l The PC screen displays, OK. rom the PC keyboard used b) ~w000f in step 5a. l PC 1’s and PC 2’s screens both display, NO CARRIER. l The DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 200 will turn off. , ..’ 8-60 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTlON200-096-208 FEBRUARY1991 LAPTOP PC 2 DIALED LINE STRATA DK (Release 3) FlGURE8-39-PCAUTO I DIALVOICECALLTEST 12.86 PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test (see Figure 8-39) dial application softPC root directory and parameters of the PC are set to the same example, Sidekick 4) To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC keyboard: a) Press the m and m keys simultaneously. l The PC screen displays the Sidekick menu window. b) Pressm twice (Sidekick prompts “search for INITials:“todisplayonthe PC’sscreen). c) Type the initials or name of the person or oroanization vou wish to auto dial. d) Press~. l Sidekick finds and highlights the desired name/number. e) Press m again. l DKT/PDIU-DI 201 seizes the appropriate CO line and auto dials the selected telephone number. l The LEDs of the DKT’smand CO line 01 buttons will be lit (if assigned in Program 39). l Dial tone, DTMF tones, and ringback or busy tones are audible from the DKT’s speaker. 3#) Make sure that a dialing directory consisting of names and telephone numbers you wish to auto dial is installed within the application software (include the appropriate STRATA CO line access code prefixing each telephone number). 5) Take the DKT’s handset off-hook at any time after the telephone number is dialed (press the m bar to release the m button only); or, remain on-hook and use the DKT’s speakerphone to talk when the called party answers (LCD model only, do not press the m bar when using the speakerphone). There are many off-the-shelf, IBM/MS-DOS compatible, desktop organizer software packages that provide an auto dialer function. One of these is the terminal resident SideKick. It is used in this section for test explanation purposes only. If you choose another auto dialer software package, the detailed response may be different than that shown here. 1) DIU Programming: Program 20: Port 01. LEDs 01, 02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. Program 39: Port 01. m (56) and m (54) buttons are optional; if the PDIU-DI is only used for the PC auto dial application, the m and m buttons are unnecessary. 2) Make sure that the auto ware is installed on the that the communication and application software values (in this test “SKINSTAL” program). 8-61 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 6) To terminate the call anytime: a) If off-hook, press the m bar and place the DKT handset on-hook. b) If talking via the speakerphone, press the m bar. 13 TWO-CO LINE EXTERNAL AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE (RELEASE stallation grounding 2) At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port B) of circuit 3 on the designated PDKU PCB to the other input of the amplifier. In the Figure 8-40 example, this is CKTB (subscriber side B) of VFR5050. 3) Plug the amplifier’s power cord into the 117 VAC (standard) wall outlet. 4) Set the gain and other amplifier parameters options per the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation. 13.02 Amplified Talk Path. Figure 8-40 provides a functional diagram of a two-CO line amplified conference connection (an R-TEC VFR5050 amplifier is used here). The talk path for the connection is as follows: outside party 1 -public telephone network-PCOU, CKTX-PCTU3-PEKU, port A-into AMP, CKTA-Out AMP, CKT B-PEKU, port BPCTU3-PCOU, CKTY-public telephone network-outside party 2. This path is twoway so when outside party 2 talks, the talk level is amplified in the reverse direction. 5) Program l l l l NOTE: Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified to/from a system telephone when it is connected into a two-CO line conference. l the STRATA DK system as follows: Program 10-3: Enables the appropriate PEKU PCB ports for amplifier connection. Only enable the ports that will be connected with the amplifier(s). Program 15-5: Enables appropriate CO lines for tandem connection. Program IO-I : LEDs 19 and 20 must be ON. Program 10-2: LED 18 must be ON. NOTE: LED 19 should be ON if it is certain that an amplifier will always be available for two-CO line conference connection (four maximum, simultaneously). If this LED is ON and a two-CO line connection is established without an external amplifier, the STRATA DKstation may be unbalanced and receive a hum noise. LED 19 provides additional station amplification when externalamplifiers areswitchedinto two-CO line connections. 13.03 Amplifier Requirements l . 1) At the main distribution frame (MDF), connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port A) of circuit 2 on the designated PEKU PCB to one input of the customer-supplied two-way amplifier. In the example in Figure 8-40, this is CKTA (Central Office Side A) of the VFR5050. 3) 13.01 Customer-supplied two-way amplifiers can be installed to amplify two-CO line tandem and/or conference calls. As many as four amplifiers can be installed to support up to four of these calls occurring simultaneously. If three amplifiers are installed, three simultaneous calls can be supported, and so on. If all amplifiers are being used, then subsequent two-CO line tandem calls and/or conference calls will be unamplified. Each amplifier is connected to two designated PEKU station ports and will automatically be switched into a two-CO line connection established between any CO lines in the system. l for amplifier 13.04 Installation: Connect a two-way amplifier to the STRATA DK system in accordance with the following steps (see Figures 8-40 and 9-24). 13.00 General. l documentation instructions. Customer-supplied (four maximum). Must be FCC-registered, Part 68, and provide automatic gain control. Each amplifier requires two PEKU station ports. Refer to the amplifier manufacturer’s in- 8-62 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION 200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 I 14 BATTERY 4. Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with conduction materials such as rings; bracelets, and keys. The battery or conductor may overheat and cause burns. 5. Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with this product only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this manual. 6. Observe proper polarity orientation between the batteries and battery charger. CARE WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these instructions: 1. Use only the following type and size batteries: 12-volt, gelcell. 2. Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. The cells may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. 3. Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed. 8-63 INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS SECTION200-096-208 FEBRUARY 1991 ! R-TEC EDGE CONNECTOR STRATA PCOU OUTSIDE PARTY 1 DK 24156196 PCTU3 , PEKU CM ONFERENC WITCH CKT, --- , p”“‘“i/ ,24AWG 25.PAIR CABLE /VT(2), r P2RW6Ni T. P51 X R, P33 f l I I I I I I PUBLIC TELEPHONE NETWORK OUTSIDE PARTY 2 CKT, (CKT 2) p”“$ /VT(3),P3ONv-s / (CKT3) 1 PSTU l l 3rd LED 03, ON 4th LED 04, ON 5th l Program amplified l (Release PEKU PORT NUMBER 3): PEKU CIRCUIT A = 09 B=lO A= 17 B=18 A = 25 B = 26 A = 33 B = 34 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 Program 1 O-1, key LED 19 and 20 ON. Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for tandem Program For LED connection. 78-2, enable appropriate DISA is required. 10-2, key LED 18 ON. 19, see note in Paragraph 1 DW 1 J Pi7 THAT SETS UP 2-CO LINE CONFERENCE CALL L R-TEC, PSI 6 POWER ADAPTER (NOTES) 1 Program 10-3, circuit assignments LED 02, ON P35 ffj=f w NOTES (PROGRAMMING): 2nd m CKTB ANY PCOU LINE ’ MAY BE USED FOR CONFERENCE; SEE PROGRAMMING NOTES FOR TANDEM AND/OR DISA CO LINES LED 01, ON T. P41 R, P49 l PEKU SLOT POSITION AMP Y I I PROGRAM 10-3 PEKU PORT CONF. ENABLE KEY/LED --Id Z4AWG TWISTEC ‘AIR f--- l R-TEC, VFR5050 AMPLIFIER (see NOTES) R-TEC EDGE CONNECTOR I- DUPLEX AC-PLUG NOTES (Amplifier): 1. All amplifier equipment is customer dealer-supplied. 2. Use a 2-way, telephone CO line amplifier that is FCC Part 68 registered and provides automatic gain control; the above example is with a Reliance Electric Co., R-TEC VFR5050 (VVSG) Repeater, with 500-X or 500-X-CT mounting assembly and a PSI 6 power adapter. 3. Recommended switch settings for VFR5050 are: FLAT GAIN (I, 2, 4, 8): all ON Equalizer (1 - 5): all OFF Sensitivity: NORM Sl screw: down = Data DIS OFF 4. The above R-TEC options may be different for some installations; see R-TEC VFR5050 installation Practice before installing VFR5050. l l l CO lines if 13.04. I l FIGURE 8-40-AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCEAND/OR AMPLIFIED DISA FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM 8-64 .’ TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONESYSTEMS INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 Strata@Bcc RELEASE 1,2, and 3 INSTALLATION CHAPTER NINE WIRING DIAGRAMS INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLEOFCONTENTS PARAGRAPH 1 2 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 SUBJECT GENERAL ............................................................................................................... WIRING DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................... Station Wiring Diagrams ...................................................................................... CO/TIE Line Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................. Power Failure Cut-through (DPFT) Wiring Diagrams .......................................... PIOU,PIOUS, and PEPU Wiring Diagrams ......................................................... Power Supply DC Out Wiring Diagrams.. ............................................................ . ,PAGE 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-I 9-1 9-I TABLE LIST TABLE 9-A 9-B 9-c 9-D TITLE FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS DK24/56/96 ...................................................... STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS.. ...................................................................... NETWORK REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ DIGITAL TELEPHONE/DIU/DDSS CONSOLE/LOOP LIMITS ............................... PAGE 9-I 9-2 9-2 9-2A 1 FIGURE LIST FIGURE 9-A 9-I 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-l 0 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-l 9 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 TITLE SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM ................................................................ MDF WIRING/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU .......................................... MDF WIRING/DSS/BLF CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WIRING TO PEKU ........................................................................... MDF WIRING-DOOR PHONE/LOCK TO PEKU/PESU .......................................... PEKU BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION ...................................................... PEKU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ............................................ MDF WIRING/STANDARD TELEPHONE, VOICE MAIL, DPFT TO PSTU/PSTU2 PSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ............................................ PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM.. .......................................................... PESU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ............................................ MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO PCOU ....................................................................... MDF WIRING/2-WIRE TIE LINE TO PEMU.. .......................................................... MDF WIRING/4-WIRE TIE LINE TO PEMU.. .......................................................... PCOU/PEMU/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD.. ............................................... DPFT CONNECTOR Jl/TERMINAL SEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS/CENTRAL OFFICE LINE CONNECTION & DPFT CONTROL.. ............................................... DPFT CONNECTOR J2/TERMINAL SEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS/STATION LINE CONNECTION ............................................................................................... MDF WIRING/PIOU OR PEPU PERIPHERALS (25PAIR) .................................... PIOU/TTY AND SMDR WIRING ............................................................................. PIOUS PAGE/RELAY/ALARM CONNECTIONS .................................................... PIOUS SMDR/TTY OPTIONS AND WIRING.. ........................................................ DK24/56/96 POWER SUPPLY DC OUT CONNECTOR/CABLES ......................... MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) AND DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE (DDSS) TO PDKU ................................................................................ MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) WITH PDIU-DI AND PDIU-DS TO PDKU ................................................................................................. PDKU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ............................................ MDF WIRING/AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE ................................... 9-i PAGE 9-2C 9-3 1 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-26 I INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 1 GENERAL l 1.OO This chapter contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supply to the DK systems. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB which provides the interface for, or controls the operation of, the associated equipment. Table A provides FCC registration numbers and a summary of electrical characteristics related to DK circuit wiring. l l Wiring for Digital TelePDIU-DI and PDIU-DS to Station/MDF Cross Con- Wiring/Amplified Two-CO 2.20 CO/TIE Line Wiring Diagrams 0 Figure 9-IO-MDF Wiring/CO Lines to PCOU l Figure 9-1 l-MDF Wiring/2-Wire TIE Line to PEMU l Figure 9-12-MDF Wiring/4-Wire TIE Line to PEMU l Figure 9-l 3-PCOU/PEMU/MDF Cross Connect Record 2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 2.01 The following paragraphs list and identify the wiring diagrams provided in this chapter. l 2.30 Power Failure Cut-through (DPFT) Wiring Diagrams l l 2.10 Station Wiring Diagrams I Figure 9-22-MDF phones (DKTs) With PDKU Figure 9-23-PDKU nect Record Figure 9-24-MDF Line Conference Figure g-A-Secondary Protector Diagram Figure 9-I-MDF Wiring/Electronic Telephone to PEKU l Figureg-2-MDF Wiring/DSS/BLF Console and Associated ElectronicTelephone Wiring to PEKU l Figure 9-3-MDF Wiring-Door Phone/Lock to PEKU/PESU l Figure 9-4-PEKU Background Music Connection 0 Figure 9-5-PEKU Station/MDF Cross Connect Record l Figure 9-6-MDF Wiring/Standard Telephone, Voice Mail, DPFT to PSTU/PSTU2 l Figure 9-7-PSTU Station/MDF Cross Connect Record l Figure 9-8-PESU Circuit Card Wiring Diagram l Figure 9-9-PESU Station/MDF Cross Connect Record l Figure 9-21-MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones (DKTs) and Digital DSS (DDSS) Consoles l Figure 9-14-DPFT Connector Sequence & Designations/Central Connection & DPFT Control Figure 9-15--DPFT Connector Sequence & Designations/Station nection e Figure 9-16-MDF Wiring/PIOU or PEPU Peripherals (25pair) l Figure 9-17-PIOU/TTY and SMDR Wiring l Figure 9-18-PIOUS Page/Relay/Alarm Connections l Figure 9-19-PIOUS SMDRITTY Options and Wiring 2.50 Power Supply DC Out Wiring Diagrams l Figure 9-20-DK24/56/96 Out Connector/Cables Power TABLE 9-A FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS DK24/56/96 Country J2ITerminal Line Con- 2.40 PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU Wiring Diagrams I Manufacture Jl/Terminal Office Line Key System Hybrid System Made in Japan Before October 1989 CJ69XA-10242-KF-E CJ69XA-10243-MF-E Made in U.S.A. After September 1989 CJ687N-10578-KF-E CJ687Nrl0579-MF-E 9-1 Supply DC INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE 9-B STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS Max Loop Resistance (Including Device) Device Description PEKU (ckts 1 - 8) Max Distance from KSU to Device Number of Wire Pairs 1 All need 2-pair. EKTs which receive OCA calls need 3-pair.’ Electronic telephone, door phone/ control boxes 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) DSS consoles 20 ohms 500 ft. (152 m) 300 ohms Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m) with 150 ohm device. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device. 1 -pair P&U * (ckts 1 & 2) Standard telephones, voice mail, auto attendant, etc. PDKU (ckts 1 - 8) Digital telephones 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) 1 -pair DDSS consoles 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) 1 -pair PDKU (ckts 1 - 7) PDIU-DI 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) PDKU (ckts 1 - 7) PDIU-DS 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) P%JZ (ckts 5 - 8) PEKU (ckts 7 & 8) PSTU (ckts 1 - 8) PDKU (ckt 8) NOTES: 1. Use 24 A WG twisted pairs. 2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used. 3. Two-pair or larger wire is required to achieve maximum range, see table 9-D. TABLE 9-C NETWORK REQUIREMENTS I I TOSHIBA Printed Circuit Board Facility Interface Code Pcou/Pcou2 (Loop Start Line) 02LS2 RJ14C 0.2B PEMU (Type I, TIE Line) 2-wire TLIlM RJ2EX N/A TL31 M RJ2GX N/A OL13A RJ21 X N/A I 4-wire PESU*/PSTU/PSTU2 (Off-premises Station) *Circuits 1 and 2 9-2 Ringer Equivalence Shares digital telephone wire-pair? 1 -pair3 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE9-D DIGITALTELEPHONE/DIU/DDSS CONSOLE/LOOP LIMITS PPSU DDSSI 1 OOOft (303m) 1 OOOft (303m) 500ft (151m) 1 OOOft (303m) 060A Battery Backup *Battery backup applies to instances by batteries exclusively. when the system 9-2A is being powered . INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 This page is intentionally blank. 9-2B INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 BUILDING BUILDING #2 #l TELEPHONE &I PEMU 1 PCOU I Secondary protectors E&M TIE LINE CO LINE HtiUHt PROTECTORDIAGRAM Y-A-StWNDARY IMPORTANT! To protect against transient voltages and currents, secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring (Figure 9-A). These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addtion to fuses, shall comply with the requirements forsecondarypro tectors for communica tion circuits, UL 497A. As of October I, 1990, the following manufacturers offer secondary protectors that are UL listed. 9-2c INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 1. Certron Corp; Anaheim, California 92807 l Secondary protector: Model 08450. 2. Curtis Mfg. Co. lnc; Jaffrey, New Hampshire 03452 l Secondary protector: Model Diamond Chip. For indoor use on the protected side of the telephone circuit only. 3. Oneac Corp; Libertyville, Illinois 60048 l Secondary protector: Model OnLine 614+ and OnLine DG/S. For indoor protected side of primary telephone protector only. use on the 4. Siemon Co.; Watertown, Connecticut 06795 l Secondary protector for communication circuits: Model PM-2305. Intended for use with Listed Siemon 66Ml Block: Models PG-04, -25, -50, or PK-04 ground kit and Listed Type I enclosure. For use on the protected side of a Listed Primary Telecommunications Protector for indoor use only. 5, Simplex Time Recorder Co.; Gardner, Massachusetts 07440 l Isolated loop circuit protectors: Models 2081-9027 and 2081-9028. Intended for use between data communication equipment or signal lines of building system equipment. Install and test the secondary protectors per the installation manufacturer. 9-2D instructions of the applicable INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TO P EKU W/FEMALE C :ONNECTOR BRIDGING VOICE Tl DATA DATA Ti RI STATION TWISTED =+r 1 CIRCUIT 4 CIRCUIT 5 CIRCUIT 6 LY-BR &; ! 44 ; CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 OCA Rl R1 NOTE: See Program 28 for electronic telephone to DSS assignments. IR-NOT 1 18 654321 ‘ATION VOICE PAIR-NOT CIRCUIT 7 DATA DATA GN-Y CABLE 1 PAIR IG USED TIP 7 RING 7) I USED ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RECEIVES OFF-HOOK TELEPHONE ASSOCIATED WITH DSS/BLF CALLS NOTE: Place PEKlJ SW1 to DSS. k BR-V NOTE: ! 24 ; See Program 27 to assign loop resistance: 20 ohms from PEKU to DSS (500 ft). DSS buttons. DSS/BLF CONSOLE FIGURE 9-2 MDF WIRING/DSS/BLF CONSOLEAND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONICTELEPHONEWIRING TO PEKU 9-4 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 TO PEKU OR PESU W/FEMALE CONNECTOR SCREW BR’DG’NG /-I InP 1654321 ( I , ; 4 , VR u uuun I I l”lYL n MDFB (REAR VIEW) / lDOO$--1 VT MDFB DOOR PHONE B OR DOOR LOCK CONTROL I See Note See Note CIRCUIT 5 CIRCUIT 6 CIRCUIT 7 CIRCUIT 8 I I 2 See Note NOT 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK USED ’ FlGURE9-3-MOFWIRING-DOOR 9-5 J l 1 MDFB (DOOR PHONE) I STATION #s 3 26 1 161 1 162 NOTES: 1. On PEKU or PESU, cut W9. See Programs 39, 77-I. 77-2, and 79. 2. HDCB “B” output options: SWI: Always in DOOR position. SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone. LOCK (Release 2 only) position; “B” connects to door lock. 3. Door phones may be connected to circuit 5 on ports 4, 12,20 and 28 only. I PHONE/LOCKTO PEKU/PESU 1 163 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TO PEKU W/FEMALE ‘CONNECTOR STATION BRIDGING VOICE VOICE DATA DATA Tl RI Tl Rl CABLING (VT) (VR) (DT) (DR) (24 AWG, TO ELECTRONIC (PORT 00) TELEPHONE 1 J Available with R2 software only. BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE OUTPUT (600 OHMS; 1 V RMS MAX) - \,R9 l!=mRT n3\ PAIRS) 1 CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE (PORT 01) I. TWISTED CAUTION: To avoid distortion, do not connect port 02 to 8-ohm outputs. CIRCUIT 4 TO ELEC PTRONIC TELEPHONE (PORT .03) CIRCUIT 5 TO ELEC :TRONIC TELEPHONE OR 36 -II ! DR 1 ~-j$--#~~ 1 1 1-1 L v-o 1 l-7 I I 7 8 cl 1-i I I L, 28 7Q FlGURE9-13-PCOU/PEMU/MDFCROSSCONNECTRECORD 9-15 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 PAIR PIN COLOR ~-CODE 1T R 2T R 26 1 27 2 W-BI BI-W w-o o-w 23T R 24T R 25T R 48 23 49 24 50 25 V-G G-V V-Br Br-V v-s s-v LEAD DESIGNATION PCOU PCB POSITION FUNCTION TIP-CO RING-CO TI P-PCOU RING-PCOU SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE PFT DG PFT -24V #1 #l #l #l PFT GROUND (INPUT) PFT -24V (INPUT) FIGURE 9-14 DPFTCONNECTORJl TERMlNALSEQUENCE&DESlGNATlONS CENTRALOFFlCELlNECONNECTlON&DPFTCONTROL 9-16 PSTU/PIN PSTU/PIN ' 50 25 .,,:, INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 I PAIR PIN COLOR CODE 1T R 26 1 W-BI BI-W 23 49 24 50 25 G-V V-Br Br-V v-s s-v R 24T R 25T R I I LEAD DESIGNATION PSTU PCB POSITION FUNCTION T R TIP-TEL RING- #l SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE FIGURE 9-15 DPFT CONNECTOR52 TERMINAL SEQUENCE& DESIGNATIONS STATION LINE CONNECTION 9-17 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 PEPU/PIOU PCB PIOU 25PR. CONNECTIONS , l-l--T PG.OUT 1 PG.IN 1 15 40 COLOR S-Bk Bk-S PG.OUT 2 PG.IN 2 17 42 O-Y Y-O 34 33 1 l PG.OUT PIOU ONLY PG.IN I T 3 3 PG.OUT4 PG.IN 4 SELECT RELAY FUNCTION WITH PROGRAM 77-l DOOR LOCK OR AMP. CONTROL J PAGE ’ OR BGM FROM PCTU PIN MDF 66M BLOCK SP.TO 11 19 Br-Y 38 44 Y-Br 37 21 BI-V 46 V-BI 1 MULTI-ZONE PAGE MAX./COMP( 3SITE IMPEDANCE 3nn --- (3HMS I 0 ALL ZONE PAGE (39) 0 42 I 41 -a II II I 38 Bk-Gn 13 Gn-Bk 26 ~.~3~~~~~v,s~--~~--.-_25_-.-SIV PG. COMMON 30W PIN 30 29 23 ---Gn-V AMPLIFIER MULTI-ZONE ___________ ’ ’ I ____ 54--.------46 I PLAYER I 1 EXTERNAL BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE TH PROGRAM 77-i: ;HT RELAY OR MOH CONTROL FIGURE 9-16-MDF . CONNECTIONS ALL WIRES SHOULD BE JACKETED 24 AWG. TWISTED PAIRS W BELL * f TO MUSIC-ON-HOLD INPUT ON PCTU P6 CONNECTOR. PCB WIRING/PIOU OR PEPU PERIPHERALS (25-PAIR) I :-: 9-18 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 DB-25 WALE) RS-232 \4 OTE TO ASCII TERMINAL OR EXTERNAL MODEM 2: Wire colors may types of modular vary with other adaptors. MAINTENANCE PORT \ .7-BIT . EVEN PARITY . l-STOP BIT PlOlJ CARD + !32/MODULAR DB-25 RS-232 (MALE) TO PRINTER OR CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE .8-BIT . NO-PARITY ONE-STOP l STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING I L K BIT MODULAR - ,-,-PAIR FEMALE AMP. JACK) JACK PIOU NOTE 3: PIOU option settings: SW1 - Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. SW2 - Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for /MD/J or TTYjack). LED CO4 ‘On”= 300 BPS/SW2 set ‘ln”. LED CO4 “Off” = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out’: S W3 - Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular iack. - For IMDU operation. MODEM - For ASH/ terminal TTY or external modem. MODULAR PIN-OUT PPTC P13 - Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for be// or CCITT specification. FIGURE9-17-PIOU/TTYAND 9-19 SMDRWIRING PIN-OUT SEE PIOLJ/MDF DRAWING IN THIS SECTION INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 KSU BACKPLANE TBI SPT BREAK Kl b BREAK MDF - 1 HESB OR PAGE AMPLIFIER DET DER NHT B K2 b NHR NORMAL OPEN ALMT ALMR PIOUS ““’ All wiring connections must be 24 A WG twisted pairs. . Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed. l RELAY OPTIONS: l l l Ki (DE): DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 07 K2 (NH): NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC-ON-HOLD CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 05 Kl & K2: 24 VDC, 1 AMP MAXIMUM FlGURE9-18-PIOUS PAGE/RELAY/ALARM CONNECTIONS 9-20 MOH INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION200-096-209 FEBRUARY1991 DB-25 RS-232 (MALE) NOTE Y\ .hYzzx= 1: If connected interchange to external modem. pin 2 and pin 3. TE 2: Wire colors may types of modular vary with other adaptors. PIOUS CARD MAINTENANCE PORT . EVEN TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD PARITY ADAPTOR DB-25 PART \ 6 1 3 SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD 3 NO. PPTC RS-232 t 6 1 TO PRINTER / STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING PORT . NO-PARITY I-STOP BIT l PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT NIGHT RELAY/ MOH CONTROL NOTE 3: PIOU option settings: SW1 - Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. S W2 - Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDlJ or TTY jack). LED CO4 ‘On” = 300 BPS/SW2 set “In”. LED CO4 “Off” = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out”. SW3 - Sets the PlOlJ to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. J.JQDE+JJ - For IMDU operation. - For ASCII terminal Iw or external modem. ALARM PPTC PIN-OUT W4 - Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for be/f or CC/77 specification. BELL - “W4 not installed”. FlGURE9-19-PIOUS DOOR LOCK/ AMP, MUTE SMDR/TTYOPTlONSAND WIRING 9-21 INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 . CABLE FROM REAR POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF OUTPUT SPECIFICATION FOR PPSU24/56/96 NOMINAL -24V +5v -5v RANGE -26.3 - -27.8 +4.5 - +5.5 -4.5 .” -5.5 POWER DC POWER PLUG-IN CONNECTION PIN NUMBERS (1) -24Vl - (4) -24V2 SUPPLY PPSU56 - (4 DG ~ (5) -24V2 ~ (6) DG - (3) +5v - (7) -5v FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR DC OUT (PIN NUMBERS) / DC POWER CABLE COLORS/DESIGNATION DK56 KSU BACKPLANE 1234567 Pl-4 Pl-l,2 Pl-5 Pi-TB2 Pl-4 Pl-I, YEL -24Vl FG FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR DC OUT (PIN NUMBERS) DC POWER CABLE COLOR/DESIGNATIONS POWER SUPPLY PPSU96 (1) 1 +5Vl (9) DG I (3) 1 -24Vl (‘0) -24V2 (4) Pl-6 Pi-4 GRN DG Pl-1,2 3 4 YEL -24Vl Pl-TBl YEL -24V2 Pl-5 5 YEL -24V2 P4-TB3 6 GRN DB P4-1,2 7 RED +5V2 P4-4 BLU -5V1 PI-3 GRN DG Pl-2,1 YEL -24V2 Pi -TB2 YEL -24V5 P4-5 GRN DG P4-I, BLU -5V2 P4-3 FG P4-6 1’ DC POWER CONNECTOR FIGURE KSU BACKPLANE PMBl, 2 +5Vl 1 -24V3 DK96 RED ’ 2 -5Vl (9) DG I Pl-6 FG 63) 2 Pl -TBl 2 PLUG-IN PIN NUMBERS !J-ZIJ-UKZ4/56/!36POWER SUPPLY DC OUT CONNECTOR/CABLES 9-22 ‘. INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TO PDKU W/FEMALE CONNECTOR STATION ;;/;2’“” CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE Tl (VOICE/DATA) (GND) RI (VOICE/DATA) I CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2 CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3 I 2) . I r CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4 10R PDIU-DS CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5 OR PDIU-DS GND PR MODU ILAR CORD (-) T C-J GND R PT CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6 OR PDIU-DS DIGITAL TELEPHONE (DKT 1) (WITH OR WITHOUT PC NJ-DI) CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT7 OR PDIU-DS T8 (VOICE/DATA) R8 (VOICE/DATA) -YXX’D, FEY3 _PR @DD. -----_-- POWER) _ / (SEE NOTE 2) P _ $1 co NOT USED _I RJll iI a--+ \ (4 PR m--II, T R d 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK ’ DDSSlBLF CONSOLE (CIRCUIT 8 ONLY) NOTES: 1. Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3 - 27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND) (Reference to SG ground) 2. T/R wires are a/ways required; PT/PR are additional power wires long station runs per Table 9-D. PT/PR may be used with normal -ORDIGITAL TELEPHONE required only for station runs also. FIGURE 9-21-MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES(DkTS) AND DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE(DDSS) TO PDKU 9-23 (DKT 8) INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 200-096-209 FEBRUARY 1991 TO PEKU W/FEMALE CONNECTOR BRIDGING CUSTOMER TWO-WAY CIRCUIT PEKU, LW-BR 1 29 NOT CIRCUIT LINE 2 VOICE PAIR PORT A (CENTRAL 3 VOICE PAIR PORT B (SUBSCRIBER OFFICE 1) SIDE) USED PEKU, NOT 1 TO EKT SUPPLIED AMPLIFIER OR REPEATERS (SEE NOTE CIRCUIT USED (SEE NOTE SIDE) 2) TO 117VAC CIRCUIT 4 TO EKT NOTES: 1. Amplifier or Repeater must have Automatic Gain Control and be FCC Registered from Port 68. 2. Refer to Manufacturer’s Installation Documentation for Amplifier or Line Repeater Pin numbering. 3. Connect to PEKU circuits only, do not connect to PEW, PSTU, or PDKU circuits. CIRCUIT 5 TO EKT OR HDCB CIRCUIT 6 TO EKT CIRCUIT OR DSS 7 TO EKT CIRCUIT OR DSS 8 TO EKT OCA OCA Tl (OT) Rl (OR) CIRCUIT h BR-Y I 19 SYSTEM PROGRAMS l CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 CIRCUIT 5 CIRCUIT 6 l CIRCUIT 7 CIRCUIT 8 l 1 24 l NOT FIGURE 9-24-MDF 10-3, circuit assignments: PROGRAM 10-3 KEY/LED PEKU SLOT POSITION PEKU PORT NUMBER PEKU CIRCUIT LED 01, ON 2nd A = 09 B=lO CKT2 CKT3 2 l BR-V Program USED Program 10-1, key LED 19 and 20 ON. Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for tandem connection. Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. Program 10-2, key LED 18 and 19 ON. WIRING/AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE 9-26 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 Stratalzx RELEASE PROGRAMMING 1,2, and 3 PROCEDURES CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEOFCONTENTS PARAGRAPH 1 2 2.10 2.20 3 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 4 4.10 4.20 4.30 SUBJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................... PURPOSE .................................................................................................... ORGANIZATION .......................................................................................... Chapter One-Introduction .................................................................... Chapter Two-System Record Sheets and Instructions ........................ GENERAL PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ........................................... Programming Data Entry Overview.. ...................................................... Programming Data Variations ................................................................ Preparing the System for Programming ................................................. General Programming Procedures.. ....................................................... INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM ........................................................................ Initialize Programs 00 - 97 Data With Program 90 ................................ Initialize Speed Dial Numbers, Character Message Memory, Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, and Call Forward Backup Memory With Program 92 ...................................................................... After Initialization .................................................................................... PAGE i l-l l-l l-l l-l l-l l-l l-l l-2 l-6 l-6 l-6 l-6 l-6 TABLE LIST TABLE I-A I-B I-C I-D I-E I-F I-G SUBJECT SIMPLE PROGRAM: PROGRAM 33 (STATION HUNTING) . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . MULTIDIMENSIONAL PROGRAM: PROGRAM 30 (STATION CLASS OF SERVICE) . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ..~. PROGRAM SO/INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 - 97 . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . PROGRAM 92/lNITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, ID CODES, CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD BACKUP MEMORY . . . . . . PROGRAM 03IFLEXIBLE PCB SLOT ASSIGNMENTS . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAM OOSOFTWARE CHECK AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . PROGRAM 04/PORT AND STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE l-3 l-4 l-7 l-9 I-II I-12 I-14 FIGURE LIST FIGURE l-l l-2 l-3 l-4 l-5 l-6 SUBJECT PROGRAMMING BUTTON SEQUENCE OVERVIEW ...... ............. .......... .. INITIALIZING DATA FOR PROGRAMS 00 - 97 WITH PROGRAM 90 . . . . . . INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, ID CODES, CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD BACKUP MEMORY WITH PROGRAM 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING SYSTEM DATE .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING SYSTEM TIME . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. SETTING SYSTEM DAY OF WEEK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE l-2 l-8 I-IO I-15 I-15 I-15 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY 1991 5step process described below, and illustrated in Figure l-l. Button (key) sequences that stay the 1 PURPOSE same for every program are abbreviated, and shaded. Button sequences that are unique for 1.OI The purpose of this programming section is to provide the system installer with instructions to set the detailed feature configuration and operation of the system. every program 1) 1.02 This chapter provides an overview of the programming section, its organization, and its general programming instructions. 1.03 For numbered. easy reference, every paragraph shaded. is 2) 4) In step 4, exit the current program. This sequence never changes. To save space on the record sheets, abbreviation “Z” is used to denote the ending sequence (as in “Z” of “from A to Z”). “Z” buttons are shaded. Upon exiting the current program, repeat step 2 to enter another program, or continue with step 5 to exit programming mode entirely. 2.20 Chapter Two-System Record Sheets and Instructions (Section 200-096-302): Provides a record sheet for every program (00 W97), including toll restriction and least cost routing, and instructions on how to fill them out. The system programmer programs the system from the data on the record sheets. Program cross-referencetables in numerical and alphabetical order are also included. 5) In step 5, exit Programming Mode by pressing the same buttons as in step 4. This sequence also never changes. 3.12 Each System Record Sheet has the abbreviated button sequence shown in Figure 1-I for its program illustrated at the top of the sheet. 3 GENERAL PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 3.20 Programming Sheets Data Variations 3.21 There are two different ways to enter data in step 3 of a program: pressing the buttons on the dialpad, and pressing the LED buttons. Many programs are multidimensional, and involve both types of entry. 3.01 General Programming Instructions provide an overview of system programming considerations. Data is entered from System Record Sheets at the 20-button LCD digital or electronic telephone connected to port 05. System Record Sheets document a specific system’s data configuration, including attributes of a feature or group of features. The record sheets are organized by program number. Record This The Data. Again, this sequence is unique for every program. The buttons are white and never abbreviated. To make another entry, repeat step 3 until ready to exit the current program. purpose and organization. Also included are basic instructions on how to program the system with a 20-button LCD digital or electronic telephone, some general programming notes, and a description of system initialization. 3.11 Keystrokes In step 2, enter the Program Number. sequence is unique for every program. buttons are white, and never abbreviated. 3) In step 3, enter Program in is organized are titled as fol- 2.10 Chapter One- Introduction (Section 200096-301): Begins with an overview of the section’s 3.10 Programming In step 1, enter Programming Mode by pressing aseriesof buttons. See Figure l-l. Tosavespace on the recordsheets, abbreviation “‘A”is used to denote the beginning sequence. “A” buttons are 2 ORGANIZATION 2.00 This programming section modular chapters. The chapters lows: are white. 3.22 Simple Programs: Simple programs, such as Program 33, only require data to be specified through the dialpad. Data entered from the dialpad displays on the programming electronic or digital telephone’s LCD, along with prompts and confirmations. See Table 1 -A for step-by-step data entry instructions for Program 33. Data Entry Overview for entering data from System follow a pattern, consisting of a l-l PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 another vowam more data 1 ~T;l~T;l~~s,,,n~~fispKRIg*~!~lT;;lT;;l~!SPKR~~~ /~--7--\---T-Step 1 Enter Program Mode \, Step 2 Enter Program Number ; Step 3 Enter Program Data Step 4 Exit Current Program Step 5 Exit Program Mode *\ I -: :- (LED buttons) ‘0-. I and/or tl-II FIGUREI-I-PROGRAMMINGBUTTONSEQUENCEOVERVIEW 3.23 Multidimensional Programs: Once a program number is entered, the first dimension (usually a CO line number, a station port number, or a range of ports) must be specified. Upon specifying this first dimension on the dialpad, programming button LEDs 01 N 36 light in the default configuration. The status of each LED can be changed by pressing its associated button. Pressing the button while its LED is lit turns the LED off; pressing the button while its LED is off turns the LED on. Program 30 is a multidimensional program; see Table 1-B for step-by-step data entry instructions for 3.24 Programming Button/LED Buttonstrip Template: A special buttonstrip template is placed over the 20 buttons located to the right of the dialpad on the programming LCD electronic telephone, or over the 20 buttons above the dialpad on the programming LCD digital telephone. The template assigns numbers to each of the 20 buttons that coincidewith tables found in the System Record for programming purposes. It includes assignments for on-hook programming, to identify programming LED buttons 01 -- 20; and assignments for off-hook programming, to identify programming LED buttons 21 N 36 (shaded). Templates are supplied with each manual. Program 30. l Range Programming: When programming a range of station ports, the station’s programming LEDs indicate whether the data programmed matches for all items in the range: l LED On: Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that lights the particular LED. l LED Off: Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that does not light the particular LED. l LED Flashing: Indicates that data is currently inconsistent for all ports in the range. Some may be programmed with the LED on; some with the LED off. 3.30 Preparing the System for Programming 3.31 This section explains how to prepare a system for programming, including minimum hardware requirements, and directions to clear the system’s memory. 3.32 Minimum Hardware Requirements: A system must have the following minimum installed for programming, as described /&ion, Section 200-096-209: hardware in Instal- Power Supply: The power supply must test l satisfactorily. 1-2 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEl-A SIMPLEPROGRAM: PROGRAM33 (STATION HUNTING)I Press... Step m + LED keys #’ Action description LCD RESPONSE . . . 1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone connected to port 05 - circuit 6. JAN Make sure the programming installed on the programming Paragraph 3.24). 2. NO. 205 06:43 SUN is HmlEBE~ Enter programming 3. button strip template telephone (see 20 PROGRAM MODE mode. mII= Access Program 33. System beeps after m key is pressed to indicate program number may be entered. PROGRAM = 33 4. m Prepare the system for a station port selection. 33 SELECT = 5. 111 -II! Select the port number of the Hunt From station. A range of ports can be entered as specified in on the record sheet. After the Hunt From ports are entered, press the fl button. DATA STORE 33 SELECT = (00 HUNT TO = - 95) Enter the port number of the Hunt To point, as recorded on the system record sheet. Press LED key 01 to delete a digit from Hunt To point ports. 33 SELECT = (00 HUNT TO = (00 - - 95) 95) 7. m Secure data in system programming. 33 SELECT = (00 - 95) DATA PROGRAMMED 8. m Prepare system for another selection (go back to step 5), or exit Program 33 (continue with step 9). 33 SELECT = 9. [I= Secure Program 33 data in system memory. 33 SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED 0. m Exit Program 33. Enter another program number or exit programming mode (go to step 11). Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 33. PROGRAM = 1. [Bm Exit programming NO. 205 JAN 20 mode. 1-3 SUN 06:58 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEl-B MULTIDIMENSIONALPROGRAM: PROGRAM30 (STATION CLASS OFSERVICE) Press... Step I m + LED keys # Action description LCD RESPONSE . . . 1. Use the programming LCD digital or electronic telephone connected to port 05 - circuit 6. JAN Make sure the programming installed on the programming Paragraph 3.24). 2. SUN PROGRAM MODE mode. =Nlm PROGRAM = 30 Access Program 30. System beeps after m key is pressed to indicate a program number may be entered. 4. m DATA STORE 30 SELECT = Prepare system for a port number selection. 5. 6. 205 06:43 is m[[E[ Enter programming 3. button strip template telephone (see NO. 20 ml! -IRE Enter the port number where the station bein defined is connected. Use two digits, followed by a If* key. A range of ports may be entered at once by using the 1 key. (See Note on system record sheet.) LED keys 01 - 20 LED keys 01 m 20 activate features for each station port or port range. Make the following selections by turing the appropriate key led ON or OFF for each item (01 m 20) for each port, as marked on the system record sheet: LED 01: Speakerphone LED 02: Microphone LED 03: Microphone Enabled. Key Lock Enabled. ON at Start of Call. LED 04: Not Used. LED 05: Speed Dial Allowed. LED 06: Automatic Busy Redial Access Enabled. LED 07: Automatic Off-hook Call Announce. LED 08: Forced Account Code Enabled. LED 09: Toll Restriction Authority LED 10: DISA Security Override Code Revision Code Change Allowed LED 11: Dial Pulse (DTMF Off) for Standard Telephone 1-4 30 SELECT = (00 - 95) PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE I-B (continued) MULTIDIMENSIONALPROGRAM: PROGRAM30, STATIONCLASSOFSERVICE Press... Step # 6. m + LED keys LCD RESPONSE . . . Action description LED keys 01 - 20 (continued) LED 12 and 13: Digital Telephone Volume (Release 3). LED 14: Account LED 15: Verified (Release 3) Handset Receiver Codes Verified (Release 3). Account Code Revision Authority LED 16: Authority Traveling Class of Service Code Revision (Release 3). LED 17: Do Not Disturb LED 18: Executive LED 19: Privacy Overrided LED 20: Not Used Override Override Allowed. Allowed. Allowed If programming a port range, the LED indications are as follows: l LED-ON, all ports in range are enabled for that item. l LED-OFF, all ports in range are disabled for that item. l LED-FLASHING, some ports in range are enabled and some ports are disabled. 7. m Secure data in system programming. 30 SELECT = (00 -, 95) DATA PROGRAMMED 8. m Prepare system for another selection (go back to step 5), or exit Program 30 (continue with step 9). 30 SELECT = 9. iim Secure Program 30 data in system memory. 30 SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED 10. m Exit Program 30. Enter another program number (see Table Q), or exit programming mode (go to step 11). System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 30. PROGRAM = 11. [[m Exit programming NO. JAN mode. 1-5 205 20 SUN 06:58 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY 1991 I 0 PCTU or PCTUS (Common Control Unit PCB): A PCTU or PCTUS must be installed, and have its jumpers set for live operation. PEKU, PESU, or PDKU in slot 01 . 0 LCD program telephone connected to port 05, equipped with programming template. 4 INITIALIZING 4.01 This section exolains how to oreiare the system software for programming. The ‘system’s memory must be cleared by initializing its data. Initializing data activates standard data assignments (stored in ROM). 3.33 Minimum Software Requirements: To prepare the system software for programming, clear the memory by initializing its data (with Programs 90 and 92), as specified in this Section, Paragraph 4, lnifializing the System. Next, Program 03 must be completed to inform software of the system’s hardware configuration. Basic system programming can then begin. 4.10 Initialize Programs 00 - 97 Data with Program 90: Always initialize a system when it is first installed, or when its software must be brought to the default configuration. If only minor programming changes are being added to a system in which the programming is basically correct, skip this section. Follow the steps in Table 1-C and Figure l-2. 3.40 General Programming Procedures 3.41 The general system follows: procedure for programming 1) Ensure that the system meets minimum ware requirements specified in Paragraph a 2) Placethesystem 1) Programs 90 and 92 must be run to initialize the system, this sets the following elements to initial status: l Data for Programs 00 - 97 l Speed Dial Memory l Character Message Memory l Timed Reminders l Digital Telephone Volume Levels l Call Forward Memory (POWER OFF then ON). powerswitch hard3.32. in theON position. 3) Follow the steps in Table 1 -C. 4.20 Initialize Speed Dial Numbers, Character Message Memory, Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, and Call Forward Backup I Memory with Program 92 4.21 Complete this step if the system installed for the first time, or when all programmed speed dial numbers or the be deleted. Follow the steps in Table 1-D to Figure l-3. 2) Program 03 must be run to inform the software of the system hardware configuration.(POWER OFF then ON). is being currently like must and refer 4.30 After Initialization 3) Ensure that the Basic System Record, Toll Restriction System Record and Least Cost Routing System Record have been filled out. If they have been filled out, continue with step 4. If not, determine the customer’s hardware/software configuration and continue with step 3. 4) In Section 200-096-302, for basic programming, cost routing. THE SYSTEM 4.31 Immediately after initializing the system, Program 03 must be run to inform the software of the system hardware configuration (see Table I-E), Program 00 to assign remote maintenance security codes and to check the system software level (see Table 1-F); and Program 04 to assign station numbers (see Table 1 -G). complete record sheets toll restriction, and least 4.32 Anytime after initialization, the time and date can be set. This is not accomplished from the programming station, but rather from the electronic or digital telephone connected to port 00 (usually station number 200). Refer to Figures l-4, 1-5 and 1-6. connected to port 05 5) From an LCD telephone equipped with a programming template, enter data from the record sheets. For help in entering this data, see example Tables 1-A and 1-B in this chapter. 4.33 All programs are entered from the LCD electronic or digital telephone connected to port 05. 6) Set the date, time and day from an LCD telephone connected to port 00. 1-6 I : I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE14 PROGRAM90 INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00- 97 See Program 90System Record Sheet Step # 1. 2. . Press... m + LED keys Action description LCD RESPONSE . . . Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone with programming template connected to port 05 - circuit 6. JAN ImEW Enter programming 20 NO. 205 SUN 06:30 PROGRAM MODE mode. ~~~~ Access Program 90. System beeps after m button is pressed to indicate the program number can be entered. PROGRAM = 90 4. m Prepare system for the programs to be initialized. 90 SELECT = 5. 11110 +LEDkeysOl &02 Enter program numbers individually or in a range. For a range, separate the low program number and the high program number with an asterisk. 90 SELECT = OO"97 DATA CLR 6. m Secure data in system programming. and 02 flash. 90 SELECT = 00*97 DATA PROGRAMMED 3. DATA STORE LEDs 01 7. m Prepare system for another selection (go back to step 5), or exit Program 90 (continue with step 8). 90 SELECT = 8. [[m Secure Program 90 data in system memory. 90 SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED 9. m Exit Program 90. Enter another program number (see Table D), or exit programming mode (go to step 10). System beeps to indicate it’s exiting Program 90. PROGRAM = 10. mm Exit programming JAN mode. NOTE: The system will not allow the m LED to light to reenter the programming 11. 20 SUN mode. If all programs or just Program 32 were initialized above, POWER OFF for 5 seconds then POWER ON. This resets Station 205 auto preference to select intercom when m key is pressed. IMPORTANT NOTE Always initialize Programs 00 w 97 when installing a PCTU that is being installed for the first time for a particular configuration. 1-7 NO. 205 06:42 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 . EXITprogramming mode \ \ Enter programming mode Program(s) to be initialized Button I and 2 LEDs END must Program be lit 90 If all programs for 5 sec. then POWER ON Initialize Programs 00 - 97 every time: Installing a new system To bring a system’s programming back to the default setting. l l Specify the range as follows: To maHaT; initialize one program at a time, enter just the individual program number, then 1. FIGUREI-P-INITIALIZING DATAFOR PROGRAMS 00- 97WlTH PROGRAM 90 I-8 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE14 PROGRAM92 INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, ID CODES, CHARACTERMESSAGEMEMORY,TlMED REMINDERS, D;GITALTELEPHONEVOLUME,ANDCALLFORWARD BACKUPMEMORY ... Step m + LED keys # Action description LCD RESPONSE 1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone with programming template connected to port 05 - circuit 6. JAN HmEBEB PROGRAM MODE 2. Enter programming mode. System beeps after m button when to enter program number. 3. 4. is pressed . .. NO. 20 205 06:43 SUN to indicate =IIm Access . PROGRAM = 92 Program 92. DATA STORE m 92 SELECT = 92 SELECT EACH DIAL = 1 CLR Prepare system for selection of programs to initialize. For new system installation perform all 1 - 4. Select one of the following. 5. A 0 + LED keys 01 & 03 Clears station speed dial, voice mail ID codes, and LCD memos assigned to station speed dial numbers. OR B 1 + LED keys 01 & 04 Clears system speed dial and LCD memos system speed dial numbers. OR assigned to C i + LED keys 02 & 03 Clears character message and user name display. OR memory (station and system) D [ + LED keys 02 & 04 Clears timed reminders. OR E 1 + LED keys 01 & 05 Presets the Ring/Speaker, Mute Ring, and Intercom Tone/BGM, volume levels of all digital telephones to approximately midrange (Release 3). OR F 1 + LED keys 03 & 04 Clears Call Forward Memory except Fixed Call Forward Memory (Release 2 and above). 6. m Secure data in system programming. Repeat steps 4 - 6 until steps 5A - 5F are completed (see note). 7. m 9. 0. Program 92 data in system = 3 92 SELECT = 4 TMR REMINDER CLR 92 SELECT = 5 DKT VR INITIAL 92 SELECT = 9 BACK UP RAM CLR 92 SELECT = (1-O) DATA PROGRAMMED = (go back to with step 8). I[= Secure 92 SELECT MSG CLR 92 SELECT Prepare system for another selection step 5), or exit Program 92 (continue 8. 92 SELECT = 2 COMMON DIAL CLR memory. m Exit Program 92. Enter another program number (see Table C), or exit programming mode (go to step IO). System beeps to indicate it’s exiting Program 92. [ilgg Exit programming mode. 92 SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED PROGRAM = I JAN 20 SUN NOTE: If the call forward memory was cleared, cycle system power after Step 6, if it is required forward LCD displays or call forward button LED indications. 1-9 fro. 205 06:58 to reset telephone call PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY 1991 more Enter programming data mode SELECT= Specify System Memory (as below, ED ProgreT 7EXIT programming mode if initializing Station Autodial, Autodial,Character Message or Timed Reminders: p-$J@)L Clears Station Speed Dial, and LCD memos Assigned pJ%J@ Clears System System Speed Clears Character Clears Timed Voice Mail ID Codes, to Station Speed Dial numbers. Speed Dial and LCD Dial numbers. Message Memory memos assigned to (Station and System). Reminders. Initialize Digital Telephone and Intercom ToneBGM Ring/Speaker, volume levels Mute (Release Ring, 3). FIGURE I-3-INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, ID CODES, CHARACTERMESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL TELEPHONEVOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD BACKUP MEMORY WITH PROGRAM 92 I-IO PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEl-E PROGRAM03 FLEXIBLEPCBSLOTASSIGNMENTS Press... Ster, m ft’ 1. 2. 3. + LED keys Action description I, LCD Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone with programming template connected to port 05 - circuit 6. WmE~P~ Enter programming JAN RESPONSE 20 . . . PROGRAM MODE mode. moom PROGRAM = 03 Access Program 03. After m key is pressed, system beeps to indicate program number may be entered. 4. NO. 205 06:43 SUN m DATA STORE 03 SELECT = Prepare system for a selection. 5. Dial a PCB slot number (00-14) using the dial. The system defaults as follows: 55 Initialized data assigns slot 00 to be a non-optioned PCTU without CRCU. 6. 7. 03 SELECT = 00 =SLOT CARD = 91 NUMBER 50 Initialized data assigns slot 01 to be a non-optioned PEKU without door phone, DSS console or OCA. 03 SELECT = 01 =SLOT CARD=21 NUMBER 55-0~ Initialized data assigns slots 02 N 14 to be empty. 03 SELECT = 02 CARD = 00 -%T ~~-~[ 03 SELECT = (00 - 14) Dial the PCB code recorded on the record sheet. Refer to the PCB code reference table on Program 03 System Record Sheet for a definition of the codes. CARD = (00 - 93) m 03 SELECT = (00 +. 14) Secure data in system programming. 8. 03 SELECT = (00 _ 14) CARD = (91, 21 or 00) NUMBER DATA PROGRAMMED m 03 SELECT = Prepare system for another selection (go back to step 5), or exit Program 03 (continue with step 9). 9. [jm Secure Program 03 data in system memory. 03 SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED 0. m Exit Program 03. Enter another program number (see Table E), or exit programming mode (go to step 11). System beeps to indicate it’s exiting Program 03. PROGRAM = 1. [[m Exit programming NO. 205 JAN 20 2. mode. In order to secure Program 03 entries, for 5 seconds, then POWER ON. POWER OFF I-II SUN 06:58 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEI-F PROGRAM00 SOFTWARECHECKANDREMOTEMAINTENANCESECURITYCODEASSIGNMENTS Press... Step I w + LED keys ti Action description 1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone with programming template connected to port 05 - circuit 6. JAN 2. 3. mElWEB Enter programming LCD RESPONSE . . . 20 PROGRAM MODE mode. =Iim PROGRAM = 00 Speaker beeps to indicate when to enter program number. Access Program 00. 4. NO. 205 06:43 SUN DATA STORE 00 SELECT = m Prepare system for a selection. 5. Select one of the following attributes: A. 1 View the software version. This attribute is not editable. OR 00 SELECT = 0 DXnn= PCTUl OR PCTU2 VERSION DVno= PCTUS VERSION PCMnn = PCTU3 VERSION NOTE:nu= THE ACTUAL VERSION NUMBER AND LETTER 00 SELECT = 1 PASSWORD = 0000 l l l B. iaB11 Define the Level 1 remote maintenance security code from the System Record Sheet (four digit max.). Level 1 allows remote access to all programs and data. Default Level 1 security code is “0000.” OR c. 01111 Define the Level 2 remote maintenance security code from the System Record Sheet (four digit max.). Level 2 allows remote entry to Programs 30 m 39 and 77 w 89 only. Default Level 2 security is “0000.” OR D. 1 View the software RAM Checksum. This attribute is not editable. The default checksum may change. OR E. 1 View the PPSU Power Cycle Counter. This attribute is not editable. The counter indicates the number of times power is removed from the system after Program 00 was initialized via Program 90. 6. m 00 SELECT = 8 SUM = xxxxxxxxx 00 SELECT = 9 COUNTER = XXXX 00 SELECT = (0,1,2,8 DATA PROGRAMMED Secure data in system programming. (Only works for “1” and “2”) 7. 00 SELECT = 2 PASSWORD = 0000 m 00 SELECT = Prepare system for another selection (go back to step 5), or exit Program 00 (continue with step 8). 1-12 or 9) PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE 1-F (Continued) PROGRAM 00 SOFTWARE CHECKAND REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODEASSIGNMENTS Step 8". Press... B + LED keys Action description LCD filrmr;l 00 Secure Program 00 data in system memory. 9. 10. RESPONSE SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED m PROGRAM Exit Program 00. Enter another program number (see Table D), or exit programming mode (go to step IO). System.beeps to-indicate it’s exiting Program do. ljm Exit programming mode. NO. JAN 1-13 . . . 205 20 = SUN 06:58 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 #’ I. Press... m + LED keys Action description TABLEl-G PROGRAM04 PORT/STATIONNUMBERASSlGNMENT LCD RESPONSE . . . Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone with programming template connected to port 05 - circuit 6. 2. 5mEEEclo Enter programming JAN 20 NO. 205 06:43 SUN PROGRAM MODE mode. 3. ~~~~ Access Program 04. System beeps after m is pressed to indicate a program number may be entered. PROGRAM = 04 4. m Prepare system for a selection. 04 SELECT = 5. Iii -i@ Select the number of the port (use two digits). Initialized data assigns station numbers 200 - 295. 04 SELECT = 00 INT = 200 6. 1111 Enter the port’s station number from the record sheet (four digits max.). 04 SELECT = 00 - 95 INT = XXXX DATA STORE NOTE: Station numbers must not exceed four digits, or conflict with feature access codes listed in Program 05 System Record Sheet. 7. m Secure data in system programming. 04 SELECT = (00 - 95) DATA PROGRAMMED 8. m Prepare system for another port selection (go back to step 5), or exit Program 04 (continue with step 8). 04 SELECT = 9. EEm Secure Program 04 data in system memory. 04 SELECT = ## DATA PROGRAMMED 0. m Exit Program 04. Enter another program number (see Table F), or exit programming mode (go to step 10). System beeps to indicate it’s exiting Program 04. PROGRAM = 1. EErmn Exit programming NO. 205 JAN 20 mode. SUN 06:58 ,’ 1-14 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION SECTION200-096-301 FEBRUARY1991 HOW TO SET THE DATE The date must be set from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to Port 00. Press the following button sequence with the handset on the hook: Date in year/month/day ( If the electronic telephone has a Redial button programmed, press it instead. format (YYMMDD). If month or day is a single digit, precede with a zero (0). FIGUREI-4-SETTING SYSTEM DATE HOW TO SET THE TIME The time must be set from the electronic telephone or digital assigned to Port 00. Press the following button sequence with the handset on the hook: I Time in hours/minutes/seconds format (HHMMSS from 000000 to 235959). If any of these values is a single digit, precede with a zero (0). If the electronic telephone has a Redial button programmed, press it instead. FIGUREI-5-SETTING SYSTEMTIME HOW TO SET THE DAY The day must be set from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to Port 00 Press the following button sequence with the handset on the hook: Enter the digit for today’s day: 2 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday FlGUREl-6-SETTINGSYSTEM 1-15 I If the electronic telephone has a Redial button programmed, press it instead. DAYOFWEEK PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 trata@mx RELEASE PROGRAMMING 1,2, and 3 PROCEDURES CHAPTER TWO INSTRUCTIONS/RECORD SHEETS PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES: These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation. 0 7. Set PCTU jumper for BATTERY be lost on power down. OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed customer data will 2. Place PEPU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB in highest slot number of KSU, I 3. Place all other PCBs in KSU from lowest slot number to highest in the following order: PCTU or PCTlJSl (always slot 00) PEKU or PDKU (starting at Slot 01) PESU (Release 2 and above) PSTU PCOU PEMU 4. Run Program 90. Initialize Programs 00 - 97, and turn power OFF for 5 seconds, then turn power back ON. 5. Run Program 92. 6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming power OFF for 5 seconds, then turn power back ON. mode, and turn WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs: 1. Move PEMU PCBs to a higher slot number to create empty slots for additions. 2. Install new PCBs and reprogram with Program 03. Change PEMU station and CO line numbers or reassign stations. 3. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEOFCONTENTS SUBJECT 1 1.10 1.20 2 3 3.00 3.10 1 f.10 4.20 4.30 4.40 4.50 4.60 4.70 4.80 4.90 4.100 5 6 6.00 6.20 7 7.10 7.20 7.30 7.40 IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES .......................................... TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................. GENERAL ................................................................................................... Record Sheet Data Entry ........................................................................ Basic System Record Instructions .......................................................... TOLL RESTRICTION .................................................................................. TOLL RESTRICTION ............................................................ OVERVIEW.. Toll Restriction Methods .......................................................................... Toll Restriction Features ......................................................................... COMPLETING THE TOLL RESTRICTION SYSTEM RECORD ................. Program 44B-Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override Codes.. .......... Program 45-l--Toll Restriction Dial Plan ............................................... Program 45-2-Toll Restriction Disable .................................................. Program 45-3 -, 6-Equal Access/Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length ...................................................... Program 45-8 N g-Toll Restriction Override Code ................................ Program 46-2 N 4-Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes Assigned by Class ................................................................................... Program 46-6 N 8-Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Office Codes Assigned by Class ................................................................................... Program 46-l 0 N 40-Toll Restriction Class Parameters (Classes 1 u 4) ........................................................................................ Program 47-Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes (Table 1 N 8) ........................................................................ Program 48-Station Toll Restriction Classification.. .............................. LEAST COST ROUTING.. ........................................................................... LEAST COST ROUTING OVERVIEW ........................................................ Definition ................................................................................................. Conditions ............................................................................................... COMPLETING THE LEAST COST ROUTING SYSTEM RECORD ........... LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table.. ....................................... Program 50 Series-LCR Definitions.. .................................................... Route Plan Overview .............................................................................. Program 55 Series-LCR Modified Digits Tables ................................... SYSTEM RECORD SHEETS ...................................................................... Strata DK Software Releases ................................................................. Release 2 Software Guide ...................................................................... Release 3 Software Guide ...................................................................... Program Number Index ........................................................................... Toll Restriction System Record Sheet .................................................... Least Cost Routing System Record Sheet.. ............................................ PAGE i ii 2-l 2-l 2-l 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-32 2-33 2-35 2-36 2-38 2-41 2-123 2-137 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 TABLELIST TABLE 2-A 2-B 2-c SUBJECT PAGE PROGRAMS 00 w 97 IN NUMERICAL ORDER WITH SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 2-43 ACCOUNT CODE PROGRAM OPTION MATRIX . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 2-153 OVERRIDE OPTION MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 2-154 FIGURE LIST FIGURE 2-1 2-2 SUBJECT LCR OPERATIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . PROGRAMMING KEY SEQUENCE OVERVIEW . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... -Ill- PAGE 2-26 2-46 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 1 GENERAL Program 03-Flexible 1.00 This chapter consists of System Record Sheets, and instructions on how to fill out each of the them. The chapter begins with the instructions: first the basic program, followed by toll restriction, and then least cost routing. The remainder of the chapter contains the system record sheets, organized in the same sequence as the instructions. 1.I 0 Record Sheet Data Entry 1.I 1 The system record sheets are used to record the assignment of features or operation of each program. Each sheet is organized to accept an “X” or a series of digits as a selection to be recorded in the space provided. The following descriptions or considerations of the various programming choices available will be helpful in filling out of the System Record Sheets. 1.12 Initialized data information can be found in the Notes at the bottom of each System Record Sheet. Program 00-Software Check/Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments: l Level 1 Security Code-Remote Mainte- 1.20 Basic System Record Instructions Program 90-Initializing PCB Slot Assignments: The software must be informed as to what type of PCB and PCB option(s) are installed in each slot of the KSU. Use the PCB Code Reference Table on the Program 03 record sheet to determine the proper PCB Code. Always enter PCTU or PCTUS in slot 00. Enter options from the choice of CRCU-4, CRCU-8, EOCU, DDSS, or DSS. Also enter HDCB where installedthis will become useful elsewhere. Record station ports assigned to the PDKU, PEKU, PSTU, PESU and PEMU interfaces. Enter CO/ TIE line numbers for the PCOU and PEMU PCBs. Always enter the code for the PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU in the last slot. This record sheet is the main record for the hardware configuration of the entire system. An example of the proper recording of Program 03 can be found at the end of Section 200-096-304. Important: After complete entry of Program 03, turn the KSU power supply switch off and wait five seconds before turning back on. This will set in memory all of the configuration data entered in Program 03. Programs: All customer data can be cleared and set to the initialized state for any program or range of programs. If the system is being installed for the first time, this program must be run to erase random data from RAM which may have been caused by the PCTUs jumper movement to the internal battery. Initialized data information can be found at the bottom of each Progra.m System Record Sheet. If the system is being installed in a new location, all programs (00 97) should be initialized. l nance security code which allows entry to all programs and data. Level 2 Security Code-Remote Maintenance security code which allows entry to Programs 30 - 39 and 77 - 89. Program 04-Port/Station Number Assignment: Initialized station numbers are 200 - 295. Door phone standard numbering is 151 - 159 and 161 - 163; the internal modem (IMDU) is 19, and port 99 is the DISA COS port. This numbering cannot be changed with Program 04. The system automatically assigns door phone station numbers if a door phone is specified in Program 77-1; only the first digit can be changed by using Program 05. Station number assignment is fully flexible so that each station can have any number assigned up to four digits. However, if the first digit is not 2, Program 92-Initializing Speed Dial Numbers, ID Codes, Character Message Memory, Timed Reminders, Call Forward, and Digital Telephone Volume Levels: All previously entered or random data (of the type listed) is cleared by this program. This program must be run when first installing a system or PCTU. access code conflicts may-exist (see Program 05), and a new system numbering plan 2-1 1 m PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 will have to be carefully worked out. All User Guides are written using the standard access codes and station numbers. If desired, an electronic telephone accompanying a DSS console (or a digital telephone accompanying a DDSS console) can have a station number of 0 or 01, etc. without conflict. If no assignment is made in Program 04, the system, upon powering up, will automatically assign eight station numbers for each PDKU, PEKU, PESU and PSTU installed and four for each PEMU. This is done in sequence of ascending slot numbers for station numbers 200 and up. If station numbers are assigned in Program 04 then they are fixed to a slot number-any movement of PEKU, PESU or PSTU station cards must be accompanied by reassignment in Program 04 or else the telephones will have their station numbers changed. l Ring Detect Time, LED 18-This l Intercom Volume PAD, LED 17--“ON” l l Program 05-Flexible Access Code Numbering: The first digit of a feature access code may be changed to a different digit or to two digits. Digits after this prefix cannot be changed. Standard access codes are shown as reference in the Program 05 System Record Sheet. Some do not change (such as Automatic Callback) and are shown with N/A for not affected. l l Access code conflicts may exist if new access codes are assigned; a new system numbering plan will haveto becarefully worked out. Pay particular attention to the internal modem (#19) and door phones. Station number assignment may have to be changed using Program 04. Program IO-l-System following options wide basis. l l Assignments are available 1: The on a system- Two CO Conference, LED 20-Two l CO lines can be conferenced with one or two telephones (digital, electronic, or standard). Conference (see LED 19) in this program must be enabled for this feature to work. Also, two CO line conference must be allowed for DISA use of outgoing lines. Conference, LED 19-The ability of stations to perform any conference can be allowed or disallowed system-wide. l 2-2 should be set to normal unlessconnected to Central Office/CENTREX lines that send ring signals less than 120 milliseconds (Release 1 is short-ring only; Release 2 and above is optional). ,, .:: reduces station to station intercom volume. LED 17 should be OFF in all cases except where extreme quiet room noise is expected. ABR Cycles, LED 12-If activated from an electronic or digital telephone, Automatic Busy Redial will retry dialing a telephone numberonacolineifafarend busy signal is detected. The choice is given of retrying 10 or 15 times before terminating. This feature is not available with standard telephones. ABR Redial Time, LED 11-Upon detection of a far end busy signal on a CO line, Automatic Busy Redial will retry either once every 30 seconds or once every minute. System Speed Dial Override, Toll Restriction, LED 1O-System Speed Dial (*60 N *99) can be chosen to override Toll Restriction. Exclusive Hold, LED 09-Exclusive Hold allows electronic and digital telephones to place calls on hold (by pressing them key twice) so that other stations cannot pick up the held call with a CO line button. This feature can be disabled on a systemwide basis. Any station can pick up an exclusive hold call by using the call pickup code. Alternate Point Answer/Transfer Privacy, LED 08-If Transfer Privacy is selected, a transferred call can only be answered at the called station upon transfer of that call. With Alternate Point Answer, any electronic or digital telephone with the appropriate CO line button can pick up a call transferred to another telephone. In either case, call pickup will function from any station. Ring Transfer, LED 07-This option defines station operation for transferring CO line calls. If Ring Transfer is allowed, the 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 l l l l l system will allow “blind” transfers-the transferring station may release a transferred call before the called party answers. If not allowed, the system will allow supervised station must answer before the transferring station releases. If Ring Transfer is not allowed, immediate recall occurs if “blind”transfer is attempted. CO Repeat Ringing, LED 06-If selected, the incoming ringing timing pattern at a station will be the same as the CO line ringing pattern. This is used mainly with CENTREX or PBX systems which may vary the ring pattern to distinguish between intercom and incoming calls, etc. If Standard Ringing is chosen, CO line station ringing will be a 1 second on, 3 seconds off cycle regardless of the incoming ring pattern. Some Central Offices have ringing characteristics such that this option would not be desirable. Incoming Call Abandon Timing, LED 05-The amount of time between incoming CO line ring signals determines when the system will discontinue (abandon) sending ringing tones to stations. The choice of 6 or 8 seconds is dependent on the CO ring pattern. This assignment has no effect if the CO Repeat Ringing option is used. DTMF Signal Time, LED 04-DTMF signals sent out to CO lines can be either 80 or 160 milliseconds in length. DTMF to PSTU/PESU ports (including Voice Mail ports) are not affected by this assignment. See Program 1 O-2 for PSTU/PESU DTMF timing. DP Make Ratio, LED 03-Dial Pulse timing sent out to CO lines can be changed from the normal 40% make ratio to 33%. This selection only applies to those CO lines assigned in Program 15 to signal dialing with dial pulse instead of DTMF. CO Line Reseize Guard Time, LED 02Should be set for 0.45 seconds for most installations. Set guard time for 1.5 seconds (using Program IO-I, LED 02 ON and Program 42-O), if CO lines experience the l following situations: no dial tone when a line is released and reseized immediately; or, when operating behind CENTREX or PBX, false hookflash signals are sent to the Central Office when stations release and reseize the same CO line immediately (Release 2 and above). Tone First/Voice First-Electronic and Digtial Telephone, LED 01-With Voice First, an intercom call to an electronic or digital telephone will be preceded by a one second burst of tone, followed by voice communication via the handsfree answerback function. For Tone First, repetitive intercom ring tone is sent in a 1 -second on, 3-seconds off pattern. Conversion from one form to the other can be made by dialing an additional digit of 0 from the calling station. Program IO-2-System Assignments 2: The following options are available on a systemwide basis. l Stations Use External Amplified Conference, LED 19-Thisfeatureshould only be used (LED 19 ON) if an external amplifier(s) (Program 1 O-3) is used for twoCO line conference calls. This will provide additional amplification to the station during a two-CO line conference call. If an external amplifier is not switched into two CO line conference calls in all cases, LED 19 must be OFF to prevent line unbalance which may cause HUM noise on the station talk path during two CO-line conference calls. l Two CO Line Conference, LED 18-LED 18 should be ON whenever two CO line (Tandem, DISA, TIE) connection is allowed in Program 15-5 and Program 1 O-l, LEDs 19 and 20. This will increase the volume level between the two outside parties on a Tandem (two-CO-line) connection; but, it will not affect station volume if conferenced into the Tandem connection. This option is not associated with external amplified conference (Program 1 O-3). l Executive Overfide Waining Totie, LED 16-Executive Override allows a station (if 2-3 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 assigned in Program 30) to break into and overhear an existing station conversation. A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties. l With Release 2, the background music connects to the same circuits on the same PCBs, except that the PEKU or PESU must be installed in slot 01. No matter what release, the music-on-hold source connects to the PCTU or PCTUS PCB’s P6 terminal. External Page Included with All Call Page, LED 15-If the all call voice page access code (39) is dialed, external page (all zones) may be included or omitted with this option. This option does not affect the All Call (m) button function; them button activates electronic and digital telephone speakers only, never external page. l l Privacy Override Warning Tone, LED l 14-Privacy Override allows a station to enter into, and overhear, an existing CO line conversation by pressing a CO line button (if the called station is assigned in Program 30). A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties. l 1 l l I l I I Display Dialed Number Timing, LED 08An LCD telephone will display a dialed number for either 15 or 60 seconds before the display changes back to the normal time and date format. Standard Telephone Distinctive Ring, LED 07-The outside-call ring pattern to standard telephones, can be made distinct from the intercom ring pattern. If Distinctive Ring is enabled, the CO-line call ring pattern will be 0.2-seconds on, 0.4-seconds off, 0.2-seconds on, 3.4-seconds off; if Distinctive Ring is not enabled, the pattern will be per Program 10-1, LED 06. Intercom calls, with or without Distinctive Ring enabled, ring 1 -second on and 3-seconds off. This option is available with Release 2 and above software only. Auto Callback Camp-on Tone, LED 13A busy called digital or electronic telephone user may optionally hear a one-time beep tone (from the speaker) signifying that another station has tried to call and has activated the Automatic Callback feature. CO Line Beep Tone, LED 12-If this LED is lit, a beep tone will be sent every three minutes to stations on outgoing CO line calls. DTMF Tone Return, LED 1I-This option can delete DTMF tones that are returned to digital or electronic telephones when manually dialing or speed dialing. It also eliminates auto dial digits returned to callers when digits are automatically sent to voice mail ports on forwarded calls (Release 2 and above). l Voice Mail Identification Code, DTMF Signal Time, LED 06-DTMF digits automatically sent to PSTUIPESU voice mail ports can be sent in either 80- or 160millisecond bursts. This applies to digits sent via voice mail identification code 656/ 657 set at each station. This option is available with Release 2 and above software only. l TIE/DISA Busy Tone Cadence, LED 05 (Release 3)-Select the busy tone cadence for DISA/TIE lines with this LED. Light the LED for a 0.5 second cadence (Bell Precise Busy Tone Cadence); Leave it OFF for the STRATA 0.25 second busy tone cadence. The Bell Precise Busy Tone cadence should be selected so callers will know that they have reached a busy station when calling in on a TIE or DISA line. If it is not selected, the busy tone may be confused with the reorder tone cadence. Background Music/Music-on-Hold Separation, LEDs IO and 9-A separate background music source can be sent to digital telephone speakers, electronic telephone speakers, and external page speakers, while another music-on-hold source can be sent to outside lines or internal stations on hold. With Release 3, the background music source connects to circuit 3 of a PEKU PCB or circuit 8 of a PESU PCB in any s!ot (see Program 19). l VM Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial 1 DAutomatic, LED u4--“Diai~~‘should be enabled 2-4 if the DK system is connected to a .,, -: PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 voice mail system that sets station Message Waiting (MW) LEDs by dialing Ii+ station number. This insures the message LED remains flashing until all VM messages have been retreived, at which time the VM machine should cancel the MW LED by dialing Ii+ station number. With Dial 11 enabled, MW indications set on a station from Voice Mail ports will not automatically be cancelled by the DK system when the station calls Voice Mail to retrieve messages. If “Automatic” is selected, the flashing message waiting LED is canceled any time a station calls the VM machine and the VM machine answers.The dial 1 B option is available with Release 2 and above. DDSS or DSS console can operate differently from calls by their attendant telephones as far as Tone First/Voice First (see Program IO-l). Program lo-3-(LED on LED 01 - 04 to identify which PEKU ports should be connected to external amplifiers. External Amplified Conference is provided by customer-supplied two-way amplifiers connected to system PEKU ports to provide amplification of “two-CO” line calls. Up to four amplifiers can be connected (2 PEKU ports for each amplifier) to amplify up to four “two-CO” line calls simultaneously. The amplifier is switched into the call automatically when a two-CO line call is established, amplifiers are switched into calls starting from the lowest PEKU ports to the highest (see record sheet). Skipping PEKU ports is allowed. Example: The first amplifier can be connected to PEKU ports 17 and 18, skipping ports 09 and 10. In this case LED 02 should be ON and LED 01 should be OFF. Caution: The DK system allows up to eight simultaneous two-CO line conference connections, the amplifiers are switched in automatically starting with the first two-CO line call, calls made after the last amplifier is used will not be amplified. (See Program 10-1, LED 19 and 20; Program 1 O-2, LED 18 and 19; and Program 15-5 for more information regarding two-CO line conference.) NOTE: Message Waiting cancel via “Dial 1 m + station number” only applies to VM ports that have LEDs 76 and 17 set “ON” in Program 31. l I l I Ringing Modes, LED03-Two choices are available for ringing modes invoked by the Night Transfer button. They are DAY, DAY 2, NIGHT (3 modes) or DAY, NIGHT (2 modes). The 3-mode selection is useful for alternate answering positions. These modes are switched via them buttons (Programs 29 and 39) which control CO line ring assignments (Programs 78 and 81 W89). Call Forward Override From DDSSDSS Console, LED 02-If a station has acti- NOTE: The external amplifiers will also be automaticallyswitched into two-CO line DISA and TIE line calls. vated call forwarding, all calls to that station will be forwarded to another number except for calls from the DDSS or DSS console position. A choice exists of whether to call forward from the console itself or from the digital or electronic telephone assigned to it. If the console calls (using the DSS console station buttons) are forwarded, the attendant telephone will not be forwarded, and vice versa. This allows the console operator flexibility in reaching a station user. I l 01 -, 04, Release 3): Turn Program 12-System Assignments-Basic Timing: l Pause Timing, Code 3-Pauses may be Tone First/Voice First-DDSSDSS Console, LED 01-Intercom calls from the l 2-5 programmed in speed dial numbers by the station users. The length of these short pauses can be set system wide for either 1.5 or 3 seconds. The long pause (a different user selection) is 10 seconds. This pause timing also applies to pauses inserted while dialing via Data Interface Units (PDIUs). Flash Timing, Code 4-When on a CO PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 line, a station user can press the Message Waiting/Flash button and the CO line will open (flash) for a period of either 2 seconds, 0.2 seconds or 0.5 seconds depending on this assignment. A flash can also be activated by dial code-II. In general, this choice reflects whether to disconnect and regain dial tone (2 seconds),ortousePBXorCENTREXfeatures which require a flash signal (0.5 seconds). This flash timing also applies to flashes inserted when dialing via Data Interface Units (DIUs). NOTE: The 0.2 seconds option is not normally in the United States. l l NOTE: If no digits are dialed after accessicg an outside line, the CRCU remains seized for ‘15 seconds and then drops; however, the CO line remains connected. Program 13-Defining the Message Center: Each digital and electronic telephone can receive a maximum of four message waiting indications. One of these four is reserved for the designated Message Center. Typically, the telephone (digital or electronic) accompanying a DDSS or DSS console will be the Message Center. However, if incoming traffic to a DDSS or DSS console attendant is heavy, another station may be assigned to be the Message Center. used Program 15-Assigning DP/DTMF, Tenant Service to Individual CO Lines: l Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail Calls, Code 0 (Release 3)-If the Central Pause After Flash, Code %--Some Central Offices or CENTREXfacilities require a period of time after a flash signal before they can accept dialing signals. A selection of pause timing is available to automatically delay any dialing signals after flash. This timing applies to speed dial calls (with flash signals between the telephone number digits) as well as manual dialing. CRCU Seize Time, Code g-One channel of the CRCU DTMF receiver/decoder is seized when it is needed for the decoding process, such as with a standard telephone with DTMF dialpad. When placing outgoing calls with DTMF standard telephones, the talk path to the outside party is not “cutthrough” until the CRCU circuit is released. The release time of the CRCU channel can be programmed for a time between 1 and 9 seconds (initialized timing is 4 seconds); this is the time it takes to release the CRCU circuit after the last digit is dialed. The choice of timing is a trade-off between CO line time to connect and user speed. If the time is too long, the outside called party may answer before the voice path is “cutthrough,” and the caller will not be heard. If the time is too short, a user inputting DTMF tones could be cut off prematurely from using other features, such as speed dial. l l l 2-6 Office sends the AR signal after a CO line call hangs up before the VM/auto attendant transfers a call, “D” tone will be sent to the voice mail port, releasing and clearing that port for another call. If the outside caller hangs up after the VM/auto attendant hook flashes (to transfer the call), “D” tone will not be sent to release the call. CO Outgoing Signal, Code l-Each CO line can be independently assigned to have either Dial Pulse or DTMF signaling. CO Dial Pulse Rate, Code 2-If a CO line is assigned Dial Pulse signaling, the rate can be either 20 or IO pulses per second. Some Central Offices do not reliably accept 20 pulses per second. Automatic Release (AR), Code 3-Some‘ Central Offices will provide an AR signal when the far-end calling party hangs up. If the system CO line is on-hold when this signal occurs, it will be automatically disconnected if this option is activated. TwoCO line DISA calls always release when AR is sent. DISA release via AR is not related to this program (Release 2 and above). PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 IMPORTANT NOTE: This option can not always be utilized because some Central Offices may send unreliable AR signaling or no AR signaling. 0 AR Time, Code 4-AR signaling timing is different depending on the Central Office equipment. An assignment choice exists between Crossbar or ESS Central Offices. 0 Tandem CO Line Connection, Code 5- Program 16-Assigning lines may be accessed with a dialing code instead of with a CO line button. Up-to ‘eight groups may be accessed by dialing 81 w 89; this is useful for WATS lines or other facilities, and is heavily used in Least Cost Routing and Pooled Line Key Assignments. Ageneral group for outside calling is available with a dial 9 access code, which is the initialized state for all CO lines. Program 16 is used to assign each CO line to one of these groups. Do not attempt to assign a CO line to more than one group. A CO line need not be assigned to a group. If CO lines are not used, they should be taken out of all groups, including the Dial 9 group. ABR will not function if unconnected lines are assigned to a line group. Once a two CO line conference call is made by an electronic or digital telephone user, that user may drop out of the conference and optionally leave the two CO lines connected. The choice exists for each CO line that may have this capability. This option must be enabled to allow CO lines to be used for outgoing DISA calls (for Release 2 and above). I 0 Program 17-TIE Line Page/Handsfree Answerback: The external page and handsfree CO Line Tenant Assignment, Code 6- answerback features can be optionally activated for each TIE line. For reference purposes, on the System Record Sheet, enter the slot number where each PEMU is installed. This program does not assign TIE lines to slot numbers; the CO/TIE line number (01 N 36) is needed for input to this program, but is actually determined by the PEMU’s slot position in the KSU. Program 03 contains the CO/TIE line number needed for input. A system may be effectively split into two parts in order to serve two tenants using the same system in a shared arrangement. This assignment dedicates CO lines to one tenant or the other. If tenant service is not desired, leave the assignments all fortenant 1, as initialized. NOTE: The m and m buttons control CO ring modes for tenant 1 and tenant2, respectively. l Program 19-Alternate Background Music (BGM) Source Slot Assignment (Release Forced Account Code (verified or nonverified), Code 7-If the Forced Account Code feature is used (see Program 30) a 3): An alternate BGM source sent to electronic telephones, digital telephones, and the external page output can be connected to a PEKU or PESU PCB in any universal slot; this Program identifies that slot. Identify in Program 1 O2, LED 09 or 10, whether a PEKU or PESU will be connected to the alternate source (the BGM source can only be connected to circuit 3 of a PEKU or circuit 8 of a PESU PCB). When the alternate BGM source is programmed and connected to the system, the music source connected to the PCTU PCB will continue to be sent to CO lines or stations that are on-hold. station user is required to enter an account code before aC0 line call can be completed. A choice exists for each CO line. l CO Line Groups: CO Operation After CO Line Flash, Code 8-If a standard telephone user is on an existing CO line call and performs a hookswitch flash, a DTMF receiver channel may or may not be connected, depending on this assignment. If the CO is a rotary dial only type, the CRCU must be seized after flash when dialing from DTMF standard telephones. The CRCU will decode the dialed tones and send dial pulses to the CO line. NOTE: The alternate 2-7 BGM source cannot be PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 connected circuit. to a PSTU or PDKU station seizure, light this LED to insert a pause before and after the PBX or CENTREX access code is dialed by the DIU &s6; light LED 05 to automatically insert a pause before network telephone numbers are auto-dialed by DIUs. Program 20-Data Interface Unit (DIU: PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS) Configuration (Release 3): This program identifies the PDKU station ports connected to DlUs and the type of DIU connected. NOTE: The pause length is set in Program COlines behind PBX/CENTREXare in Programs 42-O and 42-1 - 8. NOTE: DlUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU circuits 1 - 7. l l l l l LED Ol- Light this LED if there is a PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS connected to the PDKU port. Each PDIU-DI (integrated data interface unit) uses the same PDKU port as the station it is connected to, and each PDIU-DS (stand-alone data interface unit) requires a separate PDKU port. LED 02- If the DIU must respond to AT commands and return result codes, this LED should be lit. DIU “AT” commands and “result’codes are listed in the Data interface User Guide in the Operating Procedures section of this manual. If LED 02 is not lit, the DIU will only respond to ATdialingcommands (ATDT, ATD, and ATDD) and will not return result codes. If the DIU is connected to a terminal or a personal computer with communication software, LED 02 should be ON to enable “AT’commands with “result”codes. If the DIU is connected to a modem, LED 02 should be ON. If the DIU is connected to a printer, LED 02 should be ON. LED 03-If a PDIU-DS is connected to the PDKU port, identify whether the PDIU-DS is connected to a modem (LED ON) or not connected to a modem (LED OFF). If not connected to a modem (LED OFF), the connected device can be a DCE or DTE. This option is not necessary for PDIU-Dls, because they are not normally connected to modems. LED 04-Light this LED if a PDIU-DS is connected to the PDKU port; leave OFF, if a PDIU-DI is connected. If a PDIU-DI is con- l Typical l 12-3, and assigned LEDs 17 w 20-Data security groups can be set to block data calls between DIUs. DlUs can only make data calls to DlUs in the same security group. LEDs 17 m 20 assign the DIU to the appropriate security group: light LED 17 for group 1; LED 18, for group 3; LED 19, for group 2; and LED 20, for group 4. LED settings for Program 20. PDIU-DI Connected to a Terminal or Personal Computer-LEDs 01, 02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. @ PDIU-DS Connected to a Printer-LEDs 01,02,04, l and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. PDIU-DS Connected to a Modem-LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. Program 21-Modem Pool Port Assignments (Release 3): With this program, identify modems connected to PSTU or PESU standard telephone ports (line side of modem) and PDKU/ PDIU-DS ports (RS-232side of modem). Each selection pair assigns the modem to the system modem pool. With data security groups (Program 20, LED 17 N 20) and the call the blocking feature (Program 31, LED 04), modem access can be denied or allowed to data users. NOTES: 1. When modems are connected to PSTU ports, the executive/privacy override blocking feature (Program 31, LED. 18) should be enabled for the modem PSTU ports. buttons assigned to it in Program 39. LED 05-If the system CO lines are connected to a PBX, CENTREX, or a Central Office that is slow to return dial tone after 2-8 p ‘-.:.: , PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONSKXTEMRECORDS SiCTlON 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 2. Digitaltelephones with PDIU-Dls thatmusi access modems from a pool require a m button assigned in Program 39. 3. PDKU/PDIlJ-DS ports that are connected to modems in the modern pool should be set with LEDs 01, 02, 03, and 04 “0N”in Program 20. 4. If a modem connected to PDIU-DS is connected to a telephone network CO line, instead of a PSTU or PESU station port, Program 21 should not be used. 5. Use Program 22 to assign modem/PDIUDS station a hunt sequence. must be connected to circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU. The telephone connected to circuit 1 of the PCB supporting a console is designated as an Attendant telephone. Consoles and telephones are numbered 1 w 4 as they are installed from the lowest to highest slot number. For example, if a PEKU in slot 01 had a DSS console connected to circuits 7 and 8, then the DSS console would be DSS console #I and the electronic telephone would be Attendant telephone #I. Because more than one console can be assigned to an attendant telephone, the detailed arrangement must be programmed. Initialized data assigns one console to one attendant telephone, both connected to the same PDKU or PEKU PCB. NOTE: DlUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU circuits 1 - 7. 22-Data Interface Unit (DIU) Station Hunting: If a DIU station (printer, modem, etc.) is NOTES: 1. DDSS consoles and digital telephones are only available with Release 3. 2. DSS console #4 is not available with the PCTUS PCB. Program busy, data station hunting allows the data call to that station to hunt to an alternate DIU station assigned in this program. if the hunted DIU station is busy, the system will ring the next “hunt-to” station, and so on. If all DIU stations in the “hunt-to”sequence are busy, then the data caller will receive a busy tone. It is recommended that all PDIU-DSPDKU station ports grouped in a modem pooling or printer pooling/ server configuration be placed into a hunt-sequence arrangement with Program 22. Program 22 applies to PDIU-DS and PDIU-DI data stations. Program 29-DSS Console Button Assignments: The buttons on the DDSS and DSS consoles may be flexibly assigned asmbuttons, CO line buttons, or speed dial buttons. The standardly equipped Night Transfer and All Call buttons may be changed to one of these three types, but not vice versa. Station speed dial buttons assigned to a DDSS or DSS console share the associated Attendant digital or electronic telephone’s speed dial memory. The personal speed dial numbers of the DSSDDSS circuit port(s) are not available. Initialized data assigns the 60 buttons to be stations 200 N 257, All Call and Night Transfer. Each of the four possible consoles can be independently programmed. NOTE: When a PDIU-DSis connected to a modem(s) assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21, modem hunting is automatic when the user presses the DATA button to transfer a CO line call to a modem; however, if the user dials the modem’s PDIU-DS’s station number, modem hunting will follow the hunt sequence specified in Program 22. Program 30-Station Class of Service: l Privacy Override, LED 19-Privacy Program 28-DSS Console/Attendant Electronic Telephone and DDSS Console/ Attendant Digital Telephone Assignments: Up to four DDSS consoles, or four Override allows a station to enter into and overhear an existing CO line conversation by pressing a common CO line button. A maximum of two stations may override an existing “station to CO line” conversation. A warning tone may be setpptionally-see Program 10-2. The choice is for which station is allowed to override calls with DSS consoles, or any combination of the two types of consoles up to four may be installed. A DDSS console must be connected to circuit 8 of a PDKU, and a DSS console 2-9 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 Privacy Override. Privacy Override of DISA two-CO line calls is not allowed. Class 2: m or= Class 3: m or= Class 4: m or= NOTES: 1. To configure the DK system to operate as nonpriva te, allow privacy override from all stations. 2. Privacy override can be blocked by a station via the PRIVACYbutton (Program 39) or by the executive/privacy blocking option (Program 31, LED 18). 3. See Table 2-C at the end of this chapter. l l Executive Override, LED 18-Executive Override allows a station to break into and overhear an existing station conversation by dialing the digit 1 after the busy station number. A warning tone may be set optionally-see Program 1 O-2. The option is for which calling station can use Executive Override. I l l l DND Override, LED 17-An electronic or digital telephone can have a button programmed for Do Not Disturb (DND). When called, a station with DND activated will return very fast busy tone (four tones per second). If the caller presses the additional digit 1 on the dial-pad, a DND Override tone will be heard on the called station’s speaker. Theassignment isforwhich calling station can use DND Override. Toll Restriction Traveling Class Code Change, LED 16 (Release 3)-If this LED is lit for a port, the station occupying it can change the 4-digit Toll Restriction Traveling Class of Service Codes established in Program 44B. Stations selected for this feature must follow the dialing sequences below to change the codes: Class 1: m or= the 4-digit code + 1 + III+ the 4-digit code + $ + i Ii+ the 4-digit code + 6 Verified Account Code Change, LED 15 (Release 3)-If selected for this feature, a station can change the Verified Account Codes established in Program 69. Selected stations must dial the the following sequence to change the codes: ~+~II]~+~~~-B~~+Verified Account Code + 6 or m NOTE: Executive override can be blocked by stations that have executive/privacy blocking enabled in Program 37, LED 18; the m m button does not block executive override. See Table 2-C at the end of this chapter. l + III+ l Verified Account Code, LED 14 (Release 3)-If this feature is selected, all account codes (forced or voluntary) dialed by the station will be verified per account codes set in Program 69. If the station user fails to dial one of these specific verified account codes, the call cannot be executed (forced), or the account code will not be validated for the SMDR call report (voluntary). Handset Volume Level, LEDs 12 and 13 (Release 3)-This program sets for each digital telephone the handset’s initial offhook volume level. This level can be changed with the digital telephone’s volume control button while the handset is off-hook, but it will return to the default level set in this program after the handset is placed on-hook. The volume level range for digital telephone handsets is 1 N 9, with 1 as the lowest. Anytime a handset is off-hook, its volume level can be adjusted anywhere between 1 y 9. The level setting established in this program, however, can only be from 2 w 5. This level is set with LEDs 12 and 13: For level 5: Both LEDs ON (High) For level 4: LED 12, OFF; LED 13, ON For level 3: LED 42, ON;- LED 13, OFF (Initialized setting) For level 2: Both LEDs OFF (Low) + ~~ I+ the 4-digit code + i 2-10 , PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 NOTE: NOTE: ABR is restricted via Program 4 1 in R&lease 1 software; ABR overrides Program 41 in Release 2 and above software. Program 41 is normally used with LCR; therefore, ABR may not function with least cost routing (LCR) in Release 1, but will always function with LCR with Release 2 and above software. Program 92-5 (LEDs 0 1 and 05) does not affect receiver l handset volume levels. Dial Pulse (DTMF Off), LED Ii-If device connected to a PSTU or PESU does not require the CRCU for DTMF coding, it should be programmed for pulse. When that device goes off-hook, CRCU will not be accessed, thereby ducing potential traffic to the CRCU. l l l l l I any port dedial the re- station may be denied the use of speed dial (station and system) with this program. Initialized data sets speed dial allowed to every port. l Microphone (MIC) On at Start of Call, LED 03-The microphone (and MIC LED) Change DISA Security Code, LED loThis allows a selected station to change the DISA security code by dialing m +I1 1 (Release 2 and above). Change TR Override Code, LED 09-Two Toll Restriction Override codes are available in the system. When one of these codes is dialed from any station, all Toll Restriction is bypassed. These codes can be changed only by stations assigned in this program by dialing m + 1 h [ or m + 111 for codes 1 and 2, respectively. Forced Account Code, LED 08-If this feature is selected, a station user (using a CO line with Forced Account Code “required”in Program 15-7) is required to enter an account code before a CO line call can be completed. If forced account codes should be verified, turn on LED 14 in Program 30. The digit length of forced account codes is determined in Program 60-4. OCA Automatic, LED 07-A busy electronic or digital telephone can receive a second voice communication on intercom via handsfree answerback if the Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) feature is installed. If a calling station does not have the automatic function, the user must dial an extra digit of 1 after hearing busy tone in order to gain access to OCA. Initialized data makes all stations automatic for OCA. ABR Access, LED 06-The Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) feature can be enabled or denied for each station. The system will select the last CO line in the originating line group each time ABR is initiated (also see Speed Dial, LED 05-A l can be selected to be on or off at the start of a call if the Push On/Push Off mode (see m Button Lock) is chosen. NOTE: When receiving intercom calls, the flexible m button (Program 39) can control the microphone to prevent room monitoring and handsfree answerback. l l m Button Lock, LED 02-An electronic or digital telephone micro hone can be turned onoroff by using the dib button. Two modes of operation are available. A momentary operation requires that the m button be continuously pressed to disable the microphone. A Button Lock operation allows an alternate action Push On/Push Off of the m button. LED 02 should be ON if microphone lock operation is desired. Speakerphone Enabled, LED 01-Any electronic or digital full speakerphone operation can be disabled by assignment with this program. If disabled, a speakerphone will act as a handsfree electronic or digital telephone. Initialized data enables all speakerphones. Program 31-Station Class of Service: This program sets most VM portass.ignments. Each PESU/PSTU port connected to INTOUCH Program IO-I). 2-11 1 1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 should have the following LEDs turned ON: 04, 05, 09, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20. These LED’s should be set ON for VM ports only, not for telephone ports. nies any other station to break in with Privacy or Executive Override to the called station’s connection. It should be‘used for PSTU and PESU ports connected to a modem or Voice Mail/Auto Attendant in order to ensure data and voice security at that port. This feature may also be used to deny override of any station. NOTE: LED 04 may be ON or OFF, depending on VM/AA device operation. See the LED 04 write up that follows. l NOTE: 1. Themmbuttonmaybeusedto disable privacy blocking on a call-by-call basis; this button cannot disable executive override blocking. 2. If a modem is assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21, use this option to provide data security (LED 18 ON for modem PSTU ports assigned in Program 21). 3. If using the system modem pool for data calls that must be switched between voice and data, LED 18 should be OFF for the modem PSTUportsassignedin Program21. INTOUCH (B + Station Number), LED 20-This feature is associated with an INTOUCH Digital Voice Messaging System connected to a PSTU or PESU port. DTMF “B” tone followed by the station number is sent to INTOUCH in situations in which INTOUCH would not normally know the location from which a call was coming, such as hold recall or blind ring transfer recall. This allows INTOUCH to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts. This LED should be lit for PSTU or PESU ports connected to VM devices only, not for station ports connected to telephones. End/End Signal RCV (VM), LED 17Activation of this option allows End to End Signaling of DTMF tones through the system. It is required on all Voice Mail-PSTUI PESU ports in order to have proper signaling communication. l Receive VM ID Code, LED 16-When a station is call forwarded to a voice mail system, certain Identification (ID) DTMF tones will automatically be sent to direct the call to a specific mailbox (VM ID Code 656). The automatic ID is also sent to the voice mail device when electronic or digital telephone users retrieve messages via the Intercom and Message Waiting buttons (VM ID Code 657). The voice mail port must be programmed for this feature to allow the receiving of DTMF digits. @ INTOUCH Integration (A/D), LED 15This option will cause an answer tone (DTMF “A”tone) to be automatically sent to INTOUCH when a station answers, and a disconnect tone (DTMF “D” tone) when a station disconnects. This al-lows INTOUCH to respond quickly rather than waiting a l NOTES: 1. INTOUCH (B No Station) mustbe enabled to allow this function. 2. This is available only with INTOUCH software Release B.06 and above. l INTOUCH (B No Station), LED 19-DTMF “B” tone is sent to INTOUCH to signify a recall situation where INTOUCH already knows the recalling station number. Again, thisallows INTOUCH to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts. This LED should be lit for PSTU or PESU ports connected to VM devices only, not for station ports connected to telephones. NOTE: This is available only with INTOUCH Release B.06 and above. l software Executive and Privacy Override Blocking (Modem), LED 18-This feature de- 2-12 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 I . I I . 0 0 0 long time in time-out situations. Group Page 1 - 4, LEDs 11 w 14-lntercorn paging can be directed to digital and/ or electronic telephone speakers in a group arrangement. Up to four groups are possible. This program assigns each electronic and digital telephone to the groups. An electronic or digital telephone can be assigned to as many groups as desired. All Call Page Allowed-Electronic and Digital Telephones, LED 1 O-Any station may be allowed to receive an All Call page. This does not alter the station’s ability to initiate an All Call page. Initialized data allows every port to receive an All Call page. VM (No Conference), LED 09-If activated, a station is prohibited from having any conference calls. It should be used for voice mail ports in order to prevent undesirable conference calls. VM Group 1 - 4, LED 05 - 08-The system allows up to four voice mail station port groups to be configured for support of up to four voice mail or auto attendant devices. One group is intended for each different machine. All PSTU and PESU ports connected to a particular VM machine should be assigned to the same VM group. The purpose of the VM grouping is to allow efficient use of the message waiting set and cancel operations from the VM machine. Since each digital and electronic telephone can only have a maximum of four messages waiting, the voice mail device should set MW only once, regardless of how many messages there are. Voice Mail to Voice Mail Call Blocking, LED 04 (Release 3)-This prevents voice mail/auto attendant ports from call forwarding to other voice mail ports during screened or supervised voice mail transfers. If auto attendant calls are screened or supervised, this LED should be ON for all voice mail/auto attendant ports; if voice mail/auto attendant calls are blind transferred, this LED should be OFF for all voice mail/auto attendant ports. l l l OCA Enabled (Receive), LED 03-Any digital or electronic telephone equipped with Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) should be assigned this option. If assigned, the station will be allowed to receiveOCA. This program does not affect the station’s ability to originate OCA. Handsfree No Warning, LED 02-Normally, a 1 -second warning tone is sent to a handsfree digital or electronic telephone to inform the user that someone is calling and that he can be heard. If the warning tone is not desired at the calleddigital or electronic telephone, this assignment can disable it. This will also prevent ringing the digital or electronic telephone as a ring-first situation, allowing silent room monitoring of the area surrounding the telephone. Initialized data activates the warning tone for all ports. Handsfree Disabled, LED Ol-It is possible to disable the intercom handsfree function on any digital or electronic telephone. Program 32-Automatic Preference: Automatic Preference for electronic or digital telephones (see note 2) via handset off-hook or m button is the automatic connection to CO lines or intercom under various conditions. With Ringing Line Preference, a digital or electronic telephonegoing off-hook(orpressing them button) may be automatically connected to the lowest CO line ringing in without having to press a CO line button or dial an access code. If no CO lines are ringing and an electronic or digital telephone goes off-hook, the station can be automatically connected to intercom or to a CO line. The CO line connected can be the lowest numbered CO line available on the telephone or the highest idle CO line from a selected group (1 +- 8). NOTES: 1. The programming digital or electronic telephone, port 05, is set to auto select Intercom any time system power is turned OFF then ON. 2. This program does hot app& to standard telephones. To allow system features to 2-13 1 I 1 1 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 be accessed, standard telephones always receive system intercom dial tone when originating calls. I Program 33-Station Only): If a station Hunting (Voice Calls l is busy, Station Hunting allows the ringing of an alternate station as defined by the assignments in this program. If the hunted to station is busy, the system will try to ring the next hunt to station, and so on. If a hunt to station is in call forward, the call forward overrides the hunt. A CO Line will hunt from a station only if it has been assigned to ring at that station exclusively (see Programs 81 u Program 36-Fixed Program 34-Hold Recall Timing: Each station a different time (from 011 to 160 from placing a call on hold or park to of hold recall. Each setting is indeof any other station setting. Program 35-Station Class of Service: l LCD Individual Message, LED 05-This I l I I l Call Forward: Fixed Call Forwarding is different from other station Call Forwarding options. It is fixed in terms of the destination station number which is assigned in this program. The station usercannot change this destination as is possible with other station Call Forwarding options. This feature is valuable for forwarding to voice mail devices or to an attendant. If Fixed Call Forwarding is set on a station, the station will not ring and all calls will forward. 89). can have seconds) the point pendent assignments should be left in the initialized state of 32 characters. LED 02 must be ON to receive voice mail message waiting indication. LCD Display, LED 01-This option should be used (LED 01 ON) for all stations (even non- LCD) unless it is desired to disable the station’s LCD and message waiting LED function. Program 37-Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time: If a busy or ringing station does not answer a call sent to it via call transfer, the station originating the transfer will be recalled after a certain amount of time. This time is set independently for each originating station by this program (011 N 999 seconds). Initialized data sets all stations for a 32-second recall time. Ring Transfer must first be enabled for the system by Program IO-1 , LED 07 on. option allows LCD digital and electronic telephones to store up to ten personal messages and offers the option of entering alphanumeric memosforeach of the LCD’s station speed dial numbers. A maximum of 16 or 6 LCD telephones can have LCD personal memory depending on the control PC6 used: lG/PCTU, G/PCTUS. This program defines which ports can have this feature. Initialized data assigns the lowest ports to have this ability. The software will only accept a maximum of 16/6 port assignments-a low port must be disabled before adding a port above the initialized ports. Message Waiting (RCV), LED 04-If the message waiting indication is not desired on an electronic or digital telephone, this program can be used to deny it. This does not affect that station’s ability to send a message waiting indication to another station. LCD Type/32/12, LED OP-Digital and 6500-series LCD electronic telephones have a 32-character display. Therefore, Program 38-Digital and Electronic Telephone Buttonstrip Type: Three digital telephone and four standard electronic telephone button arrangements are provided (see System Record Sheet). It is best to start with one of these three or four, and then move on to Program 39 where individual buttons may be programmed. Initialized data treats all ports as 20-button types with 17 CO lines, Intercom, DND and MW/FL for electronic telephones or flash for digital telephones. Program 39-Flexible Buttonstrip Assignment: Program 38 should be run first: Forty different types of button assignments are possible (see System Record Sheet for details). Any of 2-14 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 the flexible programmed. buttons (10 or 20) can be line. The digit length, 1 - 30 numbers, is set in Program 60-7. This length is determined by the system’s call routing method. . l If calls are routed via least cost routing (LCR), the digit length should usually be set at 12, the length, including 0, of the telephone numbers dialed on 0+ credit card calls. Do not add the amount of digits in the credit card (usually 14), although these numbers will be dialed by the user after system LCR seizes the line and the system dials the telephone number (see Note). l When not dialing via LCR, the digit length should usually be 26, the sum of the digits in the telephone (12) and credit card (14) numbers. Program 40-Station CO Line Access: Any station can have access to as many CO lines as desired. Any station denied access (either to make a call orto answer a call) to a CO line cannot seize that line by dialing an access or pickup code or by using a CO line button. This also denies access via Least Cost Routing. Use this program to divide CO lines for Tenant Service. If only outgoing access is to be prevented, use Program 41. Use Program 40 to deny CO line call pick-up. Program 41-Station Outgoing Call Restriction: Each station can be restricted from outgoing access to each CO line. If so restricted, that station can still answer a ringing CO line or pick up a call on hold. All Call Pickup functions operate normally. This does notdeny access via LCR. Program 41 denies ABR in Release 1 software; ABR overrides Program 41 in Release 2 and above software. IMPORTANT NOTE: More digits than the length set in Program 60-7 are allowed to be dialed; there is no limit to the amount of digits that can be dialed. Program 44A-Emergency Bypass of Verified Account Code (Release 3): This program exempts numbers up to four digits, such as the emergency91 1 number,fromVerifiedAccount Code dialing restrictions. As many as three of these special numbers can be programmed. When dialed, these numbers will be sent out the CO line immediately, bypassing any Verified Account Code dialing restrictions set in Programs 69 and 30, Key/LEDs 8 and 14. If CO lines are behind CENTREX or PBX, program the appropriate 1 or 2 digit CENTREX/ PBX trunk access code in front of the emergency number. Example: If PBX trunk access code is81, then program 8191 in Program44A51 to allow 911 to bypass forced account code dial requirements. Program 42-CO Line To PBXKENTREX Connection & PBXKENTREX Access Codes: The system recognizes PBX/CENTREX access codes via Programs 42-1 - 8. Program 42-O informs the software which CO lines are connected to a PBX or to CENTREX. This combination allows Toll Restriction and speed dialing to function properly. This program must be utilized toallow (afterflash) PBX/CENTREX features to operate on incoming calls. Program 43-O+ Credit Card Dialing Option (Release 3): Selected stations can bypass their normal toll restriction assignment by seizing a CO line and then dialing a 0. Both the station and the CO line must be enabled for this feature with this program. After seizing the CO line, the station user is required to dial a specific number of digits, which includes the leading 0. This digit-length requirement forces the user to dial a telephone number or a telephone number plus a credit card number; as a result, these calls are billed to the credit card, and operator-placed calls are not billed to the CO NOTES: 1. If CO lines are behind PBXor CENTREX, program the PBX/CENTREXoutside trunk access code (See Program 42-O and 42- 1 to assign CO lines andaccess codes for behind PBX/&N TREX operation). 2. If Verified Account Codes assigned in 2-15 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 dialing a security code. This code is not required for DISA/DISC internal calls to stations. The DISA security code can’also be changed from stations enabled in Program 30. DISA access of outgoing CO calls is available with Release 2 and above software only. Program 69 conflict (duplicate) with emergency or other type telephone numbers set in Program 44A, Program 44A has priority. 3. Toll Restriction and DISA parameters requirements are not affected by this program. l Programs 45 - 48 Toll Restriction: striction program in this chapter. All Toll Reis provided later information Programs 50 - 56-Least restriction with the ‘IO+” Credit Card Calling feature (Program 43) must dial a predetermined number of digits including the”0.” This predetermined number is established with Item 7. This length can be 1 - 30 digits. Cost Routing: All Least Cost Routing program provided later in this chapter. information Credit Card Call Digit Length, Item 07 (Release 3)-Station users bypassing toll is Program 69-Verified Program 60-SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length: l SMDR Output, Item 3-System output to 3): Up to 300 Verified Account Codes may be added, deleted or changed with Program 69. Each Verified Account Code can be 1 - 15 digits long, but cannot exceed the length requirement set in Program 60-4. The following programs and options should be considered when establishing Verified Account Codes. a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device can include information for both incoming and outgoing calls, or only for outgoing calls. Local and long distance call data will be sent out. l l l Account Codes (Release l Forced/Voluntary/Verified Account Code Digit Length, Item 4-The account Account Code Digit Length-Program 60-4 sets the digit length that must be dialed for all account codes: Forced (verified/nonverified) and Voluntary (verified/ nonverified). code entered at a station can vary in length from 4 - 15 digits. For Forced Account Code use, a call will not be completed unless the specified number of digits is entered by a station user.ln the case of voluntary account codes, the account code will not be sent tot he SMDR call record unless the specified number of digits are dialed. See Program 69 for Verified Account Codes. SMDR Printout Options, Item 5-This option selectively deletes local call data and allows long distance/toll call data only to be sent out the SMDR port. The type of long distance/toll call data that prints out is selected by long distance prefix codes 0, 1, 00, or 1 or 0. DISA Security Code, Item 6-The optional security code (1 - 15 digits) is required for incoming DISA calls to access outgoing CO lines. If the DISA security code is not set in programming, DISA users can access outgoing CO lines without l Full and Partially Verified Account Codes-Verified Account Codes can contain the same number of digits (full Verified Account Code) or less (partially Verified Account Code) than the length set in Program 60-4. If partially verified, the first part of the account code is verified and the remainder is not. For example, if Verified Account Code 2734 is set in Program 69, but the digit length is set to eight in Program 60-4, then the user must dial 2734 plus any other four digits to enter a partially Verified Account Code. There are many applications for partially Verified Account Codes. For instance, using the code in the example above, the numbers 2734 could be the user’s dial restriction code and the remaining four digits could be a customerclient code, a sales order, etc. l 2-16 Verifed Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments (Release 3)-A Toll PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 Restriction Class can be assigned with Program 70 to each of the 300 Verified Account Codes. l Verified Account Code Dial Requirement (Release 3)-Verified Account Code Dial Requirement is assigned on a stationby-station basis in Program 30, LED 140N. All Account Codes dialed (forced or voluntary) from stations assigned in this program will be verified. l Code Change-Stations selected in Program 30, LED 15 ON, can change Verified Account Codes (VAC) by dialing the following: ~+~~~+ono-ooo+VAC+~or~ l Verified Account Codes: Forced/Voluntary Program Options (Release 3)-Any station can dial a Voluntary Account Code 11; or, after accessing a CO line ( 0 with Release 3, dial 1 1 F@ or press the B button). Forced Account Code requirements are assigned via station and CO line program options: stations are assigned in Program 30, LED 08 ON; and CO lines are assigned in Program 15-7. Stations must dial Verified Account Codes when assigned in Program 30, LED 14 ON. Program l l 77-I-Peripheral Options: Door LockTime, LED 20-The Door Lock relay contact may be programmed to’operate for either 3 or 6 seconds (applies to PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, and HDCB door lock controls). PEKU Port Number/HDCB, LEDs 16 1 g--Door phone/lock existence is defined by this program. Door phone/lock controllers (HDCB) can only exist at ports 04, 12, 20 and 28, and can only be installed on the 5th circuit of a PEKU and/or PESU. After assignment of an HDCB, door phone numbers (151 - 159, 161 - 163) will effectively replace the station number assignment in Program 04. The door lock option is set via Program 77-2. NOTE: HDCB4, l l Program 70-Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments (Release 3): A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned with this program to each of the 300 Verified Account Codes assigned in Program 69. Therefore, when a Forced Verified Account Code is dialed at a station, the station temporarily assumes the toll restriction class assigned to the Verified Account Code. When Program 70 is initialized, all Verified Account Codes are assigned as not toll restricted (data = 00). Verified Account Code Toll Restriction class assignments are not user programmable; so if the assignments are not known, it is recommended to assign a number (block) of Verified Account Codes to each type of toll restriction class. For example: VACs 000 - 050 = no restriction VACs 051 - 100 = total restriction VACs 101 - 150 = Class 1 etc. port28, l 2-17 with PCTUS. IMDU Modem, LED 14-Informs the software that an internal Remote Maintenance modem (IMDU) is installed. Its station number is 19 (unless the access code prefix has been changed with Program05). Night Ringing over External PageZones, LEDs 10 - 13 (Release 3): For each external paging zone, Tenant 1 or Tenant 2 CO lines can be selected with this program to night ring. For this feature to work, the appropriate CO lines must be programmed to night ring overexternal page in Program 78. Tenant assignments are made in Program 15. NOTE: The PIOU option allow this option. l is not available PCB must be installed to Door Phone Ring On External Page, LED08-If adoor phone button is pressed, a ring tone can be enabled or disabled to external paging when the system is in night mode. Activation of a m button is required to activate this feature. The m does not apply to door phones. Door Lock Relay/External Page Relay, LED 07-A relay on the PIOU, PIOUS or PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 l l PEPU can be assigned to operate with the Door Lock function or with External Page for mute control. The door lock button is assigned in Program 39; the door lock activation time is assigned in Program 77-1. This door lock function is not associated with the HDCB door lock; it is an addition to HDCB door locks. NT Relay, LED 06-A relay, located on the PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU, can be assigned to operate in one of two Night Transfer modes (see next item, MOH/NT Relay). In one mode, the relay will activate for 1 second, and then be idle for 3 seconds when a CO line rings (incoming), and the system is in the night mode. The intended application is to control an external ringing device at night. Program 78 must have Ring Over External Page activated for this feature. In the second mode, the relay will operate continuously after Night Transfer (m m) has been activated. One application is for control of an external answering machine. MOH/NT Relay, LED 05-A relay, located on the PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU, can be assigned to operate in one of two applications. A choice must be made between use for Night Transfer application (see NT Relay above) or Music-on-Hold (MOH). If used for MOH, the relay will activate when any CO line or station is placed on hold. The intended application is to control a tape player which is used as a Music-on-Hold source. l -3, .. .” 1 Program 78-CO Line Special Ringing Assignments: l Ring Over External Page During Night Mode, Feature I-This program selects which CO lines will activate ringing over external paging facilities during the NT1 or NT2 modes. The NT Relay will also be activated if it is in the l-second on/ 3-seconds off mode. l DISA/DISC CO Line Assignment, Feature 2-This program assigns CO lines to be used with the Direct Inward Station Calling (DISC) and the Direct Inward System Access (DISA)features (Release2and above). These CO lines may be set for DISCDISA operation during the different system modes of DAY, DAY2 and NIGHT. A CO line will switch to normal ringing after ten seconds if the outside caller does not use the DISA/DISC feature. Normal function of these lines occurs for outgoing calls. DISA, which allows outgoing CO line access and internal station calling, is available with Rel6ase 2 and above software only. Program 77-2-Door Phone and Door Lock Busy Assignments: l called door phone does not exist. Door phones 1A, 1 B, 1 C are numbered 151, 152, 153, respectively, and are connected to the HDCB at port 04. Door phones 2A, 2B, 2C are numbered 154, 155, 156, respectively, and are connected to the HDCB at port 12, etc. Each HDCB B-jack output can be configured as a door lock control. Door lock control buttons for HDCB door locks are assigned to electronic or digital telephones in Program 39. Door lock activation time is set in Program 77-l. A maximum of four HDCB door lock controls are available with a PCTU PCB; three are provided with a PCTUS PCB. Each HDCB requires one PEKU or PESU electronic telephone port. These door locks are not associated with, but are in addition to, the door lock provided by the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCBs. HDCB door lock control is available with Release 2 and above software only. Each door phone controller (HDCB) can interface with up to three door phones. The system treats each HDCB as a station. Therefore, this is quite different from all other station arrangements using electronic telephones or standard telephone devices. The system does not automatically know how many door phones are connected to each HDCB, so it must be told. This program is used to enter that information so that a caller will receive fast busy tone if the 2-18 ‘- PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 NOTE: An optional security code for DISA outgoing CO calls is available via Program 60-6. l stations can be programmed into the system. Nine categories exist, which are DAY IMMEDIATE, DAY DELAY 1, DAY DELAY 2,‘DAY2 IMMEDIATE, DAY2 DELAY 1, DAY2 DELAY 2, NIGHT IMMEDIATE, NIGHT DELAY 1, and NIGHT DELAY 2. DAY, DAY2 and NIGHT refer to the three modes of the Night Transfer key. DELAY 1 is a 12-second delay of ringing signal to an electronic or digital telephone, and DELAY 2 is a 24-second delay of ringing. The delay functions are mainly used in CENTREX applications but can be used for other situations. If delayed ringing occurs, the station that initially rings will continue to ring with subsequent delayed ring stations. Ring IMDU Maintenance Modem, Feature 5-IMDU Remote Maintenance modem can be accomplished with this program. Different alternatives are available for the system modes of DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT. If none of these are selected, the IMDU can still be reached on station 19 with the DISCDISA feature or by a Ring Transfer from the DSS console attendant or any other station. IMDU station 19 must be enabled with Program 77-1. Program 79-Door Phone Ringing: o Muted Ring to Busy Electronic and Digital Telephone, LED 20-If all elec- I l Program 93-CO vides alphanumeric names (to appear on LCD telephones) to CO lines such as WATS BAND 5, FXTO NY, MR JONES, etc. The names may be up to 16 alphanumeric characters each, and display when the CO line is being used by an LCD station. tronic and digital telephones are busy, and a door phone button is pressed, a muted ring tone can be sent to selected digital and electronic telephones, as defined with this program (only the lowest port in the appropriate ringing group will mute ring). Door Phone Ring, LEDs 01 w 12-When a door phone button is pressed, selected digital and/or electronic telephones will ring as assigned with this program. See Program 77-2 description for an explanation of the door phone A, B, and C numbering scheme. Program 97-Printing Program Data Through SMDR: Contents of each program can be sent to the SMDR port for a hard copy printout. Setting Date, Time and Day: The current date, time, and day of the week can be set from the electronic or digital telephone connected to port 00 (usually station 200). These cannot be set from the programming electronic or digital telephone at port 05. 1 Program 80-Electronic and Digital Telephone Ringing Tones: Distinctive system ringing I I Line Identification: This pro- 2 TOLL RESTRICTION sends a different ring tone for CO line ringing than that for intercom ringing. In addition, CO line ringing at electronic and digital telephones can be different from one phone to another. Two choices are available; one is 500 Hz modulated with 640 Hz (PERCEPTION ring tone), while the other is 600 Hz modulated with 800 Hz (STRATA ring tone). Two electronic or digital telephones that are close in proximity can then have distinctive CO line ringing, as chosen with this program. 2.01 The following provides the programmer with an overview of the Toll Restriction feature and step-by-step instructions to fill in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets. 3 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERVIEW 3.00 Toll Restriction Methods 3.01 Toll Restriction screens and selectively restricts outgoing calls using three different methods. Each type of restriction can be programmed Programs 81 w 89-CO Line Ringing Assignments: A wide variety of CO line ringing to 2-19 PRDGRAMMlNG PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 for individual stations. Toll Restriction can also be enabled/disabled for each outgoing CO line in the system. Exception office code access is accomplished with the Six-digit Toll Restriction method described . earlier. 3.02 Simple Toll Restriction: The first method, Simple Toll Restriction, only involves the first digit dialed. The system can be programmed to reject outgoing calls beginning with 0 or 1 (see Program 3.14 Emergency, Information, and Toll-free Long Distance Toll Restriction Override: Toll ‘\ ../ restricted stations may be allowed to dial special codes such as 911 for emergency response, l-41 1 or 411 for information, or 800 prefix toll-free calls 48). (Program 46). 3.03 Three-digit Toll Restriction: The second method, Three-digit Toll Restriction, involves the system analyzing the area code dialed, and selectively allowing/disallowing outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables 1 - 4 (see Program 46, codes IMPORTANT! Always be sure to provide access gency numbers such as 911. 3.15 Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial: System speed dial numbers can be pro- 2 - 4). grammed to override toll restriction System Features, Program IO-I). 3.04 Six-digit Toll Restriction: The third method, Six-digit Toll Restriction, involves the system analyzing the area code and the office code, and selectively allowing/dis allowing outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables 1 - 4 and Office Code Tables 1 - 4 (see Program 46, codes 2 - 4 and 6 - 8). 3.16 Toll Restriction/Traveling Codes: Up to two Toll Restriction purposes, Toll Restriction is components, or sub-features. operate independently of the just described, although they methods. Class Override 1 1 3.17 Special Common Carrier Authorization: Toll Restriction can be programmed to recognize Other Common Carrier (OCC) telephone numbers, directory numbers, authorization codes, and PBX access codes. The system starts inspecting numbers for toll restriction purposes after the recognizable code is dialed (Program 45-3 - 6). 3.12 Station Priority Classes 1 -. 4: Four classes of Toll Restriction can be defined to assign different levels of priority to individual stations. Classes can be defined so each is progressively more restrictive by allowing or denying specific area or office codes, calls to long distance information, international calls, and operator assisted calls 4 COMPLETING THE TOLL RESTRICTION SYSTEM RECORD 4.01 The following instructions explain how to complete System Record Sheets used to program the Toll Restriction feature. They are arranged in the same order in which the tables appear in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets. The following instructions are intended to give a concise general definition of the programming characteristics defined by each record sheet. (Programs 46-10 - 40). 3.13 Office Code Exception Tables: Class 1 - 4 restrictions can be further many as eight exception access to specific office previously restricted area (see Basic Override Codes can be defined. When dialed at a toll restricted station, these codes enable the station user to override toll restrictions defined at the station (Program44Bor458-9).Codesmaybechanged by stations chosen in programming (see Basic System Features, Program 30). 3.10 Toll Restriction Features 3.11 For description divided into several The sub-features restriction methods may employ these to emer- modified by defining as tables to allow or deny codes that fall within codes (Program 47). 2-20 .. :i PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 three-digit sequence dialed and determines whether it is an area code or an office code. l If the middle digit is 0 or 1, then the sequence is an area code. l IfthemiddledigitdoesnotequalOorl,then the sequence is an office code, and the office code parameters of the selected dialing plan apply. NOTES: 1. On each record sheet, mark an X in the space provided to indicate that a choice is selected. Unless otherwise specified, this indicates the key LED is lit. When appropriate, indicate digits to be entered using the station dialpad. 2. Initialized data and considerations are documented when applicable. 4.10 Program 44B-Toll Class Override Codes 4.22 An exception to this rule exists. In some places, area and office codes are interchangeable. The middle digit is always 0 or 1 (see Code 3 selection). In such a case, the system only knows that three digits dialed are an area code if 0 is dialed before them. If 01is not dialed first, the system knows the three digits are an office code. The dial plan defines the numbering scheme applicable to the installation site. l Office Codes: Office Code elements are defined as follows: Restriction/Traveling (Release 3) 4.11 Each of the four toll restriction classes established in Program 46 can be assigned a code with this program. If one of these codes is entered at a station, the station will assume the code’s class for that call. When the call is complete, the station returns to its regular class assigned in Program 48. The traveling class code data is not sent out the SMDR port and will not print out on station call records. l N=2-9 l x=0-9 l NOTE: Stations selected in Program 30, LED 16 ON, can add, change, or delete the codes set in Program 44. See Program 30 for more information regarding station revision of override codes. 4.20 Program 45-I-Toll Restriction l NXX 2nd NNX 2nd = interchangeable with area code; digit may be 0 or 1. = not interchangeable with area code; digit may not be 0 or I. 4.23 Equal Access Codes and Special Common Carrier Authorization Codes may be entered as exceptions to the dialing plan in Program 45-3 m 6. Dial Plan 4.24 Selections: On the record sheet for Program 45-1, choose one of the following dial plans by marking an X in the space next to the code. l Plan 1 for dialing plan AC+NNX/l+NNX with Release 1 and 2 or AC+NXX/l+NNX with Release 3 should be selected if the installation is in a location where a user places a long distance call to a destination outside the area code without dialing 0 before dialing the area code. The user places a long distance call to a destination in the same area code by dialing 0 directly before the office code. l When using this plan, the system recognizes the following: l The first three digits of a ten-digit number is an area code if the middle digit is 6 or 1. l With Release 1 and 2, the first three digits dialed immediately after a 0 in an 4.21 A dial plan must be defined for the Toll Restriction software to recognize the typical dialing sequence of long distance/local calls made from the system’s home area code, and identify area and office codes. The dialing plan defines several components of a telephone number for long distance calling: l Long Distance Prefix I-In most areas, a 1 must be the first digit dialed for long distance calling. In such areas, the area code is dialed right away. The dial plan defines whether the prefix 1 is required for a particular installation’s long distance calling. l Area/Office Code Numbering Schemes-In most places, the middle digit of an area code is 0 or 1, and the middle digit of an office code is 9. Toll Restriction examines the first 2- 2-21 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 eight-digit string are a non-interchangeable office code (the middle digit mustbe 2 w 9); or, with Release 3, the first three digits dialed immediately after a 0 in an eightdigit string is an interchangeable office code (the middle digit may be 0 or 1). l A seven-digit string starting with an office code is a local call. l An 11 -digit string is not recognized. Plan 2 for dialing plan l+AC+NNX/l+NNX with Release 1 and 2 or 1 +AC+NXX/l +NNX with Release 3 should be selected if the installation is in a location where a user places a long distance call to a destination outsidethe area code by dialing a[ before dialing the area code. The user places a long distance call to a destination in the same area code by dialing a 0 directly before the office code When using this plan, the system recognizes the following: l The first three digits following a 1 in an lidigit number are an area code, if the middle digit is 0 or 1. l With Release 1 and 2, the first three digits dialed after a 1 in an eight-digit string are a non-interchangeable office code (the middle digit must be 2 w 9); or, with Release 3, the first three digits dialed immediately after ai in an eight-digit string is an interchangeable office code (the middle digit may be 0 or 1). l Digits 5 N 7 in an 11 -digit string may be an interchangeable office code as well. Plan 3 for dialing plan 1+AC+NXX/NNX should be selected if the installation is in a location where a user places a long distance call to a destination outside the area code by dialing a 0 before dialing the area code. The user places a long distance call to adestination in the same area code by simply dialing the number, without a 1 in front. The area and office codes may be interchangeable. The system differentiates between them whenever it sees the digit 0 dialed. When using this plan, the system recognizes the following: l If i is the first number dialed in an 11 -digit string, the next three digits are an area code. A ten-digit string is not recognized. The first three digits in a seven-digit string are an office code. (There is no distinction between local call dialing and long distance dialing within the area code.) l Digits 5 N 7 in an 11 -digit string may be an interchangeable office code as well. Plans 4 and 5 are not used in the United States. l l l : NOTE: Program 45-1 must be completed for the Least Cost Routing feature to function properly. See LCR Program 50-l. 4.30 Program 452-Toll Restriction Disable 4.31 Selected CO lines may be programmed to be exempt from any toll restrictions defined in this section. Mark the exempt CO lines with an X on the record sheet. Initialized data leaves all LEDs off, which causes all CO lines to be affected by toll restrictions defined. NOTE: Toll Restrictions override station Program 48. disabled in this program toll restrictions defined in 4.40 Program 45-3 w 6-Equal Access/Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length 4.41 The purpose of this program is to notify the system of how many digits to ignore before it appliesToll Restriction. This enables the system to allow the use of Special Common Carrier authorization codes. 4.42 Special Common Carrier (SPCC) telephone numbers may be defined to notify the system to modify restrictions when the station user is dialing a long distance carrier. The user dials a code to access the carriers. Original restrictions re-activate after the carrier number is dialed. 4.43 There are two elements toll restriction software must verify for a user to successfully complete long distance calling: l The first five digits of the number dialed to 2-22 .’..’ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 l access the long distance special common carrier (SPCC). The total number of digits belonging to the authorization code of the SPCC. 4.52 Fill in the codes on the record sheet. must be four digits each. . 4.53 Selected stations in the alter the override code. These by Program 30. To change lected stations: Code 1: m+1iI+code 4.44 Items 3 and 5: Enter the first five digits of the SPCC telephone number in the spaces labeled SPCCl Telephone Number (item 3) or SPCCZ Telephone Number (item 5) on the record sheet. The initialized state assigns “00000” to items 3 and 5. 4.45 Items 4 and zation code digit allowed (including and 5) ranges from “00” to items 4 and sheet. Code2: They system are able to stations are defined the codes from se+I m+@li+code+$ 4.60 Program 46-2 W 4-Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes Assigned by Class 6: Enter each SPCC’s authorilength. The number of digits the first five specified in items 3 00 - 99. Initialized data assigns 6. Enter two digits on the record 4.61 Four Toll Restriction classes can be defined for the system. Each class area code provides for a different combination of restrictions. 4.46 A restricted station is not able to place a toll call through a long distance carrier by dialing the SPCCI or SPCC2 telephone number if the station is denied from that number in other toll restriction programs. Upon recognizing the first five digits dialed, Toll Restriction software is notified to allow the number of digits programmed in items 4 or 6 (00 N 99, including the first five dialed as SPCCI or 2). 4.62 This program defines the area codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction class. Area code tables for classes 1 N 4 can each describe area codes that are allowed or denied for the class. The tables (in memory) operate as allow tables. If an area code exists in a table (displays with mu), then it is allowed. Anything not displaying is not allowed. Initialized dataallows all areacodes for each class (all codes are in all tables). All allowed area codes can be displayed (11) for each class. 4.47 The system interprets data to be a sevendigit local call to an SPCC. Only five digits of the seven-digit number are entered; therefore, the last two digits are don’t care digits. Any number dialed that has the same first five digits as the carrier, the system will assume the SPCC is being called. 4.63 For each class, choose whether the record table is used to record allowed area codes in memory (ALLOWED) or denied area codes not in memory (DENIED). Enter the area codes that define the set. 4.70 Program 46-6 W 8-Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Office Codes Assigned by Class IMPORTANT NOTE: For items 4 and 6, do not enter more digits than necessary for the authorization code. If too many digits are allowed, toll restrictions may be ignored. 4.50 Program 45-8 ,- g--Toll Override Code 4.71 This program defines the office codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction Class within the home area code. Office code tables for classes 1 N 4 can each describe office codes allowed or denied for the class. The tables (in memory) operate as allow tables. If an office code exists in a table (displays with 1 i), then it is allowed. Anything not displaying js not allowed. Initialized data allows all office codes in the home area code for each class. Restriction 4.51 Two different codes may be dialed by any station user to override station-specific restrictions. 2-23 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 . LEDsll m 18: Area Code/Office Code Exception Tables 1 w 8-Select the exception 4.72 For each class, choose whether the record table is used to record allowed office codes in memory (ALLOWED) or denied office codes not in memory (DENIED). Enter the office codes that define the set. tables that apply to the class being defined by marking an X in the box. Exception tables for both area and office codes will be defined in ..>, i ’ Program 47. 4.80 Program 46-l 0 -,4O-Toll Restriction Class Parameters (Classes 1 -, 4) NOTE: Each class can be assigned any or all of the eight available office code exception tables. 4.81 This program defines parameters of each Toll Restriction class, including dialing plan restrictions and exceptions to previous restrictions. 4.90 Program 47-Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes (Table l-8) 4.82 Toll Restriction exceptions and dialing plan restrictions may be defined for each class. Program 46-10 assigns class 1 restriction exceptions and parameters; 46-20 assigns class 2; 46-30 assigns class 3; 46-40 assigns class 4. This program also relates to Program 47. See Program 47 for more explanation. 4.91 This program defines exceptions to previously defined office code restrictions for up to eight area codes, allowing six-digit toll restriction. Office codes entered in Tables 1 - 8 are opposite of what is defined for the area code by Program 46-2 -, 8. For instance, if Program 46 denies area code 714, entering office codes 530 and 555 into an exception table for area code 714 will allow those office codes. 4.83 To define the proper parameters for a Toll Restriction class, make the appropriate selections on the record sheet designated for classes 1 w 4: l LED 01: 0 Restricted-Mark an X next to LED 01 if operator or operator-assisted calls are restricted for the class being defined. 4.92 Eight exception tables are available. Each area code with exception office codes requires a table. Each table may hold up to 800 exception office codes. IMPORTANT NOTE: To allow 0 + dialing (LED 01 must be off), codes 020 - 099 must be allowed in Program 46, and digit free must be allowed in Program 48. Warning-Allowing 0 + dialing also allows operator-assisted toll calls. l l 4.93 Enter the areacode on the record sheet. and required office codes 4.100 Program 48-Station Classification Toll Restriction LED 02: 01 Restricted-Mark an X next to LED 02 if overseas operator or unassisted overseas operator calls are restricted for the class being defined. LED 03: 1+AC+555 and AC+555 Allowed- 4.101 This program assigns a combination of two restrictions to each station port defined in the system. Thefirstfeature is Digit Restriction and the second is Station Restriction Assignment. Mark an X next to LED 03 to allowthe particular class to call all restricted area codes plus the office code of 555, including out-of-area directory assistance calls. Turning the LED off does not necessarily deny information calls. This may also be accomplished in the office code table and/or the area/office code exception tables. 4.102 Digit Restrict Code: If Digit Restrict is enabled for a particular station, the station is able to dial the number of digits defined in the Program 45-l toll restriction dialing plan. l 1: Enable Digit Restriction-Enter 1 in the Digit Restrict Code column, next to the port number to enable the r$strictioti for the station. 2-24 : PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 l This is used to prevent a user from dialing a second call when dial tone is returned from a CO after the outside party disconnects. 2: Disable Digit Restriction-Enter 0 in the Digit Restrict Code column, next to the port number to disable digit restriction for the station. This allows toll restricted users to dial any number of digits (i.e., to an external voice mail device, computer, etc.). l 4.103 Station Restrict Code: The second feature assigns Toll Restriction to individual station ports, in addition to previous restrictions. It includes seven different choices. One of the choices must be entered for each port. Initialized data assigns 0 or no restrictions to all ports. The seven choices are explained as follows. l NOTE: Station restrictions are overridden by CO lines disabled as defined in Program 45-2. If a station port has appearance of a CO line with restrictions disabled, the restrictions will be removed from the station on an individual CO line basis through Program 45-Z. l l l l l 0: No Station Toll Restriction-Enter 0 in the Station Restrict Code column, next to the port number, to remove toll restrictions from the station. 1: Area CodeToll Restriction-Enter 1 in the Station Restrict Code column, next to the port number If the selected station must be restricted from dialing all area codes. station will be assigned to the Class 1 level of restriction. Class 1 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, a’nd exception office code tables in 46-10. 4: Class 2 Toll Restriction-Enter 4 in the Station Restrict Code column in the space provided for the port number, if the selected station will be assigned to the Class 2 level of restriction. Class 2 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and exception office code tables in 46-20. 5: Class 3 Toll Restriction-Enter 5 in the Station Restrict Code column in the space provided for the port number, if the selected station will be assigned to the Class 3 level of restriction. Class 3 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and exception office code tables in 46-30. 6: Class 4 Toll Restriction-Enter 6 in the Station Restrict Code column in the space provided for the port number, if the selected station will be assigned to the Class 4 level of restriction. Class 4 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and exception office code tables in 46-40. 5 LEAST COST ROUTING 5.01 The following provides the programmer an overview of the Least Cost Routing feature and step-by-step instructions to fill in the Least Cost Routing System Record Sheets. 6 LEAST COST ROUTING OVERVIEW 2: Area Code Toll Restriction and “0” or “1” as a 1st or 2nd Digit-Enter 2 in the Station 6.00 Definition Restrict Code column, in the space available for the port number, if the selected station must be restricted from dialing all area codes, and 0 or 1 when used as a first or second digit. This restriction prevents the station from making any long distance calls or operator-assisted calls, in addition to outgoing calls outside the home area code. In applicable areas, this prevents long distance office codes from being dialed (if l+NNX). 3: Class 1 Toll Restriction-Enter 3 in the Station Restrict Code column in the space provided for the port number, if the selected 6.01 The Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature enables the system to automatically route each outgoing voice and data call over common carriers and selected CO lines. The customer chooses these lines for the specific time of day, and for system users with varying priorities. If the system is programmed properly, LCR can select the most economical route, helping save money. If the best routes are unavailable, users with priority can access more expensive outgoing routes. Several elements of LCR must be defined in programming. 2-25 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 User dials telephone number (see note). 1 System analyzes telephone number, and checks it against most Program 50 options. * LCR Parameters (50-l) * LCR Special Codes (50-31 - 35) * LCR Long Distance Information Plan Number (50-4) . LCR Local Call Plan Number (50-5) * LCR Dial Zero Time Out (50-6) NOTE: If the telephone number is restricted by system Toll Restriction, the caller will receive busy tone and LCR will be canceled immediately. System checks be set properly the time of day. (This must by station port 00.) 1 TN0 c Selects System searches all office code exception tables entered into LCR plans 1 - 8 with Program 52. the appropriate Determines as specified schedule (1, 2 or 3) the station’s group assignment in Program 56. Within the Selects the route definition as defined by Program 54 for the CO line group (Program 16), and activates the modified digits table instructions defined through Program 55. The system selects the first available route definition (Ist, 2nd, 3rd or 4th choice) that represents both CO line group and modified digits table. if it is an area code or an office code. f I I Verifies the CO line access, as defined by Program 40. Within a CO line group, the system checks to see if access is allowed System checks all area code tables entered into the LCR plans 1 - 8 through Program 51. (I.! NO System selects Call not completed. a CO line and dials number. i (CALL COMPLETED) FIGUREP-l-LCROPERATIONALBLOCKDIAGRAM 2-26 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTlON200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 NOTE: For LCR to function properly, must be created in Program strictions set in Programs 40 area dialing plan assigned in 6.10 LCR Schedule Assignments: Call routing plans 1 N 8 can send the outgoing calls of different groups of stations according to a time Schedule, and call route definitions. CO line groups 16; CO line reand 41; and the Program 45- 1. 6.11 LCR Route Definitions: Groups of CO lines 6.02 LCR General Parameters: Enables features including a warning tone for last choice route number, a comfort dial tone during LCR processing, and the Long Distance Information dialing plan. assigned to special common carriers, foreign exchange lines, or other special services can be specified as call routes. 6.12 LCR Modified Digit Assignments: Carrier codes can be programmed to dial automatically when a call is placed over the appropriate route. Digits can be added to the front or back of special common carrier codes or other access numbers to make placing calls an invisible process for the user. Digits may also be deleted from the front of the dialed number. 6.03 LCR Home Area Code: Notifies LCR software of the area code of the installation site. 6.04 LCR Special Codes: Notifies LCR of special emergency and operator codes that will be automatically routed as a local call, without unnecessary delay. 6.13 LCR Station Access Priority Assignments: 6.05 Long Distance Information Plan Number: Notifies LCR software information call. Each station port defined in the system may be assigned to one of four station priority groups. The groups can have varying access to the defined call routes at different times of day. Each group is partitioned from the other groups. how to route a long distance 6.06 Local Call Plan Number: Notifies software designed 6.07 LCR which call routing plan is specifically to handle local and special calls. 6.20 Conditions LCR Timeout after 0 (Zero) is Dialed: 6.21 A number of conditions apply to LCR assignment. Asummaryof each is listed here. Paragraph 7, Completing the Least Cost Routing Record Sheets, gives more detailed explanations and examples of how the conditions relate to the programming process. Notifies the system of the time delay to the user after dialing a 0, before a regular operator is accessed. 6.08 LCR Area Codes: As many as eight separate area code tables can be defined; one for each available call routing plan. Each table defines the area codes that are handled by the particular routing plan. 6.22 If a station has direct CO appearances, or pooled CO line buttons programmed to allow direct outgoing line access, LCR will be bypassed using the pooled line or a CO line button. 6.09 LCR Office Code Exceptions for Area Codes: As many as eight LCR office code 6.23 LCR accommodates special code dialing, such as 911 for emergency response, l-411 or 411 for information, or 800 area code toll-free numbers. These calls can be directed to the local call route. Examples are given in Paragraph 4 (see exception tables may be defined to inform LCR software how to handle specific office codes within area codes. According to the tables defined, specific exception office codes can be routed through a different call plan than the overall area code plan. Program 50-31 - 35). 2-27 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 IMPORTANT NOTE: Always provide emergency service access for numbers such as 911. assigned to groups 81 - 88. Refer to the completed record sheet in Program 16 for this . information. 6.24 Basic System Record programs related to LCR include: Program 16 defines which outgoing CO lines are assigned to CO line groups 81 - 88. Program 40 denies a station complete CO line access. This also applies to LCR. Program 41 restricts outgoing CO line calls to selected stations. These stations may make outgoing calls through LCR. In this Program, Release 1 software denies ABR; Release 2 and above software allows ABR. 2) Under ments,” carrier group, to 818 the column labeled “CO Line Type/Cornenter the service type, the common name, or the line type for each line e.g., local line, Foreign Exchange (FX) (LA), WATS (out of state), etc. 3) Refer to Basic System Record, Program 40, to restrict stations from incoming and outgoing access of CO lines, including using LCR. All stations that must use LCR to make outgoing calls must NOT be restricted in this program. These restrictions do apply to LCR. 7 COMPLETING THE LEAST COST ROUTING SYSTEM RECORD 4) Refer to Basic System Record, Program 41, to restrict stations from accessing outgoing CO lines, except through LCR. All stations that must use LCR for outgoing calls must be restricted from CO line access in this program. NOTE: All stations using LCR should be ALLOWED CO line access in Program 40, and DENIED CO line access in Program 41. 7.20 Program 50 Series-LCR 7.01 The following instructions explain completion of the System Record Sheets used to program LCR. Instructions are arranged in the same order as data tables in the Least Cost Routing System Recordand the programming instruction tables in Chapter 3. The instructions are intended to give a concise, general definition of LCR characteristics defined by each record sheet. 7.21 Program Parameters: program defines general operating LC R software. parameters This for NOTE: Mark an X in the column to indicate which programming button LEDs should be lit. Initialized data leaves all L EDs OFF. NOTES: 1. On each record sheet, enter required data in the space provided to make a selection, unless otherwise specified. 2. The initialized state and considerations are documented on the record sheet. 7.10 LCR CO Line Programming Table 50-I-LCR Definitions LED Key 01 ON: LCR software is enabled system-wide. OFF: LCR software is disabled. None of the LCR programming referred to by this section is recognized. Dial 9 access assigned in Program 16 is enabled. Reference LED Key 02 7.11 This table is intended l for reference only. Information relevant to LCR is compiled here from Basic System Programming. Not used. LED Key 03 l 1) Under the column labeled “CO Lines in Group (01 - 36),” enter the numbers of the CO lines ON: LCR routes long distance (LDI) calls over the plan number Program 50-4. 2-28 information specified in PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 l OFF: LCR routes LDI calls using area codes 7.23 Programs 50-31 m35-LCR Special Codes: specified in route plans 1 -8, as it would for any other call. Five Special Codes may be entered in spaces provided next to 31 - 35. The codes may be a maximum of four digits, and should include items such as 911 for emergency calls, and 411 or I-411 for local information, etc. Initialized data leaves all codes blank. l When any of these codes are dialed, LCR is flagged to treat the call as follows: l The call will be sent over the local call route plan specified in Program 50-5. l No additional digits need to be dialed. They are not necessary. Therefore, the call is put through immediately. LED Key 04 l l ON: Station users hear a simulated dial tone immediately after dialing the access LCR code (typically 9), until the first digit of the phone number is dialed. The dial tone is simulated to assure the user of the system’s proper operation, but it is not a functional dial tone. OFF: Station users hear nothing after dialing the LCR access code until the destination rings or issues a busy signal. 7.24 Program 50-4-LCR Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number: Enter the number of LED Key 05 l l ON: The user is notified with a warning tone to indicate that LCR has routed the call over the least desirable route number. The most expensive route is typically programmed to be the least desirable. A user has three choices upon hearing the warning tone: a) Ignore the tone, LCR places the call using the least desirable route. b) Hang up and try later to save money. c) Activate the Automatic Call Back feature. The appropriate CO line group calls the user back when a more desirable route number becomes available. OFF: No warning tone sounds. 7.22 Program 50-2-LCR the LCR route plan (1 - 8) over which long distance information calls will be routed. Typically, long distance information calls are routed over the local call route defined in Program 50-5. If the long distance information plan is chosen in Program 50-l) the call is routed as defined by this table. Initialized data assigns plan 8 to be the LDI route plan. 7.25 Program 50-5-LCR Local Call Plan Number: Of the eight route plans available for LCR call processing, one must be defined as the Local Call Plan, typically route plan 1. Enter the number of the plan (1 - 8) over which local calls, operatorassisted/O+ calls, and special code calls will be routed. Home Area Code: Enter the local areacode in the spaces provided on the record sheet. Initialized data leaves the home area code blank. l LCR matches the area code entered here with the LCR route plan containing the home area code in its Area Code Table (the home area code is later entered into one of the eight available LCR route plans through Program 51). Thus, LCR is informed of how to handle local calls. l Typically, systems are configured to have the LCR route plan containing the home area code as the same as the local route plan defined in Program 50-5. This is typically programmed by the installer to be route plan number 1, rather than the default plan 8. 7.26 Program 50-6-LCR Dial 0 (Zero) Timeout: Enter the maximum number of seconds LCR waits for a user to dial additional digits after a 0, before it routes the call to an operator for assistance. LCR will wait this number of seconds to receive additional digits that will indicate charge calls, collect calls or other 0+ calls. l The allowed range is 04 - IO seconds. Always enter two digits. Initialized data assigns an LCR dial zero time-out value of 06 seconds. 7.30 Route Plan Overview 7.31 2-29 Four groups of programs define eight sepa- PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 rate LCR route plans. They are Programs 51 w54. The purpose of the plan scheme is to provide the system with directions for routing all possible calls, made by all possible users at all possible times of day. Eight separate plans provide the customer flexibility enough to route different area codes and exception officecodes over different CO linegroups. its Area Code Table.The home area code must be entered into one of the eight available LCR route plans through Program 31). Thus, LCR is informed of how to handle local calls. Typically, systems are configured to have the LCR route plan containing the home area code as the same as the local route plan defined in Program 50-5. This usually is programmed by the installer to be route plan number I, rather than the default plan 8. 7.32 Initialized data assigns all calls to plan eight. Any assignments made in Programs 51 w 54 for plans 1 - 7 will exempt the defined call from being made on route plan 8. Likewise, any phone number not specified in routes 1 - 7 automatically defaults to route plan 8. 7.35 Program 52-LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code: The purpose of the Office Code Exception Table is to enable the customer the flexibility of routing specific office codes through a different call plan than other office codes used with that area code. l Eight LCR office code exception tables may be defined for the overall LCR scheme. Any number of exception code tables may be assigned to each route plan, although each exception table may only be used once system-wide. l Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of area codes and office code exceptions or a set of office code exceptions. l This program applies to both examples listed below. In the first case, an office code exception table does not need to be defined in addition to the area codes in Program 51, but it may. In the second case, the plan may only pertain to exception office codes for certain area codes. 7.33 Tables for Programs 51- 54 appear on LCR Route Plan Numbers 1 - 8. The following instructions reveal how to fill in individual tables within the plans. Each of the following program tables must be completed for all plans. 7.34 Program 51- LCR Area Code Tables: Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of area codes and/or office codes. l The purpose of Program 51 is to define which area code calls are placed over which LCR Plan Number (1 - 8). Initialized data assigns all possible area codes (000 - 999) to LCR Plan 8. Therefore, calls made to all area codes will be routed over route definitions defined in Program 54 for plan 8, following the time schedule specified by Program 53 for plan 8 (unless other assignments are made in plans 1 - 7). l For example, any area code entered in a Program 51 LCR area code table for plans 1 7 is subtracted from plan 8. An area code cannot be lost. If it is subsequently deleted from plans 1 - 7, LCR software automatically adds it to plan 8. l To fill in record sheets for plans 1 - 8: l Check the box by Area Code Table. l Enter the applicable area codes, three digits per box. Example l-In the first example, office code exception tables will be defined to the area code table. Use the continuation sheet to define the exception office codes. As many as eight of the office code exception tables may be linked to a plan, but each exception table may only be used once. When using the continuation sheet, be sure that the same exception table is not assigned to more than one plan. l Turn to the continuation sheet (that follows plan 8 record sheet). l Determine the plan number where the exception office codes will be rooted. l Fill in the area code of the exception office codes in the spaces provided by the correct plan number. These office codes will NOTE: Remember that LCR matches the home area code entered in Program 50-Z with the LCR route p/an containing the home area code in 2-30 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SiCTlON 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 l be routed differently than the overall area code. Enter the specific office codes that are to be routed differently. l Example 2-m the second example, the route plan only applies to office code exceptions. The first office code exception table may be documented on the LCR Plan record sheet: l Check the box on the record sheet next to Office Code Exception Table number. l Enter the number of the exception table (1 - 8). Make sure this table number is not entered on any other plan, or on the continuation sheet. l Enter the applicable area code. l Enter the specific office codes that are to be routed differently than the area code. l l The order in which the route definitions are entered defines the order of LCR line selection. The most desirable route should be entered in the leftmost position, and the least desirable route in the rightmost position. If “1” is assigned to Station Group 1, and 1 for route definition only, then those assigned will only be able to use route definition 1, thereby restricting them during times that route definition 1 is not allowed. Keep in mind that the route definition number is being entered, not the CO line group number. The definitions are assigned in Program 54. Installation requiring timeschedulingfeatureWhen an installation requires the time scheduling feature to be programmed, three “shifts” of route definitions can be assigned per station group. To reflect this on the record sheet, substitute step 1 of the procedure described for the typical customer with the following: 7.36 Program 53-LCR Schedule Assignments: This program assigns up to three time schedules to each plan. Each time schedule consists of four different route definition choices (defined in Program 54) available to the four station groups (defined in Program 56). It may be helpful to complete Program 54 portions of the plans and Program 56 before proceeding. 1: Enter the Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1,2 and 3. Use military time, in the format HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). Fill in all four digits. Initialized data l Start time schedule l Start time schedule l Start time schedule Typical Installation without time scheduling feature-In most cases, an installation will not require use of the time schedule feature. To reflect this on the record sheets for plans 1 - 8: 1: Enter the same Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1 and 2. Use military time, in the assigns “0000” to all times. for schedule 2 is the stop time for 1. for schedule 3 is the stop time for 2. for schedule 1 is the stop time for 3. 7.37 Program 54-LCR Route Definition: The purpose of this program is to define four different ways of routing calls for each of the eight LCR plans. Define each route by selecting and entering: format HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). Fill in all four digits. Initialized data assigns “0000” to all times. l If LCR software sees schedules 1 and 2 have the same start times, then it only looks at schedule 1 for route definitions. 1: CO Line Group (1 - 8): Refer to the LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table completed at the beginning of the LCR record sheets. l Each CO line group represents a type of service, e.g., special common carrier, foreign exchange, local line group, etc. l Program 16 assigns CO lines to CO line groups 1 - 8 (81 ‘- 88). l Program 40 denies incoming and outgo- 2: Enter Route Definition Numbers for Schedules 1 and 2. Four definitions may be entered for each group. l LCR Station (Class) Groups 1 - 4 are assigned in Program 56. l LCR Route Definition numbers I- 4 are defined in Program 54. 2-31 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 l ing CO line access to stations, including LCR access. Program 41 allows CO line access to stations using LCR only for outgoing calls when enabled. l l 2: Modified Digits Table (1 W 6): Refer to Programs 55-0, 55-l and 55-2. The system handles CO line groups differently, according to which modified digits table was assigned in 7.45 Program 55-2-LCR Modified Digits-Add to End of Dialed Number: Enter the digits that Program 54. 7.40 Program 55 Series-LCR Tables Length of pause can be indicated by using codes (Pl N P8) specified in the Pause Entry ReferenceTable. Each pause takes ttio digits of memory space. Try to allow for the longest wait, e.g., make the pause longer, rather than shorter, to accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to access the service tones, etc. must be added to the end of the number dialed in the Add Digits Table. The maximum quantity of digits is 22, including pauses. l Length of pause can be indicated by using codes (PI N P8) specified in the Pause Entry Reference Table. Each pause takes two digits of memory space. l Try to allow for the longest wait, e.g., make the pause longer, rather than shorter, to accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to access the service tones, etc. Modified Digits 7.41 This program defines six modified digits tables for LCR call handling. Each modified digits table assigns editing steps that include: l Deleting a pre-defined quantity of digits from the front of the number dialed (Program 55-O). l Adding a pre-defined number to the front of the number dialed (Program 55-l). l Adding a pre-defined number to the end of the number dialed (Program 55-2). 7.46 Program 56-LCR Station Group Assignment: The purpose of this program is to assign all 7.42 The purpose of this program is to define call handling so the route definition used by LCR is invisible to the station user. The station user handles all calls the same way. The goal is for LCR to remember the dialing peculiarities of each call route, so the user doesn’t need to know. defined station ports to one of four LCR Station Groups. l Station groups are completely independent of one another. Therefore, each station group must be defined separately. l Software does not automatically assign the highest, all-inclusive routing priority to class 1 stations, making all routes available to class 2, 3 and 4 stations available to class 1 as well. l Instead, stations are assigned to independent groups (partitioned). Completely flexible assignment of routing definitions to groups is allowed, with no one group’s definition affecting another’s, Each group’s route definitions are specified to activate separately according to the time schedules set by Program 53. 7.43 Program 55-O-LCR Modified Digits-Delete: Enter the Quantity of Digits that should be deleted from the front of the numberdialedfor each of the six Table Numbers in the Delete Digits Table. The maximum number is ten. Always make the entry two digits. 7.44 Program 55-l -LCR Modified Digits-Add to Front of Dialed Number: Enter the digits that must be added to the front of the number dialed in the Add Digits Table. The maximum quantity of digits is 22, including pauses. 1: Enter the station group number next to the port number. 2-32 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTlON200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 SYSTEM RECORD SHEETS RELEASE 1,2, and 3 2-33 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES: These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation. 1. Set PCTU jumper plug for BATTERY OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed customer data will be lost on power down. 2. Place PEP& PIOU, or PIOUS PCB in highest slot number of KSU. 3. Place all other PCBs in KSU from lowest slot number to highest in the following order: PCTU or PCTUS (always Slot 00) PEKU or PDKU (starting at Slot 01) I PESU (Release 2 and above) PSTU PCOU PEMU 4. Run Program 90. Initialize Programs 00 - 97, and turn power OFF for five seconds, then turn power back ON. 5. Run Program 92. 6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming power OFF for five seconds, then turn power back ON. mode, and turn WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs: 1. Move PEMU PCBs to a higher slot number to create empty slots for additions. 2. Install new PCBs and reprogram with Program 03. Change PEMU station and CO line numbers or reassign stations. 3. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions. 2-34 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 STRATADKSOFTWARERELEASES Software Guide: This is a reference guide that provides updated information the STRATA Digital Key (DK) System. DKSoftware Identification: The DKoperating regarding software enhancenients to software is stored on Read Only Memory (ROM) chips and is identified by ROM Version. There are four ROM chips in a DK ROM set, which are installed on a processor control circuit PCB. There are four versions of PCTU: PCTU3 is the Release 3 version; PCTU2 is the Release 2 version and PCTUS is the Release 2 version for use with DK24 only; PCTUl is the first released version. PCTUI can be upgraded to PCTU2 by changing PROMS supplied in the Toshiba PURR2 upgrade kit. All PCTUS PCBs, used in STRATA DK24, contain Release 2 version software. PCTUI, PCTU2, and PCTUS cannot be upgraded to PCTU3, Release 3. The ROM version may be displayed by running Program 00-O from the local programming telephone or remote programming terminal. The ROM version is also printed on the label attached to each of the four ROM chips in a set. The last two or three characters on the label identify the ROM version: e.g., 2K, lG, etc. as shown below: ROM LABEL, PCTU(l and 2) TYPE I I - q cm L1 L$ ifl L ROM LABEL, PCTUS TYPE I 1 P ) 0 Em L L IDENTIFIES ROM VERSION IDENTIFIES PCTU IC SOCKET THAT HOLDS ROM: 9 = IC9 O=ICiO 3=IC13 4 = IC14 ~ INDICATES THAT ROM IS FOR PCTU (1 or 2) + L L IDENTIFIES ROM VERSION ROM LABEL, PCTU(3) TYPE I I PI CF - L fl-iflcllxl IDENTIFIES PCTU IC SOCKET THAT HOLDS ROM: 9 = IC9 0 = IClO 4 = lC14 5 = IC15 INDICATES THAT ROM IS FOR PCTUS L I-- IDENTIFIES ROM VERSION IDENTIFIES PCTU IC SOCKET THAT HOLDS ROM: 9 = IC9 O=IClO 3=IC13 4 = ICI4 INDICATES THAT ROM IS FOR PCTU3 IMPORTANT NOTE: PCTU(1 and 2) ROM (PCA), PCTUS ROM (PCD), and PCTU(3) ROM (PCM) are not interchangeable. System Record Sheets: The same System Record Sheets are used for a// STRATA DK models and are updated with each DK software release. Each updated and new record sheet will be dated when released and may be inserted in the original document to replace the outdated record sheet (the record sheets released with the original PCA2K software are dated June 1989). On the record sheets, the letters “R2” note options available with Release 2 and above only (see the software guide for the R2 option list). All program options that are not noted with “R2”are available with a//STRATA DK software. The letters “R3” note options available with Release 3 software only (see the software guide for the’R3 option- list). All program options available with “R2” are also available with Release 3 software. 2-35 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 RELEASE2(R2)SOFTWAREGUlDE With the exception of Busy and Group Station LCD Messaging, all items available with RI software are available with R2 software; items listed below are available with R2 software and above only. Item Description *Related Programs Comments PESU PCB OJ, Code 25 and 26 Station PCB, supports 2 standard telephones, 4 electronic telephones BGM/MOH separation 10-2, key/LED 09 Separates music-on-hold and background music; 2 music sources required HDCB, door lock option 39, Code 72,73,74,75 77-2, key/LED 4, 8, 12, 16 Allows HDCB, port B, to be optioned as a door lock control; 4 maximum Release key 39, Code 76 Provides more efficient way of releasing calls (headset or handset) SMDR, print toll only 60-5 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 -I Allows system SMDR to send SMDR data for long distance calls only Pickup code to selectively pickup CO lines on-hold None Provides the call park/page for pickup function for outside call DISA - same as DISC but allows access to outgoing CO line 60-6 = security code Port 99 = COS class 78 - assigns DISA CO lines DISA code must be entered to call out on CO lines via DISA (optional). 4-minute disconnect timer (reset-dial “0”). DISA security code change from station -30, key/LED 10 Allows stations designated to change the DISA code Call forward busy, no answer, busy/no answer 39 - codes: 57 = BNA/604 58 = NAl603 59 = BSYI602 Calls forward if station is busy, does not answer, or busy/no answer FIXED call forward displays on LCD -36 LCD displays that phone has fixed call forward set 2 CO line conference telephone 10-I and 15-5 Allows a standard telephone conference with 2 CO lines Distinctive ringing for CO/lnt to standard telephone 10-2, key/LED 07 on Standard telephone ringing pattern is different between intercom and CO line call “NAME” display on LCD None Called LCD displays name/number of calling station Auto-preference and pooled line seizure operate like STRATA e None Changes off-hook and pooled line operation to allow fast release/seize DSS transfers call when answering another call-like STRATA, None CO lines ring transfer automatically pressing another CO line key- with standard *All program numbers are underlined in this column. 2-36 in programming to set up a when ‘-3, -*’ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 RELEASE2(R2)SOFTWAREGUlDE (continued) With the exception of Busy and Group Station LCD Messaging, all items available with RI software are available with R2 software; items listed below are available with R2 software and abbvi! only. Item Description *Related Programs Comments 80/160 DTMF optionfor VM ID Codes 1 o-2 Allows Voice Mail auto digits to be sent at 80 or160ms Immediate drop when Toll Restricted digits are recognized None Call drops as soon as a restrictednumber sequence is detected CO line, incoming ring detector time change: (120/223 ms) 10-1, key 18 Changes CO ringing detect time to eliminate false ring-ins from some COs ABR overrides Program 41 None Allows ABR to function with all LCR program configurations Change RM prompt from DKTS Version 1 .O to DK Connect None Changes Remote Maintenance prompt to verify that IMDU connection is made Message waiting cancel from voice mail port only by: Dial 64 and station number 10-2, key/LED 4 Deletes auto-cancel of MW LED when VM answers a call from a station that has MW LED from voice mail Operation change when sending “D” tone to VM None Prevents disconnects when VM device does not recognize “D” tone to drop connection Ring detect time option 10-J, key/LED 18 Ring detect time INITIALIZES TO NORMAL to eliminate CO line false rings Two-CO line via access code or LCR None Allows two-CO line conference to be set up from electronic and standard telephones via 81 - 88,701 - 736, and LCR dial 9 DTMF tone return l Manual dialing l Voice mail I.D. auto digits (dial codes 656 and 657) 10-2, key/LED II Deletes DTMF tone returned to electronic telephones when manual dialing and speed dialing; deletes DTMF tones from callers when the called station forwards the call to voice mail. DTMF digits are still sent out to CO line and voice mail ports. l Speed dialing Call forward backup memory 92-J key/LED 03 and 04 Clears call forward backup memory when system is first initialized Call forward memory save None Station call forward information is retained during system power down; when power is returned, stations will forward as before power loss. CO line reseize guard time option lx, key/LED 02 42-0, key/LED 01 - 36 Allows CO line reseize guard time to be changedfrom 0.45 seconds to 1.5 seconds to meet central office and CENTREX seize/ hookflash timing requirements *All program numbers are underlined in this column. 2-37 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTlONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 RELEASE3(R3)SOFTWAREGUlDE All items available with RI and R2 software are available with R3 software; items listed below are available with R3 software only. *Related Item Description Night ringing over selected page zones Digital telephone initialization volume level Programs 77-1, key/LEDs B,i -3 92-5, keys/LEDs Comments 10 - 13 Allows CO lines to ring over selected PIOU page zones. CO lines can be placed into two groups (tenant 1 and tenant 2), and each group can be assigned to night ring over different PIOU paging zones. 01 and 05 Sets digital telephone volume levels to their initialized settings: ring, busy override, Intercom (muted) ring, speaker, and BGM. Digital telephone handset receive volume level set for individual telephones 30, keys/LEDsl2 and 13 Initialize data is Level 3. Allows the initial off-hook volume level to be set individually for each digital telephone. The setable range is from level 2 to 5 (5 = loudest). The digital telephone can be manually adjusted using the volume control for each call over the full range of 1 to 9. Privacy button 3, Code 53 Allows non-private stations to deny privacyoverride to other stations when privacy button is activated. This prevents overrride calls by pressing common CO line button appearances. Busy and group station LCD station messaging which is available in RI, but not R2, is available in R3 None Busy station messaging: Allows an LCD message to be sent (live) to a busy LCD station. Group station messaging: Allows an LCD station to set a “called or calling station message” for another station or a group of stations. “O+” credit card calls that bypass toll restriction but do not allow operator placed calls 43 _ and -60-7 Selected stations can be configured in programming to be allowed “O+” dialing which will override toll restriction on selected CO lines or all CO lines. If a station does not dial a programmable number of digits after dialing “O”, the call will be disconnected after 10 seconds. Data Interface Station Hunting -22 Allows data calls to busy data stations to hunt to an idle data station. This program is separate from voice call hunting, Program 33. Voice and data calls to the same station can hunt to different stations. *All program in this column. numbers are underlined 2-38 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 RELEASE3 (R3) SOFTWARE GUIDE (continued) All items available with RI and R2 software are available with R3 software; items listed below are available with R3 software only. Item Description *Related Programs Comments PDKU PCB OJ, Code 62 and 64 Station PCB, supports 8 Toshiba digital telephones (DKT) or 7 DKTs and one digital, direct station selection console (DDSS). Also supports up to 8 stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-DS) and DKT integrated data interface units (PDIU-DI). Bell Precise Busy Tone cadence is sent from STRATA DK to outside callers that dial busy numbers when calling into DK on TIE, DISC, or DISA CO lines 10-2, key/LED 05 Allows STRATA DK busy tone cadence to be changed from 0.25 seconds on/off to 0.5 seconds on/off. For busy TIE line or DISCYDISA calls. Automatic release of Voice Mail ports when outside caller hangs up 15, Code 0 Selected CO lines will detect the Automatic Release (AR) signal (calling party control) if sent from the CO line when the calling party hangs-up on a voice mail call. This prompts “D” tone to be sent to the PSTU or PESU voice mail port causing the voice mail machine to release. AR can be detected between voice mail answer and hookflash to transfer. Verifiable account codes 70 3, key/LED 14 69, 60-4, 15-7 Verified Account Code with Toll Restriction class assignments. Up to 300 verifiable account codes (4 u 15 digits) can be set in system programming. Voice mail (VM) to VM call blocking 3-J, key/LED 4 Prevents VM ports from call forwarding or hunting to other VM ports during screened or supervised VM transfers. Switched Data: Simultaneous voice/data over a single wire pair via DKT with an integrated data interface unit (PDIU-DI) Modem pooling and printer sharing using a stand-alone data interface unit (PDIU-DS) Data security group 1 m 4 20, key/LEDs 01 w 05 Allows digital telephones with DlUs connected to personal computers to make data calls internal to other DKT/DIUs with PC for file transfers, etc. Allows DKTs with DlUs to make external data calls over the public telephone network automatically via modems connected to stand-alone DIN specially programmed to auto-connect in customer configuration programming. l l h button, Code 56 -1 key, Code 54 Dra button, Code 55 21, 22 l 2J, key/LEDs *All program 17 u 20 numbers are underlined in this column. 2-39 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 RELEASE3 (R3) SOFTWARE GUIDE (continued) All items available with RI and R2 software are available with R3 software; items listed below are available with R3 software only. Item Description *Related Programs Comments Emergency number override of verified/forced account code 44A (51 - 53) - Allows up to three emergency numbers (911, etc.) to be programmed to bypass the forced (verified or nonverified) account code dialing requirement. Traveling class of service 44B (1 - 4) - This feature allows a toll restriction override code to be assigned to each station class (class 1 - 4). When the toll restriction override code is dialed from a telephone, the telephone will assume the class the code is assigned to until the call is complete. The telephone will return to its normal class when the call is complete. B 39, Code 50 Flexible button, allows voluntary codes to be entered anytime interrupting existing conversations. Amplified Conference (External) 10-1, LEDs 01 - 04 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19 10-3 Allows up to four customer-supplied amplifiers to be connected to selected system PEKU ports. The amplifiers automatically switch into two CO line (Tandem) and two CO line/station conference calls. The amplifiers increase the transmission volume level that is typically degraded because of added telephone network losses during two CO line calls. Two line DISA and TIE line calls are also amplified. Flexible BGM connection 12, IO-3 Allows alternate BGM source and external page output connection to any slot with a PEKU or PESU installed. *All program button numbers are underlined in this column. 2-40 account without PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM NUMBER INDEX . FEATURE OR TOPIC PROGRAM NO. FEATURE Account Codes 70, 39, 69,15, 30, 60 39 Alarm Sensor All Call Voice Page 05, IO-2,31,39 Alternate Point Answer 10-l 10-2, IO-3 Amplified Conference (External) Automatic Busy Redial IO-I, 16,30, 39 0539, 10-2 Automatic Callback Automatic Hold Recall 34 Automatic Preference 32 15 Automatic Release Hold/VM Port 05, 10-2, 19, 39 Background Music Busy Override 05 10-2 Busy Tone Cadence Change Call Blocking (VM Ports) 31 lo-2,36,39 Call Forwarding (all types) Call Pickup lo-1,15,39 Call Transfer with Camp-on 10-l Camp-on lo-1,37 42-0,42-l - 8 Centrex/PBX Compatible Centrex Ringing Repeat 10-l 39, 42-0, 42-l - 8 CO/Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons CO Line Access 39, 40, 41 CO Line Alpha Identification 93 16 CO Line Groups 10-1,42-O CO Line Reseize Guard Time CO Line Queuing 05,16 78,81 - 89 CO Line Ringing Conferencing IO-i,15 43, 60-7 Credit Card Calls (0 + dialing) Data Port/DIU Configuration 20,21,22, 39 DAY/NIGHT Mode 10-2, 78, 81 m 89 Delayed Ringing 82, 83, 85, 86,88, 89 Digital Telephone 03,30,38, 92-5 Direct Inward Station Calling (DISC) 78 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 15, 1 O-l, 60, 78 29-l u 29-4, 39 Direct Station Selection Buttons Distinctive Station Ringing IO-2,80 Do Not Disturb 05,39 Do Not Disturb Override 05,30 Door Lock Control 39, 77-1, 77-2 05, 77-1, 77-2, 79 Door Phones OR TOPIC PROGRAM NO. DSS Console Features 03,28,29-l m 29-4,10-2 DSS EKT 39 DTMF and Dial Pulse Assignments 10-1, 15, 30, 39 DTMF Receiver (CRCU) Operation 03, 12, 15 DTMF Signal Time, CO lines (80/l 60 ms) 10-l DTMF Signal Time, VM Ports (80/160 ms) IO-2 DTMF Tone Return IO-2 Emergency Numbers 44A Exclusive Hold 10-l Executive Override 05,10-2, 30 External Page Interface 10-2, 77-1, 78 External Zone Paging 05, 77-1 Fixed Call Forwarding 36,39 Flash Timing 12 Flexible Access Code Numbering 05 Flexible Button Assignments 38,39 Flexible Intercom Numbering 04, 05, 39 Flexible Line Ringing Assignment 81 - 89 Flexible PCB Slot Configuration 03 Forced and Voluntary Account Codes 15, 30, 60, 39 Group Paging 05,31 Handsfree Answerback 17,31 Hold/Park Recall Timing 34 Initialization (system programs) 90 Initialization (system/personal memory) 92 Intercom Access 39 Least Cost Routing 50- 56 Liquid Crystal Display Features 10-2, 35, 39 Message Center 13 Message Waiting/Flash 12, 35, 39 Microphone Control 30,39 Modem Pool Port Assignment 21 Music-on-Hold 77-l Night Pickup Code 05 Night Ringing over External Page 15, 77-1, 78 Night Transfer 29, 39, 77-1, 78 Off-hook Call Announce 03, 30, 31 On-hook Dialing 32 Outgoing Call Restriction 41 I Paging-EKT 31,39 Passwords-Remote Programming 00 2-41 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM NUMBER INDEX (continued) FEATURE OR TOPIC Pause Timing PBX Access Code PBX Backup Pooled CO Lines Pooled Line Buttons Port/Station Number Assignment Privacy/Non-Privacy Privacy Override Private CO Lines Redial Last Number Relay Service Remote Administration and Maintenance Repeat Last Number Dialed Ringing Line Preference Saved Number Redial Security Code (DISA) Security Code (R. Maintenance) Slot Assignment Speakerphone Assignment PROGRAM NO. FEATURE OR TOPIC PROGRAM NO. Speed Dial lo-1,30, 39 Speed Dial Clear 92 42-O Standard Telephone Ringing Options IO-2 16,39 Station Class of Service 30,31, 35 16,39 Station Hunting (Data Calls) 22 04 Station Hunting (Voice Calls) 33 31,30,39 Station Message Detail Recording 60,97 lo-2,30,31 Tandem CO Line Connections IO-l, 15 39 Tenant Service 15,39 39 TIE Lines 03,17 77-l Toll Restriction 10,30,41 -48 Toll Restriction Override lo-1,30, 39 00, 77-1,78 Toll Restriction Override Code Revision 30 30,39 Transfer Privacy 10-l 32,81 - 89 Traveling Class 44B 39 Verifiable Account Codes 15,30,60,69, 70 30,60 Voice Mail Interface lo-2,31,39 00 Voice or Tone Signaling 05,10-l, lO-2 03 Volume Reset (Digital Telephones) 92-9 30 Voluntary Account Codes 39 12,39 42-l m 42-8 2-42 I I ( PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE2-A PROGRAMS00-97INNUMERlCALORDERWlTHSECTlONSCROSS-REFERENCED Title Program Number 00 (Applicable Sections) Software Check/Remote Assignments Password Flexible 29-2 Port/Station 29-3 29-4 30 System Assignments, 31 System Assignments, Part Two of Two (Basic System) I 10-3 Amplified (External) - Basic Timing (Basic System) 13 Defining Center (Basic System) 15 Assigning Individual Assigning 81 w 88) 36 37 TIE Line Page/Handsfree Answerback Data Interface Unit (DIU: PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS) Configuration Modem 38 39 Station 4 Station Class of Service Station Class of Service Automatic Preference Station Hunting (Voice Calls) Hold Recall Timing Station Class of Service Fixed Call Forward Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time Electronic and Digital Telephone Buttonstrip Type Assignment Station CO Line Access Station Outgoing Call Restriction (Basic System) CO Line to PBX Connection (Basic Sys tern) (Data Calls) DSS Console, Attendant Telephone Assignments Flexible Buttonstrip (Basic System) 42-O 42-l -8 (Basic System) 28 40 Pool Port Assignments Hunting DSS Console (Basic System) 41 (Basic System) 22 DSS Button Assignment, (Basic System) Alternate Background Music (BGM) Source Slot Assignment (Basic System) 21 3 (Basic System) (Basic System) 20 DSS Console (Basic System) CO Line Groups (Dial 9 or (Basic System) 19 DSS Button Assignment, (Basic System) (Basic System) 17 2 (Basic System) 35 DP/DTMF, Tenant Service to CO Lines (Basic System) 16 DSS Console (Basic System) 34 the Message DSS Button Assignment, (Basic System) 33 System Assignments 1 (Basic System) 32 Conference (Basic System) 12 DSS Console (Basic System) Part One of Two (Basic System) 1 o-2 DSS Button Assignment, (Basic Sys tern) Flexible Access Code Numbering (Basic System) 1 O-l Sections) (Basic System) Number Assignment (Basic System) 05 (Applicable (Basic System) PCB Slot Assignments (Basic System) 04 29-l Title (Basic System) (Basic System) 03 Program Number PBX Access Code (Basic System) Electronic 43 0+ Credit Card Dialing Option (Basic Sys tern) (Basic System) 2-43 I I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE 2-A PROGRAMS 00 - 97 IN NUMERICAL ORDERWITH SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED(continyed) Title Program Number 44A Program Number (Applicable Sections) Emergency Codes Bypass of Verified Account 448 Toll Restriction Codes 50-4 Traveling Class Override (Toll Restriction) 45-1 Toll Restriction Toll Restriction 50-5 Dial Plan 50-6 Disable Equal Access/Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length Toll Restriction Override 51 52 Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Codes Assigned by Class Area 54 Office Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Class 2 Parameters 55-o Toll Restriction 55-l -2 56 60 Class 4 Parameters Toll Restriction Exception Assigned by Area Code Office Codes (Toll Restriction) 48 69 70 Station Toll Restriction Classification Least Cost Routing Route Definition Least Cost Routing Delete Modified Digits- Least Cost Routing Modified Digits-Add Least Cost Routing Least Cost Routing Least Cost Routing Assignments Station Group Station Message Detail Recording Output/Account Code Digit Length Verified Account Codes Verified Account Assignments Code Toll Restriction (Basic System) Parameters 77-1 Doorphone Selections (Basic System) (Least Cost Routing) 50-2 Schedule (Basic System) (Toll Restriction) 50-l Least Cost Routing Assignments (Basic System) (Toll Restriction) 47 Least Cost Routing Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code (Least Cost Routing) Class 3 Parameters (Toll Restriction) 46-40 Area Codes (Least Cost Routing) (Toll Restriction) 46-30 Least Cost Routing (Least Cost Routing) Class 1 Parameters (Toll Restriction) 46-20 Dial Zero Timeout (Least Cost Routing) Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Codes Assigned by Class Toll Restriction Least Cost Routing (Least Cost Routing) (Toll Restriction) 46-10 Call Route Plan (Least Cost Routing) 53 (Toll Res friction) 46-6-8 Least Cost Routing Number (Least Cost Routing) Code (Toll Restriction) 46-2-4 Least Cost Routing Long Distance Information Route Plan (Least Cost Routing) (Toll Restriction) 45-8-9 Special Codes (Least Cost Routing) (Toll Restriction) 45-3-6 Least Cost Routing (Least Cost Routing) (Toll Restriction) 45-2 (Applicable Sections} (Least Cost Routing) (Basic System) I 50-31-35 Title Home Area Code 77-2 Doorphone Busy Signal Assignments (Basic System) (Least Cost Routing) 2-44 , PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE2-A PROGRAMS OO-971N NUMERICALORDERWITH SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED(contiguecl) Title Program Number 78 (Applicable Program Number Sections) CO Line Special Ringing Assignments DISC/IMDU/Night Ringing Over External Page (Basic System) 79 Door Phone Ringing Electronic Tones (Basic System) 87 88 DAY IMMEDIATE Ringing 8g Ringing 90 84 NIGHT DELAY2 Ringing Initializing Program 00-89 DAY DELAY2 Ringing Initializing Speed Dial Numbers, ID Codes, Character Message Memory, Timed Reminder, Digital Telephone Volume Levels, and CO Line Identifications (Basic System) (Basic System) DAY DELAY1 Ringing 92 DAY2 IMMEDIATE Ringing 93 (Basic System) 85 NIGHT DELAY1 Ringing (Basic System) (Basic System) 83 Ringing (Basic System) (Basic System) 82 NIGHT IMMEDIATE (Basic System) and Digital Telephone (Basic System) 81 DAY2 DELAY2 Ringing (Basic System) (Basic System) 80 86 Title (Applicable Sections) DAY2 DELAY1 Ringing CO Line Identification (Basic System) 97 (Basic System) Station Message Printout Options (Basic System) 2-45 Detail Recording Data PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 another program more data ~~~~T;ll~nn~!~...~-~l;in~!~~~~, /T/T\ Step 1 Enter Program Mode Step 2 Enter Program Number Step 3 Enter Program Data Step 4 Exit Current Program Step 5 Exit Program Mode I -I Z IhI\-! .. NOTE: Varies depending upon how the Automatic Off-hook Preference is programmed. It can be: Normal, Note If m and m the programming when port 05 is set with auto preference code 01 in Program 32 keys are on telephone. FIGURE P-P-PROGRAMMING KEY SEQUENCEOVERVIEW The System Record contains programming forms for Programs out for each system installed as detailed in Chapters 1 and 2. 00 - 97. A System Record should be filled Each programming form is supplemented with a guide for entering data from the form. The guide illustrates the key sequence a programmer must press, with the exception of sequences common to all programs, e.g., entering programming mode (A), exiting current program (Z), and exiting programming mode (Z). To save space, these common sequences are coded, as illustrated in Figure 2-2. The m and m keys are also coded ‘3 and “H” to save space. NOTE: Programs 90,92, and 03 are out of order and placed in frontpurposely and in this order. Upon completing these steps, begin with Program 2-46 because 00. they must always be completed first, PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM90 INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 - 97 Enter programming mode be initialized LEDs must be lit Key 1 and 2 LEDs must flash EXIT programming mode IMPORTANT Initialize Programs 00 - 97 every time : l A new system is installed l To bring a system’s programming back to the default setting. Specifiy the range as folio ws: m m m m F[ To initialize one program at a time, just enter the individual program number, then m NOTES: 1. Always complete Program 90 at new system installs, before programming anything else. Skipping this step may cause erraticsystem behavior. 2. Follow instructions in Table I-C (Section 200-096-301) to c/ear this data. 3. When Program 90 is run, it will initialize any program or range of Programs without cycling system power. System power may be cycled to cause Program 32 to initialize the programming station with Intercom autopreference. This allows the programming station to enter the Programming Mode using the m key ( B= m 11 i 1 m. WARNING! Running this program will erase customer data. 2-47 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM92 INITIALIZINGSPEEDDIALNUMBERS,ID CODESCHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY,TIMED REMINDERS,DIGITALTELEPHONE VOLUME,AND CALLFORWARDBACKUPRAM . more data / Enter programming mode Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID Codes, and LCD memos assigned to Station Speed Dial numbers. Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned System Speed Dial numbers. Clears Character Message Memory and user Name/Number display. (Station to and System) Clears Timed Reminders. Resets digital telephone volume levels to initialized settings. This sets Infercorn Tone/BGM, busy overrride (muted ring), and speaker/ringing volume to approximately mid-range on all DKTs (Release 3). 4 q Clears Call Forward Memory (all stations, Release 2 and above). NOTES: 1. IMPORTANT: It is mandatory to complete all parts of Program 92 at every new system install. If Program 92 is not completed certain feature operations may cause erratic system behavior. 2. Use the instructions in Table 7-D (Section 200-096-301) to clear this data. 3. Program 92-9 does not affect fixed call forward settings. 4. Program 92-5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels. To set off-hook handset receiver volume levels individually for each digital telephone, see Program 30, LEDs 12 and 13. 5. Power “OFF” and “ON” is required to clear telephone LCD Call Forward Displays and Call Forward button LEDs. Call Forward memory is c/eared when Program 92-4 is run, even if system power is not cycled. WARNING! Running this program will erase customer data. 2-48 I . PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM03 FLEXIBLEPCBSLOTASSIGNMENTS To Store Data ,* ~-~~~~~~~~~n-nln-n-r;?-n-~ See Note CARD = PCB See Reference 6. Code Table DK24156 SLOT NO. 00 NOTES: DK24. slots 01 PCTUS, PCTU(2), PCTU(3), I 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. , I 1 w/DSS See instructions in Table 1-E (Section 200-096-301) to input the data from this record. Shaded rows on tables are for configuration purposes only, A PCTU (PCB codes 91, 92 or 93) must be installed in slot 00 (labeled PCTU). A PEKU , PESU or PDKU is always installed in slot 01. Initialized data reads slot 00 = 91, slot 01 = 21, slots 02 - 14 = 00. System PCB slots are labeled PCTU, SO1 - S14. For programming, these tables label the same slots 00 (PCTU) - 14. PESU circuits: 1 and 2, standard telephones; 3 and 4, not used; 5 - 8, electronic telephones. Total 8 station ports used in software; available with Release 2, and above. PCTUl, PCTU2, PCTU3 (PCTUS in DK24 only). PCTUl, PCTlJ2 orPCTlJ3only. OCA or PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS is not available with slots 11 - 14. PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS will function with either PDKU code 62 or 64; a special code is not required (Release 3). System Power must always be cycled after running Program 03. PCTlJ3 is required when a PDKU is installed. 2-49 00 - Ofi on/v ports 00 - 23 ports 00 - 96 ports 00 - 96 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM00 ‘\ SOFTWARE CHECK/REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODEASSIGNMENTS . SELECT = Select Code Enter 0 to check S/W version. Enter 1 to change 1st level password. Enter 2 to change 2nd level password. Enter 8 to check software sum. Enter 9 to check counter. Select Code Item Password Codes Enter the 4-digit password. See Note 3. Password or S/W Check Codes 0 ROM Version = 1 1st Level Password = 2 2nd Level Password = 8 Software RAM Checksum = 9 Power Cycle Counter = nnnmn See Note 4. See Note 5. NOTES: 1. See instructions in Table 1 -F (Section 200-096-301) to program the system with this information. 2. Initialized passwords are 0000. 3. The LCD responds as follows, when a selection is made: 0 Version = 1 Password = 2 Password = 8 Sum= 9 Counter = 4. This selection is not programmable. It identifies the system’s software version as follows: LEIIIU STRATA DK IT T I L X = PCTU, LEl~~00 ROM Version V = PCTUS 7 I L PCTU3 DX = Release 1 (RI) software (PCTUI) DX = Release 2 (R2) software (PCTUZ) DV = Release 2 (R2) software (PCTUS) PCM = Release 3 (R3) software (PCTU3) 5. These selections are not programmable. They are for factory test purposes on/y. The Checksum and Counter vary as customer data is entered. 2-50 ROM Version PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM04 PORT/STATION NUMBERASSIGNMENT SELECT = Port Number INT = Station Number I 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 NOTES: 1. Follow instructions in Table I-G (Section 200-096-301) to enter this data. 2. Shaded portions of the table are for configuration purposes only. 3. If a station number is assigned, and ‘ERROR”displays on the LCD, the station number has already been assigned to another port. 4. Station numbers default to 200 - 295. New station number assignments willnot activate on individualstation LCDs until the handset goes on/off hook. 5. If an assigned station number conflicts with a default feature access code, no error message is issued. The stations LCD reflects the conflicting number. When another station attempts to dial the number, the station will not ring. Instead, the feature activates. 6. If station numbers that conflict with feature access codes must be assigned, use Program 05 to change the access code first. 7. The station connected to port 05 has exclusive ability to program the system. 8. PEKU ports 04, 12,20 and 28 may be configured to support Door Phone Control Boxes (HDCBs). See Program 77-l. 9. Door phone and modem (IMDU) station numbers are pre-assigned as follows: l Modem= 19 IMDlJ modem number: Door phone numbers: . Port 04 = 151, 152, 153; Port 12 = 154, 155, 156 Port20= 157, 158, 159; Port28= 161, 162, 163 10. To insert a blank, press LED key 0 1; range programming is possible. 11. PEKU circuit 3 or PESU circuit 8 is the optional BGM connecting port circuit. This BGM PCB must be installed in slot 01 in Release 2, but can be in any slot with Release 3 (see Program 19). 12. Port 99 = DISA COS port (Release 2); DISA Port 99 is normally used in Program 40,41, and 48. 13. May be used to connect two-CO line external conference amplifier (customer-supplied) to PEKU PCB (see Program 10-3). 14. Last port available when using PCTUS control PCB. 15. PDKU requires Release 3 (PCTU3). 16. DlUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU circuits 1 - 7. 2-51 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM05 FLEXIBLEACCESSCODENUMBERING pi--p-jSpq7-p-j-~~-~n-~-~-~ T--T SELECT = Access Code l-9 from the Table Below kcess Code 0 SPECIAL DIAL = New Access See Note 6 Below. Features Affected Unused Station LCD Messages (1 O-19) Station Speed Dial Set (10 - 49) 2 Busy Override (N/A) (2) Do Not Disturb Override (N/A) (2) Station Numbers N/A 200 - 295 Off-hook Call Announce (N/A) (2) 3 Executive Override (N/A) (3) External Page (35-38) All Call Voice Page (30) Group Page (Internal) (31-34) All Call Voice Page with External Spkrs (39) 4 Automatic Callback (N/A) (4) CO Line Queuing (N/A) (4) Station Number Display (401) Port Number Display (402) Hold/Park (41) Hold/Park Pickup (42) Automatic Busy Redial (44) Automatic Busy Redial Cancel (44) Flash (45) Account Code Input (46) T.R. Override/T. Class Code Input (47) BGM Over Stations - ON (481) BGM Over Stations - OFF (480) BGM Over External Speakers ON (491) BGM Over External Speakers OFF (490) Cancel Message Waiting at Station (No MW key) I (409) Message Waiting Answer (408) 5 6 I 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. (*50) Voluntary Account Code (R3) Call Pickup Station (5+Station No.), Ringing CO Line (59), Telephone Page (530), (R2) (R2) Directed Pickup of CO Line on Hold (5700, 00 = 01 w 36), External Page (531, 535 m 538) Call Forward (601, R2: 602, 603, 604) Timed Reminder (605-609) MNV for Voice Mail ON (63+Station No.) M/W for Voice Mail OFF (64+Station No.) Voice Mail ID Code Set (Call Fwd, 656) Voice Mail ID Code Set (Ans. MW, 657) LCD Message Set (68) 6101 - DKT Mute Ring Adjust (R3) 6102 - DKT Ring Level Adjust (R3) Date Set (651) Time Set (652) Weekday Set (653) T.R. Override Code Change (654, 655) System Speed Dial/LCD Messages (60-99) (R2) LCD User Name (621-Set, 620-Reset) (R2) DISA Security Code Change (658) 659 - Verified Account Code Changed (R3) 622 * 625 Traveling Class Code 1 w 4 Changed 7 CO Outgoing Calls (701-736) Message Waiting Set/Cancel (N/A) (7)/l (77) 8 CO Group Outgoing Calls (81-88) 9 ./vu,?.--I t?J: New Acces! Codes (N/A = Not Affected) Voice First/Tone First (N/A)(l) Door Phones (151-l 63) IMDU Access (19) 1 Codes (R3) Least Cost Routing or CO Group Hunt (9) For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. Be sure access code changes do not conflict with existing access code or station numbering schemes. Refer Assignment. To insert a blank, press programming key 01. If access codes are being changed to a number that is current/y assigned, change the current/y assigned initialized state, the only unused code is zero (0). The initialized station number sequence of 200 - 295 may not be globally changed through Program 05. Access codes can be replaced by 2 digits. Standard Access codes are shown for reference. 2-52 to Program 04 -Port/Station code to an unused Make changes code through Number first. Program In the 04. ..’ PROGRAMMlNGPROCEOURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAMlOSYSTEMASSIGNMENTS,PARTl OF2 ~~-~~~~~-~~-~~~~-~~-T;1 SELECT 7= 7 \ Key LEDs Light LEDs as described in the table below NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data lights LEDs 07, 08, 09, 18, 19 and 20. 3. LED 04 DTMF Signal Time applies to manual and speed dial tones sent out of the system via CO or TIE lines. LED 04 does not apply to Call Forward or Voice Mail ID DTMF tones sent to voice mail ports. (See Program 10-2, LED 06, for tones sent to Voice Mail ports.) 4. If ring transfer is allowed, set Ring Transfer Recall time in Program 37; if ring transfer is not allowed (LED 07 off), the station will recall immediately if transfer is attempted. 5. Standard ring pattern is 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off. 6. Release 1 software detects short ring signals only. 7. Two CO conference must be allowed for DISA operation. 8. CO line guard time is the time interval the system requires to release a CO line and allow it to be re-seized. If LED 02 is off, all lines are set with 0.45 second guard time: if LED is on, guard time is 0.45 or 1.5 seconds per Program 42-O. 2-53 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM10-2 SYSTEMASSIGNMENTS,PART2OF2 SELECT BUTTON/LED 1 X 1 finish LED Off I Station External Amp Conference No External Amplifier Connected 1R Two CO Line Conference No Two CO Line Conference 2 Executive Override Warning Tone/ON Executive Override Warning Tone/OFF 157 2 External Page included with All Call Page Not Included 14 2 Privacy Override Warning Tone/ON Privacy Override Warning Tone/OFF I I Send Auto Callback Camp-on Tone 3 No Callback Tone I (R2) 11 CO Line 3 min Beep Tone No Beep Tone No DTMF Tone Returns DTMF Tone Return (R2) lo4 BGM connected to PESU, Circuit 81° EKT connected to PESU, CKT 8 (R2) 09 4 BGM connected to PEKU, Circuit 3” EKT connected to PEKU, CKT 3 Display Dialed Number/l min. Display Dialed Number/l 5 sec. Standard Tel. CO Ring per Prog. 1O-l, LED 06 Standard Tel. CO Ring Distinctive VM ID Code DTMF Signal Time 80 ms 160 ms 08 (R2) 076 I I (R2) 06 5 (R3) 05 TIE/DISA Busy Tone, 0.5 second cadence9 TIE/DISA Busy Tone, 0.25 second cadence (R2) 04 MW cancel from VM; dial 1 I& Station No. 03 I 02 01 NOTES: 1. For more information, 2. Initialized data lights 3. Called party receives 4. BGM connected to (optional). 5. VM ID code DTMF 6. The ring pattern for off; intercom ring is Il. you 19” 12 IO. table below. be lit when - 13 9. LED On by the should - 16 8. Key L EL& Light LEDs as defined ALL LEDs with an “x” 20 17 7. = 2 I 2 MW cancel from VM: Automatic I Ringing Modes/3 Ringing Modes/2 Hunt/C.F. override from console’s phone Hunt/C.F. override from console Tone First (from DSS Console) Voice First (from DSS Console) see the instructions preceding the record sheets. LEDs 02, 14, 15 and 16. notification tone when calling party activates ACB. PEKU, Circuit 3 or PEW, Circuit 8 will be sent to electronic and digital signal time is fixed at 160 msec for Release 1 software. standard telephone, distinctive ring on incoming CO calls is: 0.2 sec. always 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off. This does not apply to VM Ports (Program telephone speakers and external on/O.4 sec. off, 0.2 sec. on/O.4 sec. 31, LED 17 on) which are always page off, 3 sec. standard g%rna/ speakers and a// electronic and digital telephones are paged by dia/ing:miB Them key is used to page a// electronic telephones Only; external speakers are not included when using the a key. Deletes DTMF tones returned to electronic telephones when dialing from dialpad or speed dialing; also deletes auto dial digits from callers that are call forwarded to voice mail. This does not affect the actual DTMF tones sent out to the CO or voice mail. 0.5 second cadence, Bell Standard Busy Tone, should be enabled so outside callers are not confused by STRATA 0.25 second busy tone when calling busy number on DISA and TIE line calls PESUPEKU must be in SLOT 01 if using Release 2 software; PESLUPEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in Program 79-7 if using Release 3 software. Important: LED 19 should be OFF unless external amplifiers are used for two-CO line/station conference (see Program 10-3). If LED is ON, the station may be unbalanced and receive HUM if external amplifier with Auto-Gain-Control is not connected. 2-54 19 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM lO-3(Release 3) TWOCO-LINECONFERENCE/DlSAAMPLlFlERCONNECTlONPORTASSlGNMENTS . ~-pJq-qpq-py-q-j-JpqT-pl 7 SELECT \ =3 Key LEDs Light LEDs as defined by the table below. ALL LEDs with an ‘x” should be lit when you finish. 06 05 (R3) 04 PEKU Ports 33,34 - Amp. 4 Connected Ports 33, 34 - (R3) 03 PEKU Ports 25,26 - Amp. 3 Connected Ports 25,26 - Stations Connected (R3) 02 PEKU Ports 17,18 - Amp. 2 Connected Ports 17,18 - Stations Connected (R3) 01 PEKU Ports 09, IO - Amp. 1 Connected Ports 09,lO - Stations Connected Stations Connected NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data: all LEDs off. 3. See Section 200-096-208, Paragraph 13 for connecting up to four two-way amplifiers for use on tandem, DISA and conference telephone calls. 4. Important: Only enable the PEKU ports that are actually connected on amplifiers. 5. Amplifiers are switched into two-CO line calls automatically, one amplifier for each call, starting from the lowest ports enabled to the highest. Skipping ports is allowed. Two-CO line calls established after all amplifiers are in use will not be amplified. 6. See Program 10-2, LED 18 and 19; Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20; and Program 15-5 for more information regarding two-CO line conference/tandem. 2-55 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 12 SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS - BASIC TIMING SELECT = i-9 Enter program code, 3 - 9, from table below. Required Code Function Time 36 Pause Timing q 1 1.5 sec. (Speed Dial) 02 3.0 sec. 01 0.5 sec. 02 2.0 sec. q 0.2 sec.5 00 no pause 01 1.5 sec. 02 3 sec. Flash Timing4 W 5 9 Pause After Flash (Voice Path Delay) 01 through CRCU Inter-digital Release Time (Standard Phone) 1 sec. through 9 sec. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data programs timing as follows: Code 3 = 1, Code 4 = 2, Code 5 = 0, and Code 9 = 4. 3. When programming Code 9, the LCD responds with LINE TIME = instead of SEL ECT CODE =. 4. The duration of time the PCOUcircuitopens Tip & Ring when them keyispressed, or hookflash code m 11 is dialed. 5. This timing is not used in the United States. 6. This timing applies to voice calls originated from telephones and voice or data calls originated by system Data Interface Units (PDIU-DI or -DS). 2-56 ‘, .! SELECT CODE = Enter required code for the time listed in the table below. See Note 3. Brogram Code 46 : PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM13 OEFINBNGTHEMESSAGECENTER SELECT 7-T = 1 PORT Enter station as the = Port Number the port number of the to be defined Message Center. Port Number /VOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Any electronic or digital telephone may receive (and store) up to 3 message waiting indications from any other electronic or digital telephone. A fourth message waiting indication may be set by the Message Center electronic or digital telephone only, 3. The Message Center is allowed to perform “Message Waiting, ” even if disallowed on all other stations. 4. Initialized data = no port assigned. 5. The message center feature should be assigned to the customer’s main answering position: a station or the lowest port (in VM group) of the customer’s voice mail device (see Program 31 for VM group port assignment), whichever the customer specifies. 2-57 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 15 ASSIGNING DP/DTMF, TENANT SERVICE TO INDIVIDUAL CO LINES pq-pJlr;lr;lppJyJ-pq-pl-pJ SELECT = Program / Code 7 Key LEDs = CO Line Specify CO lines by setting All L EDs n-hook with an “X” should LED keys, as defined be lit when finished. Program ON 0 (R3) AR VM Calls’ OFF Detect Ignore below. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 171 18 19 21 (01) (02)(03) (04) (05) (08)(07) (08) (09)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)(16)(17)(18)(19)(2~ 1 CO Outgoing DP6 DTMF 2 CO Dial Pulse Rate (Pulse per sec.) 20 PPS 10 PPS 3 AR Hold 4 Recognize Ignore 4 AR Timing4 ESS (Electronic) 450 msec. 5 Tandem CO Line Connection with Station Dropout Crossbar 95 msec. Equipped5 6 CO Line Tenant Assignment Tenant Tenant 7 Forced Account Code Equipped Not Equipped 8 Operation After Flash No CRCU after flash CRCU after flash Signal by the table CO Lines 01 - 20 (LED Keys) LED Status ‘rogram Code I . I / I Not Equipped 2 1 Off-hook Program Code Program Detect 0 (R3) AR VM Calls 7 CO Outgoing 1 Signal DP Ignore Crossbar 95 msec. ESS (Electronic) 450 msec. Tandem CO Line Connection with Station Dropout Equipped Not Equipped 6 CO Line Tenant Assignment Tenant 7 Forced Account Code Equipped Not Equipped After Flash No CRCU after flash CRCU 4 AR Timing 5 4 I Tenant 1 I ‘I I I I 8 2 Operation NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data is all L EDs OFF. 3. Shaded areas indicate that the handset must be off-hook during programming. Program CO lines 01 through 20 with handset on-hook Program CO lines 21 through 36 with handset off-hook This is a momentary-open of the CO line loop provided by some Central Offices. If programmed to 4. AR = Automatic Release signal. recognize AR, CO lines on-hold will drop when the outside party hangs up and the CO sends AR signal. Two-CO line DISA calls always release with AR. DISA line release is not related to this program. 6, Tandem connection must be equipped for all DISA CO lines and all other lines used for two-CO line conference. 6. If a CO line is set for Dial Pulse (DP) operation, themkey must be programmed on stations that must send DTMF tones over the CO lines (see Program 39, -key). 7. When AR is sent on a CO line call because the outside caller hangs-up, ‘D” tone will be sent to the voice mail port (PSTu/PESU), prompting the voice mail machine to release and clear the port for another call. Detection is from VM answer to VM hookflash; it is not in effect after the VM or auto attendant operates the hookflash to transfer the call. 2-58 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM16 ASSIGNING CO LlNEGROUPS(DIAL9 OR 81-88) ~l-~l~~~I-~l~-~~l-~l-~~ 7 SELECT = CO Line Group On/y enter the last digit of the CO line group (1 - 8) to be defined, or enter 0 for Dial 9 group. NOTES: 1. For more 2. Program Program 3. Initialized \ Key LEDs Specify which CO lines are assigned to the group by setting LEDs as defined by the table below. All LEDs with an “X” should be lit when finished. See Note 2. information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. CO lines l-20 by setting LEDs l-20 with the handset on-hook; CO lines 2 l-36 by setting LEDs 1 - 16 with the handset off-hook; data assigns all CO lines to the Dial 9 group. 2-59 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM17 TIELlNEPAGE/HANDSFREEANSWERBACK I,-,In~p-j-~~p@&T-j-~-p-j / Select = TIE Line Enter the number of the CO line designated as a TIE line (01 - 36). See Notes 3 and 6. I I PEMU 1 PCB I -~~ I 2 Key/LED 01 to enable the Page/Handsfree Answerback Feature on the TIE line defined. See Note 4. 1 me ine) Keym LED Lit 36 X=ON I I 2 PEMU 2 PCB Slot No. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. System page access to external TIE line callers and handsfree answerback to stations receiving TIE line calls can be allowed with this program. 3. Shadedareas of the table are for configuration purposes. Refer to Program 03 to find the PEMU PCB slot numbers. Program 03 must be completed prior to this program. 4. Be sure to specify both digits of the CO line assigned as a TIE line. If the 0 before a single digit (01 - 09) is left out, the LCD displays what is entered, but key LED 01 cannot be programmed. 5, All 20 key LEDs light if pressed, but only key LED 0 1 has a programming function. 6. Initialized data does not assign Page/Handsfree Answerback to any TIE line. LED 01 stays off for all CO lines. 7. A range of TIE lines may be programmed I by entering / Low TIE (CO) High TIE (CO) line in range line in range 8. Maximum PEMU PCBs allowed because of power supply limits: DK24 = 1 PEMU, DK56 = 2 PEMUs, DK96 = 3 PEMUs. 9. If PEMU is installed with PCTUS PCB, only 16 station ports are available. IO. When a PEMU is installed, it is automatically assigned to the next consecutive CO line andstation p&s: if the system is quipped with a PCTU (1,2, or 3) the PEMU assumes four CO lines and four station ports; with a PCTUS it assumes four CC lines and eight station ports. 2-60 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 19 BACKGROUNDMUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION (RELEASE3) SELECT =’ 1 SLOf(O1 - 14) DK96: 01 - 14 DK56: 01 - 08 DK24: 01 - 06 Slot number of PEKU or PEW connected to background music (5GM) source NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. If PEKU, the BGM source must be wired to Circuit 3. 3. If PEW, the BGM source must be wired to Circuit 8. 4. LED 09 (PEKU) or LED IO (PEW) in Program IO-2 must be lit also. 5. BGM cannot be connected to the PDKU or PSTU PCBs. 2-61 _ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM20 PDKUDATAPORTCONFlGURATlON(RELEASE3) Select = PDKU Port Number that is connected to PDIU-DS or to DKT with PDIU-DI. PDKU Port Number 7 -I n n PDKU Port Number KEYI LED X LED ON Keys/LEDs 1 - 5 defines data port type; KeWLEDs 17 - 20 assigns data port to security group. n-n 1 11 1 PDKU Port Number n n LED OFF Data Security Group 4 Not Included Data Security Group 2 1 Group 4 Included Not Included Data Security Group 2 Not Included Data Security Group 3 Not Included Data Security Group 3 Not Included Data Security Group 1 Not Included Data Security Group 1 Not Included 16 I I I 16 1 1 I I l5 I I 15 14 13 12 I ” I I I ‘O I I I O9I I 11 10 09 08 I O7I I 07 06 I I 06 05 Auto Pause 4 Behind PBX No Auto Pause 04 DIU-DS Connected DIU-DI Connected DIU-DS to Modem Connection DIU-DS to other type DCE or DTt 03 1. For more information, see the mnstrucbons preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data: LED 17 ON, all others OFF. 3. Copy this page if more than three D/Us are installed. 4. Auto pause will be inserted after a Centrex or PBX access code is dialed by a DIU: CO line must be assigned in Program accesscodeassignedin Program42(1-8). Pause timeisdeterminedbyProgram 12-3. Apause willalsobeinsertedafterthe code is dialed (by the PDIU) in all cases if LED 05 is turned on. 5. DlUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU circuits 1 - 7. 2-62 42-0, and must nave DKCOllneaccess PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM21 MODEMPOOLPORTASSlGNMENTS(RELEASE3) PDKU/PDIlJ-DS, PDKWPDIU-DS, Port Number _1 TSTlJlModem Port Number I Assignment r 1 I-m Assignment 2 I-D Assignment 3 I-D Assignment 4 I-En Assignment 5 I-LIEI Assignment 6 I-ELII Assignment 7 I-D Assignment 8 I-D Assignment 9 I-D Assignment NOTES: 1. For more 2. Initialized 3. Copy this 4. Requires 5. D/Us ICI II -(I information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. data is blank. page if more than 10 modems are assigned to modem pool. Release 3 software. can be connected to any ports associated with P DKU circuits 2-63 1 - 7. Port Number PSTWModem Port Number PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 22 DATA INTERFACE UNIT (DIU) STATION HUNTING (DATA CALLS ONLY; RELEASE3) SELECT = Port Number (00-95) Enter the PDKU/DIU port number of the Hunt From station. See Note 3 for entering a range of ports. HUNT TO = (00-95) Enter the Hunt To PDKlUDIU port number. See Note 4. E Port Hunt To 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data does not assign Hunt To points to any port. 3. A range of ports may be assigned by pressing the following key sequence: 4. Press LED key 0 I to delete a digit from Hunt To port. 5. Program 22 applies to PDILJ-DI and PDIU-DS data stations. If programming a PDIU-DI station, use the associated digital telephone port number; the PDIU-DS is programmed using its own unique port number. 17[7~0[7 / Lowport \ High port , 2-64 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM28 DSSCONSOLE/ATTENDANTELECTRONlCTELEPHONEASSlGNMENTSAND DlGlTALDSSCONSOLE/ATTENDANTDlGlTALTELEPHONEASSlGNMENTS _ p-j-p--p-pqp-j-p-j~rpT-p-j-~ SELECT= (l-4) Enter the DSS console number. See Note 3. DSS PEKU/ DDSS PDKU PCBs (Lowest Slot to Highest) 7 DSS/DDSS Console Number Low Slot Number: 1 Slot Number: 2 Slot Number: 3 ’ High Slot Number: 4 = (1 - 4) &ATT Enter the attendant telephone number. electronic or digital See Notes 4 and 5. Attendant Electronic/ Digital Telephone Number (1,2,3 or4) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. A digital DDSS console can be assigned to an electronic telephone, and a DSS console can be assigned to a digital telephone. DDSS is supported by PCTU3 only, DSS is supported by PCTU I, PCTUZ, PCTU3, and PCTUS. 3. Refer to Program 03, Flexible PCB Slot Assignments, for the PCB slots of PEKUs and PDKUs configured to support consoles. 4. The system automatically assigns the console supported by the PEKU or PDKU in the lowest-number PCB slot to be console number 1. See Note 7. 5. The system automatically assigns the telephone connected to the 1st station pot? on a console PDKU or PEKU to be attendant number 1. See Note 7. 6. If more than one console is associated with one attendant telephone, then specify the same number attendant telephone for all consoles associated with it. 7. Shaded information is for configuration purposes only. 8. Initialized data assigns console #l to attendant telephone #I; console #2 to attendant telephone #2; console #3 to attendant telephone #3, and console #4 to attendant telephone #4. 9. Console #4 is not available with PCTUS PCB. 2-65 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM29-1 DIGITALDSSANDDSSCONSOLEKEYASSIGNMENTS CONSOLE1 SELECT = 1 DSS Number 1-4: Each system can have up to 4 consoles. Enter the console to which keys are being assigned (DSS console No. 01 - No. 20 Press the LED/key that is in the same position as the console key being assigned. The LED lights and the LCD displays the console key’s number. 1). DSS Key Group 1-3: Each console has three groups of 20 LED keys. Choose the group to be assigned, Console dial, CO line access, or DSS station access code to the key chosen. See code table below for the keys to enter. See Notes 4 and 5. 1 Code Table f I NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data associates the PEKU or PDKU’S console with the telephone connected to PEKU or PDKlJ’s first port. See Program 28 to reassign consoles to other telephones. 3. When assigning CO line access keys (0 1 - 36), the associated telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40. 4. The and keys may be changed tom, arm keys, but they may not be reassigned to other key locations. 5. Initialized data assigns (Code 89) to Group No. 3 key 19 andm (Code 91) to Group No. 3 key 20 on all consoles. All other keys are initialized as DSS keys to ports 00 - 57, in sequential order. 6. Initialized key assignments are shown after Program 29. 7. Important: Onlyprogramm, , m, , andm buttons;programming other feature buttons on a console may cause system operation problems. q Ill q q q I 92 I q 2-66 q PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM29-2 DIGITALDSSANDDSSCONSOLEKEYASSIGNMENTS CONSOLE2 SELECT = 2 DSS Number 1-4: Each system can have up to 4 consoles. Enter the console to which keys are being assigned (DSS console No. 01 - No. 20 Press the LED/key that is in the same position 2). DSS Key Group 1-3: Each console has three groups of 20 LEDs/keys. Choose the group to be assigned. as the conso’e key being assigned. The LED lights and the LCD displays the console key’s number. Console Grow Group No. 1 1o Key/Code I dia!, CO line access, or DSS station access code to the key chosen. See code table below for the keys to enter, See Notes 4 and 5. 2 No. 2 Group No. 3 ~2. Key/Code Key/Code Key/Code I 20 1 16 09 19 08 18 07 17 06 16 I 15 1 14 04 14 03 13 02 12 02 12 01 11 01 11 I 14 Code Table Key Type Code Station Speed Dial *10 -*49 System Speed Dial *60 - *99 CO Line Access DSS (Station Access) 01 - 36 #OO - #95 AC 89 NT1 91 NT2 92 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data associates the PEKU or PDKU’s console with the telephone connected to PEKU or PDKU’s first port. See Program 28 to reassign consoles to other telephones. 3. When assigning CO line access keys (0 1 - 36), the associated telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40. 4. Them andm keys may be changed tom, [9 arm keys, but they may not be reassigned to other key locations. 5. Initialized data assigns (Code 89) to Group No. 3 key 19 and (Code 91) to Group No. 3 key 20 on all consoles. All other keys are initialized as DSS keys to ports 00 - 57, in sequential order. 6. Initialized key assignments are shown after Program 29. 7. Important: Onlyprogram@, , m, , andm buttons;programming other feature buttons on a console may cause system operation problems. q q q 2-67 q PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM29-3 DIGITALDSSANDDSSCONSOLEKEYASSIGNMENTS CONSOLE3 SELECT = 2 DSS Number l-4: Each system can have up to 4 consoles. Enter the console to which keys are being assigned (DSS console No. 01 - No. 20 Press the LED/key that is in the same position as the console key being assigned. The LED lights and the LCD displays the console key’s number. 2). DSS Key Group l-3: Each console has three groups of 20 LEDs/keys. Choose the group to be assigned. Console dial, CO line access, or DSS station access code to the key chosen. See code table below for the keys to enter. See Notes 4 and 5. 3 Group No. 3 Key/Code Key/Code 10 20 09 19 08 18 07 17 06 16 05 15 04 14 03 13 02 12 01 11 Code Table Key Type I Code Station Speed Dial *10 -*49 System Speed Dial *60 - *99 CO Line Access DSS (Station Access) 01 - 36 #00 - #95 AC 89 NT1 91 NT2 92 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data associates the PEKU or PDKU’s console with the telephone connected to PEKU or PDKU’s firstport. See Program 28 to reassign consoles to other telephones. 3. When assigning CO line access keys (01 - 36), the associated telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40. 4. Them andm keys may be changed tom, (9 arm keys, but they may not be reassigned to other key locations. 5. Initialized data assigns (Code 89) to Group No. 3 key 19 and (Code 91) to Group No. 3 key 20 on all consoles. All other keys are initialized as DSS keys to ports 00 - 57, in sequential order. 6. Initialized key assignments are shown after Pro ram 29. 7. Important: Onlyprogramm, , m, , andh buttons;programming other feature buttons on a console may cause system operation problems. q q q q ’/ 2-68 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM29-4 DIGITALOSSANDDSSCONSOLEKEYASSIGNMENTS SELECT = 2 DSS Number l-4: Each system can have up to 4 consoles. Enter the console to which keys are being assigned (DSS console No. 01 - No. 20 Press the LED/key that is in the same position as the console key being assigned. The LED lights and the LCD displays the console key’s number. 2). DSS Key Group l-3: Each console has three groups of 20 L EDs/keys. Choose the group to be assigned. Console . I station access code to the key chosen. See code table below for the keys to enter. See Notes 4 and 5. 4 Code Table I I KeyType 1 Station Speed Dial Code 1 Nf3TF.q. .-. --. 1. ^ I 1 *IO - *49 1 2. 3. 1 DSS (Station Access) 1 #00 - #95 1 4. 5. I 92 I 6. 7. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. , . . miuallzeu uata assoaates the PEKU or PDKU’S console with the telephone connected to PEKU or PDKU’s firstport. See Program 28 to reassign consoles to other telephones. When assigning CO line access keys (0 I - 36), the associated telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40. Them andm keys may be changed tom, m arm keys, but they may not be reassigned to other key locations. Initialized data assigns (Code 89) to Group No. 3 key 19 andm (Code 91) to Group No. 3 key 20 on all consoles. All other keys are initialized as DSS keys to ports 00 - 57, in sequential order. Initialized key assignments are shown after Program 29. Important: Onlyprogramm, , m, , andm buttons;programming other feature buttons on a console may cause system operation problems. q q 2-69 q I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM29 INITIALIZEDDSSANDDIGITALDSSCONSOLE KEYASSIGNMENTS PCTU (1,2, or 3) #09 #19 #29 #39 #49 NTl(91) #08 #18 #28 #38 #48 AC (89) #07 #17 #27 #37 #47 #57 #06 #16 #26 #36 #46 #56 #05 #15 #25 #35 #45 #55 #04 #14 #24 #34 #44 #54 #03 #13 #23 #33 #43 #53 #02 #12 #22 #32 #42 #52 #Ol #ll #21 #31 #41 #51 #OO #IO #20 #30 #40 #50 . :,. .. 2-70 . Speed Dial Keys Vi .. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM30 STATION CLASSOFSERVICE (PORTS 00 -31) SELECT = Port Number(s) 1 Enter the port number(s) to which class of service must be assigned. See Note 4 for entering a range of ports. Change Verified A.C. Account Codes Verified Vol. (R3)14 Digital Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3)14 ” DISA Securitv TR Override Forced Acc’t Code OCNBusy Override ABR Access Speed Numbers 00-31 00101 ~02~03~04/05~06/07~08~09~10~11~12~13~14~15~16~17~18/19~20~21~22~23~24/25/26~27 / I I I III III I III 28 29 30 3 I III I I I I I I (R3) Recv. Chanae Key LEDs Light LEDs for the port specified in the last step. All Key.s/LEDs marked with an “X” in the table below should be lit. (R3)” Digital Tele. Change Port Key LED Feature I 3 Code8 Code IR21 I I .- 12 09 08 07 Automatic5 1 ' /Jo 1 I Enabled I I I Dial Allowed I MIC on at Start of Call 13 MIC Key Lock Enabled Speakerphone I l03liilI1 1 02 11 I3 I i j 1 1011 I I / II Enabled NOTES: 1. For more information, 2. Initialized data reads 3. Ports 32 - 95 on next 4. A range of ports may j I / I I j iii j 1 j i I i i /I I I 1 j i i Ii i iii i i I i iii I I see the instructions preceding the record sheets. LEDs 01, 05, 07, and 12 ON for all ports. page. The same notes apply to all ports. be specified by entering _ q [7’El00 Low port in range i -High port in range 5. If this LED is turned OFF, OCA and Busy Override must be accessed manually by dialing1 If kept ON, ACB and Executive Override cannot be accessed. 6. If all stations are allowed Privacy Override, (the system will be non-private), allowing up to three telephones to talk on the same CO line. 7. See Program 10-2 to enable/disable Priv./Exec./DND override warnina tones. 8. Change DISA security code is available with Release 2 and above softw>re only. To change DISA code from selected stations: Dial mBII+code+i. 9. DP or DTMF is specified for standard telephones only, PSTU or PEW (circuits 1 and 2). IO. To change a 4-digit Traveling Class Override (T. C. 0.) code: Dial m + q0 q + code + 1. assl,~II-Class2,~~0-Class3,~~~-Class4. lxln =lil-Cl To change verified account codes from selected stations: Dialm + III+ Code Number (000 - 299) + code (I - 15 digits) + 1, Note that the total account code digit length is set in Program 60-4; all digits do not have to be verified. 12. To change the 4-digit T. R. override codes (1 or 2) from selected stations: Dialm + 111 + coae + 3 arm + 1 B 8+ code + I. 13. MIC ON/OFF at start of call (LED 03 ON = MIC ON, LED 03 OFF = MIC OFF) is only in effect if MIC key lock is enabled (LED 02 = ON). 14. There are nine handset receiver volume levels, 1 * 9 (9 being the highest). The initial off-hook /eve/ can be set anywhere from level 2 to 5. Set the initial level with one of the following combinations: Level 2 = 12 OFF/13 OFF; Level 3 = 12 ON/l3 OFF [default level); Level 4 = 12 OFF/13 ON; Level 5 = 12 ON/13 ON. Il. 2-71 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM30 STATION CLASS OFSERVICE (PORTS32-95) Priv. Override Exec. Allowed’ Override Allowed DND Override Change Codes 3213313413E 20 i 19 I (R3) lo 16 A.C. (R3) I1 15 1 (R3) 14 1 ~ I Verified I / Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3)14 13 1 j Digital Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3)14 12 / 1 Off) g 11 i (DTMF Change DISA Change TR Override Forced Security Account OCAIBusy Speed Code (R2)8 Codei Automatic 10 1 09 Code Override ABR Access 5 I 1 1081 1 / ~ 07 1 i ~ 03 02 Speakerphone Enabled 01 Feature Key LED Priv. Override Allowed’ Override 1 ii1 1 !I I II / I I I I I 7 Code (R3)l” ChangeVerified Verified Digital Tele. Recv. Digital Tele. Recv. Dial Pulse Change 19 1 68 69/7Oi71 72173 15 12 11 Security Code / (R2)8 Code12 Automat; 5 Enabled Dial Allowed MIC on at Startif Call I3 MIC Key Lock Enabled I3 Speakerphone Enabled from page 2-71 Numbers 74 75 76 77178179 (R3) Vol. (R3)14 Override ABR Access / Off) g Change TR Override Forced Acc’t Code OCAJBusy 20 66~67 Vol. (R3)14 (DTMF DISA Port 64165 17 A.C. (R3)” Codes 1 18 Allowed T.C.O. Account 13 Allowed’ Override Change Notes i 1 Dial Allowed Enabled Speed . Enabled MIC on at Start of Call ‘3 DND i-i 1 1 MIC Key Lock Exec. 32-63 18 Digital Dial Pulse Numbers 40~41~42~43~44~45~46~47~48/49~50~51~52~53~54~55~56~57~58~59~60~61i62~6: 17 Code ChangeVerified Account 7 Allowed’ T.C.O. Port Key LED Feature .: . apply. 2-72 64-95 80/81182183 84185 86187 88 89 gojgl 92l93l94lg PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM31 STATIONCLASSOFSERVICE (PORTSOO-31) SELECT = Port Number(s) Key LEDs Enter the port number(s) to which class of service must be assigned. See Note 4 for entering a range of ports. Light LEDs for the port specified in the last step. All keys/LEDs marked with an “X” in the table below should be lit. I I I INTOUCH (B + Station INTOUCH (B No Station) Block 17 VM ID Code INTOUCH Integration Page (AID) 113 lo VM (No Conference) 09 VM Group 4 08 VM Group 3 07 VM Group 2 06 VM Group 1 (Receive) i 1 I 15 Group Page 2 - EKTs/DKTs Group Page 1 - EKTs/DKTs All Call Page Allowed - EKTs/DKTs Enabled I - 14 GroupPage3-EKTs/DKTs OCA 11 12 13 14 15 16 17/18~19~20/21~22~23~24/25~26~27~28~29~30~31 I I I I I I I I I III 16 4 - EKTs/DKTs VM to VM Call Blocking 04 05 06 07 08109110 19 Rev (VM) Sional Receive 00 01102103 20 18 End/End Group No.) Ovr. 8 Exec./Priv. Port NumbersOO-31 Key I LED Feature (R3) 7 I I 1 1 1 I I 1 1 / I / 1 / 12 11 I I I I I I I I I I I ! I I I I I I I I I I I I I I / 1 I I I 05 04 I ---I 03 Handsfree No Warning 02 Handsfree Disabled 01 * NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding 2. Initialized data reads LED IO ON for all ports. 3. Ports 32 - 95 on next page. The same notes apply. 4. A range of ports may be specified by entering I I I I I the record sheets. q7 owno \ Low port in range 5. High port in range IfkeyLED 15islit, keyLED 17mustbelit. IfkeyLED lgislit, keyLED 17mustbelit. If key LED 20 is lit, key LEDs 17 and 19 must both be lit. 6. INTOUCH B + Station No.19 No Station requires INTOUCH software Release B.06 or above. 7. VM to VM call block should be “ON” for all VM (PSTWPESU) ports if the Voice Mail/Auto Attendant machine does supervised and/or screened transfer. 8. Block Exec./Priv. override (LED 18 “ON’7 prevents Privacy Override to the selected Station unless the m key is “0N”at that station; this option (LED 18 “ON’:, prevents executive override to the station under all conditions. 2-73 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM31 STATIONCLASSOFSERVICE (PORTS32-95) Key LED Feature INTOUCH (B+Station , No.) 20 Page 3 - EKTs/DKTs 13 Group Page 2 - EKTs/DKTs 12 Group Page 1 - EKTs/DKTs 11 All Call Page Allowed . ,. . ,. . / I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - EKT! Key LED Feature INTOUCH (B+Station INTOUCH (B No Station) Exec./Priv. No.) Signal Rev. Receive VM ID Code 20 (VM) Page 2 - EKTslDKTs 12 Page 1 - EKTs/DKTs 11 lo - EKTs/DKTs I VM (No Conference) 09 VM Group 4 08 VM Group 3 07 VM Group 2 06 VM Group 1 05 04 Disabled / I / I / 1 1 1 1 I / j / (R3) 7 - 1 15 14 13 Group VM to VM Call Blocking 1 I I I I I I I 18 17 Group OCA Enabled (Receive) Handsfree No Warning 1 16 Group INTOUCH Page Integration 4 - EKTs/DKTs (AID) Group Page 3 - EKTs/DKTs All Call Page Allowed Port Numbers 64 - 95 64165166j67168/69170171172/73174175176177j78/79180181182183184185186187188189190191192l93/94/95 19 Ovr. * End/End Handsfree / -...-,-..,” Group Block Port Numbers 32 - 63 32~33~34/35~36/37~38/39~40~41/42~43~44~45~46~47~48/49~50~51~52/53~54~55~56/57~58~59~60~61~62~63 I -IL-- 03 02 01 1 I Notes from page 2-73 apply. 2-74 I I I I I I I I j PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM32 AUTOMATICPREFERENCE . I-I-IS~H-151011~-0-nOl-)-I-I-I / / ~~ ‘-\ Automatic Preference Code: SELECT = Port Number Enter the port number of the station having preference defined. See Note 3 below for entering a range of ports. DA JA = Ringing Code Enter 0 to disable Ringing Line Preference. Enter 1 to enable Ringing Line Preference. Enter Enter Enter Enter 00 0I 02 11 for no selection. for intercom. for lowest CO line. - 18 for Line Groups Ringing Port Number (,“zfyj I- 8. Automatic Preference Code 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 -?c 36 37 76 77 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 49 50 51 52 83 84 85 86 87 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns Ringing Code 1 and Automatic Off-hook Code 00 for al/ports. Power 0 1 to programming port 05. 3. To enter a range of ports dial the following key sequence: onwoo 4. Automatic Preference applies to Off-hook and speaker key. 7-\ 5. This program applies to electronic and digital telephones Low port High port only; standard telephones always select the system intercom path when going off-hook. 2-75 up sequence assigns Automatic Off-hook Code ’ I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 33 STATION HUNTING (VOICE CALLS ONLY) I SELECT = Port Number (00-95) Enter the port number of the Hunt From station. See Note 3 for entering a range of ports. HUNT TO = (00-95) Enter the Hunt To port number. See Note 4. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data does not assign Hunt To points to any port. 3. A range of ports may be assigned by pressing the following key sequence: 4. Press LED/key 01 to delete a digit from Hunt To port. 7 5. If a Hunt station is in Call Forward, calls will be directed to the forwarded Low port destination. 6. CO lines will Hunt if they are programmed to ring at the Hunt station only; CO lines that ring at more than one station in any given ring program (8189) will not Hunt. q OHOI7 2-76 \ High port PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 34 HOLD/PARK RECALL TIMING SELECT = Port Number (00-95) Enter the port number having its Hold/Park Recall Time defined. See Note 4 for entering a range of ports. HOLD TIME = Seconds Enter the number of seconds the system will wait. Use three digits, Acceptable range is 000 or 011-160. See Note 3. k Port Seconds i 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 NOTES: 1. For more information, 2. Initialized data assigns 3. Enter 000 for no hold 4. Enter a range of ports see the instructions preceding the record sheets. a Hold/Park recall time of 032 seconds to al/ports. recall. Enter 0 11% 160 for 11 to 160 seconds. by keying in the following sequence: 00~00 / Lo’w port 2-77 High port PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM35 STATION CLASSOFSERVICE (PORTS 00-31) p-pJ-qqpl-pJJ-/-q-~pp-pl 7 / SELECT = Port Number (00-95) Enter the port number(s) being defined. See Note 3 for entering a range of ports. LED Keys Feature LED Keys Select LEDs to light for the port specified in the last step. All LEDs marked with an “X” in the table below should be lit. Port Numbers (00-31) 00/01~02~03~04~05~06~07~08~09~10~11~12~13~14~15~16~17~18/19~20~21~22~23)24/25/26~27~28/29/30~31 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II/I III I I 19 18 17 I I 16 15 14 13 12 I 11 10 ------------------ 09 08 I 07 I, I, I, I, I I, 1, 06 LCD Indiv. Message LCD Messaae4 Waiting (RCV) Type/32-ON/12-OFF5 1 02 1 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data reads key/LED 05 lit for ports 00- 15, and keys/LEDs 01, 02, and 04 lit for ports 00-95. 3. Enter a range of ports by keying in the following sequence: 17OHOO / Low port I \ High port 4. The maximum number of LCD stations that may be assigned personal message/speed dial memos/ timed reminder memos is I6 with PCTU (1,2, or 3) and 6 with PCTUS. Initialized data assigns the lo west port numbers: 00 N 15 with PCTLJ; 00 w 05 with PCTUS. 5. Key L EDs 0 1, 02 and 04 should be lit for all stations connected to voice mail ports to allow proper voice mail integration. Key LED 01 and 02 should be lit for all stations (even non-LCD), unless it is desired to disable the LCD I and message waiting indication. 6. Ports 32 N 95 are found on the next page. The same notes apply. 2-78 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM35 STATIONCLASSOFSERVICE (PORTS32-95) Feature t 1-4 1201 .a,-. 1I I III I, / I I I I I .- '38 Port Numbers (32-63) 44 45 46 47 48 49 50151 39 40 41 42143 I I I I 52 53 54155 I 56157 58 59 60161162 I I 63 I I 17 16 I I I I I I 15 14 09 08 07 06 LCD Indiv. Message Message4 Waiting 05 (RCV) 04 03 LCD Type/32-ON/12-OFF I 5 02 LED Yevs ’ I Feature Port 64/65~66~67i68~69~70~71~72i73~74~7Si76i77178~78~80~81 -. -- -- - -- -- Numbers - - -- (64-95) -. /87~8.118LL/8~18618718s184~sn~91 -- -- -. --i--1-. -- -- -- - kd92194/95 I- -I - -- 20 19 I I 18 17 16 15 14 i,1 13 12 11 10 09 I 08 07 I I 06 LCD Indiv. 1 Messaae LCD Message4 Waitina Display 5 05 (RCV\ IO11 I I Notes from page 2-78 apply. 2-79 I I I I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 36 FIXED CALL FORWARD (VOICE CALLS ONLY) I / -7 SELECT = Port Number (00-95) Enter the port number of the station that needs a Fixed Call Forward location assigned. See Note 3 for a range of ports. FORWARD TEL = Port Number Enter the port number of the station or VM port that will be call forwarded to when the Fixed Call Forward key is pressed. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. initialized data does not assign a Fixed Call Forward location to any port. 3. To enter a range of ports, key in the following sequence: 6. 7. 8. nom00 / Low port 4. Press LED/key 5. (00-95) 0 1 to enter blanks. See Program 39, code 86, to assign Fixed Call Forward keys on EKTs. Fixed Call Forward will forward all calls to the designated port. Stations that have fixed call forward set will not ring. Program 92-9 does not clear fixed call forward memory. 2-80 \ High port PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM37 RlNGTRANSFER(CAMP-0N)RECALLTlME SELECT = Port Number (00-95) HOLD TIME = Ring Transfer Recall Time Enter the number of the port that needs a Ring Transfer Recall time assigned. See Note 3 for entering a range of ports. Enter Time range three the Ring Transfer Recall (in seconds). The acceptable is 011 - 999 seconds. Use digits. See Note 4. E Port Hold Time 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns a Ring Transfer Recall Time of 032 seconds to all ports. 3. To enter a range of ports, key in the sequence: q OHO[7 / \ Low port 4. The acceptable 5. Ring Transfer (camped-on) 6. Ring Transfer Recall will be High port range of Ring Transfer Recall Times is 1 I seconds to 999 seconds (16.65 minutes). Recall Time is the time it takes to recalla station that originates an unanswered or busy transferred call. must be allowed (Program 10-1, LED 07 “ON’~ for transfer recall to function; otherwise immediate. 2-81 PRO( RAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECT ON 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 38 ELECTRONICAND DIGITAL TELEPHONEKEYSTRIP TYPE I SELECT= Port Number (00-95) Enter the port number of the station that needs a keystrip defined. See Note 4 for entering a range of ports. KEY MENU = Code Enter the appropriate 20-key 20-key See Note 5. code as follows: 1 32 1 33 (B) (C) 11 I1 12 1I 13 II 14 II 15 I I 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 64 65 66 67 ‘68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 60 al a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 88 90 a9 91 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns Code 3 1 to all ports. 3. Always complete Program 38 before proceeding to 39. 4. To enter a range of ports, key in the sequence: q 01*1017 7 Low port \ High port 5. The default electronic telephone keystrips assigned by the codes follow: Code 2 1 1 O-key Code 3 1 ZO-key (A) Code 32 ZO-key (B) 2-82 Code 33 20-key (C) 63 62 I 76 / 77 I 78 , 79 I 80 61 I 92 / 93 I I 94 95 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM 38(continued) ELECTRONICAND DIGITALTELEPHONEKEYSTRIPTYPE 6. The default 1 co15 digital telephone 1 co16 1 co17 keystrips 1 DND assigned IFLASH by the codes are as follows: 1 Code 3 1 20-key (A) 7. The digital telephone keystrip it still can be assigned. Code 32 20-key (B) for code 33, shown below, is not provided PAU RDL SDS DND FLASH SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 SD6 co5 CO6 co7 CO8 SD1 /NT co1 co2 co3 co4 Code 33 20-key (C) 2-83 with your system; however, PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 39 FLEXIBLE KEY ASSIGNMENT REFERENCEGUIDE l_el-i~lool-I-IS~~-~-~~n~-I-~. SELECT or range. = Port Number See Note 4. 7 / c,L. ~~ Press LED key to be defined. See tables on the following pages. Enter the appropriate code that corresponds to the feature to be assigned. See the feature code reference table below. Key Name Abbrv. Door Lock 1 thru Door Lock 4 (HDCB 1 - 4, W Intercom Intercom MSG 81 MW/FL 99 Provides message waiting LED and Flash key MC0 88 Sets microphone on/off for incoming handsfree intercom calls MODEM 88 Used to reserve in modem pool Night Transfer Tenant 1 NT1 91 Sets Tenant DAY/NIGHT 1 CO ringing mode Night Transfer Tenant 2 NT2 92 Sets Tenant DAY/NIGHT 2 CO ringing mode 95 Sets a pause in Speed Dial. See Program 12-3 93 Sets a 1 O-second in Speed Dial Modem (R3) Pause Pause PAU (Long) PAW) Pooled Line modem pause Multiple CO lines may appear under one key Prevents Privacy (not Ext. Over.) Release PRV RLS 79 Changes station Privacy mode to Non-private for CC Redial Last Number (1 key) RDL 96 Redials number Release RLS 76 Releases current call and makes station idle SAVE 85 Saves last number dialed for future speed dial SDS 97 Begins speed selection Privacy (R2) Override the last dial Dial SD *10*49 Reserves key for station speed dial Speed Dial (Fixed) SD(F) **“9”- $;;i$ap~ti;~or Tone TONE 90 the 31 from key 53 (R3) Speed Dial Select ([ key) with Code line access PRIVACY Privacy Speed NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding record sheets. 2. Complete Program 38 before Program 39. 3. Initialized data assigns keystrip pattern associated 4. Specify a range of ports by keying in 61 68 PL Save Last Number data call Momentarily unlocks door (3 or 6 sec.). See Prog. 77, and 77-2. Begins LCD message selection Microphone cut-off Releases Notes 00 Message Waiting and Flash calls to selected Code II 72 73 74 75 INT LCD Message Forwards ! DRLKl DFiLK2 DRLKB DRLK4 Program CO dial signals tone or pulse set set to 38. q nHnn Lowport 5. IEm 6. m&m 7. q - ’ \igh port Sets pauses in Speed Dial if telephone does not have a pause key. Sets flashes in Speed Dial if telephone has a pause key. Both keys must be programmed on electronic telephone; not allowed separately. stations using voice mail, since they allow easy access of [ andi DTMF keys. Codes 61 .- 68 represent CO line groups 81 w 88. Maximum 4 keys per pooled line group on each station. q 2-84 Recommended on all I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM39 FLEXIBLEKEYASSIGNMENTFORPORTS TO- / / Port Number PDKU or PEKU SLOT NO. \ Code Key 032) W) (W 1 CO36 1 (R3) (R3) (R3) (W 63’) FW KEY PL PRIVACY PRV RLS RDL3 RLS SAVE SDS3 SD2 SD(F) 2 VW TONE PORT 100 200 NO. LCD0 DIU 0 PORT LOCATION: loo NO. LCD0 PORT 20DDIUO LOCATION: Code Key 20 09 19 09 19 08 ia 08 la 08 18 07 17 07 17 07 17 06 16 06 16 05 15 05 15 04 14 04 14 03 13 03 13 02 12 02 12 I 01 PORT NO. LOCATION: lOI LCD0 20tlDIUO 1 PORT DIU Ill 1 I 100 LCD0 200DIUO NO. PORT NO. 100 LCDu 200DIUO LOCATION: Key 10 NOTES: LCDu 1 10 06 1 CODE 61 - 68 53 79 96 76 a5 97 *10 m *49 * 60 * 99 90 LOCATION: Code Key iiifxq? 100 200 NO. . Code Key Code 20 1. See Program 39 on previous page for more flexible key information. 2. DSS buttons are used for Voice calls only; Speed Dial (SD) buttons are used for VoiCe and/or DATA calls~ 3. To allow a station to set 1 and i DTMF tones in speed dial numbers, the station must have the SDS and RDL buttons. 1000 series Digital Telephone only require the m button because the wm b&ton is permanent and replaces the m function. 2-85 0 (R3) I (9 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM40 STATIONCOLINEACCESS (PORTSOO-35) SELECT = Port Numbers Key LEDs = CO Lines Light LEDs for the port(s) specified. 06 05 04 03 02 01 06 05 04 03 02 01 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Ports 36 - 71 on next page. The same notes apply. 3. Initialized data reads all LEDs ON for all CO lines. Complete CO line access is allowed on all ports. 4. Denying access in this program applies to all access options, including LCR. 5. This program also denies Pickup CO line access. 6. A range of ports may be entered by keying in: onwoo ’ Low port in range J Tgh port in range 2-66 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM40 STATION CO LINEACCESS (PORTS36-71) SELECT Co = Port Numbers Key LED 36 16 35 15 33 32 31 13 12 11 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12, 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 KeyLEDs = CO Lines Light LEDs for the port(s) specified. Port Numbers 36-71 36137138139140/41142143144/45146/47148/49~50~51~52~53~54~55~56 Ill I I I I I I I I I I I I II 34 14 NOTE: Ports 72 - 95 and 99 on next page. The same notes apply. 2-87 57 58 59 60 61 6263 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM40 STATIONCOLINEACCESS (PORTS72 - 95, AND99) SELECT 1 I I tl E ;; = Port Numbers Key LEDs = CO Lines Light L EDs for the port(s) -I/ :; .J’ specified. i i i I i i i i i i i I i i i UL ni 20 19 _,’ 2-88 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM41 STATION OUTGOINGCALLRESTRICTION (PORTSOO-35) SELECT = Port Numbers Key LkDs = CO Lines Light LEDs for the port(s) to be restricted. Port Numbers Key Co 1 36 LED 00-35 00/01(02~03~04~05~06~07~08~09~10~11~12~13~14~15~16~17~18~19~20~21~22/23~24~25~26~27~28~29~30~31~32/33~34~3! 16 II I I I I I I I I III I I I I I I I I I I I , -II I I I I L” 19 L” 19 x 18 17 16 15 14 13 18 17 16 15 14 13 g 12 12 5f 11 10 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 I /I 1 I , I I I I I I i I - / '; !- ( / I 1, ! I I / NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Ports 36 - 71 on next page. The same notes apply to all ports. 3. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines (all stations allowed outgoing access to all CO lines). 4. This program denies all outgoing calls except when using least cost routing. 5, A range of ports may be entered by keying in: 6. With Release I software, CO lines restricted (LED “ON’:, in Program 41 -High port in range L may not be accessed for ABR calls; Low port in range with Release 2 and above, restricted CO lines may be accessed for A BR calls. q owoo 2-89 ’ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM41 STATION OUTGOINGCALL RESTRICTION (PORTS 36 -71) SELECT = Port Numbers Port Numbers Key Co t 36 LED 16 Key LEDs = CO Lines Light LEDs for the port(s) to be restricted. 36-71 36~37~38~39~40~41~42~43~44~45~46~47~48/49~50~51~52~53~54~55~56~57~58~59~60~61~6~63~64~65~66~67~68~69~70~71 II I III I III I III I III NOTE: Ports 72 - 95 and 99 on next page. The same notes apply. 2-90 I III III I I III II PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM41 STATION OUTGOINGCALL RESTRICTION (PORTS72-95,AND99) SELECT = Port Numbers . Key LEDs = CO Lines Light LEDs for the port(s) to be restricted. NOTE: 99 is used to restrict DISA access to CO lines for outgoing calls through the system. 2-91 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 42-O CO LINE TO PBX/CENTREX CONNECTION SELECi =0 Spe‘cify CO lines by setting key LEDs as defined by the table below. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the irtstructions preceding the record sheets. I 2. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines. 3. This progam must be utilized to allow CENTREWPBX (after flash) features to operate. 4. If CO line is programmed for behind CENTREWPBX (LED ON), re-seize guard time is 1.5 seconds. If CO line is programmed for normal operation guard time is 0.45 seconds. See Program 10-1, Key/LED 02 (Release 2 and above). 2-92 ,’ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM42-1-8 PBX/CENTREXACCESSCODES SELECT = I-8 /TCCESS CODE = Enter a P-digit access PBX Access Code Group Enter the PBX Group code for the group, number 1 - 8 that needs as defined by the table an access code assigned. below. See Note 3. PBXZENTREX Access Code Number 2 I NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns no access codes to PBX groups. 3. l If access code is single digit, enter the first digit and press key/L ED 0 1 as second digit. l Press LED key 0 1 to delete a digit. l Press key/LED 02 for don’t care. For example, pressingI+ key/LED 02 allows 80 N 89. 4. This program must be utilized to allow correct toll restriction and CENTREX/PBX transfer operation. 2-93 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM43 STATION/COLlNECREOlTCAROCALLALLOWEO(RELEASE3) (PORTSOO-35) ,- .-. .; ,,' . ~-~~r;;1l~-~nn~-~-l~-~-r;1 7 \ SELECT = Station Port Numbers Key LEDs = CO Lines Assigned LED 1 36 16 33 32 13 12 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 stations Port Numbers7 DO-35 Key Co to allow dial O+ calls with selected 00~01(02/03~04~05~06/07~08~09/10~11~12/13~14/15~16~17~18~19~20)21~22~23~24~25~26~27~28~29/30~31~32/33~34/3! II I III I III I III I III I III I/I/ I III I I NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. For Stations and CO lines enabled in this program: O+ calls override system toll restriction, and calls will disconnect automatically if the number of digits set in Program 60-7 is not dialkd when-“0”is dialed as the first digit. This restricts the operator from placing calls that would be charged back to the telephone line. 2-94 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM43 STATION/CO LINECREDITCAROCALLALLOWED (PORTS 36 -71) . ppy--ijT;11~-~InnT;;I-~~-T;?-~~ / SELECT Co Key LED = Station \ Port Numbers Key LEDs = CO Lines Assigned to allow dial O+ calls with selected Port Numbers 36-71 jO/51152153154155156/57~58159160161~62/63164165166167168~69170~7 NOTE: Ports 72 - 95 and 99 on next page. The same notes apply. 2-95 stations PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 43 STATION/CO LINE CREDIT CARD CALL ALLOWED (PORTS 72 - 95) SELECT x 8 f . .. .. 10 09 f-m 10 09 fl8 06 05 04 03 02 06 05 04 03 02 Key LEDs = CO Lines Assigned to allow dial O+ calls with selected 72-95 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 9519 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 na 5 Port Nhnbsrs Port Numbers co LED Key 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 3Q = Station Ill I I , I I / I- 1 --+ / I I ILL '- I I I I I ' 2-96 stations. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM44A(RELEASE3) EMERGENCYBYPASSOFFORCED/VERIFIEDACCOUNTCODES SELECT = 51,52, or 53 to set emergency number 1,2 or 3 - DATA = 3 or 4 digit emergency telephone number To enter blanks, Press: LED/Key q Example Emergency Number Emergency Number 2: Emergency Number 3: 911 = initialized Data 9911 (Note 2) Em Em SELECT = II- L- DATA = 3 or 4-digit telephone number NOTES: 1. The emergency telephone numbers assigned in this program will be sent out the CO line immediately when dialed; they will bypass the forced/verified account code dialing restriction. 2. If CO lines are behind PBX or CENTREX, program the PBWCENTREX outside trunk access code: Example: “9”. A pause is automatically inset-ted following the first 9. See Programs 42-O and 42-I to assign the CO line and access code for behind PBWCENTREX operation. Also, if the system CO lines are behind CENTREX/PBX, the CENTREXIPBX trunk access codes must be programmed in front of the emergency telephone number. Example: If the CENTREXYPBX access code is ‘9: then enter 99 I 1 in Program 44-51. 3. If verified account codes assigned in Program 69 conflict (are the same) with emergency telephone numbers assigned in Program 44A; Program 44A has priority. 4. This feature is for use with forced (verified or nonverified) account codes, but not with ABR and DISA. It also does not override Toll Restriction; emergency numbers must be allowed using system Toll Restriction tables per normal Toll Restriction programming procedures. 5. Program 448 is related to Toll Restriction and is placed with the other Toll Restriction programs in this chapter. 2-97 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 Programs 44B through 48 can be found in the Toll Restriction System Record section. Programs 50 through 56 can be found in the Least Cost Routing System Record section. 2-98 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM60 SMDROUTPUT/ACCOUNTCODEDlGlTLENGTH SELECT = 3 - 6 (Item) A Make a selection to indicate which item is being assigned. Select 3 for SMDR output. Select 4 to assign Forced/Voluntary Account code digit length, etc. Description Item 3 4 5 W’) 6 (R3) 7 Data SMDR Output when a call is completed. 1 = Incoming and Outgoing 0 = Outgoing Only ‘°Forced/Voluntary Account Code Digit Length 04 - 15. (Digits are verified per Prog. 30, Key/LED and Prog. 69. Printout W For “3” SMD~ COR = 0 or I (Data) Enter one digit to indicate SMDR output operation. 0 = No Incoming Record 1 = Incoming and Outgoing Record For “4” ACCOUNT = 04 - 15 Enter the number of digits allowed for forced/voluntary account codes. The range is 04 - 15. Enter two digits. For “5” TOLL DIAL Enter one digit (the range is 0 - 5). For “6” DATA = DISA security code; 1 - 15 digits. For “7” CREDIT = Credit Card Digits; 1 - 30 digits COR) 0 (ACCOUNT) III 14, (TOLL options Toll Dial = 0 17 = 1 El = 2 0 = 3 0 = 4 III = 5 0 (SMDR DIAL DATA 0 All Calls (Note 7) Dial “0” calls only Dial “1” calls only Dial “00” calls only Dial “I”, “0”, calls only Dial “1” or “00” calls only DISA Security Code9 (may be changed from station, per Program 30) Credit card call digit length, 01 - 30 digits, (see Program 43) DATA [7-o CREDIT” q III NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. For Selection 3, initialized data assigns SMDR output to be enabled for incoming calls that are answered. 3. For selection 4, initialized data assigns a g-digit length to all Forced/Voluntary Account Codes. 4. If PBX code is dialed, numbers dialed after the code will be checked. 5. If A/C, O/C or SPCC code begins with “Of’, “I “, or “00’; that call will print out. 6. When accessing LCR feature, all digits sent to CO will be output. 7. Programming 60-3-U (printout outgoing call only) is still available. 8. Key/LED 7 = blank, key/LED 2 = don’t care. 9. If a security code is not programmed, outgoing CO line access via DISA will not require a security code I when dialing. 10. See Program 69 for verified account codes (R3). 11. Number of digits required when “0” is the first digit dialed; if this number of digits is not dialed, the system will disconnect the call after 20 seconds. “0” is counted as a digit. Example: 0 + I + 714 + 583 - 3700 = 12 digits; 12 should be programmed as a minimum in this case. 2-99 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 69 (RELEASE 3) VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES(000 m 049) SELECT = Verified VERIFIED VACN 1 2 I 3 I Account ACCOUNT 5 4 I Code Number I 6 I 1 CODE (1 - 15 DIGITS) 7 I (VACN) 9 10 11 12 8 I I I I I 13 I l! 14 I IVACN Verified VERIFIED 1 2 3 Account ACCOUNT 4 5 6 7 Code (1 - 15 digits) CODE 8 (1 - 15 DIGITS) 9 IO 11 12 13 14 It I 025 026 027 028 1 006 032 008 036 038 016 I I I I III Ill I I 042 048 023 024 NOTES: 1. Account code format l Account code digit length is defined in Program 60-4 (4 - 15 digits). l To dial an account code, station users must always dial the quantity of digits defined in Program 60-4. l If the quantity of digits in a verified account code is the same as the account code digit length in Program 60-4, then all digits will be verified; if the quantity of digits are less, then only those digits will be verified. 2. Account codes may not conflict (be the same as) emergency numbers in Program 44A. 2-100 .;’ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTlON200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM69(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODES(050-099) 7 SELECT VACN = Verified l-r VERIFIED Account Al CCOUNT 12 Code Number More Codes (VACN) CODE (1 - 15 DIGITS) . 1 1 I. 1 VACN Verified VERIFIED 1 12 13 1415 Account ACCOUNT 16 17 Code (1 - 15 digits) CODE (1 - 15 DIGITS) 18 ~9~10~11~12(13~14~15 - 076 077 078 083 084 085 087 097 098 099 Notes from page 2- 100 apply. 2-101 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM69(RELEASE3) VERIFIED ACCOUNTtODES(lOO'-149) 7 More Codes l~-~-*q-ppp--j-p-j lXl-~S~H1!lSOC SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACq VACN VERIFIEDAC 1 2 100 3 4 COUNT CODE 5 1617 (1 - 15 DIGITS) 18 ~9~10~11~12~13~14~15 7 1 , 1 VAIN!* 1i i i i i i i i i I 107,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 108 116 118 2-102 L Verified Account Code (1 - 15 digits) ACCOUNT CODE (1 - 15 DIGITS) PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM69(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODES(150-199) 7 SELECT = Verified Account Code Number More Codes (VACN) - Notes from page 2- 100 apply. 2-103 - L- Verified Account Code 11 w 15 diaits) PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM69(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODES(200-249) I- SELECT VACN = Verified VERIFIED Account ACCOUNT Code Number CODE More Codes (VACNI 1 (1 - 15 DIGITS) 1 Notes from page 2- 700 apply. 2-104 -I L-- Verified Account Code (1 - 15 dioits) PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM69(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODES(250-299) SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN) -VERIFIED VACN 1 ACCOUNT 2 3 4 5 6 7 CODE (1 - 15 DIGITS) 8 9 10 11 12 13 L 1 14 1 15 255 256 257 258 - 259 260 261 - 262 266 267 268 Notes from page 2- 100 apply. 2-105 Verified Account Code (I - 75 digits) CODE (1 - 15 DIGITS) PROGRAMMlNGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM70(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODETOLLRESTRlCTlONASSlGNMENTS (VAC 000 - 099) SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN) y DATA VAC Restrict Code (0 - 6) = VAC &yjt Restriction Cod;? 0 or 7 000 - 299 Enter 0 for No Station To// Restriction. Enter 1 for Area Code Toll Restriction. Enter 2 for Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st or 2nd digit. Enter 3 for Class 1 Toll Restriction. Enter 4 for Class 2 Toll Restriction. Enter 5 for Class 3 Toll Restriction. Enter 6 for Class 4 Toll Restriction. Enter 0 for no digit restriction. Enter 1 for digit restriction. 1 063 1 1 I NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data reads 00 for all VACNs. 3. This restriction overrides the normal station restriction assigned in Program 48 when ‘a VAC is entered at the station. The station resumes its Program 48 restriction after the call is disconnected. 4. Range programming is not available. 2-106 \ .* PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTlON200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM70(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODETOLLRESTRlCTlONASSlGNMENTS (VAClOO-199) SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN) ____-----------,-‘;-7 DATA = VA C Digit Restriction Code 0 or 1 Enter 0 for no digit restriction. Enter 1 for digit restriction. VAC Restriction Code (0 - 6) Enter 0 for No Station Toll Restriction. Enter I for Area Code Toll Restriction. Enter 2 for Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or I as 1st or 2nd digit. Enter 3 for Class 1 Toll Restriction. Enter 4 for Class 2 Toll Restriction. Enter 5 for Class 3 Toll Restriction. Enter 6 for Class 4 Toll Restriction. VACN 106 in7 108 109 1 I 1 I 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 I Notes from page 2- IO6 apply. 2-107 VAC Digit Restrict Code “AC Restrict Code 3 3 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM70(RELEASE3) VERlFlEDACCOUNTCODETOLLRESTRlCTlONASSlGNMENTS (VAC200-299) SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN) 228 Restriction Code 0 or 1 Enter 0 for no digit restriction. Enter I for digit restriction. 1 Notes from page 2- 106 apply. 2-108 VAC Restriction Code (0 - 6) Enter 0 for No Station Toll Restriction. Enter 1 for Area Code Toll Restriction. Enter 2 for Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st or 2nd digit. Enter 3 for Class 1 Toll Restriction. Enter 4 for Class 2 Toll Restriction. Enter 5 for Class 3 Toll Restriction. Enter 6 for Class 4 Toll Restriction. , /' PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 77-1 PERIPHERAL OPTIONS (DOOR PHONES/IMDU/PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) p-pJT;lT;llpJ-pJr;l-$-JYJ-pJ-r;1 7 SELECT = 1 \ LED Key Light the key.s/LEDs that are marked with an X in the table below. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs off. 3. HDCB = Door Phone Control Box. Up to four HDCBs may be installed in a system. They must be assigned a PEKU or PEW port number to operate. 4. If a modem unit (IMDU) is installed on a PIOU or PIOUS, it can be accessed by dialing station 19. 5. If NT1 is turned on at an electronic or digital telephone, then the door phone will ring over external page. 6. This option applies to the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU Door Lock Control (DRLK 0) assigned to electronic or digital telephone keys using Code 71 in Program 39; it does not apply to HDCB door locks. 7. HDCB4 is available with PCTU (1, 2, or 3), but not with PCTUSI. 8. Assigns Tenants 1 and 2 CO lines to night ring over PIOU external paging zones 1 - 4 (see the Installation Section 200-096-208 for more information regarding night ringing over selected paging zones). 2-109 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM77-2 DOORPHONEBUSYSIGNAL/DOORLOCKASlGNMENTS SELECT = 2 LED Key Light the LED keys marked with an X in the table below. LED Kev LED ON LED OFF 20 - - 19 - - 18 - - 17 - - 16 (R2) HDCB4 B-jack is Door Lock Control #44 B is connected 15 Door phone 4C Busy Out No Busy Signal 14 Door phone 4B Busy Out No Busy Signal 13 Door phone 4A Busv Out No Busv Sianal 12 (R2) HDCB3 B-jack is Door Lock Control #3 B is connected 11 Door phone 3C Busy Out No Busy Signal 10 Door phone 3B Busy Out No Busy Signal 09 Door phone 3A Busy Out No Busy Signal 08 (R2) HDCB2 B-jack is Door Lock Control #2 B is connected 07 Door phone 2C Busy Out No Busy Signal 06 Door phone 2B Busy Out No Busy Signal 05 Door phone 2A Busv Out No Busv Sianal 04 (R2) HDCBl B is connected 03 Door phone 1 C Busy Out No Busy Signal 02 Door phone 1 B Busy Out No Busy Signal Door phone 1A Busy Out No Busy Signal 01 I x I I B-jack is Door Lock Control #l NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. initialized data reads all LEDs OFF. 3. HDCB Door Lock Control is available with Release 2 and higher. 4. HDCB4 is not available with PCTUS. 5. HDCB cannot be connected to PDKU or PSTU ports. HDCB PEKU/PESU Port Assignments 2-110 to Door Phone 4B to Door Phone 3B to Door Phone 2B to Door Phone 1 B PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM78 CO LINESPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS DISA/IMDU/NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE I,-,I~~~-~nn -f+JqYy-p-pJ /7- \ SELECT = Feature Number Code Enter Feature 1, 2or5. Enter Code Number 1-3. Number CO Line Specify CO lines by setting LED keys as defined by the tab/e below. All LEDs with an “X” should be lit when finished. On-hook Feature Number 1 2 5 I \ Code Feature Description CO Lines 01 - 20 (LED Keys) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (01)(02)(03)(04)(05)(06)(07)(08)(09)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)(16)(17)(16)(19)(2 3 Ring Over External Page5 during NIGHT 1 DISAIDISC CO Line during DAY 2 DISAIDISC CO Line during DAY2 3 DISAIDISC CO Line during NIGHT 1 Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY 2 Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY2 3 Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during NIGHT Mode 17 16 19 2' mode 4 Mode4 Mode4 Mode Mode Mode Off-hook Feature 2 5 Description 2 DISAIDISC CO Line during DAY2 Mode4 3 DISA/DISC CO Line during NIGHT 1 Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY 2 Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY2 3 Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during NIGHT Mode4 Mode Mode Mode NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs off. 3. Shaded table indicates that the handset must be set off-hook during programming. l Program CO lines 01 through 20 with handset on-hook. l Program CO lines 21 through 36 with handset off-hook. 4. DISA, which allows outgoing CO line access as well as (DISC) internal calling, is available with Release 2 and above; for DISA, see Programs 10-1, 15, 60, 40, 41, 48, and 03, code 92 or 93 (for DISA, the CRCU PCB must be installed on the PCTU). 5. See Program 77-1 for night ringing configuration. 2-111 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM79 DOOR PHONERINGING (PORTSOO-31) SELECT = Port Number Enter the port number having Door Phone Ringing assigned. Kf ?Y I LE :D 00~01/02~03104 Feature IMuted ringto busy EKT/DK$l 20 1 / 05 06 0708/09/10 Key LEDs Select keys indicated table below. Port Numbers 00-31 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 272829 / NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Ports 32 - 95 on next page. The same notes apply to all ports. 3. Initialized data does not assign door phone ringing to any station port. All LEDs are OFF. 4. A range of ports may be entered by keying in the following: noHa / Lowport in range I in the \ High port in range 5. Door phones can ring any number of elecfronic and digital telephones, but do not ring standard telephones or ofher devices connected to PESU or PSTU station ports. 6. On/y the lowest port in a ringing group will receive muted ring tone if all EKTs/DKTs in the ringing group are busy and the door phone key is pressed. 2-112 30 31 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM79 DOOR PHONE RINGING (PORTS 32 - 95) Notes from page 2- I 12 apply. 2-113 . PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM80 I ELECTRONIC AND DlGlTALTELEPHONERlNGlNGTONES(C0 LINECALLS) / 7 SELECT = Port Number Enter number of port having its ringing tone defined. See Note 4 for entering a range of ports. Ringing Tone (Code) Ringing Tone Code Enter 1 for Tone 1 (500/640 Enter 2 for Tone 2 (600/800 Port Numbers Hz). Hz). 00-31 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Tone 1 (1) I Tone 2 (2) Ringing Tone (Code) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Port Numbers 32 33134 35 36 3738 39 40 41 42 43 4445 32-63 46 47 48 49 50 51 52153154 Tone 1 (1) I Tone 2 (2) Ringing Tone (Code) 55 56157158 59 60 61 62 63 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Port Numbers 64-95 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81/82/83 Tone 1 (1) Tone 2 (2) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding 2. Initialized data assigns Tone I to all station ports. 3. Tone 1 is 500 Hz modulated with 640 Hz. Tone 2 is 600 Hz modulated with 800 Hz. 4. A range of ports may be specified by entering the record sheets. q omn17 / Low port in range 2-114 \ High port in range 84 85 86 87 88 89 90191 92 93 94 95 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM80 (l-9) CO LINE/STATION RINGING ASSIGNMENTS (Ports 00 -35) pq-pJ-Tj~pq-~~~~-~~-~-~~ . / SELECT = 1 - 9 %LECT = Port Number(s) for type of ringing of station(s) that must ring \ Key LEDs = CO Lines assigned to ring selected port number(s) Selected CO lines ring selected station ports per Ringing Program options as follows: 80 Immediate 8H 12 second delay 8w 24 second delay IDAY/ mi Key I Co ?G LED :i ~?~~~~ delay m 8m 24 second delay Port Numbers ii ~~~~~~ delay 8 H 24 second delay 00-35 00~01)02~03~04~05~06/07~08~09/10111112/13~14/15~16/17/18~19~20~21~22/23~24/25/26/27~28~29/30~31~32~33~34~3! 1c NOTES: 1. For more information, 2. Ports 36 - 71 on next 3. Initialized data reads 4. If a CO line must Call 5. A range of ports may II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I see the instructions preceding the record sheets. page. all LEDs ON for port 00 in Program 81 and port 01 in Program 87, all other LEDs are OFF. Forward or Hunt from a station, the line must be assigned to ring at that station on/y. be selected. 2-115 I I I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 80 (1 - 9) CO LINE/STATION RINGING-ASSliiNMENTS (Ports 36 - 71) pq-pJ-q~~-~~~~-f+J~-~-~ . \ = Port hbnd&J SELECT = 1 - 9 -SELECT of station(s) that must ring for type of ringing Key LEDs = CO Lines assigned to ring selected port number(s) Selected CO lines ring selected station ports per Ringing Program options as follows: 80 Immediate 80 12 second delay 80 24 second delay I DAY 8B Immediate 80 12 second delay 8m 24 second delay m Port Numbers Key Co 1 36 LED 16 80 Immediate 8m 12 second delay 8 24 second delay m q 36-71 36~37~38~39~40~41/42/43~44~45~46/47~48~49~50~51~52~53~54~55~56~57~58j59~60~61~62~63~64~65~66~67~68~69~70~7~ II I III III I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Illi NOTES: 1. Ports 72 - 95 on next page. Notes from the previous 2. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF. 2-116 page apply to all ports. ’ I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAMB[7 (l-9) CO LINE/STATION RINGING ASSIGNMENTS (Ports 72 - 95) SELECT= l-9’ for type of ringing SELECT = Port Numberis) of station(s) that must ring \ . Key LEDs = CO Lines assigned to ring selected port number(s) Selected CO lines ring selected station ports per Ringing Program options as follows: (DAY1 80 Immediate 80 12 second delay 8m 24 second delay F ;i &J 5 08 07 28 27 NOTE: Initialized IDAY2/ data reads all LEDs OFF. 8a 80 Immediate 12 second delay m 8m 24 second delay Notes from previous 2-117 ii ~~~~~~ d&y 8B 24 second delay page apply. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 System Record Sheets for Programs 90 and 92 are in the beginning of this section because they must be executed before any other programs. 2-118 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM93 CO LINE IDENTIFICATION SELECT CO Line Identification Enter the CO line identification (16 alphanumeric characters is the maximum). See Note 4 for LCD message editing. = 1 Choose the key LED for the CO line being named. See Note 2. -Key CO I I.-LED une 16 15 ( (36) / (35) 16 15 14 (16) (15) l 06 05 ( (06) 1 I (05) 1 flA 1 lnA\ “7 03 \ , CO Line Identification (16 Characters Max. - Enter One Per Sauare) . I 1 I (ii, a NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Program CO lines 01 - 20 by setting LEDs 1 - 20 with the handset on-hook. Program CO lines 21 - 36 by setting LEDs 1 - 16 with the handset off-hook. 3. Initialized data assigns no identification message to CO lines. 4. Special 2-119 editing keys include 1 to toggle from alphabetic numeric,. 0 rboves cuisor to right; i moves cursor to left; 1 increments letters, etc. to PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM 93(continued) CO LlNElNDENTlFlCATlONALPHA/NUMERIC ENTRY 1) Enter Program 93 and select the desired CO line. 2) Use the guide below to enter CO line identification Numeric information. Mode “0” to “9” are treated as numerals. NOTE: Key pad starts out in Numeric Use 1 key to switch to Alpha Mode. Mode. Alpha Mode Moves cursor to right, and starts special character entry when in the Alpha Mode ; A; DE GHI JKL MN0 El El 161 PRS TUV WXY Changes from Numeric to Alpha Mode and vice versa Moves cursor to left. Scrolls alpha and special characters Alpha Entry (Example): Special Character A-1 ‘IQ” --t mB B--W “Z” --t n mm C--WI “:‘I --t fl 1 B 1 T Alpha Character Entry: lEntry Sequence ‘I/. -0y~1 T Special Character 2-120 Entry Sequence I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM97 PRINTINGPROGRAMDATATHROUGHSMDR -7 \ SELECT = Program Number to be printed on SMDR. See Note 2 for entering a range of programs. NOTES: 1. For more information, DATA PRINT Printout begins. see the instructions 2. Enter a range of programs by keying preceding the record sheets. q omno / \ Low program in range 2-121 miim Cancels printout at any time. High program in range PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 SETTING THE DATE, TIME AND DAY HOW TO SET THE DATE The date can be set only from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to port 00. Press the following key sequence with the handset on the hook: l- Date in year/month/day format (YYMMDD). If month or day is a single digit, precede with a zero (0). If the EKT has a Redial key programmed, press it instead, HOW TO SET THE TIME The time can be set only from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to port 00. Press the following key sequence with the handset on the hook: -II# Time in hours/minutes/seconds d format (HHMMSS from 000000 to 235959). If any of these values is a single digit, precede with a zero (0). If the EKT has a Redial key programmed, press it instead. HOW TO SET THE DAY The date can be set only from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to port 00. Press the following key sequence with the handset on the hook: piqI”Tmn-n-m l-lEnter the digit for today’s day: 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 1 1 If ‘the EKT has a Redial key programmed, press it instead. NOTES: 1. The date, time and day can be set immediately following initialization or after programming 2. The system should not be in programming mode for the date, time and day to be set. 3. Set date, time and day from station 200, connected to PEKU or PDKU port 00. 2-122 I RDL is Gocompleted. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES TOLL RESTRICTION SYSTEM RECORD SECTION Programs 44B - 48 2-123 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM44B TOLLRESTRlCTlONCLASS(l-4)OVERRlOECODES SELECT = Toll restriction Class 1 - 4 J - DATA = &digit Toll Restriction for Selected Class Code Code for Toll Restriction Class Code for Toll Restriction Class Code for Toll Restriction Class 00110 El 0000 El q ono Code for Toll Restriction Class SELECT El q T L DATA = 4-Digit code NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Classes I - 4 are defined in Program 46. 3. When the Toll Restriction override code is dialed, the station’s class defined in Program 48 will be changed to the class assigned to the code in Program 448. 4. Do not use same codes set in Program 45 (8 - 9). 5. Stations enabled in Program 30, Key/LED I6 “ON”, are allowed to enter and change Toll Restriction Class (I N 4) override codes. ‘, 2-124 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM45-1 LCR/lOLLRESTRlCTlON DIALPLAN SELECT = 1 DA-TA = Plan 1 - 5 Enter codes 1 - 5 to indicate the dial plan for the system. Releases 1 and 2 X Plan Toll Restriction/LCR Dial Plans 5 0+ (Note 7) 4 Universal (Note 7) 3 1+AC+NXX/NNX 2 1 +AC+NNX/i 1 AC+NNX/l +NNX +NNX Release 3 X IMPORTANT: Plan Toll Restriction/LCR Dial Plans 5 0+ (Note 7) 4 Universal (Note 7) 3 1+AC+NXX/NNX 2 1 +AC+NXX/l +NNX 1 AC+NXX/l +NNX The correct Dial Plan must be assigned or Toll Restriction to function properly. to allow system NOTES: 1. Initialized data assigns Dial Plan Code 1 to the system, N=2-9. 2. InNXXandNNX,X=O-9, 3. NXX = Office code (interchangeable; 2nd digit can be I or 0). 4. NNX = Office code (not interchangeable; 2nd digit cannot be 1 or 0). 5. AC = Area Code. 6. 0+, and universal (code 5 + 4) are not used in USA. 7. 1+ NNX indicates 1 may be dialed before office codes. 2-125 LCR and/ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM45-2 TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE p-pJ~~~-pJ-+Q$pYl-r;1-r;1 SELECT LED Key 16 15 14 10 09 , 08 1 07 1 06 05 04 03 02 01 20 19 18 17 16 15 1 g 14 NOTES: 1. For more 2. Program Program 3. Initialized 1 1 CO Line 36 35 34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 / =2 I \ LED Keys Specify CO lines by setting key LEDs as defined by the table below. All LEDs with an “X” should be lit when finished. ON = Disable Toll Restric m X 1 1 14 information, CO lines 0 I CO lines 2 I data reads see the instructions w 20 by setting LEDs w 36 by setting L EDs all LEDs OFF for all 2-126 preceding the record sheets. 01 * 20 with the handset on-hook. 0 I w 16 with the handset off-hook. CO lines. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM45-3-6 SPEClALCOMMONCARRlER(SPCC)NUMBERSANDAUTHORlZATlONCODEDlGlTLENGTH SELECT = Item 3-6’ Enter Item number 3-6 from table below. Item 3 DiTA = First five digits of the SPCC Number, or digit length specified in the table below. See Note 3. Description SPCCI Data = 1 st five digits of SPCC Number or Digit Length Number 4 Authorization Code 1 Digit Length (00 - 99) 5 SPCC2 6 Authorization Code 2 Digit Length (00 - 99) III nunnO no NOTES: I. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns “0O”data to items 4 and 6, and assigns blank data to items 3 and 5. 3. When editin 0 Press i ’ to move cursor. l Press LED key 01 to delete or leave a blank. l Press LED key 02 for don’t care. 4. Do not enter a digit length greater than necessary or Toll Restriction may be able to be defeated. 2-127 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM45-B,9 TOLLRESTRICTIONOVERRIDECODE m-mmHm-I-IS10-1700I7-IH1-lm-m 77 SELECT = 8 or 9 Enter 8 to Select Code 1. Enter 9 to Select Code 2. DATA = Code Enter the 4-digit code from the table below. Code (4 digits) Select = 8 Code 1 9 Code 2 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. When editing the data field, use key LED 0 1 to delete a digit; key LED 02 for don’t care. 3. Initialized data leaves code assignments blank. 4. Codes may be revised by station users specified in Program 30, key LED 09. 5. Do not use same 4-digit codes set in Program 44B, Toll Restriction Class (I - 4) Override codes. Program 45 (8 - 9) overrides Program 448 (1 - 4) if same codes are used. 2-128 . >\ I' PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM46-2-4 TOLLRESTRlCTlONALLOWED/DENIEDAREACODESASSlGNEDBYCLASS ~-~~~~-~100~-000-1-I-I-I-I 2ior inter one of the following numbers: 2 = add to memory, 3 = delete from memory,4# = display allowed codes in memory. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data includes all area codes in all classes. 3. A range of area codes can be entered by pressing: 4 DATA = Area Codes SELECT = Class Number / Enter toll restriction class number 1 - 4. y Enter or display area codes. See Notes 3 and 4. 4. Several ranges or individual area codes may be entered by separating them with a 1 key. 5. Tables with deny box checked do not represent memory. All area codes in memory are allowed. q nnwoonr;;lnnnwnnn \\ Low Area Code High Area Code 2-129 Denotes end of string PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM46-6-8 TOLLRESTRlCTlONALLOWED/DENIED OFFICECODESASSIGNED BYCLASS SELECT = Class Number Enter toll restriction class number 1 - 4. Class )21 Allowed Off ice Codes I I Class 6, 7or8 Enter one of the following numbers: 6 = add to memory, 7 = delete from memory, 8# = display allowed codes in memory. 131 I I NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. initialized data allows all office codes in all classes. 3. A range of office codes can be entered by pressing: Allowed Off ice Codes I Denied 0 I DATA = Office Codes Enter or display office codes. See Notes 3 and 4. I 0 I Denied I ) I (Check I n one) I (Check I one) I 4. Several ranges or individual office codes may be entered bv seoarating them with a B key. 5. Tables with the denied box checked do not represent memory. All Office Codes in memory are allowed. Low Office Code High Office Code 2-130 Denotes end of string PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTlON200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM46-10 TOLLRESTRlCTlONCLASSl PARAMETERS p-p-p$jp-pJ~pT-j4&p-pl / \ SELECT= 10 Enter IO on the keypad for class 1. LED 1 X Key LEDs Light every key LED marked an X in the table below. with LED OFF 1 20 19 18 Table 8 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 17 Table 7 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 16 Table 6 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 15 Table 5 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 14 Table 4 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 13 Table 3 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 12 Table 2 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 11 Table 1 Area/Office Exception Not Selected 10 09 I I 08 07 06 05 04 I I 03 1 + A/C + 555IAC + 555 Allowed Per Area Code Restriction 02 01 Restricted Allowed 01 I I 0 Restricted NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions 2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF. I preceding 2-131 the record sheets. Allowed PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM46-20 TOLLRESTRICTION CLASS2PARAMETERS p-p-pj~~-~~p$fJ)-p-pl-~ / SELECT = 20 Enter 20 on the keypad for class 2. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions 2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF. preceding 2-132 \ Key LEDs Light every key LED marked an X in the table below. the record sheets. with PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM46-30 TOLLRESTRlCTlONCLASS3PARAMETERS SELECT = 30 Enter 30 on the keypad for class 3. NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions 2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF. preceding 2-133 Key LEDs Light every key LED marked an X in the table below. the record sheets. with PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM46-40 TOLLRESTRICTION CLASS4PARAMETERS ~-pJ-q-qrqq-qq~-~-~-~ 7-+\ SELECT = 40 Enter 4 on the keypad for class 4. Key LEDs Light every key LED marked an X in the table below. 0 Restricted NOTES: 1. For more information, 2. Initialized data leaves see the instructions all LEDs OFF. preceding 2-134 the record sheets, with PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM47 TOLLRESTRlCTlONEXCEPTlONOFFlCECODESASSlGNEDBYAREACODE (TABLESlAND2) SELECT = Exception Table 1 - 8 Enter the number of the exception table, 1 - 8. A new exception table is needed for each area code with office codes that are exceptions to restriction. AREA CODE = DATA = Enter the area code. See Note 3. Enter or display office code(s). See Notes 4 and 5. I\ SELECT = Exception Table 1- 8 2,3or4 Enter the number of the exception table, 1 - 8 again. Enter Enter Enter table’s 2 to add to the exception table. 3 to delete from the exception table. 4# to display the exception office codes. Exception Table (1 - 8) [7 Area Code I Record of Exception I I Office Codes (Data) I I Exception Table (1 - 8) 0 Area Code NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns no office codes to tables. 3. On/y one area code may be entered per exception table. 4. TO enter a range of office codes, key in nnnT;;lnnnT;;lnnnmmnn 5. Several ranges or individual office / r-lcodes may be entered by separating Low Office High Office them with a 1 key. Code Code 6. Copy as required, maximum eight exception tables. 2-135 Denotes end of string I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM48 STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION SELECT Enter the station(s) See Note = Port Number(s) port number(s) of the being defined. 4 for entering a range. Digit Restriction Code 0 or 1 Enter 0 for no digit restriction. Enter 1 for digit restriction. Port Number 01 I 02 NOTES: 1. For more information, 2. Initialized data reads 3. Port 99 is DISA COS 4. A range of ports may Digit Restrict Code Station Restrict Code 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 . Station Restriction Code (0 - 6) Enter 0 for No Station Toll Restriction. Enter 1 for Area Code Toll Restriction. Enter 2 for Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st or 2nd digit. Enter 3 for Class 1 Toll Restriction. Enter 4 for Class 2 Toll Restriction. Enter 5 for Class 3 Toll Restriction. Enter 6 for Class 4 Toll Restriction. Digit Restrict Code Port Number 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 -^ /z 73 74 see the instructions preceding “10” for all ports. assignment. be entered DOB00 / \ Low port in range the record sheets. High port in range 2-136 ’ Station Restrict Code :~ .' PROGRAMMlNGPROCEOURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES LEAST COST ROUTING SYSTEM RECORD SECTION Programs 50 - 56 2-137 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 LCRCOLINEPROGRAMING 1) Use Program 16 to assign CO lines in groups per the reference chart below. CO Line Group Reference Chart CO Lines in Group (1 - 36) Line Group CO Line Type/Comments 1 (81) 2 (82) 3 (33) 4 034) 5 (85) 6 (86) 7 107\ 2) Use Program 40 to allow CO lines access to stations using LCR for outgoing calls. 3) Use Program 41 to deny outgoing CO line access except for LCR access. Important: Area code and office code structure must be defined by Program (Toll Restriction Dial Plan) for LCR to work properly. 4) Use Program 45-1 to enable the dial plan that is appropriate 45-l for the area where LCR calls will originate. PROGRAM50-1 LCRPARAMETERS SELECT = 1 LED Key 1 2 3 4 5 X Press Key LEDs for each LCR parameter. LED On Enable System LCR Not Used 555 LDI Route Per Program 50-4 Dial Tone After LCR Access Warning Tone Last Choice Route No. LED Off No LCR Not Used Per Area Code Table Silent No Warning Tone NOTES: 7. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Program 40 denies CO line access via LCR and denies all other access methods. 3. Program 41 allows CO line access via LCR but denies all other outgoing access methods: (701-736, 81-88, CO key). 4. initialized data: All LEDs OFF. 2-138 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM50-2 LCRHOMEAREACODE SELECT= 2 DATA = Home Area Code Enter the local area code. LCR Home Area Code NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Typically this code is entered in Program 51 table for the LCR route plan number calls in Program 50-5. 3. Initialized data leaves the home area code blank. defined PROGRAM50-31-35 LCRSPECIALCODES SELECT = 31~ 35 DATA = Special Code Enter 31 - 35 to indicate the special code. Enter the code from the table below. Special Code 31 I Examples l-411 32 911 33 611 34 35 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data leaves all codes blank. 3. Press LED key 01 to erase data; and leave blank. 4. These calls follow the local call route defined in Program 50-5. 2-139 for the local PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 50-4 LCR LONG DISTANCE INFORMATION (LDI) PLAN NUMBER 7-l SELECT =4 DATA = LDI Route Plan (1 - 8) Identify the LDI Route Plan by entering 1 - 8. LDI Plan Number: (1 -8) 0 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns LDI Plan Number 8. 3. Typically, LDI Plan Number = Local Call Plan Number. PROGRAM 50-5 LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER SELECT Local =5 DATA = Local Route Plan (1 - 8) Identify the Local Route Plan by entering 1 - 8. Call Plan Number: (1 -8) 0 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns plan 8 to be the local call plan. 3. The local plan handles special codes and operator calls. PROGRAM 50-6 LCR DIAL ZERO TIMEOUT 7-T SELECT = 6 Dial Zero I7 DATA = Timeout Value Enter a timeout value from 04 - IO seconds long. Timeout: (04 - IO seconds) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns an LCR Dial Zero Timeout value of 06. 3. This value determines pause time before sending a call on to an operator, 2-l 40 I etc. .- PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM51 LCRAREACOOES SELECT ‘Ian = LCR N”mber DATA = Area Code(s) - (’ * ‘) ’ Action Code:’ Enter 2 to add code to table. Enter 3 to delete code from table. Enter 4# to display codes in table. DATA = Area Code(s) DATA = Area Code(s) (3 digits) DATA = Area Code(s) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data leaves Tables 1 - 7 blank; all codes (000 - 999) are initialized 3. To enter a range of Area Codes, press Low Area Code 4. Several ranges High Area Code or individual DATA = Area Code(s) in Table 8. besignates end of string codes can be expressed 2-141 at once by separating them with a 1 key. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM51 LCRAREACOOES SELECT ‘Ian = LCR N”mber DATA = Area Code(s) y (I * 8, 7 Action Code: T Enter 2 to add code to table. Enter 3 to delete code from table. Enter 4# to display codes in table. DATA = Area Code(s) DATA (3 digit; DATA = Area Code(s) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data leaves Tables 1 - 7 blank; all codes (000 - 999) are initialized 3. To enter a range of Area Codes, press Low Area Code 4. Several ranges High Area Code or individual Area Code(s) DATA = Area Code(s) in Table 8. besignates end of string codes can be expressed 2-142 at once by separating them with a 1 key. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM52 LCROFFlCECODEEXCEPTlONSFORSPEClFlEDAREACODE To assign Office Code Exception Table (1 - 4) to an LCR Plan: SELECT= Office Code / / Exception Table (l-8) Action Code Action Code Function DATA = (See below) Action Codes Assign Exception Table to LCR Plan 00 DATA = El LCR Plan 1 w 8 Assign Area Code to LCR Plan q1 q nu 3-digit Area Code Add Office Codes to Exception Table 02 IIKI 3-digit Office Code Delete Office Codes from Exception Table 0 3-digit Office Code Display Office Codes in Exception Table film lIKl nnn morel#l 3-digit Office Code q Office Code Exception Table for Area Code m Assign to LCR Route Plan Number 0 Office Codes: q Office Code Exception Table for Area Code m Assign to LCR Route Plan Number 0 Office Codes: Office Code Exception Table 131 for Area Code m Assign to LCR Route Plan Number u Office Codes: q Office Code Exception Table for Area Code m Assign to LCR Route Plan Number 0 Office Codes: NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions 2. Initialized data leaves all codes blank. 3. To enter a range of office codes, press Low ‘Office Code High Office Code 4. Several ranges or individual 5. Copy as required, maximum preceding the record sheets, ‘Designates end of String codes can be expressed at once by separating eight Office Code Exception Tables. 2-143 them with a i key. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 52 LCR OFFICE CODEEXCEPTIONSFOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE To assign Office Code Exception Table (5 - 8) to an LCR Plan: more data ___._____---._____._____________________------, SELECT = Office Code /’ 1 Exception Table (l-8) Action Code Action Code Function DATA = (See below) Action Codes DATA q Assign Exception Table to LCR Plan q0 0 Assign Area Code to LCR Plan 01 lzlnlo 3-digit Area Code Add Office Codes to Exception Table II 2 q III 3-digit Office Code Delete Office Codes from Exception Table 0 Display Office Codes in Exception Table l-ilm [710 nnn Office Code Exception Table q m Assign to LCR Route Plan Nuzr Office Code Exception Table q Assign to LCR Route Plan Number Office Code Exception Table q Assign to LCR Route Plan Number 4. Several ranges High Office Code or individual 3-digit Office Code Office Codes: I II , for Area Code m q Office Codes: for Area Code m q Office Codes: for Area Code RI q NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions 2. Initialized data leaves all codes blank. 3. To enter a range of office codes, press Low Office Code 3-digit Office Code for Area Code I[ Assign to LCR Route Plan Number 0 Office Code Exception Table morem LCR Plan 1 w 8 Office Codes: preceding the record sheets. Designates end of String I codes can be expressed 2-144 at once by separating them with a [ key. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 53 LCR SCHEDULEASSIGNMENTS FOR LCR PLAN NO. 1 AND 2 more data , SELECT SELECT = .&art Start TM TM or DATA SELECT Start TM II Start TM Schedule (1 * 3) Plan1 Start TM Schedule (1 -3) Plan 2 HHMM LCR Plan 2 LCR Plan (HH =OO-23 MM = 00 - 59) SELECT DATA (Ryte I Schedule 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 I3 --- 3 4 1 Route Choices For Plan 1 ~ Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 1 ~ Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 1 LCR Plan Schedule (1 +. 3) LCR Staticn ’ --i I I Group No. (1 N 4) (see Program 56 ) I I I ’ 1 SELFCT Schedule HHMM (HH =OO-23 Schedule (1 s 3) --I Action co;c Choices) MM = 00 -5% DATA (Ryte Choices) 1 Route Choices For Plan 2 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 2 214 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 2 -r-l--T-T 1st 2nd 3rd Last 1 1 - (Route Definition No’s (1 - 4) From Program 54 ) LCR Plan- 1st 2nd 3rd Last Schedule (1 w 3) LCR Stati.n ’ Group No. (1 w 4) (see Program 56 ) 1 1 (Route Definition No’s (1 - 4) From Program 54 ) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules. 3. If schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs to be entered for schedule 1. 4. Press LED key 01 to erase data (LED does not light). 2-145 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM53 LCRSCHEDULE ASSIGNMENTS FORLCRPLANNO. 3 AND4 ._ more data SELECT SELECT SELECT ’ Start TM Start TM Schedule (1 - 3) Plan 4 I I I Schedule (1 - 3) Start TM or DATA Start TM Start TM Schedule (1 - 3) Plan 3 LCR Plan 2 = ’ TT -.---- HHMM SELFCT DATA (Ryte ’ J --- LCR Plan A I I Schedule fl - 3) AI Actionco;lc ’ Ht i M M (HH =OO-23 1 ‘MM = 00 - 59) Choices) SELECT DATA (Rpute Choices) I 311 Schedule 1 Route Choices For Plan 3 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 3 El 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 Group No. (1 - 4) (see Program 56 ) 3 4 I I I# 43 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 4 333 3 --- LCR Plan A Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 4 ml 33 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 3 Schedule 1 Route Choices For Plan 4 312 1 432 433 434 I 1st 2r!rd 3rd Last LCR Plan 27 -r-T-T-r 1st 2nd 3rd Last Schedule (1 - 3) 1 From Program 54 ) LCR Station Group No. (1 - 4) (see Program 56 ) (Route Definition No’s (1 - 4) From Program 54 ) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank fo.r all schedules. 3. If schedules I & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data on/y needs to be entered for schedule 1. 4. Press LED key 01 to erase data (LED does not light). 2-146 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM53 LCRSCHEDULEASSIGNMENTS FORLCRPLANNO.5AND6 more data I / SELECT SELECT = Start TM or DATA Start TM SELECT Start TM II Start TM Schedule (1 - 3) 5 2 Plan 5 ml$fq --LCR Plan 2 Start TM Schedule (1 - 3) Plan J?HHMM LCR Plan - (HH =OO-23 MM = 00 - 59) SELFCT Schedule (1 - 3) Action Code I Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 5 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 6 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 5 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 6 I I 1st 2nd 3rd Last LCR Plan I LCR Plan 1 (Route Definition No’s (1 - 4) From Program 54 ) (HH =OO-23 MM = 00 +.59) DATA (Rcute Choices) -- Schedule (1 - 3) 1 1 I I SELFCT Schedule 1 Route Choices For Plan J& Group No. (1 - 4) (see Program 56 ) - DATA (Route Choices) Schedule 1 Route Choices For Plan 5 Schedule (1 - 3) LCR Stati.n ’ -7- LCR Station Group No. (1 - 4) (see Program 56 ) T -rITr1st 2nd 3rd Last T (Route Definition No’s (1 - 4) From Program 54 ) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets, 2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules. 3. If schedules I& 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs to be entered for schedule 1. 4. Press LED key 01 to erase data (LED does not light). 2-147 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 PROGRAM 53 LCR SCHEDULEASSIGNMENTS FOR LCR PLAN NO. 7 AND 8 more data 1 \ SELECT SELECT = Start TM or DATA Start TM SELECT Start TM Schedule Plan 7 Start TM Schedule (1 w 3) Plan 8 HHMM LCR Plan JTT TT LCR Plan 2 Schedule (1 w 3) - I SELECT DATA (Route Choices) SELECT I Schedule 1 Route Choices For Plan 7 Schedule 1 Route Choices For Plan 8 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 7 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 8 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 7 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 8 LCR Plan - LCR Plan 2 1st 2nd 3rd Last Schedule (1 w 3) ---I Schedule (1 m 3) LCR Station Group No. (1 N 4) (see Program 56 ) Start TM (Route Definition No’s (1 * 4) From Program 54 ) LCR Station Group No. (1 m 4) (see Program 56 ) HHMM DATA (Ryte Choices) 1st 2nd 3rd Last (Route Definition No’s (1 m 4) From Program 54 ) NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules. 3. If schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs to be entered for schedule 1. 4. Press LED key 0 1 to erase data (LED does not light). 2-148 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM54 LCRROUTE DEFlNlTlONTABLES(l-4) SELECT SELECT = Enter Data $ q II CODE = -CODE q CO line group and modified digits table Route Definition Table for LCR Plan q Route Definition Table for LCR Plan q Route Definition Table for LCR Plan q Table NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data is “11”. 2-149 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM54 LCR ROUTE DEFlNlTlONTABLES(5-8) SELECT = CODE = Enter Data $ SELECT = I Route Definition Table for LCR Plan q ,p -CODE q CO line group and modified digits table mm mm Route Definition Table for LCR Plan 161 - m m Route Definition Table for LCR Plan q --) 8 8 2 3 8 mm 4 LCR Plan No. (5 - 8) Modified digits table 1 - 6, see Program Route Definition Number 55 CO line group 1 - 8, see Program NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions 2. Initialized data is “11 ‘I. 2-150 preceding 16 the record sheets. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEMRECOROS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM55 LCR MODIFIED DIGITSTABLES PROGRAM 55-O LCR MODIFIED SELECT = Modified Digits Table I - 6 (six available) PROGRAM DIGITS - DELETE FROM FRONT \ / FIGURE = Quantity of Digits (00 - IO) to be deleted. 55-1 and 2 LCR MODIFIED p-p--pj~~-~nn DIGITS - ADD l ** p-p-j-p-l /7--l SELECT = Modified Digits Table (1 - 6) / Enter 1 to add digits in front of number dialed Enter 2 to add digits at end of number dialed CODE = Digits added (up to 22). Enter the digits to be added. Pauses may be coded as described in the pause entry reference table below. PAUSE ENTRY REFERENCE (Program 55-1,55-2) DELETE DIGITS TABLES Special Keys: Key/LED 11 - Clear 10 - Convert DP to DTMF ADD DIGITTABLES Add to FRONT of Dialed Number (Program TableNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 55-l) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Comments 1 2 3 4 5 6 Add to END of Dialed Number (Program TableNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 55-2) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Comments 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets. 2. Initialized data leaves all tables blank except Delete Digits, which are all 00. 2-151 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 PROGRAM56 LCRSTATIONGROUPASSIGNMENT SELECT = Port number(s) Enter port numbers of stations being assigned. See Note 3 for entering a range of ports. Port Number EnteJLCR / LCR Station Port LCR Station Port Grow No. (1 - 41 Number Grow No. (I - 41 Number station Group (I - 4) LCR Station Port LCR Station Grow No. I1 - 4) Number Grauo No. (1 - 4) 66 67 68 69 70 71 NOTES: 1. For more information, see the instructions preceding 2. Initialized data assigns all stations to group 1. 3. To enter a range of ports, press 4. Refer to Program 53. rlnT;;lrlrl Low Port High Port 2-152 the record sheets. ,PROGRAMMiNG PROCEOUfI&lIiSfRUCTlO’NS/SYSTEM RECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY 1991 This tab/e below shows the program options for st&iot% atWC0 lines for verified, forced and voluntary account code dialing. 1 . TABLE2-B ACCOUNTCODEPROGRAMOPTIONMATRIX Account Code Program Options ._’ Station CO Line Verified Program 30 LED 14 Forced Program 30 LED 08 Forced Program 15-7 CO LED Verified (Forced) On On On Verified (Voluntary) On On Off Verified (Voluntary) On Off On Verified (Voluntary) On Off Off Not Verified (Forced) Off On On Not Verified (Voluntary) Off On Off Not Verified (Voluntary) Off Off On Not Verified (Voluntary) Off Off Off Account Code Dial Plan ‘\ system Initialization PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONWSYSTEMRECORDS SECTION 200-096-302 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE2-C OVERRIDE OPTION MATRIX Button I No Yes On On NOTES: 1. Station “A” attempts to override Executive or Privacy) Station 2. Normally only one button Id . ’ or m is assigned to should operate with Privacy Override. 3. Program 30, Key/LED 13 is turned “ON” for Station A, allowing 6 for al/possibilities in this table. If Program 30, LED 13 is “OFF” any station. l 2-154 Station B Options (Program On “BY a telephone (Program 39) On 39) depending on how it Station A to have executive override to Station for station A, then it can never executive override OPERATINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-400 FEBRUARY1991 Stra ta7-m~ OPERATINGPROCEDURES OPERATINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-400 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE of CONTENTS SUBJECT DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE STANDARD TELEPHONE ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY FEATURES DIGITAL TELEPHONE ELECTRONIC LIQUID CRYSTAL DIGITAL TELEPHONE DISPLAY FEATURES TELEPHONE DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE U S E R G U I D E DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE USER GUIDE The Direct Station Selection console has been designed for use where the volume of incoming calls warrants a dedicated call forwarding location. STRATA” DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRATA DK56 AND RELEASE 1, DK KEY SYSTEMS DK24 DK96 2, & 3 Similar in shape and size to the electronic and digital telephone, the DSS console makes an attractive and easy-to-use companion for the busy attendant. It features 60 buttons with associated LEDs. The DSS console buttons can be programmed as stations, CO lines, or speed dial buttons. A total of four consoles can be installed in a system. There are two DSS console models, the HDSS6560 (compatible with electronic telephones) and the DDSSlO60 (compatible with digital telephones). All features for both models are executed the same way. However, their LED color displays differ on some functions. The HDSS6560 LEDs are always red; the DDSS106O’s are red, except in the following situations: 1) A CO line LED will be green on a DDSS1060 when the CO line is in-use by the console user and the CO line does not appear on the consoles associated telephone. 2) A DSS button’s LED will be green when calling or transferring a CO call to a station; the LED becomes red when the call is camped on to or answered by the station. BUTTON FUNCTIONS Your DSS console may be provided with the following buttons (these buttons are assigned flexibly in system programming, see the back page of this guide for initialized assignments): ALL CALL BUTTON @ A single dedicated button that provides direct access to all electronic/digital telephone or external speakers for paging. q LINE BUTTONS Provides direct access of individual CO lines for incoming and outgoing calls. In most cases, only those CO lines that cannot fit on the accompanying electronic telephone will be placed on the DSS. DIRECT STATION SELECTION m BUlTONILED Provides one-touch dialing to call another station. A dedicated button may be provided for each station up to the limits of the console(s). The associated LED displays the busy/idle status of the station. NIGHT TRANSFER BUTTON m Controls the system’s CO/PBX line ringing atterns. Different ringing patterns are chosen by pressing the iii button. q SPEED DIAL BUTTONS Provides one-touch dialing of up to 20 digits for each button after accessing dial tone. Personal and System Speed Dial numbers may be flexibly assigned. * These buttons may be programmed Dial buttons. as DSS, GO line, or Speed OPERATIONS ALL CALL PAGE TO PAGE ALL STATIONS: 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the button. l AC LED lights steadily. 3) Make your announcement in a normal voice level. 4) Hang up when you have completed your announcement. q CALL ANSWERING CO LINE/INTERCOM Use the same procedures as with an electronic phone. TO TRANSFER A CO LINE CALL TO AN IDLE STATION: 1) Press the m button corresponding to the station to be called. l CO line is placed on hold automatically. l CO LED flashes at double the On-hold rate. l DSS console station LED flashes. l You hear a single ring tone. 2) Announce the call. You can speak with the station user without pressing any other buttons. 3) Hang up. l CO LED changes to the On-hold flash rate. l CO line rings the called station. l CO LED illuminates steadily when the called station connects with the transferred call. TO TRANSFER A CO LINE CALL TO A BUSY STATION: 1) Press the m button corresponding to the station to be called. l CO line is placed on hold automatically. l CO LED flashes at double the On-hold rate. l DSS console station LED flashes. l You hear a single ring tone. 2) Hang up. l CO LED changes to the On-hold flash rate. l CO line rings the called station. l CO LED illuminates steadily when the called station connects with the transferred call. NOTES: 1. The call will recall you and camp-on is cancelled if the station does notpick it up within a pre-determined time. Inform the caller of the situation, and repeat the procedure (if necessary). 2. You may reconnect to a transferred line (anytime before it is answered) by pressing the appropriate button. 3. The Busy Override feature may be used instead of Gall Transfer with Camp-on. See the Electronic or Digital Telephone User Guide for details. q or digital tele- CALL TFANSFER WITH CAMP-ON Allows you to transfer an outside call to a station that is either busy or idle. , 3 DDSS/DSS CONSOLE CALL FORWARD OVERRIDE DATE/TIME/DAY Calls to Forwarded stations will ring the dialed station and will not forward. This feature can be used to notify a person who forgets to deactivate the call forward feature after returning to the office. TO RING A FORWARDED STATION: Call that station from your dialpad and not the console’s m button assigned to that station. NOTE: This option may be reversed in system programming; i.e., m button calls will not forward and telephone dialpad calls will. NIGHT TRANSFER 1) Different ringing patterns are chosen by pressing the button (NT1 or NT2, see notes). 2) Depending upon system programming, either two or three night transfer patterns are available. The active pattern is shown by the state of the NT LED: q DAY DAY 2 NIGHT Three-pattern OFF FLASH ON Two-pattern OFF N/A ON NOTES: 1. For Non-tenant Service: Ringingpattern can be changed by any DSS console(s). 2. Fqr Tenant Service: CO lines are assigned and controlled independently: NTl, TENANT 1 CO Lines NT2, TENANT 2 CO Lines 3. In Tenant Service, one system is split so two businesses can use their telephones independently of each other. 4 ADJUSTMENT This operation is possible from port 00 only (usually station 200). Station 200 is typically an attendant station for a DSS console. TO SET DATE 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial m110. 3) Dial the time (year/month/day) in the format YYMMDD. Enter a leading 0 for any single digit month or day. 4) Press the [ (or m button. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. TO SET TIME 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial WiII. 3) Dial the time (hour/minute/second) in the 24-hour clock format HHMMSS. Enter a leading’0 for any single digit entered. 4) Press the 1 (or m ) button. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. TO SET DAY 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial WIiI. 3) Dial the day l 1 = Sunday l 2 = Monday 03 = Tuesday l 4 = Wednesday l 5 = Thursday 06 = Friday 07 = Saturda 4) Press the i (or cd - l button. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. 5 STRATA I DK24 DSS Console Buttons STRATA 1 Initialized DSS console button assignments for the DK24 system; assignments are flexible and may be changed by service personnel. 6 I DK56 and 96 DSS/DDSS Console Buttons 1 Initialized DSSIDDSS console button assignments for the DK56 and 96 systems; assignments are flexible and may be changed by service personnel. STANDARD TELEPHONE U S E R G U STRATA" DIGITAL TELEPHONE I D E DK KEY SYSTEMS STRATA DK56 AND RELEASE 1, DK24 DK96 2, & 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS General Information .............................................................. Outside Calls ........................................................................ Intercom Calls ....................................................................... Automatic Callback-Intercom ................................................ Call Forwarding.. ................................................................... Call Holding .......................................................................... Call Transfer with Camp-on .................................................. Conference Calls .................................................................. Door Phone.. ......................................................................... Flash CO Line ....................................................................... Account Code Calls .............................................................. Message Sending ................................................................. Override ................................................................................ Paging ................................................................................... Repeat Last Number Dialed ................................................. Speed Dial ............................................................................ Voice/Tone Signaling Programmable Option.. ...................... CO Line Queuing .................................................................. Call Pickup.. .......................................................................... Call Park ............................................................................... Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................... Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class ............................. Index ..................................................................................... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 10 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 20 21 GENERAL INFORMATION Using a standard telephone with your STRATA DK digital telephone system provides easy access to the wide range of features listed in this guide. Intercom dial tone must be heard before dialing; if you have just lifted the handset, you will hear intercom dial tone. During a conversation, intercom dial tone is obtained by “flashing” the hookswitch (plunger) located in the handset cradle. To flash, depress the hookswitch momentarily (for about a l/2 second), and you will hear intercom dial tone. Periodically in this guide you will see footnote numbers either imbedded in the sentence or at the end of a sentence. (For example: When the partyanswers,2flash the hookswitch.) These numbers refer you to the notes following the feature. Each note will have a corresponding number, to provide you with additional important information about that feature. IMPORTANT! All features in thisguideare available with each STRATA DK system and most with each software version (Releases 1,2, and 3). Exceptions are duly noted. OUTSIDE CALLS TO MAKE AN OUTSIDE CALL 1) Lift the handset l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the CO line access code.* 3) Listen for CO (outside line) dial tone. 4) Dial the desired telephone number. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. *Dial 1 to access the general group or to use /east cost dial a CO line number d 11 * 0 11); or dial to access line groups 1 * 8, respectively. TO RECEIVE AN INCOMING CALL 1) You will hear ringing (two short rings every four seconds’ or one ring every four seconds*). 2) Lift the handset. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. Two short rings indicate a direct outside call (optional with Release 2 and higher). 2. One ring every four seconds indicates an intercom call or a transferred outside call. 2 INTERCOM CALLS TO MAKE AN INTERCOM CALL 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the desired station number. l You will hearasingle ring tone if calling to an electronic or digital telephone. 3) Speak when the ring tone ends.* 4) Hang up when the call is completed. * If you are calling another standard telephone, ring tones will continue. Wait for an answer. Tone signaling can be accomplished when calling an electronic or digital telephone by dialing 0 after the station number. TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL 1) You will hear a ringing signal (1 second on-3 2) Lift the handset and speak to the caller. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. seconds off). AUTOMATIC CALLBACK-Intercom After reaching a busy (fast busy-two tones per second) or DND station (very fast busy-four tones per second) on an intercom call, you may use Automatic Callback. TO USE AUTOMATIC CALLBACK 1) Dial a to set Automatic Callback. l Busy tone stops. l You will hear dial tone for two seconds and then busy tone again. 2) You may go on-hook or make other calls while waiting for the called station to become available. 3) When the called station becomes idle: l Your telephone will ring at a fast rate. 4) Answer the call within nine seconds to prevent the callback from being cancelled. l You will hear a single tone. 5) Proceed to voice announcement. 6) Proceed with the conversation. NOTES: 1. You may cancel the request anytime prior to the callback by lifting the handset and dialing B I. 2. If, after answering a callback, you hear a busy tone, it means the called pafly has already received or originated anottier call. Your request is not cancelled. You will be called again the next time the station becomes idle. TO CALL FORWARD (CF) 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial fl B CI. l a B 0 = Call forward-all calls l flIB= Call forward-busy (Release 2 and higher) l NIB= Call forward-no answer (Release 2 and higher) l i 1 m = Call forward-busy/no answer (Release 2 and higher) 0 You will receive confirmation tone. 3) Dial the desired station number to which calls will be forwarded. l You will receive confirmation tone again, then busy tone. 4) Hang up. l Calls will be forwarded to that number. NOTES: 1. You may continue using your phone in the usual manner while Call forwarding is in effect. 2. If call forward-all calls is set, your telephone will not ring when it is called. 3. If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forwardCO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l l l TO CANCEL CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. Intercom calls will forward. Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. CALL FORWARDING 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial i@i. l You will receive confirmation tone again, then busy tone. 3) Hang up. 4 5 CALL HOLDING TO HOLD A CALL 1) While connected to an outside call, flash the hookswitch. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial 10 and hang up (at least 2 seconds). l You may now originate or receive other calls. TO RETURN TO CALL ON HOLD* 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial B 1. l You will be reconnected with the call. NOTES: 1. If you do not return to the call within a designated time period, your telephone will ring to recall you. 2. Any other station can pick up the held call by: l Dialing m B + N (N = the intercom number of the station that laced the call on hold). l Dialing m ii 0 + N (N = the number, 0 1 m 36, of the held CO line), Release 2 and higher. 6 CALL TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON This feature allows you to transfer an outside call to a station that is either idle or busy. TO TRANSFER A CALL 1) While connected to an outside line, flash the hookswitch (l/ 2 second). l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the station number to which the call is to be transferred. 3A) If the called station is idle: l You will hear a single ring tone. 4A) Announce the call when the station answers, or hang up to ring-transfer the call.* . . or. . 3B) If the called station is busy: l You will hear busy tone. 48) Hang up. l The call is camped-on to the busy station.* NOTES: 1. Flash the hookswitch to reconnect to the line before it is transferred. (If the called station has lifted the handset or depressed the m button, a conference will be formed by the hookswitch flash.) 2. The call will recall you and camp-on is cancelled if the station does not answer within a predetermined time. Inform the caller of the situation, and repeat the procedure, if necessary. CONFERENCE TO CONFERENCE LINE CALLS CONFERENCE UP TO THREE STATIONS ON ONE CO While connected to an established CO line call (incoming or outgoing): 1) Flash the hookswitch. l You will hear intercom dial tone. l The existing call will be on hold. 2) Dial the number of the desired station. 3) Flash the hookswitch after the party answers.* l All parties will be conferenced. 4) Repeat to add another station. (Two stations, plus yours, and one CO line is maximum.) 5) Hang up when the call is completed. TO CONFERENCE UP TO FOUR STATIONS ON INTERCOM 1) Establish a standard two-station intercom call. 2) Flash the hookswitch. l You will hear intercom dial tone. l The existing call will be on hold. 3) Dial the number of the desired station. 4) Flash the hookswitch after the party answers.* l All parties will be conferenced. / * 4 one more time, if necessary to add 5) Repeat steps 2 another station. 6) Hang up when the call is completed. *Called party must come off-hook or depress the m button. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by flashing the hookswitch. TO CONFERENCE UP TO TWO STATIONS LINES (Release 2 and higher) CALLS (continued) 2) Dial the access code ( ) for another CO line.’ 3) Dial the desired telephone number of the second party. 4) Flash the hookswitch after the party answers.’ l All parties will be conferenced. 5) To connect another station flash the hookswitch. l You will hear intercom dial tone. l The existing calls will be on hold. 6) Dial the number of the desired station. 7) Flash the hookswitch after the party answers.2 l All parties will be conferenced. (Two stations, including yours, and two CO lines are maximum.) 8) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. All access codes are allowed depending on system programming: 70 1 N 736, line numbers; 81 m 88, line group numbers; or 9, for LCR or general group, with Release 2 and higher. 2. If the second outside patty does not answer or is busy, hang up to receive an immediate recall from the first Party. 3. While the conference is being set up, all outside parties are held separately and cannot converse with each other. 4. If a 4-party conference is set, either inside station will maintain the conference if the other hangs up. But one station must remain in the conference to maintain the outside connections. AND TWO CO While connected to an established CO line call (incoming or outgoing):, 1) Flash the hookswitch. l You will hear intercom dial tone. l The existing call will be on hold. 8 9 DOOR PHONE TO CALL/MONITOR A DOOR PHONE 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the intercom number for the desired door location. 151 Location 152 Location 153 Location 154 Location 155 Location 156 Location 157 Location 158 Location 159 Location 161 Location 162 Location 163 Location 3) Hang up when the call is completed or when you no longer wish to monitor the door phone. NOTE: Door phones will not ring standard telephones. FLASH CO LINE Some CO line features like conferencing, Centrex features or behind PBX operation require “flashing” the CO (or like) line. TO FLASH A CO LINE 1) Momentarily press hookswitch. 2) Dial91 l You will receive dial tone. 10 ACCOUNT CODE CALLS Account codes can be forced or voluntary, and, with Release 3 only, verified or nonverified. TO ENTER FORCED ACCOUNT CODE (Outgoing only) 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the CO line access code (701 - 736, 81 - 88, 9). l You will hear dial tone (see note). 3) Dial the account code digits ( ). l You will hear dial tone if a valid code is dialed. . . . or. . . l You will hear busy tone if an invalid code is dialed (with verified account code option, Release 3 only) 4) Dial the outside number. NOTE: If a CO line is accessed using LCR (diale), dial tone is not returned. EMERGENCY OVERRIDE OF FORCED ACCOUNT CODE DIALING REQUIREMENTS With Release 3, forced account code requirements can be bypassed by three emergency numbers, including 911. See your system administrator for these numbers: 1) 911 3)2) TO ENTER VOLUNTARY ACCOUNT CODE (Incoming or Outgoing) After completing an external call (incoming or outgoing), do not hang up: 1) Flash the hookswitch (the speech path is broken). l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial[i. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 3) Dial the account code digits ( ). 11 ACCOUNT CODE CALLS (continued) OVERRIDE 4A) Hang up or resume talking. . . . or. . . 4B) If voluntary account codes are verified (Release 3): l If a valid code is dialed, you will hear one confirmation burst tone. Hang up or resume talking. l If an invalid code is dialed, you will hear two confirmation burst tones. Repeat steps 1 N 3 to enter another code, or hang up, or resume talking. MESSAGE SENDING TO SET MESSAGE WAITING TO AN ELECTRONIC DIGITAL TELEPHONE 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the station number. 3) Dial 0. 4) Hang up handset. (continued) TO OVERRIDE DND (Programmable Option) 1) Dial B. l A tone signal will be heard at the DND station indicating an override call. 2) After reaching a busy station, Executive Override allows you to enter an established conversation. TO INITIATE EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE (Programmable Option) Dial 1. l A tone signal will be heard prior to entering the conversation. OR TO CANCEL MESSAGE WAITING SET AT AN ELECTRONIC OR DIGITAL TELEPHONE 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial the station number. 3) Dial m 0. 4) Hang up the handset. OVERRIDE After reaching a busy station (fast busy-two tones per second), you may signal that station that a call is waiting. PAGING TO PAGE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Listen for intercom dial tone and dial the following: iI= All Call (all electronic and digital telephones) 10 = Group #l B B = Group #2 [I = Group #3 1 i = Group #4 11 w B I= External Page Zones Bi = All Call (with External Page).* 3) Make your announcement in a normal voice level and repeat it. 4) Hang up when you have completed your announcement. *Programmable option; also see call pickup. TO INITIATE A BUSY OVERRIDE SIGNAL 1) Dial 1. l A tone signal will be heard at the busy station. 2) After reaching a DND station (very fast busy-four tones per second), you may signal that station that a call is waiting. 12 13 REPEAT LAST NUMBER DIALED TO USE REPEAT LAST NUMBER DIALED 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial 1. l You will hear dial tone and the number will be dialed. SPEED DIAL TO STORE A STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial 11. l You will hear a short tone. 3) Dial 1 p. 4) Dial a 2-digit dialing code (10 w 49). 5) Dial the CO line access code to be stored (701 * 736,81 w 89, 9). 6) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum, including the digits dialed in step 5). 7) Dial 1. l You will hear a short tone. l Your telephone number has been stored for future use. TO DIAL SPEED DIAL TELEPHONE NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial 1. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 3) Dial’the 2-digit dialing code for the desired telephone number. Use 10 w 49 for telephone numbers you have previously stored. Use 60 w 99 for system speed dial numbers. l You will hear CO dial tone and the system will automatically dial the number for you. 14 VOICE/TONE SIGNALING PROGRAMMABLE OPTION TO MAKE A TONE SIGNAL CALL 1) Call an electronic telephone via intercom. l You will hear one ring, then you will be able to voice announce. 2) To activate the ring tone, dial 0. l The called telephone will begin ringing. NOTE: Calls made to standard telephones will ring signal only. CO LINE QUEUING This feature provides a means for station users to be placed in a waiting queue for a busy outgoing CO line group, and to be called back when a CO line in the group is available. TO USE CO LINE QUEUING 1) If all CO lines are busy, you will hear a fast busy tone after dialin 1 or other CO access codes. 2) Dial i1 to set Automatic Callback. l Busy tone will stop, you will hear dial tone for two seconds and then busy tone again. l You may go on-hook or make other calls while waiting for a CO line to become available.’ 3) When a CO line becomes idle: l Your telephone will ring at a fast rate. 4) Lift the handset within six seconds to prevent the callback from being cancelled. l You will hear CO dial tone.3 5) Dial the desired telephone number.2 15 CO LINE QUEUING (continued) NOTES: 1. You may cancel the request at anytime prior to the actual callback by lifting the handset and dialing 0 1. 2. If the call wasp/aced using LCR (dials), the telephone number is automatically redialed in step 4. 3. If, after answering a callback, you hear a busy tone, it means the trunk has already been accessed or receivedan incoming call. Your request is not cancelled. You will be called again the next time a trunk becomes idle. CALL PICKUP TO ANSWER A CALL THAT IS PAGING, RINGING OR ON HOLD 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial 1. 3) Dial one of the following: Station number (intercom, CO and on hold) 1 m = Intercom Page Ba = External Page I= Any CO line ringing. CALL PARK Park allows you to hold an existing call and consult with an internal station or external CO line call, then return to the original call. TO PARK 1) While connected to an outside call, flash the hookswitch. l ‘You will hear intercom dial tone. 2) Dial 10 and listen for confirmation tone (call is parked). 3) Hang up (remain on-hook for at least two seconds). l You may now originate or receive other calls.’ 16 I CALL PARK (continued) TO RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL (from any station*) If you parked the call: 1) Lift the handset. l You will hear intercom dial tone, 2) DiallI. From any other station: A. Dial 10 0 Q (a Ct tI = the number of the station that parked the call). . . . or. . . 6. Dial 11 QQ (CI Q = the number of the parked CO line, can be 01 u 36).3 NOTES: 1. lfyour station has a predetermined hold recall time set, theparkedcallwillrecallyourstationatthattime. lfyour station is busy at recall time, recall will occur when your station becomes idle. 2. Youcanpageanotherperson topickup theparkedcall. 3. Selected pickup of held CO lines is available with Release 2 and higher. DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) When calling into your system telephone lines. from the outside on certain TO MAKE A DIRECT INWARD STATION CALL USING DISA 1) Call the DISA CO line telephone number: 2) Listen for the ringback tone signal, and then listen for the intercom dial tone’ (if busy tone is received, try again). 3) Dial the intercom number of the desired station. l You will be connected when the station answers.2 . . . or. . . l If you receive busy tone orwish to dial another number while ringing the station, press the 1 button to receive dial tone, allowing another number to be dialed. . , 17 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) (continued) TO CALL THROUGH YOUR SYSTEM ON AN OUTGOING LINE USING DISA (Release 2 and higher) 1) Call the DISA CO line telephone DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) (continued) CO number: 2) Listen for the ringback tone signal, and then listen for the STRATA DK intercom dial tone’ (if busy tone is received, try again). ) of the CO line or CO line group 3) Dial the access code3 ( that is to be used to place the outgoing call. 4A) If a DISA security code is required4, dial the code and listen for CO dial tone.5 4B) If a DISA security code is not required, listen for CO dial tone. 5) After receiving CO dial tone, dial the desired telephone number. 6) A timer tone will sound6 approximately four minutes after the time the call was made. Dial 1 to reset the timer7 each time the tone sounds (this allows an additional four minutes of conversation). 7) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. Dial tone will be present for 10 seconds to allow direct dialing of station intercom number or CO line access code. If a number is not dialed, the system automatica/ly causes the DISA CO line to ring at telephones as a normal incoming call. However, if the call is not answered within 15 seconds after the ringing starts, it will disconnect. 2A. If the station does not answer after six rings or twentyfour seconds, whichever occurs first, a busy tone will be sent. Diali to return to dial tone and dial the same or another number. 18 2B. If you wish to call another station after completing a DISA station call, it is necessary for the internal patty to transfer your call. 3. A direct CO line or line group access code must be dialed (701 N 736 or 81 w 88). The LCR code (9) is not allowed. 4. The DISA security code is a system program option. 5. If the correct code is not entered, the call will be disconnected. 6. Allpatties will hear the timer tone and timer reset DTMF tone. 7. If the timer is not reset, the call will disconnect approximately one minute after the timer tone is sent. 8. Station and system page is not available to DISA callers. DISA SECURITY CODE ENTRY/CHANGE/CANCEL From designated station(s) only. 1) Lift the handset. l Receive intercom dial tone. 2) Dial CI CL 0’ (3-digit access code). l Receive confirmation tone. 3) Dial the new DISA security code” (0 . . . Q-1 N 15 digits). 4) Press the m button. l Receive confirmation tone. NOTES: I. For security purposes, the 3-digit access code is not published; it is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. 2. If a DISA security code is not entered in step 3, the security code will be cancelled and outgoing line access via DISA will not require a security code. 19 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE/TRAVELING CLASS Toll restriction at a station can be completely overridden, or, with Release 3, the station’s normal class can be changed to another class (traveling class). The following procedure applies to complete Toll Restriction override codes and to Toll Restriction Traveling Class (1 y 4) override codes. TO OVERRIDE TOLL RESTRICTION AT A STATION FOR A SINGLE CALL 1) Acess a CO line, as normal. 2) Flash the hookswitch, then dial 1 I. l If there was dial tone, it will now cease. 3) Dial the Toll Restriction Override Code (four digits). l You hear dial tone. 4) Dial the desired telephone number. 20 Account Code Calls ............................................................ Automatic Callback-Intercom.. ............................................ Call Forwarding .................................................................. Call Holding ........................................................................ Call Park ............................................................................. Call Pickup.. ........................................................................ Call Transfer with Camp-on ................................................ CO Line Queuing ................................................................ Conference Calls ................................................................ Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................. Door Phone ........................................................................ Flash CO Line.. ................................................................... General Information ............................................................ Intercom Calls.. ................................................................... Message Sending ............................................................... Outside Calls ...................................................................... Override .............................................................................. Paging ................................................................................ Repeat Last Number Dialed ............................................... Speed Dial .......................................................................... Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class ........................... Voice/Tone Signaling Programmable Option ..................... (.,: 11 4 5 6 16 16 7 15 8 17 10 10 1 3 12 2 12 13 14 14 20 15 21 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE U S E R G U I D E TABLE OF CONTENTS STRATA" DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRATA DK56 AND RELEASE 1, DK KEY SYSTEMS DK24 DK96 2, & 3 GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................... 1 Button Descriptions.. ............................................................. 2 LED Indications.. ................................................................... 6 FEATURE USE ........................................................................ 8 Outside Calls ........................................................................ 8 On-hook Dialing .................................................................... 9 Group Listening .................................................................... 10 Automatic Off-hook Selection Programmable Option ........... 10 Repeat Last Number Dialed Programmable Option ............. 11 Auto Busy Redial .................................................................. 11 Speed Dial ............................................................................ 12 Speed Dial Buttons Programmable Option ........................... 13 Saved Number Redial Programmable Option ...................... 14 Telephone Number Storage ................................................. 14 * and # DTMF Tone Dialing .................................................. 16 Tone/Pulse Dialing Programmable Option ........................... 17 Privacy Override Programmable Option ............................... 18 Privacy Release Programmable Option.. .............................. 19 Intercom Calls ....................................................................... 19 Handsfree Answerback.. ....................................................... 20 Microphone Cut-off Programmable Option ........................... 20 Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Optional Feature.. .............. .20 Call Transfer with Camp-on .................................................. 21 Conference Calls .................................................................. 24 Call Forward-All Calls ........................................................... 26 Call Forward-Busy ................................................................ 26 Call Forward-No Answer.. ..................................................... 27 Call Forward-Busy/No Answer.. ............................................ 28 Call Forward-Fixed ............................................................... 29 Call Holding .......................................................................... 29 Exclusive Hold ..................................................................... .30 Call Pickup ............................................................................ 31 Do Not Disturb ...................................................................... 31 Automatic Callback (Intercom) .............................................. 32 Account Code Calls .................................................. . .......... .33 TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued) Paging ................................................................................... Door Phone.. ......................................................................... Handsfree Monitoring ........................................................... Alarm Reset .......................................................................... Background Music (BGM) ..................................................... Background Music Over External Speakers ......................... Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................... Direct Station Selection Buttons (Hotline) Programmable Option ......................................................... Door Lock ............................................................................ Message Waiting .................................................................. Night Transfer Programmable Option ................................... Override Calls ....................................................................... ...................................................................... Speakerphone Microphone Control ............................................................. Two (Tandem) CO Line Connection ..................................... Timed Reminders ................................................................. Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class ............................. Tone Signaling Programmable Option .................................. Voice Mail (VM) .................................................................... CENTREX APPLICATION ........................................................ INDEX ....................................................................................... 36 37 38 38 38 39 39 DIALPAD \ HANDSET \ 41 .41 42 44 44 45 .46 47 48 49 50 50 52 53 FLEXIBLE BUTTONS ‘FEATURE AND FUNCTION LEDS lo-button - Electronic Telephone ,.: GENERAL INFORMATION DIALPAD Your electronic telephone has been designed to provide easy access to the wide range of features offered by your telephone system. Each phone is equipped with a dialpad, 14, or 24 feature buttons, a speaker with volume control, a ringer volume control, and a handset. HANDSET \ All feature buttons are plainly marked to indicate their function. Four buttons have fixed assignments:=, m, m, and-m. The remaining 10 or 20 buttons are assigned flexibly as w buttons, or as access buttons for various features. SPEAKER \ MODULAR HANDSET CORD FLEXIBLE BUTTONS \ Voice and ring tone volume levels are controlled by separate adjustable slides located at the bottom of the front panel. The right control adjusts speaker volume for dial tone and voice level; the left control adjusts ring tone and voice announcement volume. This guide also contains a section on the Centrex Application, which enhances the system feature capability when installed behind a Centrex or PBX system. FEATUREAND FUNCTION LEDS MICROPHONE ON/OFF BUTTON CONTROL 20-button - Electronic Telephone Periodically in this auide vou will see footnote numbers either , imbedded in the sentence or at the end of a sentence. (For example: When the party answers,2 press the m button.) These numbers refer YOU to the notes followina the feature. Each note will have a conesponding number, to provide you with additional important information about that feature. NOTE: Wherever a CO line is indicated, it can also be a Centrex (CTX) and/or PBX line. IMPORTANT! Ail of the features in this guide are available with each STRATA DK system and most with each software version (Releases I, 2, and 3). Exceptions are duly no ted. Also, please be a ware that some of the features listed in this guide may not appear on your telephone due to hardware configuration or programming. GENERAL BUlTON INFORMATION DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON B (Release 3 only) Allows a station user to enter a voluntary account code anytime during a CO line call without interrupting the conversation. ALARM RESET BUTTON m A station programmable option that will turn off the electronic telephone alarm if connected to a facility alarm mechanism. q ALL CALL VOICE PAGE BUTTON A single dedicated button that allows a station to voice page all of the electronic/digital telephones in the system simultaneously. AUTOMATIC BUSY REDIAL BUlTON m Allows the user to set up an Automatic Busy Redial after receiving busy tone on a dialed CO line call. AUTOMATIC CALLBACK BUTTON m Recalls a busy or Do Not Disturb station on intercom as soon as that station becomes idle. Also used for CO line queuing. BACKGROUND MUSIC BUTTON m Allows background music to be switched on/off of the station speaker. CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS BUTTON m With this feature, all calls will forward to another station. CALL FORWARD-BUSY BUTTONS (Release 2 and higher) Whenever the called station is busy, this feature forwards calls to another station. CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER BUTTON m (Release 2 and higher) Whenever the called station is busy or does not answer prior to a predetermined period, this feature forwards calls to another station. lfthe called station is busy, the calls forward immediately. GENERAL INFORMATION BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS (continued) All non-answered calls (station is not busy) forward after either three rings or 12 seconds, whichever occurs first. CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER BUTTON m (Release 2 and higher) Whenever the called station does not answer after either three rings or 12 seconds, whichever occurs first, this feature forwards calls to another station. CALL FORWARD-FIXED BUTTON m Sets Call Forward to a pre-assigned station. (The destination station is assigned in system programming.) NOTE: CO line calls will forward on/y if the CO line is programmed to ring at one station (and that station has set the Call Forward feature). If a CO line is programmed to ring at more than one station, the CO line will not forward. CALL PICKUP BUTTON m Initiates directed call pickup of CO line, intercom, and page calls. CALL PICKUP BUlTONS m and m If the system is shared by two tenants, the m up Tenant 1 ringing CO line calls and them Tenant 2 ringing CO line calls. CENTRAL OFFICE LINE BUTTON Accesses an outside line. button picks button picks up q CONFERENCE/TRANSFER BUTTON m Sets up conference calls and also used to transfer calls. DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUTTON(s) w Causes a preselected station to ring by ressing an assigned button. The LED associated with each I& D button provides the status (idle/busy) of the station assigned to the button. GENERAL GENERAL INFORMATION BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS BUTTON (continued) DO NOT DISTURB BUTTON m Locks the individual station in or out of the Do Not Disturb mode. DOOR LOCK BUTTON r_inm Controls a door lock mechanism. DESCRIPTIONS (continued) PAUSE BUTTON m Applies a l/2- or 2-second pause when used in programming speed dial numbers (time is set in system programming). PAUSE (LONG) BUTTON m Inserts a IO-second pause when used in programming dial numbers. HOLD BUTTON m Holds internal or outside calls. speed q POOLED LINE BUTTON Allows a group of CO lines to appear under one button. INTERCOM BUTTON m Accesses an intercom line. MESSAGE SELECT BUTTON m Allows system and personal messages to be displayed 32-character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). on the PRIVACY BUTTON m (Release 3 only) Blocks Privacy Override of CO lines from stations that have common CO line button appearances. This button does not block Busy and Executive Override. MESSAGE WAITING/FLASH BUTTON m The MW/FL LED flashes to indicate a message is waiting. m: : Disconnects and recalls dial tone on a CO line, or is used to access Centrex or PBX features. : Also used to enter a pause or flash signal when programming speed dial numbers. PRIVACY RELEASE BUTTON m Releases privacy on a CO line so another station can enter the conversation. MICROPHONE BUTTON m Controls the microphone off/on while telephone RELEASE BUTTON m (Release 2 and higher) This feature disconnects the existing call and places the station into an idle condition, whether the electronic telephone is on- or off-hook. q q is in use. MICROPHONE CUTOFF BUTTON m Allows astation to turn its microphoneoff/on while idle. Functional when station receives calls; them key controls the microphone when the station originates calls. q NIGHT TRANSFER BUTTON Controls the system’s CO line ringing pattern for after hours incoming calls. 4 INFORMATION REDIAL BUlTON m Redials the last telephone number dialed. SAVE BUTTON m Saves a telephone number after dialing and automatically that number when button is pressed in the idle state. redials SPEAKER BUTTON m Turns the speaker on/off. The speaker button will also, select a CO or intercom line if programmed for auto preference in system programming. Also, used to disconnect when the handset is in the cradle. GENERAL BUllON GENERAL INFORMATION DESCRIPTIONS LED INDICATIONS (continued) q SPEED DIAL BUTTON Provides single-button speed dial of personally phone number. assigned tele- SPEED DIAL (FIXED) BUTTON m This button dials a pre-assigned number or Centrex/PBX access code. feature SPEED DIAL SELECT m Provides access to station or system speed dial numbers. TONE BUTTON m Changes the outgoing dialing of the CO line in use from dial pulse to tone signaling. LED INDICATIONS CO INCOMING CALL A slow flash rate (l/2-second on- l/2-second CO line on which the call is ringing. off) indicates the CONFERENCE Avery fast flash rate (10 impulses per second (IPS)) indicates the CO line presently in the Conference mode. Other stations’ LEDs also show a steady (busy) indication for these lines. EXCLUSIVE HOLD A very fast flash rate (10 IPS) indicates the CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold at the holding station. The LED is on steady (busy) on all other stations. HOLD RECALL Aquickflash rate matching the tones (2 IPS for 1 second-l 0 IPS for 1 second) reminds a station which line has been on hold for the programmed period of time. 6 INFORMATION (continued) INTERCOM CALL A pulsating on/off flash rate (10 IPS for 1 second on and 1 second off) appears on the INT LED at the station that is being called. IN-USE A steady, double flash rate (2 second on-l/8-second off-l /8second on-l/8-second off) indicates the CO line presently in use at the station that originated the call. Other stations’ LEDs are on steady for that time. ON-HOLD A fast (4 IPS) flash rate (l/8-second on-l /8-second off) indicates the CO line placed on hold at the station. The LEDs of the CO line on hold flash at a medium rate (3/4-second on-l/4-second off) at the other stations. If using the Pooled Line button, the hold indication is only at the station that places the call on hold. FEATURE FEATURE USE OUTSIDE CALLS (continued) OUTSIDE CALLS q 2) Lift the handset or press the button. l PL LED on steady. 3) A muted ringing indicates a new incoming call, or recall. 4) Transfer the present call or place it on hold. 5) Press and release the hookswitch to answer the next call. 6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all calls are completed. 7) Hang up. TO MAKE AN OUTGOING CALL (Direct Access) 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available line button (or button). l Listen for dial tone. l CO/PL LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Hang up when the call is completed. q q NOTES: 1. A transfertoa busystation willautomatically Camp-on. 2. If step 5 is performed before step 4, the current call is terminated. TO MAKE AN OUTGOING CALL (Dial Access) !) Lift the handset. 2) Press the m button. 0 Listen for intercom tone. l INT LED flashes at In-use rate. 3) Dial CO line access code’ l Listen for CO dial tone.2 4) Dial desired number. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. ON-HOOK (Handsfree model only-see phone electronic telephones) NOTES: 1. Dial1 to access the genera/group or to use Least Cost Routinu; or dial iandaCO?inenumber(O[ -1m;or dk i/i a .m11 to access line group I * 8, respective/y. 2. CO dial tone is not returned when dialing via LCR, dial 1; intercom dial tone may be returned, depending on system programming. TO RECEIVE AN INCOMING CALL 1) You hear a ringing tone. l CO LED flashes at the CO Incoming Call rate. 2) Press m line button and lift the handset. l ,CO LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. TO RECEIVE INCOMING CALLS WITH POOLED BUTTONS 1) Ringing tone is heard. l PL LED flashes at the CO Incoming Call rate. 8 USE LINE DIALING Speakerphone for speaker- TO MAKE AN OUTSIDE CALL 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press any availablemline button (arm button) and listen for dial tone, or follow previous directions for Dial Access. l LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Lift the handset when the distant party answers.* 5) Hang up when the call is completed. TO MAKE AN INTERCOM CALL 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press the m button. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired station number. l You hear a single ring tone.* 4) Lift the handset to converse. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. *Ifbusy tone is heard, press them button to disconnect. REPEAT LAST NUMBER DIALED PROGRAMMABLE OPTION GROUP LISTENING Allows all persons present to hear the distant party’s responses. TO USE GROUP LISTENING 1) With the handset off-hook, press and hold them button then place the handset on-hook and release the m button. l SPKR and MIC LEDs light and the distant party’s voice is heard via the telephone’s speaker. 2) When local response is required, lift the handset off-hook. l SPKR and MIC LEDs go off. l Telephone speaker is silenced. l Handset is activated. NOTE: Repeat the procedure TO REDIAL LAST NUMBER CALLED 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available [9 line button. l Listen for dial tone. 3) Press the m (or the 1) button. l The last telephone number you dialed will automatically be redialed. 4) Hang up when the call is completed. as required. AUTO BUSY REDIAL AUTOMATIC OFF-HOOK SELECTION PROGRAMMABLE OPTION After reaching a busy outside number, the system will automatically redial that number at programmed intervals. Allows Automatic Off-hook Selection of either an intercom path, a CO line, or a CO line group. (The particulars must be programmed by your system administrator.) NOTE: The m button also selects the designated automatically. TO MAKE A CALL Lift the handset. l You will be connected line/group to the option programmed. NOTE: If you hear silence after going off-hook, you must press the m button or a line button before making a call. q 10 This feature enables you to automatically redial the last number called by pressing the m button. If your telephone does not have an m button, the 1 button serves the same function. TO USE AUTO BUSY REDIAL 1) Access any available CO line and dial the outside telephone number. l Receive busv tone. 2) Press the m button (or m I@. l ABR LED blinks (or hear confirmation tone). 3) Hang up (or press them button). 4) At programmed intervals (30 or 60 seconds), the system will redial the number (15 times maximum). l With each attempt, if busy, ABR will reset for next try. 5) When the connection is made and the called party is ringing: l CO (or INT) and SPKR LEDs blink. l Ringing tone is heard. 6) Pick up handset (or press the m button) and, wait for party to answer. 11 FEATURE AUTO BUSY REDIAL TO CANCEL ABR Press the m button (or m 5) Press the m (or the i) button. 6) Dial the 2-digit speed dial code for the second telephone number to be dialed. 7) Repeat the above steps for each subsequent number to be dialed. l Your system will automatically dial the numberforyou. 8) Hang up when the call is completed. 1 I). SPEED DIAL TO CALL A SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available line button. l Listen for dial tone. 3) Press the w (or the 1) button (see Note). 4) Dial the 2-digit speed dial code for the desired telephone number. t Your system will automatically dial the number for you. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. q TO CHAIN DIAL AUTOMATICALLY Dials two or more speed dial numbers during one call. 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available (9 line button. F Listen for dial tone. 3) Press them (or the 1) button (see Note). 4) Dial the 2-digit speed dial code for the first telephone number to be dialed. USE SPEED DIAL (continued) (continued) NOTES: 1. ABR will not be attempted while the station is busy on another call but will continue to time-out. 2. With each attempt: The CO (or IiT) and SPKR LEDs blink when the line is seized. Dial tone is heard via the speaker. Telephone number is redialed. If busy, ABR will reset and try again. If a connection is made, ring tone sounds until called party answers. If the originatin station does not pick up the handset (orpress the d33 w - button) after a connection is made (it willring back three times), ACB mute ring sounds for 30 seconds and then the call disconnects. 12 FEATURE USE NOTE: lfyour telephone does not have an= serves the same function. button, the 1 button SPEED DIAL BUTTONS PROGRAMMABLE OPTION After accessing a CO line, speed dial is available by pressing an button instead of a2-digit access code. Eachm button stores one telephone number (up to 20 digits).’ q TO STORE A TELEPHONE NUMBER* 1) Do not lift the handset. 2) Press the * (or m) and 1 (or m) buttons, respectively. 3) Press the al D button you wish to use. 4) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum).3 5) Press the 8 (or m) button to record the number in memory. 6) Repeat the above steps for each button. q NOTES: 1. Up to 37 digits by linking two speed dial numbers (see the link procedure that follows). 2. Repeat this procedure to replace the stored telephone numbers with new ones. 3. It may be necessary to insert a pause after the CO line access code to allow for dial tone delay. If so, press the m (or m button after entering the Centrex or PBX access code (see Telephone Number StoragePauses). 13 FEATURE USE FEATURE SPEED DIAL BUTTONS PROGRAMMABLE OPTION (continued) 4. To store * or # DTMF tones in soeed dial numbers. the telephone that stores the numbers must have them and m buttons. SAVED NUMBER REDIAL PROGRAMMABLE OPTION TO SAVE A TELEPHONE NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. 2) Obtain dial tone. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Press the m button. l The telephone number is saved for future use. TELEPHONE NUMBER STORAGE (continued) 6) Repeat the steps above with every telephone number to be stored (up to the maximum of 40). 7) Write down the speed dial codes and telephone numbers for future reference. NOTE: Repeat steps I N 5 to replace the stored telephone bers with new ones. This feature enables you to store a dialed telephone number and later redial that number by pressing a single button. TO DIAL A SAVED TELEPHONE NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. 2) Obtain dial tone. 3) Press the m button. l Saved number will be automatically TELEPHONE USE dialed. NUMBER STORAGE STORING A SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBER System speed dial telephone numbers can be stored in the system memory by station 200 only. 1) Do not lift the handset. 2) Press the 1 and p (or m and m) buttons, respectively. 3) Dial a 2-digit speed dial code. l System speed dial codes run consecutively from 60 N 99. 4) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum). 5) Press them(orm) button to record the telephone number in memory. num- TO STORE PAUSES (l/2- or 2-second/lo-second) and FLASHES (Hookflash) ALONG WITH SPEED DIAL NUMBERS r m) button to store a pause. button to store a flash. The flash must be stored as the first entry: a flash cannot be stored after a digit is entered into the speed dial number. NOTES: 7. If am button is not available, them button will store auses only, not flashes. 2. The Lb 8i button is i/2- or 2-seconds per system program assignments. 3. A lo-second pause is programmed using the m button. STORING A STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBER Speed dial telephone numbers can be stored by each station. 1) Do not lift the handset. 2) Press the 1 and 1 (or m and m buttons, respectively. 3) Dial a 2-digit speed dial code. l Station speed dial codes run consecutively from 10 * 49. 4) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum). 5) Press the 1 button to record the number in memory. 6) Repeat the above steps with every number to be stored (up to the maximum of 40). 7) Write down the speed dial codes and telephone numbers for future reference. FEATURE TELEPHONE USE NUMBER STORAGE FEATURE (continued) USE * AND # DTMF TONE DIALING (continued) NOTE: To store * or # DTMF tones in speed dial numbers, the tele hone that stores the numbers must have them and -cdD buttons. q TO LINK TWO SPEED DIAL NUMBERS UNDER ONE BUlTON You can link a second number to a number stored in one of ten locations in the system speed dial memory (90 - 99). This allows up to 37 digits to be stored under one speed dial button or code. Any station can link any of its assigned speed dial numbers (10 - 49) to codes 90 - 99, however station 200 is required for linking codes 60 - 89. (All other procedures for entering numbers apply.) 1) Press the m and 1 (or m and m) buttons. 2) Dial an applicable 2-digit speed dial code (10 - 49 for all stations, 60 - 99 at station 200 only). 3) Press the fl (or m) button. 4) Dial the 2-digit code to which this number will be linked (90 - 99). 5) Dial the number to be chained (17 digits maximum). 6) Press the 1 (or m) button to record the number in memory. NOTE: The number stored in location 90 m 99 will dial out first, followed by the number linked to it in location 10 m49 or 60 N 89. The company’s special carrier access telephone numbers are normally stored in locations 90 w 99, allowing other numbers to be linked to them to dial both numbers using a one-button speed dial. * AND # DTMF TONE DIALING When the * or # tones must be output (for computer input service or other use), the speed dial feature must be disabled manual dialing of thepandmbuttons. (Applicable only if m buttons are not programmed.) TO OUTPUT * AND # DTMF TONES 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available line button. 3) Dial any desired directory number. 4) To enable * and # tones to be sent, press 11. q NOTE: Only manual tones as well when dialed. the station is dialing will be possible; the special * and # as digits 0 * 9 will be output as DTMF tones The speed dial feature will be restored when disconnected or placed on hold. TONE/PULSE DIALING PROGRAMMABLE OPTION For some CO lines, calls must be made using rotary dial pulses. In order to access remote equipment requiring tones in these areas (such as automatic tellers or answering machines), you must change to DTMF tone sending after you have dialed the outside directory number. Pressing them button changes the dialing status of the CO line in use: TONE LED ON indicates DTMF tones are output; LED OFF indicates dial pulses are output. TO CHANGE TO TONE SENDING After you have dialed a telephone number and the call is in progress, press the m button. l TONE LED goes on. l Pressing the dialpad buttons will cause DTMF tones to be transmitted. NOTE: After the m button is pressed, the TONE LED will remain on and DTMF tones will be sent when dialing until the callis released. When originating orreceiving a new CO line call, the system automaticallyplaces the line in the dial pulse mode until the m button is used. 17 FEATURE PRIVACY OVERRIDE PROGRAMMABLE OPTION PRIVACY RELEASE PROGRAMMABLE OPTION Allows stations with common CO line buttons to override an existing conversation by pressing the busym line button. Up to two stations maximum may override an existing CO line-tostation call (allowing a total of up to three stations being connected to an outside line) The m button allows any other station to enter an inprogress CO line call (see Privacy Override). TO ENTER AN EXISTING CALL BETWEEN A CO LINE AND ANOTHER STATION Press the busy line button. l An optional tone signal is heard by the connected parties prior to the new station entering the conversation. q NOTE: To allow Privacy Override, the overriding station must be programmed with Privacy Override; or, the Privacy Release LED must be on at the talking station (see Privacy Release). PRIVACY BUTTON PROGRAMMABLE OPTION (Release 3 only) This option blocks any station programmed with Privacy Override from entering your CO line conversation by pressing a common CO line button. TO MAKE ALL CO LINES ON YOUR STATION Press the m button. PRIVATE TO CANCEL PRIVACY Press the IswLll,‘;m’l button again NOTE: Privacy will not block Busy Override or Executive Override. 18 USE .,_.. TO USE PRIVACY RELEASE FEATURE Press the m button. l PRV RLS LED goes on. l Your station does not have CO line privacy. l Any station user can press a common CO line button to enter your conversation. INTERCOM CALLS TO MAKE AN INTERCOM CALL (Voice First) 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the m button (see Note). l You hear intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired station number. l You hear a single ring tone. 4) Speak when the ring tone ends. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. See Automatic Off-hook Selection. 2. Tone Signaling can be accomplished the station number. by dialing0 after TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL 1) You hear a single long tone, followed by the caller’s voice. l INT LED flashes at the Incoming Call rate. 2) Lift the handset. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. x _a.,’ 19 FEATURE HANDSFREE USE FEATURE ANSWERBACK OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE (OCA) OPTIONAL FEATURE (continued) TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL (HANDSFREE) 1) You will hear a single long tone, followed by the caller’s voice. l INT LED flashes at the Incoming Call rate. 2) Leave the handset on-hook. 3) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. NOTE: The m button must be pressed (or the handset must be taken off-hook) before placing an intercom call on hold. MICROPHONE CUT-OFF PROGRAMMABLE OPTION The m button allows a station to turn its microphone off/on while idle. Handsfree Answerback is inoperable while the microphone is off; provides privacy by blocking room monitor to calling parties. TO USE MICROPHONE CUT-OFF 1) Press the m button. l MC0 LED goes on. l Micro hone is turned off. 2) Press the km 0 button to turn the microphone l MC0 LED goes off. on again. (OCA) Allows a .station user to call and speak to an off-hook, busy electronic telephone through the speaker, if that called station has optional OCA feature. 20 TO USE OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Call the desired station. l Hear warning tone. l If busy tone is heard, dial 1. 3) Speak to called party (automatic OCA). TO FORCE A DISCONNECT A forced disconnect allows the called station to disconnect OCA call. l Press the SPKR button to disconnect an OCA caller. the NOTES: 1. DND revents OCA calls. 2. The I& andm buttons can prevent the OCA caller from listening to your conversation. CALL TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON Allows you to transfer an outside call to a station that is either idle or busy. NOTE: Functional when telephone receives calls, them button controls the microphone when the telephone originates calls. OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE OPTIONAL FEATURE USE TO TRANSFER A CALL 1) While connected to an outside call, press them button. l CO LED changes to the Conference flash rate. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 2) Dial the station number to which the call is to be transferred. 3A) If the called station is idle: l You hear a single ring tone. 4A) Announce the call. 5A) Hang up. l INT LED goes off. l CO LED changes to the On-hold flash rate: l CO line rings the called station.’ 21 FEATURE CALL TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON (continued) CO LED illuminates steadily when the called station connects with the transferred call. l If the station fails to answer the call, you will receive a recall ring after a predetermined time. . . . or. . . 3B) If the called station is busy: l Busy tone is heard. 4B) Hang up. l INT LED goes off. l CO LED changes to On-hold flash rate. l CO line is camped-on to the called station.’ l Called station hears a warning tone. l CO LED illuminates steadily when the station connects with the transferred call.2 l NOTES: 1. You may reconnect to a transferred line (anytime before it is answered) by pressing the appropriatem button or dialm 0 B if them line does not appear on your telephone. 2. The call will recall you and camp-on is cancelled if the station does not pick it up within a predetermined time. Inform the caller of the situation, and repeat the procedure (if necessary). TO ANSWER A TRANSFERRED CALL (if your station is idle) 1) Voice Signaling: a) You will hear a single long tone, followed by an ’ announcement. l INT LED flashes at the Incoming Call rate. b) Acknowledge the announcement. c) When the transferring station hangs up, you will hear a ringing tone. l CO LED changes to the Incoming Call flash rate. d) Press the appropriate [9 button. l CO LED changes to the In-use flash rate. 22 CALL TRANSFER USE WITH CAMP-ON (continued) NOTE: If your electronic telephone has the Ringing Line Preference feature, you may press the m button or lift the handset instead of pressing the button. q 2) Tone Signaling: a) You will hear intercom ringing. l INT LED flashes at the Incoming Call rate. b) Lift the handset (or press the m button). l INT LED changes to the In-use flash rate. c) Speak to the transferring station. d) You will be connected to the outside call when the transferring station hangs up. l INT LED goes off. l The LED of the transferred CO line changes to the In-use flash rate. TO ANSWER A TRANSFERRED CALL (if your station is busy) 1) You will hear a l-second warning tone. l The outside call is camped-on to your station. l CO LED flashes at the On-hold rate. 2) You have several choices: a) Press the appropriate m button. l Existing call is terminated. l The new line is answered and its LED changes to the In-use flash rate. . . . or. . . bl) Hang up. l Existing call is terminated. l The camped-on line rings at your station. l CO LED changes to the Incoming Call flash rate. button (or lift the handset) to answer the b2) Press them call. l CO LED changes to the In-use flash rate. . . . or. . . 23 FEATURE CALL TRANSFER FEATURE USE WITH CAMP-ON (continued) cl) Press the m button (if conversing on a CO line). l Existing CO call is put on hold. l The camped-on line rings at your station. l CO LED changes to the Incoming Call flash rate. c2) Press the button to answer the call. l CO LED changes to the In-use flash rate. q CONFERENCE CALLS TO CONFERENCE UP TO TWO STATIONS AND TWO CO LINES, OR THREE STATIONS AND ONE CO LINE Establish a CO line call using a CO line button, dial the appropriate access code, or you may already be talking on a CO line call. TO ADD A SECOND CO LINE 1) Press the m button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l CO LED flashes at the Conference l INT LED flashes at the fast rate. rate. 2) Access a second CO line’ and dial the next telephone number.* 3) Press the m button after the party answers. l CO LEDs flash at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. NOTES: 1. Press a line button or dial an access code: 701 * 736, line number; 87 w 88, line group number; or with Releases 2 and 3, LCR access code “9” is allowed. 2. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by pressing the button. If the line is not on your telephone, hang up and the original connection will recall you immediately. q q 24 CONFERENCE USE CALLS (continued) TO ADD ANOTHER STATION 1) Press the m button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l CO LED flashes at the Conference rate. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 2) Dial the number of the other station.’ 3) Press the m button after the party answers.* l CO LED(s) will flash at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. 4) Repeat to add another party: l Three stations/one CO line maximum. 5) Hang up when conference call is completed. NOTES: 1. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by pressing the m button. 2. Thenewstation willnotbeconferencedunless the user lifts the handset or presses the m button to answer. TO CONFERENCE UP TO FOUR STATIONS ON ONE INTERCOM LINE 1) Establish a two-station intercom call. 2) Press the m button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes at the Conference rate. 3) Dial the third station’s number. 4) Press the m button after the party answers. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. 5) To add the fourth party, repeat steps 2 * 4. 25 FEATURE CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS For Intercom and CO line calls (all calls will forward to a selected station at all times-your station will not ring when called). TO SET CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS 1) Press the m button (or dial m 1 m 0). l CFAC LED flashes (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward. l Listen for confirmation tone if 110 was dialed. 3) Press the m (or m button. l CFAC LED on steady. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS Press the m button (or dial m [I 0). l CFAC LED goes off (or hear confirmation tone). l Press SPKR button if INT 6 0 1 was dialed. NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-BUSY (Release 2 and higher) When your station is busy, all calls will forward immediately. When your station is idle, calls will ring at your station as usual. TO SET CALL FORWARD-BUSY 1) Press the m button (or dial m B w I). l CFB LED flashes (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward. l Listen for confirmation tone if 111 was dialed. 26 ‘.. ,;: USE CALL FORWARD-BUSY (continued) 3) Press them (or m button. l CFB LED on steady. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-BUSY Press the m button (or dial m 1 m i). l CFB LED goes off (or hear confirmation tone). l Press SPKR button if INT 6 0 2 was dialed. NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER (Release 2 and higher) For Intercom and CO line calls (all calls will forward to a selected station whenever your telephone is not answered within 12 seconds or three rings, whichever occurs first). TO SET CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER 1) Press the m button (or dial m 11 B. l CFNA LED flashes (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward l Listen for confirmation tone if B 11 was dialed. 3) Press the m (or m) button. l CFNA LED on steady. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER ’ Press the m button (or dial m 11 I). l CFNA LED goes off (or hear confirmation tone); l Press SPKR button if INT 6 0 3 was dialed. ... ..A 27 FEATURE CALL FORWARD-NO USE ANSWER (continued) NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER (Release 2 and higher) For Intercom and CO line calls (all calls will forward immediately to a selected station whenever your telephone is busy, or if not answered calls will forward within 12 seconds or three rings, whichever occurs first). TO SET CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER 1) Press the I;l=fllm button (or dial m 1 m I). l CFB/NA LED flashes (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward. l Listen for confirmation tone if 11 i was dialed. 3) Press them (or m) button. l CFB/NA LED on steady. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER Press the m button (or dial m i 11). l CFB/NA LED goes off (or hear confirmation tone). ’ l Press SPKR button if INT 6 0 4 was dialed. NOTE: ’ If call forward is set: CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO l lines that ring more than one station will not forward. CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l l Intercom calls will forward. 28 CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO l l ANSWER (continued) Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-FIXED All intercom and CO line calls to your station will forward to a predetermined station or voice mail device. The “Forward to” station/device is determined (Fixed) in system programming for each station. Your station will not ring when Call Forward-Fixed is set. TO USE FIXED CALL FORWARD (ALL CALLS) 1) Press the m button. l CFF LED on steady. l All calls will forward to the fixed programmed 2) To cancel, press the m button again. . CFF LED off. station. NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL HOLDING TO HOLD A CALL (CO line or a button appears on your station) While connected to a CO line or intercom call, press them button. CO or intercom LED flashes at the On-hold rate. , l To reconnect the call, press the CO or INT button on hold. l 29 FEATURE CALL HOLDING USE NOTE: an intercom call must be answered by pressing the m button or lifting the handset before it can be placed on hold. Regarding handsfree answerback, TO HOLD/PARK A CALL AND PLACE ANOTHER CALL (CO line does not appear on your station) 1) While connected to a CO or intercom call press the m button and dial fl . 2) To make another call, press the I& or a[9 button and dial the desired number. button when the call is com3) Hang up or press the m pleted. button 4) To retrieve the held call made in step 1, press them and dial 15 (see Note 3). NOTES: 1. The on-hold recall tone will be heard within a predetermined time. 2. The heldcallmaybe releasedautomaticallyif the other party hangs up (if the CO provides a hold-release signal). 3. When a CO line is placed on hold, it may be picked up from any station: l Press a 0 button with common appearance. l Press the% button and dial I+ N (N = the holding station’s intercom number). l Press the m button and dial 11 + N (N = the ’ holding CO line’s number-O 1 w 36, Release 2 and higher). EXCLUSIVE HOLD TO USE EXCLUSIVE HOLD (CO line must appear on your station) While connected to an outside call, press them button twice. l CO LED flashes at a fast (10 IPS) rate. l To reconnect the call, press the CO button that is on hold. 30 . .. EXCLUSIVE (continued) HOLD (continued) NOTE: When a CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold, it may be picked up at another station by dialing a and the station number that placed the call on Exclusive Hold; however it cannot be picked up by pressing a common (9 button at another station. CALL PICKUP TO PICK UP RINGING Groups) Press them or= dial 11). CO LINE (Tenant l/Tenant button (or press them 2 Line button and TO DIRECT PICK UP ONE OF THE FOLLOWING 1) Station: Press the m button + station number (intercom, ringing or held CO line). 2) Intercom Page: Press the m button + 11. 3) External Page: Press the 4) CO line on hold: Press the line number: 01 u 36, Release 2 and higher). 5) Any ringing CO line: Press the m button + m . q Kn”$!~(OO=C l NOTE: Ifa the button is not available, press m button. + 1 instead of DO NOT DISTURB Allows you to prevent incoming calls from accessing your station. You can still make out-going calls. TO USE DO NOT DISTURB Press the m button. l DND LED goes on. MODE ‘. ,_’ 31 FEATURE DO NOT DISTURB FEATURE USE (continued) TO RELEASE THE DO NOT DISTURB Press the m button. l DND LED goes off. MODE NOTES: 1. Do Not Disturb prevents Off-hook Call Announce. 2. Outside calls will mute ring your station while in the DND mode. AUTOMATIC CALLBACK (INTERCOM) After reaching a busy or DND station on an intercom call, you may use Automatic Callback. TO USE AUTOMATIC CALLBACK 1) Press them button (or dial 0) to set Automatic Callback. l Busy tone stops. l You will hear dial tone for two seconds and then busy tone again. 2) Go on-hook. You may make other calls while waiting for the called station to become available. 3) When the called station becomes idle: l Your telephone rings at a fast rate. 4) Answer the call within nine seconds to prevent the callback from being cancelled. l You hear a single tone, as if making a regular intercom call. 5) Proceed to voice announcement. 6) Proceed with the conversation. NOTES: 1. You may cancel the re uest anytime prior to the callback by pressing the lb’ : button (or press the m button and-dial 1 m. 2. If, after answering a callback, you hear a busy tone, it means the called party has already received or originated another call. Your request is not cancelled. You will be called again the next time the station is idle. 32 AUTOMATIC CALLBACK USE (INTERCOM) (continued) CO LINE QUEUING Provides a means for station users to be placed in a waiting queue for a busy outgoing CO line group, and to be called back when a CO line in the group is available. TO USE CO LINE QUEUING 1) If all outgoin lines are busy, ou will hear busy tone. 2) Press the dil A : button (or dial ii1) to set Automatic Callback. l Busy tone stops. You will hear dial tone for two seconds and then busy tone again. l You may go on-hook or make other calls while waiting for a trunk to become available.’ 3) When a CO line becomes idle: l Your telephone rings at a fast rate. l CO LED flashes at the Incoming Call rate. 4) Lit? the handset within six seconds to prevent the callback from being cancelled. l You hear CO dial tone.3 l CO LED flashes at the In-use rate. 5) Dial the desired telephone number.2 6) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. You may cancel the request at any time prior to the button and dialing actual callback by ressing them 11 (or press the I$A : button). 2. If the original call was made using LCR (dial @, the telephone number is automatically dialed in step 4. 3. If, after answering a callback, you hear a busy tone, it means the trunk has already been seized or received an incoming call. Yourrequest is not cancelled. You will be called again the next time a trunk becomes idle. ACCOUNT CODE CALLS e On some calls, you may be required (forced) to dial an account code before dialing an outside number. On other calls, you may 33 FEATURE ACCOUNT USE CODE CALLS (continued) wish to record an account code voluntarily after either dialing an outside number or receiving an incoming call. The code you enter will be recorded on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) printout with the details of your call. With Release3 only, account codes may be verified or nonverified. TO RECORD A FORCED ACCOUNT CODE (Outgoing Calls Only) 1) Access a CO line.’ l You hear dial tone.2 2) Dial the -digit account code with the dialpad. l Dial tone stops after you dial the first digit. l You will hear dial tone after you press the last digit of a valid account code. . . . or. . . l You will hear busy tone after you press the last digit of an invalid code (Release 3 only). 3) Dial the outside directory number. NOTES: 1. Press a (9 button, dial a CO line access code, or dial 1 to call via LCR. 2. If calling via LCR, CO dial tone will not be returned. 3. Unless you dial the correct number of digits, you will not receive dial tone. 4. Any digits dialed after the code will be treated as part of the outside directory number. EMERGENCY OVERRIDE OF FORCED ACCOUNT CODE DIALING REQUIREMENTS With Release 3, forced account code requirements can be bypassed by three emergency numbers, including 911. See your system administrator for these numbers: 1) 911 2) 3) FEATURE ACCOUNT USE CODE CALLS (continued) TO RECORD A VOLUNTARY ACCOUNT CODE WITH RELEASES 1 AND 2 (Incoming or Outgoing) 1) After completing an incoming or outgoing call, do not hang 2) Lfkss the m button and dial 11. 3) Dial the I-digit account code on the dialpad. 4) Hang up after entering the account code. NOTE: The account code may be entered using steps 2 and 3 anytime the call is in progress, however, it is not recommended the conversation will be interrupted after you enter step 2. TO RECORD A VOLUNTARY ACCOUNT CODE WITH RELEASE 3 (Incoming or Outgoin ) 1) Anytime during the call, dial II B8 or press the B button (the conversation will not be interrupted). 2) Dial the account code. If the code is valid, you will hear a confirmation burst l tone (about l/2 second duration). . . . or. . . Ifthecode is invalid, you will heartwo short confirmation l burst tones. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to dial another account code. . . . or. . . l If the code is nonverified, you will not hear a confirmation tone after an account code is entered. NOTE: Confirmation tones are inaudible to the other party. TOADD,DELETE,ORCHANGEVERlFlEDACCOUNTCODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 1) Press m and dial the verified account code change access code Q Ci CI (see Note). l You will hear confirmation tone. 35 34 k. , FEATURE USE ACCOUNT CODE CALLS (continued) 2) Dial the three-digit verified account code number tI Cl It (000 - 299). 3) Dial the verified account code O...Ct (4 * 15 digits). 4) Press the 1 or m button to store the code. l You will hear confirmation tone. 5) Repeat steps 1 w 4 to enter more verified account codes. NOTE: For security reasons, the account code change access code is not given in this guide. Contact your telephone system maintenance provider for this access code. PAGING TO PAGE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the m button and dial the following: 14 = All Call (electronic and digital telephones only) 10 = Station Group #1 iI= Station Group #2 Ii= Station Group #3 iI= Station Group #4 = All Call (with External Page)* 88 w 1 B = External Page Zones (1 w 4)* 3) Make your announcement in a normal voice level and repeat it. 4) Hang up when you have completed your announcement. l *Progqmmable FEATURE USE DOOR PHONE TO ANSWER THE DOOR PHONE 1) You hear a distinctive ringing tone. 2) Lift the handset. l INT LED lights. l You are connected to the door phone. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. TO CALL/MONITOR A DOOR PHONE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press them button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the intercom number for the desired door location. 151 Location 152 Location 153 Location 154 Location 155 Location 156 Location 157 Location 158 Location 159 Location 161 Location 162 Location 163 Location 4) Hang up when the call is completed or when you no longer wish to monitor the door phone. Option TO PAGE ALL CALL TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES ONLY 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the button. 3) Make your announcement in a normal voice level and repeat it. 4) Hang up when you have completed your announcement. q TO USE A DOOR PHONE 1) Press the button and then release it. l You hear a distinctive ringing tone. 2) When answered, speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the door phone. NOTE: The q button does not access external page speakers. 36 37 FEATURE HANDSFREE FEATURE USE BACKGROUND MONITORING Calls placed on hold by the distant party may be monitored handsfree. TO USE HANDSFREE MONITORING 1) While connected to a call, press and hold them button. 2) Place the handset on-hook. 3) Release the m button. l Sounds from the distant party are heard via the telephone’s speaker. 4) Lift the handset to continue the conversation when the distant party returns. option used with an optional alarm system to on the system’s electronic telephone. button resets the alarm signal on the telephones. BACKGROUND MUSIC (BGM) If a BGM music source is connected to your system, you may listen to background music via your station’s speaker, or over the external page speakers. TO LISTEN TO BGM ON YOUR TELEPHONE SPEAKER Press the m button and dial g 10 (or press the m button). l Adjust volume with the VOL control on the front of your phone. TO CANCEL Press the m 38 BGM ON YOUR TELEPHONE MUSIC OVER EXTERNAL TO ALLOW BGM OVER EXTERNAL Press the m button and dial 110. TO CANCEL Press the m SPEAKER button and dial a 11 (or press the m button). SPEAKERS is the only station that can turn External BGM OVER EXTERNAL button and dial 11 I. PAGE PAGE DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) When calling into your system telephone lines. ALARM RESET A programmable NOTE: Station number200 BGM On/Off. USE from the outside on certain TO MAKE A DIRECT INWARD STATION CALL USING DISA 1) Using a DTMF telephone, call the DISA CO line telephone number:-2) Listen for the ringback tone signal, and then listen for the intercom dial tone’ (if busy tone is received, try again). 3) Dial the intercom number of the desired station. l You will be connected when the station answers*, . . . or. . . l If you receive busy tone or wish to dial another number while ringing the station, press the a button to receive dial tone, allowing another number to be dialed. TO CALL THROUGH YOUR SYSTEM ON AN OUTGOING CO LINE USING DISA (Release 2 and higher) 1) Using a DTMF telephone, call the DISA CO line telephone number:-2) Listen for the ringback tone signal, and then listen for the STRATA DK intercom dial tone’ (if busy tone is received, try again). ) of the CO line or CO line group 3) Dial the access code3 ( that is to be used to place the outgoing call. 4A) If a DISA security code is required4, dial the code and listen for CO dial tone.5 ‘.;:, ,:’ 39 FEATURE DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) (continued) 4B) If a DISA security code is not required, listen for CO dial tone. 5) After receiving CO dial tone, dial the desired telephone number. 6) A timer tone will sound6 approximately four minutes after the time the call was made. Dial 1 to reset the timer’ each time the tone sounds (this allows an additional four minutes of conversation). 7) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. Dial tone will be present for 10 seconds to allow direct dialing of station intercom number or CO line access code. If a number is not dialed, the system automatically causes the DISA CO line to ring at telephones as a normal incoming call. However, if the call is not answered within 15 seconds after the ringing starts, it will disconnect. 2A. Ifthestationdoes not answeraftersixringsortwentyfour seconds, whichever comes first, busy tone will be sent. Dial1 to return to dial tone and dial the same or another number. 213. If you wish to call another station after completing a DISA station call, it is necessary for the internal party to transfer your call. 3. A direct CO line or line group access code must be dialed (701 m 736 or 81 w 88). The LCR code (9) is not allo wed. 4. The DISA security code is a system program option that may or may not be required. 5. If the correct code is not entered, the call will be disconnected. 6. Allparties will hear the timer tone and timer reset DTMF tone. 7. If the timer is not reset, the call will disconnect approximately one minute after the timer tone is sent. 8. Station and system page cannot be accessed on DISA calls. 40 FEATURE USE USE DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) (continued) DISA SECURITY CODE ENTRY/CHANGE/CANCEL (Release 2 and higher) From designated station(s) only. 1) Press thembutton and dial QQ 0’ (3-digit access code). 0 Receive confirmation tone. 2) Dial the new DISA security code2 (Q . Q-1 m 15 digits). 3) Press the B (or m) button. l Receive confirmation tone. NOTES: 1. For security purposes, the 3-digit access code is not published, it is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. 2. If a DISA security code is not entered in step 2, the security code will be cancelled and outgoing line access via DISA will not require a security code. DIRECT STATION SELECTION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS OPTION (HOTLINE) Allows stations to be connected directly by pressing a m button. The button’s LED independently shows the status (idle/ busy) of that station. If connected to a CO line, pressing this button will put the party on hold. Transfer the call as you would normally, by voice announcing or camping on by hanging up. DOOR LOCK Pressing the m button momentarily nected to a door lock or similar device. Door Lock DRLK DRLK DRLK DRLK DRLK Button 0 1 2 3 4 activates a switch con- Location 41 FEATURE FEATURE USE MESSAGE WAITING MESSAGE WAITING If someone calls your telephone and you are unable to answer, the calling party may set the Message Waiting indicator (a flashing LED) on the called party’s telephone. The Message Waiting indicator is the MW/FL LED on the IO- or 20-button electronic telephone. Up to four Message Waiting indications may be queued on the message indicator at one time. One of the four message indications is always reserved for the Message Center; the other three may be set from any other telephone or voice mail device. The button associated with the message indicator on the lo- or 20-button telephone is shown as MW/FL. TO ANSWER A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION ON YOUR TELEPHONE ur telephone: Lift the 1) If the MWIFL LED is flashi handset, press the m and buttons, respectively. l This calls the station that set the message indicator. l Wait for an answer to receive the message. NOTE: If there is no answer, hang up and try at a later time (the MW/FL LED continues to flash). 2) After receiving the message, place the handset on hook. l If the MW/FL LED turns off, you have no more messages. 0. If the MW/FL LED continues to flash, you have more messages-repeat steps 1 and 2 to retrieve them. l If the flashing message LED was turned on by a voice mail device, the device will cancel the indication after a short delay. The cancel time depends on the voice mail device’s parameters. NOTE; our telephone 42 ‘... .. does not have a m USE (continued) TOSETTHEMESSAGEWAlTlNGINDlCATORONANOTHER TELEPHONE 1) At yourtelephone: Lift the handset, press them button and dial the desired intercom number. 2) If the called telephone does not answer: Press them button to set the message indication (or dial I). l The MW/FL LED flashes at the called telephone. l The MW/FL LED illuminates steady at your telephone. 3) Place the handset on-hook. l The MW/FL LED flashes at the called telephone. l The MW/FL LED turns off at your station. e The MW/FL LED continues to flash at the called telephone. TO CANCEL THE MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION SET FROM YOUR TELEPHONE Lift the handset, dial the intercom number of the telephone that has the message indication, and press them button twice (or dial 10). TO CANCEL THE MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION SET ON YOUR TELEPHONE 1) Answer the Message Waiting indication and receive the message. NOTE: Thecalledpartymustanswer(off-hookorm the message indication to be canceled. 2) Press them . . . or. . . button (do not press them button) for button first). NOTE: If your telephone does not have a m button, the message indication can be canceled by dialing m a m 1. button, dialm I.._ /’ 43 FEATURE USE NIGHT TRANSFER PROGRAMMABLE OPTION On an optional basis, your system can function with two or three ringing patterns. If three patterns are selected, they are designated DAY, DAY 2, and NIGHT. If only two patterns are selected, DAY and NIGHT designations are used. In both cases, different ringing patterns are chosen by pressing the button. Certain CO lines may be enabled in system programming to switch from normal operation to DISA line operation. q The active pattern is shown by the state of the NT LED as follows: DAY DAY 2 NIGHT Three-pattern OFF FLASH ON OVERRIDE Two pattern OFF N/A ON CALLS TO INITIATE A BUSY OVERRIDE SIGNAL After reaching a busy station, you may signal that station that a call is waiting by dialing 1. l A tone signal is heard at the busy station. NOTE: If the Off-hook Cal/Announce stat@, then you may talk. option is installed on the busy TO OVERRIDE DND (Programmable Option For Selected Stations) After retiching a DND station, you may signal that station that a call is waiting by dialing 1. A tone signal is heard at the DND station. l 44 FEATURE OVERRIDE CALLS USE (continued) TO INITIATE EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE (Programmable Option For Selected Stations) After reaching a busy station, Executive Override allows you to enter an established conversation by dialing 1. l An optional tone signal is heard by the called parties prior to entering the conversation. NOTE: Privacy override and off-hook call announce separate section of this guide; see the index. are in a SPEAKERPHONE TO MAKE AN OUTSIDE CALL (On-hook Dialing) 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press any available button (or them button + access code). l Listen for dial tone. l CO LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. 5) Press the m button when the call is completed to disconnect. q TO RECEIVE AN INCOMING CALL 1) You hear a ringing tone. 2) Leave the handset on-hook. 3) Press them button next to the flashing LED (CO Incoming Call rate). l CO LED flashes at the In-use rate. 4) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. 5) Press the m button when the call is completed to disconnect. 45 FEATUREUSE SPEAKERPHONE (continued) TO MAKE AN INTERCOM CALL (On-hook Dialing) 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press the m button. l Listen for intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired station number. l You hear a single ring tone. 4) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. 5) Press the m button when the call is completed to disconnect. MICROPHONE FEATURE CONTROL The MIC button is used to switch the electronic telephone’s microphone from ON to OFF or vise versa while the telephone is in use (also see Microphone Cut-offbutton). The MIC LED indicates the status of the microphone: MICROPHONE CONTROL NOTES: 1. To change from speakerphone l Lift handset. l USE (continued) to handset: Return handset on-hook. on off-hook call announce calls for privacy. TWO (TANDEM) CO LINE CONNECTION TO ESTABLISH A TANDEM CO LINE CONNECTION (TRKTRK) 1) While connected on an established CO line call (incoming You hear intercom dial tone. CO LED flashes at the Conference rate. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. Access a second CO line and dial the next telephone number.’ Press the m button after the party answers.2 l CO LEDs flash at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. Press them button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l CO LEDs flash at the Exclusive Hold rate (10 IPS). l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. Hang up. l Both CO LEDs continue flashing at the Exclusive Hold rate. l INT LED goes off. l COs are connected and in Exclusive Hold on your station. l Connection is released automatically when parties hang UP.~ l l LED ON OFF MICROPHONE ON OFF 3) 4) All electronic telephones can answer intercom calls handsfree (on-hook) via the microphone, but only a speakerphone can talk handsfree when originating CO line or intercom calls while onhook. The microphone and accompanying LED are always ON when receiving intercom calls to allow handsfree answerback, and may be ON or OFF when beginning to place an on-hook CO line or intercom call. l Each station’s microphone may be set in system programming to be ON or OFF at the start of handsfree dialing. l Each station’s m button may be set in system programming to switch ON/OFF with one touch or to switch ON/OFF only while pressed. 46 5) 6) ., 47 FEATURE USE FEATURE TIMED REMINDERS TWO (TANDEM) CO LINE CONNECTION (continued) (continued) On some systems, the connection must be supervised and released as follows: 1) Press either button. l Both CO LEDs flash at the In-use rate. l You will be connected to both CO lines. 2) If the parties have hung up, go back on-hook. l Both CO LEDs go off. l Connection is released. 3) If the parties are still talking, proceed to step 5 above. q NOTES: 1. CO lines may be accessed bypressing am line button or by dialing access codes (line number, 70 1 - 736; line group, 81 - 88; or with Release 2 and higher, LCR access “9” is allowed),. however, both CO lines must appear (buttons) on the telephone to allow the station to monitor the tandem connection. 2. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by pressing the original [9 line button. 3. Depends on the public telephone company; some provide auto disconnect and some do not. TIMED REMINDERS Allows five separate reminders to be set at each station. These reminders will be an audible beeping at the times (hour and minute) set by the station user. They can occur just once or repeated on a daily basis. TO ENTER A TIMED REMINDER 1) Dial~+~~~-~~~.Y ou h ave a choice of five different reminders. 2) Enter the desired time (24-hour clock format; i.e., HHMM). 3) Dial 1 if reminder will be repeated every day, or 0 if it is a 48 USE one-time reminder only. 4) Press 1 (or m button to record the time in memory. l A beeping tone will be heard for 30 seconds (or until cancelled by going off-hook) when the hour and minute occur. TO CANCEL A TIMED REMINDER NOTE: Repeat for reminders 1 m b - 1 B 1. TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE/TRAVELING CLASS Toll restriction at a station can be completely overridden, or, with Release 3, the station’s normal class can be changed to another class (traveling class). Use the following procedure to completely override or to change a station’s toll restriction class. TO OVERRIDE TOLL RESTRICTION AT A STATION FOR A SINGLE CALL 1) Access a CO line as normal. 2) Press the m button and dial 0 0. l If there was dial tone, it will noti cease. 3) Dial the Toll Restriction Override Code (four digits). l You will hear dial tone. 4) Dial the desired telephone number. TO ADD, DELETE, OR CHANGE TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE OR TRAVELING CLASS CODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING. 1) Press m and dial the three-digit toll restriction override change access code CI CII0”. l You will hear confirmation tone. 2) Dial the four-digit override code It Cl It It. 3) Press the 1 or m button to store code. 49 FEATURE TOLL RESTRICTION USE OVERRIDE/TRAVELING (continued) VOICE MAIL (VM) (continued) CLASS l You will hear confirmation tone. 4) Repeat steps 1 w 4 to enter more toll restriction override or traveling codes. NOTES: 7. Traveling class is available with Release 3 only. 2. For security reasons, the change access code is not provided in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. TONE SIGNALING PROGRAMMABLE OPTION Provides ringing on incoming nouncing is not activated. intercom calls when voice an- , an- Whenever your station is call forwarded to voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice mail unit to direct the call to your voice mail box. 50 :,, .’ or= button to store pauses. When you wish to retrieve your messages from voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice unit to play back your messages after you press the message waiting button. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial RIO. 3) Dial the re uired di its and pauses to be sent. 4) Press the i * (or d) button to store data. TO CLEAR ALL DIGITS 1) Press m. 0. ). VOICE MAIL (VM) TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial 111. NOTE: Use m TO RETRIEVE MESSAGES Press the m and m buttons. TO MAKE A TONE SIGNAL CALL 1) Call another station via intercom. l The called party hears one ring, then our voice. 2) To send ring tone to the called party, dial Iii. 3) Speak to the party when the call is answered. TO ANSWER A TONE SIGNAL CALL 1) Lift the handset or press the m button (handsfree swerback is inoperative). 2) Hang up when the call is completed. and pauses to be sent (see Note). button to store data. NOTE: The above procedures are required for initial VM set-up only. The digits remain in memory until changed. INDEX CENTREX APPLICATION Your system may be equipped with the Centrex Application, which enhances the system feature capability when installed behind a Centrex or PBX system. Your electronic telephone may be equipped with one or more of the enhanced Centrex features listed below: A) Flexible Intercom A station intercom therefore, possible trex line extension when indicated. Numbering (up to four digits) number can be three or four digits. It is, to match a station’s intercom and Cennumber. Dial the entire station number NOTE: To avoid system numbering plan conflicts, some access code numbers may have to be changed. B) Centrex Feature Buttons Certain Centrex features may be operated by pressing a button on your electronic telephone. The Centrex access code, including the necessary Flash and/or Pause sequence, is activated when the appropriate button is pressed. Press the appropriate Centrex feature button instead of dialing a Centrex access code when operation of the feature is desired. See your Centrex or PBX Operations Manual for specific details. C) Ringing Repeat The distinctive ring patterns available in your Centrex system are automatically repeated with your electronic telephone, allowing you to answer appropriately for either outside, inside or callback calls. D) Delayed Ringing CO or Centrex line(s) may be programmed for a 12-second and/or 24-second ring delay at stations to permit alternate answering conditions. Answer the line when your electronic telephone is ringing. 52 Account Code Calls ............................................................ Alarm Reset ........................................................................ Auto Busy Redial ................................................................ Automatic Callback (Intercom) ........................................... Automatic Off-hook Selection Programmable Option.. ....... Background Music (BGM) .................................................. Background Music Over External Speakers ....................... Button Descriptions ............................................................ Call Forward-All Calls ......................................................... Call Forward-Busy .............................................................. Call Forward-Busy/No Answer ........................................... Call Forward-Fixed ............................................................. Call Forward-No Answer .................................................... Call Holding ........................................................................ Call Pickup.. ........................................................................ Call Transfer with Camp-on ................................................ CENTREX Application ........................................................ Conference Calls ................................................................ Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................. Direct Station Selection Buttons (Hotline) Programmable Option ....................................................... Do Not Disturb .................................................................... Door Lock ........................................................................... Door Phone ........................................................................ Exclusive Hold .................................................................... Group Listening .................................................................. Handsfree Answerback ...................................................... Handsfree Monitoring ......................................................... Intercom Calls.. ................................................................... LED Indications .................................................................. Message Waiting ................................................................ Microphone Control ............................................................ Microphone Cut-off Programmable Option ......................... Night Transfer Programmable Option ................................. Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Optional Feature .............. On-hook Dialing ............................................................ .:. ... Outside Calls ...................................................................... 33 38 11 32 10 38 39 2 26 26 28 29 27 29 31 21 52 24 39 41 31 41 37 30 10 20 38 19 6 42 46 20 44 20 9 8 INDEX (continued) Override Calls ..................................................................... Paging ................................................................................ Privacy Override Programmable Option ............................. Privacy Release Programmable Option ............................. Repeat Last Number Dialed Programmable Option ........... Speakerphone .................................................................... Speed Dial .......................................................................... Speed Dial Buttons Programmable Option.. ....................... Saved Number Redial Programmable Option .................... Telephone Number Storage ............................................... Timed Reminders ............................................................... Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class ........................... Tone/Pulse Dialing Programmable Option ......................... Tone Signaling Programmable Option ............................... Two (Tandem) CO Line Connection ................................... Voice Mail (VM) .................................................................. * and # DTMF Tone Dialing ................................................ 54 : 44 36 18 19 11 45 12 13 14 14 48 49 17 50 47 50 16 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY FEATURES ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE U S E R G U I D E STRATA” DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRATA DK56 AND RELEASE 1, DK KEY SYSTEMS DK24 DK96 2, & 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY .................................................. SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS ......................................... DATE/TIME/DAY ADJUSTMENT ........................................... CALL FORWARD DISPLAY ................................................... STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING ...................... VOICE MAIL (VM) ................................................................... BUSY FIELD DISPLAY.. ......................................................... MODE EXIT ............................................................................ ................ DISA SECURITY CODE: ADD/DELETE/CHANGE TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRRlDE/TRAVELlNG CLASS CODE CHANGE ..................................................... VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE CHANGE.. ............................... MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS ........................ Message ................................ Adding to a Preprogrammed Editing or Setting a New Calling Station Message .............. Preprogramming System Messages.. .................................. Recording A Message ......................................................... Storing A Message .............................................................. LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY.. ........................................... SPEED DIAL MEMO.. ............................................................. TIMED REMINDERS WITH MEMO.. ...................................... MESSAGE SENDING ............................................................. Called Station Messaging .................................................... Group Called Station Messaging ......................................... Calling Station Messaging ................................................... Group Calling Station Messaging ........................................ Busy Station Messaging ...................................................... MESSAGE DIRECTORY ........................................................ USER NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY.. .................................. SPEED DIAL MEMO DIRECTORY ........................................ INDEX ........................................................................... .:. ....... 1 2 12 13 14 15 16 16 16 17 18 19 19 20 20 21 22 22 25 26 27 27 28 29 29 31 32 33 34 39 LIQUID CRYSTAL DIALPAD LCD DISPLAY HANDSET \ , SCROLL BUTTON’ I PAGE BUTTON’ - MODE BUmON* DISPLAY In its idle state, the 32-character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) feature on your electronic telephone gives you an accurate desk clock and calendar combination. When you have an outside call in progress, an elapsed time display gives a constant reminder of the call duration. In addition, a variety of information displays and feature prompting make your call handling more efficient. Alphanumeric messaging capability is also provided. All display functions occur automatically as call processing proceeds. SCRL u SPEAKER \ [l]pAGED MODULAR CORD - FLEXIBLE BUTTONS MODE 0 The uses of the three buttons shown above are: SCRL: 1) Scrolls through message waiting numbers. 2) Scrolls through the speed dial digits (if more than 16 digits) when in mode 8. PAGE: FEATURE AND FUNCTION LEDS ON/OFF ‘AVAILABLE BUmON BUTTON VOLUME CONTROL ON LCD MODEL ONLY 20btton Liquid Crystal Display Telephone 1) Changes Busy Field groups. 2) Used by station 200 to record a user NAME/NUMBER for another station. Station 200 must be an LCD electronic telephone to record NAME/NUMBER display for any other station type. 3) Changes displays (date/time, call forward, dialed number). elapsed time, message, 4) Scrolls through speed dial numbers when using mode 8. MODE: 1) To enter/exit various mode functions (see below). 2) To cancel beeping tone when using timed reminders. 1 ‘. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (continued) SUMMARY MODE DEFINITION I MODE 0: Used to exit another mode and return to clock/calendar display. (Releases (continued) When you dial a verified voluntary account code that is set in the system account code memory (Release 3). 1 NO. NNN RESTRICTED I DIAL MODE 2: Busy station messaging NO. NNN VERIFIED CODE I MODE 1: Busy Field display. OF LCD FUNCTIONS 1 and 3). When you dial a verified forced account code that is not valid (Release 3). After you dial a verified forced account code that is valid (Release 3). )DIALTELkE:~ MODE 4: Called station messaging. MODE 8: Speed dial number check and memo dialing. DIAL MODE 94: Remote called station messaging (Releases 1 and 3). MODE 95: Remote calling station messaging (Releases 1 and 3). SUMMARY Type TEL After you dial a forced or voluntary count code (Releases 1 and 2). NUMBER ac- B) Auto Busy Redial WW After setting auto busy redial, your display prompts you that it has been set. OF LCD FUNCTIONS When the system retrieves the call, your display shows the called number. When Displayed When the called station is ringing, your station’s CO LED (or INT LED) and SPKR LED will flash and a warning beep will sound. A) Account Codes When you press a CO line that requires a forced (verified or nonverified) account code; or dial 111, or press the B button to enter a voluntary (verified or nonverified) account code (Release 3). When you press a CO line that requires a forced (nonverified) account code, or when you press m 1 B to enteravoluntary (nonverified) account code (Releases 1 and 2). When you dial a verified voluntary account code that is not valid (Release 3). C) Automatic Callback (ACB) I I INT I NNN I LINE I 1 NO. NNN NNN ACB SET I NO. NO. 10 ACB I When you receive an automatic callback, the station number you called is displayed. I When you receive an automatic callback for a CO line, the seized line’snumber is displayed. NNN ACB When you set automatic callback at a busy station, its number is displayed. NN'N I SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) Your station will display the called number, followed by LINE NN ACB. piE=q SUMMARY When you initiate any type of call forward, the LCD displays, CALL FORWARD TO. Line After you set call forward, the station number to which your calls will be forwarded is displayed, along with one of the following abbreviations: CF-AC (Call Forward-All Calls) CF-BUSY (Call Forward-Busy) CF-NA (Call Forward-No Answer) CF-B/NA (Call Forward-Busy/No Answer) CF-FIXED (Call Forward-Fixed) If your station automatically accesses an mtercom lme when you go off-hook, INT is displayed. I 2) CO Line If your station automatically accesses a CO line when you go off-hook, the number of the seized CO line is displayed. pEq 3) Dial Access Code When you access a CO line by dialing a COlinegroupaccesscode, theaccessed CO line number is displayed. pz?q El Alphanumeric Messaaes Messages of up to 32 characters may be used in alphanumeric messaging. Messages may either be programmed or set as one-time messages. (Messages may also be used with a timed reminder.) NOTE: Call Forward-Busy, Call Forward-No Answer, and Call Forward-Busy/No Answerare available only with Release 2 or higher. rzl F) Busy Field I 00 10 0....5.... . . . . ...7.. ( , (continued) G) Call Forward D) Automatic Line Selection 1) Intercom OF LCD FUNCTIONS I The Busy Field display indicates, in groups of 10, the last two digits of the station numbers that are busy or set for DND. The top display indicates that stations X00, X05, and Xl 7 are either in use or in DND; the bottom display indicates the same for stations X27, X32, X34, and X39. If the m button is pressed, the 00/l 0 group will change to 10/20, and the busy/DND states of that group of stations will be displayed. The station roups will increment each time the da WA button is pressed, thereby displaying all stations. When your call is forwarded to another station, the station you called is shown. It then changes to the station to which your call was forwarded. When a call is forwarded to your station, the calling station number is displayed on the left and the station called is displayed on the right. H) Call Pickup pLizi%q When you pick up an intercom call, the calling station’s number is displayed on the left and the station number called is displayed on the right. ’ ‘\ :I I” SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) Your LCD telephone displays information noting that your call to station NNN was picked up by station NNN. Calling Number-Intercom When you receive an intercom call, the calling station’s number is displayed. J) SUMMARY 4) Hold OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) Recall Held call automatically recalls your station after a programmed period of time. 5) Outgoing ( When you manually select a CO line, it is displayed. This display is replaced by the dialed number as you dial. CO Line Identification The CO lines can be programmed to display an identifying name of up to 16 characters. The name will be displayed on outgoing and incoming calls. I DR. JONES OETICE 6) CO Line Queuing (Callback) When the CO line queuing feature rings back to your station with an available CO line, that line number will be displayed. I L) Date/Time K) CO Line Number 1) Incoming Call Incoming CO call-If your station is programmed for incoming ringing on that CO line. m I. Press them button to display date/time when talking on a CO line. 2. The date/time is adjusted on a system-wide basis by the station located in port 00 (usually station 200). Transferred CO call-CO line is transferred to your station in the ringing state by another station. Camped-on CO call-CO line was camped-on to your busy station and rings your station when you hang up. 2) When R M) Dialed Number 1) CO Line Call Is Answered The display changes to indicate calling status. m The digits are displayed as you dial over erther a CO,lrne or the intercom using: 1 Manual dialing l l 3) Hold -1 l You have put a CO line call on hold at your station. Automatic dialing Repeat last number dialed Saved number redial SUMMARY 2) OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) P) Intercom Number Display Intercom If an access code is entered (m 110, m [I 0 when on a CO line), the programmed intercom number will be displayed. If you are calling on a CO line, the display ’ will automatickly change from dialeb number to elapsed time after a programmed period of time. Q) LCD Name/Number N) Door Phone/Monitor Display (Release 2 and higher) 1) Idle station When you are called from a door phone, its designating characters are displayed. When you call a door phone, its designating characters are displayed. NOTE: The doorphone designators are NA, NB, and/or NC (N = 1 Y 4, and indicates which of the 12 possible door phones is calling or is being called). 0) Elapsed Time While you are making an outgoing CO line call, the elapsed time of the call is displayed. Elapsed time automatically replaces the dialed number on the display after a programmed period of time. (Timing begins when a [9 button is pressed.) NOTES: 1. On a CO line call, the display can be alternated between date/time, elapsed time, and dialed number by pressing the m button. 2. Elapsed time is displayed for 15 seconds after you hang up, and then changes automatically to date/time. A name or title may be set in memory for each station. When an LCD station is idle, the name displays on the top line of the LCD. When a station calls an LCD station, the name of the calling station displays on the bottom line of the called station’s LCD. m 2) Called station R) Least Cost Routing (LCR) ‘When you are making a call via LCR, your display will prompt you to dial a number by displaying, DIAL TEL NUMBER. As you dial the number, your display. it is shown on S) Message Waiting When you set message waiting at another station, the number of that station is displayed. ( slrm!NNN I JAN 01 SUN 12:19 I CALL 203 I NO. NNN 201 200 I When you hang up after setting message waiting at another station, a reminder is shown on the top row of your display. Your display will show the numbers of up to three stations that have left messages for you. Four numbers may be’stored in message memory (see Recalling Station). SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) T) Message Waiting/Voice Mail When a message waiting voice mail is displayed, a “V” will follow the station number. A I‘+” indicates that there is a station message in memory. Press the m button to rotate through the numbers. U) Off-hook Call Announce When you off-hook call announce to a busy station, your LCDdisplays the numI ber of that station. When another station off-hook call announces to your station, your LCD displays the number of that station. SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS 3) Do Not Disturb (DND) Override The station you have called is in the do not disturb mode. I I NNN NO. NNNDND DND NO. OVR NNN OVR I NNN I 4) Privacy Override I NO. NNN PRV OVRD I NNN V) Overrides 1) Busy (continued) Override When you activate the override feature after calling a busy station, the station number and the feature are displayed. When you initiate do not disturb override, the station number you have overridden is displayed. When another station overrides do not disturb at your station, its number is displayed. (Thedisplay remains until the end of override.) When a station presses a busy line button to enter an existing conversation: The station that initiates the override displays the CO line identification on the LCD. The overridden station’s LCD displays initiating station’s number. (The display remains until the end of the call.) Recallina Station When a transferred call goes unanswered, it will recall to the station that transferred it. The display shows the CO line number and the station number to which it was originally transferred. Your LCD telephone displays the number of a station initiating override when you are on the telephone. The number will remain displayed until override is disconnected. 2) ( 10 Executive Speed Dial Memo Override When you initiate executive override, your LCD telephone displays the number of the station that is overridden. The station that receives the override displays your station number. The number will remain displayed until the call is ended. I *ll TOSHIBA 7145833700 I When using Speed Dial Memo (mode 8), the name and number are displayed. TOSHIBA is the memo (up to 12 characters). 714 583 3700 is the number, (up to 16 digits). 11 SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) Y) Toll Restriction Override Codes After vou access a CO line and Dress to dial a complete toll restriction override or traveling class code (traveling class override codes are available with Release 3 only) your LCD display will prompt you to dial a code. ‘II mlIsm!i Z) Two-CO Line Calls 1) Tandem After you establish atwo-CO line conference call and then release. N, and N, identify the connected CO lines. 2) Conference When you are talking with two external parties on two CO lines. N, and N, identify the connected CO lines. m 3) Amplified When you are talking with two external parties on two CO lines that are externally amplified (optional with Release 3). m DATE/TIME/DAY ADJUSTMENT (continued) 2) Dial main. 3) Dial thetime (hour/minute/second) in the24-hourclockformat HHMMSS. Enter a leading 0 for any single digit entered. button. 4) Press the 1 (or m 0 Listen for confirmation tone. TO SET DAY 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial m@II. 3) Dial the day. l 0 = Sunday l 1 = Monday l 1 = Tuesday l B = Wednesday l 1 = Thursday l 1 = Friday l 0 = Saturday 4) Press the B (or B button. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. CALL FORWARD DISPLAY TO SET CALL FORWARD DATE/TIME/DAY ADJUSTMENT This operation is possible from port 00 only (usually station 200). TO S&T DATE 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial mBi0. 3) Dial the date (year/month/day) in the format YYMMDD. Enter When any type of call forward is initiated, the CALL FORWARD TO prompt displays on the lower row of the LCD. When your station has call forward set, the LCD displays as shown (NNN = the forward to number). 1) Call Forward-All Calls PressmimB+NNN+m (orm+NNN+m. 2) Call Forward-Busy 0 Listen for confirmation tone. 2 and 3) Press~~~~+NNN+~ (orm+NNN+m. (Releases ’ TO SET TIME 1) Place handset on-hook. 12 13 CALL FORWARD DISPLAY (continued) STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING (continued) 3) Call Forward-No Answer (Releases 2 and 3) Press~~~~+ N N N +m (or=+ N N N +m). 4) Call Forward-Busy/No Answer (Releases 2 and 3) PressmiII+NNN+m (or=+ N N N +m). 5) Call Forward-Fixed Press the m button. 5) To clear the MWIFL LED from the calling statio button, dial the station number and press the twice (or 0 I). NOTE: Up to four message waiting displays may be stored on the LCD. Thestationnumberin the left-mostposition willbecalled when the m button is pressed. To rotate the station numbers, press the m button. The fourth message is reserved for the Message Center. VOICE MAIL (VM) NOTES: 1. Tocancelcallforward,press~~~[~(orpressthe call forward button used to set call forward). 2. If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring at your station only will forward (CO lines that ring into more than one station will not forward). l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING TO USE STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING 1) Lift the handset. 2) Dial the desired station number. l If there is no answer (busy or DND), press the m button (or dial 0). This causes the MW/FL LED on the called station to flash. l The called station’s LCD displays the calling station’s number. 3) The called station user presses them and m buttons to return, the call. 4) To clear the MW/FL LED from the called station, press the m button. Whenever your station is call forwarded to voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice mail unit to direct the call to your mailbox. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial Iii. 0 The LCD disolavs. 6 5 6 ID CODE SET. 3) Dial the digits (up toi 6) and pauses (m) to be sent. l The LCD displays the digits and pauses. 4) Press the m button to store data. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. When you want to retrieve your messages from voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice mail unit to play back your messages. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial iii. l The LCD displays, 6 5 7 ID CODE SET. 3) Dial the required digits and pauses to be sent. l The LCD displays the data as it is entered. 4) Press the fl button to store data. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. ’ 15 VOICE MAIL (continued) DISA SECURITY CODE: ADD/DELETE/CHANGE (continued) TO RETRIEVE Press the m MESSAGES and m l Receive confirmation tone. buttons. -1 TO CLEAR ALL DIGITS 2) Dial the new DISA security code (Q . . . Q).’ 3) Press the 1 button. l Receive confirmation tone. 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial~~~orI~~. 3) Press the b button. NOTES: 1. The above procedures are required for initial VM set-up only. The digits remain in memory until changed. 2, Digits are not sent to camped-on VM calls. BUSY FIELD DISPLAY TO DISPLAY BUSY FIELD STATUS ON THE LCD DISPLAY 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 2) Dial 1. Refer to the figure in Summary of LCD Functions. 3) Press the m button to rotate Busy Field groups. MODE EXIT TO EXIT ANY MODE 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 2) Dial 1. l The LCD displays date/day/time. DISA SECURITY From desighated CODE: ADD/DELETE/CHANGE 1) Press the m 16 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE/TRAVELING CLASS CODE CHANGE TO ADD, DELETE, OR CHANGE TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE OR TRAVELING CLASS’ CODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING. 1) Press m and dial the three-digit toll restriction change access code Cl Q Q.2 l You will hear confirmation tone. override -1 station(s) only. TO STORE NEW DISA SECURITY NOTES: 1. Forsecuritypurposes, the 3-digit access code is notgiven in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. 2. The DISA security code can be 1 m 15 digits. 3. To cancel the DISA code, complete steps 1 and 3, skipping step 2. If the DISA code is canceled, outgoing access of CO lines on DISA calls willnot require a security code. CODE 2) Dial the four-digit override code 0 CI Q Q. , button and dial 0 D cI1 (3-digit access code). k... i i 17 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE/TRAVELING CLASS CODE (continued) 3) Press the B (or m)button to store code. l You will hear confirmation tone. I DATA NO. NNN PROGRAMMED I NOTES: 1. Traveling class is available with Release 3 only. 2. For security reasons, the change access code is not provided in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. ACCOUNT CODE CHANGE (Release 3) TO ADD, DELETE, OR CHANGE VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 1) Press m and dial the verified account code change access code Q D CI (see Note). 1 VERIFY A::.SF 3) Dial the verified account code c3 . . . Q (4 w 15 digits). 18 CODE CODE CHANGE (continued) NO. PROGRAMMED NNN I 5) Repeat steps 1 w 4 to enter more verified account codes. NOTE: For security reasons, the change access code is not provided in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION ADDING TO A PREPROGRAMMED VERIFIED NDMBEiR ACCOUNT CODE FUNCTIONS MESSAGE When you select a message, it appears on your station display. A cursor (-) also appears immediately to the right of the last letter in the message. You can now input additional information (up to atotal of 32 digits for each message). Some system messages may expect you to add more information. For example: 1) CALL l Add a station or outside telephone 1 2) Dial the three-digit verified account code number Cl CI Q (000 - 299). ACCOUNT ACCOUNT 4) Press the 1 (or m)button to store code l You will hear confirmation tone. DATA 4) Repeat steps 1 w 4 to enter up to four traveling class codes or two toll restriction override codes. VERIFIED VERIFIED number. 2) BACK AT l Add the time you will return. 3) RETURN AT l Add the date you will return. NOTE: Refer to Recording a Message for adding to a preprogrammed message. 19 MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS (continued) EDITING OR SETTING A NEW CALLING RECORDING STATION MESSAGE You can set a completely new, personalized message by overwriting any of the existing preprogrammed messages. To do this, simply call up one of the messages as explained previously. When the cursor appears to the right of the message, shift it to the left margin and write your new message over the preprogrammed one. The new message will remain on your station until canceled. It will then be erased and the original preprogrammed message will be restored.2 NOTES: 1) Refer to Recording a Message for leaving a new message at your station. 2) Messages 60 - 99 will be erased. Messages remain in memory until changed. PREPROGRAMMING MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION 10 - 19 will SYSTEM MESSAGES System messagescan only be programmed or permanently changed (usually200). Five preprogrammed at portO0, station number messages are automatically stored in memory when the Alphanumeric Messaging with LCD feature is initialized. 60) OUT TO LUNCH 61) IN A MEETING 62) CALL 63) BACK AT 64) RETURN ON You can us‘e these messages and add 35 more messages designed specifically for your system, or you can overwrite the initialized messages and program up to IO of your own. Any messages programmed at port 00 will remain in memory until canceled from port 00 or until the system is reinitialized. After reinitialization, only the original five messages will be in memory. System me’ssages are written and stored in memory as explained in Storing a Message. FUNCTIONS (continued) A MESSAGE Use this procedure to enter the characters of a personal message (10 m 19) or system message (60 y 99), to add to a preprogrammed message, or to edit and set a new message. After calling up a message on your display (see Storing a Message, steps 1 and 2), perform one of the following procedures: TO RECORD A MESSAGE 1) Press the1 button to access alpha characters. Refer to Figure 1 for an explanation of the dialpad buttons. 2) Move the cursor (-) to the desired position (the left edge of the display for a new message, or two spaces to the right of the preprogrammed message to add information). 3) Press the button that has the letter you want to enter. Use the a button to shift from letter to letter on the button. For example: l If you press 1, a D will be displayed. By pressing I, the D is changed to E. By pressing 1 again, the E is changed to F. Press a again and the F changes to D. l To enter a space, press 1. 4) If you want to enter a number, press the 1 button to change to numeric characters. Numbers are also entered on thedialpad. Press the 1 button again to return to alpha characters. 0 button moves cursor to the right (also used to access special \r characters and to enter “blanks” in the alpha mode) f- Each button has three letters that are used in cursor to the left 1 button is used to shift between the three letters on each alpha button (also used to access special characters)’ FIGUREI-DIALPAD INFORMATION 21 20 _I MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION 5) FUNCTIONS (continued) The following special characters are set by pressing Band then pressing 1 to step through the available characters: Q, z, :, -, +, I. button (or, if 6) When the message is complete, press them you do not have a m button, press the m button). l Your message is now stored on your station. STORING A MESSAGE TO STORE A MESSAGE (or m 1 b button. 1) Press the m l The MSG LED flashes. l LCD displays, MSG NO.? 2) Dial the 2-digit message number to be stored. 0 Personal (10 m 19). l System (60 m 99 port 00 only). 3) Use the Recording a Message procedure to enter the message characters. 4) Press them (or m button. l The MSG LED lights steadily. l The LCD displa s, MSG. button. 5) Press them (or iii Ilm l The MSG LED goes out. l The message is now stored. LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY (continued) TO ENTER NAME/NUMBER INFORMATION FROM YOUR STATION 1) Press the m button and dial 110. l USER NAME? will appear on the upper line of the LCD. l Current information will appear on the lower line of the LCD. 2) Enter the new information via the dialpad (refer to Record LCD Messages for method). l Uo to 16 characters can be recorded. 3) Press the m button. l The new information is stored. m TO CLEAR NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY Press the m button, dial 111 and press the m l Listen for confirmation tone, then busy tone. During clear: button. After clear: LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY (Release 2 and higher) NOTES: This feature allows you to store a title (such as your name, telephone number, location, etc.) in system memory. This title (i.e., LOBBY) wifl display on your station’s LCD while it is idle, and it will appear at other stations’ LCDs when they are called from your station. Name display information for non-LCD telephones or voice mail/auto attendant devices may be stored from station 200. When NAME/NUMBER is recorded for non-LCD telephones or other devices, their NAME/NUMBER is displayed on LCD telephones when called. 1. Your title will appear on the LCD during direct intercom, forwarded, and hunted calls. On override or OCA calls, the LCD will not display the title. 2. After a name is cleared, it may be redisplayed at anytime by dialing m 110. 3. A name is displaced by message and call forward settings if they are set. 4. To erase NAME/NUMBER information from memory, repeat steps 1 - 3 above and enter blanks in step 2. Blanks are entered by pressing 1 in the alpha mode. 22 23 LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY TO ENTER NAME/NUMBER INFORMATION FOR ANOTHER STATION OR VOICE MAIL DEVICE FROM STATION 200 1) Press the m button and dial 111. l USER NAME? will appear on the upper line of the LCD. l Current information for station 200 will appear on the lower line of the LCD. I USER NAME? TOSHIBA EXT.200 Allows an LCD user to program a 12-character name for each of his/ her 40 personal speed dial numbers. The memo pad of names may be stepped through to select the appropriate party. Memos may also be added to the 40 system speed dial codes via the station connected to port 00, station number (usually 200). TO PROGRAM I 2) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, DEST. EKT NO.? 3) Dial the intercom number (fl m 1) of the NAME/NUMBER information to be recorded. l The LCD displays, DEST EKT NO. NNN. 4) Press the m button. l USER NAME? will appear on the upper line of the LCD. l Current information for station NNN will appear on the lower line of the LCD. 5) Enterthe new information via the dialpad (referto Record LCD Message method). l Up to 16 characters can be recorded. 6) Press the m button. l The new information is stored and appears on the top line of station NNN’s LCD. l Station 200’s LCD returns to the normal idle display. NOTES: 1. To erase the NAME/NUMBER information of another station from station 200, repeat steps 1 - 6 above and enter blanks in step 5. Blanks are entered by pressing 0 in the alpha mode. 2. Station NNN may set and clear the NAME/NUMBER feature anytime: l Set:mBI& 0 Clear: m B B I, “c /ear” eliminates the display when calling, but does not erase it from memory; on/y station 200canerase the NAME/NlJMBERofanon-LCDstation. 24 SPEED DIAL MEMO (continued) NAMES AND NUMBERS 1) Press the [I buttons. 2) Dial the desired speed dial number. l The LCD displays, # * NNN SPEED DIAL. 3) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, # *NNN _ SPEED DIAL. 4) Enter the name or memo (refer to Recording a Message). 5) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, *NN MEMO SPEED DIAL. 6) Enter the desired telephone number (16 digits maximum). 7) Press the 1 button to record data in memory. TO DIAL A SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displa s, MODE NO.? 2) Dial~tIo2.(CiQ= ii I-IIoraI-ib. l The s eed dial number apears with name or memo. 3) Press the ib A button to scan the directory for the appropriate number/memo. 4) Press any available button. 5) The number is dialed. l q NOTES: 1. A station must be enabled via system programming for LCD message memory. 2. Personal speed dial code numbers are 10 - 49, and system numbers, stored from station 200 on/y, are 60 99. 3. Speed dial numbers and memos aiid their corresponding Z-digit codes may be recorded on the record sheet provided in back of this guide. 25 MESSAGE SPEED DIAL MEMO (continued) TO CHECK A SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Press m 1. 2) Dial a 2-digit speed dial number (see Note). 3) If the number is longer than 16 digits, press them to display the remaining digits. button NOTE: Personal (10 w 19) and system (60 w 99). TIMED REMINDERS WITH MEMO Allows five separate messages to be set at each LCD station. These messages will be displayed at the times (hour and minute) set by the station user. They can either be displayed just once or repeated on a daily basis. TO SET A TIMED REMINDER WITH MEMO 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial a 3-digit reminder number (11 m N 1 i 1). 3) Enter the desired time (24-hour clock format; i.e., HHMM) for the message to be displayed. 4) Dial 1 if the message is to be repeated every day, or fl if it is a one-time message only. 5) Enter the desired message number.* 6) Press the 1 button to record the data in memory. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. l The message will be displayed at the specified time, and a beeping tone will be heard for 30 seconds (or until it is canceled by pressing the m button). * Personal (10 w 19) and system (60 m 99). The message does not display when setting a timed reminder-it displays when the remjnder activates. Messages are set using the Record a Message method. SENDING The Alphanumeric Messaging feature on your LCD electronic telephone enables you to set short text (up to 32 characters) at your station to ensure that you do not miss important calls. Any station may record a message; however, only stations with the LCD are able to display messages. To record messages, see the message administration functions in this guide. Your sent to or ized system has up to 40 preprogrammed messages that may be to other LCD electronic telephones. You can temporarily add change any of these messages, in order to leave a personalmessage at your station (see Note). Some stations may record and save up to 10 personal messages to be used for all types of station messaging. This is a station option that is enabled in system programming. NOTE: Storedmessages and their corresponding message number(s) may be recorded on the record sheet provided in the back of this guide. CALLED STATION MESSAGING Your station number and a message indication may be sent to another LCD station. When that station responds, it will receive the message. TO SET A CALLED STATION MESSAGE 1) Dial the station number (station does not answer). button. 2) Press the m l The LCD displays, MODE? 3) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, MW TO STNNN MSG NO? Enter the desired message number.* 4) 5) l The LCD displays, INT NNN MW SET. Press the m button to release. 6) !6 27 MESSAGE SENDING (continued) 7) CALL NNM is displayed at the called station and the MW/FL LED flashes. 8) SENT NNM is displayed at your station. MESSAGE SENDING (continued) 12) The originating station number and a message indication are displayed on the destination station LCD. *Your number or another station number. *Personal (IO - 19), system (60 - 99). TO RECEIVE A CALLED STATION Press the m and m buttons. TO RECEIVE CALLED STATION MESSAGE 1) Press the m and m button. MESSAGE GROUP CALLED STATION MESSAGING (Releases 1 and 3 only) Allows a station to set a Called Station Message stations. for a group of TO SET A “CALLED STATION” MESSAGE FOR ANOTHER STATION OR GROUP OF STATIONS 1) Press them button. l The LCD displays, MODE? 2) Dial 11. l The LCD displays, MODE 94 DEST EKT NO.? 3) Dial the “destination” station’s number (or enter 30 for all stations, or 31 - 34 for page groups). l The LCD displays, MODE 94 DEST EKT NO.NN. 4) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE 94 ORG EKT NO.? 5) Dial the “originating” station’s number.* l The LCD displays, MODE 94 ORG EKT NO.NN. 6) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 7) Enter‘the desired message’s number. l The LCD displays, the message. 8) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 9) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? IO) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, date/day/time. Ii) The LCD displays, SENT NN M, at originating station. 28 CALLING STATION MESSAGING TO SET A MESSAGE (ON YOUR LCD)THAT WILL BE RECEIVED BY LCD TELEPHONES THAT CALL YOUR TELEPHONE 1) Press the m button. l The MSG LED flashes. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 2) Dial the number of the message you want (see Note). l The selected message is displayed. 3) Press the m button. l The MSG LED lights steadily. NOTE: Personal (10 - 19) and system (60 - 99). GROUP CALLING STATION MESSAGING TO SET A CALLING STATION MESSAGE FOR ANOTHER STATION 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE? 2) Dial 11. l The LCD displays, MODE 95 DEST EKT NO.? 3) Dial the “destination” station number. l The LCD displays, MODE 95 DEST EKT NO.NN. 4) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 5) Enter the desired message number. l The LCD displays the message. 6) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? . ,J 29 MESSAGE SENDING MESSAGE. SENDING (continued) NOTE: Group calling station messaging allows you to set a calling station message for on/y one station at a time. 7) Press the mmq button. l The LCD displays. MODE NO.? 8) Dial 1. l Your LCD shows the time and date. l The message is displayed at the “destination” station. l Any station calling the “destination” station receives the message. TO SET A MESSAGE IF YOU DO NOT HAVE Am BUTTON 1) Press the m button. l The INT LED lights. 2) Dial ma. 3) Dial the number of the message you want (see Note). 4) Press the m button. l The INT LED goes out (your message is now stored). NOTE: Persona/ (70 - 79) and system (60 - 99). TO CANCEL STATION A MESSAGE THAT HAS BEEN SET AT YOUR Press the m button. l The MSG LED goes out. TO CANCEL Bull-ON \ A MESSAGE IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A m 1) Press the m button. l The INT LED lights. 2) Dialmg. 3) Press’ the m button. l The INT LED goes out. (continued) BUSY STATION MESSAGING (Releases 1 and 3 only) When reaching a busy LCD station, a message can be sent to that station (an audible tone will be heard). The busy station may also return a message to the calling station’s LCD. The two stations may continue this procedure to carry on a “silent” conversation. TO SEND A MESSAGE TO A BUSY STATION 1) Call the desired station. l Listen for busy tone. 2) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 3) Dial I. l The LCD displays, OVER TO STNN MSG NO? 4) Enter the desired message number.* l The LCD displays the message. 5) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG SEND. 6) The destination station beeps four times and the message is displayed for 30 seconds, or until originating station hangs up. *Personal (10 - 19) and system (60 - 99). TO RETURN A MESSAGE (Within 30 Seconds) FROM THE BUSY STATION AFTER RECEIVING A “BUSY STATION” MESSAGE. 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO? 2) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, OVER TO STNN MSG NO? 3) Enter the desired message number.* l The LCD displays the message. 4) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG SEND. NOTE: A personal message (10 - 19) will remain stored in memory. 30 31 MESSAGE DIRECTORY Messages are limited to 32 alphanumeric displayed in two rows of 16. characters and are This directory is provided for reference and recording messages. Message # NAME/NUMBERS are limited to 16 alphanumeric characters and are displayed on the top row of idle LCD stations and the bottom row of called LCD stations. This directory is provided for station 200 reference and recording of other station NAME/NUMBERS. Station # Message # DATE DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME. Station # Message # DATE Station # Message # DATE Station # Message # DATE Station # Message # DATE Station # Message # DATE 32 ‘. j.. I _ ;.y’ 33 SPEED DIAL MEMO DIRECTORY Speed Dial memos are limited to 12 characters for the memo (top row of LCD) and 16-digits/pauses for the dial number (bottom row of LCD). * Code: 12-Character Memo: * This directory is provided for recording Speed Dial numbers with memos. * Code: * 12-Character Memo: (Example) -MEMO 10 SPEED HERE DIAL# HERE * * * \ * * 35 * Code: 12-Character * * * * * *\ *EE.- ! 36 Memo: * Code: 1 * * * * * * * 12-Character Memo: INDEX * Code: 12-Character * * * * * * , 38 Memo: Adding to a Preprogrammed Message ................................. Busy Field Display ................................................................ Busy Station Messaging ....................................................... Call Forward Display.. ........................................................... Called Station Messaging ..................................................... Calling Station Messaging .................................................... Date/Time/Day Adjustment ................................................... ............................ DISA Security Code: Add/Delete/Change Editing or Setting a New Calling Station Message ............... Group Called Station Messaging .......................................... Group Calling Station Messaging ......................................... LCD Name/Number Display ................................................. Liquid Crystal Display ........................................................... Mode Exit .............................................................................. Message Administration Functions ....................................... Message Directory ................................................................ Message Sending ................................................................. Preprogramming System Messages.. ................................... Recording a Message ........................................................... Speed Dial Memo ................................................................. Speed Dial Memo Directory .................................................. Station-to-Station Message Waiting ..................................... Storing a Message ................................................................ Summary of LCD Functions.. ................................................ Timed Reminders with Memo ............................................... Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class Code Change ...... User Name/Number Directory .............................................. Verified Account Code Change ............................................ Voice Mail (VM) .................................................................... 19 16 31 13 27 29 12 16 20 28 29 22 1 16 19 32 27 20 21 25 34 14 22 2 26 17 34 18 15 39 DIGITAL TELEPHONE U S E R G U I D E TABLE OF CONTENTS STRA TA@ DK D I GITAL TE :1.EPHONE STRATA DK56 AND RELEASE KEY SYSTEMS DK24 DK96 3 GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................... Button Descriptions.. ............................................................. Volume Controls ................................................................... LED Indications . . ................................................................... FEATURE USE . . ...................................................................... Outside Calls ... . .................................................................... On-hook Dialing .................................................................... Group Listening .................................................................... Automatic Off-hook Selection Programmable Option ........... Repeat Last Number Dialed ................................................. Auto Busy Redial Programmable Option .............................. Speed Dial ............................................................................ Speed Dial Buttons Programmable Option ........................... Saved Number Redial Programmable Option ...................... Telephone Number Storage ................................................. * and # DTMF Tone Dialing .................................................. Tone/Pulse Dialing Programmable Option ........................... Privacy Override Programmable Option ............................... Privacy Button Programmable Option .................................. Privacy Release Programmable Option.. .............................. Intercom Calls ....................................................................... Handsfree Answerback.. ....................................................... Microphone Cut-off Programmable Option ........................... Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Optional Feature.. ............... Call Transfer with Camp-on .................................................. Conference Calls .................................................................. Call Forward-All Calls ........................................................... Call Forward-Busy ................................................................ Call Forward-No Answer.. ..................................................... Call Forward-Busy/No Answer.. ............................................ Call Forward-Fixed ............................................................... Call Holding .......................................................................... Exclusive Hold ...................................................................... Call Pickup.. .......................................................................... Do Not Disturb .......................................................... , ........... 1 2 6 8 10 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 16 16 19 19 20 21 21 21 22 23 23 24 26 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 33 34 TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued) Automatic Callback (Intercom) .............................................. Account Code Calls .............................................................. Paging ................................................................................... Door Phone.. ......................................................................... Handsfree Monitoring .......................................................... Alarm Reset ......................................................................... Background Music (BGM) .................................................... Background Music Over External Speakers ........................ Direct Inward System Access (DISA) .................................. Direct Station Selection Buttons (Hotline) Programmable Option ......................................................... Door Lock ............................................................................. Message Waiting ................................................................. Night Transfer Programmable Option ................................... Override Calls ....................................................................... Speakerphone (DKT 1020SD Only) ..................................... Microphone Control ............................................................. Two (Tandem) CO Line Connection ..................................... Timed Reminders ................................................................. Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class ............................. Tone Signaling Programmable Option .................................. Voice Mail (VM) .................................................................... CENTREX APPLICATION ........................................................ INDEX ....................................................................................... 34 36 38 39 .40 .40 .40 .41 .41 43 44 .44 46 47 47 .48 49 51 51 52 53 55 56 HANDSET SPEAKER \ FLEXIBLE FEATURE BUTTONS MODULAR HANDSET CORD\ MESSAGE WAITING BUTTON AND LED INDICATOR CONFERENCE/ TRANSFER BUlTON LAST NUMBER REDIAL BUTTON tlOLD BUTTON I MICROPHONE ON/OFF BUTTON AND LED INDICATOR SPEAKER ON/OFF BUlTON AND LED INDICATOR 20-button Digital Telephone GENERAL INFORMATION Toshiba digital telephones can access a wide range of useful features. This user guide provides brief, step-by-step instructions for each of these features, which are activated by access codes or feature buttons. It is possible that your digital telephone cannot access all of the listed features; this is because feature accessibility is assigned on a phone-by-phone basis in system programming. Each digital telephone includes a dialpad, 26 feature buttons, and volume control up-and-down buttons. The feature buttons on each side of the dialpad are fixed, and their functions cannot be changed. The feature buttons above the dialpad are flexible and can be changed in programming. All of the flexible feature buttons and some of the fixed feature buttons have LEDs. These LEDs indicate call status by their color and flash rate. Activated LEDs can be one of two colors, red or green. If a station user makes or receives a CO line or intercom call, the intercom or appropriate CO line LED on the telephone will be green. If a common CO line is accessed, the line’s LED will be red at the stations not on the line. If a feature button is activated, its LED will be red. This guide also contains a section on the Centrex Application, which enhances the system feature capability when installed behind a Centrex or PBX system. NOTE: Wherever a CO line is indicated, it can also be a Centrex and/or PBX line. IMPORTANT! Some of the features listed in this guide may not appear on your telephone due to hardware configuration or programming. GENERAL INFORMATION BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS BU-ITON DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON B Allows a station user to enter a voluntary account code anytime during a CO line call without interrupting the conversation. CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER BUTTON m Whenever the called station does not answer after either three rings or 12 seconds, whichever occurs first, this feature forwards calls to another station. ALARM RESET BUTTON m A station programmable option that will turn off the digital telephone alarm if connected to a facility alarm mechanism. CALL FORWARD-FIXED BUTTON m Sets Call Forward to a station assigned in system programming. q ALL CALL VOICE PAGE BUTTON A single dedicated button that allows a station to voice page all of the digital/electronic telephones in the system simultaneously. NOTE: CO line calls will forward on/y if the CO line is programmed to ring at one station. If a CO line is programmed to ring at more than one station, the CO line will not forward. AUTOMATIC BUSY REDIAL BUTTON m Allows the user to set up an Automatic Busy Redial after receiving busy tone on a dialed CO line call. CALL PICKUP BUTTON m Initiates directed call pickup of CO line, intercom, and page calls. AUTOMATIC CALLBACK BUTTON m Recalls a busy or Do Not Disturb station on intercom as soon as that station becomes idle. Also used for CO line queuing. CALL PICKUP BUTTONS m and m If the system is shared by two tenants, the m up Tenant 1 ringing CO line calls and them Tenant 2 ringing CO line calls. BACKGROUND MUSIC BUTTON m Allows background music to be switched speaker. 2 (continued) on/off the station button picks button picks up CENTRAL OFFICE LINE BUTTON m Accesses an outside line. CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS BUTTON m With this feature, all calls will forward to another station. CONFERENCE/TRANSFER BUTTON m Sets up conference and transfer calls. CALL FORWARD-BUSY BUTTON m Whenever the called station is busy, this feature forwards calls to another station. DATA BUlTON m Allows manual dialing for internal data calls. See the Data In- CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER BUTTON m Whenever the called station is busy or does not answer prior to a predetermined period, this feature forwards calls to another station. If the called station is busy, the calls forward immediately. All non-answered calls (station is not busy) forward after either three rings or 12 seconds, whichever occurs first. DATA RELEASE BUTTON m Releases data calls. See the Data Interface User Guide. terface User Guide. DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUTTON(s) w Rings a preselected station. The LED associated with each m button provides the status (idle/busy) of the station assigned to the button. GENERAL INFORMATION BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS (continued) BUlTON DO NOT DISTURB BUlTON m Locks the individual station in or out of the Do Not Disturb mode. DOOR LOCK BUTTON m Controls a door lock mechanism. DESCRIPTIONS (continued) q NIGHT TRANSFER BUTTON Controls the system’s CO line ringing pattern for after hours incoming calls. PAUSE BUTTON m Applies a l/2- or 2-second pause when used in programming speed dial numbers (time is set in system programming). FLASH BUTTON m Can be used to perform the following functions: Disconnect and recall dial tone on a CO line; access Centrex or PBX features; and enter a pause or flash signal when programming speed dial numbers. PAUSE (LONG) BUTTON m Inserts a lo-second pause when used in programming dial numbers. HOLD BUTTON m Holds internal or outside calls. POOLED LINE BUTTON Allows a group of CO lines to appear under one button. INTERCOM BUTTON m Accesses an intercom line. PRIVACY BUTTON m Blocks Privacy Override of CO lines from stations that have common CO line button appearances. This button does not block Busy and Executive Override. q MESSAGE SELECT BU’ITON m Allows system and personal messages to be displayed 32-character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). on the MESSAGE WAITING BUTTON DXm The message LED flashes to indicate a message is waiting. MICROPHONE BUTTON m Controls the microphone off/on while telephone speed PRIVACY RELEASE BUTTON m Releases privacy on a CO line so another station can enter the conversation. REDIAL BUTTON m Redials the last telephone number dialed. is in use. MODEM BUTTON m Used to reserve a modem from a pool, to indicate that your telephone.is connected to a modem, or that all modems in the pool are busy. See the Data Interface User Guide. MICROPHONE CUTOFF BUTTON m Allows a station to turn its microphone off/on while idle. Functional when station receives calls; the m button controls the microphone when the station originates calls. RELEASE BUlTON m This feature disconnects the existing call and places the station into an idle condition, whether the digital telephone is on- or offhook. SAVE BUTTON m Saves a telephone numberafterdialing and automatically that number when button is pressed in the idle state., redials GENERAL INFORMATION BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS SPEAKER VOLUME (continued) BUTTON m Turns the speaker on/off. The speaker button will also select a CO or intercom line if programmed for auto preference in system programming. Also, used to disconnect when the handset is in the cradle. SPEED DIAL BUTTON Provides single-button telephone number. q speed dial of a personally assigned SPEED DIAL (FIXED) BUTTON m This button dials a pre-assigned access code. number or Centrex/PBX feature SPEED DIAL SELECT m Provides access to station or system speed dial numbers. TONE BUlTON m Changes the outgoing dialing of the CO line in use from dial pulse to tone signaling. VOLUME CONTROLS These twobuttons, left of the dialpad, control the ring, speaker, handset, and muted tone burst volume levels. The buttons consist of two arrows: one that points up, and one that points down. To increase any of the volume levels listed above, press the, upward pointing arrow; to decrease any of the levels, press the downward pointing arrow. IMPORTANT! Either‘buttonmustbehelddown foratleastaneigthof a second for any volume change to occur. If either button is continually held down, the volume will continually change until the button is released. 6 CONTROLS (continued) TO ADJUST RING TONE (Also Controls Intercom Volume Before Answer) Incoming Handsfree 1) Ensure that the handset is on-hook. 2) Press the m button continuous ring tone will be heard. 3) Hold down the m button until the desired ring volume is set. . ..or... 1) Press m and dial 10 m I. 15 seconds or until disconnected. button until the desired ring volume is set. TO ADJUST THE HANDSET VOLUME While the handset is off-hook on an established call, press them button until the desired volume is achieved. TO ADJUST THE SPEAKER VOLUME (On-hook nation, Intercom and CO Dial Tone; Incoming Answerback after Answer; and BGM) Presswand then press the-button volume is set. . ..or... While on an On-hook call, press them desired volume is set. TO ADJUST INCOMING INTERCOM HANDSFREE Call OrigiHandsfree until desired button until VOLUME While receiving a handsfree intercom call, press the m button until the desired volume is set. TO ADJUST MUTED TONE BURST* 1) Press the m 2) Press them button and dial 10 B 1. button until the desired volume is set. * The muted tone burst is a warning-type tone that is used with a number of features, including Busy Override, ‘Do Not Disturb Override, and Call Waiting. This tone warns or informs users that another party is calling their telephone when it is busy or in Do Not Disturb mode. 7 GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL LED INDICATIONS LED INDICATIONS CO INCOMING CALL A slow flash rate (i/2-sec. on-l/2-sec. off) indicates the CO/ PBX line on which the call is ringing.The line’s LED will be red on all stations with this button. CONFERENCE Avery fast flash rate (10 impulses per second (IPS)) indicates the CO line presently in the Conference mode. Other stations’ LEDs also show a steady (busy) indication for these lines. The line LED of the digital telephone that initiates the conference will be green. All other stations’ LEDs will be red. EXCLUSIVE HOLD A very fast flash rate (10 IPS) indicates the CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold at the holding station. The LED is on steady (busy) on all other stations. The holding station’s LED will be green, and other stations’ LEDs will be red. FLEXIBLE FEATURE BUTTON ACCESS The LED of a flexible feature button (such as m, m, m, etc.) will be red at the station that activated it. Stations do not share these buttons with each other; therefore, other stations’ LEDs will not be affected. HOLD RECALL A quick flash rate matching the tones (2 IPS for 1 sec.-l for 1 sec.) reminds a station which line has been on hold programmed period of time. The line LED of the holding will be green during Hold Recall. All other stations’ LEDs red. INFORMATION 0 IPS for the station will be INTERCOM CALL A pulsating on/off flash rate (IO IPS for 1 sec. on-l sec. off) appears on the INT LED at the station that is being called. The INT LEDsof the called and calling stations will be green during the ring state and the conversation. Both stations’ MIC and SPEAKER LEDs will be red. (continued) IN-USE A steady, double flash rate (2 sec. on-l/8-sec. off-l/8-sec. on-l/8-sec. off) indicates the CO line presently in use at the station that originated the call. Other stations’ LEDs are on steady for that time. The line LED will be green at the station that is participating in the CO call. Other stations’ LEDs will be red. ON-HOLD A fast (4 IPS) flash rate (l/8-sec. on-l /8-sec. off) indicates the CO line placed on hold at the station. The LEDs of the CO line on hold flash at a medium rate (3/4-sec. on-l/4-sec. off) at the other stations. If using the Pooled Line button, the hold indication is only at the station that places the call on hold. The line LED will be green at the station that placed the call on hold. All other stations’ LEDs will be red. FEATURE FEATURE USE OUTSIDE CALLS OUTSIDE CALLS TO MAKE AN OUTGOING CALL (DirectAccess) 1) Lift the handset. line button (or button). 2) Press any available l Listen for dial tone. l CO/PL LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Hang up when the call is completed. q q TO MAKE AN OUTGOING CALL (Dial Access) 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the m button. 0 Listen for intercom tone. l INT LED flashes green at In-use rate. . 3) Dial CO line access code’ l Listen for CO dial tone.* 4) Dial desired number. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. Dial1 to access the genera/group or to use Least Cost Routing; or dial 0 and a CO line number fi 0 wB B,; or dial0 0 w 11 to access line group I w 8, respective/y. 2. CO dial tone is not returned when dialing via LCR, dial 1; intercom dial tone may be returned, depending on system programming. TO RECEIVE AN INCOMING CALL 1) You hear a ringing tone. l ‘CO LED flashes red at the CO Incoming Call rate. 2) Press (9 line button and lift the handset. l CO LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. TO RECEIVE INCOMING CALLS WITH POOLED LINE BUTTON 1) Ringing tone is heard. l PL LED flashes red at the CO Incoming Call rate. 10 \ i USE (continued) q 2) Lift the handset or press the button. l PL LED is on steady green. 3) A muted ringing indicates a new incoming call, or recall. 4) Transfer the present call or place it on hold. 5) Press and release the hookswitch to answer the next call. 6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all calls are completed. 7) Hang up. NOTES: 1. A transfer to a busy station willautomatically Camp-on. 2. If step 5 is performed before step 4, the current call is terminated. ON-HOOK DIALING TO MAKE AN OUTSIDE CALL 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press any availablem line button (arm button) and listen for dial tone, or follow previous directions for Dial Access. l LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Lift the handset when the distant party answers.* 5) Hang up when the call is completed. TO MAKE AN INTERCOM CALL 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press the m button. l INT LED flashes green at the In-use rate 3) Dial the desired station number. l You hear a single ring tone.* 4) Lift the handset to converse. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. *If busy tone is heard, press the m connect. button to dis- \\ :’ 11 FEATURE FEATURE USE GROUP LISTENING REPEAT LAST NUMBER DIALED Allows all persons present to hear the distant party’s responses. This feature enables you to automatically redial the last number called by pressing the m button. The 1 button serves the same function. TO USE GROUP LISTENING 1) With the handset off-hook, press and hold the m button then place the handset on-hook and release the m button. l SPEAKER and MIC LEDs light and the distant party’s voice is heard via the telephone’s speaker. 2) When local response is required, lift the handset off-hook. l SPEAKER and MIC LEDs go off. l Telephone speaker is silenced. l Handset is activated. TO REDIAL LAST NUMBER CALLED 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available (9 line button. l Listen for dial tone. 3) Press them (or the b button. l The last telephone number you dialed will automatically be redialed. 4) Hang up when the call is completed. AUTOMATIC OFF-HOOK SELECTION PROGRAMMABLE OPTION AUTO BUSY REDIAL PROGRAMMABLE OPTION Allows Automatic Off-hook Selection of either an intercom path, a CO line, or a CO line group. (The particulars must be programmed by your system administrator.) After reaching a busy outside number, the system will automatically redial that number at programmed intervals. NOTE: The m button also selects the designated group automatically. TO MAKE A CALL Lift the handset. l You will be connected line/ to the option programmed. NOTE: hear silence aftergoing off-hook, you mustpress button or a [9 line button before making a call. 13 USE the TO USE AUTO BUSY REDIAL 1) Access any available CO line and dial the outside telephone number. l Receive busy tone. 2) Press the m button (or m [ b. l ABR LED blinks red or hear confirmation tone). 3) Hang up (or press the b button). 4) At programmed intervals (30 or 60 seconds), the system will redial the number (15 times maximum). l With each attempt, if busy, ABR will reset for next try. 5) When the connection is made and the called party is ringing: l CO (or INT) and SPEAKER LEDs blink green. l Ringing tone is heard. 6) Pick up handset (or press the m button) and wait for party to answer, 13 FEATURE USE AUTO BUSY REDIAL (continued) TO CANCEL Press the m ABR button (or m SPEED DIAL TO CALL A SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available line button. l Listen for dial tone. 3) Press the m (or the [) button (see Note). 4) Dial the 2-digit speed dial code for the desired telephone number. l ‘Your system will automatically dial the number for you. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. q TO CHAIN DIAL AUTOMATICALLY Dials two or more speed dial numbers during one call. 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available line button. l Listen for dial tone. 14 3) Press them (or the 1) button (see Note). 4) Dial the 2-digit speed dial code for the first telephone number to be dialed. 5) Press them (or the 1) button. 6) Dial the 2-digit speed dial code for the second telephone number to be dialed. 7) Repeat the above steps for each subsequent number to be dialed. l Yoursystem will automatically dial the number for you. 8) Hang up when the call is completed. 1 I). NOTES: 1. ABR will not be attempted while the station is busy on another call but will continue to time-out. 2. With each attempt: The CO (or IiT) and SPEAKER LEDs blink when the line is seized. Dial tone is heard via the speaker. Telephone number is redialed. If busy, ABR will reset and try again. If a connection is made, ring tone sounds until called party answers. If the originatin station does not pick up the handset (or press the h button) after a connection is made (it will ring back three times), ACB mute ring sounds for 30 seconds and then the call disconnects. q SPEED DIAL (continued) NOTE: lfyour telephone does not have an= serves the same function. button, the 1 button SPEED DIAL BUTTONS PROGRAMMABLE OPTION After accessing a CO line, speed dial is available by pressing an button instead of a 2-digit access code. Eachm button stores one telephone number (up to 20 digits).’ q TO STORE A TELEPHONE NUMBER* 1) Do not lift the handset. 2) Press the 1 (or m) and fl (or m) buttons, respectively. 3) Press the button you wish to use. 4) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum).3 5) Press the 1 (or m) button to record the number in memory. 6) Repeat the above steps for each button. q q NOTES: 1. Up to 37 digits by linking two speed dial numbers (see the link procedure that follows). ./’ 15 FEATURE USE FEATURE SPEED DIAL BUTTONS PROGRAMMABLE OPTION (continued) 2. Repeat this procedure to replace the stored telephone numbers with new ones. 3. It may be necessary to insert a pause after the CO line access code to allow for dial tone delay. If so, press the m (arm button after entering the Centrex or PBXaccesscode (see Telephone NumberStorage-Pauses). 4. To store * or # DTMF tones in speed dial numbers, the tele hone that is used to store the numbers must have the lb D button. These tones can be entered anywhere in a speed dial number. SAVED NUMBER REDIAL PROGRAMMABLE OPTION This feature enables you to store a dialed telephone number and later redial that number by pressing a single button. TO SAVE A TELEPHONE NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. 2) Obtain dial tone. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. 4) Press the m button. l The telephone number is saved for future use. TO DIAL A SAVED TELEPHONE NUMBER 1) Lift the handset. 2) Obtain dial tone. 3) Press the m button. l Saved number will be automatically TELEPHONE dialed. NUMBER STORAGE STORING A SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBER System speed dial telephone numbers can be stored in the system memory by station 200 only. 1) Do not lift the handset. 16 TELEPHONE USE NUMBER STORAGE (continued) and m buttons, respec2) Press the 1 and 1 (or m tively. 3) Dial a 2-digit speed dial code. l System speed dial codes run consecutively from 60 N 99. 4) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum). button to record the telephone 5) Press the 1 (or mm number in memory. 6) Repeat the steps above with every telephone number to be stored (up to the maximum of 40). 7) Write down the speed dial codes and telephone numbers for future reference. NOTE: Repeat steps 1 w 5 to replace the stored telephone bers with new ones. num- TO STORE PAUSES (l/2- or 2-second/lo-second) and FLASHES (Hookflash) ALONG WITH SPEED DIAL NUMBERS 1) Press them (or m) button to store a pause. Pauses can be inserted anv where in speed dial number. 2) Press them button to store a flash. The flash must be stored as the first entry, a flash cannot be stored after a digit is entered into the speed dial number. NOTES: 7. If a m button is not available, the m button will store a ause (flashes cannot be stored). 2. The G$ - A button is l/2- or P-seconds per system program assignments. 3. A lo-second pause is programmed using the m button. FEATURE TELEPHONE FEATURE USE NUMBER STORAGE TELEPHONE (continued) STORING A STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBER Speed dial telephone numbers can be stored by each station. 1) Do not lift the handset. and m) buttons, respec2) Press the [ and i (or m tively. 3) Dial a 2-digit speed dial code. l Station speed dial codes run consecutively from 10 N 49. 4) Dial the telephone number to be stored (20 digits maximum). 5) Press the 1 button to record the number in memory. 6) Repeat the above steps with every number to be stored (up to the maximum of 40). 7) Write down the speed dial codes and telephone numbers for future reference. q TO LINK TWO SPEED DIAL NUMBERS UNDER ONE BUTTON You can link a second number to a number stored in one of ten locations in the system speed dial memory (90 N 99). This allows up to 37 digits to be stored under one speed dial button or code. Any station can link any of its assigned speed dial numbers (10 w 49) to codes 90 N 99, however station 200 is required for linking codes 60 w 89. (All other procedures for entering numbers apply.) 1) Press the 1 and i (or m and m) buttons. 2) Dial an applicable 2-digit speed dial code (10 m 49 for all stations, 60 w 99 at station 200 only). 3) Press the 1 (or m) button. 4) Dial the 2-digit code to which this number will be linked (90 - 99). 5) Dial the number to be chained (17 digits maximum). 6) Press the 1 (or m) button to record the number in’ memory. NOTE: The number stored in location 90 - 99 will dial out first, followed by the number linked to it in location IO - 49 or 60 .,. USE NUMBER STORAGE (continued) - 89. The company’s special carrier access telephone numbers are normally stored in locations 90 - 99, allowing other numbers to be linked to them to dial both numbers using a one-button speed dial. * AND # DTMF TONE DIALING When the * or # tones must be output (for computer input service or other use), the speed dial feature must be disabled to ermit manual dialing of the1 and 1 buttons. (Applicable only if 55D and m buttons are not programmed.) TO OUTPUT * AND # DTMF TONES 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press any available line button. 3) Dial any desired directory number. 4) To enable * and # tones to be sent, press 11 first. q NOTE: Only manual tones as well when dialed. the station is dialing will be possible; the special * and # as digits 0 - 9 will be output as DTMF tones The speed dial feature will be restored when disconnected or placed on hold. TONE/PULSE DIALING PROGRAMMABLE OPTION For some CO lines, calls must be made using rotary dial pulses. In order to access remote equipment requiring tones in these areas (such as automatic tellers or answering machines), you must change to DTMF tohe sending after you have dialed the outside directory number. Pressing them button changes the dialing status of the CO line in use: TONE LED ON indicates DTMF tones are output; LED OFF indicates dial pulses are output. ‘\,:; ,:, 19 FEATURE USE FEATURE TONE/PULSE DIALING PROGRAMMABLE OPTION (continued) TO CHANGE TO TONE SENDING After you have dialed a telephone number and the call is in progress, press the m button. TONE LED goes on. Pressing the dialpad buttons will cause DTMF tones to be transmitted. NOTE: After :hem button is pressed, the Tone LED will remain on and DTMF tones will be sent when dialing until the call is released. When originating or receiving a new CO line call, the system automatically places the line in the dial pulse mode until the m button is used. PRIVACY OVERRIDE PROGRAMMABLE OPTION Allows stations with common CO lines to override an existing conversation by pressing the busy line button. Up to two stations maximum may override an existing CO line-to-station call (allowing a total of up to three stations being connected to an outside line). q TO ENTER AN EXISTING CALL BETWEEN A CO LINE AND ANOTHER STATION Press the busy m line button. l An optional tone signal is heard by the connected parties prior to the new station entering the conversation. NOTE: ’ To allow Privacy Override, the overriding station must be programmed with Privacy Override; or, the Privacy Release LED must be on at the talking station (see Privacy Release). USE PRIVACY OVERRIDE PROGRAMMABLE (continued) OPTION PRIVACY BUTTON PROGRAMMABLE OPTION This option blocks any station programmed with Privacy Override from entering your CO line conversation by pressing a common CO line button. TO MAKE ALL CO LINES ON YOUR STATION PRIVATE Press the m button. TO CANCEL Press the m PRIVACY button again NOTE: Privacy willnot block Busy Override or Executive Override. PRIVACY RELEASE PROGRAMMABLE OPTION On a private system, activating them button allows any other station to enter an in-progress CO line call (see Privacy Override). TO USE PRIVACY RELEASE FEATURE Press the m button. l PRV RLS LED goes on. l Your station does not have CO line privacy. INTERCOM CALLS TO MAKE AN INTERCOM CALL (Voice First) 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the m button (see Note). l You hear intercom dial tone. 31 FEATURE INTERCOM CALLS (continued) l INT LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired station number. l You hear a single ring tone. 4) Speak when the ring tone ends. 5) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. See Automatic Off-hook Selection. 2. Tone Signaling can be accomplished the station number. by dialing0 after TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL 1) You hear a single long tone, followed by the caller’s voice. l INT LED flashes green at the Incoming Call rate. 2) Lift the handset. l INT LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. HANDSFREE MICROPHONE CUT-OFF PROGRAMMABLE OPTION The m button allows a station to turn its microphone off/on while idle. Handsfree Answerback is inoperable while the microphone is off. TO USE MICROPHONE CUT-OFF 1) Press the m button. l MC0 LED goes on. l Micro hone is turned off. 2) Press the l!im 0 button to turn the microphone l MC0 LED goes off. OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE OPTIONAL FEATURE on again. (OCA) Allows a station user to call and speak to an off-hook, busy digital telephone through the speaker. The called digital telephone must be equipped for OCA capability. ANSWERBACK TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL (HANDSFREE) 1) You will hear a single long tone, followed by the caller’s voice. l INT LED flashes green at the Incoming Call rate. l MIC LED is on steady red, indicating your microphone is active. l SPEAKER LED flashes red. 2) Leave the handset on-hook. 3) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. NOTE: . The m button must be pressed (or the handset must be taken off-hook) before placing an intercom call on hold. !2 USE TO USE OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Call the desired station. l Hear warning tone. l If busy tone is heard, dial m. 3) Speak to called party (automatic OCA). TO FORCE A DISCONNECT A forced disconnect allows the called station to disconnect the OCA call. l Press the m button to disconnect an OCA caller. NOTES: 1. DND revents OCA calls. buttons can prevent the OCA caller 2. The Iti andm from listening to your conversation. 23 FEATURE CALL TRANSFER FEATURE USE WITH CAMP-ON CALL TRANSFER Allows you to transfer an outside call to a station that is either idle or busy. TO TRANSFER A CALL 1) While connected to an outside call, press them button. l CO LED remains green, but changes to the Conference fast flash rate. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 2) Dial the station number to which the call is to be transferred. 3A) If the called station is idle: l You hear a single ring tone. 4A) Announce the call. 5A) Hang up. l INT LED goes off. l CO LED remains green, but changes to the On-hold flash rate. l CO line rings the called station.’ l CO LED changes to steady red when the called station connects with the transferred call. l If the station fails to answer the call, you will receive a recall ring after a predetermined time. . . . or. . . 38) If the called station is busy: l Busy tone is heard. 4B) Hang up. l INT LED goes off. l CO LED remains green, but changes to On-hold flash rate. l CO line is camped-on to the called station.’ l Called station hears a warning tone. l CO LED changes to steady red when the station connects with the transferred call.2 NOTES: 1. You may reconnect to a transferred line (anytime before it is answered) by pressing the appropriate q 24 USE WITH CAMP-ON (continued) button or dia/m [ 1 if them line does not appear on your telephone. 2. The call will recall you and camp-on is cancelled if the station does notpick it up within a predetermined time. Inform the caller of the situation, and repeat the procedure (if necessary). TO ANSWER ATRANSFERRED CALL (if your station is idle) 1) Voice Signaling: a) You will hear a single long tone, followed by an announcement. l INT LED flashes green at the Incoming Call rate. b) Acknowledge the announcement. c) When the transferring station hangs up, you will hear a ringing tone. l CO LED changes from red to green at the Incoming Call flash rate. d) Press the appropriate button. l CO LED changes to the In-use flash rate. q NOTE: If your digital telephone has feature, you may press the handset instead of pressing the [9 Line Preference button or lift the button, 2) Tone Signaling: a) You will hear intercom ringing. l INT LED flashes green at the Incoming Call rate. b) Lift the handset (or press the B button). l INT LED changes to the In-use flash rate. c) Speak to the transferring station. d) You will be connected to the outside call when the transferring station hangs up. l INT LED goes off. l The LED of the transferred CO line changes to green at the In-use flash rate. 25 FEATURE CALL TRANSFER FEATURE USE WITH CAMP-ON TO ANSWER A TRANSFERRED CALL (if your station is busy) 1) You will hear a l-second warning tone. l The outside call is camped-on to your station. l CO LED flashes green at the On-hold rate. 2) You have several choices: a) Press the appropriate button. l Existing call is terminated. l The new line is answered and its LED changes to the In-use flash rate. . . . or. . . bl) Hang up. l Existing call is terminated. l The camped-on line rings at your station. l CO LED changes to the Incoming Call flash rate. b2) Press them button (or lift the handset) to answer the call. l CO LED changes to the In-use flash rate. . . or. . . cl) Press them button (if conversing on a CO line). l Existing CO call is put on hold. l The camped-on line rings at your station, l CO LED changes to the Incoming Call flash rate. c2) Press the (9 button to answer the call. l CO LED changes to the In-use flash rate. q CONFERENCE CALLS TO CONFkRENCE UP TO TWO STATIONS AND TWO CO LINES, OR THREE STATIONS AND ONE CO LINE Establish a CO line call using a CO line button, dial the appropriate access code, or you may already be talking on a CO line call. TO ADD A SECOND CO LINE 1) Press the m button. e You hear intercom dial tone. 26 CONFERENCE (continued) USE CALLS (continued) CO LED flashes green at the Conference rate. INT LED flashes green at the fast rate. 2) Access a second CO line’ and dial the next telephone number.* 3) Press the m button after the party answers. l Both CO LEDs flash green at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. l l NOTES: 1. Press a line button or dial an access code: 70 1 736, line number; 81 - 88, line group number; or, 9, LCR access code. 2. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by pressing the button. If the line is not on your telephone, hang up and the original connection will recall you immediately. q q TO ADD ANOTHER STATION 1) Press the m button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l CO LED flashes green at the Conference rate. l INT LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 2) Dial the number of the other station.’ 3) Press the m button after the party answers.2 l CO LED(s) will flash at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. 4) Repeat to add another party: l Three stations/one CO line maximum. 5) Hang up when conference call is completed. NOTES 1. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by pressing the m button. 2. Thenewstation willnotbeconferencedunless the user lifts the handset or presses the m button to answer. 27 FEATURE CONFERENCE TO CONFERENCE INTERCOM LINE USE CALLS FEATURE (continued) UP TO FOUR CALL FORWARD-ALL STATIONS ON ONE l 1) Establish a two-station intercom call. 2) Press them button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes green at the Conference rate. 3) Dial the third station’s number. 4) Press the m button after the party answers. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. l All parties will be conferenced. 5) To add the fourth party, repeat steps 2 N 4. CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS For Intercom and CO line calls (all calls will forward to a selected station at all times-your station will not ring when called). TO SET CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS 1) Press the m button (or dial m B 10). l CFAC LED flashes (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward. l Listen for confirmation tone if 110 was dialed. 3) Press the m (or m) button. l CFAC LED on steady red. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL l CALL FORWARD-ALL CALLS Press the m button (or dial m 11 m. l CFAC LED oes off (or hear confirmation l Pressdbutton ifmIIiwasdialed. tone). NOTE: ’ If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. USE CALLS (continued) Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-BUSY When your station is busy, all calls will forward immediately. When your station is idle, calls will ring at your station as usual. TO SET CALL FORWARD-BUSY 1) Press the m button (or dial m 1 B B). l CFB LED flashes red (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward. l Listen for confirmation tone if 111 was dialed. 3) Press the m (or m) button. l CFB LED on steady. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-BUSY Press the m button (or dial m i 1 B. l CFB LED oes off (or hear confirmation tone). l Press&button if~~~~wasdialed. NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not foward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER For Intercom and CO line calls (all calls will forward to’s selected station whenever your telephone is not answered. within 12 seconds or three rings, whichever occurs first). 29 FEATURE CONFERENCE CALLS (continued) CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO TO SET CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER 1) Press the m button (or dial m 11 a). l CFNA LED flashes red (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward ’ l Listen for confirmation tone if B 1 u was dialed. 3) Press the m (or m) button. l CFNA LED on steady. l Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-NO ANSWER Press the m button (or dial m 11 B). l CFNA LED oes off (or hear confirmation l Pressdbutton if~~[~wasdialed. tone). NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER For intercom and CO line calls (all calls will forward immediately to a selected station whenever your telephone is busy, or if not answered calls will forward within 12 seconds or three rings, whichever ‘occurs first). TO SET CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER 1) Press the m button (or dial m 1 i I). l CFB/NA LED flashes red (or hear confirmation tone). 2) Dial the station number to which calls will forward. l Listen for confirmation tone if B B 1 was dialed. 3) Press’ the m (or m) button. 30 l l USE ANSWER (continued) CFB/NA LED on steady. Calls will forward to stored station number. TO CANCEL CALL FORWARD-BUSY/NO ANSWER Press the m button (or dial m B B I). l CFB/NA LED oes off (or hear confirmation tone). l Press d button if mimm was dialed. NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will not forward. l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. l Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL FORWARD-FIXED All intercom and CO line calls to your station will forward to a predetermined station or voice mail device. The “Forward to” station/device is determined (Fixed) in system programming for each station. Your station will not ring when Call Forward-Fixed is set. TO USE FIXED CALL FORWARD (ALL CALLS) 1) Press the m button. l CFF LED on steady red. l All calls will forward to the fixed programmed 2) To cancel, press the m button again. . CFF LED off. station. NOTE: If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring your station only will forward-CO lines that ring more than one station will noiforward. 31 FEATURE USE CALL FORWARD-FIXED l l l l FEATURE (continued) CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. Intercom calls will forward. Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. Call forward must be set before the call is received. CALL HOLDING l l l USE (continued) Press a 0 button with common appearance. Press the% button and dial I+ N (N = the holding station’s intercom number). Press the m button and dial 1 0 + N (N = the holding CO line’s number-0 1 m 36). CALL HOLDING EXCLUSIVE TO HOLD A CALL (CO line or m button appears on your station) While connected to a CO line or intercom call, press them button. CO or intercom LED flashes green at the On-hold rate. l To reconnect the call, press them arm button on hold. l NOTE: Regarding handsfree answerback, an intercom call must be answered by pressing the m button or lifting the handset before it can be placed on hold. TO HOLD/PARK A CALL AND PLACE ANOTHER CALL (CO line does not armear on vour station) 1) While connected to a-CO or intercom call press them m button and dial 10. To make another call, press themor am button and dial 2) the desired number. button when the call is 3) Hang up or press the m completed. button 4) To retrieve the held call made in step 1, press them and dial D 1 (see Note 3). NOTES: 1. The on-hold recall tone will be heard within a predetermined time. 2. The heldcallmay be releasedautomatically if the other party, hangs up (if the CO provides a hold-release signal). 3. When a CO line is placed on hold, it may be picked up from any station: 32 HOLD TO USE EXCLUSIVE HOLD (CO line must appear on your station) While connected to an outside call, press them button twice. l CO LED flashes green at a fast 10 IPS) rate. l To reconnect the call, press the h 0 button that is on hold. NOTE: When a CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold, it may be picked up at another station by dialing 1 and the station number that placed the call on Exclusive Hold; however it cannot be picked up by pressing a common button at another station. q CALL PICKUP TO PICK UP RINGING Groups) Press them or m dial 1 I). CO LINE (Tenant l/Tenant button (or press the m 2 Line button and TO DIRECT PICK UP ONE OF THE FOLLOWING 1) Station: Press the m button + station number (intercom, ringing or held CO line). 2) Intercom Page: Press the m button + 11. 3) External Page: Press the m button + IB. 4) CO line on hold: Press them button + 0 Cl Q (Cl Cl = CO line number: 01 * 36). 5) Any ringing CO line: Press them button + 1. 33 FEATURE FEATURE USE AUTOMATIC CALL PICKUP (continued) NOTE: If am the m button is not available, press m button. + 1 instead of DO NOT DISTURB Allows you to prevent incoming calls from accessing your station. You can still make outgoing calls. TO USE DO NOT DISTURB MODE Press them button. l DND LED goes on steady red. TO RELEASE THE DO NOT DISTURB Press the m button. l DND LED goes off. MODE NOTES: 1. Do Not Disturb prevents Off-hook Call Announce. 2. Outside calls will mute ring your station while in the DND mode. AUTOMATIC CALLBACK (INTERCOM) After reaching a busy or DND station on an intercom call, you may use Automatic Callback. TO USE AU,TOMATIC CALLBACK 1) Press them button (or dial 1) to set Automatic Callback. l Busy tone stops. l You will hear dial tone for two seconds and then busy tone again. 2) Go on-hook. You may make other calls while waiting for the called station to become available. 3) When the called station becomes idle: l Your telephone rings at a fast rate. 34 CALLBACK USE (INTERCOM) (continued) 4) Answer the call within nine seconds to prevent the callback from being cancelled. l You hear a single tone, as if making a regular intercom call. 5) Proceed to voice announcement. 6) Proceed with the conversation. NOTES: 1. You may cancel the re uest anytime prior to the callback by pressing the ib’ : button (or press the m button and dial m m. 2. If, after answering a callback, you hear a busy tone, it means the called party has already received or originated another call. Your request is not cancelled. You will be called again the next time the station becomes idle. CO LINE QUEUING Provides a means for station users to be placed in a waiting queue for a busy outgoing CO line group, and to be called back when a CO line in the group is available. TO USE CO LINE QUEUING 1) If all outgoin lines are busy, you will hear busy tone. 2) Press the dlA 5 button (or dial 1) to set Automatic Callback. l Busy tone stops. You will hear dial tone for two seconds and then busy tone again. l You may go on-hook or make other calls while waiting for atrunk to become available.’ 3) When a CO line becomes idle: l Your telephone rings at a fast rate. l CO LED flashes green at the Incoming Call rate. 4) Lift the handset within six seconds to prevent the callback from being cancelled. l You hear CO dial tone.3 l CO LED flashes at the In-use rate. 35 “,.~ , FEATURE AUTOMATIC CALLBACK USE (INTERCOM) FEATURE (continued) 5) Dial the desired telephone number.* 6) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. You may cancel the request at any time prior to the actual callback by ressing them button and dialing 11 (or press the $1 A : button). 2. If the original call was made using LCR (dial m, the telephone number is automatically dialed in step 4. If, after answering a callback, you hear a busy tone, it 3. means the trunk has already been seized or received an incoming call. Yourrequest is not cancelled. You will be called again the next time a trunk becomes idle. ACCOUNT CODE CALLS On some calls, you may be required (forced) to dial an account code before dialing an outside number. On other calls, you may wish to record an account code voluntarily after either dialing an outside number or receiving an incoming call. The code you enter will be recorded on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) printout with the details of your call. Account codes may be verified or nonverified. TO RECORD A FORCED ACCOUNT CODE (Outgoing Calls Only) 1) Access a CO line.’ l You hear dial tone.* 2) Dial the -digit account code with the dialpad. l Dial tone stops after you dial the first digit. l You will hear dial tone after you press the last digit of a valid account code. . . . or. . . l You will hear busy tone after you press the last digit of an invalid code. 3) Dial the outside directory number. ACCOUNT USE CODE CALLS (continued) NOTES: I. Press a button, dial a CO line access code, or dial 1 to call via LCR. 2. 1 calling via LCR, CO dial tone will not be returned. 3. Unless you dial the correct number of digits, you willnot receive dial tone. 4. Any digits dialed after the code will be treated as part of the outside directory number. q EMERGENCY OVERRIDE OF FORCED ACCOUNT CODE DIALING REQUIREMENTS Forced account code requirements can be bypassed by three emergency numbers, including 911. See your system administrator for these numbers: 911 2) 1) 3) TO RECORD A VOLUNTARY ACCOUNT CODE (Incoming or Outgoing) 1) Anytime during the call, dial p 11 or press the B button (the conversation will not be interrupted). 2) Dial the account code. l If the code is valid, you will hear a confirmation burst tone (l/2 second duration). . . . or. . . l If the code is invalid, you will heartwoshortconfirmation burst tones. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to dial another account code, or hang up. . . . or. . . l If the code is nonverified, you will not hear a confirmation tone. NOTE: Confirmation tones are inaudible to the other party. FEATURE ACCOUNT CODE CALLS (continued) TOADD,DELETE,ORCHANGEVERlFlEDACCOUNTCODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 1) Press m and dial the verified account code change access code Ci D 0 (see Note). l You will hear confirmation tone. 2) Dial the three-digit verified account code number CI CI 0 (000 - 299). 3) Dial the verified account code CI . . . Q (1 * 15 digits). 4) Press the 1 or m button to store the code. l You will hear confirmation tone. 5) Repeat steps 1 w 4 to enter more verified account codes. NOTE: For security reasons the account code change access code is not given in this guide. Contact your telephone system maintenance provider for this access code. PAGING TO PAGE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press the m button and dial the following: B I= All Call (electronic and digital telephones only) 10 = Station Group #l Ii= Station Group #2 iI= Station Group #3 m I= Station Group #4 = All Call (with External Page)* Is w i I= External Page Zones (1 w 4)* 3) Make your announcement in a normal voice level and repeat it. 4) Hang up when you have completed your announcement. l *Programmable Option TO PAGE ALL CALL TELEPHONES ONLY 1) Lift the handset. 38 TO DIGITAL AND USE PAGING (continued) q 2) Press the button. 3) Make your announcement in a normal voice level and repeat it. 4) Hang up when you have completed your announcement. NOTE: The q button does not access external page speakers. DOOR PHONE TO ANSWER THE DOOR PHONE 1) You hear a distinctive ringing tone. 2) Lift the handset. l INT LED lights. l You are connected to the door phone. 3) Hang up when the call is completed. TO CALL/MONITOR A DOOR PHONE 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press them button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the intercom number for the desired door location. 151 Location 152 Location 153 Location 154 Location 155 Location 156 Location 157 Location 158 Location 159 Location 161 Location 162 Location 163 Location ELECTRONIC 4) Hang up when the call is completed wish to monitor the door phone. or when you no longer x>..*- ! 39 FEATURE DOOR PHONE (continued) TO USE A DOOR PHONE 1) Press the button and then release it. l You hear a distinctive ringing tone. 2) When answered, speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the door phone. HANDSFREE MONITORING Calls placed on hold by the distant party may be monitored handsfree. TO USE HANDSFREE MONITORING 1) While connected to a call, press and hold the m button. 2) Place the handset on-hook. 3) Release the m button. l Sounds from the distant party are heard via the telephone’s speaker. 4) Lift the handset to continue the conversation when the distant party returns. ALARM A programmable RESET option used with an optional alarm system to on the system’s electronic telephone. button resets the alarm signal on the telephones. , BACKGROUND BACKGROUND TO CANCEL Press the m USE MUSIC (BGM) (continued) BGM ON YOUR TELEPHONE SPEAKER button and dial 111 (or press the m button). TO CONTROL BGM VOLUME 1) Press them button. 2) Press the m button and adjust to the desired level while listenin to system Intercom tone. after setting volume level. 3) Press d l The relative volume level of BGM will be the same as Intercom tone. BACKGROUND NOTE: Stationnumber200is BGM on/off. MUSIC OVER EXTERNAL theonlystation TO ALLOW BGM OVER EXTERNAL Press the m button and dial 110. TO CANCEL Press the m BGM OVER EXTERNAL button and dial 111. DIRECT INWARD SPEAKERS thatcan turn External PAGE PAGE SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) When calling into your system telephone lines. from the outside on certain MUSIC (BGM) If a BGM music source is connected to your system, you may listen to background musicviayour station’s speaker, or over the external page speakers. TO LISTEN TO BGM ON YOUR TELEPHONE SPEAKER Press the w button and dial 110 (or press the m button). l Adjust volume with the VOL control on the front of your phone. All FEATURE USE TO MAKE A DIRECT INWARD STATION CALL USING DISA 1) Using a DTMF telephone, call the DISA CO line telephone number. 2) Listen fox ringback tone signal, and then listen for the intercom dial tone’ (if busy tone is received, try again). 3) Dial the intercom number of the desired station. l You will be connected when the station answers*, . . . or. . . 41 FEATURE USE DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) (continued) l If you receive busy tone or wish to dial another number while ringing the station, press the 1 button to receive dial tone, allowing another number to be dialed. TO CALL THROUGH YOUR SYSTEM ON AN OUTGOING CO LINE USING DISA 1) Using a DTMF telephone, call the DISA CO line telephone number:-2) Listen for the ringback tone signal, and then listen for the STRATA DKintercom dial tone’ (if busytone is received, try again). 3) Dial the access code3 ( )oftheCOlineorCOlinegroup that is to be used to place the outgoing call. 4A) If a DISA security code is required4, dial the code and listen for CO dial tone.5 46) If a DISA security code is not required, listen for CO dial tone. 5) After receiving CO dial tone, dial the desired telephone number. 6) A timer tone will sound6 approximately four minutes after the time the call was made. Dial [i to reset the timer’ each time the tone sounds (this allows an additional four minutes of conversation). 7) Hang up when the call is completed. NOTES: 1. Dial tone will be present for 10 seconds to allow direct dialing of station intercom number or CO line access code. If a number is not dialed, the system automatically causes the DISA CO line to ring at telephones as a normal incoming call. However, if the call is not answered within 15 seconds after the ringing starts, it will disconnect. 2A. If the station does not answerafiersix rings or twentyfour seconds, whichever comes first, busy tone will be sent. Dial 1 to return to dial tone and dial the same or another number. 42 -. ,, FEATURE USE DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) (continued) 2B. If you wish to call another station after completing a DISA station call, it is necessary for the internal party to transfer your call. 3. A direct CO line or line group access code must be dialed (70 I - 736 or 81 - 88). The LCR code (9) is not allowed. 4. The DISA security code is a system program option that may or may not be required. 5. If the correct code is not entered, the call will be disconnected. 6. Allpatties will hear the timer tone and timer reset DTMF tone. 7. If the timer is not reset, the call will disconnect approximately one minute after the timer tone is sent. 8. Station and System Page cannot be accessed on DISA calls. DISA SECURITY CODE ENTRY/CHANGE/CANCEL From designated station(s) only. 1) Press them button and dial Cl 0 Et1(3-digit access code). l Receive confirmation tone. 2) Dial the new DISA security code* (It . . . Q-1 * 15 digits). 3) Press the 1 (or m) button. l Receive confirmation tone. NOTES: 1. For security purposes; the 3-digit access code is not published, it is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. 2. If a DISA security code is not entered in step 2, the security code will be cancelled and outgoing line access via DISA will not require a security code. DIRECT STATION SELECTION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS OPTION (HOTLINE) Allows stations to be connected directly by pressing a w button. The button’s LED independently shows the status (idle/ 43 FEATURE USE FEATURE DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUTTONS (HOTLINE) PROGRAMMABLE OPTION (continued) busy) of that station. If connected to a CO line, pressing this button will put the party on hold. Transfer the call as you would normally, by voice announcing or camping on by hanging up. DOOR LOCK Pressing the m button momentarily activates a switch connected to a door lock or similar device. Door Lock DRLK DRLK DRLK DRLK DRLK Button 0 1 2 3 4 Location MESSAGE WAITING USE (continued) NOTE: If there is no answer, hang up and try at a later time (the MESSAGE LED continues to flash). 2) After receiving the message, place the handset on hook. If the MESSAGE LED turns off, you have no more messages. If the MESSAGE LED continues to flash, you have more messages-repeat steps 1 and 2 to retrieve them. If the flashing message LED was turned on by a voice mail device, the device will cancel the indication after a short delay. The cancel time depends on the voice mail device’s parameters. NOTE: telephone does not have a B button, dial MESSAGE WAITING If someone calls your telephone and you are unable to answer, the calling party may set the Message Waiting indicator (a flashing red LED) on your telephone. The Message Waiting indicator is the MESSAGE LED. Up to four Message Waiting indications may be queued on the message indicator at one time. One of the four message indications is always reserved for the Message Center; the other three may be set from any other telephone or voice mail device. TO ANSWER A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION ON YOUR TELEPHONE 1) If the MESSAGE LED is flash elephone: Lift the handset, press the m and buttons, respectively. l This calls the station that set the message indicator. l Wait for an answer to receive the message. 44 TOSETTHEMESSAGEWAlTlNGINDICATORONANOTHER TELEPHONE 1) At your telephone: Lift the handset, press them button and dial the desired intercom number. 2) If the called telephone does not answer: Press the B button to set the message indication (or dial@. l The MESSAGE LED flashes at the called telephone. l The MESSAGE LED illuminates steady at your telephone. 3) Place the handset on-hook. l The MESSAGE LED flashes at the called telephone. l The MESSAGE LED turns off at your station. l The MESSAGE LED continues to flash at the called telephone. TO CANCEL THE MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION SET FROM YOUR TELEPHONE Lift the handset, dial the intercom number of the telephone that FEATURE USE MESSAGE WAITING FEATURE OVERRIDE (continued) has the message indication, and pressthe-buttontwice (or dial 1 I). TO CANCEL THE MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION SET ON YOUR TELEPHONE 1) Answer the Message Waiting indication and receive the message. NOTE: The called party must answer (off-hook or m button) for the message indication to be canceled. 2) Press the B first). or . button (do not press the m button TO INITIATE After reaching call is waiting l A tone USE CALLS A BUSY OVERRIDE SIGNAL a busy station, you may signal that station that a by dialing 1. signal is heard at the busy station. NOTE: If the Off-hook Cal/Announce station, then you may talk. option is installed on the busy TO OVERRIDE DND (Programmable Option For Selected Stations) After reaching a DND station, you may signal that station that a call is waiting by dialing B. l A tone signal is heard at the DND station. NIGHT TRANSFER PROGRAMMABLE OPTION TOINITIATE EXECUTlVEOVERRlDE(ProgrammableOption For Selected Stations) After reaching a busy station, Executive Override allows you to enter an established conversation by dialing 1. l An optional tone signal is heard by the called parties prior to entering the conversation. On an optional basis, your system can function with two or three ringing patterns. If three patterns are selected, they are designated DAY, DAY 2, and NIGHT. If only two patterns are selected, DAY and NIGHT designations are used. NOTE: Privacy Override and Off-hook-Call Announce are described in separate sections of this guide and are listed in the index. In both cases, different ringing patterns are chosen by pressing the button. Certain CO lines may be enabled in system programming to switch from normal operation to DISA line operation. SPEAKERPHONE (DKT 1020SD ONLY) NOTE: If your telephone does not have a DXa button, the message indication can be canceled by dialing m 111. q The active pattern is shown by the state of the NT LED as follows: DAY DAY 2 NIGHT Three-pattern OFF FLASH ON Two pattern OFF N/A ON TO MAKE AN OUTSIDE CALL (On-hook Dialing) 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press any available button (or them button + access code). l Listen for dial tone. l CO LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired telephone number. q \: ,.i/ 47 FEATURE FEATURE USE MICROPHONE (continued) SPEAKERPHONE 4) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. button when the call is completed to 5) Press the m disconnect. TO RECEIVE AN INCOMING CALL 1,) You hear a ringing tone. 2) Leave the handset on-hook. 3) Press the w button next Incoming Call rate). l CO LED flashes at the 4) Speak at a normal voice telephone. button 5) Press the m disconnect. TO MAKE AN INTERCOM to the flashing red LED (CO In-use rate. level in the direction of the when the call is completed to CALL (On-hook Dialing) 1) Leave the handset on-hook. 2) Press the m button. l Listen for intercom dial tone. l INT LED flashes green at the In-use rate. 3) Dial the desired station number. l You hear a single ring tone. 4) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction of the telephone. 5) Press them button when the call is completed to disconnect. MICROPHONE CONTROL The m button is used to switch the digital telephone’s microphone from on to off or vice versa while the telephone is in use (also see Microphone Cut-offbutton). The red MIC LED indicates the status of the microphone: LED ON OFF MICROPHONE ON OFF USE CONTROL (continued) All digital telephones can answer intercom calls handsfree (onhook) via the microphone, but only a speakerphone can talk handsfree when originating CO line or intercom calls while onhook. The microphone and accompanying LED are always ON when receiving intercom calls to allow handsfree answerback, and may be on or off when beginning to place an on-hook CO line or intercom call. l Each station’s microphone may be set in system programming to be on or off at the start of handsfree dialing. l Each station’sm button may be set in system programming to switch on/off with one touch or to switch on/off only while pressed. NOTES: 1. To change from speakerphone to handset: l Lift handset. 2. To change from hands l Press and hold the l Return handset on-hook. l Release the m button. 3. The m and m buttons function on off-hook call announce calls for privacy. TWO (TANDEM) CO LINE CONNECTION TO ESTABLISH A TANDEM CO LINE CONNECTION (TRK-TRK) 1) While connected on an established CO line call (incoming button. You hear intercom dial tone. l CO LED flashes green at the Conference rate. l INT LED flashes green at the In-use rate. * 3) Access a second CO line and dial the next telephone number.’ button after the party answers.2 4) Press the m l TWO (TANDEM) CO LINE CONNECTION (continued) CO LEDs flash green at the In-use rate. All parties will be conferenced. 5) Press the m button. l You hear intercom dial tone. l CO LEDs flash green at the Exclusive Hold rate (10 IPS). l INT LED flashes at the In-use rate. 6) Hang up. l Both CO LEDs continue flashing at the Exclusive Hold rate. l INT LED goes off. l COs are connected and in Exclusive Hold on your station. l Connection is released automatically when parties hang UP.~ l l On some systems, the connection must be supervised and released as follows: 1) Press either button. l Both CO LEDs flash at the In-use rate. l You will be connected to both CO lines. 2) If the parties have hung up, go back on-hook. . Both CO LEDs go off. l Connection is released. 3) If the parties are still talking, proceed to step 5 above. q NOTES: 1. CQ lines maybe accessedbypressing a(9 line button or by dialing access codes (line number, 70 1 - 736; line group, 81 - 88; or, LCR access 9); however, both CO lines must appear (buttons) on the telephone to allow the station to monitor the tandem connection. 2. If you receive a busy tone or no answer, return to the original connection by pressing the original q line button. 3. Depends on the public telephone company; some provide auto disconnect and some do not. 50 TIMED REMINDERS Allows five separate reminders to be set at each station. These reminders will be an audible beeping at the times (hour and minute) set by the station user. They can occur just once or repeated on a daily basis. TO ENTER A TIMED REMINDER 1) Dialm+iII-iII.Y ou h ave a choice of five different reminders. 2) Enter the desired time (24-hour clock format; i.e., HHMM). 3) Dial 1 if reminder will be repeated every day, or 0 if it is a one-time reminder only. 4) Press 1 (or m) button to record the time in memory. l A beeping tone will be heard for 30 seconds (or until cancelled by going off-hook) when the hour and minute occur. TO CANCEL A TIMED REMINDER 1) Dialm+i11. 2) Press 1 (om). NOTE: Repeat for reminders B IITOLL RESTRICTION 111. OVERRIDE/TRAVELING CLASS Toll restriction at a station can be completely overridden, or the station’s normal class can be changed to another class (traveling class). Use the following procedure to completely override or to change a station’s toll restriction class. TO OVERRIDE TOLL RESTRICTION AT A STATION SINGLE CALL 1) Lift the handset. 2) Press a Toll Restricted button.* l Listen for dial tone. l CO LED flashes at the In-use rate. 3) Press the m button and dial 4 0. FOR A q _....: / 51 FEATURE TOLL RESTRICTION USE FEATURE OVERRIDE/TRAVELING (continued) CLASS You no longer hear dial tone. 4) Dial the Toll Restriction Override Code (four digits). l You hear dial tone. 5) Dial the desired telephone number. l TONE SIGNALING USE PROGRAMMABLE TO ANSWER A TONE SIGNAL CALL 1) Lift the handset or press the m answerback is inoperative). 2) Hang up when the call is completed. OPTION (continued) button (handsfree VOICE MAIL (VM) * Or press the m button and dial access a CO line. TO ADD, DELETE, OR CHANGE TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE OR TRAVELING CLASS CODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING. 1) Press m and dial the three-digit toll restriction override change access code CI a Q 2. l You hear confirmation tone. 2) Dial the four-di it override code L;I Cl Ci CI. 3) Press the B or ibm - D A button to store code. l You will hear confirmation tone. 4) Repeat steps 1 w 4 to enter more toll restriction override or traveling codes. NOTE: For security reasons, the change access code is not provided in this guide. It is available from your telephone sys tern maintenance provider. TONE SIGNALING PROGRAMMABLE OPTION Provides rtnging on incoming nouncing is not activated. intercom calls when voice an- TO MAKE A TONE SIGNAL CALL 1) Call another station via intercom. l The called party hears one ring, then our voice. 2) To send ring tone to the called party, dial i . 3) Speak to the party when the call is answered. Whenever your station is call forwarded to voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice mail unit to direct the call to your voice mail box. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial 111. 3) Dial the di its (u to 16 and pauses to be sent (see Note). 4) Press the\ (or w) button to store data. NOTE: Use m or= button to store pauses. When you wish to retrieve your messages from voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice unit to play back your messages after you press the message waiting button. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial BRi. 3) Dial the re uired di its and pauses to be sent. 4) Pressthei(or&)buttontostoredata. TO RETRIEVE MESSAGES Press the m and m buttons. TO CLEAR ALL DIGITS 1) Press m. 2) Dial~~Ior~~~. 3) Press 1 (or m). 53 FEATURE USE VOICE MAIL (VM) (continued) NOTE: The above procedures are required for initial VM set-up on/y. The digits remain in memory until changed. CENTREX APPLICATION Your system may be equipped with the Centrex Application, which enhances the system feature capability when installed behind a Centrex or PBX system. Your digital telephone may be equipped with one or more of the enhanced Centrex features listed below: A) Flexible intercom Numbering (up to four digits) A station intercom number can be three or four digits. It is, therefore, possible to match a station’s intercom and Centrex line extension number. Dial the entire station number when indicated. NOTE: To avoid system numbering plan conflicts, some access code numbers may have to be changed. B) Centrex Feature Buttons Certain Centrex features may be operated by pressing a button on your digital telephone. The Centrex access code, including the necessary Flash and/or Pause sequence, is activated when the appropriate button is pressed. Press the appropriate Centrex feature button instead of dialing a Centrex access code when operation of the feature is desired. See your Centrex or PBX Operations Manual for specific details. C) Ringing Repeat The distinctive ring patterns available in your Centrex system are automatically repeated with your digital telephone, allowing you to answer appropriately for either outside, inside or callback calls. D) Delayed Ringing CO or Centrex line(s) may be programmed for a 12-second and/or 24-second ring delay at stations to permit alternate answering conditions. Answer the line when your digital telephone is ringing. 54 ._ :_, 55 INDEX (continued) INDEX Account Code Calls ............................................................ Alarm Reset ........................................................................ Auto Busy Redial Programmable Option ............................ Automatic Callback (Intercom) ........................................... Automatic Off-hook Selection Programmable Option.. ....... Background Music (BGM) .................................................. Background Music Over External Speakers ....................... Button Descriptions ............................................................ Call Forward-All Calls ... ...................................................... Call Forward-Busy .............................................................. Call Forward-Busy/No Answer ........................................... Call Forward-Fixed ............................................................. Call Forward-No Answer ..... ............................................... Call Holding ........................................................................ Call Pickup.. ........................................................................ Call Transfer with Camp-on ................................................ CENTREX Application ........................................................ Conference Calls ................................................................ Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................. Direct Station Selection Buttons (Hotline) Programmable Option.. ..................................................... Do Not Disturb .................................................................... Door Lock.. . ........................................................................ Door Phone . ....................................................................... Exclusive Hold .................................................................... Group Listening .................................................................. Handsfree Answerback . .................................................... Handsfree Monitoring ......................................................... Intercom Calls.. . .................................................................. LED Indications .................................................................. Message Waiting ................................................................ Microphone Control ............................................................ Microphone Cut-off Programmable Option ......................... Night Transfer Programmable Option ................................. Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Optional Feature .............. On-hook Dialing. ................................................................. Outside Cglls ...................................................................... EC 36 40 13 34 12 40 41 2 28 29 30 31 29 32 33 24 55 26 41 Override Calls ..................................................................... Paging ................................................................................ Privacy Button Programmable Option ................................ Privacy Override Programmable Option ............................. Privacy Release Programmable Option ............................. Repeat Last Number Dialed ............................................... Speakerphone (DKT 1020SD Only) ................................... Speed Dial .......................................................................... Speed Dial Buttons Programmable Option ......................... Saved Number Redial Programmable Option .................... Two (Tandem) CO Line Connection ................................... Telephone Number Storage ............................................... Timed Reminders ............................................................... Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class ........................... Tone/Pulse Dialing Programmable Option ......................... Tone Signaling Programmable Option ............................... Voice Mail (VM) .................................................................. Volume Control ................................................................... * and # DTMF Tone Dialing ................................................ 47 38 21 20 21 13 47 14 15 16 49 16 51 51 19 52 53 6 19 43 34 44 39 33 12 22 40 21 8 44 48 23 46 23 11 10 E7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY FEATURES DIGITAL TELEPHONE U STRA S E R G U I D E A” DK D I TAL TELEPHONE STRATA DK56 AND RELEASE KEY SYSTEMS DK24 DK96 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY .................................................. SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS ......................................... DATE/TIME/DAY ADJUSTMENT ........................................... CALL FORWARD DISPLAY ................................................... STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING ...................... VOICE MAIL (VM) ................................................................... BUSY FIELD DISPLAY.. ......................................................... MODE EXIT ............................................................................ DISA SECURITY CODE: ADD/DELETE/CHANGE ................ TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRRlDE/TRAVELlNG CLASS CODE CHANGE ..................................................... VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE CHANGE.. ............................... MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS ........................ Adding to a Preprogrammed Message ................................ Editing or Setting a New Calling Station Message .............. Preprogramming System Messages.. .................................. Recording A Message ......................................................... Storing A Message .............................................................. LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY.. ........................................... SPEED DIAL MEMO.. ............................................................. TIMED REMINDERS WITH MEMO.. ...................................... MESSAGE SENDING ............................................................. Called Station Messaging .................................................... Group Called Station Messaging ......................................... Calling Station Messaging ................................................... Group Calling Station Messaging ........................................ Busy Station Messaging ...................................................... MESSAGE DIRECTORY ........................................................ USER NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY.. .................................. SPEED DIAL MEMO DIRECTORY ................................ . ....... INDEX ..................................................................................... 1 2 12 13 14 15 16 16 16 17 18 18 18 19 19 20 21 22 24 26 26 27 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 39 LIQUID CRYSTAL HANDSET DISPLAY In its idle state, the 32-character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) feature on your digital telephone gives you an accurate desk clock and calendar combination. When you have an outside call in progress, an elapsed time display gives a constant reminder of the call duration. In addition, a variety of information displays and feature prompting make your call handling more efficient. Alphanumeric messaging capability is also provided. All display functions occur automatically as call processing proceeds. LCD DISPLAY* d LCD CONTROL BUTTONS SPEAKER VOLUME UP/DOWN CONTROL BUTTONS MODE FLEXIBLE ‘FEATURE BUTTONS MODULAR HANDSET CORD\ , MESSAGE WAITING BUTTON AND LED INDICATOR kOLD BUTTON \ \ \ / MICROPHONE ON/OFF BUTTON AND LED INDICATOR DIALPAD SPEAKER ON/OFF BUTTON AND LED INDICATOR 20-button Liquid Crystal Display Digital Telephone SCRL The uses of the three buttons shown above are: SCRL: -CONFERENCE/ TRANSFER BUTTON . LAST NUMBER REDIAL BUTTON PAGE non 1) Scrolls through message waiting numbers. 2) Scrolls through the speed dial digits (if more than 16 digits) when in mode 8. PAGE: 1) Changes Busy Field groups. 2) Used by station 200 to record a user NAME/NUMBER for another station. Station 200 must be an LCD digital electronictelephone to record NAME/NUMBER display for any other station type. 3) Changes displays (date/time, call forward, dialed number). elapsed time, message, 4) Scrolls through speed dial numbers when using mode 8. MODE: 1) To enter/exit various mode functions (see below). 2) To cancel beeping tone when using timed reminders. 1 LIQUID CRYSTAL SUMMARY DISPLAY (continued) OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) (.,, When you dial a verified forced account code that is not valid. m After you dial a verified forced account code that is valid. MODE DEFINITION MODE 0: Used to exit another mode and return to clock/calendar display. MODE 1: Busy Field display. B) Auto Busy Redial (ABR) After setting auto busy redial, your disHOLD LINE NN ABR SET I play prompts you that it has been set. MODE 2: Busy station messaging. MODE 4: Called station messaging. When the system retrieves the call, your display shows the called number. MODE 8: Speed dial number check and memo dialing. When the called station is ringing, your station’s CO LED (or INT LED) and SPKR LED will flash and a warning beep will sound. MODE 94: Remote called station messaging. MODE 95: Remote calling station messaging. SUMMARY Type I,,,, OF LCD FUNCTIONS When Displayed C) Automatic A) Account Codes I ENTER NO. NNN ACCT CODE I When you press a CO line that requires a forced (verified or nonverified) account code; or dial 111, or press the B button to enter a voluntary (verified or nonverified) account code. Your station will display the called number, followed by LINE NN ACB. Callback (ACB) When you set automatic callback at a busy station, its number is displayed. When you receive an automatic callback, the station number you called is displayed. m NO. When you dial a verified voluntary count code that is not valid. ac- w D) Automatic I I CODE I NO. NNN VERIFIED I When you dial a verified voluntary account code that is set in the system account code memory. 1) Intercom I NNN When you receive an automatic callback for a CO line, the seized line’s number is displayed. Line Selection Line If your station automatically accesses an Intercom line when you go off-hook, INT is displayed. 3 SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS 2) CO Line 3) Dial Access Code When you access a CO line by dialing a CO line group access code, the accessed CO line number is displayed. )I 4 Alphanumeric F) Busy Messages Messages of up to 32 characters may be used in alphanumeric messaging. Messages may either be programmed or set as one-time messages. (Messages may also be used with a timed reminder.) I 20 30 I I . . . . ...7.. ..2.4....9 FORWARD DATE I TO NNN & TIME I The Busy Field display indicates, in groups of 10, the last two digits of the station numbers that are busy or set for DND. The top display indicates that stations X00, X05, and Xi 7 are either in use or in DND; the bottom display indicates the same for stations X27, X32, X34, and X39. If the m button is pressed, the 00/l 0 group will change to 10/20, and the busy/DND states of that group of stations will be displayed. The station roups will increment each time the Lzik l A button is pressed, thereby displaying all stations. Call Forward When you initiate any type of call forward, the LCD displays, CALL FORWARD TO. When your call is forwarded to another station, the station you called is shown. It then changes to the station to which your call was forwarded. When a call is forwarded to your station, the calling station number is displayed on the left and the station called is displayed on the right. Field pYY?Fg G) After you set call forward, the station number to which your calls will be forwarded is displayed, along with one of the following abbreviations: CF-AC (Call Forward-All Calls) CF-BUSY (Call Forward-Busy) CF-NA (Call Forward-No Answer) CF-B/NA (Call Forward-Busy/No Answer) CF-FIXED (Call Forward-Fixed) If your station automatically accesses a CO line when you go off-hook, the number of the seized CO line is displayed. pizciq (continued) H) Call Pickup l--izzi When you pick up an intercom call, the calling station’s number is displayed on the left and the station number called is displayed on the right. Your LCD telephone displays information noting that your call to station NNN was picked up by station NNN. I) Calling Number-Intercom When you receive an intercom call, the calling station’s number is displayed. J) CO Line Identification The CO lines can be programmed to display an identifying name of up to 16 SUMMARY I DR. JONES OF LCD FUNCTIONS OFFICE I (continued) SUMMARY characters. The name will be displayed on outgoing and incoming calls. OF LCD FUNCTIONS Date/Time Idle Telephone K) CO Line Number 1) Incoming (continued) NOTES: I. Press them button to display date/time when talking on a CO line. 2. The date/time is adjusted on a system-wide basis by the station located in port 00 (usually station 200). Call Incoming CO call-If your station is programmed for incoming ringing on that CO line. Transferred CO call-CO line is transferred to your station in the ringing state by another station. Dialed Number Camped-on CO call-CO line was camped-on to your busy station and rings your station when you hang up. 2) When 1) CO Line The digits are displayed as you dial over either a CO line or the intercom using: l Manual dialing l Automatic dialing l Repeat last number dialed l Saved number redial ( Call Is Answered The display changes to indicate calling status. 3) Hold 2) You have put a CO line call on hold at your station. p!isEcq 4) Hold Intercom I Recall pizE!q Held call automatically recalls your station after a programmed period of time. NOTE: lfyou are calling on a CO line, the display will automatically change from dialed number to elapsed time after a programmed period of time. Door Phone/Monitor 5) Outgoing When you manually select a CO line, it is displayed. Thisdisplay is replaced by the dialed number as you dial. 6) CO Line Queuing m. When you are called from a door phone, Its designating characters are displayed. I., When you call a door phone, its designating characters are displayed. (Callback) When the CO line queuing feature rings back to your station with an available CO line, that line number will be displayed. NOTE: The doorphone designators are NA, Nl3, and/or NC (N = 1 w 4, and indicates which 7 SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS (continued) of the 12 possible door phones is calling or is being called). 0) While you are making an outgoing CO line call, the elapsed time of the call is displayed. Elapsed time automatically replaces the dialed number on the display after a programmed period of time. (Timing begins when a button is pressed .) q NOTES: 1. On a CO line call, the display can be alternated between date/time, elapsed time, and dialed number by pressing the m button. 2. Elapsed time is displayed for 15 seconds after you hang up, and then changes automatically to date/time. Intercom Number Display If an access code is entered (ma 10, m 111 when on a CO line), the programmed intercom number will be displayed. Display 1) Idle Station 2) Cal!ed I Station OF LCD FUNCTIONS A name or title may be set in memory for each station. When an LCD station is idle, the name displays on the top line of the LCD. When a station calls an LCD station, the name of the calling station displays on the bottom line of the called station’s LCD. (continued) ww Least Cost Routing When you are making a call via LCR, your display will prompt you to dial a number by displaying, DIAL TEL NUMBER. ki!iEzJ Elapsed Time Q) LCD NAME/NUMBER SUMMARY As you dial the number, your display. it is shown on Message Waiting I INT NNN NO. NNN MW SET I I SENTNNN JAN 01 SUN I NO. NNN CALL 203 201 12:19 200 I I When you set message waiting at another station, the number of that station is displayed. When you hang up aftersetting message waiting at another station, a reminder is shown on the top row of your display. Your display will show the numbers of up to three stations that have left messages for you. Four numbers may be stored in message memory (see Recalling Station). Message Waiting/Voice Mail When a message waiting voice mail is displayed, a “V” will follow the station number. A “+‘I indicates that there is a station message in memory. Press the m button to rotate through the numbers. Off-hook Call Announce When you off-hook call announce to a busy statron, your LCDdisplays the num” ber of that station. ’ ‘. ,, 9 SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS I NNN NO. OVR NN BUSY I (continued) When another station off-hook call announces to your station, your LCD displays the number of that station. SUMMARY 4) Privacy OF LCD FUNCTIONS Override When a station presses a busy line button to enter an existing conversation: The station that initiates the override displays the CO line identification on the LCD. The overridden station’s LCD displays initiating station’s number. (The display remains until the end of the call.) V) Overrides 1) Busy (continued) Override When you activate the override feature after calling a busy station, the station number and the feature are displayed. W) Recalling Station Your LCD telephone displays the number of a station initiating override when you are on the telephone. The number will remain displayed until override is disconnected. 2) Executive I 3) 1 I X) Speed Dial Memo Override NO. NNN NNNEXECOVRD I Do Not Disturb (DND) When you initiate executive override, your LCD telephone displays the number of the station that is overridden. The station that receives the override displays your station number. The number will remain displayed until the call is ended. Override I INT When a transferred call goes unanswered, it will recall to the station that transferred it. The display shows the CO line number and the station number to which it was originally transferred. NO. NNN NN??DND I When using Speed Dial Memo (mode 8), the name and number are displayed. TOSHIBA is the memo (up to 12 characters). 714 583 3700 is the number (up to 16 digits). Y) Toll Restriction Override Codes a CO i 0 to dial ’ restriction override or code, your LCD display to dial a code. The station you have called is in the do not disturb mode. When you initiate do not disturb override, the station number you have overridden is displayed. line and press a complete toll traveling class will prompt you Z) Two-CO Line Calls When another station overrides do not disturb at your station, its number is displayed. (The display remains until the end of override.) 10 1) Tandem After you establish a two-CO line conference call and then release. ,N, and N, identify the connected CO lines. 11 SUMMARY OF LCD FUNCTIONS DATE/TIME/DAY (continued) When you are talking with two external parties on two CO lines. N, and N, identify the connected CO lines. 3) Amplified DATE/TIME/DAY CALL FORWARD When any type of call forward is initiated, the CALL FORWARD TO prompt displays on the lower row of the LCD. is possible from port 00 only (usually station 200). 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dialmi10. 3) Dial the date (year/month/day) Listen for confirmation in the format YYMMDD. Enter tone. When your station has call forward set, the LCD displays as shown (NNN = the forward to number). Call Forward-All Calls PressmBfli+NNN+m pi?iE!q (orm+NNN+m. Call Forward-Busy PressmiaB+ (orm+NNN+m). pjgq TO SET TIME 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial WiiB. 3) Dial thetime (hour/minute/second) in the24-hourclockformat HHMMSS. Enter a leading 0 for any single digit entered. 4) Press the 1 (or mq) button. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. Call Forward-No pi!TEq 1) Place handset on-hook. 2) Dial miil. 3) Dial the day. l 0 = Sunday = Monday 4 l B = Tuesday N N N+m Answer PressmlmI+NNN+w (or=+ N N N +m). Call Forward-Busy/No TO SET DAY 12 DISPLAY TO SET CALL FORWARD ADJUSTMENT TO SET DATE l m = Wednesday l 1 = Thursday l 1 = Friday l i = Saturday 4) Press the a (or m button. 0 Listen for confirmation tone. When you are talking with two external partres on two CO lines that are externally amplified. This operation (continued) l 2) Conference lGGZZl ADJUSTMENT Answer Press~~~~+NNN+~ (orm+NNN+a). Call Forward-Fixed Press the m button. 13 CALL FORWARD DISPLAY NOTES: 1. Tocance/ca//forward,press~~~~~ (orpress the call forward button used to set call forward). 2. If call forward is set: l CO lines that ring at your station only will forward (CO lines that ring into more than one station willnot forward). l CO line calls transferred to your station will forward. l Intercom calls will forward. l Call forward redirects the station hunt feature. STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING TO USE STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGE WAITING Lift the handset. 1) 2) Dial the desired station number. l If there is no answer (busy or DND), press thebutton (or dial I). This causes the MESSAGE LED on the called station to flash. l The called station’s LCD displays the calling station’s number. The called station user presses the m and B 3) buttons to return the call. 4) To clear the MESSAGE LED from the called station, press the B button. To clear the MESSAGE LED from the calling station, press the 5) m button, dial the station number and press the Dam button twice (or 0 B. NOTE:, Up to four message waiting displays may be stored on the LCD. Thestationnumberin theleft-mostposition willbecalled n is pressed. To rotate the station button. The fourth message is reserved for the Message Center. 14 VOICE MAIL (VM) (continued) Whenever your station is call forwarded to voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice mail unit to direct the call to your mailbox. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial 111. l The LCD displays, 6 5 6 ID CODE SET. 3) Dial the digits (up to 16) and pauses (B l The LCD displays the digits and pauses. 4) Press the 1 button to store data. l Listen for confirmation tone. to be sent. When you want to retrieve your messages from voice mail, certain digits will automatically be sent to the voice mail unit to play back your messages. TO STORE THE DIGITS TO BE SENT 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial 110. l The LCD displays, 6 5 7 ID CODE SET. Dial the required digits and pauses to be sent. 3) l The LCD displays the data as it is entered. 4) Press the 1 button to store data. l Listen for confirmation tone. TO RETRIEVE MESSAGES Press the m and B buttons. TO CLEAR ALL DIGITS 1) Press the m button. 2) Dial~~~or~~~. 3) Press the 1 button. NOTES: 1. The above procedures are required for initial VM set-up only. The digits remain in memory until changed. 2. Digits are not sent to camped-on VM calls. 15 DISA SECURITY CODE: ADD/DELETE/CHANGE (continued) TO DISPLAY BUSY FIELD STATUS ON THE LCD DISPLAY 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 2) Dial 0. Refer to the figure in Summary of LCD Functions. 3) Press the m button to rotate Busy Field groups. MODE EXIT TO EXIT ANY MODE 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 2) Dial 1. l The LCD displays date/day/time. DISA SECURITY From designated CODE: ADD/DELETE/CHANGE TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE/TRAVELING CLASS CODE CHANGE TO ADD, DELETE, OR CHANGETOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE OR TRAVELING CLASS CODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING. 1) Press m and dial the three-digit toll restriction change access code Q 0 CL2 l You will hear confirmation tone. CODE 1) Press them button and dial CI 0 0’ (3-digit access code). 0 Receive confirmation tone. 2) Dial the four-digit override code c3 Q Lt CI. I ENTER NO. OUR CODE N’NN ~~0~ I 3) Press the 1 (or m)button l You will hear confirmation ( 2) Dial the new DISA security code (a . . . Q).’ 3) Press the 1 button. 0 Receive confirmation tone. NOTES: 1. For securitypurposes, the 3-digit access code is not given in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. 2. The DISA security code can be 1 m 15 digits. 3. To .cancel the DISA code, complete steps 1 and 3, .. override station(s) only. TO STORE NEW DISA SECURITY 16 skipping step 2. If the DISA code is canceled, outgoing access of CO lines on DISA calls will not require a security code. I DATA NO. PROGRAMMED to store code. tone. NNN I 4) Repeat steps 1 * 4 to enter up to four traveling class codes or two toll restriction override codes. NOTE: For security reasons, the change access code is notprovided in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. _ ;i 17 VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE CHANGE TO ADD, DELETE, OR CHANGE VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES FROM STATIONS SELECTED IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 1) Press m and dial the verified account code change access code Q Q Q (see Note). MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION of 32 digits for each message). Some system messages expect you to add more information. For example: 3) Dial the verified account code CL .. . 0 (4 w 15 digits). ACCOUNT VERIFIED CODE NUMBER ACCOUNT 4) Press the a (or -button l You will hear confirmation CODE to store code. tone. 5) Repeat steps 1 N 4 to enter more verified account codes. NOTE: For security reasons, the change access code is not provided in this guide. It is available from your telephone system maintenance provider. \ MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION ADDING TO A PREPROGRAMMED FUNCTIONS MESSAGE When you select a message, it appears on your station display. A cursor (-) also appears immediately to the right of the last letter in the message. You can now input additional information (up to a total 18 may 1) CALL l 2) Dial the three-digit verified account code number Q Ct CI (000 - 299). FUNCTIONS (continued) Add a station or outside telephone number. 2) BACK AT l Add the time you will return. 3) RETURN AT l Add the date you will return. NOTE: Refer to Recording a Message for adding to a preprogrammed message. EDITING OR SElTlNG A NEW CALLING STATION MESSAGE You can set a completely new, personalized message by overwriting any of the existing -preprogrammed messages. To do this, simply call up one of the messages as explained previously. When the cursor appears to the right of the message, shift it to the left margin and write your new message over the preprogrammed one. The new message will remain on your station until canceled. It will then be erased and the original preprogrammed message will be restored.’ NOTES: 1. Refer to Recording a Message for leaving a new message at your station. 2. Messages 60 w 99 will be erased. Messages 70 a 79 will remain in memory until changed. PREPROGRAMMING SYSTEM MESSAGES System messages can only be programmed or permanently changed at portO0, station number (usually200). Five preprogrammed 19 MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS (continued) messages are automatically stored in memory when the Alphanumeric Messaging with LCD feature is initialized. 60) OUT TO LUNCH 61) IN A MEETING 62) CALL 63) BACK AT 64) RETURN ON You can use these messages and add 35 more messages designed specifically for your system, or you can overwrite the initialized messages and program up to IO of your own. Any messages programmed at port 00 will remain in memory until canceled from port 00 or until the system is reinitialized. After reinitialization, only the original five messages will be in memory. System messages are written and stored in memory as explained in Storing a Message. RECORDING A MESSAGE Use this procedure to enter the characters of a personal message (10 w 19) or system message (60 w 99), to add to a preprogrammed message, or to edit and set a new message. After calling up a message on your display (see Storing a Message, steps 1 and 2), perform one of the following procedures: TO RECORD A MESSAGE 1) Press the 1 button to access alpha characters. Refer to Figure 1 for an explanation of the dialpad buttons. 2) Move the cursor (-) to the desired position (the left edge of the display for a new message, or two spaces to the right of the preprogrammed message to add information). 3) Press the button that has the letter you want to enter. Use the 1 button to shift from letter to letter on the button. For example: l If you press 1, a D will be displayed. By pressing a, the D is changed to E. By pressing 1 again, the E is changed to F. Press 1 again and the F changes to D. l To enter a space, press 0. MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS (continued) Each 0 button moves cursor to the right (also used to access special 1 characters and to enter “blanks” in the alpha mode) 1 button moves the cursor to the left -II w b button is used to shift alpha button (also used button has three I#I-~~~~~~~~ f between the three letters on each to access special characters) FIGURE l-DIALPAD INFORMATION 4) If you want to enter a number, press the1 button to change to numeric characters. Numbers are also entered on the dialpad. Press the 1 button again to return to alpha characters. 5) The following special characters are set by pressing iand then pressing i to step through the available characters: Q, Z, :, -, +, I. 6) When the message is complete, press them button (or, if you do not have am button, press them button). l Your message is now stored on your station. STORING A MESSAGE TO STORE A MESSAGE 1) Press the m (or m 1 m button. l The MSG LED flashes. l LCD displays, MSG NO.? 2) Dial the 2-digit message number to be stored. l Personal (10 w 19). l System (60 N 99 port 00 only). 3) Use the Recording a Message procedure to enter the message characters. 21 20 .~. -, i....i’ MESSAGE ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS (continued) 4) Press the m (or m) button. l The MSG LED lights steadily. l The LCD displays, MSG. 5) Press the m (or m 11 m) l The MSG LED goes out. l The message is now stored. LCD NAME/NUMBER button. DISPLAY This feature allows you to store a title (such as your name, telephone number, location, etc.) in system memory. This title (i.e., LOBBY) will display on your station’s LCD while it is idle, and it will appear at other stations’ LCDs when they are called from your station. Name display information for non-LCD telephones or voice mail/auto attendant devices may be stored from station 200. When NAME/NUMBER is recorded for non-LCD telephones or other devices, their NAME/NUMBER is displayed on LCD telephones when called. TO ENTER NAME/NUMBER INFORMATION FROM YOUR STATION 1) Press the m button and dial 111. l USER NAME? will appear on the upper line of the LCD. l Current information will appear on’the lower line of the LCD. p!iiEcq Enterthe new Messages for l Up to 16 3) Press the B l The new 2) !2 information viathe dialpad (referto Record LCD method). characters can be recorded. button. information is stored. LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY (continued) TO CLEAR NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY Press the m button, dial 1 [I and press the m l Listen for confirmation tone, then busy tone. During clear: button. I.,,, After clear: piziziq NOTES: 1. Your title will appear on the LCD during direct intercom, forwarded, and hunted calls. On override or OCA calls, the LCD will not display the title. 2. After a name is cleared, it may be redisplayed at anytime by dialing m 1 B 0. 3. A name is displaced by message and call forward settings if they are set. 4. To erase NAME/NUMBER information from memory, repeat steps 1 - 3 above and enter blanks in step 2. Blanks are entered by pressing 0 in the alpha mode. TO ENTER NAME/NUMBER INFORMATION FOR ANOTHER STATION OR VOICE MAIL DEVICE FROM STATION 200 1) Press the m button and dial 110. l USER NAME? will appear on the upper line of the LCD. l Current information for station 200 will appear on the lower line of the LCD. piiiEzq 2) Press them button. l The LCD displays, DEST. EKT NO.? 3) Dial the intercom number (111) of the NAME/NUMBER information to be recorded. l The LCD displays, DEST EKT NO. NNN. 23 LCD NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY (continued) 4) Press the m button. l USER NAME? will appear on the upper line of the LCD. l Current information for station NNN will appear on the lower line of the LCD. 5) Enter the new information viathe dialpad (referto Record LCD Message method). l Up to 16 characters can be recorded. 6) Press the m button. l The new information is stored and appears on the top line of station NNN’s LCD. l Station 200’s LCD returns to the normal idle display. NOTES: 1. To erase the NAME/NUMBER information of another station from station 200, repeat steps 1 w 6 above and enter blanks in step 5. Blanks are entered by pressing 0 in the alpha mode. 2. Station NNN may set and clear the NAME/NUMBER feature anytime: l Set:mi]a. l Clear: m 11 [Im, “c Iear” eliminates the display when calling, but does not erase it from memory; only station 200canerase the NAME/NUMBERofanon-LCDstation. SPEED DIAL MEMO Allows an LCD user to program a 12-character name for each of his/ her 40 personal speed dial numbers. The memo pad of names may be stepped%through to select the appropriate party. Memos may also be added to the 40 system speed dial codes via the station connected to port 00, station number (usually 200). TO PROGRAM NAMES AND NUMBERS 1) Press the m fl buttons. 2) Dial the desired speed dial number. l The LCD displays, # * NNN SPEED DIAL. SPEED DIAL MEMO (continued) 3) Press the m button. The LCD displays, # *NNN _ SPEED DIAL. l 4) Enter the name or memo (refer to Recording a Message). 5) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, *NN MEMO SPEED DIAL. 6) Enter the desired telephone number (16 digits maximum). 7) Press the [ button to record data in memory. TO DIAL A SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displa s, MODE NO.? 2) DialiQLl*.(QCL= ii I-IIorlI-om. l The s eed dial number apears with name or memo. 3) Press the bl - A button to scan the directory for the appropriate number/memo. 4) Press any available button. 5) The number is dialed. q NOTES: 1. A station must be enabled via system programming for LCD message memory. 2. Personal speed dial code numbers are 10 w 49, and system numbers, stored from station 200 only, are 60 N 99. 3. Speed dial numbers and memos and their corresponding P-digit codes may be recorded on the record sheet provided in back of this guide. TO CHECK A SPEED DIAL NUMBER 1) Press mq 0. 2) Dial a 2-digit speed dial number (see Note). 3) If the number is longer than 16 digits, press them to display the remaining digits. button NOTE: Personal (IO w 19) and system (60 m 99). 25 TIMED REMINDERS WITH MEMO Allows five separate messages to be set at each LCD station. These messages will be displayed at the times (hour and minute) set by the station user. They can either be displayed just once or repeated on a daily basis. TO SET A TIMED REMINDER WITH MEMO 1) Press the m button. m 11 I). 2) Dial a 3-digit reminder number flI1 Enter the desired time (24-hour clock format; i.e., HHMM) for 3) the message to be displayed. 4) Dial 1 if the message is to be repeated every day, or 0 if it is a one-time message only. 5) Enter the desired message number.* 6) Press the 1 button to record the data in memory. l Listen for confirmation tone. l The message will be displayed at the specified time, and a beeping tone will be heard for 30 seconds (or until it is canceled by pressing the mmd button). * Personal (10 N 19) and system (60 N 99). The message does not display when setting a timed reminder-it displays when the reminder activates. Messages are set using the Record a Message method. MESSAGE SENDING The Alphanumeric Messaging feature on your LCD digital telephone enables you to set short text (up to 32 characters) at your station to ensure that you do not miss important calls. Any station may record a message; however, only stations with the LCD are able to display messages. To record messages, see the message administration functions in this guide. Your system sent to other rarily add to personalized 26 has up to 40 preprogrammed messages that may be LCD digital or electronic telephones. You can tempoor change any of these messages, in order to leave a message at your station (see Note). MESSAGE SENDING (continued) Some stations may record and save up to 10 personal messages to be used for all types of station messaging. This is a station option that is enabled in system programming. NOTE: Stored messages and their corresponding message number(s) may be recorded on the record Sheet provided in the back of this guide. CALLED STATION MESSAGING Your station number and a message indication may be sent to another LCD station. When that station responds, it will receive the message. TO SET A CALLED STATION MESSAGE 1) Dial the station number (station does not answer). 2) Press the mmd button. l The LCD displays, MODE? 3) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, MW TO STNNN MSG NO? 4) Enter the desired message number.* l The LCD dis lays the message. A 5) Press the button. l The LCD dis la s, INT NNN MW SET. 6) Press the 2 button to release. 7) CALL NNM is displayed at the called station and the MESSAGE LED flashes. 8) SENT NNM is displayed at your station. *Personal (10 m 19), system (60 N 99). TO RECEIVE A CALLED Press the m and B STATION MESSAGE buttons. GROUP CALLED STATION MESSAGING Allows a station to set a Called Station Message for a group of stations. 27 MESSAGE SENDING (continued) TO SET A “CALLED STATION” MESSAGE STATION OR GROUP OF STATIONS FOR ANOTHER 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE? 2) Dial ID. l The LCD displays, MODE 94 DEST EKT NO.? 3) Dial the “destination” station’s number (or enter 30 for all stations, or 31 - 34 for page groups). l The LCD displays, MODE 94 DEST EKT NO.NN. 4) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE 94 ORG EKT NO.? 5) Dial the “originating” station’s number.* l The LCD displays, MODE 94 ORG EKT NO.NN. 6) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 7) Enter the desired message’s number. l The LCD displays, the message. 8) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 9) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? IO) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, date/day/time. 11) The LCD displays, SENT NN M, at originating station. 12) The originating station number and a message indication are displayed on the destination station LCD. *Your number or another station number. TO RECEIYE CALLED 1) Press the m STATION button. MESSAGING TOSETAMESSAGE(ONYOURLCD)THATWILLBERECElVED BY LCD TELEPHONES THAT CALL YOUR TELEPHONE 1) Press, the m button. l The MSG LED flashes. 28 SENDING (continued) l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 2) Dial the number of the message you want (see Note). l The selected message is displayed. 3) Press the m button. l The MSG LED lights steadily. NOTE: Personal (IO - 19) and system (60 - 99). GROUP CALLING TO SET A CALLING STATION STATION MESSAGING STATION MESSAGE FOR ANOTHER 1) Press the mxq button. l The LCD displays, MODE? 2) Dial PI. l The LCD displays, MODE 95 DEST EKT NO.? 3) Dial the “destination” station number. l The LCD displays, MODE 95 DEST EKT NO.NN. 4) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? 5) Enter the desired message number. l The LCD displays the message. 6) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG NO.? NOTE: Group calling station messaging allows you to set a calling station message for only one station at a time. STATION MESSAGE and m CALLING MESSAGE 7) Press the w button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 8) Dial 1. l Your LCD shows the time and date. l The message is displayed at the “destination” station. l Any station calling the “destination” station receives the message. .’ 29 MESSAGE SENDING (continued) TO SET A MESSAGE IF YOU DO NOT HAVE Am BUTTON 1) Press the m button. l The INT LED liahts. 2) DialBI. y 3) Dial the number of the message you want (see Note). 4) Press the m button. l The INT LED goes out (your message is now stored). NOTE: Personal (10 - 19) and system (60 - 99). TO CANCEL A MESSAGE THAT HAS BEEN SET AT YOUR STATION Press the m button. l The MSG LED goes out. TO CANCEL A MESSAGE IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A m BUlTON 1) Press the m button. l The INT LED liahts. ” 2) Dial 11. 3) Press the m button. l The INT LED goes out. MESSAGE SENDING (continued) 2) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO.? 3) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, OVER TO STNN MSG NO? 4) Enter the desired message number.* l The LCD displays the message. 5) Press them button. l The LCD displays, MSG SEND. 6) The destination station beeps four times and the message is displayed for 30 seconds, or until originating station hangs up. *Personal (10 - 19) and system (60 - 99). TO RETURN A MESSAGE (Within 30 Seconds) FROM THE BUSY STATION AFTER RECEIVING A “BUSY STATION” MESSAGE. 1) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MODE NO? 2) Dial 1. l The LCD displays, OVER TO STNN MSG NO? 3) Enter the desired message number.* l The LCD displays the message. 4) Press the m button. l The LCD displays, MSG SEND. NOTE: A personal message (10 - 19) will remain stored in memory. BUSY STATION MESSAGING When reaching a busy LCD station, a message can be sent to that station (an audible tone will be heard). The busy station may also return a message to the calling station’s LCD. The two stations may continue this procedure to carry on a “silent” conversation. TO SEND A MESSAGE TO A BUSY STATION 1) Call the desired station. l Listen for busy tone. 30 31 MESSAGE USER NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY Messages are limited to 32 alphanumeric displayed in two rows of 16. characters and are DIRECTORY NAME/NUMBERS are limited to 16 alphanumeric characters and are displayed on the top row of idle LCD stations and the bottom row of called LCD stations. This directory is provided for reference and recording messages. Message # This directory is provided for station 200 reference and recording of other station NAME/NUMBERS. Station # Message # DATE DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME DAY TIME Station # Message # DATE Station # Message # DATE Station # Message # DATE I Message Station # # DATE Station # Message # DATE 32 33 SPEED DIAL MEMO DIRECTORY Speed Dial memos are limited to 12 characters for the memo (top row of LCD) and 16-digits/pauses for the dial number (bottom row of LCD). * Code: 12-Character Memo: * This directory is provided for recording Speed Dial numbers with memos. * Code: * 12-Character HERE -MEMO 10 SPEED * Memo: (Example) DIAL# HERE * * * *EEE * * , * * 35 12-Character * Code: Memo: * Code: 12-Character Memo: * * * * * * * * * * * * \ * .* 36 _* i” 37 INDEX 12-Character * Code: * * * * * * Memo: Adding to a Preprogrammed Message ................................. Busy Field Display ................................................................ Busy Station Messaging ....................................................... Call Forward Display.. ........................................................... Called Station Messaging ..................................................... Calling Station Messaging .................................................... Date/Time/Day Adjustment.. ................................................. ............................ DISA Security Code: Add/Delete/Change Editing or Setting a New Calling Station Message ............... Group Called Station Messaging .......................................... Group Calling Station Messaging ......................................... LCD Name/Number Display ................................................. Liquid Crystal Display ........................................................... Mode Exit .............................................................................. Message Administration Functions ....................................... Message Directory ................................................................ Message Sending ................................................................. Preprogramming System Messages.. ................................... Recording a Message ........................................................... Speed Dial Memo ................................................................. Speed Dial Memo Directory.. ................................................ Station-to-Station Message Waiting ..................................... Storing a Message ................................................................ Summary of LCD Functions.. ................................................ Timed Reminders with Memo ............................................... Toll Restriction Override/Traveling Class Code Change ...... User Name/Number Directory .............................................. Verified Account Code Change ............................................ Voice Mail ............................................................................. 18 16 30 13 27 28 12 16 19 27 29 22 1 16 18 32 26 19 20 24 34 14 21 2 26 17 33 18 15 r * - 39 38 TOSHIBASYSTEM PRACTICES ELECTRONICKEYTELEPHONESYSTEM STRATADKFAULTFINDING SECTlON200-096-500 FEBRUARY1991 Stratalzx RELEASE1,2, and 3 FAULTFINDING PROCEDURES STRATADKFAULTFINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY1991 TABLEDFCDNTENTS . SUBJECT PARAGRAPH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.01 7.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . GENERAL . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . FAULT CLASSIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND ELIMINATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . Voltmeter Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . Ohmmeter Test .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . FLOWCHARTS CHARTNO 1 FAULT CLASSIFICATION .................................................. CHART NO 2 POWER FAULTS.. .............................................................. CHART NO. 3 STATION FAULTS .............................................................. CHART NO. 4 KSU FAULTS ...................................................................... CHART NO. 5 CO LINE FAULTS ............................................................... CHART NO. 6 INTERCOM FAULTS .......................................................... CHART NO. 7 DSS CONSOLE FAULTS ................................................... CHART NO. 8 SPEED DIAL FAULTS ........................................................ CHART NO. 9 MOH, BGM, PAGE & RELAY FAULTS .............................. CHART NO. 10 SMDR FAULTS.. ................................................................. CHART NO. 11 PSTU FAULTS .................................................................... CHART NO. 12 DOOR PHONE FAULTS.. ................................................... CHART NO. 13 TIE LINE FAULTS.. ............................................................. CHART NO. 14 REMOTE MAINTENANCE/TTY FAULTS ........................... PAGE i 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 14 15 17 18 20 21 22 25 26 TABLELIST TABLE A B C D E F G H TITLE PAGE FLOWCHARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*........................................... 1 DK24 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 3 DK56 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DK96 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 3 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER (PDKU) . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 27 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER (PDKU) . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . 27 I FIGURE LIST FIGURE 1 2 FLOWCHART BACKPLANE TITLE PAGE SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CONNECTORS PI (DK24), PI & P4 (DK56/96)‘............: . . . . . . . . .. . . . :... 2 STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 1 GENERAL 1 .Ol This section describes the maintenance procedures used to diagnose faults in the STRATA DK digital key telephone system. Faults are classified and then cleared by replacing the malfunctioning unit and performing operational tests in the sequences prescribed by the fault clearing flowcharts in Paragraph 5. 2 FAULT CLASSIFICATION 2.01 A Fault Classification ensure that fault clearing sequence (Chart No. 1). Flowchart is provided to is pursued in a logical 2.02 An assumption is made in the flowcharts that the fault was discovered and reported by an electronic telephone user. All faults, therefore, are classified according to the way they would appear at the electronic telephone. 2.03 Faults and associated flowcharts in Table A are organized into the following categories: TABLE A FLOWCHARTS Flowchart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Title Fault Classification Power Faults Station Faults KSU Faults CO Line Faults Intercom Faults DSS Console Faults Speed Dial Faults MOH, BGM, Page & Relay Faults SMDR Faults PSTU Faults Door Phone Faults TIE Line Faults Remote Maintenance/TTY Faults 3 FAULT CLEARING IMPORTANT! Many system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries as described in Programming Procedures. It is important to verify that the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware. 3.02 In newsystems, or when the PCTU or PCTUSI PCB has been changed, the initialization procedure must be performed before testing. The system data stored on the original PCTU or PCTUSI will be protected from loss by the backup battery on that PCB. Therefore, the initialization sequence should nof be performed if the original PCB is reinstalled. NOTE: In this section all information relating to the PCTU PCB applies to the PCTlJSl, PCTUl, PCTU2, and PCTU3 unless otherwise stated. 3.03 Faults in the system are cleared by replacing PCBs, electronic telephones or the power supply, as instructed in the flowcharts. 3.04 Five symbols which are identified are used in the flowcharts, in Figure 1. Start and end of a flowchart sequence. Important notes affecting the fault clearing procedure. -----I-.- Question to be answered YES or NO. Progression TO or FROM another flowchart location. Letters and numbers denote the exact entrance or exit points. PROCEDURES 3.01 Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure that it is in the system and not caused by associated external equipment, such as wiring, MOH source, etc. Statement of a required action. I FIGUREl-FLOWCHART c SYMBOLS 1 STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 c) Plastic bags for electronic etc. 3.05 The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to permit rapid fault localization within the system. All fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classification Flowchart, which is arranged locating sequence. 3.06 The following precautions when handling PCBs: must be observed Drop a PCB. l Stack one PCB on top of another. l Handle a PCB without discharging any static electricity from your person by touching the grounded cabinet. 0 Touch PCB contacts with your fingers. 5 FAULT IDENTIFICATION and ELIMINATION PROCEDURES 5.01 The PCTU PCB may contain a “soft” fault due to static electricity. If it is found defective during the fault finding procedures, attempt to clear a soft fault prior to returning the PCTU PCB for repair. The correct procedure for this is to reinstall the PCTU, perform the initialization procedure, and then reprogram the system as necessary to test for the fault. If the fault returns after these procedures are performed, tag the defective PCTU and return it for repair. IMPORTANT! If the fault is not cleared by substituting a PCB, the original PCB must be reinstalled in the cabinet before trying another PCB. RETURNS 4.01 When adefective system apparatus is shipped for repair, the apparatus must be packed in a suitable container (the original box is highly recommended), as follows: a) Paper container b) Anti-static 6 POWER SUPPLY 6.01 If a DC power fault is detected, all PCBs should be disconnected from the backplane connectars to eliminate them as the cause of the power for the PCTU PCB. containers . 4.03 If different and/or additional faults are created in the system by substituting a PCB, tag and return the substitute PCB as a defective unit. l APPARATUS for all other PCBs. Pl CABLE FROM REAR OF POWER SUPPLY g$gi;g wz FG -24V2 -24Vl -5V +5V DG CONNECTOR BACKPLANE KSU, 4.02 NEVER WRITE ON THE APPARATUS ITSELF! Describe the nature of the defect on an information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the unit with string (not wire) so the tag can remain attached during the testing and repair process. Return tags are available from Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., TSD Division. in the correct fault DO NOT: 4 DEFECTIVE telephones, FG 6 P4 FG -24V3 5 -24V5 +5VI 4 +5V2 -5Vl 3 -5V2 DG 2 DG DG 1 DG -24Vl -24V2 TBl TB2 DK 56196 -24V4 TB3 i-l Check between pins 1 and 2 (DG) and the desired OBSERVE THE CORRECT POLARITY.. FIGURE P-BACKPLANE CONNECTORSPl (DK24), PI & P4 (DK56/96) -2- DK 96 voltage. STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 problem. The Power Supply Test Procedure in Paragraph 3, Section 200-096-205, Installation, can be employed to further isolate possible causes before removal of the KSU back cover or the power supply unit. Figure 2 shows backplane connector Pl and P4 and voltages at each pin. Voltages should fall within the following ranges: Nominal -24V +5v -5v TABLE D’ OK96CIRCUITBREAKER DlSTRlBUilO'N I Circuit Breaker Range -26.3 - -27.8 +4.5 - +5.5 -4.5 - -5.5 6.02 If voltage checks indicate a power supply fault, replace the power supply with a correctly operating unit. Refer to Section 200-096-200, Installation, for power supply installation procedures. NOTE: +5 volts goes to all PCB slots. -5 volts goes to all PCB slots. TABLE B DK24 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION Backplane 1 I -24Vl 1 PCB Slot 01, 02, 03 I 7.01 I 7.02 The continuity of the cable run between the HKSU and the electronic telephone is checked with a voltmeter as follows: +5v All slots +5v I -5v Breaker Backplane -24Vl I I -24V2 -24V3 PCB Voltmeter Test NOTE: Perform the following at the locations indica ted: I. Modular block: Check all station cables. 2. MDF: Check cable from KSU to MDF. TABLE C DK56 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION Circuit CHECK I Slot 04, 05, 06 All slots CABLE CONTINUITY 1 -24V2 I 7 STATION ( PCTUSI - -5V 1 Backplane PCB bwwr) PCTU Slots 01, 02 I I Slots 03, 04, 05 Slots 06, 07, 08 I I-I I 1) Disconnect 2) Using wires shown 27 for NOTE: +5 volts goes to all PCB slots. -5 volts goes to all PCB slots. the electronic telephone. a DC voltmeter, measure between the of the two pairs to verify the readings in Table E (Refer to Table G on page a PDKU). 3) An improper reading indicates crossed or shorted wire. 6.03 The circuit breaker distribution charts show which voltages supply the various slot locations. If a circuit breaker pops out, this chart will help to identify a malfunctioning PCB (reference Tables B, C, and D). an open, 4) For the MDF-to-electronic telephone cable, a more precise check is made using an ohmmeter. -3- I STRATADKFAULTFINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY1991 7.10 Ohmmeter Test exceed 1 M ohm (Refer to Table H on page 27 for a PDKU). I . 7.11 The continuity of the cable run between the KSU and the electronic telephone is checked with an ohmmeter as follows: 1) Disconnect the electronic 2) At the MDF, remove 4) At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires between the T and R of pair #I (green-red), the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the T and R of pair #3 (blue-white). telephone. the bridging 5) At the modular block, measure the resistance between all wire combinations. The proper readings are shown in Table F (Refer to Table H on page 27 for PDKU). clips. 3) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between all combinations of the four wires at the modular block. All measurements should TABLEE STATION CABLECONTINUITY CHECKUSINGVOLTMETER TABLEF STATION CABLECONTINUITY CHECKUSINGOHMMETER *Nominal voltage-within the limits of -26.3 N -27.8 VDC while under AC power. NOTES: 1. This is maximum allowable reading. 2. The green-red, black-yellow and whiteblue measurements should be within 10% of each other. -4- I ‘\, ./ ,I’ STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 1 FAULT CLASSIFICATION Please read the maintenance information before proceeding. __-_... - _____-y due to erroneous Start here to clear faults in STRATA DK Systems. 1 YES Check circuit breakers and power indicators. I To I n YES A r--IT- NOTE: Any time a flowchart refers to PCTU, the information applies to PCTUI, PCTU2, PCTU3 and/or PCTUSl. -5- programming. STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 1 FAULT CLASSIFICATION From (cont.) From INT aae 14 Maintenance/ Fault should have been classified. Return to Page 5. To -6- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 2 POWER FAULTS From ‘rYES Power down and lightly press all circuit breakers. Remove all PCBs and power down and press breakers. Y YES Refer to the Voltage Distribution chart and install PCBs one at a time until faulty PCB is found. Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. A Call Service Center for assistance. YES -7- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 3 STATION FAULTS \ Fault Classification Flowchart? fault. . ’ I Fromm \/ [Pages 15\-&YES Replace the electronic telephone and line cord. it an OCA “;/ NO Replace HVSWHVSI in electronic telephone or DVSU in digital telephone. Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. q-z-) NOTE: The maximum distance between , the electronic telephone and KSU is 1,000 ft. using 24 AWG cable. .’ ” To -B- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 3 STATION FAULTS (cont.) all stations on PEKU, Replace the EOCU on the appropriate PEKU or PESU, if used, or replace the PDKU. ‘ES Replace the PCTU, initialize the system and reprogram as required. Call the Service Center for assistance. defective unit(s) and return for -9- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 4 KSU FAULTS Go to Page 5 to classify fault. Fault Classification at the electronic Remove all PCBs from the KSU except: PEKU, PCTU, PESU, or PDKU. accessed by ports PESU, or PDKU, / l intercom ~~ be l \ Reinstall all PCBs, one at a time. If trouble occurs, replace suspected PCB. --) Tag the defective unit(s) ar Id return for repair. (r-i END -lO- I STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 5 CO LINE FAULTS Fault Classification Go to Page 5 to classify fault. Reprogram as required. Call the Service Center for assistance. Replace appropriate PCOU. Verify operation of that CO/PBX line. Replace the appropriate m,-.,-., , -3. Verify continuity of wiring between the PCOU and the connecting block. Replace the wiring. I cc; I-END .- Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. From -ll- END , STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 5 CO LINE FAULTS (cont.) NOTES: 1. Perform Remove all PCBs from the KSU except: * PCTU . PEKU (PESU) the initialization (PDKU) Reinstall PCBs one at a time. If troubles occur, replace suspected PCB. l-----i Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. I I 23 END -12- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 5 CO LINE FAULTS (cont.) Replace all PCBs, (’ END / Call the Service Center for assistance. 1 -13- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 6 INTERCOM FAULTS / Did \ I From ‘3 ICl This Page I I Replace the appropriate PEKU, PESU, or PDKU, if used. Replace the PCTU Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. 23 I NO END -14- Call Service Center for assistance. STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 7 DSS CONSOLE FAULTS* Go to Page 5 to classify fault. here from the Fault Classification Reprogram as required. -5 END telephone switch in the DSS position? To/--l wiring from PEKU (circuits 7 and 6) or PDKU (circuit 8) and DSS/DDSS console. Tag the defective unit and return * Procedures also apply to digital DSS consoles. -15- Set switch to DSS position. STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 7 DSS CONSOLE FAULTS (cont.) Replace the PEKU or PDKU. Replace the PCTU. defective unit(s) and return for e3 END -16- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 8 SPEED DIAL FAULTS Sfart here to clear Speed Dialing faulfs. here from the Fault Classification :-L: END Replace the PCTU NOTES: 1. Perform the initialization sequence before proceeding. 2. Reprogram as required. (i> END Call the Service Center for assistance. -17- STRATADKFAULTFINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY1991 .^.: CHARTNO. MOH, BGM, PAGE & RELAY FAULTS . From Start here to c/ear faults wifh Music-on-Hold, Background Music, Paging. MBP Page 6 ----------9 - Verify external equipment. 1 - Verify pr;mming / on one CO/PBX the PCOU. T YES Tag the defective PCB(s) and return for repair. 23 END : -I& STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 9 MOH, BGM, PAGE & RELAY FAULTS (cont.) b only over external - Verify external equipment. * Verify programming. Replace the PCTU. l-----l Replace PIOU or PEPU or PIOUS PCB, if used. Tag the defective part(s) and return for repair. / Call the Service Center assistance. L -19- for STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 10 SMDR FAULTS From / Start here to clear SMDR faults. MDR \ Page 6 ______ ---------;;i here from the Fault Classification * Switch settings (PIOU or PIOUS. 1 NOTES: 1. Perform the initialization sequence before proceeding. 2. Reprogram I Replace the PCTU. I as required. Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. I END Call the Service Center for assistance. -2o- or PIOUS) STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 11 PSTU FAULTS Go to Fault Classification NOTE: Verify the following: - Programming. . Station wirina. - Standard telephone. - Auxiliary de vice appropriate PSTU or PESU, if used. Tag the defective unit(s) and return for Ir’, END NOTE: If ‘Ring-Trip” is the fault, set the ring generator jumper plug to the ‘L” (Low) position. The ring generator jumper plug is equipped on the PEW and PTSU2 PCBs. -21- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 12 DOOR PHONE FAULTS Start here to c/ear Door Phone faults. ______---_____ YYES [YES -22- I STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 12 DOOR PHONE FAULTS (cont.) Program system for DP output. Verify HDCB strapping and wiring (correct if necessary). Replace the door phone. From Service Center for assistance. 1 Tag defective unit(s) and return for repair. CL, END -23- Replace the HDCB. [ @ STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION 200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 12 DOOR PHONE FAULTS (cont.) programmed Recheck HDCB output programming. properly Program system for door phone usage. 1 YES ( END ) From/-----Y Call the Service Center for assistance. 23 END -24- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 CHART NO. 13 TIE LINE FAULTS Fault Classification Verify programming. Contact TELCO operate correctly? line, repair line). YES Call the Service Center for assistance. -25- STRATADKFAULTFINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY1991 CHART NO. 14 REMOTE MAINTENANCE/TTY FAULTS 1 YES NOTES: 1. Verify programming. 2. Verify G-232 cable and pin-out connection to TTY. 3. Ensure proper CO /ins operation for remote maintenance modem. Replace the PIOU or PIOUS PCB. Call the Service Center for assistance. Tag the defective PCB and return for repair. I c-5 END -26- STRATA DK FAULT FINDING SECTION200-096-500 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE G (PDKU) STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER TABLE H (PDKU) STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER TO FROM Pair Wire 1 1 1 1 1 2 T R T R T T Color Green Red Green Red Green Black Pair Wire 2 2 2 2 1 2 T T R R R R Color Black Black Yellow Yellow Red Yellow Resistance 14 ohms 370 ohms 980 ohms 5 ohms 983 ohms 12 ohms -27- TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONESYSTEMS REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 StrataTax RELEASE 1,2, and 3 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES REMOTE AOMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE of CONTENTS PARAGRAPH 1 2 3 4 4.00 4.10 4.20 4.30 5 5.00 5.10 5.20 6 6.00 6.10 6.20 6.30 7 7.00 8 8.00 8.10 8.20 8.30 8.40 9 9.00 IO 10.00 10.10 II 11.00 11.10 11.20 I2 12.00 I3 I4 14.00 14.10 15 SUBJECT TABLE of CONTENTS ....................................................................................................... FIGURE LIST.. .......... ......................................................................................................... USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE ............................................ ................................................................................................ GENERAL DESCRIPTION HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ SET-UP .......... .................................................................................................................... General .......................................................................................................................... Hardware Verification .................................................................................................... Programming ............ ..................................................................................................... On-site Testing .............................................................................................................. LOCAL TERMINAL ............................................................................................................ Requirements ................................................................................................................ Set-up .......... .................................................................................................................. Local Operation ............................................................................................................. REMOTE TERMINAL SITE.. .............................................................................................. Requirements ................................................................................................................ Set-up ............................................................................................................................ Remote Operation ....... .................................................................................................. Operation ....................................................................................................................... MODE SELECTION ........................................................................................................... Selecting a Mode ........................................................................................................... PROGRAM MODE ............................................................................................................. General .......................................................................................................................... System Record Sheets .................................................................................................. Program Types .............................................................................................................. Multiple Station (Range) Programming.. ........................................................................ Programming Procedures. ............................................................................................. DATA DUMP MODE. ......................................................................................................... General .......................................................................................................................... TEST MODE ...................................................................................................................... General ............ .............................................................................................................. CO Line Testing ............................................................................................................. MESSAGE MODE.. ............................................................................................................ General .......................................................................................................................... Remote Called Station Message Mode ......................................................................... Remote Calling Station Message Mode ........................................................................ SPEED DIAL MODE.. ........................................................................................................ General ......................................................................................................................... MODE EXIT ............ ........................................................................................................... DISCONTINUE OPERATION ............................................................................................ Local Terminal ............................................................................................................... Remote Terminal .......... ................................................................................................. EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY ......................................................................................... REMOTE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES INDEX .......................................................... MESSAGE RECORD SHEET.. .......................................................................................... I . PAGE i ii I 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 IO IO IO IO IO IO IO 60 61 REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 .. TABLE LIST TABLE RM-A RM-B SUBJECT FIGURE FIGURE 1 2 3 4 5 . PAGE SECTION FLOWCHART . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . 1 PROGRAMMING PROMPTS . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . 6 RM-C thru RM-BL . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . 11-59 LIST SUBJECT PAGE PIOUS/IMDU CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. .. LOCAL TERMINAL CONNECTION . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. .. DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. .. . SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . 2 4 7 8 8 REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 1 USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION 1.01 Table RM-A is provided as a quick reference AND MAINTENANCE aid in using this section. TABLE RM-A-SECTION FLOWCHART General Description: The functions available on STRATA DK systems via a Local or Remote Terminal 1 are explained in Paragraph 2 The hardware and installation requirements explained in Paragraphs 3 and 4. I To set-up and operate a Local Terminal, see Paragraph 5. 7 I I 1 are To set-up and operate a Remote Terminal, see Paragraph 6. To enter Operation Modes from a Local or Remote Terminal: Program Data Printout Test LCD Message Entry Speed Dial Entry See Paragraph 7. l l l l l review speed dial via a terminal; I To exit and/or change modes; Paragraph 13. To terminate Local and Remote Terminal operation; Paragraph 14. Paragraph 15 provides an equipment compatibility -l- -1 list. REMOTE ADMIN ii MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 2 GENERAL Test Mode: Provides for testing CO lines and stations. DESCRIPTION 2.01 Remote Administration and Maintenance is accomplished with a remote terminal/modem communicating over the public telephone network via a Modem Unit (IMDU) installed in the STRATA DK KSU. The IMDU is a built-in modem so an external, customer-supplied modem is not required (see Figure 1). of STRATA DK Data Dump Mode: Provides a complete printout of all or individual STRATA DK customer data base programs, including speed dial numbers and LCD messages. Message Mode: Provides for sending, changing electronic telephone adding, or LCD messages. Speed Dial Mode: Allows station and system speed (300or1200 dial numbers BPS) to be programmed remotely. NOTE: All the functions in the preceding are a/so available via a terminal directly to the on-site PIOUS PC9 nal with a modem connected to a (Paragraph 5). TELEPHONE paragraph connected or a termiPSTU port 2.05 There are two levels of Remote tion and Maintenance. INTERNAL MODEM (IMDU) Administra- Level 1: Allows access to all programs. Level 2: Allows access to Programs 30 m 39 and FIGURE l-PIOUS/IMDU 77 -- 89, which pertain only to individual station options such as button assignments, class of service, etc. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 2.02 Remote Administration and Maintenance calls may connect to the IMDU automatically via programmable CO line ringing assignments (Program 78), or manually via the standard call transfer feature at intercom number 19. Automatic connection allows remote programming to be accomplished after business hours without on-site assistance via night ringing assignments. 2.06 Each Remote Administration and Maintenance level has a different programmable password for customer data base protection. This allows a customer to make certain station moves, adds, and changes in Level 2; while protecting the critical system assignments in Level 1 (refer to Program 00). 2.03 An external modem may be used and can be connected as detailed in Figure 8-21, Section 200096-208. In this case, either a dedicated CO line or a dedicated PSTU port is required for a remote terminal connection. 2.04 Remote Administration lows the following functions remotely: 3 HARDWARE 3.01 The STRATA DK KSU must be equipped with a PIOUS PCB and either an IMDU (subassembly) modem or a modem external to the KSU. and Maintenance alto be accomplished Program Mode: Provides for complete ming of all STRATA DK programs speed dial adds/changes). REQUIREMENTS 4 SET-UP 4.00 General 4.01 This section assumes that fhe system has been properly installed per the appropriate section in this manual. program(including -2- ‘X REMOTE AOMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 4.02 The following items must be completed onsite for Remote Administration and Maintenance to be operational. NOTE: This test checks basicprogramming and IMDU operation, and should be completed -before continuing with Remote Administration and Maintenance installation. 4.10 Hardware Verification 5) If a terminal is to be utilized on-site, Paragraph 5. For off-site programming Paragraph 6. 4.11 Verify the PIOUSIMDU or external modem is installed per instructions in the appropriate installation section of this manual (refer to Sections 200096-206 and 200-096-208). 5 LOCAL TERMINAL 4.20 Programming 4.21 If an IMDU Program 77-l. 5.00 Requirements is used, enable the IMDU 5.01 The KSU must have a PIOU(S) PCB installed in (refer to Sections 200-096-208 for wiring information). 4.22 If Remote Administration and Maintenance calls are to connect to the IMDU automatically, assign the designated CO lines to ring the IMDU intercom number (19) in Program 78 as required (use standard STRATA DK programming procedures). 5.03 Operating the terminals, local or remote, is identical. The only difference is the physical connection and the method used to establish initial communications. NOTE: The security codes are initialized as “0000”. These codes may also be changed via a local or rem0 te terminal. 5.10 Set-up 5.11 Refer to Figure 2 and verify that the local terminal 4.30 On-site Testing is connected of the IMDU. NOTE: If a personal computer is being used, connect the cable to the serial “COM”pot?. dial tone. 2) Dial 0 1. l Receive modem tone from the IMDU after a 2-second delay. 2) Set the terminal baud rate to match the PIOU(S) setting (PIOU[S], SW2). 3) Set the terminal button and set-up as follows: 1) Connect the RS-232 cable to the terminal connector and the PlOU(S) TTY connector. 4.31 From any working station, test the functioning 1) Press the m button. l Receive intercom and 200-096-209 5.02 The local terminal must have an EIA RS-232 interface, communicate in ASCII code at 300 or 1200 bps, have a standard typewriter-type keyboard, and display data via a CRTdisplay or printer. A personal computer capable of emulating the described terminal may also be used (see Figure 2 and Paragraph 15). 4.23 Program the security codes for Levels 1 and 2 as in the Programming Procedures, Section 200096-300. Reference Program 00. 3) Press the m refer to referto to release. 4) Set the keyboard 4) Make an incoming call over each CO line that is programmed to ring the IMDU (station 19). l Receive modem tone from the IMDU after a 2-second delay with each call. 5) Set the terminal Word length: Stop bits: 1 Parity: Even -3- for “Full Duplex” operation. for “Caps Lock” on. parameters 7 bits s to: REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 LOCAL TERMINAL KSU . PPTC MODULAR TO DB25 ADAPTOR / RS-232 I I _ 50‘ FEET 5) Type the 4digit security code, and press . l The system responds, and the terminal displays: 5.21 Use the procedure below to establish communications between the local terminal and the PIOU(S) so that programming may be accomplished via the terminal. OK MODE NOTE: The security code can be entered CODE prompt appears. NOTE: Hereafter, whenever the term is used, it means the return or enter key, depending on the keyboard being used. m means the space bar. An empty square indicates one of several characters will appear in that location (either on the terminal’s screen or in a printout). q as described 6) To continue, in Paragraph * DKTS VERSION t-1 > CODE 1.0 and the terminal or SITE must interface with an asynchronous modem, communicate in ASCII code at 300 or 1200 bps, have a standard typewriter-type keyboard, and display data via a CRT display or printer. A personal computer capable of emulating the described terminal may also be used (see Figure 1 and Paragraph 15). to on-line. responds, 7. 6.01 Terminal: The terminal q key. The system displays: any time the 6.00 Requirements 3) Set “Caps Lock” on (upper case). l go to Paragraph 6 REMOTE TERMINAL 5.10. 4) Press Section 200-096-208, information. q 5.20 Local Operation 2) Set the terminal INTERNAL MAX. 24 AtiG See Peripherals Installation, for detailed pin-out 1) Set-up the terminal p’ou(s) (300 OR 1200 PBS) 6.02 Modem: The modem must be full-duplex asynchronous, operate at’ 300 or- 1200 bps and have an RS-232 interface to connect with a termi- DK CONNECT -4- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 2) To continue, graph 6.30. nal or PC (as described in Paragraph 5). It must interface with the public telephone network and be compatible with Bell 103 or 212 modem specifications. 6.23 connection via call transfer! 1) Using a telephone (at the remote location) that can switch to the terminal/modem, dial the number of a system CO line. 6.10 Set-up 6.11 Refer to Figure 1 and verify that the remote terminal Manual enter the security code per Para- is connected and set-up as follows: 1) Connect the terminal and modem with the RS-232 cable. 2) When the call is answered, request that it be transferred to station 19 (the IMDU). together 3) After the call is transferred and communication is established with the IMDU, switch the call from the telephone to the terminal/madem. NOTE: If a personal computer is being used, connect the cable to the serial “C0M”pot-t. 4) Observe l 2) Connect the modem line input to a CO/PBX line for access to the public telephone network. 3) Set the terminal match the PIOU(S) and modem setting. baud l rate to l 4) Set the terminal and modem for “Full Duplex” the following: When the CO line is transferred, it will connect to the IMDU. The IMDU and the remote modem will respond to each other with modem tone and communication is established. When communication is established, the terminal will display: CONNECTED or COMMUNICATIONS (see Note). operation. 5) Set the terminal Word length: Stop bits: 1 Parity: Even parameters 7 bits NOTES: 1. If the connection is not completed or communication is unsuccessful, the remote terminal will display: NO CARRIER. 2. If this is the case, check that the equipmentisinstalledperParagraph5.70or6.10 of this section and try again. to: 6.20 Remote Operation 6.30 Operation 6.21 Automaticconnectionviaringingassignments: To establish communication between the remote terminal and the IMDU, call the number of the system CO line assigned to ring the IMDU via the remote terminal/modem set-up: 6.31 Once communication is established between the remote terminal and the IMDU, follow the steps below to enter the security code and receive the MODE prompt. 1) Observe the following: l When the CO line rings-in, it will connect to the IMDU and the IMDU will respond by returning modem tone to the remote modem. l The remote modem will return modem tone to the IMDU and communication will be established. l When communication is established, the terminal will display: CONNECTED or COMMUNICATIONS (see Note). NOTE: Hereafter, whenever the term is used, it means the return or enter kev. deoendina on the keyboard being used. m mean; the space bar. An empty square indicates one of several characters will appear in that location (either on the terminal’s screen or in a printout). I q 1) Set the keyboard -5- for ‘Caps Lock” on. REMOTE ADMIN 81MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 q 2) Press the key. l The system responds, displays: DKTS VERSION 1.0 XODE 8 PROGRAM and the terminal 3) Enter the 4-digit key. l The system displays: security q responds, 8.00 General (DK CONNECT) R2 * The software version number Program 00. is identified in code and press the and the terminal 8.02 All options are controlled by selections made in the System Record Sheet. An initialization process is provided for verifying predetermined system assignments. The installer can then proceed with any necessary changes. 7 MODE SELECTION 7.00 Selecting a Mode 8.03 Internal battery power is provided to prevent loss of system data memory in the event of a power failure. 7.01 To enter an operating mode, establish communication with the terminal, enter the security code, and press the key to receive the MODE prompt. q 8.10 System Record Sheets 8.11 Before system data can be programmed, the System Record Sheets which contain the customer data base must be available (see Programming, Section 200-096-305). 5.10 or 6.10 to accom- 8.20 Program Types 1) Set the keyboard for ‘Caps Lock” on (the mode name must be entered in capital letters). 2) At the MODE prompt, name (Table RM-B). 3) Press the q . 8.01 Data governing overall system operation and feature execution for the systems are stored in read-only memory (ROM) and cannot be altered in the field. However, the data controlling operation of the various options, both system and station, are stored in random-access memory (RAM) and can easily be changed according to individual installation requirements. OK MODE NOTE: Refer to Paragraphs plish the above. MODE enter the desired 8.21 There are three types of programs: Type 1: All Type 1 programs use the same procedure; however, each key/LED has a different meaning, depending on the program number. The status of these data is reviewed, changed, and stored in system memory using Type 1 program procedures. mode key. 4) Verify the correct prompt return (Table RM-B). Type 2: All Type 2 programs follow the same entry procedure; however, they require port number and key/LED entries. Each key/LED has adifferent meaning, depending on the program number. TABLE RM-B-PROGRAMMING PROMPTS Mode Function Program Mode Name PROG Data Dump Test DUMP Prompt Return P D TEST T LCD Messages MESG (NONE) SDeed Dial No. REPT R Type3: In this type program, the information shown in the System Record Sheet indicates the data to be stored in system memory. Each program has a different meaning, and the data is reviewed, changed or stored in memory using an individual procedure for each program. -6- REMOTE ADMIN& MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 8.30 Multiple Station (Range) Programming These procedures must be completed whenever a PCTU or PCTUSl PCB is first installed. . b) Type 1 programs: 8.31 Some programs select options for individual stations (where 0 0 represents the port number being programmed). To save time, it is possible to program all ports or a range of ports simultaneously. 1O-l, 1O-2,1O-3,15,16,42-0,77-1,77-2. c) Type 2 programs: Station Class of Service; 17,20,30,31,35,40,41,43,79,81 8.32 Multiple station programming is accomplished by substituting a range of ports (0 0 10 0) for the port number part (0 0) of the program. Example, - 89. d) Type 3 programs: l Initialization; 90, 92 l General; 00, 03, 04, 05, 12, 13, 21, 22,28,29,32,33,34,36,37,38,39, 42-1 - 8, 44, 60,69, 70, 78,80,93. all ports: w 1 111 Toll Restriction; 45 w 48. Least Cost Routing; 50 w 56. l 8.33 When the multiple station range is entered, the terminal displays existing data as follows: l 9 DATA DUMP MODE Y or N: Data is the same for all ports in the dialed group. Y = key/LEDs “ON”; N = key/LEDs”OFF”. U: Key/LED is “ON” ports in that group. 9.00 General 9.01 This mode allows three types of data to be for at least one, but not all displayed or output to a printer: STRATA DK Programs (Customer Data Base), Speed Dialing Numbers (Station/System), and LCD Messages (Station/System). 8.40 Programming Procedures 1) Refer to a completed System Record Sheet. mode per 9.02 The three procedures for the Data Dump mode are called: Program Dump, Speed Dialing Dump, and LCD Messages Dump. 3) Program procedures are categorized and given in the order below. Use these procedures to store System Record Sheet data in working memory. a) Initialization procedures: 9.03 Program Dump: While in the dump mode, enter “PRG” and up to three characters and press . The three alphanumeric characters represent a program group or a particular program, i.e., ALL, 03, 04, 10, 39, etc. For a printout example, see Figure 3. 2) Place the terminal Paragraph 7. into the program q CO LINE NUMBERS 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 40 33 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 t CO 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 32 25 24 17 16 9 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 LINE 36 -*I 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 STATION PORT NUMBER PROGRAM NUMBER FIGURE3-DATA DUMPPRINTOUTEXAMPLE -7- :SELECT(LED t- CO LINE 01 PN) REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 dialing codes for either an individual station, 10 0 (all stations and system data) 1 m B (system data only). . >MODE DUMP D MSG SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS D M60 M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68 M69 9.05 LCD Messages mode, enter “MSG” and press . The messages for either stations and system only). For a printout OUT TO LUNCH IN A MEETING CALL BACK AT RETURN ON q .\, .’ Dump: While in the dump and two or three characters characters represent stored an individual station, 101 (all data) or 4 m H (system data example, see Figure 4. 9.06 Tables provide a quick reference to the stepby-step procedures to output the appropriate data. IO TEST MODE FIGURE 4-SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES NOTE: 10.00 10.01 The remote test mode can be used to test STRATA DK stations and CO line circuits from an off-site location. Programs are output only in the groups indicated. To print out or review a program not included above, use Program Mode procedures. 10.02 This testing function is accomplished accessing stations from the remote terminal, activating various buttons on the electronic phone to make telephone calls, set function tons, change the system time and date, etc. Figure 5). 9.04 Speed Dialing Dump: While in the dump mode, enter “REP” and two or three characters and press . The characters represent the speed q PUBLIC TELEPHONE NETWORK REMOTE SITE REMOTE TERMINAL t\ MODEM General by and telebut(see KSU I CO LINE _ (300 or 1200 BPS) REMOTE STATION B CO LINE CO LINE B I \ Electronic Telephone XX CONNECTION : FIGURE 5-TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 IMPORTANT! Any electronic telephone button can be activated from the remote terminal at any time while in the Test Mode (even while the end user is using the electronic telephone). Therefore, caution must be used toprevent service interruption or interference. The Test Mode provides status tests to check whetherornotastationorCOlineisinuse. The status checks should always be made before performing other tests. 11.lO Remote Called Station Message Mode 11.I 1 Allows the terminal to set a Called Station Message for an originating station with the destination of the message being a station or group of stations. 11.I 2 When the message is set, the MW/FLLED(s) on the destination 11.I 3 When a destination ing station, the message nation station’s LCD. 10.10 CO Line Testing 10.11 To test CO line transmission, CO lines must be available Figure 5). stations through by using all Mode 96: To add or change a Called Station Message before setting it, use this mode. It does not display the existing message, but allows a completely new message to be entered before it is set. a talk path between the two remote (B & C) via a CO-to-CO connection STRATA. 11.20 Remote Calling Station Message Mode 11.21 Allows the terminal to set a Calling Station Message for a station. The message will be set on the station’s LCD and is automatically displayed on other stations’ LCDs whenever they call that station. 3) Establish a talk path between a remote station and the time or weather service via a CO-toCO connection through STRATA. 10.13 The procedures in the tables provide examples of the types of tests and functions that can be accomplished with the Test Mode. These procedures do not cover all the possible tests that can be performed remotely; however, by using the principles given, other tests are possible. 11 MESSAGE station calls the originatis displayed on the desti- Message before setting it, use this mode. It will print out the existing message and allow additions to it (such as a time or a date) before it is set. (The message cannot be changed with this mode-just added to.) Call station B at the remote site via the STRATA system and then place the line on hold (transmission is checked at the remote site via MOH). 2) Establish flash. Mode 94: To edit and/or review a Called Station two or three at the remote site (see 10.12 CO line testing is accomplished of the following three methods: 1) station(s) Mode 95: To edit and/or review a Calling Station Message before setting it, use this mode. It will display the existing message and allow additions to it (such as a time or adate) before it is set. (The message cannot be changed with this modejust added to.) MODE Mode 97: To add or change a Calling Station Message before setting it, use this mode. It does not display the existing message, but allows a completely new message to be entered before it is set. 11.OO General 11 .Ol This mode allows a local or remote terminal to set Called and Calling Station LCD messages for station users. The messages may be system or station type and are stored in their respective memory locations when set. 11.22 Use the procedures in the tables messages via Modes 94/96 and 95/97. -9- to set REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 . .\ 12 SPEED DIAL MODE 14 DISCONTINUE 12.00 General ,’ OPERATION . 14.00 Local Terminal 12.01 The Speed Dial Mode can be used to add or change speed dial numbers to any of the system speed dial memory locations (60 N 99) and to any station speed dial memory locations (IO w 49). 14.01 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph 13 and observe that the MODE prompt is displayed on the terminal. 14.10 Remote Terminal 12.02 Chain speed dial numbers can also be programmed using the Speed Dial Mode. See the Electronic Telephone User Guide for more information regarding chain speed dialing operation. 14.11 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph 13 and observe that the MODE prompt is displayed on the terminal. 12.03 To program speed dial numbers, enter the REPT mode per Paragraph 7 of this section. Then use the Speed Dial Mode Procedure at the end of this section. 14.12 To discontinue 1) Take the terminal 13.01 Exit the current mode per Paragraph and select the desired mode via Paragraph 15 EQUIPMENT 13.02 7. >MODE 13.03 To exit the MESG mode: mode. drops the line. COMPATIBILITY 15.01 Below is a list of equipment that is known to be compatible with STRATA DK Remote Administration and Maintenance. This list does not show all of the equipment that will work, only the equipment that has been proven compatible in the field or lab. 13.02 To exit the PROG, DUMP, TEST or SPEED DIAL mode: l At the P, D, T or R prompt, enter mm[amand observe: At anvtime while in the messaae a 1 a and observe: operation: off-line. 2) Verify that the modem 13 MODE EXIT l remote 15.02 As additional equipment is proven ible, it will be added to an up-dated list. enter: compat- NOTE: To exit the Message Mode, the terminal keyboard must be in lower case. I TERMINALS Texas Instruments Silent 700 Panasonic KXD-4920 MODEMS I Hayes: Smartmodem 1200 COMPUTERS Toshiba: T3100/20, Tl 100, & Ti 000 1 SOFTWARE 1 Crosstalk or equivalent Universal Data Systems: Model 103J LP I U.S. Robotics: Password -lO- I’ REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-C PROGRAM90 INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 - 97 iTEP 1 ACTION Enter the Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt enter 1 1 H 1 2 Enter Program Press q Number q >MODE PROG . 90 P 90 P90 . 3 To Initialize All Programs Enter 1 1 i 1 0 NOTE: Single programs can be initialized by entering a single program number plus B . Group numbers are separated by an 1 . P90 00-97 4 Enter key number 1 0. P90 5 Change 01 key to “ON” by entering 6 Press m 7 Change 02 key to “ON” by entering 8 Pressm . Initialization complete. 9 a . NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, then not respond. To retry, press F q . Exit Program 90: Press njm 10 1 . Enter Program Press iim 77: will 01 N P9O 00-97 01 N Y P9O 00-97 01 N Y 02 N P90 (IO-97 01 N Y 02 N Y P90 00-97 01 N 02 N Y P90 P90 # P P77 . 11 Press [ 0 1 then:mm 12 To Exit this Program: Press In(9 q 00-97 P77 1 14 N P77 1 14 N Y P77 . IMPORTANT NOTE: If al/programs are initialized, If using the IMDU for remote in steps 9, IO, and 11. If this the programming electronic the “IMDU enabled” has a/so been turned off in Program W-1, LED 14. programming, go into Program 77-1 and turn key/LED 14 on as shown is not completed, remote programming must be reactivated locally from telephone. -ll- REMOTEADMIN & MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-D PROGRAM92 STATION SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO,VMID CODES INITIALIZATION iTEP 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT m m B q >MODE PROG . Number 92 P 92 P92 . 3 Enter 0 . P92 P92 1 4 Enter key number: 1 0. P92 P92 1 01 N 5 Change key 01 to “ON” by entering 6 Press m 7 Change key 03 to “ON” by entering 8 Press Initialization 0 . P92 P92 1 01 N Y two times. P92 P92 1 01 N Y 02 N 03 N 1 P92 P92 1 01 N Y 02 N 03 N Y q complete. NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, . not respond. To retry, press ),111=11=1 q 9 Clear system speed dial using the procedure q will on the next page. -12- P92 P92 1 01 N Y 02 N 03 N Y P92 . REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-E PROGRAM 92(continued) SYSTEM SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO INITIALIZATION ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter w m 1 B - 2 Enter Program Press - q Number q >MODE PROG . 92 P 92 P92 . 3 Enter 1 . P92 P92 2 4 Enter key number 1 0 . P92 P92 2 01 N 5 Change 01 key to “ON” by entering 6 Press m - P92 P92 2 01 N Y 1 . three times. 7 8 Change key 04 to “ON” by entering 1 . q Press . initialization complete. NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, not respond. To retry, press m q 9 q Clear LCD message memory, using the procedure next page. will on the L -13- P92 P92 2 01 02 03 04 N Y N N N P92 P92 2 01 02 03 04 N Y N N N Y P92 P92 2 01 02 03 04 P92 N Y N N N Y REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-F PROGRAM 92 (continued) LCD CHARACTERMESSAGE MEMORY INITIALIZATION ACTION iTEP 1 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 4 B w H Number q >MODE PROG . 2 Enter Program Press [9 92 P 92 P92 3 Enter m . P92 P92 3 4 Enter key number 1 1. P92 P92 3 02 N 5 Change 02 key to “ON” by entering 6 Press m 7 Change key 03 to “ON” by entering 8 Press [9 . Initialization complete. 1 P92 P92 3 02 N Y . P92 P92 3 02 N Y 03 N 1 P92 P92 3 02 N Y 03 N Y NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, not respond. To retry, press m . q 9 Clear the timed reminders using the procedure q will P92 P92 3 02 N Y 03 N Y P92 on the next page. . -14- -_j : REMOTE AOMIN 81MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-G PROGRAM 92 (continued) TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i B m 1 q >MODE PROG . 2 Enter Pro ram Number Press d - 92 3 Enter1 4 Enter key number 11 P92 P92 4 02 N 5 Change key 02 to “ON” by entering [ . P92 P92 4 02 N Y 6 Press m P92 P92 4 02 N Y 03 N 04 N 7 Change key 04 to “ON” by entering [ . 8 Press Initialization P 92 P92 . P92 P92 4 two times. P92 P92 4 02 N Y 03 N 04 N Y q complete. NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, not respond. To retry, press m . q 9 To exit this program, press 11 q q . -15- will P92 P92 4 02 N Y 03 N 04 N Y P92 REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-Gl PROGRAM 92(continued) DlGlTALTELEPHONEVOLUMELEVELlNlTlALlZATlON ACTION STEP/ 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter w B 1 H 2 Enter Program Press q Number . DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 92 P 92 P92 . 3 Enter 1 . P92 5 4 Enter 5 Press m 6 Change key 05 to “ON” by entering 1. q ; change key 01 to “ON” by entering a. P92 5 01 N Y four times. NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, [9 respond. To retry, press ),11131=1 . q q 7 Press . Initialization complete. 8 To exit this program, press m B (9. will not P92 5 01 02 03 04 05 N Y N N N N P92 5 01 02 03 04 05 N Y N N N N Y P92 5 01 02 03 04 05 P92 N Y N N N N , -16- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-GP PROGRAM 92 (continued) CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION STEP ACTION Enter Program 1 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the S-MODE prompt, enter 1 1 m @ >MODE PROG q 2 P 92 P92 I I 3 Enter1 4 Enter key number 11 5 Change key 03 to “ON” by entering B . 1 6 . Press m P92 P92 9 P92 P92 9 03 N . P92 P92 9 03 N Y I . P92 P92 9 03 N Y 04 N I I 7 Change key 04 to “ON” by entering 1 . 8 Press Initialization P92 P92 9 03 N Y 04 N Y q complete. I I NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, not respond. To retry, press m . 9 To exit this program, press [[m q q will P92 P92 9 03 N Y 04 N Y P92 . IMPORTANT NOTE: This program clears call forward memory for all stations, but does not reset the call forward indication on the station (call forward LCD information and/or call forward button/LED), To clear station call forward indications, system power must be turned OFF for five seconds, then ON. Fixed call forward is not cleared by this program. -16A- REMOTEAOMIN & MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-H TYPEIPROGRAMPROCEDUREEXAMPLE (PROGRAMS: STEP/ 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter B 1 m @ 2 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q . Number Enter Program Code or Digit(s) Per Record Sheet El or other digit required. NOTE: 4 Most programs Enter Key/LED P 10 PlO PlO 1 PlO 1 01 g (see note) I Pl0 1 01 N Y do not require a second digit. Number Enter the desired key/LED number. Example: Key/LED 01, enter 1 n . 5 To Change Key/LED 0 >MODE PROG P Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired rogram number. Example: Program IO-I, enter 0 1, press d - . 3 . IO-I, 10-2, 1 O-3, 15-0, 15-1, 16,42-O, 77-1,77-2) Status Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the key/LED status, if required (Y or N). Example: Enter 1 6 To Advance to Next Key/LED Press m 7 PlO 1 01 Y 02 N Repeat step 5 if necessary. To Review Key/LED Status Change q Enter . Re-enter steps 3 and 4. NOTE: This step is optional and not required to save data. 8 To Exit Program/Store Data q A) To store data, press B) To exit this program, press 1 1, then press . C) Continue returning to step 2 until all Type 1 programs are completed. 9 To Exit the Program Pressu[m IO q Mode PlO - 1 LL PlO PlO ## P > MODE Mode Press mmmim (datadump) D OlMiW (test) T m0 HHq (LCD messages) (no prompt) moii[9 (speed dial) R NOTE: Y = key/LED “ON’: N = key/LED “OFF” -16B- Y- Key LED “ON” Key LED Number Program Code . To Enter Another 01 Program Number REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-I TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDUREEXAMPLE . (PROGRAMS: 2 i Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 4 1 m 1 I ,81 - 89) ACTION iTEF 1 17,20,30,31,35,40,41,43, DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE P . PROG Enter Program Number Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number. Example: Program 30, enter1 m, press . P Enter Port Number 0 0 or Port Range 0 0 10 0 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired port number(s). Example: 1 1. P30 P30 04 4 Press i P30 04# 5 Enter the Desired Key/LED Number Example: Key/LED 01, enter: 1 0. P30 04# 01 N_ (Note iIf 6 To Change Key/LED Status Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the key/LED status, if required (Y or N). Example: Enter a P30 04# 01 N 7 To Advance Press m 8 To Review Key/LED Status Change Press Re-enter steps 3, 4, and 5. 9 To A) B) C) 30 q 3 key. to Next Key/LED (repeat step 6 if necessary). q Exit Program/Store Data To store data, press To exit this program, press 1 1, then press . Continue returning to step 2 until all Type 2 programs are completed. q To Exit the Program Press aim 11 Y To Enter Another Press VOTE: Y = key/LED(s) q Mode >MODE Mode, NImlm (datadump) D OINIm (test) T ~~~~~ (LCD messages) (no prompt) ~~~~~ (speed dial) R “ON”, N = key/LED(s) “OFF”; U = key/LED(s) -17- ‘0N”some parts and ‘OFF” other parts, REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-J PROGRAM00 SOFTWARECHECK/REMOTEMAINTENANCE-SECURITYCODE ACTION TEP Enter Program ’ 2 Enter Program Press 3 q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter NlH H[9 >MODE PROG P . Number 00 I? 00 . PO0 To Check Software Version Enter Action Code 0. System will display the version of software PO0 0 Version PCTU q Software To Change Level 1 Security Code Enter Action Code 1. The system will display the present PO0 1 0000 PO0 level 1, 4-digit code. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Press (9 . 5 To Change Level 2 Security Code Enter Action Code 2. The system will display the present PO0 2 0000 PO0 level 2, 4-digit code. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Press . q 6 To Exit This Program PO0 ## Press 1 1 P q . -18- = Do 00 POO that is in the PCTU(S). Press 4 . type version REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-K PROGRAM03 FLEXIBLEPCBSLOTASSIGNMENTS ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter the Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode >MODE PROG P At the >MODE prompt, enter w 1 m 1 (9. 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number 03 P 03 PO3 . Enter the Slot Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired slot number. Example: Slot number 00, enter 1 1. 4 Enter the PCB Code Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired PCB code number. Example: PCB code 92, enter 1 1 . 5 To Exit Program/Store Data 03 PO3 ## P q 6 PO3 PO3 00 91 92 PO3 PO3 00 91 92 q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 1, press PO3 PO3 00 91 Turn system power “OFF” for 5 seconds and then turn power “ON” to store data in working memory (see Notes). Remote maintenance is disconnected. IMPORTANT NOTES: 1. This program must be completed with on-site assistance (after installing PCBs) because the system must be powered down momentarily after PCB code entry. 2. Even though PCB codes display as being changed, they are not entered into working memory until the system DC power is cycled OFF and ON. 3, If PCB codes are not entered into working memory by cycling DC power, PCB options will not function. 4. Only Program 03 requires the system power to be turned OFF and ON to store data into working memory. -19- REMOTEAOMlN&MAlNTPROCEOURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 , TABLERM-L PROGRAM04 PORT/STATIONNUMBERASSlGNMENT ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt enter i 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number m @ H DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P q 04 P 04 PO4 . Enter the Port Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired port number. Example: Port number 01, enter a 0. 4 5 PO4 PO4 01 Press 1 key. System displays present station number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired station number. Example: Station number 206, enter 1 1 1. PO4 PO4 Ol# To Exit Program/Store PO4 PO4 ## P Data q A) To store data; press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press fl 1 [9 . NOTE: A blank is displayed 04 201 206 by ‘N”. TABLERM-M PROGRAM05 FLEXIBLEACCESSCOOENUMBERING iTEP 1 ACTION Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number 0 u H DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG . 05 Enter Access Code number P 05 PO5 that you wish to change (0 - 9) PO5 4 4 Example: 4 (if it was not previously changed, the system will print another 4. If it has been previously changed, the system will print the number to which it was changed). 4 Change the number if required Example: Change to 6, press q (one or two digits) 5 Continue returning to step 3 until all required access codeshavebeenchanged. 6 To Exit this Program Press 1 1 q PO5 4 4 6 P . NOTE: Program 10, use Type I procedure. -2o- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-N PROGRAM12 SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS-BASICTIMING ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter w m B 1 2 Enter Program Press q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 12 P 12 P12 . 3 Check the record sheet and enter the program code that is required. As an example, feature 3, enter 1. The present selection will be displayed. P12 3 1 4 Refer to the record sheet and change if required. As an example, change it to 2. Enter 1 . P12 3 1 2 5 To Exit Program/Store P12 p12 P Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 12 data is # # q TABLERM-0 PROGRAM13 DEFININGTHEMESSAGECENTER ACTION STEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 1 1 H 2 Enter Program Press q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . P 13 P13 13 . 3 Enter the number a . The present port number will be displayed. P13 P13 1 NN 4 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 00, enter 1 1 . P13 1 NN 00 P13 5 To Exit this Program P13 ## P q Press B 1 q . NOTES: 1. A blank is displayed by ‘N”. 2. Programs 15, 16, use Type 1 procedure. Program 77, use Type 2 procedure. -21- REMOTEAOMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-01 PROGRAM21 MODEMPOOLING ACTION ;TEP Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 a 11 Enter Program Press q q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P , Number 21 P 21 P21 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required pot-t number for the PDIU-DS. Example: port 04; Enter: m 1. P21 04 4 Press 1. The system will display the presently selected PSTU port number. P21 04 # NN 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required PSTU port number. Example: port 06; Enter: 11. P21 04 # NN 06 6 To Exit Program/Store P21 04 # m p21 # # P Data q A) To store data, press . 6) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program is entered. C) To exit this program, press u 1 . 21 data 06 q TABLERM-02 PROGRAM22 DATASTATlONHUNTlNG(DATACALLONLY) ACTION iTEF 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Pro ram Number m m B DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 22 P 22 P22 Press d - . 3 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 03, enter 1 1. P22 03 4 Enter 1 . The present data will be displayed. P22 03# NN Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number that will be the hunt point. Example: Port 00, enter 1 1 P22 03# NN 00 To Exit Program/Store P22 03# NN 00 p22 ## P Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 0 . 22 q -22- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-P PROGRAM28 DSSCONSOLE/ATTENDANTELECTRONlCTELEPHONEASSlGNMENTS ACTION iTEF 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press q 1 1 B DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 28 P 28 P28 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required DSS console number (1 - 4). The system will display the electronic telephone to which the DSS console is assigned. Example: DSS console number 1 is assigned to electronic telephone number 1. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Example: Assign DSS console 1 to electronic telephone 2. Enter: B . P28 1 1 2 4 To Exit Program/Store P28 1 1 2 P28 # # P Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 . q NOTES: This program also applies to digital DSS consoles and digital telephones. -22A- . REMOTEADMIN & MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 This page intentionally left blank. I -22B- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-Q PROGRAM29 DSSCONSOLEBUTTONASSIGNMENTS ACTION iTEP 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 m 1 @ 2 Enter Program >MODE PROG P q Number P 29 P 29 PressIim 3 Enter Console Number and Keystrip Group Number p4lo Press 0 0 T- Ke:::y:;::::;;,-::j 4 Enter the 2-digit Key Number to be Programmed (01 - 20): 00 p2g 0 0 0 0 17 0 0 (current feature code displays 0 0 0 after key entry). 5 Enter New (2- or 3-digit) Press0 Feature Code Key% p2gQ cl ~o,o 0 or 0 0 0 Key T - 3;!dg:;;ze Console ‘i Key group 6 Press m Press q to go to next key. or to store data. 7 Continue with step 3 until all Program a To Exit this Program Press i[m NOTE: Program 30,31; P29 29 data is entered. . use Type 2 procedure. -23- 0- II 0 cl 0 17 No. I I Old New code code REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-R PROGRAM32 AUTOMATICPREFERENCE ;TEP 1 ACTION Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter the Program Press q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Number m 4 B q >MODE PROG P . 32 P 32 P32 . 3 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 01, enter 1 0 P32 01 4 Enter $. The present status for this port will be displayed. P32 01# 5 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required ringing code. Example: Code 0, enter 1 . P32 01 # 100 6 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required automatic off-hook code. Example: Code 11, enter 0 0 P32 01# 100 011 7 To Exit Program/Store 100 0 P32 01# 100 011 Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program is entered. C) To exit this program, press 9 f . 32 data P32 ## P q TABLERM-S PROGRAM33 STATION HUNTING iTEP 1 ACTION Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i a m H DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 2 Enter Pro ram Number Press d - . 3 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 03, enter 1 1. P33 03 4 Enter 1 P33 03# NN 5 Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number that will be the hunt point. Example: Port 00, enter 1 1 P33 O3# NN 00 6 To Exit Program/Store P33 03# NN 00 33 P 33 P33 The present data will be displayed. Data A) To store data, press (9 . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 P33 ## 33 q -24- P . REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-T PROGRAM34 HOLDRECALLTIMING STEP . ACTION 1 Enter the Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 B n H 2 Enter Program Press q Number q >MODE PROG P . 34 P 34 P34 . 3 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 05, enter 1 i . P34 05 4 Press1 P34 05# 032 5 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required timing. Example: 160 seconds, enter 0 1 a. P34 05# 032 160 6 To Exit Program/Store P34 05# P34 ## P 032 160 The present data will be displayed. Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data has been entered. C) To exit this program, press i m . 34 q iVOTE: k~gtatn 35, use Type 2 procedure. TABLERM-U PROGRAM36 FIXEDCALLFORWARD ACTION STEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 B a 1 >MODE PROG P q 2 Enter Pro ram Number 36 Press d - . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the port number for the station that will have a Fixed Call Forward key. Example: Port 00, enter 1 1 . 4 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT I P 36 P36 P36 00 I 1 Press 1 . The present data will be displayed. I P36 00# NN 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the port to be forwarded to when the Fixed Call Forward key is pressed. Example: Port 04, enter 1 a P36 00# ma 04 6 To Exit Program/Store P36 00# P36 ## P Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press E 1 [9. 36 -25- NN 04 . REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-0'96-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-V PROGRAM37 RlNGTRANSFER(CAMP-0N)RECALLTlME ACTION iTEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter a a w a 2 Enter the Program Pressm Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 37 P 37 P37 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 01, enter 1 0 P31 01 4 Press B System will display the present ring transfer recall time. P37 01# 064 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required ring transfer timeout. Example: 70 seconds. Enter 1 0 m. P37 01# 064 070 6 To Exit Program/Store P37 01# P37 ## P 064 070 Data A) To store data, press [9 B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 37 q ‘. -26- REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-W PROGRAM38 ELECTRONICTELEPHONEBUTTONSTRIPTYPE ITEP 1 ACTION Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 m 1 1 2 Enter the Program Press q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P q 38 P 38 P38 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 00, enter 1 a P38 00 4 Press1 . The system will display the present electronic telephone code. P38 00# 31 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required electronic tele hone code number. Example: Code 21, enter io . P38 00# 31 21 6 To Exit Program/Store P38 00# P38 ## P 31 21 Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program data is entered. C) To exit this program, press a 1 . 38 q -27- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-X PROGRAM 39 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter the Program Press q Number 0 H H DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 39 P 39 P39 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 00, enter 1 1. P39 00 4 Press B P39 00 # 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the key number. Example: Key 01, enter 1 0 The system will display the feature code presently assigned to this key. P39 OO# 01 00 6 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required feature code (2 or 3 digits . Example: Code 01, enter b@ 0. P39 OO# 01 00 01 7 To select next key number, press m Continue returning to step 6 until all port 00 features are programmed. P39 OO# 01 00 01 02 02 8 Press 9 A) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 39 data has been entered. B) To exit this program and store data, press 1 1 q . P39 to store data. q . P39 OO# 01 00 01 02 02 p39 # # P NOTES: 1. Programs 40,4 1; use Type 2 procedure. 2. Program 42-O; use Type I procedure. >. -28- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-Y PROGRAM42-1-8 PBXACCESSCODE ACTION TEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 0 m a 2 Enter Program Press W DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 42 P 42 P42 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required PBX group number (1 - 8). System will display present PBX access code. P42 1 NN 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required access code. N = Space # = Don’t care Example: 9, enter B 1 . P42 1 NN 9N 5 To Exit Program/Store P42 1 NN 9N P42 ## P Data q A) To store data press . B) Return to step 3 to continue in this rogram. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 $ - . NOTES: 1. Programs 45 - 48, Toll Restriction Procedures, begin after Program 93. 2. Programs 50 N 56, LCR Procedures, begin after Program 48. -29- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-2 PROGRAM 60 SMDR OUTPUT/ACCOUNTCODE DIGIT LENGTH ACTION iTEP 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number >MODE PROG P q At the >MODE prompt, enter u a m m 60 P 60 P60 Allow SMDR printout on incoming and outgoing calls. Enter: Action code 3. P60 3 1 P60 System will print out “1” if incoming and outgoing calls will be printed on SMDR. A “0” will be printed out if only outgoing calls will be printed. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change (to 1 or 0), if required, and press . q 4A P60 4 06 Set Account Code Digit Length Enter: Action code 4. The system will display the number of digits allowed in the account code. The default is 06. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number of digits (04 - 15). 4B P60 5 0 SMDR Toll Calls Only Enter: Action code 5. The system will display the presently selected feature (0 - 5). The default is 0. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required feature code. 4C P60 6 - Enter DISA ID Code Enter: Action code 6. System will display last entered ID code number. Default = Blank. 5 To Exit Program/Store Data NOTE: Programs P60 6 NNNN q A) To store data, press . B) To exit this program, press1 1 q P60 ## . P 77-I & 77-2, use Type I procedure. . -3o- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-Zl PROGRAM69 VERIFIABLEACCOUNTCODEENTRY I ACTION iTEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i a m H 2 Enter Program Press q Number q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P . 69 P 69 P69 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required code number (000 - 299). Example: code number 001; Enter: B 10. The system will display the present account code number assigned to 001. Note: The number of digits will be as defined in Program 60-4. P69 001 Nknnm-N 4 Refer to the System Record Sheets, and enter the required account code number. Example: number 987654; Enter: B 10 im 1. P69 001 NIWNNN 987654 5 To Exit Program/Store P69 001 NNNNNN 987654 P69 ## P Data A) To store data, press (9. B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program is entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 B . 69 data q , -3OA- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-ZP PROGRAM70 VERlFYACCOUNTCODE/TOLLRESTRlCTlONASSlGNMENT ACTION STEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 1 H 1 2 Enter Program q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P . Number 70 P 70 P70 Press a. 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required code number (000 - 299). Example: code number 002; Enter: 111. The system will display the present digit Restrict (Y) and Toll Restriction Status (Z) for entered code number. P70 002 00 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required digit Restrict and Toll Restriction data. Example: digit Restrict (1) and Toll Restriction (3); Enter: 11. P70 002 00 13 5 To Exit Program/Store P70 002 P70 ## P 00 13 Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program is entered. C) To exit this program, press 11 . 70 data q -3OB- REMOTEAOMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AA PROGRAM78 CO LINESPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS-DISA/IMDU/NIGHTRlNGlNG OVER EXTERNAL-PAGE ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 0 m H 2 Enter Program Press q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 78 P 78 P78 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the feature number for the feature to be programmed. Example: Feature code 1, enter 0 . P78 1 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the code number for the area of the feature being programmed. Example: Code 3, enter 1 P78 13 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line keys that will be associated with this feature. Example: CO key 01, enter 1 1. The system will designate whether the CO key/LED is on/off. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Press= to display next CO key/LED. ~78 6 To Exit Program/Store P78 13 01 N 02 N Y P78 ## P Data A) To store data, press [9 . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 q NOTE: Program 79 uses Type 2 procedure. -31- 13 01 N 02 N Y REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AB PROGRAM80 ELECTRONICTELEPHONERINGINGTONES ;TEP 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode. At the >MODE prompt enter B 0 a B 2 Enter Program Press q . DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 80 P 80 P80 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 01, enter ip . P80 01 4 Press E key. The system will display 1 or 2 corresponding P80 01# 1 to tone 1 or tone 2. 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Example: Tone 2, enter 1 . P80 01# 1 2 6 To Exit Program/Store P80 Ol# P80 ## 1 2 Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 a . q NOTE: Programs 81 - 89 use Type 2 procedure. -32- P REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AC PROGRAM93 CO LINE IDENTIFICATION ACTION iTEF 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter u m H H 2 Enter Program Press 3 q q >MODE PROG P . Number 93 I? 93 P93 . Enter Action Code 1 p93 I 02 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the appropriate CO line number. Example: CO line 2, enter i 1 . The system will display previously entered identification characters (up to 16 characters). r-m fupfo 76) L Current I.D. 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change identification if required: 00.. . . . . . . . .[70 (16 characters maximum). Example: OVERSEAS. P93 1 02 non (upto 16) OVERSEAS 5 To Exit Program/Store P93 1 02 nnn lupto 76) OVERSEAS pg3 ## P Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 q NOTE: Use m to clear characters. TABLERM-AD PROGRAM45-1 TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN ACTION STEP1 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter w 0 1 H 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number q >MODE PROG P . 45 P 45 P45 . Enter the number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT I 1. P45 1 1 The system will display the present dial plan code number (1 - 5). 4 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required code number. Example: Code 2, enter 1 . P45 1 1 2 5 To Exit Program/Store P45 1 1 2 P45 # # P Data q A) To store data, press . 8) To exit this program, press 1 1 q . -33- REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AD1 PROGRAM44(AORB) TOLLRESTRlCTlONTRAVELlNGCLASSOVERRlDECODEENTRY ACTION STEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter a 0 B a 2 Enter Program Press q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . P 44 P44 Number 44 (Do not enter A or B) . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required Toll Restriction Class number (1 - 4). Example: Class 1; Enter: [. The system will display the present override code assigned to that class number. P44 1 NNNN 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required override code number. Example: 3456; Enter 1 n i i. ~44 5 To Exit Program/Store P44 1 NNNN 3456 p44 ## P Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program is entered. C) To exit this program, press 11 . 44 data q -34- 1 NNNN 3456 . REMOTEAOMlN&MAlNTPROCEOURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AE PROGRAM45-2 TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE ACTION iTEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Number 1 H H q >MODE PROG P . 45 P 45 P45 . 3 Enter the number B. P45 2 4 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required CO line number. Example: CO line 01, enter1 0. The system will display N or Y to define if the LED is on or off. P45 2 01 N 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the CO line status as required (Y or N). Press m to step to next CO line number. P45 2 01 N Y 02 N 6 To Exit Program/Store P45 2 01 N Y 02 N p45 ## P Data q A) To store data, press . B) To exit this program, press1 1 q TABLERM-AF PROGRAM45-3-6 EQUALACCESS,SPEClALCOMMONCARRlERNUMBERSandAUTHORlZATlONCODEDlGlTLENGTH ACTION iTEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 0 H H 2 Enter Program Press q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 45 P 45 P45 . 3 Refer to the record sheet and enter the item number (3 - 6). Example: Item 3, enter 1 . The system will display the present equal access number or EAl Code. P45 3 NNNNN 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number. Example: 12345, enter 0 1 1 8 1 . ~45 3 NNNNN 12345 P45 5 Enter code number 4. The system will display present authorization code digit length. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required authorization code number digit length. Example: 12, enter: 0 1 ~45 4 oo 12 P45 q q 6 To exit this program, press B B q . p45 P NOTE: Items 5 and 6 are entered the same way as 3 and 4, respectively. -34A- ## REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 This page intentionally -34B- left blank. REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AG PROGRAM45-8-9 TOLLRESTRICTIONOVERRIDECODE ACTION STEP 1 Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter the Program Press q Number 1 w @ DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 45 P 45 P45 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 1 or 1 for the desired code number. The system will display the present override code number. P45 8 NNN'N 4 Refer to the record sheet and enter a new number if required. Example: 1234. Enter: 0 # Ff 1 . P45 8 NNNN 1234 5 To Exit Program/Store P45 8 NNNN 1234 Data A) To store data, press (9 . B) To exit this program, press B m p45 q ## P TABLERM-AH PROGRAM46-2-4 TOLLRESTRlCTlONALLOWED/DENIEDAREACODESASSlGNEDBYCLASS ACTION TEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press 3 4 q Number m H H DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P q 46 P 46 P46 . Enter class number (1 m 4). P46 0 L Class Number Enter g,I,orIm 1 -to add codes to memory (allow). 1 -to delete codes from memory (deny). 1m -to display codes in memory (allowed codes). P46 00 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the area code or area code group. Single 000. Group 1700 * nfln Press m to enter more codes. P46 X Y ALLOW 1700-000 or DENY 6 Press m completed. 7 Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed this program. 8 To Exit this Program P46 Press 1 1 (9. P c l 2,3or4 l ALLOW? or DENY? l to temporarily store data. Press q -35- when P46 for # #, REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLE RM-AI PROGRAM46-6-8 TOLLRESTRlCTlONALLOWED/DENIED OFFICECODESASSIGNED BYCLASS ACTION iTEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter a B H n 2 Enter Program Press 3 4 q . .>, . DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P q Number 46 P 46 P46 . Enter class number (1 m 4). P46 0 L Class Enter i,I,orim . 1 -to add codes to memory (allowed). 0 -to delete codes from memory (deny). 1m - to display codes in memory (allowed codes). P46 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the office code or office code group. Single 00[7. Group [7fln * 000 . Press m to enter more codes. P46 x Y ALLOW uun or DENY Number [7[7 1 6,7,or8 l l 5 Press m completed. 7 Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed this program. 8 To Exit this Program Press 1 a to temporarily store data. Press q 6 q -000 P46 when for P46 # # P . . -36- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AJ PROGRAM46-10-40 TOLLRESTRICTION CLASSPARAMETERS TEP 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter @ 1 m H 2 Enter Program Press q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 46 P 46 P46 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the toll restriction class number (1 - 4). Then enter the number 1. Example: Class 1, enter 0 1. P46 10 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required key/LED number. Example: Key number 11, enter 0 0 . The system will display the status of the key/LED. P46 10 11 TABLE 1 N 5 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required (Y or N). To access next key number, press m . ~46 6 To Exit Program/Store P46 10 11 TABLE 1 N Y 12 TABLE 2 N Data q A) To store data, press . B) To exit this program, press1 1 (9. 10 ii TABLE 1 N Y 12 TABLE 2 N P46 ## P -37- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AK PROGRAM47 TOLLRESTRICTIONEXCEPTION OFFICECODESASSIGNEDBYAREACODE iTEP 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 0 m 1 2 Enter Program Pressm Number . DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P q 47 P 47 P47 . 3 Enter exception table (1 - 8) and press 0 . P47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required area code and press . Example: AC 714, enter 610 1 . P47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN 714 P47 To Add Exception P47 01 5a q l l l l 5b l l l Office Codes to Table table (1 - 8) and press B codes 000 or 000 1 ~~~ to add more codes. (9 to store codes. Enter Enter Press Press l l Except . Except Office Codes from Table exception table (1 - 8) and press 1 exception codes ~~~ or ~~~ 1 000 m to delete more codes. m to store codes. 000 P47 01 Delete . Delete q To Display Exception l 6 exception exception m m To Delete Exception l 5c Enter Enter Press Press q Office Codes in Table 000 P47 ng Enter exception table (1 - 8) and press 1 m Press m to display more codes. Press to exit display. . Except no0 q To Exit Program/Store Data: 1 1 q P47 Y 2 Exceptn[70 P47 # # P -38- REMOTEAOMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AL PROGRAM48 STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION siTEP 1 ACTION Enter the Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 a m 1 2 Enter Program Pressm DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 48 P 48 P48 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number. Example: Port 00, enter 1 1 P48 0 0 4 Press 1 key. The system will display the present data as a 2-digit code: The first digit designates digit free or digit restrict. The second digit is the station restriction code. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. P48 0 0 # 13 To Exit Program/Store P48 0 0 # 13 p48 # # 5 Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is recorded for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 (9. P TABLERM-AM PROGRAM50-1 LCRPARAMETERS STEP 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press q m m 1 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 50. P 50 P50 . 3 Enter 0 . Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required key/LED number. Example: Key 01, enter1 0 . ~50 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change key/LED status, if required. Press m to move to next key/LED. P50 1 01 N 02 N 5 To Exit Program/Store P50 1 01 N 02 N p50 # # P Data A) To store data, pressm B) To exit this program, press [ 1 q . -39- 1 01 N REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AN PROGRAM50-2 LCRHOMEAREACODE ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P 0 1 H [9. Number 50 P 50 P50 Pressm 3 Enter the number 1 . The system will display the last area code programmed. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. P50 2 NNN 4 To Exit Program/Store P50 2 NNN P50 # # P Data q A) To store data, press . B) To exit this program, press 1 1 q . TABLERM-A0 PROGRAM50-31-35 LCRSPECIALCODES ACTION 1 1 Enter Proaram At the >M6DE 2 Enter Program Press q Mode prompt, enter i 1 m 1 Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 50 P 50 P50 . 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 31 - 35 as required. Example: 31, enter 1 1. System will display previously programmed number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. P50 31 NNNN 4 To Exit Program/Store P50 31 NNNN P50 # # P Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data for this program has been entered. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 m . -4o- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-AP PROGRAM 50-4 LCR LDI PLAN NUMBER TEP 1 ACTION Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode >MODE PROG P At the >MODE prompt, enter-1 0 a 1 a. 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number 50 P 50 P50 . Enter the number 8 P50 4 1 The system will display the present LDI route number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. 4 Exit Program/Store Data A) To store data, pressm . B) To exit this program, press 1 1 P50 4 1 P50 # # P q TABLE RM-AQ PROGRAM 50-5 LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER ACTION ;TEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 0 0 1 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 50 P 50 P50 . Enter the number B P50 5 1 2 The system will display the present local route plan number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Example: 2, enter 1 . 4 Exit Program/Store Data q A) To store data, press B) To exit this program, press 1 B q P50 5 1 2 P50 # # P . -41- REMOTEADMIN & MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AR PROGRAM!iO-6 LCRDIALZEROTIMEOUT ACTION STEP 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter m @ m @ 2 Enter Program Press (9 3 q >MODE PROG P . P 50 P50 Number 50 . P50 6 06 10 Enter the number @ The system will display the present dial zero timeout. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required. Example: 10, enter 0 1. 4 Exit Program/Store P50 6 06 10 Data q A) To store data, press . B) To exit this program, press B 1 p50 # # q P . TABLERM-AS PROGRAM51 LCRAREACODES ACTION ;TEPl 1 Enter Program DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode >MODE PROG P At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 1 1 a (9. 2 Enter Proaram 1 Press 3 q Number P 51 P51 51 -. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required route plan number (1 w 8). Example: Route plan 1, enter 0. P51 1 Enter 1, i,or I. 1 - To add area codes to table. B -To delete area codes from table. 1m - to display area codes in table, continue to press m to display more codes. Press to exit display. P51Utl Enter codes on0 or 000 1 000 and press m after each code entry. p51 T 2,3or4 Plan No. l l p51 uu q 7 5 6 nnn <-CODES ml El Exit Program/Store Data A) To store data, pressm B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 . q -42- P51 12 212 or IDO - 0017 p51 P # # :., :i : REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AT PROGRAM52 LCROFFlCECODEEXCEPTlONSFORSPEClFlEDAREACODE iTEP 1 ACTION Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter B 0 m a 2 Enter Program Pressm 3 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 52 P 52 P52 . Define Route Plan Number P52 10 0 3 L Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the exception table number (1 m 8). Example: Table 1, enter 8. L !- LCR Plan No. Action Code Exception Table No. Enter Action code 1 . The system will print out the currently defined route plan number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and new plan number if required. Example: Change to 3. 4 enter Define Area Code Number Press [9 . Enter exception table number (1 - 8) defined in step 3. Enter Action P52 ll~tl~212 P52 --iI Area Action code 0 k The system will print out the currently defined area code number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the new area code number if required. Example: Change to 212, enter 1 0 1. Press . Exception Code Code Table q 5 Display Office Codes P52 14 Enter exception table number defined in step 3. Enter Action code 1 . ooooodOOO Press m to dis la previously selected office codes. Continually press 5s ’ until all previously selected codes have been displayed, then press . l 6 To Add 2) or Delete (3) Office Codes Press d - . To Exit Program/Store Office q Enter exception table number defined in step 3. Refer to the System Record Sheets and enter 1 to add office codes or 1 to delete office codes. Example: Add office codes 300-325 Enter 1 (OrI )1111111m 7 T Data q A) Data was stored when was pressed in step 6. B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered for this program. -43- P52 12 300-325 P52 P52 P # # Codes No. REMOTEADMIN & MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AU PROGRAM53 LCRSCHEDULEASSIGNMENT ACTION STEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 1 B 1 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 53 P 53 P53 . Define Route Plan Number P53 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the route plan number (1 - 8). Example: Route Plan 1, enter 1. 4 Define Schedule Number P53 1 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required schedule number (1 - 3). Example: Schedule 1, enter 0 . 5 Enter Code Number 0 The system will display the previously selected time for the route plan number (step 3) and the schedule number (step 4). Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the time if required. Example: Change to 0800. Enter 1 1 1 1 . Press and repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for all lanskchedules. P53 1 1 0 0000 P53 0800 q NOTE: Enter time using 24hour 6 format: [3 m b m . Priority Class Assignment Enter the route plan number as defined in step 3. Enter the schedule number as defined in step 4. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required station group number (1 - 4). Example: Group 1, enter 0 . The system will display the previously entered route definition numbers (reference Program 54). Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter required route definition numbers 1 - 4) and press Example: Enter1 and 1 b - . Continue to repeat steps 3, 4, and 6 until all plans/schedules are entered. P53 1 1 1 NNNN 12 P53 q 7 To Exit Program/Store Data q A) Data was stored when pressing in step 6. B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered for this program. C) To exit this program. Press 1 1 . q -44- P53 # # P REMOTEAOMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AV PROGRAM54 LCR ROUTE DEFINITION ACTION STEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 0 m H 2 Enter Program Press 3 q DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 54 P 54 P54 . Enter Route Plan Number P54 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required route plan number (1 - 8). Example: Route plan 1, enter 1. 4 Enter Route Definition Number P54 12 11 32 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required route definition number (1 - 4). Example: Enter route definition number 2, enter 1 . The system will display the previously entered CO line group number (1 - 8) and the modified digits table number (1 - 6). Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line group and modified digit numbers as required, then press . Example: Change the CO line grou number to 3 and the modified digits table to 2. Enter: 1 Ii . Modified !Y Route L Plan No. q q 5 To Exit Program/Store Data q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 . q -45- P54 P54 P 12 ## 11 Digit Table CO Line Group 32 Definition No. No. No. REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 ‘: TABLE RM-AW PROGRAM 55-O LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-DELETE ACTION STEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter B m B 1 2 Enter Program Press 3 . q Enter Modified DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . Number 55 P 55 P55 Digits Table Number P55 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the modified digits table number (1 - 6). Example: Enter modified digits table number 1, entern . 4 Enter Code 0 P55 10 00 10 The system will display any previously entered number of digits to be deleted (01 - 10). Refer to the System Record Sheet and change number if required. Example: Change to 10, enter:0 1. 5 To Exit Program/Store Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press @ 1 . q -46- P55 10 00 10 P55 ## P REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AX PROGRAM55-1 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-ADD ACTION ;TEP I Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter i 2 Enter Program Press 3 q Number m m a DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE PROG P . 55 P 55 P55 . Enter Modified P55 1 Digits Table Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required modified digits table number (1 - 6). Example: Enter table number 1, enter [ . 4 Enter Code 1 The system will display any previously entered digits (up to 22). Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers, if required. Example: Enter~~~~~~ . NOTE: Pause codes may also be entered. To enter pauses, press “P” plus the pause number (1 - 8). Special Code Input Pause = 11% iI. Tone = 0 at beginning of digits to convert. . Clear = 1 as first digit, then P55 11~~~ (up to22 1234P3 q 5 To Exit Program/Store Data P55 11mIl q A) To store data, press B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press 1 1 . q -47- 1234P3 P55 ## P digits) REMOTEAOMIN & MAINTPROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AY PROGRAM 55-2 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-END ACTION iTEP 1 Enter Program Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 2 Enter Program Press 3 q B H B 1 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT >MODE PROG P q Number 55 P 55 P55 Digits Table Number P55 1 . Enter Modified Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required modified digits table number (1 - 6). Example: Enter table number 1, enter 0. 4 Enter Code 2 p55 12 nnn (up fo22digifs) 1234P3 The system will display any previously entered digits (up to 22). Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers, if required. Example: Enter 1 u 11 i m . NOTE: Pause codes may also be entered. To enter pauses, press “P”plus the pause number (I - 8). Special Code Input Pause = Na - NB Tone = 0 at beginning of digits to convert. Clear = m as first digit, then q 5 To Exit Program/Store Data P55 12 A) To store data, press [9 . 9) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press4 1 q -4B- otlotl (up to 22digits) 1234P3 P55 ## P REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-AZ PROGRAM56 LCRSTATIONGROUPASSIGNMENT ACTION STEP1 1 Enter Program Mode At the z-MODE prompt, enter w a 1 H 2 3 Enter Program Number DISPLAY/PRINTOUT I q >MODE PROG P . 56 Press (9 P 56 P56 Enter Port Number P56 01 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number, [70 or 00 Ino. Example: Port 01, enter 1 0. 4 5 Press OKey (if single port 00 entry in step 3). The system will display any previously entered group number (1 - 4). Refer to the System Record Sheet and change as required. Example: Change to 4, enter1 . P56 01# 1 4 To Exit Program/Store P56 Ol# P56 ## P 1 4 Data q A) To store data, press . B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program. C) To exit this program, press1 1 . q -49- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-BA PROGRAM DATA DUMP ACTION STEP 1 Enter the Data Dump Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 m m 1 2 To Output Program I I To Stop Printout Enter JrRr=ll$m q >MODE DUMP D . Data q D PROGun Enter 1 g Inn 00 = Program number or 110 3 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT for all programs. at Any Time . TABLE RM-BB SPEED DIALING DATA DUMP STEP 1 ACTION Enter the Data Dump Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 2 1 1 1 a DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q To Output Speed Dialing Data Enter B a 1 nnn [9 ---or--- 1 0 4 00 >MODE DUMP D . q UOU=MO or811 00 3 = Port number for individual station speed dial. To Stop Printout Enter mm at Any Time D . -5o- REMOTEAOMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlOti200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-BC LCOMESSAGING DATADUMP ACTION STEP 1 Enter the Data Dump Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter m 1 m i To Output Message * 00 I / 3 q Data q mo =m or8i8 Enter @ H H nnn DISPLAY/PRINTOUT ---or--- m 1 100 >MODE DUMP . q D MSGnuu = Pot-t number of individual station. To Stop Printout at Any Time D Enter mm I -51- REMOTE AOMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-BD MODE 95 REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE) ACTION iTEP 1 Enter the Message Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter m 0 1 a 2 . DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE MESG . To Add Or Review a Calling Station Message m 95 Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and enter QII. NOTE: Enter “m” anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure. 3 Enter 1 1 1 (XXX = station number where the message will be set and stored). m95 4 Enter B [7(7 (p = page command and 00 = 2-digit message memory location: IO - 19 personal messages and 60 = 99 = system message). m95 xxx ~017 [Ml m95 xxx ~00 W+l m95 p mo[M+] XXX NOTES: 1. To store system messages permanently, EKT XXX must be the station at port 00. 2. After 1 00 IS entered, the previously stored message is displayed. If there is no stored message, nothing is displayed. 5 To Change Previous Message Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message (alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). 6 To Set the Message on EKT XXX’s LCD Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter BmI . XXX -L 7 To Exit the Message At any time, enter 111 Mode p m0 Zero m0 (lower case). 9 > MODE NOTES: I. To cancel a message set via Mode 95, use Mode 97 procedure. 2. [M] represents the message entered. 3. With Release 2 software only, remote calling station messaging is not available from electronic telephones, but it is available from ASCII terminals connected to the TTYport or via IMDU on the PIOU or PIOUS. -52- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-BE MODE97 REMOTECALLINGSTATION MESSAGlNG(ADD/CHANGE) ACTION TEP 1 Enter the Message Mode >MODE MESG At the >MODE prompt, enter m 0 lI[9 2 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT . To Add a Message (or change a previously stored message) Set the terminal keyboard to lower case (caps lock off) and enter 110 m 97 NOTE: Enter I’m” at anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure. 3 Enter 1 1 0(XxX = station number for which the message will be set and stored). m97 XXX 4 Enter: 1 00 (p = page command and 170 = 2-digit message memory location: IO * 19 personal messages and 60 w 99 = system messages). m97 XXX p 00 NOTE: To store system message change permanently, station assigned to port 00. 5 EKT XXX must be To Add a Message m97 XXX P 00 [Ml m97 XXX P 00 WI Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message (alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). New message displays as it is entered. 6 To Set the Message on the Electronic Telephone’s LCD Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter 1 m 1 7 To Exit the Message Mode At any time, enter 1 b 1 m JL P Zero m0 q >MODE (lower case). NOTES: 1. To cancel a message set via Mode 95, use Mode 97 with any message number in step 4, use this procedure and skip step 5. 2. [M] represents the message entered. 3. With Release 2 software only, remote calling station messaging is not available from electronic telephones, but it is available from ASCII terminals connected to the TTY port or via IMDU on the PIOU or PIOUS. -53- REMOTE AOMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-BF MODE 94 REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE) iTEP 1 ACTION Enter the Message DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Mode >MODE MFSG At the >MODE prompt, enter m 0 1 H [9 2 To Add Or Review a Called Station . . Message m 94 Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and enter min. 3 Enter 0 1 0(XxX = Destination station number or destination group number [30 = all stations, 31-34 per system, Program 311). m94 xxx 4 Enter 11 m 1 (p = page command 1 u 13 = originating station number). m94 XXX p YYY 5 Enter Ino (p = page command [lower case] and 00 = 2-digit message memory location: 10 - 19 personal messages and 60 u 99 = system messages). After b 00 is entered, the previously stored message (M) is displayed. (If there is no stored message, nothing is displayed.) m94 XXX p YYY pun [M] 6 To Change the Message (M+) m94 Xxx p YYY pun [M+] To Set Message m94 XXX p YYY pun [M+] Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter B 11 . Destination station: MW/FL LED flashes, “CALL YYYM” is displayed. Origination station: “SENT XXXM” is displayed. m0 To Exit the Message m0 [lower case] and Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message as required (alphanumeric, 32 characters max. for total message). 7 8 At any time, enter1 Mode 11 (lower case). -L p Zero q >MODE NOTES: 1. Press 1 at any time to start over. 2. [M] represents the message entered. 3. With Release 2 software on/y, remote called station messaging is not available from electronic telephones, but it is available from ASCII terminals connected to the TTYport or via III/ID(J on the PIOU or PIOUS. -54- REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-BG MODE96 REMOTECALLEDSTATION MESSAGlNG(ADD/CHANGE) ACTION STEP 1 Enter the Message Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter fl 0 a H 2 To Change or Add a New Called Station DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE MESG . Message m 96 Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and enter Q[I NOTE: Enter “m” (lower case) anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure. Enter 1 1 13 (XXX = destination station number or destination station group number - 30 = all EKTs, 31 - 34 per system, Program 31). Enter ![[I (p = page command station number). 6 m96 XXX and YYY = originating m96 XXX p YYY Enter B 00 (p = page command and 00 = 2-digit message memory location: 10 * 19 personal messages and 60 w 99 = system messages). m96 XXX p YYY pflo To Add the New Message m96 XXX p YYY pnn[M] [M] Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message as required (alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). New message displays as it is entered. 7 To Set the Message . Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter B 11 Destination station: MW/FL LED flashes, “CALL YYYM” is displayed on LCD. Origination station: “SENT XXXM” is displayed on LCD. 8 To Exit the Message Mode m96 XXX p YYY pnn[M] m0 -L Zero p m0 q >MODE At any time, enter m 11 (lower case). NOTES: 1. [M] represents the message entered. 2. With Release 2 software only, remote called station messaging is not available from electronic telephones, but it is available from ASCII terminals connected to the TTYport or via IMDU on the PIOU or PIOUS. -55- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-BH STATION/CO LINE STATUS CHECK ACTION iTEP 1 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Enter the Test Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 0 1 1 0 2 . To Check Station q >MODE TEST . Line Status Enter B 0 1 1 1 1 B I= port number. Possible status: Idle on-hook, idle off-hook, busy on-hook, busy off-hook. T SEKT XX IDLE T ON-HOOK IMPORTANT! To prevent service interference, station line status must be idle on-hook before initiating a test from that station. 3 To Check CO Line Status T SCOYY - BUSY T Enter 1 B m 1 13 1 I= CO line number. Possible status: Idle, busy. 4 To Exit the Test Mode At the T prompt, enter H 1 0 1 q T QUIT > MODE . TABLE RM-BI GENERALSTATION ACCESSAND BUTTON ACTIVATION ACTION iTEP 1 Enter the Test Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 0 1 1 fi DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE TEST T . T TKXX KYY 2 T XX = Port number and YY = key number. NOTE: Key numbers begin at 01. 3 To Activate Enter 4 A Function 1 1 1 a a pSPKR1 S HOLD ( H CONF C MIC M 4 Key D F = function key designator TTKXXF T F = S, H, C, M To Access A CO Line (via CO Access Code) and Dial Out Enteri~~~[3~~~~~ 0~~~~~0 q . TT=X K01 -onnn[7tlo T AAA = 1, 2, or 3-digit CO line access code and 0 = telephone number. To Access A CO Line (via CO Line Key and Dial Out 5 6 Enter~~~~~~~ YY = CO line number. nn~~nfl~b- To Exit the Test Mode At T prompt, enter m B 0 0 Telephone q Number . , -56- REMOTEADMlN&MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-BJ CO LINETEST STEP 1 ACTION DISPLAY/PRINTOUT Enter the Test Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 B 1 0 2 To Verify Station/CO . Line Status ~~'ip,n,'~~t~~'~~;,~r~~ 3 >MODE TEST q T SEKT XX IDLE 11’ ‘(1 f _O,&?ZZ~~~~r). Call Remote Station B (from SEKT XX and CO line YY) Enter I[3 1113 1 i ~~~iJOOO[9. (0 = station B’s telephone number) Answer station B. 9 SC0 ON-HOOK yy IDLE T ‘I-K xx KYY~~~[7tlfl~ T NOTE: If the system is equipped with MOH, go to step 4. If the line must be tested via a CO-to-CO connection, go to step 6. 4 A) Press Enter B) Listen music C) Press Enter the 0 D key on TK XX (station B on hold). 1 m QEI. at station B and check that the transmission from the source is acceptable. the D key on TKXX (to release the call). 0 ma l m 5 Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested. 6 To Set Up A CO-to-CO Connection Press the m key on 0 [3 1 1 T TKXX H T T TKXX S T T TKXX C T Enter0 1 1 1 1 q NOTES: 1. Station B is connected via step 3. 2. Verify that Program 15-5 allows CO-to-CO connections. 3. The next step must be completed immediate/y to avoid dial tone timeout. 7 Call station C (or local time/weather) via CO line C. Enter: 0 [3 1111 i oooooC!Eia 1 1 = CO line C’s key number and [7 = telephone number of station C. Answer station C (or verify time/weather connection) and go to next step. T ‘JXXX KYYOOOnOnn T 8 Press the m between all parties. TTKXXC T 9 If you wish to tie the two CO lines together and hang up: 10 Continue 11 To Exit the Test Mode, key on STXX to establish a conference Enter0 [30 1 mq . Enter0 [31 1 B q . TTKXXC TTKXX S T returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested. At the T prompt, enter m m 0 0 q . . -57- REMOTE ADMIN 81MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 TABLE RM-BK SYSTEM DATE/DAY/TIME SETTING PROCEDURE ACTION iTEP 1 Enter the Test Mode At the >MODE prompt, enter 1 0 4 0 2 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT q >MODE TEST . T T TKOO KOl T :~t~~'o""o'"o~~oo~~~~~~~~~~~. 3 :FEyo”~; “o”b0 11 B[3[3m &IQQ1 q . (D = day of week with Sunday = 1 - Saturday = 7) 5 To Exit the Test Mode At T prompt, enter m [rl 0 1 q TTKOO EC01 652HHMMSS# TTKOO KOl T 4 ~t:;to”so”‘o’~~w~~1111 q . . -58- 651YYMMDD# 653D# REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTION200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 TABLERM-BL SPEED DlALMODE(CHANGE/REVIEW) ACTION iTEP 1 Enter the Speed Dial Mode >MODE REPT At the >MODE prompt, enter 11 2 DISPLAY/PRINTOUT iam . Enter the station port number for which the speed dial number will be programmed Press 0 0 --L ROO r Station Port Number (00 - 95) NOTE: If pro ramming system speed dial, enter port number Bu 1 . 3 Enter Speed Dial Memory Press 0 0 -II- 4 Location Ron T 20.digit number OO.......... (20 digits max) Ron T a 0 0 6 T OoN on . . . . . . . . . . 00 New speed dial number .‘114’?.n.u~.b”r& System speed dial location (90 * 99) (Refer to Electronic Telephone regarding chain dialing.) User Guide for information Special Entries: F=Flash; P=l 5 or 3-set Pause (Prog. 12); L=lO-set Pause; N=Clear Memory. 5 Nothing in memory 00 2) To enter chain dial number Press OnN TT Memory location 10 w 49 Station 60 - 99 System 1) To enter speed dial number Press to be Programmed (current memory will display) To store data, press q R NOTE: If program entry is not correct, [9 respond. To try again, press m q will not . >MODE -59- REMOTE ADMIN & MAINT PROCEDURES SECTION 200-096-600 FEBRUARY 1991 Remote Maintenance Procedures Index . Initialization Procedures: Page Number: System Programs (90) Station Speed Dial (92) System Speed Dial (92) LCD Messages (92) Timer Reminders (92) 11 12 13 14 15 Program Procedure TYPE 1 TYPE 2 00 03 04 05 10 12 13 15 16 17 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42-O 42-l * 8 45-l 45-2 45-3 - 6 45-8 - 9 46-10 - 40 46-2 - 4 46-6 - 8 47 Program Procedure 48 50-l 50-2 50-31 - 35 50-4 50-5 50-6 51 52 53 54 55-o 55-l 55-2 56 60 77 78 79 80 81 - 89 93 Program Type Page Number 1 16 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 17 18 19 20 20 16 21 21 16 16 17 22 23 17 17 24 24 25 17 25 26 27 28 17 17 16 29 33 34 34 35 37 35 36 38 Program Type Page Number 3 39 3 39 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 30 16 31 17 32 17 33 DATA DUMP PROCEDURES System Programs Speed Dial Numbers LCD Messages 50 50 51 Remote LCD Messaging Procedures Remote Remote Remote Remote Calling Calling Called Called Station Station Station Station (Edit) (New) (Edit) (New) Page Number 52 53 54 55 Remote Test Procedures Station/Line Status Check Station Key Activation CO Line Test Set: Date/Day/Time 56 56 57 58 Remote Speed Dial (Change/Review) 59 .; -6O- REMOTEADMIN &MAlNTPROCEDURES SECTlON200-096-600 FEBRUARY1991 MESSAGE RECORD SHEET-Use MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# MESG.# several sheets if necessary

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 676
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Has XFA                         : No
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:02 18:46:23-06:00
Producer                        : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0
Creation Date                   : 1999:04:27 16:08:33Z
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:02 18:46:23-06:00
Create Date                     : 1999:04:27 16:08:33Z
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:02 18:46:23-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu